Construction of Adam Airbase: (Package Five)

T01 August 2014 E.Moretti A.Romildo A.Cecchini L.
Candelpergher
TENDER
DATE PREPARED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY: AUTHORIZED BY:
REVISION
PROJECT: MOD/2013/011 P5
SULTANATE OF OMAN
MINISTRY OF DEFENCE - ENGINEERING SERVICES
Construction of Adam Airbase

(Package Five)
TENDER No: 56/2014
Main Consultants (Joint Venture):
Project and Construction Design Consultant:

Management Consultant:
Hill International LLC 3TI PROGETTI ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LLC

Office 206 - Regus Business Centre Units 214/205 Block 1, Street 3701 Plot No. 97
Tamimah Building Al Ghubrah South
P.O.Box 395 - PC118 Muscat, OM P.O. BOX 1477 - P.C. 114 - MUSCAT
Alberto Cecchini Lorenzo Candelpergher

Design Manager - Authorized Signatory General Manager - Authorized Signatory
T14 - ELECTRO - MECHANICAL [task 14]

Document title:
DETAILS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
General
Electro-mechanical technical specifications
-
Scale: -
Document no: S4_T14_XX00-00_00_S001-00

ITEM
TASK
STAGE
DISCIPLINE
DRAWING
REVISION DATE PREPARED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY: AUTHORIZED BY:
A01 July 2014 F.Tappi/S.Federici A.Cecchini L.Candelpergher

Sultanate of Oman Main Consultants (Joint Venture):
DETAILED
DESIGN Project: ADAM AIRBASE – RAFO
Consultancy Services (lead consultant) for project MOD/2013/011
Table of Contents
0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 49
0.1 STRUCTURE OF THE DOCUMENT .............................................................................................................................................. 49
0.2 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. 50
1 PART 1 – PRELIMINARIES AND STANDARDS SPECIFICATION ................................................................. 51
A10 PROJECT PARTICULARS .......................................................................................................................... 52

100 INTRODUCTION TO PRELIMINARIES ......................................................................................................................................... 52
200 TITLE AND NATURE OF PROJECT ............................................................................................................................................... 52
300 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 52
310 METRIC AND IMPERIAL CONVERSIONS..................................................................................................................................... 53
400 DESIGN TEAM ........................................................................................................................................................................... 53
500 SUMMARY OF BUILDING ENGINEERING SERVICES SYSTEMS TO BE PROVIDED ....................................................................... 53
600 PLANT / EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND PROVISION................................................................................................................... 54
A11 TENDER AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................. 55

100 THE TENDER DRAWINGS........................................................................................................................................................... 55
200 DRAWINGS BY THE INSTALLER.................................................................................................................................................. 55
210 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................... 55
220 SCHEDULE OF INSTALLER’S DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................................... 55
230 DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE INSTALLER ................................................................................................................................ 55
240 PRODUCTION OF CO-ORDINATED DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................................... 56
300 LEAD CO-ORDINATORS ADDITIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................................... 57
400 CO-ORDINATION ....................................................................................................................................................................... 57
500 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS ....................................................................................................................................................... 58
600 BUILDER’S WORK DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................................................... 59
700 TECHNICAL SUBMISSIONS BY THE INSTALLER .......................................................................................................................... 60
800 COMMENTS ON INSTALLER’S DRAWINGS AND TECHNICAL SUBMISSIONS .............................................................................. 60
900 REVISIONS AND VARIATIONS .................................................................................................................................................... 61
A12 THE SITE / EXISTING BUILDINGS ............................................................................................................ 62

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................... 62
200 SITE LOCATION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 62
400 RISKS TO HEALTH AND SAFETY ................................................................................................................................................. 62
500 SURVEY’S & SITE VISITS............................................................................................................................................................. 62
510 INSTALLERS SURVEY – TENDER ................................................................................................................................................. 62
520 INSTALLER SURVEY – INSTALLATION DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................... 62
T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

STAGE 4
DETAILS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS S4_T14_XX00-00_00_S001-00
S4 General Rev. A01
Electro-Mechanical Technical Specification Page 1 / 669
DETAILED
530 SPECIAL SURVEYS...................................................................................................................................................................... 63
A13 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS ................................................................................................................ 64

100 THE MAIN CONTRACT WORKS .................................................................................................................................................. 64
200 CONFLICT .................................................................................................................................................................................. 64
300 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................... 64
400 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY ........................................................................................................................................ 66
A20 THE CONTRACT / SUBCONTRACT........................................................................................................... 67

100 INSTALLER'S DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY....................................................................................................................................... 67
200 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS AND REGULATIONS .................................................................................................................... 71
300 PRACTICAL COMPLETION.......................................................................................................................................................... 71
A30 TENDERING / SUB-LETTING / SUPPLY .................................................................................................... 72

100 SCOPE ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 72
200 ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS ..................................................................................................................................... 72
300 TENDER RETURNS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 72
400 EXCLUSIONS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 73
500 WARRANTY TO BE GIVEN BY THE INSTALLER ........................................................................................................................... 73
600 ORDERS FOR MATERIALS .......................................................................................................................................................... 73
A31 PROVISION, CONTENT AND USE OF DOCUMENTS ................................................................................ 74

100 MAIN CONTRACT PRELIMINARIES ............................................................................................................................................ 74
200 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 74
210 REFERENCES TO BSI DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................................................ 74
220 TENDER DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................................................................. 74
300 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION .............................................................................................................................................. 75
400 SITE DOCUMENTATION ............................................................................................................................................................ 76
500 CONFIDENTIALITY ..................................................................................................................................................................... 76
600 PHOTOGRAPHS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 76
A32 MANAGEMENT OF THE WORKS ............................................................................................................. 77

100 CO-OPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES...................................................................................................................................... 77
200 SETTING OUT OF THE WORKS................................................................................................................................................... 77
300 SITE CLEANLINESS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 77
400 PROGRAMME AND ORDERING REPORTING ............................................................................................................................. 78
500 INSPECTION OF THE WORKS ..................................................................................................................................................... 78
510 INSTALLERS “SNAGGING” ......................................................................................................................................................... 78
520 INSPECTION BEFORE CONCEALMENT ....................................................................................................................................... 78
600 ACCESS FOR PLANT INSTALLATION & SUBSEQUENT REMOVAL ............................................................................................... 79
700 EASE OF MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................................................................... 79
800 COMMISSIONING AND TESTING ............................................................................................................................................... 80
810 SPECIALIST COMMISSIONING ENGINEER.................................................................................................................................. 80

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
820 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................... 80

830 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................................... 81
A33 QUALITY STANDARDS / CONTROL ......................................................................................................... 82

100 QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES.................................................................................................................................... 82
200 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................................... 82
300 HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES ................................................................................................................ 82
400 DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 82
500 EQUIPMENT AND PLANT PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES .......................................................................................................... 82
600 TECHNICAL METHOD STATEMENTS .......................................................................................................................................... 82
700 SUITABILITY OF MATERIALS ...................................................................................................................................................... 83
710 DELETERIOUS MATERIALS......................................................................................................................................................... 84
720 PROHIBITED MATERIALS LIST ................................................................................................................................................... 84
800 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................................................ 85
900 PRESSURE EQUIPMENT DIRECTIVE ........................................................................................................................................... 86
A34 SECURITY / SAFETY / PROTECTION ........................................................................................................ 87

100 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................................................... 87
110 DELIVER .................................................................................................................................................................................... 87
120 HANDLING ................................................................................................................................................................................ 87
130 STORAGE................................................................................................................................................................................... 87
200 PROTECTION OF WORKS........................................................................................................................................................... 87
300 IDETIFICATION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 88
400 ROTATING PLANT ..................................................................................................................................................................... 89
500 PROTECTION OF THE EXISTING SITE ......................................................................................................................................... 89
600 CDM REGULATIONS .................................................................................................................................................................. 90
700 NOISE AND NUISANCE .............................................................................................................................................................. 90
A37 OPERATION / MAINTENANCE OF THE FINISHED INSTALLATIONS ......................................................... 91

100 SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS FOR HEALTH AND SAFETY FILE ................................................................................................ 91
200 RECORD DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................................................................................. 91
300 RECORD DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................................................................. 91
400 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................... 93
410 MANUAL PRESENTATION ......................................................................................................................................................... 93
420 MANUAL FORMAT AND CONTENTS.......................................................................................................................................... 93
430 ELECTRONIC O&M MANUALS ................................................................................................................................................... 95
440 STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 95
A40 MANAGEMENT AND STAFF.................................................................................................................... 97

100 INSTALLER’S STAFF ................................................................................................................................................................... 97
2 PART 2 – PARTICULARS .......................................................................................................................... 99

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
R11 FOUL DRAINAGE ABOVE GROUND ...................................................................................................... 100

100 PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES ................................................................................................................................................... 100
200 DESIGN PARAMETERS ............................................................................................................................................................. 100
300 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................................................................. 101
345 HDPE PIPEWORK..................................................................................................................................................................... 102
400 CONTROL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................................................................... 105
500 SCOPE OF THE WORKS ............................................................................................................................................................ 105
510 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 105
540 FIRE SAFETY ............................................................................................................................................................................ 105
550 VERMIN CONTROL .................................................................................................................................................................. 105
600 SYSTEM COMPONENTS........................................................................................................................................................... 105
610 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 106
611 PIPEWORK GENERALLY ........................................................................................................................................................... 106
612 GRADIENTS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 106
613 OPEN ENDS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 106
614 DAMAGE ................................................................................................................................................................................. 106
615 EXAMINATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 106
616 GREASING ............................................................................................................................................................................... 107
617 STORAGE ON SITE ................................................................................................................................................................... 107
618 OBSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 107
700 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 107
710 TERMINATIONS....................................................................................................................................................................... 107
711 VENTILATING PIPES ................................................................................................................................................................ 107
730 TRAPS...................................................................................................................................................................................... 107
740 OVERFLOWS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 107
800 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................................................... 108
900 PAINTING AND INSULATION ................................................................................................................................................... 108
920 INSULATION ............................................................................................................................................................................ 108
921 ACOUSTIC INSULATION........................................................................................................................................................... 108
1000 FIXING TO BUILDING FABRIC .................................................................................................................................................. 108
1200 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ............................................................................................................................................. 109
1210 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 109
1220 SITE TESTS AND ISPECTIONS ................................................................................................................................................... 109
1230 TESTING FOR SOUNDNESS ...................................................................................................................................................... 109
1240 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE ................................................................................................................................................ 110
S10 COLD WATER ........................................................................................................................................ 111

210 SYSTEM DESIGN GUIDE........................................................................................................................................................... 113
220 PIPEWORK VELOCITY .............................................................................................................................................................. 113

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
410 METERING .............................................................................................................................................................................. 114

420 WATER LEAK DETECTION ........................................................................................................................................................ 114
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 114
510 RESPONSABILITIES - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................ 114
511 MAIN CONTRACTOR ............................................................................................................................................................... 114
512 MECHANICAL INSTALLER ........................................................................................................................................................ 114
513 ELECTRICAL INSTALLER ........................................................................................................................................................... 114
540 CONTROL OF LEGIONELLA BACTERIA/ ENVIRONMENTAL PRECAUTIONS .............................................................................. 115
610 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 115
620 PIPEWORK, FITTINGS AND ANCILLARIES................................................................................................................................. 115
630 CISTERNS ................................................................................................................................................................................ 115
650 PAINTING AND THERMAL INSULATION .................................................................................................................................. 115
900 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SERVICES .......................................................................................................................... 116
1010 SITE WIDE WATER SUPPLY CONTRACTOR .............................................................................................................................. 116
1020 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................................................... 116
1030 TESTING .................................................................................................................................................................................. 116
1040 COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................................................................................... 116
1100 SCHEDULE OF INSTALLER’S SUBMISSIONS.............................................................................................................................. 116
S11 HOT WATER.......................................................................................................................................... 118

210 DESIGN TEMPERATURE .......................................................................................................................................................... 120
220 SYSTEM DESIGN GUIDE........................................................................................................................................................... 120
230 DESIGN FLOW RATES .............................................................................................................................................................. 120
240 PIPEWORK VELOCITY .............................................................................................................................................................. 120
250 PRIMARY HEAT SOURCE ......................................................................................................................................................... 120
310 TYPE OF SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................................................................... 121
320 HOT WATER GENERATING PLANT........................................................................................................................................... 121
410 CONTROL OF HOT WATER TEMPERATURE ............................................................................................................................. 122
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 122
510 RESPONSABILITIES GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 122
511 MAIN CONTRACTOR ............................................................................................................................................................... 122
514 ALL CONTRACTORS COORDINATED RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................................... 123
540 CONTROL OF LEGIONELLA BACTERIA/ ENVIRONMENTAL PRECAUTIONS .............................................................................. 123

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
550 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION ................................................................................................................................................ 124

600 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................................................ 124
610 PIPEWORK FITTINGS AND ANCILLARIES.................................................................................................................................. 124
620 THERMAL INSULATION AND IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................................................ 125
650 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES ............................................................................................................................................ 125
700 CLEANING AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT ................................................................................................................................ 125
710 CONTROL OF LEGIONELLA ...................................................................................................................................................... 125
820 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TESTING AND SYSTEM PERFORMANCE ................................................................................ 126
830 COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................................................................................... 126
S30 COMPRESSED AIR................................................................................................................................. 127

200 DESIGN PARAMETERS. ............................................................................................................................................................ 127
210 QUALITY .................................................................................................................................................................................. 128
220 PRESSURE ............................................................................................................................................................................... 128
221 HIGH PRESSURE MAINS IN OCCUPIED SPACES ....................................................................................................................... 128
230 CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 128
310 GENERAL DISTRIBUTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 128
320 COMPRESSED AIR PLANT ........................................................................................................................................................ 128
410 DESCRIPTION OF START-UP .................................................................................................................................................... 130
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 131
510 MAIN CONTRACTOR ............................................................................................................................................................... 131
520 RESPONSABILITIES – MECHANICAL INSTALLER ....................................................................................................................... 131
522 ALL CONTRACTORS COORDINATED RESPONSABILITIES.......................................................................................................... 132
530 DETAIL CO-ORDINATION......................................................................................................................................................... 132
540 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 132
550 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 132
610 DISTRIBUTION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 132
620 AIR COMPRESSORS ................................................................................................................................................................. 133
640 COMPRESSED AIR DRYERS ...................................................................................................................................................... 133
650 AIR FILTERS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 133
660 AIR RECEIVERS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 134
670 RELIEF VALVES ........................................................................................................................................................................ 134
680 SAFETY VALVES ....................................................................................................................................................................... 134
690 AUTOMATIC DRAIN TRAPS ..................................................................................................................................................... 134
6100 NON RETURN VALVES (NRV)................................................................................................................................................... 135

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
6110 ISOLATING VALVES ................................................................................................................................................................. 135

6120 PRESSURE INDICATORS/DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE INDICATORS ............................................................................................. 135
6140 OUTLET TERMINATION ........................................................................................................................................................... 135
6150 PIPEWORK MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................................................... 136
6160 GUARDS .................................................................................................................................................................................. 136
6170 INFORMATION PLATES ........................................................................................................................................................... 136
700 FIXING TO BUILDING ‘FABRIC’ ................................................................................................................................................ 136
800 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................ 136
910 PERFORMANCE TESTS............................................................................................................................................................. 136
920 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 136
930 WITTNESSING OF TESTS.......................................................................................................................................................... 137
940 SYSTEM TO BE BROUGHT INTO USE ....................................................................................................................................... 137
950 TESTS ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 137
960 RISK ASSESTMENT .................................................................................................................................................................. 137
1000 SCHEDULE OF INSTALLER’S SUBMISSION ............................................................................................................................... 137
S63 SPRINKLER ............................................................................................................................................ 139

210 DESIGN CRITERIA .................................................................................................................................................................... 140
211 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 140
212 WATER SUPPLY ....................................................................................................................................................................... 141
213 SPRINKLER SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................................. 141
214 WET FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTS........................................................................................... 141
215 WET FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PRESSURE REGIMES ........................................................................................................... 141
216 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER............................................................................................................................................... 141
217 CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM (FM200) ............................................................................................................................................. 142
218 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM AND STANDPIPE .............................................................................................................................. 142
330 WET FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................. 142
331 CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM (FM200) ............................................................................................................................................. 143
350 FIRE EXTINGUISHER ................................................................................................................................................................ 143
410 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION ................................................................................................................................................. 143
420 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS .............................................................................................................................................................. 144
430 SYSTEM OPERATION ALARM .................................................................................................................................................. 144
440 VALVE STATUS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 144
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 144
510 INSTALLER’S RESPONSABILITIES ............................................................................................................................................. 144
530 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 145
540 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 145

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
550 PLANNED SHUTDOWN............................................................................................................................................................ 145

610 PIPELINES ................................................................................................................................................................................ 145
611 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 145
612 GRADIENTS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 146
613 PIPE SUPPORTS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 146
614 DRAINAGE............................................................................................................................................................................... 146
620 PIPELINES ANCILLARIES .......................................................................................................................................................... 146
621 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 146
622 INSTALLATION CONTROL VALVES ........................................................................................................................................... 146
623 ALARM VALVES ....................................................................................................................................................................... 147
624 STOP VALVES .......................................................................................................................................................................... 147
625 SPRINKLER TEST VALVE ........................................................................................................................................................... 147
626 SECURING OF VALVES ............................................................................................................................................................. 147
630 SYSTEM ANCILLARIES.............................................................................................................................................................. 147
631 SPRINKLER HEADS................................................................................................................................................................... 147
632 WATER FLOW ALARM SWITCHES ........................................................................................................................................... 147
633 PRESSURE SWITCHES .............................................................................................................................................................. 148
634 WATER MOTOR ALARM AND GONG....................................................................................................................................... 148
635 FIRE ALARM INTERFACE.......................................................................................................................................................... 148
636 PRESSURE GAUGES ................................................................................................................................................................. 148
637 FLOW MEASURING DEVICE..................................................................................................................................................... 148
700 PAINTING ................................................................................................................................................................................ 148
910 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 148
920 PAINTING ................................................................................................................................................................................ 148
930 LABELLING AND SIGNS ............................................................................................................................................................ 149
1010 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 149
1020 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................................. 149
1111 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................................. 150
S71 FOAM FIRE FIGHTING........................................................................................................................... 152

311 FOAM SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA ........................................................................................................................................... 154
320 PRESSURE GAUGE ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
330 WATER FLOW DETECTING DEVICES ........................................................................................................................................ 155
340 RELIEF VALVES ........................................................................................................................................................................ 155
350 WET FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PRESSURE REGIMES ........................................................................................................... 155

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
410 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................... 155

420 PLANT ALARM......................................................................................................................................................................... 155
430 AUDIBLE ALARM ..................................................................................................................................................................... 155
440 ELECTRICAL INTERLOCK .......................................................................................................................................................... 155
460 LOCK-OFF ................................................................................................................................................................................ 155
470 INTERMITTENT FOAM FLOW .................................................................................................................................................. 156
480 REMOTE CONTROL ................................................................................................................................................................. 156
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 156
510 RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................................................................................................... 156
512 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 156
513 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 156
610 PIPELINES ................................................................................................................................................................................ 156
612 CARBON STEEL ........................................................................................................................................................................ 156
620 PIPELINE ANCILLARIES ............................................................................................................................................................ 157
621 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 157
622 MANUAL ISOLATION VALVE ................................................................................................................................................... 157
623 DRAIN VALVES ........................................................................................................................................................................ 157
624 NON RETURN VALVES ............................................................................................................................................................. 157
625 STRAINERS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 157
700 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 157
710 PROPORTIONING DEVICE........................................................................................................................................................ 157
720 FOAM MAKER/GENERATOR ................................................................................................................................................... 157
730 PUMPS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 157
740 TANKS ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 158
760 FOAM INLET............................................................................................................................................................................ 158
800 PAINTINGS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 158
1110 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 158
1120 VISUAL EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................................................ 158
1130 TESTING .................................................................................................................................................................................. 159
1140 COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................................................................................... 159
T90 HEATING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................. 160

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 160
525 GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER ................................................................................................................................................... 160
526 SCOPE OF WORK..................................................................................................................................................................... 161
55 PIPED SUPPLY SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................... 163

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
55-40-40/140 INSTANTANEOUS HOT WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................... 163

90-10-65/345 CHLORINATED POLYVINYLCHLORIDE (PVC-C) PIPELINES IS A THERMOPLASTIC PIPES ........................................................... 163
55-40-40/120 COLD WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................ 163
90-10-65/365 POLYETHYLENE (PE) PIPELINES FOR WATER SUPPLY .............................................................................................................. 163
90-10-65/380 JOINTING MATERIALS FOR PLASTIC TUBES:............................................................................................................................ 164
55-45-50/115 DRIP IRRIGATION SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................................... 164
55-45-50/175 SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................. 165
55-45-50/175 DESIGN OF SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................... 167
55-40-50/230 DURABILITY OF IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT............................................................................................................................... 168
90-10-65/365 POLYETHYLENE (PE) PIPELINES FOR WATER SUPPLY .............................................................................................................. 168
90-10-65/380 JOINTING MATERIALS FOR PLASTIC TUBES............................................................................................................................. 168
90-10-70/310 PUMPS SELECTION.................................................................................................................................................................. 168
90-10-70/320 PUMPS GENERALLY ................................................................................................................................................................ 168
90-10-70/430 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS............................................................................................................................................................. 168
90-10-90/305 CONNECTION FOR ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................................................................ 169
90-10-90/334 CAST IRON BALL VALVES ......................................................................................................................................................... 169
90-10-90/348 CAST IRON CHECK VALVES ...................................................................................................................................................... 169
90-10-95/310 FIBERGLASS UNDERGROUND TANKS AND .............................................................................................................................. 169
90-10-95/470 WARNING AND OVERFLOW PIPES TO FEED............................................................................................................................ 170
90-15-40/313 IRRIGATION CONTROLS .......................................................................................................................................................... 170
90-15-40/329 CONTROL VALVES ................................................................................................................................................................... 170
90-15-40/449 ROTARY IMPACT SPRINKLER ................................................................................................................................................... 171
90-15-40/491 WEATHERPROOF EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES.......................................................................................................................... 171
90-90-55/430 IDENTIFY PIPEWORK ............................................................................................................................................................... 171
55-40-50/605 INSTALLING IRRIGATION SYSTEM GENERALLY........................................................................................................................ 171
55-40-50/610 INSTALLING IRRIGATION PIPELINES ........................................................................................................................................ 172
55-40-50/630 INSTALLING FIXED SPRINKLER ................................................................................................................................................ 172
90-10-65/615 INSTALLING PIPELINE FITTINGS .............................................................................................................................................. 172
90-10-65/615 INSTALLING ANCHORS GENERALLY ........................................................................................................................................ 172
90-10-65/690 SPACING OF PIPELINES ........................................................................................................................................................... 173
90-10-65/700 INSTALLING BURIED PIPELINES ............................................................................................................................................... 173
90-10-65/705 PROTECTION OF BURIED PIPELINES ........................................................................................................................................ 173
90-10-65/710 GENERAL INSPECTION AND TESTING ...................................................................................................................................... 174
90-10-70/610 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS GENERALLY ................................................................................................................................... 174
90-10-90/610 INSTALLATION OF VALVES GENERALLY................................................................................................................................... 174
90-10-95/610 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................................................... 174
90-10-95/630 INSTALLING TANKS AND CISTERNS ......................................................................................................................................... 174
90-15-40/605 INSTALLATION OF IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT GENERALLY ....................................................................................................... 174
90-90-55/660 INSTALLING IDENTIFICATION ON PIPEWORK.......................................................................................................................... 175
55-40-50/810 TESTING IRRIGATION PIPEWORK ............................................................................................................................................ 175
55-40-50/815 TESTING SPRINKLER SYSTEM .................................................................................................................................................. 176
55-40-50/820 COMMISSIONING OF AUTOMATIC TURF IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................... 176
55-40-50/850 SPARES AND TOOLS FOR IRRIGATION SYSTEM ....................................................................................................................... 176
55-40-50/860 CERTIFICATES AND OPERATING MANUALS FOR IRRIGATION SYSTEM ................................................................................... 176

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
55-85-25/110 FIRE HOSE REEL SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................................................... 176
60 MECHANICAL HEATING COOLING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS ..................................................... 178

60-45-10/110 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................................ 178
60-45-10/210 DESIGN OF CHILLED WATER SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................... 179
60-45-10/220 BASIC DESIGN TEMPERATURE ................................................................................................................................................ 179
60-45-10/615 INSTALLING WATER BASED COOLING SYSTEM ....................................................................................................................... 181
90-10-60/620 INSTALLING EXPANSION COMPENSATORS ............................................................................................................................. 181
90-10-60/650 INSTALLING STRAINER ............................................................................................................................................................ 181
90-10-65/615 INSTALLING PIPELINE FITTINGS .............................................................................................................................................. 181
90-10-65/685 WELDING STEEL PIPELINES ..................................................................................................................................................... 181
90-10-65/690 SPACING OF PIPELINES ........................................................................................................................................................... 181
90-10-65/710 GENERAL INSPECTION AND TESTING ...................................................................................................................................... 182
90-10-70/610 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS GENERALLY ................................................................................................................................... 182
90-10-90/610 INSTALLATION OF VALVES GENERALLY................................................................................................................................... 182
90-90-55/660 INSTALLING IDENTIFICATION ON PIPEWORK.......................................................................................................................... 182
60-45-10/810 COMMISSIONING CHILLED WATER SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................... 183
60-45-95/110 MULTISPLIT SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................................... 183
90-10-65/390 REFRIGERANT PIPELINE AND FITTINGS ................................................................................................................................... 183
90-40-95/310 ELECTRIC DRIVEN COMPRESSOR ............................................................................................................................................ 185
90-40-95/330 INDOOR UNIT.......................................................................................................................................................................... 185
90-90-40/360 INSULATION FOR PIPELINE ..................................................................................................................................................... 185
60-45-95/620 INSTALLING MULTISPLIT SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................... 185
U10 GENERAL SUPPLY AND EXTRACT VENTILATION SYSTEMS ................................................................... 187

210 SECURITY ................................................................................................................................................................................ 188
410 BMS CONTROL ........................................................................................................................................................................ 189
420 MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................................................................................... 189
440 DESCRIPTION OF START UP .................................................................................................................................................... 190
450 MOTORIZED DAMPERS ........................................................................................................................................................... 191
470 FAN SPEED CONTROL.............................................................................................................................................................. 191
480 ALARMS .................................................................................................................................................................................. 191
490 FIRE DETECTION MODE .......................................................................................................................................................... 191
491 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 191
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 191
510 RESPONSABILITIES - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................ 191
520 MAIN CONTRACTOR ............................................................................................................................................................... 191

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

570 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 192
580 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 192
610 AIR DUCTLINES ....................................................................................................................................................................... 192
611 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 192
612 CLASSIFICATION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 192
613 ZINC COATED STEEL ................................................................................................................................................................ 192
614 FLEXIBLE DUCTING.................................................................................................................................................................. 192
620 AIR DUCTLINE ANCILLARIES .................................................................................................................................................... 192
621 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 192
622 ACCESS OPENINGS .................................................................................................................................................................. 193
623 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS ................................................................................................................................................ 193
624 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS ................................................................................................................................................... 193
625 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTINGS ...................................................................................................................................... 193
630 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS ......................................................................................................................................................... 193
640 BLAST VALVE ........................................................................................................................................................................... 193
650 SLOT LINEAR DIFFUSER ........................................................................................................................................................... 193
660 VENTILATION VALVE ............................................................................................................................................................... 194
670 TRANSIT AIR GRILLE ................................................................................................................................................................ 194
700 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 194
710 AIR HANDLING UNITS ............................................................................................................................................................. 194
720 EXTRACT FANS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 194
730 AIR FILTERS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 195
740 HEATING AND COOLING COILS ............................................................................................................................................... 195
750 SILENCER AND ACOUSTIC TREATMENT .................................................................................................................................. 195
760 PULSER.................................................................................................................................................................................... 195
770 EXTERNAL LOUVERS ............................................................................................................................................................... 196
780 HEAT RECOVERY UNIT ............................................................................................................................................................ 196
900 OFF-SITE PAINTING AND ANTI CORROSION TREATMENT ....................................................................................................... 197
1210 COMPLIANCE .......................................................................................................................................................................... 198
U11 TOILET VENTILATION ........................................................................................................................... 199

210 SECURITY ................................................................................................................................................................................ 200

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
310 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 200

430 MOTORISED DAMPERS ........................................................................................................................................................... 200
470 FIRE DETECTION MODE .......................................................................................................................................................... 201
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 201
510 MAIN CONTRACTOR ............................................................................................................................................................... 201
560 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 201
570 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 202
610 AIR DUCTLINES ....................................................................................................................................................................... 202
611 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 202
612 CLASSIFICATION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 202
613 ZINC COATED STEEL ................................................................................................................................................................ 202
620 AIR DUCTLINE ANCILLARIES .................................................................................................................................................... 202
621 ACCESS OPENINGS .................................................................................................................................................................. 202
623 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS ................................................................................................................................................... 202
624 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTINGS ...................................................................................................................................... 202
640 TOILET EXTRACT FANS ............................................................................................................................................................ 202
700 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 203
800 PAINTING ................................................................................................................................................................................ 203
1200 SCHEDULE OF INSTALLER’S SUBMISSION ............................................................................................................................... 203
U41 FAN COIL AIR CONDITIONING .............................................................................................................. 204

311 FAN COIL UNIT COOLING SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................................... 205
312 PRECISION AIR CONDITIONER................................................................................................................................................. 205
313 AIR CONDITIONER FOR HIGH CEILING .................................................................................................................................... 207
320 CONDENSATE DRAINAGE SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................................... 208
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 209
510 MAIN CONTRACTOR ............................................................................................................................................................... 209

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

560 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 210
570 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 210
700 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 210
710 FAN COILS UNITS .................................................................................................................................................................... 210
800 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................................................... 210
1210 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 210
1220 COMPLIANCE .......................................................................................................................................................................... 211
Y10 PIPELINES ............................................................................................................................................. 212

300 CHILLED WATER PIPELINES ..................................................................................................................................................... 212
310 CHILLED WATER PIPELINES (BLACK STEEL) ............................................................................................................................. 212
311 APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 212
312 PIPE: BLACK CARBON STEEL .................................................................................................................................................... 212
313 FITTINGS: BLACK ..................................................................................................................................................................... 212
314 UNIONS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 212
315 FLANGES: MILD STEEL, RAISED FACE ...................................................................................................................................... 212
316 FLANGE GASKETS .................................................................................................................................................................... 213
317 GROOVED JOINT COUPLINGS ................................................................................................................................................. 213
400 CONDENSER COOLING WATER PIPELINES .............................................................................................................................. 213
410 CONDENSER COOLING WATER PIPELINES (BLACK STEEL)....................................................................................................... 213
411 APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 213
412 PIPE: BLACK CARBON STEEL .................................................................................................................................................... 213
413 FITTINGS: BLACK ..................................................................................................................................................................... 213
414 UNIONS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 213
415 FLANGES: MILD STEEL, RAISED FACE ...................................................................................................................................... 213
416 FLANGE GASKETS .................................................................................................................................................................... 214
500 HOT AND COLD WATER – INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL NOT BURIED ........................................................................................ 214
700 FIRE MAIN PIPELINES .............................................................................................................................................................. 214
710 FIRE MAINS PIPELINES - INTERNAL ......................................................................................................................................... 214
711 APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 214
712 PIPE ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 214
716 GASKETS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 214
1100 COMPRESSED AIR PIPELINES .................................................................................................................................................. 215

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
1110 COMPRESSED AIR PIPELINES INDUSTRIAL (GALVANISED STEEL) ............................................................................................ 215

1124 FLANGES ................................................................................................................................................................................. 215
1125 FLANGE GASKETS .................................................................................................................................................................... 215
1200 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 215
1210 PIPELINES INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................................................ 215
1211 PIPELINES INSTALLATION – GENERALLY ................................................................................................................................. 215
1212 PIPE RUNS AND GRADIENTS ................................................................................................................................................... 216
1213 PIPELINE FITTINGS AND JOINTS .............................................................................................................................................. 216
1214 PIPELINE CLEARANCE AND SEGREGATION.............................................................................................................................. 217
1215 PIPE SLEEVES AND COVER PLATES .......................................................................................................................................... 218
1216 EXPANSION, ANCHORS AND GUIDES ...................................................................................................................................... 218
1217 PIPELINE SUPPORTS ................................................................................................................................................................ 219
1218 ELECTRICAL PLANT ROOMS .................................................................................................................................................... 222
1220 VENTING AND DRAINING........................................................................................................................................................ 222
1221 PIPELINE VENTING AND DRAINING......................................................................................................................................... 222
1222 EQUIPMENT VENTING AND DRAINING ................................................................................................................................... 223
1230 EXTERNAL PIPELINES .............................................................................................................................................................. 223
1231 BURIED PIPELINES - TRENCHING............................................................................................................................................. 223
1232 EXTERNAL PIPELINES – BUILDING ENTRY................................................................................................................................ 223
1240 DRAW-OFF TAPS, FLOAT OPERATED VALVES AND SANITARY CISTERNS ................................................................................ 224
1241 DIRECT CONNECTION TO SANITARY FITTINGS ........................................................................................................................ 224
1250 WELDING ................................................................................................................................................................................ 224
1251 PIPELINE WELDING AND BRAZING .......................................................................................................................................... 224
1252 RADIOGRAPHIC TESTING OF WELDING .................................................................................................................................. 225
1260 GROOVED JOINTING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................. 225
1261 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 225
1263 GROOVED JOINT GASKETS ...................................................................................................................................................... 226
1264 METHOD STATEMENT ............................................................................................................................................................ 226
1265 TRAINING ................................................................................................................................................................................ 227
1266 SITE INSPECTION ..................................................................................................................................................................... 227
1267 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER WARRANTS ................................................................................................................................ 227
1300 STANDARDS AND REFERENCE DOCUMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 227
Y11 PIPELINES ANCILLARIES ........................................................................................................................ 232

300 CHILLED WATER AND CONDENSER COOLING WATER ............................................................................................................ 232
310 APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 232
320 BALLVALVES ............................................................................................................................................................................ 232
321 FILTER TYPE SCREWED 15-50MM ........................................................................................................................................... 232
330 WEDGE GATE VALVES ............................................................................................................................................................. 232
331 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 232
332 CAST IRON .............................................................................................................................................................................. 232
340 BUTTERFLY VALVES - WAFER TYPE BETWEEN FLANGES 65-300MM ...................................................................................... 232

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
350 CHECK VALVES ........................................................................................................................................................................ 232

360 STRAINER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 233
400 HOT WATER AND COLD WATER INTERNAL DOMESTIC........................................................................................................... 233
410 APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 233
420 BALLVALVES ............................................................................................................................................................................ 233
430 WEDGE GATE VALVES ............................................................................................................................................................. 233
450 STOPCOCKS, SIZES 15-50MM.................................................................................................................................................. 233
460 CHECK VALVES ........................................................................................................................................................................ 233
461 SCREWED, SIZES 15-50MM ..................................................................................................................................................... 233
462 WAFER TYPE BETWEEN FLANGES 65 TO 300MM ................................................................................................................... 234
470 STRAINERS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 234
471 SCREWED, SIZES 15-50MM ..................................................................................................................................................... 234
472 FLANGED, SIZES 65-150MM ................................................................................................................................................... 234
600 FIRE MAINS INSTALLATIONS ................................................................................................................................................... 234
610 APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 234
620 WEDGE GATE VALVE............................................................................................................................................................... 234
621 SCREWED SIZES 15-50MM ...................................................................................................................................................... 234
622 FLANGED, SIZES 65-150MM ................................................................................................................................................... 234
640 CHECK VALVES ........................................................................................................................................................................ 235
641 SCREWED, SIZES 15-50MM ..................................................................................................................................................... 235
642 WAFER TYPE BETWEEN FLANGES 65-300MM ........................................................................................................................ 235
650 STRAINERS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 235
651 SCREWED, SIZES 15-50MM ..................................................................................................................................................... 235
652 FLANGED, SIZES 65-150MM ................................................................................................................................................... 235
660 FIRE HYDRANT VALVES - UNDERGROUND .............................................................................................................................. 235
661 FIRE LANDING VALVES ............................................................................................................................................................ 235
662 WET RISERS............................................................................................................................................................................. 235
670 FOAM INLETS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 235
800 SPRINKLER SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................................. 236
801 VALVES.................................................................................................................................................................................... 236
811 GENERALLY ............................................................................................................................................................................. 236
812 ALARM VALVES ....................................................................................................................................................................... 236
813 STOP VALVES .......................................................................................................................................................................... 236
814 NON-RETURN VALVES............................................................................................................................................................. 236
815 DRAINAGE............................................................................................................................................................................... 236
816 SECURING AND LABELLING OF VALVES .................................................................................................................................. 236
820 WATER MOTOR ALARM GONG ............................................................................................................................................... 236
830 PRESSURE GAUGES ................................................................................................................................................................. 237
840 FLOW MEASURING DEVICE..................................................................................................................................................... 237
850 PRESSURE SWITCH .................................................................................................................................................................. 237
860 SPRINKLER TEST VALVE ........................................................................................................................................................... 237
1000 COMPRESSED AIR - INDUSTRIAL ............................................................................................................................................. 237

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
1010 APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 237

1020 BALLVALVES SCREWED SIZES 15-50MM ................................................................................................................................. 237
1030 GLOBE VALVES SCREWED SIZES 15-50MM ............................................................................................................................. 238
1040 DIAPHRAGM VALVES SCREWED SIZES 15-50MM ................................................................................................................... 238
1050 GLOBE VALVES FLANGED SIZES 65-300MM ............................................................................................................................ 238
1400 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS .......................................................................................................................................................... 238
1500 AIR COCKS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 238
1600 THREE-WAY GLAND VENT COCKS ........................................................................................................................................... 238
1700 DRAIN COCKS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 238
1800 TEST POINTS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 238
1900 HANDWHEEL LOCKING DEVICES ............................................................................................................................................. 239
2000 THERMOMETERS .................................................................................................................................................................... 239
2010 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 239
2020 STEM THERMOMETERS .......................................................................................................................................................... 239
2030 DIAL THERMOMETERS ............................................................................................................................................................ 239
2100 ALTITUDE AND PRESSURE/VACUUM GAUGES ........................................................................................................................ 240
2110 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 240
2120 PRESSURE GAUGES ................................................................................................................................................................. 240
2200 FLOW MEASUREMENT AND REGULATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 240
2210 APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 240
2220 ONE VALVE SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................................ 240
2230 PIPELINES ................................................................................................................................................................................ 240
2231 CHILLED WATER, HOT AND COLD WATER .............................................................................................................................. 240
2250 TWO VALVE SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................................... 240
2260 DOUBLE REGULATING VALVES ............................................................................................................................................... 241
2300 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 241
2400 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................................................. 241
Y20 PUMPS ................................................................................................................................................. 244

100 PUMPS GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................... 244
110 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 244
120 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 244
122 DIRECT COUPLED .................................................................................................................................................................... 244
123 CLOSE COUPLED ..................................................................................................................................................................... 244
124 IN-LINE PUMP (FLOOR-MOUNTED) ........................................................................................................................................ 244
125 IN-LINE PUMP (PIPELINE-MOUNTED) ..................................................................................................................................... 244
130 PUMP/MOTOR ASSEMBLY EFFICIENCIES ................................................................................................................................ 244
140 PUMP SELECTION POINT ........................................................................................................................................................ 245
150 SUCTION AND DELIVERY CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................................ 245
200 PRODUCT & MATERIALS ......................................................................................................................................................... 245
210 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 245
211 MATERIAL ............................................................................................................................................................................... 245

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
212 DRAIN PLUGS AND AIR COCKS ................................................................................................................................................ 245

213 GLANDS................................................................................................................................................................................... 245
213 BEARINGS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 246
220 PUMPS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 246
222 DIRECT COUPLED, CLOSE COUPLED AND IN-LINE MOUNTED PUMPS .................................................................................... 246
224 SUMP PUMPS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 246
225 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS............................................................................................................................................................. 246
Y21 COLD WATER STORAGE TANKS/CISTERNS ........................................................................................... 248

210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF WATER SUPPLY AUTHORITY ................................................................................................... 248
300 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS ..................................................................................................................................................... 248
310 INCOMING WATER SUPPLIES .................................................................................................................................................. 248
400 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................................................... 248
410 TANK OVERFLOWS AND WARNING PIPES .............................................................................................................................. 248
420 COMPARTMENTATION OF TANKS .......................................................................................................................................... 249
430 TANK SUPPORTS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 249
440 TANK / CIRSTERN LEAKAGE AND BUNDING ............................................................................................................................ 249
450 LEAK DETECTION..................................................................................................................................................................... 249
500 PARTICULAR MATERIALS SPECIFICATION ............................................................................................................................... 250
510 POTABLE DOMESTIC COLD WATER STORAGE CISTERNS ........................................................................................................ 250
610 CONTROL ROUTINES, CONTROL INTERLOCKS AND ALARMS .................................................................................................. 250
700 CLEANING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING .......................................................................................................................... 250
710 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 250
720 CLEANING, DISINFECTION AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT ........................................................................................................ 251
730 CONTROLS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 251
Y23 STORAGE CALORIFIERS AND CYLINDERS.............................................................................................. 253

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 253
100 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 253
111 INDIRECT CYLINDER (HEATED ELECTRICALLY)......................................................................................................................... 253
200 PRODUCTS AND MATERIAL .................................................................................................................................................... 253
210 STORAGE VESSELS .................................................................................................................................................................. 254
211 UNVENTED .............................................................................................................................................................................. 254
220 CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 254
230 IMMERSION HEATERS............................................................................................................................................................. 255
240 SACRIFICIAL ANODES .............................................................................................................................................................. 255
250 THERMAL INSULATION ........................................................................................................................................................... 255
260 SUPPORTS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 255

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y25 CLEANING AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT ............................................................................................. 257

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 257
110 MAINS WATER ........................................................................................................................................................................ 258
120 PIPEWORK DISTRIBUTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 258
121 REGULATING VALVES.............................................................................................................................................................. 258
123 STRAINER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 258
125 PLANT ISOLATION ................................................................................................................................................................... 258
126 PUMPS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 259
127 DRAINAGE............................................................................................................................................................................... 259
128 PIPEWORK VISUAL INSPECTION.............................................................................................................................................. 259
200 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 259
201 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 259
300 CHEMICAL AND MICROBIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS ....................................................................................................................... 259
400 FILLING AND FLUSHING .......................................................................................................................................................... 261
410 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 261
420 FILLING AND FLUSHING - STATIC AND DYNAMIC ................................................................................................................... 261
500 FINAL FLUSHING AND PASSIVATIONS ..................................................................................................................................... 262
510 FINAL FLUSHING ..................................................................................................................................................................... 262
520 OVERALL SUCCESS OF BENCHMARK OF SYSTEM CLEANING AND FLUSHING ......................................................................... 262
530 PASSIVATION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 262
600 CHEMICAL CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................................. 263
610 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 263
620 DEGREASING ........................................................................................................................................................................... 263
630 BIOCIDE WASH........................................................................................................................................................................ 263
640 REMOVAL OF SURFACE OXIDES .............................................................................................................................................. 263
650 VISUAL INSPECTION ................................................................................................................................................................ 263
700 CORROSION INHIBITOR / BIOCIDE DOSING ............................................................................................................................ 263
800 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICES .................................................................................................................................................. 264
Y30 AIR DUCTLINES ..................................................................................................................................... 266

100 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 266
200 DUCTWORK CLASSIFICATION.................................................................................................................................................. 266
300 DUCTWORK (GALVANISED SHEET STEEL) ............................................................................................................................... 266
400 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ...................................................................................................................................................... 268
500 ACCESS OPENINGS .................................................................................................................................................................. 269
600 TEST HOLES ............................................................................................................................................................................. 269
700 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK – METAL AND FABRIC .......................................................................................................................... 269
800 FLEXIBLE JOINTS...................................................................................................................................................................... 270
900 CONNECTIONS TO BUILDER'S WORK ...................................................................................................................................... 270
1000 EXTERNAL DUCTWORK ........................................................................................................................................................... 270

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
1200 PROTECTIVE FINISHES............................................................................................................................................................. 270

1210 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 270
1220 MILD STEEL SECTIONS............................................................................................................................................................. 270
1230 EXTERNAL DUCTWORK ........................................................................................................................................................... 271
1300 IDENTIFICATION OF DUCTWORK ............................................................................................................................................ 271
1400 AIR LEAKAGE TESTING ............................................................................................................................................................ 271
1500 DUCTWORK CLEANING AND FUMIGATION ............................................................................................................................ 271
Y31 AIR DUCTLINES ANCILLARIES ............................................................................................................... 273

100 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................... 273
110 ACCESS OPENINGS .................................................................................................................................................................. 273
120 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ...................................................................................................................................................... 273
130 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS ................................................................................................................................................ 274
140 PULSER.................................................................................................................................................................................... 275
150 SLOT LINEAR DIFFUSER ........................................................................................................................................................... 275
160 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS........................................................................................................................................................... 276
170 BLAST VALVE ........................................................................................................................................................................... 276
180 HIGH PENETRATION AIR DIFFUSER ......................................................................................................................................... 277
Y40 AIR HANDLING UNITS........................................................................................................................... 279

110 AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHUS) CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 279
111 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 279
112 DOUBLE-SKINNED INSPECTION PORTS ................................................................................................................................... 280
113 PURPOSE-BUILT MOUNTING POINTS ..................................................................................................................................... 280
120 PAINT FINISH .......................................................................................................................................................................... 280
121 AIR LEAKAGE - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................................... 280
122 AIR LEAKAGE – LEAK TEST....................................................................................................................................................... 280
130 AIR HANDLING UNITS ............................................................................................................................................................. 281
130 CONTROL AND DISCHARGE OF CONDENSATE ........................................................................................................................ 281
200 ACCESSORIES AND COMPONENTS.......................................................................................................................................... 281
210 FAN SECTION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 281
220 FILTER SECTION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 282
221 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 282
222 HIGH EFFICIENCY FILTERS ....................................................................................................................................................... 282
223 FLUSH MOUNTED DIAL TYPE PRESSURE GAUGE .................................................................................................................... 282
224 INSTALLATION AND SPARES ................................................................................................................................................... 282
230 RE-HEAT SECTION ................................................................................................................................................................... 282
231 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 282
230 CARTRIDGE TYPE COILS........................................................................................................................................................... 283
240 COOLING COIL SECTION.......................................................................................................................................................... 283

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
241 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 283

260 CONDENSATE DRAIN PANS AND ELIMINATOR ....................................................................................................................... 283
261 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 283
262 MOISTURE ELIMINATOR ......................................................................................................................................................... 283
270 SOUND ATTENUATORS/VIBRATION ISOLATORS ..................................................................................................................... 283
271 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 283
280 MIXING AND DAMPER SECTIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 284
281 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 284
282 ACTUATORS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 284
290 HUMIDIFIER ............................................................................................................................................................................ 284
300 UNIT PERFORMANCE .............................................................................................................................................................. 285
400 STANDARD AND REFERENCE DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................................ 285
Y41 FANS ..................................................................................................................................................... 287

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 287
110 FAN SELECTION ....................................................................................................................................................................... 287
200 PRODUCT AND MATERIALS .................................................................................................................................................... 287
210 CENTRIFUGAL FAN .................................................................................................................................................................. 287
230 AXIAL FANS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 288
250 TOILET EXTRACT FANS ............................................................................................................................................................ 289
Y42 AIR FILTRATION .................................................................................................................................... 290

100 PRODUCTS/MATERIALS .......................................................................................................................................................... 290
110 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 290
111 FILTER TYPE AND LOCATION ................................................................................................................................................... 290
120 FILTER BYPASS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 290
130 SPARE FILTER MEDIA .............................................................................................................................................................. 290
140 HIGH EFFICIENCY FILTERS ....................................................................................................................................................... 290
200 ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................................................................................................... 291
Y43 HEATING/COOLING COILS .................................................................................................................... 293

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 293
110 AIR HEATING COILS ................................................................................................................................................................. 293
120 AIR COOLING COILS ................................................................................................................................................................ 293
200 PRODUCTS & MATERIALS ....................................................................................................................................................... 294
210 WATER/GLYCOL AIR HEATING COILS – GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 294
230 IN-DUCT ELECTRIC HEATERS ................................................................................................................................................... 294
240 WATER/GLYCOL AIR COOLING COILS –GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 294
300 ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................................................................................................... 295
310 ELIMINATOR PLATES ............................................................................................................................................................... 295

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y45 SILENCERS/ ACOUSTIC TREATMENT .................................................................................................... 296

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 296
111 SPECIALIST MANUFACTURERS ................................................................................................................................................ 296
112 NOISE LEVELS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 296
113 INTERNAL NOISE RATINGS ...................................................................................................................................................... 297
210 ATTENUATORS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 299
211 RECTANGULAR ABSORPTIVE ACOUSTIC ATTENUATORS......................................................................................................... 299
300 COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................................................................................... 300
310 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 300
320 ACOUSTIC TEST EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................................................. 300
Y46 GRILLES / DIFFUSERS / LOUVERS ......................................................................................................... 303

110 GRILLES ................................................................................................................................................................................... 303
120 DIFFUSERS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 303
130 LOUVRES ................................................................................................................................................................................. 303
140 DAMPERS ................................................................................................................................................................................ 304
200 WORKMANSHIP ...................................................................................................................................................................... 304
Y47 FAN COIL UNITS.................................................................................................................................... 306

100 PRODUCT/MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................................................ 306
110 ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE...................................................................................................................................................... 306
120 CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 307
121 CASING.................................................................................................................................................................................... 307
122 COOLING COILS....................................................................................................................................................................... 307
123 CONDENSATE DRIP TRAY ........................................................................................................................................................ 308
124 FILTER ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 308
125 FANS ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 308
126 MOTORS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 309
127 DISCHARGE DUCT AND PLENUM ............................................................................................................................................ 309
130 VALVE AND PIPEWORK ASSEMBLY ......................................................................................................................................... 309
131 CONTROLS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 309
200 TESTING .................................................................................................................................................................................. 310
210 MANUFACTURER’S MOCK-UP TEST ........................................................................................................................................ 310
Y50 PAINTING AND THERMAL INSULATION ............................................................................................... 312

110 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 312

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
200 SCOPE OF THE WORKS ............................................................................................................................................................ 313

210 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 313
220 INSULATION ADJACENT TO FIRE BARRIERS ............................................................................................................................ 314
300 CLEANING AND PAINTING ...................................................................................................................................................... 315
310 SCOPE OF THE WORK.............................................................................................................................................................. 315
320 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................................................... 316
330 PAINTING INTERNAL INSTALLATIONS ..................................................................................................................................... 316
340 PAINTING EXTERNAL INSTALLATIONS..................................................................................................................................... 317
400 DETERIORATION ..................................................................................................................................................................... 317
500 THERMAL INSULATION – MATERIALS ..................................................................................................................................... 318
700 THERMAL INSULATION – WORKMANSHIP.............................................................................................................................. 319
710 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 319
720 SAMPLE TESTING OF INSULATION MATERIAL......................................................................................................................... 321
800 DAMAGE OR DISTURBANCE OF EXISTING INSULATION .......................................................................................................... 321
900 INSULATION OF PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONS GENERALLY ....................................................................................................... 321
910 COLD WATER INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................................. 321
911 PREPARATION AND PAINTING BEFORE INSULATION IS APPLIED ............................................................................................ 321
912 INSULATION MATERIALS......................................................................................................................................................... 321
913 INSULATION THICKNESSES...................................................................................................................................................... 322
920 HOT WATER SERVICE INSTALLATIONS .................................................................................................................................... 322
923 INSULATION THICKNESS ......................................................................................................................................................... 323
1000 INSULATION OF PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONS GENERALLY ....................................................................................................... 323
1010 REFRIGERANT INSTALLATIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 323
1030 CHILLED WATER INSTALLATIONS ............................................................................................................................................ 324
1033 INSULATION THICKNESSES...................................................................................................................................................... 324
1060 COLD WATER SERVICE STORAGE CISTERNS AND FEED & EXPANSION CISTERNS ................................................................... 325
1070 PUMPS AND DRIP TRAYS ........................................................................................................................................................ 326
1080 VALVES, PIPE JOINTS AND OTHER EQUIPMENT OF PIPEWORK SYSTEMS ............................................................................... 326
1100 THERMAL INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSTALLATIONS .................................................................................................... 326
1120 DUCTWORK INSULATION GENERALLY .................................................................................................................................... 327
1130 INSULATION MATERIALS FOR RECTANGULAR DUCTS ............................................................................................................ 327
1150 INSULATION THICKNESSES FOR DUCTWORK .......................................................................................................................... 327
1160 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS .................................................................................................................................................. 327
1170 FIRE RESISTING DUCTWORK ................................................................................................................................................... 328
1200 MEASURES TO ACCOMMODATE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION AND VIBRATION .................................................................... 328
1300 TEST POINTS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 328

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
1400 PROTECTION OF THERMAL INSULATION ................................................................................................................................ 329

1420 CLADDING SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................................................................... 330
1430 PROTECTION OF INSULATION GENERAL ................................................................................................................................. 330
Y51 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEM ................................................................ 335

100 COMMISSIONING PLAN .......................................................................................................................................................... 335
110 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED ........................................................................................................................................... 335
111 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 335
112 ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL SYSTEMS ..................................................................................................................................... 335
113 PLUMBING SYSTEMS .............................................................................................................................................................. 336
114 SPECIALIST SYSTEMS............................................................................................................................................................... 336
200 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 336
210 COMMISSIONING PERIODS..................................................................................................................................................... 336
220 LABOUR, MATERIALS AND OTHER PROVISIONS ..................................................................................................................... 336
230 SPECIALIST COMMISSIONING ENGINEER................................................................................................................................ 336
240 WITNESSING AGENT ............................................................................................................................................................... 337
250 COMMISSIONING METHOD STATEMENT ............................................................................................................................... 337
260 RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS ................................................................................................................................................... 337
270 REPORTS AND RECORDS ......................................................................................................................................................... 337
280 WITNESSING AND NOTIFICATION ........................................................................................................................................... 337
290 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 337
300 INSTALLATION OF COMMISSIONABLE SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................... 337
310 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 337
320 COMMISSIONING SET SELECTION .......................................................................................................................................... 338
400 TESTING AT WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................ 338
500 STATIC TESTING ...................................................................................................................................................................... 338
510 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 338
520 CONCEALED SECTIONS OF WORK ........................................................................................................................................... 339
530 PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING ......................................................................................................................................... 339
540 THERMAL EXPANSIONSYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................... 339
550 PROTECTION OF SYSTEM EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................................... 339
560 DRAINING AFTER TESTING ...................................................................................................................................................... 339
570 PIPEWORK DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS ....................................................................................................................................... 339
572 UNDERGROUND PIPEWORK GENERALLY ................................................................................................................................ 339
580 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT TESTING .......................................................................................................................................... 340
600 COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................................................................................... 340
610 COMMISSIONING CODES........................................................................................................................................................ 340
620 INSTALLATION (STATIC COMPLETION) ................................................................................................................................... 340
700 PARTICULAR TEST PROCEDURES............................................................................................................................................. 340
710 DISPOSAL SYSTEMS (R) ........................................................................................................................................................... 341
711 FOUL DRAINAGE ABOVE GROUND (R11) ................................................................................................................................ 341
720 WATER SUPPLY (S1) ................................................................................................................................................................ 341

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
721 COLD WATER (S10) ................................................................................................................................................................. 341

722 HOT WATER (S11) ................................................................................................................................................................... 342
723 PRESSURISED WATER (S13) .................................................................................................................................................... 342
730 GAS SUPPLY ............................................................................................................................................................................ 342
731 COMPRESSED AIR (S30) .......................................................................................................................................................... 342
740 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM........................................................................................................................................................... 342
741 FIRE HOSE REELS (S60) ............................................................................................................................................................ 342
743 WET RISERS............................................................................................................................................................................. 343
744 SPRINKLERS............................................................................................................................................................................. 343
745 FIRE HYDRANTS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 344
747 FOAM FIRE FIGHTING ............................................................................................................................................................. 345
760 COOLING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................................... 346
770 VENTILATION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 346
771 GENERAL SUPPLY AND EXTRACT VENTILATION SYSTEMS ...................................................................................................... 346
772 TOILET EXTRACT ..................................................................................................................................................................... 347
780 AIR CONDITIONING................................................................................................................................................................. 347
783 FAN-COIL AIR CONDITIONING ................................................................................................................................................ 347
790 OTHER SYSTEMS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 347
791 CENTRAL CONTROL/BUILDING MANAGEMENT ...................................................................................................................... 347
792 SPECIALISED EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................................................................................... 348
800 COMMISSIONING AND TESTING REPORT ............................................................................................................................... 349
810 CONTENT ................................................................................................................................................................................ 349
820 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING SHEETS ......................................................................................................... 349
830 EXHAUST/EXTRACT FAN COMMISSIONING SHEETS ............................................................................................................... 349
840 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS, COMMISSIONING SHEETS ........................................................................................... 349
850 WATER SYSTEM COMMISSIONING SHEETS ............................................................................................................................ 350
860 HEATING COIL AND HEAT RECOVERY COIL COMMISSIONING SHEETS ................................................................................... 350
900 PERFORMANCE AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING .......................................................................................................................... 350
910 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 350
920 DEMONSTRATION................................................................................................................................................................... 351
930 CONTROLS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 351
940 ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS ......................................................................................................................................................... 351
950 PERFORMANCE AND ACCEPTANCE TEST RESULTS ................................................................................................................. 352
960 APPROVALS............................................................................................................................................................................. 352
1000 SCHEDULE OF COMMISSIONING DELIVERABLES .................................................................................................................... 352
1010 DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................................................................................. 352
1020 DEMONSTRATION / WITNESSING ........................................................................................................................................... 353
Y52 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTINGS ................................................................................................... 357

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 357
110 SPECIALIST MANUFACTURER .................................................................................................................................................. 357
120 VIBRATION CRITERIA .............................................................................................................................................................. 357

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
130 DURABILITY OF VIBRATION ISOLATORS .................................................................................................................................. 357

140 STATIC DEFLECTION ................................................................................................................................................................ 357
150 COLOUR CODING .................................................................................................................................................................... 357
160 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS ......................................................................................................................................................... 357
170 ISOLATION OF PIPEWORK ....................................................................................................................................................... 358
200 PRODUCTS / MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................................................ 358
210 VIBRATION ISOLATORS ........................................................................................................................................................... 358
211 HELICAL SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATORS ................................................................................................................................ 358
212 RUBBER OR NEOPRENE VIBRATION ISOLATORS ..................................................................................................................... 358
220 VIBRATION ISOLATION HANGERS ........................................................................................................................................... 358
221 HELICAL SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATION HANGERS ................................................................................................................ 358
222 RUBBER, NEOPRENE OR GLASS FIBRE VIBRATION ISOLATION HANGERS ............................................................................... 359
230 INERTIA BASES ........................................................................................................................................................................ 359
231 SPRING ISOLATED INERTIA BASES........................................................................................................................................... 359
232 NEOPRENE PAD ISOLATED INERTIA BASES ............................................................................................................................. 359
240 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS .......................................................................................................................................................... 359
Y54 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEM ......................................................................................... 361

100 PIPEWORK AND DUCTWORK .................................................................................................................................................. 361
110 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 361
120 MAINS WATER OUTLETS ......................................................................................................................................................... 361
200 ACCESS PANELS....................................................................................................................................................................... 361
300 VALVE LABELS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 361
310 MANUFACTURER’S LABELS ..................................................................................................................................................... 361
320 VALVE LABELS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 361
330 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT LABELS ............................................................................................................................................ 362
400 WALL CHARTS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 362
500 HAZARD WARNINGS SIGNS..................................................................................................................................................... 362
Y90 FIXING TO BUILDING FABRIC................................................................................................................ 364

110 FIXING TYPES .......................................................................................................................................................................... 364
130 FIXING METHODS NOT ALLOWED .......................................................................................................................................... 364
200 HOLES FOR FIXINGS ................................................................................................................................................................ 364
Y61 HV/LV CABLES AND WIRING ................................................................................................................ 365

100 GENERAL ITEMS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 365
110 CABLES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 365
120 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 365
130 CABLE TIES .............................................................................................................................................................................. 366

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
140 CABLE CLEATS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 366

150 CABLE GLANDS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 367
200 LV CABLES IN CONDUIT AND TRUNKING ................................................................................................................................ 368
210 CABLES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 368
220 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 369
230 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS (CPCS) ........................................................................................................................... 370
300 INSULATED AND SHEATHED CABLES....................................................................................................................................... 370
310 CABLES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 370
320 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 371
321 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................................................. 371
322 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR SURFACE INSTALLATIONS ............................................................................................. 372
323 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCEALED INSTALLATIONS ........................................................................................ 372
400 FIRE-RESISTING CABLES OF VOICE ALARM AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS ................................................................................. 372
410 CABLES AND CABLE SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................................................. 372
420 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 373
500 FIRE-RESISTING CABLES FOR GENERAL APPLICATIONS........................................................................................................... 374
510 CABLES AND CABLE SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................................................. 374
520 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 375
600 MINERAL INSULATED, COPPER COVERED (MICC) CABLES ...................................................................................................... 375
610 CABLES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 375
620 TERMINATIONS....................................................................................................................................................................... 375
630 BOXES ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 376
640 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 377
700 ARMOURED CABLES – LOW VOLTAGE .................................................................................................................................... 378
710 CABLES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 378
720 TERMINATIONS, STRAIGHT JOINTS, TEES AND BRANCHES ..................................................................................................... 379
730 INSTALLATION OF ARMOURED, PVC OR XLPE INSULATED CABLES ........................................................................................ 379
800 CABLES FOR HIGH VOLTAGE APPLICATION............................................................................................................................. 381
810 CABLES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 381
820 JOINTING AND TERMINATING HV CABLES .............................................................................................................................. 382
830 INSTALLATION OF HV ARMOURED CABLES ............................................................................................................................ 383
900 INSTALLATION OF CABLES UNDERGROUND ........................................................................................................................... 384
1000 MODULAR WIRING ................................................................................................................................................................. 386
Y62 BUSBAR TRUNKING .............................................................................................................................. 390

100 GENERAL - BUSBAR SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................................................. 390
200 BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................................................. 391
300 TAPP OFF UNITS...................................................................................................................................................................... 391
400 BUSBAR FEED UNIT ................................................................................................................................................................. 392
500 SUPPORT SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................................... 392
600 BUSBAR EARTHING ................................................................................................................................................................. 392

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y63 SUPPORT COMPONENTS – CABLES...................................................................................................... 395

110 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 395
120 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 396
210 CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................................................................. 396
211 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 396
212 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 396
220 CABLE LADDERS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 397
221 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 397
222 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 397
230 WIRE CABLE TRAYS ................................................................................................................................................................. 397
231 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 397
232 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 398
240 CABLE CLEATS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 398
250 CABLE INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................................. 398
Y71 LV SWITCHGEAR AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS .................................................................................... 400

110 SWITCHGEAR .......................................................................................................................................................................... 400
111 SWITCHGEAR: 500V ................................................................................................................................................................ 400
112 SWITCHGEAR: 250V ................................................................................................................................................................ 400
120 CONSUMER UNITS .................................................................................................................................................................. 400
130 RESIDUAL CURRENT-OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCBS)................................................................................................. 401
140 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS .......................................................................................................................................................... 401
141 HRC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ................................................................................................................................................... 401
142 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB) DISTRIBUTION BOARDS............................................................................................... 402
150 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................................... 402
160 SWITCHBOARDS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 403
161 CUBICLE TYPE SWITCHBOARDS .............................................................................................................................................. 403
162 UNIT TYPE SWITCHBOARDS .................................................................................................................................................... 404
200 SWITCHGEAR AND LV PANELS – GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 405
210 DRAWINGS.............................................................................................................................................................................. 405
220 TERMINATIONS AND SWITCHBOARD CONNECTIONS............................................................................................................. 405
230 SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE................................................................................................................................................... 406
240 IDENTIFICATION AND NOTICES ............................................................................................................................................... 406
250 PHASE COLOURING................................................................................................................................................................. 406
260 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ..................................................................................................................................................... 406
270 INSTRUMENTS AND METERING .............................................................................................................................................. 407
280 TESTING .................................................................................................................................................................................. 407

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
290 RUBBER MAT(S) ...................................................................................................................................................................... 407

Y72 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLLERS ............................................................................................... 410

110 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLLERS – GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 410
120 MOTOR STARTERS .................................................................................................................................................................. 410
121 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 410
122 CONTACTORS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION ......................................................................................................................... 411
123 DIRECT-ON-LINE (DOL) MOTOR STARTERS ............................................................................................................................. 411
124 STAR/DELTA (S/D) MOTOR STARTERS .................................................................................................................................... 411
125 CLOSED-TRANSITION STAR/DELTA MOTOR STARTERS ........................................................................................................... 412
126 PART WINDING MOTOR STARTERS......................................................................................................................................... 412
127 ELECTRONIC SOFT START ........................................................................................................................................................ 412
130 MOTOR DRIVES....................................................................................................................................................................... 413
131 EDDY CURRENT COUPLING DEVICES....................................................................................................................................... 413
132 VARIABLE FREQUENCY INVERTER DRIVES .............................................................................................................................. 414
140 MOTOR CONTROL PANELS ..................................................................................................................................................... 414
141 CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 414
142 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................................. 415
143 MOTOR CIRCUIT WIRING ........................................................................................................................................................ 415
144 CONTROL CIRCUITS................................................................................................................................................................. 416
145 CONTROL RELAYS ................................................................................................................................................................... 416
146 CONTROL SWITCHES............................................................................................................................................................... 416
147 LAMP INDICATIONS ................................................................................................................................................................ 416
148 PANEL LABELS FOR INFORMATION AND WARNING ............................................................................................................... 416
150 MOTOR ISOLATION ................................................................................................................................................................. 417
160 STAND ALONE MOTOR STARTERS .......................................................................................................................................... 417
170 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE ...................................................................................................................................... 417
200 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ....................................................................................................................... 417
300 AS FITTED DRAWINGS, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ..................................................................................... 417
Y73 LUMINAIRES AND LAMPS..................................................................................................................... 420

110 LUMINARIES ........................................................................................................................................................................... 420
111 EMERGENCY LIGHTING LUMINAIRES ...................................................................................................................................... 421
112 EXIT SIGNS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 421
113 HAZARDOUS AREA LUMINAIRES............................................................................................................................................. 421
114 SIGNS AND HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS........................................................................................................................... 421
120 LAMPHOLDERS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 421
121 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 421

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
122 TUNGSTEN FITTINGS............................................................................................................................................................... 422

123 MOUNTING ............................................................................................................................................................................. 422
130 CONTROL GEAR AND COMPONENTS ...................................................................................................................................... 422
131 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS AND STARTERS ..................................................................................................................... 422
132 DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS AND STARTERS ......................................................................................................................... 422
133 CAPACITORS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 423
134 SUPPLY TERMINALS ................................................................................................................................................................ 423
135 FUSE........................................................................................................................................................................................ 423
136 INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................................................................................................ 423
137 REMOTE GEAR ........................................................................................................................................................................ 423
140 LAMPS..................................................................................................................................................................................... 423
141 TUNGSTEN FILAMENT LAMPS................................................................................................................................................. 423
142 FLUORESCENT LAMPS ............................................................................................................................................................. 423
143 TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMPS ................................................................................................................................................. 423
144 HIGH PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOUR LAMPS .......................................................................................................................... 423
145 METAL HALIDE LAMPS ............................................................................................................................................................ 424
146 HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR LAMPS............................................................................................................................. 424
147 LOW PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR LAMPS ............................................................................................................................. 424
148 TRANSFORMERS FOR LOW VOLTAGE (LV) LUMINAIRES ......................................................................................................... 424
149 LAMP MANUFACTURER .......................................................................................................................................................... 424
150 SUPPORT SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................................................................. 424
151 CONDUIT................................................................................................................................................................................. 424
152 ROD......................................................................................................................................................................................... 424
153 CHAIN ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 424
154 FLEXIBLE CORD ....................................................................................................................................................................... 425
155 WALL BRACKET ....................................................................................................................................................................... 425
156 BALL AND SOCKET................................................................................................................................................................... 425
157 COLUMNS AND BOLLARDS ..................................................................................................................................................... 425
158 OPTICAL FIBRE LUMINAIRES ................................................................................................................................................... 425
160 ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................................................................................................... 425
161 LIGHTING TRACK ..................................................................................................................................................................... 425
162 INTEGRAL PHOTO-CELL ........................................................................................................................................................... 425
200 WORKMANSHIP ...................................................................................................................................................................... 425
210 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 425
220 ORIENTATION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 426
230 CLEANLINESS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 426
240 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 426
241 RECESSED FITTINGS ................................................................................................................................................................ 426
242 SEMI-RECESSED FITTINGS ....................................................................................................................................................... 426
243 WALL MOUNTED FITTINGS ..................................................................................................................................................... 426
244 MATERIAL SUPPORTIVE SURFACE .......................................................................................................................................... 426
245 POTENTIALLY EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES ............................................................................................................................... 426
246 AREAS WITH INFRA-RED CONTROL SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................................... 426
247 SIGNS AND HIGH VOLTAGE DISCHARGE LIGHTING................................................................................................................. 426

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
248 EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMPS ............................................................................................................. 427

250 SUPPORTS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 427
251 CONDUIT................................................................................................................................................................................. 427
252 TRUNKING............................................................................................................................................................................... 427
253 DIRECT FIXING ........................................................................................................................................................................ 427
254 LUMINAIRES LOCATED IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS ................................................................................................................... 427
255 ROD......................................................................................................................................................................................... 427
256 CHAIN ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 428
257 FLEXIBLE CORD ....................................................................................................................................................................... 428
258 BALL AND SOCKET................................................................................................................................................................... 428
259 COLUMNS AND BOLLARDS ..................................................................................................................................................... 428
260 CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 428
261 LUMINAIRES ........................................................................................................................................................................... 428
262 DIRECT TO CONDUIT ............................................................................................................................................................... 428
263 DIRECT TO TRUNKING ............................................................................................................................................................. 428
264 SUSPENDED FROM TRUNKING ............................................................................................................................................... 429
265 RECESSED FITTINGS ................................................................................................................................................................ 429
266 MICC CABLES .......................................................................................................................................................................... 429
Y74 ACCESSORIES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ............................................................................................. 432

100 LIGHTING SWITCHES ............................................................................................................................................................... 432
200 SOCKET OUTLETS .................................................................................................................................................................... 432
300 FUSED CONNECTION UNITS .................................................................................................................................................... 433
400 LAMPHOLDERS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 433
500 CEILING ROSES ........................................................................................................................................................................ 433
600 LAMPS..................................................................................................................................................................................... 433
700 FLEXIBLE CABLES ..................................................................................................................................................................... 433
900 SHAVER SOCKETS .................................................................................................................................................................... 434
1000 COOKER CONTROL UNITS ....................................................................................................................................................... 434
1100 FUSED CLOCK CONNECTORS................................................................................................................................................... 434
1200 MOUNTING HEIGHTS .............................................................................................................................................................. 435
Y80 EARTHING AND BONDING COMPONENTS ........................................................................................... 437

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 437
210 EARTH – SUPPLIES RECEIVED AT LOW VOLTAGE .................................................................................................................... 438
220 SUBSTATION EARTHING/CONNECTIONS TO SWITCHGEAR .................................................................................................... 438
230 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS ...................................................................................................................................... 439
240 TN-S SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 440
250 EXTENSION AND ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING INSTALLATIONS ............................................................................................... 440

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
260 GENERATORS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 440

270 EXTERNAL SOCKET OUTLETS AND EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................................................... 440
Y81 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ................................................................. 442

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 442
200 PARTICULAR TEST PROCEDURES............................................................................................................................................. 442
210 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 442
211 SUBSTATION ........................................................................................................................................................................... 442
212 TRANSFORMERS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 443
220 SWITCHGEAR .......................................................................................................................................................................... 443
221 HV SWITCHGEAR .................................................................................................................................................................... 443
222 LV SWITCHGEAR ..................................................................................................................................................................... 444
223 HV AND LV SWITCHGEAR FUNCTIONAL TESTS ....................................................................................................................... 444
224 PROTECTION TESTS................................................................................................................................................................. 444
230 CABLES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 444
231 HV CABLES .............................................................................................................................................................................. 444
232 LV CABLES ............................................................................................................................................................................... 445
240 GENERATORS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 445
241 STANDBY GENERATORS .......................................................................................................................................................... 445
250 BACKUP, ALARM AND CONTROL SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................................. 445
251 UPS SYSTEMS .......................................................................................................................................................................... 445
252 EMERGENCY LIGHTING ........................................................................................................................................................... 446
253 FIRE ALARM ............................................................................................................................................................................ 449
254 INTRUDER ALARM .................................................................................................................................................................. 453
255 ACCESS CONTROL ................................................................................................................................................................... 453
256 PUBLIC ADDRESS..................................................................................................................................................................... 453
260 MISCELLANEOUS – LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER ................................................................................................................ 454
261 VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL BUSBAR SYSTEMS ....................................................................................................................... 454
262 LIGHTING AND POWER INSTALLATIONS ................................................................................................................................. 454
263 DC SUPPLIES AND BATTERIES ................................................................................................................................................. 457
264 STREET/AREA/FLOODLIGHTIN VISUAL INSPECTION ............................................................................................................... 457
270 MISCELLANEOUS – MOTORS .................................................................................................................................................. 458
271 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLLERS .................................................................................................................................. 458
272 MOTOR DRIVES....................................................................................................................................................................... 459
280 MISCELLANEOUS – OTHER SYSTEMS ...................................................................................................................................... 459
281 EARTHING AND BONDING ...................................................................................................................................................... 459
282 TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND DATA....................................................................................................................................... 460
283 RADIO AND TELEVISION AERIAL SYSTEMS .............................................................................................................................. 460
284 CCTV ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 460
285 LIGHTNING PROTECTION ........................................................................................................................................................ 460
286 THERMAL IMAGING/ACOUSTIC VIBRATION TESTING ............................................................................................................. 461
300 INSTRUMENTATION................................................................................................................................................................ 461

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
400 CERTIFICATES AND SCHEDULES .............................................................................................................................................. 461

Y82 IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 464

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 464
110 MATERIALS AND MARKING .................................................................................................................................................... 464
120 FIXING ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 465
200 LABELLING OF EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................................................... 465
210 CABLES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 465
211 CABLE CONDUCTOR COLOUR CODING ................................................................................................................................... 465
212 CABLE SHEATH IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................................................................. 465
213 TERMINAL MARKING AND CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................................................... 465
214 UNDERGROUND CABLES......................................................................................................................................................... 466
220 CONDUIT AND TRUNKING COLOUR CODING .......................................................................................................................... 466
230 SWITCHGEAR .......................................................................................................................................................................... 466
240 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS .......................................................................................................................................................... 467
250 MOTOR AND STARTER LABELS ............................................................................................................................................... 467
260 COLOUR CORRECTED LUMINAIRES ......................................................................................................................................... 467
270 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT LABELS ............................................................................................................................................ 467
280 INDICATOR LAMPS AND PUSH BUTTONS ............................................................................................................................... 468
290 FINAL CIRCUIT ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................................................................. 468
300 SIGNS NOTICES AND DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................................................................ 468
310 SAFETY SIGNS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 468
320 ADDITIONAL SAFETY SIGNS .................................................................................................................................................... 469
330 MAINTENANCE NOTICES ........................................................................................................................................................ 469
340 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS .......................................................................................................................................................... 469
350 EARTHING ............................................................................................................................................................................... 469
400 SHOCK TREATMENT CARD ...................................................................................................................................................... 469
Y89 SUNDRY COMMON ELECTRICAL ITEMS ............................................................................................... 471

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 471
110 DEFINITION ............................................................................................................................................................................. 471
120 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY ............................................................................................................................................................... 471
130 DESIGN CRITERIA .................................................................................................................................................................... 471
210 FAULTY MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................................. 471
220 SUPPORTS AND FIXINGS ......................................................................................................................................................... 471
300 ANCILLARIES ........................................................................................................................................................................... 472
310 FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIERS.................................................................................................................................................... 472
320 EXPANSION JOINTS ................................................................................................................................................................. 472
330 ENCLOSURES........................................................................................................................................................................... 472
340 OTHER SUNDRY COMPONENTS .............................................................................................................................................. 472

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
400 WORKMANSHIP ...................................................................................................................................................................... 472

410 POSITIONING .......................................................................................................................................................................... 472
420 MOUNTING HEIGHTS IN WALLS ............................................................................................................................................. 473
Y92 MOTORS DRIVES .................................................................................................................................. 476

100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 476
210 MOTORS (3 PHASE)................................................................................................................................................................. 476
220 MOTORS (1 PHASE)................................................................................................................................................................. 477
230 MOTOR - MECHANICAL INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................. 477
240 BELT COUPLINGS .................................................................................................................................................................... 478
250 DIRECT COUPLING .................................................................................................................................................................. 478
260 GUARDS .................................................................................................................................................................................. 478
300 COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................................................................................... 479
V10 ELECTRICITY GENERATION PLANT........................................................................................................ 480

11.0 GENERATOR REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ..................................................................................................................... 488
12.0 COOLING SYSTEM – AIR .......................................................................................................................................................... 489
13.0 COOLING SYSTEM – WATER ................................................................................................................................................... 489
14.0 FUEL SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 489
15.0 ENGINE INSTRUMENTATION .................................................................................................................................................. 490
16.0 LUBRICATION SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................................ 490
17.0 STARTING SYSTEM .................................................................................................................................................................. 491
18.0 COLD STARTING ...................................................................................................................................................................... 491
19.0 EXHAUST SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................................... 491
20.0 GUARDS .................................................................................................................................................................................. 492
21.0 DRIVES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 492
22.0 ALTERNATOR .......................................................................................................................................................................... 492
23.0 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATION ...................................................................................................................................... 493
24.0 CONTROL EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................................................................... 493
25.0 CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 495
26.0 CIRCUIT BREAKERS.................................................................................................................................................................. 495
27.0 EARTHING ............................................................................................................................................................................... 497
28.0 ENGINE CONTROL ................................................................................................................................................................... 497
29.0 SET CONTROL PANEL .............................................................................................................................................................. 498
30.0 SET LOCK-OUT ........................................................................................................................................................................ 499
31.0 ALARMS .................................................................................................................................................................................. 499
310 SITE WIDE INFRASTRUCTURE – ELECTRICAL SUPPLY CONTRACTOR (ESC) .............................................................................. 500

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
320 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................................................................................................... 500

500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 501
530 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 503
540 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 503
550 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 503
610 BACK BOARDS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 504
620 CABLE TAILS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 504
800 IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SERVICES ............................................................................................................................. 504
910 PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................................................................ 504
920 DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................................................................................. 505
V11 HV SUPPLY / DISTRIBUTION / PUBLIC UTILITY SUPPLY ........................................................................ 506

500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 519
530 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 520
540 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 520
550 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 520
610 BACK BOARDS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 520
620 CABLE TAILS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 521
910 PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................................................................ 521
920 DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................................................................................. 522
V12 LV SUPPLY / PUBLIC UTILITY SUPPLY.................................................................................................... 524


STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 527
530 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 527
540 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 528
550 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 528
610 BACK BOARDS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 528
620 CABLE TAILS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 528
910 PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................................................................ 529
920 DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................................................................................. 529
V20 lv DISTRIBUTION .................................................................................................................................. 530

500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 532
520 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 532
610 INCOMING SUPPLY ................................................................................................................................................................. 532
611 INCOMING CABLE ................................................................................................................................................................... 532
612 CONTAINMENT AND SUPPORT FOR INCOMING CABLE .......................................................................................................... 533
613 TERMINATION TO MAIN SWITCH ........................................................................................................................................... 533
620 MAIN SWITCHBOARD AND METERS ....................................................................................................................................... 533
621 MAIN SWITCHBOARD TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION.................................................................................................................. 533
622 MAIN SWITCH ......................................................................................................................................................................... 534
623 OUTGOING CIRCUITS .............................................................................................................................................................. 534
624 METERS................................................................................................................................................................................... 534
630 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION ................................................................................................................................................ 534
640 SUB MAINS DISTRIBUTION ..................................................................................................................................................... 535
641 SUB MAINS CABLE .................................................................................................................................................................. 535
642 CONTAINMENT AND SUPPORT FOR SUB MAINS CABLE ......................................................................................................... 535
650 FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND ISOLATING SWITCHES .................................................................................................... 535

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

1000 SCHEDULE OF INSTALLER’S SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................ 536
V21 GENERAL LIGHTING.............................................................................................................................. 537

210 DESIGN CRITERIA .................................................................................................................................................................... 539
310 EXTERNAL CIRCULATION AREAS ............................................................................................................................................. 539
410 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 540
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 540
510 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 540
520 ELECTRICAL INSTALLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................................................... 540
530 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 541
610 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 541
620 CONDUIT SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................................... 541
630 CABLE TRUNKING SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................................... 541
640 CABLE TRAY/BASKET SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................. 542
650 WIRING SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................................................................... 542
700 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 542
710 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 542
720 LUMINAIRES ........................................................................................................................................................................... 542
721 BALLASTS ................................................................................................................................................................................ 543
722 LAMPS..................................................................................................................................................................................... 543
730 CONTROL DEVICES .................................................................................................................................................................. 544
731 SWITCHES ............................................................................................................................................................................... 544
732 OCCUPANCY DETECTORS ........................................................................................................................................................ 544
733 TIME SWITCHES ...................................................................................................................................................................... 545
734 PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL UNITS .......................................................................................................................................... 545
800 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 545
810 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 545
811 INSTALLING DAYLIGHT SENSORS ............................................................................................................................................ 545
812 INSTALLING OCCUPANCY SENSORS ........................................................................................................................................ 545
813 CLEANING AND CABLE INSPECTION........................................................................................................................................ 545
814 LABELLING .............................................................................................................................................................................. 545
1211 SUBMITTALS DURING CONTRACT ........................................................................................................................................... 546

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
V22 GENERAL LV POWER ............................................................................................................................ 547

310 EXTENT ................................................................................................................................................................................... 548
320 SMALL POWER ........................................................................................................................................................................ 549
321 CIRCULATION AREAS .............................................................................................................................................................. 549
322 PLANT ROOMS/ANCILLARY AREAS/WORKSHOPS ................................................................................................................... 549
323 OFFICE AREAS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 549
410 CIRCUIT CONTROL .................................................................................................................................................................. 549
420 LOCAL ISOLATION ................................................................................................................................................................... 550
430 HAZARDOUS AREAS ................................................................................................................................................................ 550
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 550
530 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 550
540 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 551
610 CONDUIT SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................................... 551
620 CABLE TRUNKING SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................................................... 551
630 CABLE TRAY/BASKET SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................. 551
640 WIRING SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................................................................... 551
650 STANDARD 13 AMP SOCKET OUTLETS AND FUSED CONNECTION UNITS ............................................................................... 552
660 ISOLATING SWITCHES ............................................................................................................................................................. 552
670 ISOLATORS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 553
700 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 553
710 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 553
720 ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................................................................................................... 553
1110 SUBMITTALS DURING CONTRACT ........................................................................................................................................... 554
V32 UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY (UPS) SYSTEM................................................................................ 555

310 DESCRIPTION OF UPS TYPE ..................................................................................................................................................... 556
410 BMS MONITORING ................................................................................................................................................................. 556
420 UPS MONITORING PANEL ....................................................................................................................................................... 557

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 557

510 RESPONSIBILITIES – ELECTRICAL INSTALLER ........................................................................................................................... 557
520 MAIN CONTRACTOR ............................................................................................................................................................... 557
540 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 557
550 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 557
610 UPS SYSTEMS – TECHNICAL PERFORMANCE .......................................................................................................................... 557
V40 EMERGENCY LIGHTING ........................................................................................................................ 560

310 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 562
320 LUMINAIRES ........................................................................................................................................................................... 563
330 LAMPS..................................................................................................................................................................................... 563
340 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEMS .................................................................................................................................................. 564
V41 STREET / AREA / FLOOD LIGHTING ...................................................................................................... 565

500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 569
530 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 569
540 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 569
550 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 569
610 BACK BOARDS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 570
620 CABLE TAILS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 570
910 PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................................................................ 570
920 DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................................................................................. 570

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
W10 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ...................................................................................................................... 572

400 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 573
430 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 573
440 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 573
W12 PUBLIC ADDRESS / SOUND AMPLIFICATION ........................................................................................ 574

500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 576
520 PA SYSTEM INSTALLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................................................ 576
610 CABLES AND CONDUITS .......................................................................................................................................................... 576
611 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 576
612 MICROPHONE CABLE .............................................................................................................................................................. 577
613 LOUDSPEAKER CABLE ............................................................................................................................................................. 577
614 POWER CABLE ........................................................................................................................................................................ 578
615 CONDUIT................................................................................................................................................................................. 578
616 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 578
620 MICROPHONES ....................................................................................................................................................................... 579
621 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 579
622 UNIDIRECTIONAL MICROPHONE ............................................................................................................................................ 580
623 MINIATURE OMNI DIRECTIONAL LAVALIERE MICROPHONE .................................................................................................. 580
624 DESK MOUNTED OMNI DIRECTIONAL MICROPHONE............................................................................................................. 580
625 MICROPHONE DESK STAND AND FLEXIBLE GOOSENECK SHAFT ............................................................................................ 580
630 LOUDSPEAKERS....................................................................................................................................................................... 580
631 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 580
632 HORN SPEAKER ....................................................................................................................................................................... 581
633 CEILING MOUNT SPEAKER ...................................................................................................................................................... 581
640 AMPLIFIERS............................................................................................................................................................................. 581
641 MIXER POWER AMPLIFIER ...................................................................................................................................................... 581
642 MIXER PREAMPLIFIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 582
643 POWER AMPLIFIER ................................................................................................................................................................. 582
650 MISCELLANEOUS .................................................................................................................................................................... 583

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
651 SPEAKER SELECTOR UNIT........................................................................................................................................................ 583

652 MONITOR PANEL .................................................................................................................................................................... 583
653 RELAY CONTROL BOX.............................................................................................................................................................. 583
654 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................................................................... 583
660 EQUIPMENT RACK .................................................................................................................................................................. 584
661 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 584
662 CABLE MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................................................................................ 584
663 LABELLING .............................................................................................................................................................................. 584
664 COVER PANELS........................................................................................................................................................................ 584
670 POWER SUPPLY/STANDBY OPERATION .................................................................................................................................. 585
700 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 585
711 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 585
712 COVERAGE AREA .................................................................................................................................................................... 585
713 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 585
720 EMERGENCY VOICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (EVC) .......................................................................................................... 585
721 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 585
722 MASTER STATION ................................................................................................................................................................... 586
723 SPEAKER CIRCUIT CONTROL UNIT .......................................................................................................................................... 586
724 CABLING.................................................................................................................................................................................. 586
730 DIGITAL STORAGE MODULE ................................................................................................................................................... 586
740 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................................................................. 587
W14 ALARM SYSTEM FOR DISABLED TOILETS.............................................................................................. 588

400 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................................................................................. 589
500 SYSTEM INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................... 589
W20 SMATV.................................................................................................................................................. 590

500 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................................................................................. 592
510 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 592
520 HEAD-END DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................................. 592
530 AMPLIFIER EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................................................................................... 593

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
540 DISTRIBUTION MEDIUM ......................................................................................................................................................... 593

600 SYSTEM INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................... 594
610 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 594
620 POWER SUPPLIES .................................................................................................................................................................... 594
700 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING ...................................................................................................................................................... 594
W40 ACCESS CONTROL................................................................................................................................. 595

220 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................................................................... 596
310 SYSTEM CLASSIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................................................................... 596
311 UNCLASSIFIED ......................................................................................................................................................................... 596
312 RESTRICTED ............................................................................................................................................................................ 597
313 CONFIDENTIAL ........................................................................................................................................................................ 597
314 SECRET .................................................................................................................................................................................... 597
315 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 597
400 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 598
420 INSTALLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................................................................... 599
510 CONTROL FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................................................................ 600
520 SOFTWARE .............................................................................................................................................................................. 600
521 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 600
522 SOFTWARE ACCESS ................................................................................................................................................................. 600
523 DATABASE BACK-UP FACILITY ................................................................................................................................................. 601
524 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................................................................................................................ 601
525 USER GENERATED GRAPHICS.................................................................................................................................................. 601
526 HISTORICAL TRANSACTION LOGS ........................................................................................................................................... 601
527 TOKENHOLDER DATABASE ..................................................................................................................................................... 601
600 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................................................................... 602
610 TIME AND DATE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 602
620 TOKEN CONTROL .................................................................................................................................................................... 602
621 ACCESS AUTHORISATION........................................................................................................................................................ 602
622 ANTI PASS-BACK ..................................................................................................................................................................... 603
623 ESCORTED ACCESS .................................................................................................................................................................. 603
624 TIME CONTROL ....................................................................................................................................................................... 603
630 RECORDING ............................................................................................................................................................................ 603
631 HISTORICAL RECORDING ........................................................................................................................................................ 603
632 TRACKIN .................................................................................................................................................................................. 603
640 TAMPER ARRANGEMENTS ...................................................................................................................................................... 603
650 RELIABILITY ............................................................................................................................................................................. 603

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
660 COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................................................................................................................ 603

670 SYSTEM INTERFACES............................................................................................................................................................... 604
700 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 604
710 CONTAINMENT ....................................................................................................................................................................... 604
720 CABLES .................................................................................................................................................................................... 604
730 ACCESS POINT HARDWARE..................................................................................................................................................... 604
731 CONTROLLERS......................................................................................................................................................................... 605
732 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS..................................................................................................................................................... 606
733 ELECTRONIC HANDLE SETS ..................................................................................................................................................... 606
734 ELECTRONIC CYLINDERS ......................................................................................................................................................... 606
735 TOKEN READERS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 607
736 VALIDATION POINTS ............................................................................................................................................................... 607
737 KEYPADS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 607
738 MANUAL ACCESS POINT RELEASE........................................................................................................................................... 607
739 AUTOMATIC ACCESS POINT RELEASE ..................................................................................................................................... 607
740 ACCESS CONTROL TOKENS ..................................................................................................................................................... 607
750 CENTRAL EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................ 608
751 PERSONAL COMPUTER ........................................................................................................................................................... 608
770 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY AND SCREENING .......................................................................................................... 608
900 IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES ................................................................................................................................................ 608
1010 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 608
1030 PROCEDURES .......................................................................................................................................................................... 609
1040 INSTRUCTION OF EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE .................................................................................................................. 610
1110 SUBMISSIONS WITH TENDER .................................................................................................................................................. 610
1111 TECHNICAL INFORMATION ..................................................................................................................................................... 610
1112 DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................................................................................. 610
1113 FINANCIAL INFORMATION ...................................................................................................................................................... 611
1120 SUBMISSIONS DURING THE CONTRACT ................................................................................................................................. 611
1121 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 611
1122 SAMPLES ................................................................................................................................................................................. 611
W41 INTRUDER ALARM SYSTEM .................................................................................................................. 613

220 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................................................................... 614
310 SYSTEM CLASSIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................................................................... 616

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
311 UNCLASSIFIED ......................................................................................................................................................................... 616

312 RESTRICTED ............................................................................................................................................................................ 616
313 CONFIDENTIAL ........................................................................................................................................................................ 616
314 SECRET .................................................................................................................................................................................... 616
315 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 617
410 SYSTEM CONTROL .................................................................................................................................................................. 617
420 ZONE CONTROL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 617
430 ALARM TRANSMISSION .......................................................................................................................................................... 618
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 618
520 INTRUDER ALARM INSTALLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES................................................................................................................. 619
600 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................................................................... 619
610 TIME AND DATE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 619
620 CONTROL FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................................................................ 620
621 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 620
622 ACCESS LEVELS........................................................................................................................................................................ 620
623 FUNCTIONS ACCESSIBLE TO UNAUTHORISED PERSONS – ACCESS LEVEL ............................................................................... 620
624 FUNCTIONS ACCESSIBLE TO AUTHORISED PERSONS – ACCESS LEVELS 2, 3, AND 4 ............................................................... 620
625 AUTHORISATION CODES ......................................................................................................................................................... 620
700 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 620
710 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 620
720 CONTROL DEVICES .................................................................................................................................................................. 620
721 CONTROL PANELS ................................................................................................................................................................... 620
722 PC-BASED CONTROL ............................................................................................................................................................... 621
723 REMOTE KEYPADS .................................................................................................................................................................. 622
730 INTERNAL DETECTORS ............................................................................................................................................................ 622
731 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 622
732 PASSIVE INFRA-RED ................................................................................................................................................................ 622
733 ULTRASONIC (DOPPLER) ......................................................................................................................................................... 622
734 MICROWAVE (DOPPLER) ........................................................................................................................................................ 623
740 PERIMETER DETECTORS.......................................................................................................................................................... 623
741 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 623
742 DOOR AND WINDOW MONITORS .......................................................................................................................................... 623
743 ELECTROSTATIC MICROPHONIC CABLE................................................................................................................................... 623
744 ELECTROMAGNETIC CABLE ..................................................................................................................................................... 623
745 VIBRATION DETECTORS .......................................................................................................................................................... 623
746 CONTINUOUS WIRING ............................................................................................................................................................ 623
747 RIGID PRINTED CIRCUIT WIRING............................................................................................................................................. 623
748 ACOUSTIC (MICROPHONIC) .................................................................................................................................................... 624
749 ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE LAMINATED GLAZING................................................................................................................ 624
750 DELIBERATELY OPERATED ALARM DEVICES............................................................................................................................ 624
751 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 624
752 FIXED EMERGENCY ALARM BUTTONS .................................................................................................................................... 624

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
753 FOOT BUTTONS AND TREADLES ............................................................................................................................................. 624

754 LONE WORKER PORTABLE ALARMS........................................................................................................................................ 624
755 MONEY TRAY ALARM.............................................................................................................................................................. 624
760 SIGNALLING DEVICES .............................................................................................................................................................. 625
761 SOUNDERS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 625
770 CABLING INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................................................... 625
790 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY AND SCREENING .......................................................................................................... 625
900 IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES ................................................................................................................................................ 626
1010 TESTING .................................................................................................................................................................................. 626
1020 COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................................................................................... 626
1110 SUBMISSIONS WITH TENDER .................................................................................................................................................. 627
1111 TECHNICAL INFORMATION ..................................................................................................................................................... 627
1112 DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................................................................................. 627
W50 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM .............................................................................................................. 628

110 CONTROLS AND INTERFACES .................................................................................................................................................. 628
210 STATUS OF TENDER DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................................. 630
310 SYSTEM TYPE AND CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................................................... 630
311 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 630
320 SYSTEM TYPE .......................................................................................................................................................................... 630
321 ADDRESSABLE SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................................... 630
410 SYSTEM OPERATION ............................................................................................................................................................... 631
420 CONTROL INTERFACES ............................................................................................................................................................ 631
421 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS CONTROL AND MOUNTING ................................................................................................................... 631
422 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MONITORING ........................................................................................................................................ 631
424 FUSIBLE LINK INPUT ................................................................................................................................................................ 631
425 COMPONENT BOOTH CONTROL AND MONITORING.............................................................................................................. 631
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 632
520 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 632
530 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 632
540 INSTALLATION AND WIRING ARRANGEMENT ........................................................................................................................ 632
541 WIRING TYPE AND ARRANGEMENT........................................................................................................................................ 632
542 FIRE RATED CABLING .............................................................................................................................................................. 632
543 WIRING ARRANGEMENT......................................................................................................................................................... 632

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
544 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 633

610 SELF-CONTAINED PANELS FOR ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE (OR ADDRESSABLE) SYSTEMS ..................................................... 634
611 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 634
612 FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................................................... 634
613 CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 635
614 CONTROLS AND INDICATION .................................................................................................................................................. 635
615 PROGRAMMING ..................................................................................................................................................................... 635
616 ISSUE OF INFORMATION......................................................................................................................................................... 636
617 CONNECTION TO REPEAT PANELS .......................................................................................................................................... 636
630 FIELD DEVICES......................................................................................................................................................................... 636
631 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 636
632 MOUNTING HEIGHTS .............................................................................................................................................................. 636
640 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE SYSTEMS FIELD DEVICES .............................................................................................................. 636
641 DETECTORS – GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................................... 636
642 MANUAL CALL POINTS............................................................................................................................................................ 637
643 AUTOMATIC SMOKE DETECTORS ........................................................................................................................................... 637
644 AUTOMATIC HEAT DETECTORS............................................................................................................................................... 638
645 ISOLATION AND INTERFACE DEVICES ..................................................................................................................................... 638
646 AUDIBLE ALARM DEVICES ....................................................................................................................................................... 638
700 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 638
710 POWER SUPPLIES .................................................................................................................................................................... 638
711 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 638
712 MAINS POWER SUPPLIES ........................................................................................................................................................ 639
713 BATTERY AND CHARGER UNITS .............................................................................................................................................. 639
W51 EARTHING AND BONDING ................................................................................................................... 641

210 SYSTEM DESIGNATION ........................................................................................................................................................... 643
400 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 644
410 GENERAL – INSTALLER ............................................................................................................................................................ 644
440 INITIAL SOIL TESTS .................................................................................................................................................................. 645
500 EARTHING REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................................... 645
511 LV NEUTRAL EARTH ................................................................................................................................................................ 645
520 EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM .................................................................................................................................................... 645

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
530 LV SYSTEM EARTHING............................................................................................................................................................. 646

540 EQUIPMENT EARTHING .......................................................................................................................................................... 647
541 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS ...................................................................................................................................... 647
542 EXTERNAL SOCKET OUTLETS AND EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................................................... 647
543 ANTI STATIC DEVICES .............................................................................................................................................................. 648
600 BONDING REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................................................................... 648
610 BONDING EXTRANEOUS CONDUCTIVE PARTS ........................................................................................................................ 648
620 BONDING EXPOSED CONDUCTIVE PARTS ............................................................................................................................... 649
630 OTHER BONDING REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................................................... 649
700 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 649
710 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 649
800 TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDOVER ........................................................................................................................ 650
900 INSTALLERS SUBMISSIONS...................................................................................................................................................... 650
910 HANDOVER DOCUMENTATION .............................................................................................................................................. 650
W52 LIGHTNING PROTECTION ..................................................................................................................... 651

410 SURGE PROTECTION ............................................................................................................................................................... 653
500 SCOPE OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................................................... 653
520 DETAIL COORDINATION .......................................................................................................................................................... 654
530 BONDING OF OTHER SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS............................................................................................................... 654
540 SOIL SURVEY ........................................................................................................................................................................... 655
550 PERMIT TO WORK ................................................................................................................................................................... 655
560 WARNING SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................................ 655
610 AIR TERMINATION NETWORK................................................................................................................................................. 655
611 STRUCTURES WITH A FLAT ROOF ........................................................................................................................................... 655
612 NATURAL COMPONENTS (STRUCTURES WITH METAL ROOFS) .............................................................................................. 656
620 DOWN CONDUCTOR NETWORK ............................................................................................................................................. 656
621 CONNECTORS, CLAMPS, LINKS, BONDS AND BOLTS............................................................................................................... 657
622 NON STEEL FRAMED STRUCTURES ......................................................................................................................................... 657
623 NATURAL COMPONENTS (STEEL FRAME STRUCTURES) ......................................................................................................... 657
630 EARTH TERMINATION NETWORK ........................................................................................................................................... 658
631 EARTH TERMINATION SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................... 658
632 NATURAL EARTH ELECTRODES (UTILISATION OF STRUCTURAL REINFORCING BARS) ............................................................ 659
700 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 659

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
710 TEST POINTS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 659

720 INTERNAL LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................... 659
730 LIGHTNING ELECTROMAGNETIC IMPULSE (LEMP) ................................................................................................................. 659
W64 CONTROL PANELS ................................................................................................................................ 662

400 CONTROL PANELS ................................................................................................................................................................... 663
410 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 663
420 CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 664
430 WARDROBE-TYPE CONTROL PANELS ...................................................................................................................................... 664
440 COMPARTMENTED CONTROL PANELS ................................................................................................................................... 665
450 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................................. 665
500 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................................................ 666
510 CONTROL CIRCUITS................................................................................................................................................................. 666
520 CONTROL RELAYS ................................................................................................................................................................... 666
540 LAMP INDICATIONS ................................................................................................................................................................ 666
550 MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION......................................................................................................................................... 667
560 PANELS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 667
561 LABELS FOR INFORMATION AND WARNING .......................................................................................................................... 667
562 EARTHING ............................................................................................................................................................................... 667
563 PANEL ISOLATION ................................................................................................................................................................... 667
570 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE ...................................................................................................................................... 667
800 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ....................................................................................................................... 668
900 AS-FITTED DRAWINGS, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................................................................................... 668
1000 SCHEDULE OF INSTALLERS SUBMITTALS................................................................................................................................. 668

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
0 INTRODUCTION
This document is part of the detailed design of the master plan, infrastructures, and buildings of the new Adam
Airbase - RAFO located near the City of Adam, in the Governorate of Interior Area, Sultanate of Oman.
This specification relates to the Mechanical, Electrical, IT and Public Health systems within all the buildings
designed by the Main Consultants
This document has been prepared according to the Common Arrangement of Work Sections (CAWS) system
categories, and any other system or sub-system detailed in the accompanying specifications.
CAWS is the categorization of work that is used for the National Building Specification (NBS) and has been
incorporated into Table J of Uniclass; Uniclass classification system includes library materials, product literature
and project information.
As in the last few years CAWS has been restructured, this document has been written considering that both the
two system are acceptable:
o NBS Create that uses the new Uniclass system.

o NBS Binders and discs use the Common Arrangement of Work Sections (CAWS).
Both CAWS and the new work section classification have three levels – group, subgroup and section
The new classification comprises 20 Groups, numbered in 5s, each containing up to 20 Subgroups. In turn these
contain up to 20 Sections.
In particular this document has been used new classification groups 55 and 60; these groups are homes for
system sections for engineering services and process engineering.
The enginnering services groups are closely aligned to those in CAWS. For the most part the relationship between
the new sections and current CAWS section is one-to-one
The new Groups used in this document are as follows:
o 50 Piped supply system

o 60 Mechanical heating, cooling and refrigeration systems
0.1 STRUCTURE OF THE DOCUMENT

This Specification is compiled of two parts as outlined below.
PART 1 – Preliminaries and Standards Specification
The Part 1 Specification sets out the Preliminaries, Standards and Workmanship.
The Preliminary clauses included are those that relate to the Engineering Works in particular and must be read in
conjunction with the “Preliminaries” of the “Main Contract”.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The Standards and Workmanship Clauses included are those that relate to the Engineering Works in particular
and must be read in conjunction with the Part 2 Particulars, specific to the Network grids, if included in tender
documents.
Depending on the nature of the works set out within the individual Part 2 Specification for each package of
works, some or all of the Standard Clauses (or reference specifications) set out within the Part 1 Specification
shall be relevant.
PART 2 – Particulars
Individual Part 2 Specifications shall be provided specific to each particular systems within the Mechanical,
Electrical and Public Health Engineering Systems Scope.
0.2 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – GENERAL

The main contract work is described in the Main Contract Preliminaries.
Undertake detailed design development to provide a complete coordinated and functional design and installation,
including all commissioning and certification, for all systems outlined within this specification, required as part of
the contract and as explicitly or implicitly implied or necessary to ensure that all buildings are fully operational
and a complete installation is provided to include all client requirements.
For clarity, the installer is responsible for liaising with the Main Contractor to ensure that all design elements for
all systems are detailed and coordinated. The design outlined within this documentation and on the
accompanying drawings and specifications is developed for Tendering purposes only and the installer and main
contractor are responsible for ensuring that the design is developed to a fully coordinated installation design,
including the final selection of all plant, equipment and ancillary support systems and elements to provide
complete, functional, operational and certified systems.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
1 PART 1 – PRELIMINARIES AND STANDARDS SPECIFICATION

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A10 PROJECT PARTICULARS
100 INTRODUCTION TO PRELIMINARIES

This Preliminaries section of the specification describes the engineering systems installer’s obligations in relation
to the management of the works, production of information, design responsibility and other matters not directly
related to the technical content of the works, insofar as they relate to the building engineering systems sub-
contract(s). Nothing in this specification overrides any requirement of the main contract preliminaries; this
specification should be read in conjunction with the main contract preliminaries.
200 TITLE AND NATURE OF PROJECT

The complex consists in a military base.
The base is divided in zones:
- Civilian and family zone;

- Collective housing-Recreational-sport;
- Logistic zone;
- Operative zone-Other activities;
- Operative zone-Air defence - Airfield activities.
The systems make available electrical distribution, some services or facilities that are necessary for the
communication, connection, around all the base.
300 DEFINITIONS
The following definitions apply throughout this specification:
- Installer: The contractor appointed to undertake Mechanical, Electrical, Lift, Sprinkler or other building
engineering system installation work in any single or combined subcontract as defined by the main contract
documentation.
- Building Engineering Systems Installation: Each and every Installation from the following schedule:
o 1. Mechanical
o 2. Electrical
o 3. Fire Protection
o 4. Lift
o 5. Voice and Data Cabling
o 6. Foul Drainage
o 7. Commissioning
- Contract Administrator: The party named as such in the main contract preliminaries, or others acting on his
behalf.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Submit: Issue documentation in accordance with the contract (i.e. the specified number of copies, to the
contract administrator and / or other members of the project team as required).
- Works: All building engineering systems shown on the drawings and described in the specification.
- Drawings: The tender drawings.
- Elsewhere: Detailed or specified in other clauses, sections, shown on the drawings or contained in the
specification or main contract documentation.
- System: All equipment, accessories, controls, supports and ancillary items, including supply, installation,
connection, testing, commissioning and setting to work
- necessary for that section of the Works to function.
- Competent person: A person who, by reason of theoretical and practical training or actual experience
- or both, is competent to perform the task or function or assume the responsibility in question and is
authorised to perform such a task or function.
- Trench: A covered horizontal service space in the floor or ground with access from above.
- Cavity: A space enclosed within the elements of a building within which services are installed, e.g. the space
between ceiling and floor above.
- Concealed services: Includes installations within trenches or cavities.
- Terminal units: Units such as radiators, convectors, fan coil units, induction units, variable or constant volume
air boxes and other like equipment.
- Ancillaries: All specified fittings, accessories, inserts, test points, bracketing, terminal equipment connected to
and installed in the engineering services system.
- Equal and approved: The Contract Administrator will be the sole arbiter of whether any alternative product to
that specified is acceptable.
310 METRIC AND IMPERIAL CONVERSIONS

Some dimensions and units in metric have been converted from imperial units and approximated to the nearest
practical dimension, i.e. 12” has been converted to 300mm. Metric sizes have been used for both metric and
imperial components. Where only imperial components are available the imperial size has been converted to the
metric equivalent size. Due allowance should be made for metric and imperial conversions.
400 DESIGN TEAM

The names, postal addresses, e-mail addresses, telephone and facsimile numbers of parties involved in the
design and construction of the project and its administration shall be set out within the main contract
preliminaries.
500 SUMMARY OF BUILDING ENGINEERING SERVICES SYSTEMS TO BE PROVIDED

The building engineering services systems covered under the scope of this document include systems
described under the following Common Arrangement of Work Sections (CAWS) system categories, and any other
system or sub-system detailed in the accompanying specification(s) or on the associated drawings and schedules:
- P1/P3 Building Fabric Sundries

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- R1 Drainage
- S1 Water supply
- S2 Treated on site water supply
- S6 Fire fighting – water
- S7 Fire fighting – gas / foam
- T1 Heat source
- T4 Heat distribution / utilisation – air
- T6 Central refrigeration / distribution
- T7 Local cooling / refrigeration
- U1 Ventilation / fume extract
- U3 Air conditioning – all air
- U4 Air conditioning – air / water
- U6 Air conditioning – local
- U7 Other air systems
- V1 Generation / supply / HV
- V2 General LV distribution / lighting / power
- V3 Special types of supply / distribution
- V4 Special lighting
- V5 Electric heating
- V9 General / other electrical work
- W1 Communications – speech / audio
- W2 Communications – audio-visual
- W3 Communications – data
- W4 Security
- W5 Protection
- W6 Central control
600 PLANT / EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND PROVISION

All plant and equipment provided as part of the contract shall have a BS EN or be demonstrated as being of an
equivalent standard.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A11 TENDER AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
100 THE TENDER DRAWINGS

The Tender drawings are listed in the specific design documents volume forming part of the Tender package.
200 DRAWINGS BY THE INSTALLER
210 GENERAL
Produce and submit all installation drawings, without exception, in a CAD format agreed at tender with the
Contract Administrator (tender to allow for latest version of agreed software) with files also provided in ‘DXF’
(drawing exchange format).
Make independent enquiries to ensure that the system is compatible with those systems being used by the
Design Team and provide file translation facilities to suit the Design Team's format. Agree the drawing layering
convention with the Contract Administrator so that some items (including dimensions, furniture, general text,
drawing borders) can be ‘frozen’ without affecting the visibility of other aspects e.g. the building structure.
Agree with the Contract Administrator a document numbering system prior to preparing any documents.
220 SCHEDULE OF INSTALLER’S DRAWINGS

Prepare and submit a schedule of all drawings that you propose to submit for comment in connection with the
Works. For every drawing on the schedule indicate the following:
- Drawing number and revision letter/number

- Drawing title and building engineering system
- Scale
- Latest date required on site
- Date that final comments are required
- Date on which comments were received
- Date issued for comment
- Date of commencement of drawing production
Revise and submit the Drawing Schedule on an agreed basis with the Contract Administrator, updating it to take
into account all revisions that have taken place.
Include the necessary time in the programme for production of drawings for submission; examination; alterations
and resubmission in the event of the initial submission not being accepted; and the final issue.
230 DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE INSTALLER

Provide the following drawings and cross-reference them to each other for ease of interpretation.
- Detailed Schematics
- Co-ordinated Working Drawings
- Co-ordinated reflected ceiling plans

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Installation Drawings
- Shop / fabrication drawings
- Manufacturer’s Drawings
- Plant and equipment drawings
- Plant and equipment wiring diagrams
- Builder’s Work Information
- Builder’s Work Details
- Record Drawings
240 PRODUCTION OF CO-ORDINATED DRAWINGS

Ensuring that all Co-ordinated Working Drawings, Installation Drawings, Builder's Work Information and Builder’s
Work Details for the project are co-ordinated and that their production is timely, requires that all building
engineering system Installers exchange information with each other, and with the main contractor, and prepare
their drawings to a common drawing production programme agreed with each other and with the main
contractor.
It is the responsibility of each building engineering systems Installer to attend drawing production meetings
arranged and chaired by the main contractor. The purpose of the meetings is to resolve the effective production
of the Co-ordinated Working Drawings, Installation Drawings, Builder's Work Information and Builder’s Work
Details for each and every discipline.
No additional payment will be made for abortive draughting by any individual Installer caused by his lack of
knowledge of the requirements of any of the other Installers. Any work package proceeding prior to the
submission and receipt of comments on the relevant co-ordinated drawings will do so at the Installer’s own risk,
unless the Installer is instructed to so proceed by the Main Contractor.
No additional payment will be made to rectify work rendered abortive as a consequence of an Installer’s failure to
install in accordance with a properly produced and commented-upon drawing or to install without relevant
detailed information of the other sub-contract packages, structure or architectural form.
Produce and present all drawings in printed form unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Contract
Administrator.
Indicate on every Co-ordinated Working Drawing, Installation Drawing, Builder's Work Information Drawing and
Builder’s Work Detail all relevant details of all elements of structure, architectural form and other building
engineering systems. Ensure that all drawings have independent layers of information in accordance with the
following list and include the relevant aspects, in co-ordination, of the following:
- Structure and architectural form

- Mechanical works
- Electrical works
- Fire protection works
- Voice and Data Cabling
- Catering Installation
- External works
- Primary and secondary steelwork.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Process work
- Interior design
- Furniture layouts
Depict all the above in a readily identifiable manner.
300 LEAD CO-ORDINATORS ADDITIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES

While the overall responsibility for programming and co-ordinating the entire works is the main contractor’s, the
mechanical installer is to act as Lead Co-ordinator.
The lead co-ordinator’s responsibilities are as follows:
- Create and maintain the architectural and structural information for the background to the coordinated
drawings and liaise with the main contractor to ensure the latest architectural and structural information is
used at all times.
- Establish the layering convention to be used by all building engineering systems installers.
- Agree with the main contractor and the other building engineering systems installers a programme for the
production of the individual installers’ installation drawings, and of the Coordinated Working Drawings,
Installation Drawings, Builder's Work Information and Builder’s Work Details.
- Produce the Co-ordinated Working Drawings showing all the building engineering systems installations along
with architectural and structural information. Update the co-ordinated drawings as necessary to incorporate
spatial design changes instigated by the main contractor or any of the building engineering systems installers.
- Production of Co-ordinated Builder’s Work Information and Builder’s Work Details showing the builder’s work
requirements of all the building engineering systems installations. Update these drawings as necessary to
incorporate any changes to the Co-ordinated Working Drawings.
- Check the co-ordination of all services on the co-ordinated drawings.
400 CO-ORDINATION
Each and every building engineering systems installer is responsible for ensuring his installation is fully
coordinated with the remainder of the project and that all information relating to his installation is correctly
indicated on the lead co-ordinator’s Co-ordinated Working Drawings. Likewise ensure that all builders’ work
requirements are correctly indicated on the lead co-ordinator’s co-ordinated Builder’s Work Information and
Builder’s Work Details. Keep the lead co-ordinator informed of any spatial changes instructed in relation to the
installer’s works.
Following issue of the final Co-ordinated Working Drawings by the lead co-ordinator, each installer may issue his
installation drawings, using the routes agreed and shown on the Co-ordinated Working Drawings.
Allow for taking all your own dimensions on site, checking runs and levels and marking out for the builder’s work.
Ensure that setting out of plant and equipment, pipes and ducts, etc., permits it to fit into the space allocated and
allows access for maintenance and replacement purposes.
Ensure that your Installation Drawings include all works to be carried out by sub-traders / suppliers and that their
works are fully co-ordinated with each other and with all other installations.
Agree with all sub-traders / suppliers and be responsible for the positions of their work or materials including pipe
runs in ducts, conduits and cables, etc., and the positions of holes, chases, recesses, fixings and the like, before
work is put in hand, in order to ensure that they do not conflict with other work.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
To ensure co-ordination between sub-traders / suppliers, allow for arranging and attending any necessary
meetings with the relevant sub-traders / suppliers in order to agree such priorities as are necessary and in order
to monitor progress, obtaining the necessary data for and preparing co-ordinated drawings of all the work
involved in the building engineering systems installation together with its associated builder’s work and giving all
necessary instructions to overcome any potential conflicts.
500 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

Each of the building engineering system Installers is to produce, in accordance with the agreed programme,
independent Installation Drawings, Builders Work Information and Builder’s Work Details. Each Installer is
responsible for the accuracy of his own information and for the physical relationship of his own works to those of
other installers.
When preparing drawings for the installation show all components required for a complete installation, properly
located, dimensioned and co-ordinated.
Produce plans, elevations, sections, details and schematics. Make them of a minimum scale but sufficient to
illustrate and describe the design, fabrication, installation and fixings for all assembly conditions, interfaces and
co-ordination with the other works.
Base the Installation drawings on the contract drawings, taking into account any modifications that may have
taken place, and correctly relate the details of the actual plant and equipment selected for incorporation into the
works, to all other items. Properly include in the works the layouts, routes and details of the building services
engineering systems shown on the contract drawings, and make allowance for the installation, operation and
maintenance of the works by all other trades and disciplines. Accurately show the specified or selected plant and
equipment in its true proposed location.
Base the Installation Drawings upon the latest issue of the architectural and structural drawings and any other
drawings or information issued by the Contract Administrator during construction.
Submit Installation Drawings that clearly state that plant or equipment proposed complies in all respects with the
specified requirements. Where the Installer wishes the Contract Administrator to consider alternatives to or
deviations from the specification, clearly detail each and every alternative or deviation proposed.
Submit details of plant and equipment in schedule form, accompanied by the supplier’s certified working drawings
where appropriate. Provide copies of the manufacturers’ certified drawings for major items of plant, indicating
physical dimensions, schematic arrangements of all components and fully detailed electrical wiring diagrams.
Where necessary for the proper co-ordination of the works, make a survey of the site or building(s) or room(s)
and existing installations as constructed, and prepare the Installation Drawings from the resulting site
measurements.
Show on the Installation Drawings all plant, equipment and cable tray / cable trunking / pipe / duct runs, etc.
Include on the drawings full details of all plant together with cable tray / cable trunking / pipe / duct sizes, wiring
diagrams, schematic and inter-connection diagrams / drawings.
Show on wiring diagrams, (including internal diagrams for items of electrical equipment and diagrams of
interconnection between items of equipment and components) references of all terminals and terminations with
cable types clearly identified.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that circuit and layout diagrams for the electrical wiring of plant, etc., detail not only all circuitry within
main control panels but also that within all external equipment (e.g. motor starters, thermostatic control devices),
together with all interconnecting wiring from the main point of supply onwards and with all terminal markings.
Indicate the required sizes and types of all cables on the layout diagrams together with the ratings of such items
as fuses, switches and controllers.
Arrange circuit diagrams, where possible, so that the main sequence of events is from left to right and from top
to bottom of the diagram. Comply, generally, with the IEC on-line database for diagram symbols. If abbreviations
are employed for the designation of components, provide a schedule on the drawings that explains the meaning
of the abbreviations.
Ensure that the circuit and layout diagrams for the electrical wiring of plant, etc., subsequently form part of the
set of Record Drawings.
Individual circuit and layout drawings from the various component manufacturers are not acceptable in lieu of
composite diagrams.
Where revisions take place to the building engineering systems installation, either under the authority of a
Contract Administrator's Instruction, or by written agreement with the Contract Administrator, or as a
consequence of revised architectural or structural drawings being issued, modify the Installation Drawings
accordingly and re-issue them for construction purposes. Issue revised drawings in accordance with and with
regard to the agreed programme for construction.
Particular Installation Drawings may (by the prior, specific and express written permission of the Contract
Administrator), omit minor details such as conduit, provided that an agreed method statement rigorously covers
the installation intent. This permission will not be unreasonably withheld but will not be given where either
Employer operation or visual appearance is adversely affected, nor where such details are needed for informing
other trades.
Ensure that the Installation Drawings include details of all local co-ordination around equipment, control panels,
individual plant at access points and on architecturally finished surfaces. The intent is that all installations can be
considered for spatial relationship, appearance and Employer operation.
Ensure that the Installation Drawings show sufficient detail to enable the erection staff to install the works in
accordance with the specification and to show sufficient clearances for insulation, dismantling, maintenance,
insertion of thermostats, thermometers, gauges and the like, painting, cleaning and commissioning. Show also on
the drawings possible causes of obstruction or restriction, either structural or by other services, to enable
alternative routes to be considered. Include electrical equipment and control items on the mechanical Installation
Drawings.
600 BUILDER’S WORK DRAWINGS

Notwithstanding that some builder’s work provision for the building engineering systems installation may have
already been made on the architect’s and structural engineer’s tender drawings, you are responsible for preparing
and issuing Builder’s Work Information and Builder’s Work Details based on your Installation Drawings, and for
doing so in sufficient time to prevent abortive work.
Show clearly on the Builder’s Work Information the requirements necessary to accommodate the installation of
each and every building engineering system you are providing. In cases where preliminary builder’s work and
structural information has already been shown on the Tender Drawings (e.g. the weight of items of equipment,
sizes of access ways, etc), check that it is correct before incorporating it on your Builder’s Work Information.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Prepare all other necessary Builder's Work Information required for the execution of the Works, making due
reference to the Structural and Architectural final dimensioned detail drawings as applicable. Fully dimension all
such drawings.
Provide all Builder's Work Information in sufficient time to comply with the agreed programme requirements and
meet all costs arising from failure to do so.
700 TECHNICAL SUBMISSIONS BY THE INSTALLER

For all plant and equipment proposed, submit all manufacturers' drawings and comprehensive technical
information prior to manufacture or placing of orders. Submit final details including all technical aspects and
calculations where applicable in a clear, definable and easily read format with the specified technical details,
notes and performance data clearly shown. Include the following information as a minimum: -
- 1. Copies of manufacturers’ certified drawings indicating physical dimensions, schematic arrangement of

components and full electrical wiring diagrams.
- 2. Full description of controls systems describing the sequence of operation of all components under every
operating condition likely to be experienced by the equipment.
- 3. Manufacturer’s material and workmanship specifications including paint finish and RAL colour.
- 4. Full performance schedules, operating characteristic curves and charts for every individual item of
equipment indicating all data necessary (e.g. fluid flow rates, pressures, operating temperatures, electrical
currents, voltages, noise levels, etc.) to properly describe in engineering terms, the performance of the
equipment being offered, including the definitions of all engineering parameters at the interfacing points of
connection.
- 5. Manufacturer’s installation, operating and maintenance instructions.
The submission of the above information does not remove the obligation for all equipment to comply with the
specification. Any proposed deviations from the specification should be specifically drawn to the Contract
Administrator’s attention and his written agreement obtained before proceeding.
Include all costs for attending meetings associated with the submittal review procedure.
Agree with the Contract Administrator details of the drawings issue procedures to be followed including:
- Number of hard copies required (if applicable) and where they are to be sent.
- Distribution of drawings by email (if required)
- Use of an extranet-based document management system (if applicable). Provide details or refer to a
description in the main contract preliminaries.
- In what form comments will be returned (hard copy, email or via extranet).
800 COMMENTS ON INSTALLER’S DRAWINGS AND TECHNICAL SUBMISSIONS

Allow an agreed period for comment by the Contract Administrator. Issue the drawings and technical submissions
progressively, related to the construction programme, grouped according to building engineering system and in
sequence with all other Installers’ Installation / Working drawings, to facilitate reviewing.
Where your drawings are issued out of sequence, or without supporting information, the Contract Administrator
reserves the right to reject the drawing or comment only upon those elements unaffected by missing information.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The Contract Administrator's representative will, if requested by you, attend a series of meetings during the
production of the co-ordinated Installation Working and Builder's Work Information to provide early comment
upon presentation, detail, design queries and production programme.
Where details are replicated throughout a series of drawings and / or technical submissions, present and agree
such details prior to draughting of the entire scheme. Repeated or duplicated drawings need not be submitted.
Ensure that all drawings and technical submissions produced are commented on by the Contract Administrator
before they are used for construction purposes.
Submit drawings and technical submissions for comment in sufficient time prior to ordering equipment and to
avoid delay to the works.
Unless otherwise agreed in writing, do not commence any installation work until the relevant Installation /
Coordinated Working Drawings have been issued and commented upon.
Take responsibility for any omission, errors or any discrepancies in the drawings and other particulars supplied
directly or by suppliers, whether such drawings or particulars have been commented upon by the Contract
Administrator or not, provided that such omission, errors or discrepancies are not due to inaccurate information
of particulars furnished in writing to the Installer by the Contract Administrator.
Comments (or absence of comments) by the Contract Administrator on any drawing or technical submission does
not mean that the Contract Administrator is responsible for the correctness of such, nor its suitability for purpose.
These remain your responsibility.
Amend and re-issue as soon as possible all drawings and technical submittals in response to the Contract
Administrator’s comments, and continue to do so until all comments have been addressed to the Contract
Administrator’s satisfaction. Any installation work carried out while comments remain outstanding is at your risk.
900 REVISIONS AND VARIATIONS

Where the scheme is subject to revision or instruction, then the Installation Drawings, Co-ordinated Working
Drawings, Builder’s Work Information, Builder’s Work Details, and Record Drawings must show the full effect of
such revision. Where the scheme revision involves change to the architectural or structural details give immediate
notice to the Contract Administrator.
Where drawings are revised and updated during construction, issue to the Contract Administrator for comments
on the revision only.
A variation in cost will only be considered by the Contract Administrator if you can demonstrate that a significant
departure from the intent of the Tender drawings has been necessary. This will not include normal detail
development relating to inclusion of, nor development of, factors within your design responsibility.
Maintain on site, a marked-up record of the progress of the works on a set of Installation Drawings, detailing the
extent of completed actual installations and all departures from the Installation Drawings. Update them weekly,
securely store them and keep them available for inspection on site. Incorporate them in a file of draft Record
Drawings at no longer than monthly intervals.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A12 THE SITE / EXISTING BUILDINGS
100 GENERAL
The existing site is described within the main contract preliminaries.
200 SITE LOCATION

The site is at Adam Air Base located some 2 hours by road to the southwest of Muscat. The site is largely
undeveloped currently and it is understood that a master plan for development as a military air field will be being
undertaken
400 RISKS TO HEALTH AND SAFETY

The following risks are or may be present:
- The accuracy and sufficiency of this information is not guaranteed by the Employer and the Subcontractor
must ascertain for himself any information he may require to ensure the safety of all persons and the Works.
Comply with the CDM Regulations by:
- Compiling risk assessments for the sub-contract works;

- Providing information on the sub-contract works which might affect the health and safety of any Person;
- Providing appropriate input to the Pre-Construction Information, Construction Phase Plan, and Health and
Safety file for the works.
500 SURVEY’S & SITE VISITS

Before tendering, ascertain the nature of the site, access thereto and all local conditions and restrictions likely to
affect the execution of the subcontract Works. Site visits may be made by the Subcontractor.
Ascertain the nature of the site and all local conditions and restrictions likely to affect the execution of the Works.
Before commencing work, carry out a survey and examination of buildings, structure and engineering services
affected by the works.
510 INSTALLERS SURVEY – TENDER

Undertake a survey prior to submitting the Tender to verify all matters that could affect post Tender costs or
works. No allowance can or will be made post Tender for any omission of works or cost arising from information
available at the time of Tender.
520 INSTALLER SURVEY – INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

Undertake all survey work prior to the preparation of Installation Drawings / Working Drawings / Builder’s Work
Information to enable accurate preparation and dimensioning of them. Do not rely upon information contained in
any Tender drawings. Refer to the main contract preliminaries for details of site access arrangements during
construction.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
530 SPECIAL SURVEYS

Arrange and provide for all specialist surveys to be undertaken, and forward the results of them to the
Contract Administrator prior to submitting for comment the associated Installation / Working Drawings. The
specialist surveys which may be required are as follows (this is not an exhaustive list and any other specialist
surveys required shall be included for):
- Electromagnetic environment survey - (ground level (by electrical installer)

- Soils survey – electrical resistivity measurement (by electrical installer for earthing of lightning
- protection system)
- Contaminated ground survey (by mechanical installer to decide piping materials for buried cold
- water service).
- Acoustic environment survey (by mechanical installer)
- Satellite reception survey (by electrical installer)
- Water main flow and pressure capability (by mechanical / sprinkler installer)
- Location of existing underground services (by mechanical / electrical / sprinkler installer to
- determine exact locations for avoidance / connection)
- Sewer, drainage CCTV survey (by mechanical installer)
- Incoming water main quality analysis (by mechanical installer)
- Capacity and earthing characteristics of electrical supply (by electrical installer).

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A13 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS
100 THE MAIN CONTRACT WORKS

All works associated with the main contract are described within the Main Contract Preliminaries.
200 CONFLICT
Immediately after receipt of the Tender documents check that the documents are complete and legible (e.g.
check page and drawing numbers, whether writing or figures are indistinct, etc.) and promptly notify the Contract
Administrator accordingly. No subsequent claim for loss consequent upon failure to comply with this requirement
will be allowed.
Where there is contradiction between any elements, clauses or sections of the project Tender documents
(including the specification, the schedules and the drawings), notify the Contract Administrator prior to returning
the Tender. In the absence of notice being given prior to Tender submission and to ensure that a positive
decision is made, the Contract Administrator is the final arbiter of which element, clause or section of the project
Tender documents is deemed to have been included.
Where there is any doubt in your mind as to the meaning of any clause or aspect of the Tender documents, set
out the particulars of such doubt in writing and submit the same as soon as possible to the Contract
Administrator to obtain clarification prior to the submission of Tenders.
300 GENERAL
The main contract work is described in the Main Contract Preliminaries.
Undertake detailed design development to provide a complete coordinated and functional design and
installation, including all commissioning and certification, for all systems outlined within this specification,
required as part of the contract and as explicitly or implicitly implied or necessary to ensure that all buildings are
fully operational and a complete installation is provided to include all client requirements.
For clarity, the installer is responsible for liaising with the Main Contractor to ensure that all design elements for
ALL systems are detailed and coordinated. The design outlined within this documentation and on the
accompanying drawings and specifications is developed for Tendering purposes only and the installer and main
contractor are responsible for ensuring that the design is developed to a fully coordinated installation design,
including the final selection of ALL plant, equipment and ancillary support systems and elements to provide
complete, functional, operational and certified systems.
Final selection of plant shall ensure that all equipment, central plant and ancillary items fit within the intended
footprints of that plant indicated on the design drawings.
You are responsible for all works detailed in the Specification or Schedules or shown on the Tender Drawings,
and the following site based activities:
(Only activities specifically declared as "at works" or "off site" may take place off site.)
- Undertake specific detailed design as indicated herein.

- Provide and operate CAD / Revit / Drawing Production Facilities.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Provide Co-ordinated Working Drawings, Installation Drawings, Builder’s Work Information, Builder’s
- Work Details and Record Drawings, showing the complete installation and structure, architectural form and
other building engineering systems.
- Provide detailed wiring diagrams for all equipment and control panels.
- Ensure the complete integration of the works with the remainder of the project.
- Inspect all plant, equipment and materials as delivered or, where specified, at the manufacturer's works.
- Arrange delivery, offloading, lifting, hoisting and all other storage and movement of all plant, equipment and
materials.
- Ensure that all plant, motors, starters and ancillary equipment etc. are suitable for operation at full capacity
under the environmental conditions in which they are to be located.
- Install and fix correctly all plant, equipment and materials including positioning, levelling, packing, and
shimming. Install and fix all secondary steelwork necessary to support the installed plant.
- Provide all supports up to and including the final attachment to primary structure.
- Carry out final detailed location and dimensioning of second fix equipment (including but not limited to:
luminaires; electrical switches, control devices, grilles and diffusers etc.) based on architectural information.
- Detail, supply and install all sleeves, inserts, frames, fixing anchors etc. and any other items required to be
cast or built into the structure by others, including co-ordination of positions to such extent and accuracy to
allow structural construction to proceed.
- Supply and install all collars, flashings, kerbs, stopping up and sealing required for the associated building
engineering system(s) to achieve weatherproofing and acoustic stopping of services passing through the
internal and external elements of the building.
- Ensure all associated work (including electrical wiring, connecting pipework, builder’s work, etc.), is properly
executed.
- Test and commission the complete installation(s) including making adjustments and balancing as necessary.
- Prepare such reports, calculations and details as required for submission to any appropriate authority
including the co-ordination of such information by suppliers, specialists etc. Needed to be included in any
submission.
- Demonstrate that the equipment is capable of the performance and method of operation specified, to the
satisfaction and acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
- Demonstrate that the overall and complete systems perform correctly in the required manner and as intended
by the specification to the satisfaction and acceptance of the Contract Administrator (including return visits for
seasonal tests).
- Provide operating and maintenance instruction manuals for the complete systems.
- Provide the full set of test results in an approved format for all tests, commissioning and balancing operations.
- Instruct the Employer's staff in the use, operation and maintenance of the installations.
- Hand over all specified tools, keys, spares, oils, chemicals, etc. as detailed elsewhere in the specification.
- Survey existing building engineering services systems and associated buildings, where relevant.
- Remove existing building engineering services systems as described elsewhere in this specification, where
applicable.
- Obtain approval from the structural engineer and / or architect of proposed fixings.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Mark on site actual locations of all builder's work holes required through walls, partitions, floors, etc., and also
chases in walls, floors, etc., for conduits, pipes and the like, and offer them for inspection by the Contract
Administrator prior to carrying out any work of making them. Establish a method of working with the Contract
Administrator to ensure that such builder’s work proceeds without hindrance to the overall project
programme.
- Provide material samples, method statements, equipment technical literature and any other submissions
detailed within this specification.
- Ensure all materials, equipment and components used, together with methods of installation, comply with
Statutory Requirements.
- Room terminal locations – The positions of all connection points, accessories, apparatus, equipment and other
room terminals shown on the Tender drawings are approximate and for guidance in the preparation of the
Tender. Agree with the Contract Administrator, final locations and make an allowance within the Tender price
for movement of terminals and final distribution routes, mounting heights and services positions.
- Prepare an asset register in a format specified by the Facilities Manager / Engineering Manager.
- Co-operate with the specialist Recycling Contractor for the project in the minimisation and management of
waste materials resulting from the works described in the specification, in accordance with the project waste
minimisation and management plan.
- Ensure that the location and installation of all building engineering systems meets the requirements of the
project Access Consultant.
- For dwellings, ensure that all wiring and electrical work is designed, installed, inspected and tested in
accordance with the requirements of BS7671 and the Building Regulations, Part P, by an installer registered
with a Part P competent person electrical self certification scheme authorised by the Secretary of State. Within
30 days of completion of the work provide the Building Control Authority with, the installer’s self certification
registration body’s confirmation that the scheme has been successfully self-certified, and a copy of a Building
Regulations Compliance Certificate.
400 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

Ensure all equipment and systems are installed to provide electromagnetic compatibility within the system and
with any other systems installed in the same area. Ensure all systems and buildings are assessed for protection
to, and that such protection meets the requirements of BS EN 62305. Ensure all equipment meets the
requirements of the appropriate electromagnetic compatibility standard.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A20 THE CONTRACT / SUBCONTRACT
100 INSTALLER'S DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY

You are responsible for undertaking the detailed design activities to provide a complete installation for the
systems listed below and any others implicitly or explicitly required to provide a complete and functional
installation, in addition to those activities normally undertaken through the custom and practice of the industry,
all of which shall be subject to the comment of the Contract Administrator.
Ensure that the detailed design undertaken is fully co-ordinated and compatible with the remainder of the project
design.
Comments by the Contract Administrator do not relieve you of your responsibility for the suitability and
correctness of designs and other obligations within the contract documentation.
Your design obligations include, but are not limited to:
- The chosen contractor responsible for the construction of the Adam airbase, Oman, must ensure that a
specialist competent Local Exhaust Ventilation (LEV) designer/installer is employed. The LEV designer must be
able to design the equipment to comply to the relevant Omani or International standard, whichever is the
higher.
- It is strongly advised that this LEV contractor work closely with the RAFO/BAE design team to ensure a full
understanding of the processes and substances to be used within the facility. The LEV contractor must be
able to produce suitable designs, risk assessments and calculations for capture hoods and air velocities to
ensure that all fume/dust hazards are extracted from the operators breathing zone. It is advised that these
designs are then independently reviewed to ensure suitability for the task.
- Design, install, test and commission a complete RF Shielding installation to all SCR and Comms. Rooms,
compliant with the requirements of JSP 440. The installation shall cover all walls, floors, ceiling and doors.
Allow for breaks in containment & service penetrations and connect to the power earth within the space.
- Select and verify that the luminaires and associated controls in each building meet the performance criteria
set out within the individual building Part 2 Specifications.
- Select and verify that the grilles, diffusers and louvers in each building meet the performance criteria set out
within the individual building Part 2 Specifications.
- Select and verify that all elements of the SMATV system within each building meet the performance criteria
set out within the individual building Part 2 Specifications.
- Select and verify that all elements of the UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply) and CBS (Central Battery
System) within each building meet the performance criteria set out within the individual building Part 2
Specifications.
- Select and verify that all elements of the Fuelling system, serving the QRA, Squadron Hangars and Hot
Refuelling Apron, meet the performance criteria set out within the individual buildings Volume 2 Specification.
- Select and verify that all elements of the security access control and intruder alarm systems within each
building meet the performance criteria set out within the individual building Part 2 Specifications.
- Select and verify that all elements of the aircraft power plinths within each building meet the
- performance criteria set out within the individual building Part 2 Specifications.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Select and verify that all elements of the PA system within each building meet the performance criteria set out
within the individual building Part 2 Specifications.
- Preparation of Fabrication drawings and the Co-ordinated Working Drawings, Installation Drawings, Builder’s
Work Information, Builder’s Work Details and Record drawings.
- Selecting drain and vent point locations and piping gradients in accordance with the current edition of BSRIA
Application Guide 1/2001 Pre-commission cleaning of pipework systems.
- Undertaking bracket and support detailed design and the selection of appropriate locations for them taking
account of any known restrictions on types or location of fixing. Declaring all types, loads and locations to the
Contract Administrator ten working days prior to installation, for comment.
- Designing, fabricating, supplying and installing all secondary support steelwork required to support the
engineering systems within this works package where not specifically detailed on the Structural Engineering
drawings.
- Preparing all electrical wiring diagrams of all equipment supplied by you showing all interconnections between
equipment to enable the necessary wiring to be undertaken.
- Selecting all equipment and components to meet the requirements and performance specified or scheduled,
and being responsible for the design of the equipment and components selected.
- Undertaking the detailed design of the automatic controls insofar as it is required to meet the full physical and
operational requirements of the Specification.
- Ensuring the full compatibility of the plant and equipment with the specified function. Where there are
interfaces (including relays or other devices or modifications to hardware or software), being responsible for
their design and the incorporation of them.
- Carrying out all electrical design activities, as detailed herein, relating to the automatic controls system.
Preparing detailed BMS point schedules, wiring schematics, control panel labelling details and equipment
schedules.
- Dimensioning of, and final installation details of, the automatic control panels to suit the detailed requirements
of the particular agreed manufacturers of controls equipment and the cable entry/exit arrangements such
that:
o Cable entry is possible in the selected location, and
o Doors are not fouled by other plant, equipment, services or structural elements, and
o Safe operating and maintenance clearances are provided in all access positions when installed on site
- Selecting the fire alarm system(s) and voice alarm system(s), and their components and cabling
requirements, to meet the requirements of the particular manufacturer and the requirements of the
specification. Ensuring that the design of the fire alarm system(s) and voice alarm system(s) comply with the
edition of BS 5839 current at the time of Tender.
- Designing and obtaining certification of the sprinkler system, its components and configuration, to meet the
particular and the performance requirements of the specification, including submitting calculations and all
other design information required by the certifying authority.
- Designing and selecting attenuators to satisfy the particular and performance requirements of the
specification and Tender drawings.
- Designing flue systems for the diesel generator(s), boiler(s) and other equipment to meet the requirements of
the equipment manufacturer, the Building Control Authority and the Environmental Health Officer, and
ensuring that the flue gas is discharged at the required velocity and altitude.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Designing elements of our scheme to account for self-weight and other applied forces / loadings reasonable
use (e.g. the design of anchorage, encasement and foundations for buried tanks or buried piping.)
- Designing systems to safely and reliably accommodate thermal expansion and contraction (including the
provision of anchors, bellows, compensators, loops and bends.) Designing systems to safely and reliably
accommodate and control their movement due to hydraulic pressures and building movement.
- Designing acoustic treatment (including attenuators, silencers, absorption materials, baffles, mutes, cladding
and jacketing) or modification of equipment, to comply with the noise levels specified, including when all
building engineering services systems and plant are operating.
- Selecting valve, damper and access locations.
- Calculating system water capacities, the quantities of chemical additives required, and providing all the
facilities required (whether temporary or permanent), for pre-commissioning flushing and cleaning of water
systems, all in accordance with the current edition of BSRIA Application Guide 1/2001 ‘Pre-commission
cleaning of pipework systems’.
- Selecting all anti-vibration mountings to suit the particular application of the mounts.
- Designing pump inertia bases to meet the specified vibration isolation requirements.
- Selecting exact locations of instruments, control sensors, detectors and thermostats.
- Final sizing of sections of ductwork between terminal units and diffusers to achieve the specified noise criteria
and duct velocities.
- Final detailing and confirmation of the location and sizes of duct connections to external louvres.
- Calculating pump and fan duties to suit the piping and ducting layouts shown on your final Installation
Drawings to ensure that the specified capacities are not invalidated by your selection of alternative pipe or
duct routes, or items of plant and equipment selected for incorporation into the works
- Selecting the capacity, location and design of electrical conduit, trunking, tray and cable ladder systems
- Selecting proprietary platforms, access covers, gratings, ladders, walkways, balustrades, guardrails and all
additional structural steelwork, associated with specific items of plant, where indicated in the Tender
documentation.
- Carrying out detailed design of fire rated ductwork systems and ductwork fire protection systems, including
obtaining all necessary statutory approvals.
- Selecting, positioning and carrying out final sizing of regulating devices (including regulating valves, balancing
valves, flow measuring orifice plates, commissioning sets, balancing dampers, etc.), to achieve the specified
function and to suit the characteristics of items served and the final configuration of installed systems, in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturers of the regulating devices.
- Selecting cable terminations on items of equipment provided by you to suit the cable sizes proposed by other
Installers (including the electrical Installer, the automatic control system installer, etc.) or the specified cable
sizes, as appropriate.
- Ensuring that the specified cable sizes are not invalidated by your selection of alternative cable routes.
- Detailed sizing, location, routes and design of electrical conduit systems including capacity, locations, routes
and fixing.
- Verifying spatial requirements, routes and anchor points for cable pulling.
- Designing earthing and bonding requirements for electrical building engineering systems, mechanical building
engineering systems, architectural elements and structural elements that require earthing and bonding,

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
including aircraft earthing and specialist earthing requirements as set out within the Volume 2 particulars
specification and as otherwise required to provide a complete installation.
- Designing cable and cable trunking terminations on to electrical equipment provided under the subcontract
and dimensioning of, and final installation details of, electrical switchgear, to ensure that:
o Cable entry is possible in the selected location, and
o Doors are not fouled by other plant, equipment, services or structural elements, and Safe operating and
maintenance clearances are provided in all access positions when installed on site.
- Ensuring fuse sizes installed in plug tops are appropriate for the rating of connected equipment.
- Sizing and detailing the design of refrigerant pipework between items of equipment provided under the sub-
contract Works.
- Undertaking the following Lift sub-contract design obligations:
o Detailed design of all specialist and proprietary equipment associated with the lift installation to allow the
installation to function in accordance with the performance requirements of the specification
o Determining final locations of all lift equipment within the lift motor rooms and lift shafts to ensure safe
and efficient operation and to suit the detailed requirements of the lift installation
- Production of design loadings / reactions on support structure associated with the installation.
- Sizing and designing earthing and electromagnetic screening of electrical power systems and ensuring
compliance with the appropriate EMC directives.
- Complying with all requirements set out within BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations.
- The Wiring Regulations. Seventeenth Edition and HSE publications.
- Designing all temporary works, facilities and provisions required during construction, to meet the
requirements of the Specification.
- Ensuring that the design of the lightning protection system components meets the particular manufacturer’s
and the specification’s requirements.
- Ensuring that the design of the security system(s) components and cabling requirements meet the particular
manufacturer’s and the specification’s requirements.
- Designing the gaseous fire suppression system(s), its components and configuration, to meet the
requirements of the specification.
- Designing and determining the required extent of the trace heating system(s) in accordance with section Y24
of the specification.
- Ensuring that details of making-good, fire stopping and weather proofing are effective.
- Calculating system water capacities based on the installation drawings and actual equipment intended for
installation, in order to properly determine the required capacity of expansion vessels, expansion cisterns,
pressure vessels and thermal inertia [buffer] vessels and carrying out final selection of pressurization units.
- Designing thrust blocks associated with underground pipework installations.
- Calculating sub-circuit resistances based on the piping layouts shown on your final Installation drawings and
taking into account items of plant and equipment selected for incorporation into the works, and selecting
control valves based on the calculated sub-circuit resistances.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
200 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS AND REGULATIONS

Carry out the works in accordance with all relevant Statutory Instruments, Regulations, standards and Codes of
Practice current at the time of Tender and applicable to the location of the project.
Carry out the works in accordance with the requirements and regulations of all relevant local authorities, fire
brigades, and utility providers including drainage, electricity, gas, telecommunications, and water supply.
Do not build-in, cover or otherwise obscure any portion of the works requiring the inspection and approval of
such authorities and utility providers, until such approval has been obtained.
300 PRACTICAL COMPLETION

Practical completion of your Works, or agreed phase or part of the works, will not be effected until you have
fulfilled your obligations under the Main Contract conditions and in particular demonstrated to the satisfaction of
the Contract Administrator that the following aspects are complete:
- All installation works are complete other than minor ‘snags’, omissions or defects that could reasonably be
completed within an agreed programme without causing disruption to the Employer's or his Agent's use of the
Building or agreed part thereof. In respect of this clause, specifically but not uniquely, the Contract
Administrator shall be the sole arbiter of what may be considered ‘minor’, ‘reasonably be completed’, ‘an
agreed programme’ and ‘disruption to the Employer’
- All tests and demonstrations have been undertaken in the presence of the Contract Administrator as required
in the specification(s).
- All final copies of the Record Drawings, schedules, operating and maintenance instruction manuals have been
supplied to the Contract Administrator in an agreed format
- All spares, keys, tools, oils, chemicals and other materials required by the specification for the running and
maintenance of the building engineering services systems as specified, have been supplied
- All instruction of the Employer's staff has been satisfactorily completed in accordance with the programme for
handovers agreed with the Contract Administrator
- All necessary certification by the Employer’s insurers has been completed.
- All documentation required for the completion of the Health & Safety File under the CDM Regulations has
been issued to the satisfaction of the CDM Co-ordinator.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A30 TENDERING / SUB-LETTING / SUPPLY
100 SCOPE
The scope of works to be included are set out within this specification and the Main Contract Preliminaries.
200 ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS

Include in the Tender for all equipment to be supplied and confirmation that equipment selected meets the
requirements set out within this specification and hold the BS EN.
Detail any alternative manufacturers offered together with benefits, cost / programme saving, technical, value
added, etc., cost differences at the time of Tender, impact.
Summarise on a “Schedule of Alternatives” sheet to be submitted with the Tender, all alternatives, with all
information pertinent to the evaluation of the alternative item and its operation.
Acceptance or rejection of any alternative is entirely at the discretion of the Contract Administrator, who is under
no obligation to give a reason why an alternative is not acceptable. Note that alternatives will not be accepted for
items for which a change would cause significant disruption to the quality, design or construction of the Works.
Where alternative manufacturers’ equipment is offered, include for all measures necessary to make the
equipment and the total installation equivalent to that specified e.g. upgrading pumps where pressure drops are
higher, upgrading cable sizes where electrical loads are higher and all necessary re-design, draughting and co-
ordination to demonstrate the successful installation including the costs of submittals, consequential delays and
professional fees, impacts on energy consumption and carbon emissions, etc. These measures are to be included
in the information issued with the tender. These requirements also apply where the Installer chooses equipment
from the manufacturer specified, but having different performance characteristics from those specified.
Where the Contract Administrator agrees to accept equipment alternative to that specified, you will remain
responsible for ensuring that such alternative is of equal performance and quality to that specified.
Additional costs resulting from non-compliance with the above shall be borne by you.
300 TENDER RETURNS

Ensure that the Tender includes for all work shown or described in the Tender documents as a whole, and also
includes everything that is clearly apparent as being necessary for the complete and proper execution of the
Works but which is not explicitly referred to in the Tender documents. Include within the Tender for all costs
necessary to ensure that the Works can be completed within the stated programme. Include for all necessary
overtime and other expenses in the contract price that may be necessary in order to complete the Works in
compliance with the contract programme, or to avoid disruption to the Employer. Payment will be made for the
extra cost of overtime only if a prior written instruction has been issued by the Contract Administrator together
with agreement to accept the costs involved.
Identify any aspects of the Tender documents with which you, as Tenderer, disagree or which in your opinion
need to be changed to enable the Works to be properly completed. Submit particulars of each such suggested
alteration with the Tender and state the consequential change, if any, to the Tendered price.
Examine the architect’s and structural engineer’s drawings, if any, issued to you with the Tender documents.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Submit all queries concerning such drawings to the Contract Administrator for clarification prior to submitting your
Tender.
In addition submit the following information with the Tender:
- Letter of conformity with the Tender drawings and specifications, including a full reference to the Tender
documentation upon which the Tender is based, and a statement that these preliminaries have been read,
understood and included in the price. In the absence of any such confirmation, it is deemed that you have
made full provision for compliance with these technical preliminaries;
- Schedule of proposed specialist installers and others to whom you intend to sub-let elements of the Works;
- Schedule of proposed manufacturers and suppliers;
- Details of any equipment proposed that causes any change to spatial requirements or allowances made in the
Tender scheme;
- Simple bar chart programme to identify key dates, duration and sequencing of the main activities including
submissions;
- Proposed first draft of the procurement schedule;
- Proposed schedule of drawings;
- Confirmation of willingness to provide a Design Warranty.
400 EXCLUSIONS
If the Main Contractor (or subcontractor) cannot tender for any part(s) of the works as defined in the tender
documents, they must inform the CA as soon as possible, defining the relevant part(s) and stating the reasons for
their inability to tender. All exclusions to be returned on a schedule with the Tender return.
500 WARRANTY TO BE GIVEN BY THE INSTALLER

Design warranties may be required from certain sub-contracts. Refer to the main contract preliminaries and sub-
contract documentation for details. Confirm your willingness to provide such a warranty with the return of
Tender.
600 ORDERS FOR MATERIALS

Allow in the Tender price for the purchase of all materials and equipment from stockists and other suppliers at
such time, and in such a manner, as may be necessary to allow for the completion of the work in accordance with
the contract programme.
Clearly state in the Tender return any difficulty foreseen with the delivery periods for the selected equipment.
Additional costs resulting from non-compliance with the above shall be borne by you.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A31 PROVISION, CONTENT AND USE OF DOCUMENTS
100 MAIN CONTRACT PRELIMINARIES

Definitions and interpretations given in the Main Contract Preliminaries apply to the whole of the Works, including
this Subcontract. In the case of conflicting definitions the Subcontract Preliminaries will prevail.
200 DEFINITIONS
The definitions of technical terms associated with the engineering services installations are those included within:
- CIBSE, IoP and BSRIA Technical Publications

- Loss Prevention Council – Rules for Automatic Sprinkler Installations
- NFPA Standards for Fire Protection
- British Standards, including Codes of Practice.
Associated Statutory Acts.
Where used in the documentation the following definitions apply:
- Duct: An enclosed space specifically intended for the distribution of services, with direct access for personnel.
- Trench: A covered horizontal service space in the floor or ground with access from above.
- Cavity: A space enclosed within the elements of a building within which services are installed, e.g. the space
between ceiling and floor above. See Building Regulations.
- Service Areas: Includes areas within a building with limited finishes such as loading bays, car parks etc.
- Concealed Services: Includes installations within ducts, trenches or cavities.
- Exposed Services: Includes installations within plant rooms, outdoors or unprotected within service or
occupied areas.
- System: System means all equipment, accessories, controls, supports and ancillary items, including supply,
installation, connection, testing, commissioning and setting to work necessary for that section of the Works to
function.
- Services: Services means the inclusion of one or more systems.
210 REFERENCES TO BSI DOCUMENTS

References to BSI documents are to the version and amendments listed in the British Standards Catalogue and in
subsequent issues of BSI Update Standards up to and including that for any subsequent versions, amendments or
superseding documents specifically referred to within the project documentations.
220 TENDER DRAWINGS

The Tender drawings means those drawings listed in the specific design documents volume forming part of the
Tender package.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
300 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION

Carefully and thoroughly examine the drawings and the specification, and fully acquaint yourself with the work to
be done, as no allowance for claims will be considered for any alleged deficiency of work or materials resulting
from unfamiliarity with the specification’s or drawings’ contents.
Should there be any doubt about the precise meaning of any item for any reason whatsoever, inform the office of
issue of the tender documents in writing in order that further clarification may be provided. Any clarification of
the meaning or intent will only be valid if issued in writing. All Tenderers will be notified of any such explanation.
No liability will be admitted, nor claim allowed, in respect of errors in the Tender, due to mistakes that should
have been rectified in the manner described above.
The Tender drawings are prepared primarily to describe, in a basic manner, the design of the building
engineering system(s), the working principles of the systems and the general intended methods of installation.
They are intended to be read in conjunction with the specification to facilitate the preparation of your estimate
and tender and to enable all other participants to appreciate the interrelation of the building engineering systems
installation works, as applicable, and the main works as a whole. Not all items or matters referred to in the
specification are indicated on the drawings, nor are all items detailed on the drawings described in the
specification. The tender drawings are produced for the purpose of Tender preparation only. Aspects of the
Tender drawings are not fully detailed in all respects. The size, capacity and position of all components including
connection points, accessories, apparatus, equipment and room terminals shown on the Tender drawings are
approximate and for guidance in Tender preparation.
The Tender drawings are accordingly part diagrammatic with runs of piping, ducts, cables, conduits, trunking and
the like, being shown to small scale and not necessarily indicating exact installation positions.
Do not use the Tender drawings alone for the detailed pricing of the Works. Take your own dimensions for the
preparation of the Tender. Allow for all necessary sets, bends, transformations, expansion measures, supports
and other components required, or recommended by the manufacturer, to achieve a safe and fully functional and
operational installation in accordance with the design intent. Where you elect to depart from the principles and
general arrangements depicted on the Tender drawings, be responsible for undertaking detailed checks on the
duties of all equipment affected, demonstrating to the Contract Administrator that neither performance nor
spatial co-ordination are compromised and adjusting the sizing of plant as required.
Do not proceed with the order of resized equipment until you have provided the necessary calculations to the
Contract Administrator and received and acted in accordance with the Contract Administrator’s comments.
Note that reduced size plant need not be accepted by the Contract Administrator and that all costs arising from
such change shall remain your responsibility.
This specification should be read as a whole and does not include cross referencing except where an alternative
choice is given (e.g. in a 'Y' clause); the alternative choice should be made clear in the appropriate section of the
specification. Should a specification section be unclear as to which alternative is to be used, ascertain the choice
in writing at Tender stage, but if the choice is not clarified until the contract stage, the more expensive choice will
be deemed to have been included in your Tender price.
The Tender drawings may be amended as a consequence of variations during the Tender period and reissued as
contract issue information.
Do not use Tender or contract drawings as installation / working drawings.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Treat all Tender documentation as confidential and return to the Contract Administrator if you are not successful.
400 SITE DOCUMENTATION

Notwithstanding the requirements of the main contract preliminaries, you shall also allow in your Tender for, and
provide in a maintained indexed library on site, the following:
- Relevant copies of all technical equipment schedules 'as delivered to site'.

- Relevant technical literature on every type of equipment or component used within the installation.
- Copies of all relevant information. (technical queries, relevant instructions, current installation / working
drawings, current programme).
- Copies of all signed daywork sheets.
All of the above are to be accessible to the Contract Administrator or his representative at all times that the site is
open.
All of the above shall be kept up to date and in good order; it is not for your use and must be maintained
complete.
500 CONFIDENTIALITY
Do not give any information relating to the works to the press or other media without the written permission of
the Contract Administrator or Employer.
600 PHOTOGRAPHS
Refer to Main Contract Preliminaries.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A32 MANAGEMENT OF THE WORKS
100 CO-OPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES

Co-operate with the Contractor, other subcontractors, suppliers, local authorities and statutory undertaking in the
execution of works. Through and as directed by the main contractor, co-operate with and provide information to
other trades.
Take particular care to co-operate with other trades in setting out the Works where buried underground or
installed in common ducts, subways, services shafts, trenches, ceiling voids, floor voids or any such areas which
are to accommodate several building engineering systems.
Inspect each area of the site in good time to ensure it is in a suitable state, before commencing work in it, and
also to ensure that any previous work carried out by others does not affect the quality of any work to be carried
out by you.
200 SETTING OUT OF THE WORKS

Accurately set out the Works and keep them correct in accordance with the final installation drawings, as
amended by any Contract Administrator’s instructions issued.
Take all necessary site measurements to ensure the Works are built in accordance with the installation drawings.
Take responsibility for the accuracy of such dimensions and of drawings made therefrom. Where services are to
be installed adjacent to or near to other services take responsibility for the setting out of the new services and, if
necessary, check the setting out of work by others that affects your own. Co-operate with all other trades such
that all such work is completed within the programme.
Rectify all errors arising from the inaccurate setting out or lack of site co-ordination of services at no additional
cost.
300 SITE CLEANLINESS

It is the responsibility of all operatives to maintain site cleanliness. Provide and enforce all site cleaning
procedures fully in accordance with the Contract Administrator's requirements.
You are to leave the site in a clean condition making good any damage to any parts of the site where you have
caused this.
Prior to any air conditioning or ventilation system being started ensure that all of the following are 'signed-off' by
the Contract Administrator, as being complete:
- The temporary protection of the air inlet(s) where site conditions require;
- The cleaning of ducting including builder’s work ducts;
- The dust-sealing of all structural and architectural components and surfaces within the airstream, including
floor voids and voids above false ceilings;
- The cleaning of rooms and spaces served by the system.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
400 PROGRAMME AND ORDERING REPORTING

Refer to the Main Contract Preliminaries for the site wide programme of works.
No undertaking is given that the Works will necessarily be able to proceed continuously. No claim will be allowed
for discontinuity of work due to the necessity to conform to the contract programme.
Make due allowance in the programme(s) of the Works for the following as a minimum:
- Ordering and installation periods;

- The completion of drawings and transmittals, etc. and the minimum of 10 working days for comment;
- Work resulting from instructions issued in respect of the expenditure of Provisional Sums;
- Concurrent work by other trades.
- Any temporary works necessary for the completion of the building engineering systems installations.
- Pre-commissioning, commissioning and performance testing of the building engineering services installations.
- Preparation and provision of record drawings and operating and maintenance instruction manuals.
- Period for employer training and instruction.
Provide a separate and detailed commissioning programme for agreement with the Contract Administrator.
Make due allowance for the following:
- Commissioning, demonstration and instruction procedures;

- Provision of a written notice before each (or each series of) test, inspection, commissioning or demonstration
procedure is implemented;
- Demonstration to the Contract Administrator that test instruments and equipment are accurate.
500 INSPECTION OF THE WORKS
510 INSTALLERS “SNAGGING”

You are responsible for ensuring that your own work (and that of any sub-contractors) is carried out in
accordance with the specification and drawings and to a high standard of workmanship. Prior to offering any part
of the Works to the Contract Administrator for inspection, carry out a full, independent inspection or “snag” of the
Works and rectify any defects discovered. The Contract Administrator will then carry out his own inspection and
produce a schedule of defects. Prior to offering the Works to the Contract Administrator for re-inspection, provide
a written response to each individual item on the Contract Administrator’s defects schedule stating what has been
done to rectify it. Global responses such as “all defects have been rectified” will not be acceptable and will not
allow the Contract Administrator’s re-inspection to take place. If defects stated by you to have been rectified are
found not to have been, you will be liable to reimburse the Employer for the Contract Administrator’s abortive
time to carry out the inspection.
520 INSPECTION BEFORE CONCEALMENT

Whenever work requiring inspection or testing is subsequently to be concealed, provide due notice to the
Contract Administrator so that inspection may be made or tests witnessed before concealment.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Failure to give due notice, of at least 48 hours, could result in you being responsible for the expense of the work
of uncovering, and subsequently reinstating the concealment.
The Contract Administrator reserves the right to forego his inspection; this does not relieve you from
responsibility for giving due notice.
Where the Contract Administrator believes that the installation may be defective you shall, at your own expense,
uncover a specific area selected by the Contract Administrator for inspection. This shall be restricted to 1 linear
metre or 1m², depending on the nature of the work, for each area of concealment.
Reinstatement of the concealment shall be at your expense. Where works are proven defective by such
uncovering, the entire installation shall be uncovered, brought into compliance with the specification by you, and
subsequently reconcealed, all at your expense.
600 ACCESS FOR PLANT INSTALLATION & SUBSEQUENT REMOVAL

Check on site and with the drawings if plant such as boiler(s), tank(s), cylinder(s), calorifier(s), pressure
vessel(s), switchgear, transformer(s), chiller(s) and all other large plant, has to be ordered before the building
work is at a suitable point to enable the dimensions of all doorways, etc, serving as access to be site checked.
This is to ensure that every item can be admitted to its allotted position and installed in such a way, together with
all other services, that it can be replaced with similar equipment at some future date.
Demonstrate, if requested by the Contract Administrator, that plant and equipment can be removed for
replacement or maintenance purposes, and subsequently re-install it using the same materials, except that
jointing materials (e.g. gaskets) must be renewed. If the installation arrangements preclude equipment removal,
modify the arrangement accordingly. Equipment that cannot be readily maintained in position is not acceptable,
unless specifically agreed in a particular case, in writing by the Contract Administrator, that maintenance after
removal is acceptable.
Review the provision of builder’s work shown on the Tender drawings and highlight any additional requirements
needed to ensure that access for plant installation and subsequent removal is adequate, and do so to suit the
construction programme.
700 EASE OF MAINTENANCE

In selecting equipment and preparing installation drawings, access for maintenance and removal of equipment is
to be considered at all times. Ensure that there is adequate space provided for maintenance and to allow all
serviceable components to be replaced without disturbance to the surrounding installations.
Include, whether or not specifically indicated in the specification, on the drawings or in the equipment schedules,
for all component parts and other items necessary to facilitate proper maintenance of plant and equipment,
including, but not limited to, the following: cleaning and access ports on pressure vessels and heat exchangers;
easy access to oiling and greasing points; low level drain plugs and / or cocks in all vessels or plant or pipework
containing fluids or gases.
Ensure that all pipework in ducts and ceiling voids is fully accessible for repair, replacement and routine servicing
and includes flanged and valved sections to permit easy removal of all pipework. Ensure all conduit, trunking and
pipework etc. for future use is installed with draw wires to allow the installation of additional circuits without the
removal of fixed sections of walls, ceilings etc.
Where pipes cross access routes at low level install purpose made step-overs to provide safe access.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that ease of subsequent removal is achieved for all electric motors, thermostats, heat exchanger batteries,
and of any other item to which it may be reasonably anticipated that maintenance would apply.
Select similar items of apparatus and equipment to be made and provided by the same manufacturer where
practicable such that corresponding parts of all apparatus and equipment are interchangeable to reduce the need
for different attention and spares.
800 COMMISSIONING AND TESTING
810 SPECIALIST COMMISSIONING ENGINEER

Directly employ a specialist company to undertake commissioning of the mechanical and electrical engineering
systems.
Ensure that the specialist company undertakes a review of the installation drawings and include any additional
components deemed by the specialist to be required to ensure all systems are fully commissionable.
The specialist commissioning company shall be approved by the contract administrator.
These clauses relate to commissioning of the mechanical engineering systems. The commissioning of other
engineering systems, or items of plant, may be undertaken by the installer or the manufacturer but
commissioning of interfaces between systems is to be witnessed by all parties concerned and proven to operate
to the satisfaction of all parties concerned.
820 GENERAL
Give the Contract Administrator sufficient notice in writing when your Works, or parts thereof, are ready for
testing and commissioning. Carry out the tests and issue the results to the Contract Administrator. After
successful completion of all commissioning, carry out specific demonstrations as requested by the Contract
Administrator to prove that all test results accord with the specification. Agree the dates and times of such
demonstrations with the Contract Administrator. The contract administrator shall require an agreed notice to
attend such demonstrations.
The extent and proportion of results to be witnessed by the Contract Administrator will be at the discretion of the
Contract Administrator.
Make provision for all independent inspections / insurance company approvals etc. of components or parts of the
installation, where required by legislation.
Establish procedures with all parties to allow demonstration of normal, emergency, shutdown and standby mode
operation of plant and systems.
If the initial tests fail to demonstrate that the plant and equipment are properly installed and functioning
correctly, investigate the cause of the failure. If this is due to incorrect or faulty work by you, or your subtraders
or suppliers, then without delay, carry out such remedial measures and adjustments as may be necessary and
repeat the commissioning and testing procedure to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.
Where it is not possible at the particular time of commissioning and testing for full load conditions to be obtained
or simulated, repeat such operations of full load or simulation thereof at a time when this can be achieved. Use
artificial loads, where appropriate, for the purpose of simulating internal and external sensible and latent heat
gains. It is unlikely that demonstration will be possible of both summer and winter conditions before building

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
handover. Therefore, allow for making a re-visit to the site after the building is completed to carry out
outstanding seasonal environmental tests.
Where portions of the Works are commissioned and tested separately, upon Completion or Completion of Section,
as defined in the Main Contract Preliminaries, demonstrate to the Contract Administrator that all the separate
sections are capable of proper simultaneous operation.
In cases where the construction programme is such that you will need to return to a portion of the building
previously handed over and currently occupied by the Employer in order to undertake testing, balancing,
adjustment, etc., take all necessary precautions against, and be responsible for repairing, any damage caused
whilst working in such areas for that purpose (unless such damage is proven to be outside your control).
Provide all necessary skilled and unskilled labour and all necessary instruments and testing equipment for the
purposes of commissioning and testing of the installation. Produce up to date calibration certificates for all testing
equipment on request.
Subsequent to the completion of all testing and commissioning to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator,
operate the plant and demonstrate that the system(s) function correctly in accordance with the requirements of
the specification. Allow a period of at least fourteen days full running and operation for this demonstration. Take
responsibility throughout this period for the operation and maintenance of the system(s).
830 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

In addition to the general requirements of the individual building engineering systems specifications, your
attention is brought to the following aspects all as detailed elsewhere (refer to particular specification for details):
- Electrical switchgear – testing at works

- Electrical switchgear - temporary heating for protection
- UPS system - testing at works / on-site load testing
- Diesel generator(s) - testing at works / on-site load testing
- Packaged substation - testing at works
- Transformers – testing at works
- Chilled water storage vessels - testing at works, on-site re-commissioning
- Chillers – testing at works
- AHU’s – testing at works
- BMS’s and control panels - testing at works.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A33 QUALITY STANDARDS / CONTROL
100 QUALITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

Refer to the Main Contract documents. Quality and Standards applies to the whole of the Works, including this
Subcontract. Comply with the requirements stated therein insofar as they relate or apply to the Subcontract
Works, and co-operate with and assist the Main Contractor in complying with them generally.
200 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

Refer to the Main Contract documents.
300 HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

Refer to the Main Contract documents.
400 DIMENSIONS
Where installations are dependent upon site dimensions ensure that these are available before proceeding with
the Works.
Do not take dimensions by scaling from the drawings.
Where dimensions are indicated on drawings check these on sire, as appropriate, to ensure building construction
and manufacturing tolerances can be accommodated.
Do not order or manufacture equipment using dimensions indicated on the Tender drawings, specification or
schedules.
500 EQUIPMENT AND PLANT PERFORMANCE GUARANTEES

Where equipment and plant performance data and duties are identified in the specification, thoroughly check that
the equipment offered by the manufacturer complies in every respect with the detailed materials and
performance specification given. Obtain and submit for comment a written undertaking from the selected
manufacturer that:
- The equipment has the BS EN, or can it be proved to be of an equivalent quality/ standard;
- All aspects of the stated specification are achieved;
- The equipment is ‘CE’ marked or that it does not legally require a ‘CE’ mark.
600 TECHNICAL METHOD STATEMENTS

In advance of any Works being carried out on site, submit for comment by the Contract Administrator a technical
method statement for the following aspects of the installation:
- T Q (Technical Query) procedures.

- Quality control and samples procedure.
- Installer liaison procedures.
- The minimisation and management of waste materials.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Installation drawings production.

- Underground services coordination and installation
- Ductwork installation.
- Ductwork cleaning.
- Ductwork pressure testing.
- Pipework installation.
- Pipework flushing, cleaning and pressure testing.
- Painting, thermal insulation and cladding.
- Switchgear installation.
- Sprinkler installation
- Cabling and busbar installation.
- Automatic control system installation.
- Installation of large plant items (including offloading and positioning).
- Plant room installation.
- Ceiling void installation.
- Floor void installation.
- Removal of existing building engineering systems.
- Connection to existing building engineering systems.
- Temporary works.
- Maintaining operation of existing building engineering systems.
- Commissioning and testing.
- Operating and maintenance instruction manuals.
- Record Drawings.
- All other method statements called for under the project Health and Safety plan, or otherwise required to
satisfy Health and Safety criteria.
700 SUITABILITY OF MATERIALS

Supply materials and components to suit the climatic conditions and other conditions of use to which the
materials and components will be exposed during the installation process and after it is completed, and to
withstand any test specified herein or in any document referred to herein.
Use materials and products that are:
- New unless specified otherwise.

- Suitable for the services and conditions of use normally expected to apply after the installation is complete.
- Able to withstand the testing and commissioning conditions specified.
- Unable to initiate mould growth, support vermin, contain animal hair, or support bacterial life.
- Free from the use of CFC’s at any stage of manufacture, installation or subsequent operation except where
specified.
- Resistant to corrosion, oxidation, distortion, rot, etc.,

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Resistant to attack from insects, animals and birds.

- Free from objectionable odours at the maximum or normal working conditions of operation.
- Prevented from suffering deterioration at the maximum or normal working conditions of operation.
- Capable of being applied to a base surface without causing damage or deterioration of the base.
- Not a fire hazard and that do not produce dense or toxic fumes when subjected to excessive heat, such as
fire.
- Approved under the Water Regulations Advisory Scheme, as applicable.
- Not in themselves deleterious nor can become deleterious when properly maintained and used in the intended
circumstances of the building(s) of this project. Refer to clause 900.
710 DELETERIOUS MATERIALS

Do not use any materials and / or procedures deleterious to health or safety in the works.
720 PROHIBITED MATERIALS LIST

The following list of materials or procedures should not be used in the installation:
- Asbestos or asbestos-containing product, as defined in the United Kingdom’s ‘The Control of

- Asbestos Regulations 2006’ or any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof.
- Lead where the metal or its corrosive products may be directly ingested, inhaled or absorbed.
- Applications of lead such as roofing, flashings, rainwater goods and copper alloy fittings containing lead which
are specifically required are acceptable, until equal or better alternatives are available.
- Lead based paints and primer.
- Urea formaldehyde foam or materials which may release formaldehyde beyond British Standard Limits.
- Pitch Polymer DPC.
- Materials which generally comprise mineral fibres, either man-made or naturally occurring, which have a
diameter of 3 microns or less and a length of 200 microns or less, or which contain any fibres not sealed,
encapsulated, or otherwise stabilised to ensure that fibre migration is prevented. Test evidence must be
available and produced confirming that the materials fulfil the requirements of European Directive 97/69/EC
and the approved supply list of current HSE CHIP regulations and consequently are not classified as a possible
human carcinogen.
- Chlorofluorocarbons or hydrochlorofluorocarbons or any goods and / or materials containing the same (e.g.
materials in which CFCs, HCFCs or HFAs have been used as blowing agents).
- The use of a species pf hardwood from the tropical rainforests is not permitted unless it is obtained from
sustainable resources.
- Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), polychlorinated terphenyls (PCTs) or any goods and /or materials containing
the same.
- Chrysotile Amosite Crocodilite.
- Cemfil
- Spray applied fire protection / insulation of any kind.
- Vermiculite containing fibrous dust.
- Polyurethane foam and polyisocyanurate foam (where these fail to meet LPCB – LPS 1181).

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- PTFE fabrics – except where the use of PTFE is as a jointing tape in plumbing applications and on specialist
applications such as valve seats, bearing material or sealing rings in premanufactured items of plant and
equipment.
- Lindane – wood treatment / insecticidal spray.
- Pentachlorophenol (PCP) or timber treated with Pentachlorophenol – biocide / wood preservative.
- Tributyltin (TBT)
- CCA (Chromated copper arsenate) preservatives where there is likelihood of continuous skin contact, or for
any domestic / residential situations. Refer to EC directive 2003/02/EC.
- Materials generally accepted within the construction industry as being deleterious in themselves, or in the
particular situation or in combination with other materials known to be used, or known to become deleterious
with the passage of time, or being damaged by or causing damage to the structure in which they are to be
incorporated or to which they are affixed, or pose a hazard to health and safety, or pose a threat to the
structural stability or performance or the physical integrity of the Works of any part or component, or would
have the effect of significantly reducing the normal life expectancy of the Works or part thereof.
800 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

Use the best materials and workmanship of their respective kinds in accordance with the specification.
Ensure that all materials (unless otherwise stated) conform to the statutory requirements detailed herein.
References to recognised standards of materials and workmanship, i.e. British Regulations, Standards,
Codes of Practice, BRE Recommendations, DIN Standard, ISO Standards, etc., relevant to the design, installation
or performance of the works, represent the minimum standard to be complied with. Construct the installation
from entirely new materials and equipment. Transport, unload, stack, store, and fix / install / apply all materials
in full accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, including all safety precautions and any ancillary or associated
components (e.g. warning label, electromagnetic screen, electrical isolator, fuse, pressure relief valve, isolating
valve, strainer, air vent, drain valve) that such installation instructions require or recommend.
Only use alternatives to what is specified upon receipt of written instructions from the Contract Administrator.
Where materials and components are not specifically described, use the best of their kind and, if required, submit
samples or drawings of such materials or components to the Contract Administrator for comment.
Use competent and experienced operatives, appropriate to the work to be carried out. Ensure that standards of
workmanship are supervised by a competent person. You are responsible for ensuring your own inspection of the
installation is carried out by a competent person prior to offering it to the Contract Administrator for inspection.
Make available for inspection by the Contract Administrator when required copies of orders to suppliers.
Immediately remove and replace all materials considered by the Contract Administrator to be unsound, faulty or
installed imperfectly or not in accordance with the specification, at no additional cost. Failure to act within a
reasonable period of notice will empower the Contract Administrator to employ other persons for this purpose
and to pay the same out of any monies that may be or shall become due to you.
The Contract Administrator may at all reasonable times inspect any drawings or inspect, examine and test the
material and workmanship of any plant (or portion thereof) contracted for at the premises of the manufacturer or
installer.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Provide all equipment and materials by manufacturers who have available maintenance and servicing capability
within the United Kingdom as appropriate.
Include adequate provision in the design and construction for appropriate fire barriers, building expansion joints
and steelwork supports and fixings, as required and where detailed in the specifications and the architectural
drawings provided in the Tender documents. Make allowance for building movement in the installation of the
engineering systems.
Pack all equipment carefully for transport so that it is protected against all climatic conditions. Take adequate
precautions to prevent mechanical damage to any equipment during transit.
Within one month of appointment provide to the main contractor details of the dimensions and weight of all
heavy and large items to be brought to the site and the dimensions and wheel loadings of the vehicles to be used
in their transport.
For all the equipment supplied under this contract level and adjust it on its foundations prior to grouting. Provide
all shimming and packing required for adjustments. All necessary adjustment for foundation levels and all
bedding and grouting of plant on foundations and cementing into walls and floors will be carried out by others.
Ensure that such work is adequately and properly carried out and that the above levels and adjustments made
are not thereby disturbed.
900 PRESSURE EQUIPMENT DIRECTIVE

Ensure that all pressure equipment and assemblies with a maximum allowable pressure greater than 0.5 bar
comply with the European Community (EU) Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC. Pressure equipment
shall include vessels, piping, safety accessories and pressure accessories. Assemblies shall mean several pieces of
pressure equipment assembled to form an integrated, functional whole.
As a minimum, mark pressure equipment with:
- Unique identification of the manufacturer

- Unique identification of the model and serial number
- The year of manufacture
- Maximum / minimum allowable pressure limits
- CE marking
- Provide a declaration of conformity for all pressure equipment.
Ensure that equipment is:
- Designed for adequate strength taking into account internal / external pressure, ambient and operational
temperatures, static pressure and mass of contents in operating and test conditions, corrosion and erosion,
fatigue, etc.
- Provided with means to ensure safe handling and operation and of examination, draining and venting.
- Provided with protection against exceeding the allowable limits of pressure.
- Where necessary, pressure equipment must be designed and fitted with suitable accessories to meet damage
limitation requirements in the event of external fire.
- Ensure all components or sub-assemblies in their finished assembly are used within their safe operating range
and correctly installed and tested. Ensure that adequate instructions are provided by the manufacturer for the
safe installation, testing and operation.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A34 SECURITY / SAFETY / PROTECTION
100 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT

The Contract Administrator is not obliged to accept anything other than new, totally undamaged, correctly
installed and selected equipment.
Properly protect the installation at all times, as required by the main contract preliminaries. Where appropriate,
(e.g. for some types of electrical installation work, or for some types of materials requiring particular
environmental conditions) ensure that the installation work does not commence until the affected rooms or areas
of the building can be maintained weather tight, without unacceptable risk of water or dust reaching the
installations. If the measures taken by you prove to be inadequate, the Contract Administrator will decide
whether repairs may be affected and suitable recompense made to the Employer, or whether damaged
installations are to be completely replaced.
All costs for repair or replacement remain with you.
110 DELIVER
Provide adequate and safe protection for all materials and products during transport to site. Deliver, with open
ends effectively plugged, capped and sealed for all ducting (where so specified), piping, tubes, conduit, trunking
and associated equipment.
120 HANDLING
Offload and transport about the Works, all materials and products in the manner recommended by their
manufacturers.
130 STORAGE
Store all materials and products in the manner recommended by their manufacturers.
Provide sufficient, safe and secure storage for all materials and products.
Provide properly made racks with adequate supports to prevent distortion for storage of conduits, pipes and
similar materials.
Store all fittings, accessories and sundry items in clean bins or bagged and stowed on racks, and maintained
under suitable weatherproof cover. Where not stored in dry buildings, raise all material off the ground and
protect accordingly.
Ensure that any materials or equipment affected by temperature are stored at a suitable temperature and
humidity for the local environmental conditions.
200 PROTECTION OF WORKS

Provide adequate and safe protection for all materials and products during and after installation stage to prevent
wilful, accidental or resultant damage to the works.
Ensure all items forming part of the Works, whether in storage, in the course of installation, or installed, are
protected against ingress of water, dust or foreign bodies, formation of condensation, extremes and rapid

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
changes of temperature, direct sunlight, high winds, excessive humidity, building works and operations to other
items. Ensure that all protection is adequate for its purpose, including fire resistance. Maintain, alter, adapt,
replace or repair protective measures as necessary as the Works proceed. Replacement parts or equipment or
making good will not be accepted in lieu of protective measures. Prevent the Works from becoming wet or damp
and dry out the Works accordingly.
Take all reasonable fire precautions in respect of stores, workshops and other installations. Where it is necessary
to use any naked flame or welding equipment in executing the Works and where combustible materials are in
use, give adequate protection to other adjacent materials and personnel. Make suitable fire extinguishers readily
available at the position where such work is proceeding.
Protect throughout erection and after installation, vulnerable or delicate materials or finishes, with hardboard
covers or heavy duty polythene sheet.
Such items include but are not limited to:
- Control panels;
- Switchboards;
- Distribution boards.
Protect the surface finish of all items from damage and paint splashes. Install items such as grilles, diffusers,
luminaires, switches, accessories, etc., as near to completion as practicable.
Install filter media no earlier than when the plant items concerned are being commissioned and tested. Cover all
plant items with polythene sheeting (or plywood if more appropriate) except when being worked upon.
Cap all open ends of ducts, conduits and trunking etc., except when being worked upon.
Leave plant and equipment in a ready-to-paint condition where specified as part of the Works, or where they are
to be painted by others.
Properly clean and paint with corrosion resistant paint at works and again immediately after installation or after
the removal of temporary protection all those parts which are liable to corrosion.
When final finishes are applied at manufacturer’s works, ensure adequate protection is provided up until the point
of installation. Inspect on delivery and do not accept anything that is damaged.
Replace material, plant or equipment where deterioration has occurred prior to handover.
At Practical Completion, remove all protective measures (including removal from site) and clean down and
prepare the Works for hand over.
Ensure all materials used for protection are recyclable.
Allow for inspection of finishes of work to be carried out before covering up or over.
Do not remove protection to the work of others without an instruction and subsequently replace protection so
removed, where required.
300 IDETIFICATION
Provide proposals for providing protective measures as part of the Tender return.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where appropriate, ensure that materials, plant and equipment bear the brand name, serial / batch number and
any other data required to identify their nature in relation to the Works.
400 ROTATING PLANT

Immediately prior to Practical Completion adjust, ease and lubricate moving parts as necessary to ensure easy
and efficient operation.
Ensure that, whenever, to avoid damage or deterioration, it is necessary to operate at regular intervals motive
plant items delivered and / or installed, the necessary temporary electricity and / or fuel supplies are provided.
Ensure that rotating plant is hand-turned periodically throughout periods when such temporary supplies are not
available.
Machine Guards
Properly protect every rotating, reciprocating or moving part of compressors, pumps, fans and other machines
supplied, using the machine manufacturer's standard or purpose made machine guards to comply with the
current issue of the Factories Act. Ensure that all machine guards are manufactured from solid sheet metal or
wire mesh or iron frame, all galvanised after manufacture, and have hinges and / or removable sections to allow
for maintenance and tachometer readings.
500 PROTECTION OF THE EXISTING SITE

Provide everything necessary for the protection of the site, and be responsible for and take all reasonable steps
for protecting, securing, lighting and watching all places on or about the Works or Sites. Leave no steps, ladders
or other plant in circumstances that makes it possible for unauthorised persons to enter the Site, or any building
on the site or any adjoining buildings.
Take all necessary measures to protect the finishes and fabrics of the building as well as all furniture and fittings
that remain in the project area.
Install temporary protection as required to prevent damage by the Works to any elements of the building fabric
including any soiling of carpets, luminaires, finishes, walls, etc, surrounding the Works from whatever cause.
If protection is inadequate, improperly installed or maintained and resultant damage occurs (or damage is caused
by negligent action of site personnel), promptly repair the damage at your own expense and, if instructed by the
Contract Administrator, by use of the appropriate specialist contractor.
Make such repairs at least sufficient to restore the damaged element to its condition immediately prior to the
damage occurring. Where resultant damage is localised and the local repair of it would remain noticeable, then
repair the whole section of Works.
Fully tape at the edges all temporary floor finishes such as “hardboard”, to prevent tripping hazards. Erect
adequate signage warning of all potential trip hazards.
Install adequate temporary signage to warn non-contract staff of the Works and of all wet surfaces arising as a
result of the Works. Failures to sign wet surfaces adequately which result in a claim of damage to personnel, will
result in you compensating the victim at your own expense.
Install protection to prevent damage by the Works to any element external to the Works area (whether on the
site or on adjoining properties), including damage to hardstandings, grassed areas, pavements, roads, etc.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Repair all damage at your own expense so as to return the damaged element to its condition immediately prior to
the damage occurring.
Ascertain and comply with any Police regulations as may affect the Works.
600 CDM REGULATIONS

Comply with the requirements of the CDM Regulatons by:
- adhering to the rules of the Pre-Construction Information and Construction Phase Plan.
- reporting accidents, injuries or dangerous occurrences to the main contractor.
- providing the main contractor with appropriate input to the health and safety plan, including risk assessments,
and to the health and safety file.
- providing the main contractor with information on the subcontract works which might affect the health or
safety of any person.
700 NOISE AND NUISANCE

Ensure that the Works are undertaken with as little noise as possible. Ensure that no nuisance by noisy working is
caused to the occupants of either the premises in which the works are located or of adjacent buildings outside
the site boundary.
Take all necessary precautions to prevent nuisance from smoke, rubbish and other causes.
Fit all compressors, percussion tools and vehicles with effective silencers of a type recommended by the
manufacturers of the equipment.
Ensure all internal combustion engines used in the execution of the Works are fitted with efficient suppressors in
the ignition system in accordance with the recommendations of British Standards so as to prevent electrical
interference to radio or television equipment in the vicinity. Prevent all temporary electrical installations, such as
motors or the like, from creating such interference and fit with suppressor equipment in accordance with British
Standards and to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A37 OPERATION / MAINTENANCE OF THE FINISHED INSTALLATIONS
100 SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS FOR HEALTH AND SAFETY FILE

To satisfy the provisions of the Health and Safety at Work Act the Employer will not accept handover of the
installations until full and adequate information concerning the installations is in the possession of his operating
and maintenance staff.
200 RECORD DOCUMENTS

Ensure that the record documents make it possible to comprehend the extent and purpose of the Works and the
method of operation thereof.
Ensure that the record documents set out the extent to which maintenance and servicing is required and how, in
detail, it should be executed.
Ensure that the record documents provide sufficient, readily accessible and proper information to enable spares
and replacements to be ordered.
Correlate record documents so that the terminology and the references used are consistent with those used in
the physical identification of the component parts of the installations.
Issue Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals and Record Drawings of the final "as installed" layouts in
draft form for comment prior to the testing and commissioning period to allow checking for accuracy.
Revise as necessary the complete set of Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals and draft Record
Drawings to incorporate testing and commissioning data where applicable, and hand over the final set(s) of
Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals and Record Drawings in accordance with the main contract
preliminaries.
Issue at a time in accordance with the main contract preliminaries, the complete agreed package of Operating
and Maintenance Instruction Manuals and Record Drawings.
Issue a further copy of the final version of the O&M Instruction Manual and Record Drawings to the principal
contractor for insertion into the Health & Safety File (CDM) in accordance with the principal contractor’s
programme.
300 RECORD DRAWINGS

Provide Record Drawings of the complete installation on completion or completion of section as defined in the
main contract preliminaries.
Produce all Record Drawings upon common building outlines and structural details agreed by the Contract
Administrator.
Produce all Record Drawings using the agreed format.
Provide the information contained upon the final versions of Record Drawings such that independent 'layers' are
created with selected categories of information on each layer. Agree the content of each ‘layer’ with the Contract
Administrator prior to creation of the drawing files.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Record Drawings should comply with the definitions in BSRIA’s Building Applications Guide BG 6/2009 A Design
Framework for Building Services, Appendix C.
Include the following information on the Record Drawings:
- Location, including level if buried, of utility service connections, including those provided by the appropriate
Authority, indicating points of origin and termination, size and material of service, emergency shut-off
isolation locations, pressure and / or other relevant information.
- Disposition and depth of all underground systems.
- Schematic drawings of each system indicating principal items of plant, equipment, zoning, means of isolation,
etc. in sufficient detail to make it possible to comprehend the system operation and the inter-connections
between various systems.
- Details of the principles of application of automatic controls and instrumentation.
- Diagrammatic dimensioned plans and sections of each system or service showing sizes and locations of all
ancillaries, plant, equipment controls, test points, and means of isolation etc.
- Including any items forming an integral part of the engineering systems provided by others (such as plenum
ceilings, builder’s work shafts, chimneys etc.). Identification of all terminals / cables etc. by size / type and
duty / rating as recorded from the approved commissioning results.
- Detailed wiring drawings / diagrams / schedules for all systems, including controls, showing origin, route,
cable / conduit size, type, number of conductors, length, termination size and identification, and measured
conductor and earth continuity resistance of each circuit. Ensure routes indicate if cable / conduit is surface
mounted, concealed in wall chase, in floor screed, cast in-situ, above false ceiling etc.
- Details of co-ordination of wiring and connections with cable core identification, notation of fire alarm,
security, control and instrumentation and similar systems provided as part of the Works.
- Details to show inter-connections between the Works and equipment or systems provided by others to which
wiring and connections are carried out as part of the Works.
- Location and identity of each room or space housing plant, machinery or apparatus.
- Dimensioned plans and sections of plant rooms, service subways, trenches, ducts and other congested areas
where in the opinion of the Contract Administrator smaller scale drawings cannot provide an adequate record.
Indicate the location, identity, size and details of each piece of apparatus.
- Ensure that the Record Drawings conform to the following standards:
o All hard copy Record Drawings are on best quality paper, with CAD files provided on CD or DVD.
o All titles, headings, etc. have a height not less than 5mm
o All other lettering is upper case in a height of not less than 3mm.
o Every Record Drawing shall show the following information:
Employer's name
Name of contract and, where appropriate, the zone or floor designation
Description of drawing, it’s number and scale
Name and address of originator
Your signature that the completed Record Drawing is a true record
- Note that in the event of non-compliance with this Clause, the Contract Administrator reserves the right to
have the Record Drawings prepared by others and to deduct the cost of preparing them from monies

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
otherwise due to you. The sum deducted will be the actual cost and may be greater than any sum declared by
you.
400 GENERAL
- Issue of Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals is a pre-requisite of practical completion of the
Works and the Certificate will not be issued until the Contract Administrator has been satisfied that the
manuals have been produced in accordance with this specification.
- Produce all manuals using an agreed word processing package. (Tender to allow for Word for Window latest
release).
- For every major plant item submit to the Contract Administrator with the draft version of the Operation and
Maintenance Instruction Manual, written confirmation from every manufacturer of a list of documents that the
manufacturer considers must be held on site for the proper operation and maintenance of the plant supplied.
- The Contract Administrator will use these written confirmations when determining whether or not the
Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual is complete.
- The major plant to which this requirement applies includes, but is not limited to, the following:
o Foul and surface water pumping stations, effluent treatment plant, waste compactors and macerators,
incinerators, water treatment plant, air compressors, gas boosters, vacuum pumps, steam generators,
gas and foam fire-fighting equipment, boilers, chimneys, heat pumps, heat recovery equipment, chillers,
cooling towers, air conditioning units, cold rooms, air handling units, fume cupboards and safety
cabinets, gas scrubbers, dust collection equipment, HV switchgear, electricity generators, lighting
controllers, UPS equipment, communication system equipment, CCTV and security equipment, projection
equipment, fire detection and alarm equipment, earthing equipment, lightning protection systems,
automatic control and BMS equipment.
410 MANUAL PRESENTATION

- The manual shall conform to the following minimum standards: -
- Multi-ring PVC bound stiff binder able to withstand constant usage, or where a thicker type of binder is
required it shall have steel locking pins.
- Print on the cover the following information: -
- "Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual" (Project Name and System).
- Where more than one volume is required, the cover shall also be printed with volume number.
- Provide each section of the manual with a stiff full-page divider. Label the divider as to the section of the
manual. Do not obscure the labels with the manual's content, i.e. where a drawing or other information is
incorporated using a transparent plastic pocket the label/ tab must be visible.
- Typewrite all written instructions within the manual with a margin on the left hand side.
420 MANUAL FORMAT AND CONTENTS

- Ensure that the general contents and format of the manual are in accordance with BS 4884 Technical manuals
and BSRIA BG1/2007 Handover, O&M Manuals and Project Feedback Electronic Forms. As a minimum ensure
that the following are included:
- A full description of each of the systems installed, written to ensure that the Employer’s staff fully understand
the scope and facilities provided.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- A description of the mode of operation of all systems including services capacity and restrictions.
- Diagrammatic drawings of each system indicating principal items of plant, equipment, valves etc.
- A set of drawings of the installation upon which is recorded all plant settings, water flow-rates, pump heads
and noise level readings as adjusted and measured during the testing and commissioning period. Protection
and overload relay settings shall be recorded and calibration charts shall be incorporated.
- Legend of all colour-coded services.
- Schedules (system by system) of plant, equipment, valves, etc. stating their locations, duties and performance
figures. Each item must have a unique number cross-referenced to the record and diagrammatic drawings
and schedules.
- An asset register of all plant and equipment supplied under the contract, in a format agreed with the
Employer or Facilities Manager.
- The name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer of every item of plant and equipment together
with catalogue list numbers.
- Manufacturers’ technical literature for all items of plant and equipment, assembled specifically for the project,
excluding irrelevant matter and including detailed drawings, electrical circuit details and operating and
maintenance instructions.
- A copy of all test certificates, inspection and test records, commissioning and performance test records
including, but not limited to, electrical circuit tests, corrosion tests, type tests, start and commissioning tests,
for the installations and plant, equipment, valves, etc., used in the installation.
- A copy of all manufacturers’ guarantees or warranties, together with maintenance agreements offered by
subcontractors and manufacturers.
- Copies of insurance and inspecting authority certificates and reports.
- Starting up, operating and shutting down instructions for all equipment and systems installed.
- Control sequences for all systems installed.
- Schedules of all fixed and variable equipment settings established during commissioning.
- Procedures for seasonal change-overs and / or precautions necessary for the care of apparatus subject to
seasonal disuse.
- Detailed recommendations for the preventative maintenance frequency and procedures which should be
adopted by the employer to ensure the most efficient operation of the systems.
- Details of lubrication for lubricated items including schedules of lubricant type, frequency, etc.
- Details of regular tests to be carried out (e.g. water analysis for pseudomonas).
- Details of procedures to maintain plant in safe working conditions.
- Details of the disposal requirements for all items in the Works.
- A list of normal consumable items.
- A list of recommended spares to be kept in stock by the Employer, being those items subject to wear or
deterioration and which may involve the Employer in extended delivery periods when replacements are
required at some future date.
- A list of special tools needed for maintenance cross-referenced to the particular item for which each tool is
required.
- Procedures for fault-finding in diagrammatic and tabular form to show the action necessary to correctly
identify defective pieces of equipment and the steps to be taken to rectify faults.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Emergency procedures, including telephone numbers for emergency services.

- Documentation of the procedures for updating and / or modifying software operating systems and control
programs.
- Instructions for the creation of control procedure routines and graphic diagrams.
- Details of the software revision for all programs provided.
- Two back-up copies of all software items, as commissioned.
- Contractual and legal information including, but not limited to: details of local and public authority consents;
details of design team, consultants, installation contractors and associated subcontractors; start date for
installation, date of practical completion and expiry date for the defect liability period; details of warranties for
plant and systems including expiry dates, addresses and telephone numbers.
- Performance guarantees (as detailed in clause A33, 2000). A Schedule of Energy Technology Products that
lists all items of plant, equipment and components incorporated in the Works that are on the UK
Government’s ‘Energy Technology Product List’ for Enhanced Capital Allowances purposes under the UK
Government’s Climate Change package of measures. A Schedule of Water Technology Products that lists all
items of plant, equipment and components incorporated in the Works that are on the UK Government’s ‘Water
Technology List’ for Enhanced Capital Allowances purposes, that encourages sustainable water use.
- Health & Safety (CDM) relevant information (e.g. safety measures in maintenance, COSHH substances,
disposal instructions, risk assessments, etc.), written schemes of examination for pressure systems, written
schemes of examination and tests for systems at risk of causing Legionellosis.
430 ELECTRONIC O&M MANUALS

Electronic copies of the O&M’s shall be provided as set out within the Main Contract documents.
440 STANDARDS
Notwithstanding the above, provide O&M manuals, system records and full documentation in accordance with the
following standards, as applicable to the project:
- For intruder alarm systems:

o BS 4737 Intruder alarm systems in buildings
o BS EN 50131 Alarm systems. Intrusion and hold-up systems- Part 1: System requirements
- For fire detection and alarm systems:
o BS 5839 Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings
- For telecommunications equipment and telecommunications cabling:
o BS 6701 Telecommunications equipment and telecommunications cabling. Specification for installation,
operation and maintenance
- For electrical installations generally:
o BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations. IEE Wiring Regulations. Seventeenth edition
- For heating systems:
o BS EN 12170 Heating systems in buildings. Procedure for the preparation of documents for operation,
maintenance and use. Heating systems requiring a trained operator.
o BS EN 12171 Heating systems in buildings. Procedure for the preparation of documents for operation,
maintenance and use. Heating systems not requiring a trained operator

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- For lightning protection systems:

o BS EN 62305 Protection against lightning.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A40 MANAGEMENT AND STAFF
100 INSTALLER’S STAFF

Designate a senior member of your office staff to be your representative.
Ensure that this person is an experienced engineer-designer and is competent and duly authorised to:
- co-ordinate the work in your office between your office and the site, and between the suppliers and you, and
liaise with the main contractor and / or architect / engineer and other parties, and attend progress meetings,
and generally represent you on all aspects related to your contract and interfaces with all other Installers.
Your representative is responsible for, inter alia:
- Ensuring that all installation and builders work drawings produced take proper account of all the other works,
the building structure and the architectural finishes.
- Checking drawings in detail to ensure that the Works can be installed without spatial conflict.
- Ensuring that your work is planned, set out and installed in such a way that the installation is co-ordinated
with the structure and other services.
- Co-ordination of your sub-contractors and suppliers so that their work is executed with due regard to each
other and in such a manner that satisfactory construction and performance of the Works results.
- Ensuring that there is adequate exchange of information with and between you and the main contractor
concerning the exact location and size of components, fixings, openings and the like.
- Obtaining from each of your sub-contractors, drawings and other information identifying their builder’s work
requirements. Checking that these do not conflict with those of others or with those pre-arranged in the
Tender documents.
- Being a focal point for design queries. Vetting all such queries and checking that answers are not contained in
the Tender or contract documents and drawings. Providing the answers and returning queries in all such
cases.
- Ensuring that you provide the necessary drawings and design information to enable the
- Works to be completed correctly to meet the specified performance and installation standard.
- Ensuring that you provide in good time and to an agreed standard, the drawings, calculations and other
information required of you.
- Checking all drawings and other information provided by you before submitting them to the
- Contract Administrator.
- Ensuring that all information and details required are submitted in good time and in accordance with the main
contract programme.
- Ensuring that all materials and plant supplied are appropriately delivered and that site conditions are suitable
for their storage and installation.
- Ensuring that your Works are adequately protected.
- Ensuring that your Works are adequately supervised.
- Ensuring that your plans, programmes, monitors and co-ordinates the work of his testing engineer.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- In the event that any of your site staff are, in the opinion of the main contractor and / or architect / engineer,
unsatisfactory, arranging the immediate removal from the site of the said staff, provided that such opinion is
not unreasonable.
All directions or instructions given by the main contractor or Contract Administrator to your representative are
deemed to have been given to you.
Throughout the duration of the Works, maintain an adequate drawing office with staff, to enable the timely
preparation of all drawings required for your Works.
Maintain on the site of the Works an experienced engineer and site staff for carrying out your Works.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
2 PART 2 – PARTICULARS

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
R11 FOUL DRAINAGE ABOVE GROUND
100 PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES

Provide all foul drainage above ground pipework to serve the new sanitary appliances and other drainage outlets
throughout the building down to ground floor level, for connection to the below ground drainage systems.
Base the above ground foul drainage design on System I as defined in BS EN 12056-2 and using the demand
based on the fixture unit method from the International Plumbing Code (IPC), with a minimum self cleansing
velocity of 0.75m/s.
Install the foul drainage installation to meet the performance objectives stated in BS EN 12056, the Building
Regulations and all other technical manuals and guides applicable, including, but not restricted to, the documents
shown in clause 200 below.
Install the system using the minimum pipework and fittings necessary to carry away all foul discharges from the
building to the below ground drainage system, quickly, quietly and with freedom from nuisance or risk of injury to
health. Prevent air from the discharge pipes from entering the building. Clearly identify all pipelines in accordance
with BS 1710.
Install all drainage pipework to convey discharges without cross-flow, back-fall, leakage or blockage. Adequately
test, clean and maintain the system at all times throughout the construction process.
200 DESIGN PARAMETERS

Wherever reference is made to a British Standard (BS) an equivalent European Standard, which is recognised by
the British Standard Institution, would also apply (see latest BSI Standard Catalogue etc.) Each product and each
material selected by the Installer shall comply fully with the latest issue of either the BS or the equivalent
European Standard.
Listed below are the British Standards, Codes and Guides relevant to this section of the Specification: The
Building Regulations
Oman Regulations and Safety Standards
The Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations
- BS 416 - Discharge and ventilating pipes and fittings, sand-cast or spun in cast iron BS 476 - Fire tests on
building materials and structures
- BS 1710 - Specification for identification of pipelines and services BS 4118 - Glossary of sanitation terms
- BS 6100 - Building and civil engineering. Vocabulary
- BS 6465 - Sanitary installations
- BS 7671 - Requirements for electrical installations. IET Wiring Regulations. Seventeenth edition
- BS EN 598 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for sewerage applications.
- Requirements and test methods
- BS EN 752 - Drain and sewer systems outside buildings
- BS EN 1057 - Copper and copper alloys. Seamless, round copper tubes for water and gas in sanitary and
heating applications

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 1519 - Plastics piping systems for soil and waste discharge (low and high temperature) within the
building structure. Polyethylene (PE). Specifications for pipes, fittings and the system
- BS EN 12056 - Gravity drainage systems inside buildings
- BBA - British Board of Agrément Certificate as appropriate. CIBSE Guide G - Public health engineering
- IOP - Institute of Plumbing & Heating Engineers Design Guide
If any areas with respect to buildings designed will be identified as being potentially hazardous zones, they shall
be considered for compliance in line with all necessary criteria for an Explosives Building.
Explosive Atmospheres Directive (ATEX)
- ATEX Classifications:
o Zone 0: An atmosphere where a mixture of air and flammable substances in the form of gas, vapour or
mist is present frequently, continuously or for long periods.
mist is likely to occur in normal operation occasionally.
mist is not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for only a short period.
o Zone 21: A place in which an explosive atmosphere in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air is
likely to occur in normal operation occasionally.
o Zone 22: A place in which an explosive atmosphere in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air is
not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for a short period only.
300 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

All above ground pipework to be in high density polyethylene (HDPE)
Base the design of the foul drainage above ground system on the primary ventilated stack principles as defined in
BS EN 12056-2 with additional relief ventilation pipework provided as necessary. Convey all effluent from various
sanitary appliances, drainage outlets, etc. by gravity to the connection to the underground drainage systems at
ground floor level.
Install main ventilating pipework to suit the design of both the above and below ground drainage systems as
necessary, terminating to atmosphere at roof level.
Provide adequate drainage facilities for the mechanical services equipment and plant. Discharge all drainage from
plant rooms and mechanical equipment into trapped floor gullies, connected to the foul drainage above ground
system.
Do not use short radius bends in the foul drainage above ground system.
Make all branches to horizontal discharge pipework at high level any floor using 45° branches swept in the
direction of flow where possible.
Install all discharge pipework to gradients strictly in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 12056, as a
minimum.
Install access doors or caps on sanitary pipework to facilitate rodding and maintenance access to installed
pipework. Co-ordinate access through Architectural casings with pipe accessories.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Provide access doors to all main discharge pipes in accordance with the Building Regulations and BS EN 12056,
as follows:
Vertically
1. at lowest floor level, at topmost floor level and every 3rd level, as a minimum, located at floor level plus
1200mm at each installed position, to the centreline of the access fitting;
2. on stub stack connections at floor level plus 1200mm to the centreline of the access fitting or above the
fittings spill-over level
3. as required to facilitate access for testing
4. on vertical pipework above and below any offset
Horizontally
5. all changes in direction

6. on all horizontal floats
Ensure all traps to appliances have deep seals in compliance with BS EN 12056 and the Building Regulations.
Where ventilating pipework is necessary to suit either the below or the above ground drainage systems,
terminate through the roof to meet architectural and technical requirements.
Design all discharge and ventilation pipework installation within designated service ducts or integrated ceiling
voids. Co-ordinate removable access panels with the drainage access points to enable maintenance to discharge
pipework. Where pipework is designed to be exposed, install to a high standard, true to line, with adequate
support fixings.
Test all discharge and ventilation pipework at various stages and on completion of the installation to ensure
compliance with the requirements of the Building Regulations and BS EN 12056.
345 HDPE PIPEWORK

For internal soil and vent pipes, available in metric sizes 40mm – 315mm; HDPE should be installed in accordance
with BS EN 12056 Part 2 – ‘Gravity Drainage System Inside Buildings”, and covered by BBA Certificate No.
92/2796.
Recommended applications are soil and waste, siphonic and gravity rainwater and chemical drainage.
All pipe are manufactured from High Density Polyethylene(HDPE), black in colour, with a minimum of 2% carbon
black to prevent UV degradation.
Pipes are tempered to reduce the risk of shortening (reversion) from high temperature discharges. The pipe is
manufactured to EN 1519.
Pipe fittings are available in metric sizes 32mm-315mm. HDPE should be installed in accordance with BS EN
12056 Part 2 –“Gravity Drainage System Inside Building’, and covered by BBA Certificate No. 92/2796. The
fittings are manufactured to EN 1519.
Physical Characteristics:
Characteristic Unit Test Method Test Specimen

Density g/cm³ DIN 53479 Plate 0.953...0.955

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Reduced specific Viscosity (viscosity

cm³/g ISO/R 1191 0,1% solution in decalin 3.0
coefficient)
Melt flow index MFI 190/5 g/10min DIN 53735 Granulate 0.4...0.7
Mechanical Characteristics:
Measured under standard climatic conditions of 23°C 50% relative air humidity

Tensile strength N/mm² DIN 53455.ISO R 527 Test specimen 3 with 22
Test velocity: 125 measurements
Elongation at yield % 15
mm/min
stress
Ultimate tensile N/mm² In the ratio 32
stranght
Elongation at break % >800
Limit bending strenght N/mm² DIN 53452 Standard small bar 28
injenction moulded
Torsion rigidity N/mm² DIN 53447 60mm x 6.35mm x 240
2mm
Bending creep modulus N/mm² Bending creep test ob 3 120mm x 20mm x 6mm 800
1 minute value N/mm²
Indention hardness, 30 N/mm² DIN 53456 Test strength Sheet, 4mm 40
second value 132, 4N
Shore hardness DIN 53505 Sheet, 4mm 60

Impact strenght mJ/mm² DIN 53453 Standard small bar, 15
moulded
Impact strength at mJ/mm² DIN 53453 Standard small bar, 45
+23° C and -40°C moulded
Thermal Characteristics:

Crystallite melting range °C Polarisation microscope Microtome section 127..131
Average linear K-¹ DIN 52328: ASTM D 696 50mm x 4mm x 4mm 1.7 x
expansion Coefficient 10-4
between 20° and 90° C
Heat conductivity at W/m K DIN 52612 sheet method Plate, 8mm injection 0.43
20°C moulded
Electrical Properties:
Measured under standard climatic conditions of 23°C, 50% relative air humidity

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

Specific transmission N/mm² DIN 53482 Foil, 0.2mm >10
resistance
VDE 0303 Part3
Surface resistance K-¹ DIN 53482 Sheet, 1mm >10
VDE 0303 Part3
Electric strenght kV/cm DIN 53481 Foil, 0.2mm 700
VDE 0303 Part3
Dielectric index (relative DIN 53483 Foil, 0.2mm 2.50
dielectric constant) at 2
VDE 0303 Part4 (Immersion Method)
x 10exp 6 Hz
Dielectric loss factor DIN 53483 Foil, 0.2mm 6x10 exp-4
Tan 8 at 50Hz VDE 0303 Part4 5x10 exp-4
10³ Hz 5x10 exp-4
10 exp4 Hz 6x10 exp-4
10 exp5 Hz
Track resistance DIN 53484 Sheet > 3mm KA3c
VDE 0303 Part4
Arc resistance DIN 53484 120mm x 120mm x
10mm I.4
VDE 0303 Part5
Chemical Resistance:
HDPE pipe and fittings are resistant to a wide range of chemicals from pH0 to pH14.
Installation:
HDPE pipes and fittings should be cut with an appropriate pipe-cutter or saw. Prior to welding, the two prepared
ands must be square and true and de-burred.
- Butt Welding
o By hand 40mm to 75mm
o MEDIA Machine with appropriate peripherals – 40mm through to 160mm
o UNIVERSAL Machine with appropriate peripherals – 40mm through to 315mm
- Electro Welding:
o ESG 40/200 240V 40mm-160mm
o ESG 40/200 110V 40mm-160mm
o ESG – T2 Starter Switch 240V 200mm-315mm
Prior to Electro-welding, the pipe end must be prepared.
Expansion joints must be provided at a maximum of 6 metre intervals and/or changes in direction more than a
metre apart, unless bending legs are positioned to allow thermal movement.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Thermal expansion can be contained within the material itself due to its high elasticity when buried into a solid
medium such as concrete.
Brackets should be provided to allow support and to control the directional movement of thermal expansion,
bracket shall not inadvertently anchor a system that is designed to expand.
Pipes that penetrate throught fire compartments must have fire sleeve built in, in accordance with BS EN 1366-3
2009 and Building Regulations PartB.
The work shall be inspected and tested during installation. All work which will be concealed shall be tested before
it is finally enclosed. A final test shall be made upon completion for soundness and performance in accordance
with BS EN 12056 Code of Practice for Sanitary pipe work.
All completed soil and waste system to be air tested to a minimum of 38mm water gauge over 3 minutes with no
pressure drop.
HDPE pipes should be stored on level ground or supports at a maximum of 1 metre centres. If being stored for a
long period time, or if long exposure to sunlight is expected, piping should be covered with opaque sheeting.
400 CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

Provide power supplies and control systems for the following electrically operated and/or activated sanitary
installations.
Install the urinal control valve on the cold water supply serving the urinal cistern, activated by a passive infra- red
detector. Ensure that the sensor is a recessed ceiling-mounted unit, provided on the basis of one detector for up
to 3 urinal bowls. Ensure that the control valve complies with the requirements of the Water Regulations and is
set to flush every 20 minutes during occupation and every 12 hours during nonoccupancy. Ensure that the
urinal control valve is mains electric powered.
500 SCOPE OF THE WORKS
510 GENERAL
Supply, install, test and commission the whole foul drainage above ground system, based on the requirements
and parameters outlined within this specification and as indicated on the accompanying detail design drawings.
540 FIRE SAFETY

Provide and install protection of openings and fire stopping in accordance with the Building Regulations, Part B.
550 VERMIN CONTROL

Include vermin control measures on all foul discharge pipes at ground level by fitting a purpose made “Rat Stop”
incorporating an oval access door in the following locations:
- On vertical pipework linking the below ground drainage system to the above ground drainage system at
ground floor level.
600 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

The above ground foul drainage pipework materials will comprise the following, unless detailed or specified
otherwise:

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- ensure main large diameter discharge and ventilation pipework and fittings are HDPE to BS EN 1519 – refer to
drawings for locations;
- ensure all small diameter discharge and ventilation pipework and fittings are HDPE to BS EN 1519
610 GENERAL
Provide for any or all of the following, notwithstanding the more detailed instructions or requirements contained
in other parts or sections applicable to sanitary systems of the specification.
611 PIPEWORK GENERALLY

Free pipework of burrs, rust, scale, throating, flattening rippling and any foreign matter or defects and thoroughly
cleaned prior to erection.
Obtain all components for each type of pipework from the same manufacturer unless otherwise indicated
612 GRADIENTS
Install discharge pipes and ventilating pipework to gradients strictly in accordance with BS EN 12056 to provide
self-cleansing velocities. Agree minor adjustments of gradient required by practical on site fixing, size of fittings
or through co-ordination with other services with the engineer prior to installation.
613 OPEN ENDS

Where open ends of pipe, fittings etc., are left exposed during the progress of the work and prior to completion,
temporarily but firmly fix a suitable proprietary plug or cap to such open ends as to prevent the ingress of any
foreign matter. Ensure that the aforementioned plug or cap also prevents the egress of liquid from within the
system.
614 DAMAGE
Provide suitable approved protection to afford protection to pipe, fittings or other equipment whether required on
a temporary or permanent nature and where any parts or part are liable to be exposed to damage from other
trades or any causes whatsoever.
Immediately replace, at your own expense, any pipework fittings, valves, sanitary fittings unduly marked by tools
or otherwise damaged or distorted and rejected by the engineer.
615 EXAMINATION
Inspect components carefully before fixing and reject any which are defective. Ensure cut ends of pipes are clean
and square with burrs removed.
At the engineer's direction on site, and at no extra cost to the Employer, remove, submit for his inspection and
re-fix after, any length of pipe, valve or fitting already fixed. If the inspection reveals neglect on your part, to
conform to the requirements of the specification the engineer may direct the removal and replacement without
extra cost to the Employer, the whole or any part of the installation.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
616 GREASING
Ensure that all working parts requiring lubrication are properly greased or lubricated at all times and left in good
working order.
617 STORAGE ON SITE

Notwithstanding any storage accommodation being provided, ensure proper office and storage facilities are
available at the site. Ensure these are lock-up units with facilities for inspecting all drawings. Store all materials in
accordance with the appropriate manufacturer's instructions to protect them from damage or deterioration. Make
good, at your own expense, any material damaged due to your negligence in this respect.
618 OBSTRUCTION
Carry out, at your own expense, either during erection of pipework, sanitary fittings, or during the period of
guarantee of same, the location and removal of any foreign body or matter, liable to cause stoppage or faulty
operation of any of the sanitary pipework, sanitary fittings, which is found to impede or affect the proper working
of the installation.
700 EQUIPMENT
710 TERMINATIONS
711 VENTILATING PIPES

Pass ventilating pipes terminating to atmosphere through the roof with a proprietary roof vent connector and
purpose made weathering slate to suit the roofing material. Carry this out in accordance with BS EN 12056 and
the Building Regulations. Locate the ventilating pipes to avoid ventilation duct inlets and exhausts
730 TRAPS
Provide traps to sanitary fittings. Ensure that the deep seal traps are complete with a pipe to wall extension piece
and wall cover flange (as necessary). Supply and install the necessary pipe adaptors.
Ensure all traps have seal depths and diameters in accordance with BS EN 12056, and that they bear the British
Standard Kite Mark.
Bottle traps are acceptable for use on WHBs only. Ensure that they are of the re-sealing type, and that the re-
sealing insert is removable.
The architect will identify any traps to appliances that are required to be chrome plated.
Traps to specialised items of equipment e.g. main kitchen appliances, will be provided by the kitchen fit-out
installer.
740 OVERFLOWS
Install all overflows to meet the requirements of the Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations 1999.
Ensure that WC overflows are the internal type within the cistern that allows discharge through the flush pipe into
the WC pan.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
800 CLEANING
Properly clean all pipework, fittings and valves.
900 PAINTING AND INSULATION
920 INSULATION
921 ACOUSTIC INSULATION

Insulate pipework within un-insulated ducts or enclosures in residential apartments. Ensure that the insulation
reduces airborne/impact sound to comply with the Building Regulations, Document E.
Ensure that the insulation complies with any special applications detailed and specified by the acoustic specialist.
1000 FIXING TO BUILDING FABRIC

Fix pipes at centres not greater than those specified in BS 8000-13. Provide additional supports as necessary at
junctions and changes in direction.
Where not specified otherwise, use plated, sherardized, galvanised or non-ferrous fastenings, suitable for the
purpose and background and compatible with the material being fixed and fixed to.
Fix all pipes in straight runs and lay all horizontal runs to gradients in excess of the minimum gradients stated in
BS EN 12056.
Sleeve pipes passing through walls or floors to allow unrestrained movement.
Fix vertical fixings via purpose made two-piece fixing bracket as supplied by the pipe and fitting manufacturer or
similar. An extended steel rod fixed to back plate may be used to suit pipe location. Place brackets directly below
joints wherever possible, with additional brackets provided at branches, bends and changes in direction, as
necessary.
Install adequate restraints to all bends, branches, stop ends etc. to ensure that the system is capable of
withstanding all likely accidental static water pressures.
Fix horizontal fixings via purpose made two-piece galvanised mild steel bolted drop rod type clips drilled to accept
M8/M10 rod. Place brackets directly adjacent and downstream of pipe sockets wherever possible, with additional
brackets provided at branches, bends and changes in direction, as necessary.
Where horizontal pipes are located in excess of 300mm from soffit provide adequate supports to prevent lateral
movement.
Where pipework is required to be installed prior to the erection of supporting walls, supply and install
independent galvanised mild steel support framework spanning from floor slab to soffit. Install adequate
temporary bracing to ensure that the pipework system is stable and capable of withstanding all internal and
external loads. Construct the independent framework to allow the construction of walls without the need to
dismantle the framework other than any temporary bracing.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
1200 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
1210 GENERAL
Carry out all tests and inspections to prove that the installation meets with the requirements of the Building
Regulations and BS EN 12056.
Inspect and test the installation at agreed stages, and test all work which is to be concealed before it is finally
enclosed.
Carry out all tests required by the District Surveyor/Building Control Officer giving adequate notice with regard to
timing of tests etc.
Inspect and test the installation at agreed stages to ensure that the pipework is properly secured and clear of
obstructing debris and superfluous matter and that all work which is to be concealed is free from defects before it
is finally enclosed.
Where the installation fails to hold against any test, identify the location of the leak, defect or failure, rectify and
re-test.
1220 SITE TESTS AND ISPECTIONS

Unless otherwise specified provide for the following tests and inspections:
Provide an air test to all sanitary and ventilation pipework equal to 38mm water gauge during the installation of
pipework to ensure that the installation meets the following final tests. Test pipes in the presence of the engineer
or his approved representative, and ensure that all pipework is visible at the time of testing.
1230 TESTING FOR SOUNDNESS

Test every individual stack including all branches off and all fittings attached to the stack. The top of the stack is
its uppermost limit i.e. roofs outlet or vent, and its bottom the entry to underground drainage.
Clean stack pipes thoroughly before testing, as follows:
Remove duct covers and ceiling tiles where necessary for access to main stacks and branches. Remove access
covers, cleaning and rodding eyes and rod the stacks by means of drain rods or similar flexible springs and
plungers for a suitable diameter.
Remove obstruction in pipes using suitable cleaning tools.
Take care in carrying out the foregoing operations to see that deposits and other extraneous matter are removed
and NOT flushed into the drainage system.
Carry out these cleaning operations in the presence of the engineer so that he may be assured, as far as
possible, of the cleanliness of the system.
Test all stack pipes and branches, and all fitted appliances, by air pressure equal to 38mm on the water gauge.
Ensure the pressure remains constant for three minutes.
Water test may be called for on the horizontal runs of plumbing and drainage and the section of drainage and
pipework below the lowest sanitary appliance. Carry this out by inserting a plug in the lowest end of the pipe
where it enters the inspection chambers and filling system up to flood level of the lowest sanitary appliance, or
6m head, whichever is the lower.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Fully charge the water seals of all sanitary appliances and floor gullies with water and plug off all open ends of
pipe, i.e. vents and outfalls, before commencing air tests.
Carry out remedial works found to be necessary at this stage, and if the engineer is not satisfied the right is
reserved for you to carry out further tests and cleaning, as specified by the engineer.
1240 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE

Ensure that all traps retain not less than 25mm of seal when subjected to the appropriate discharge tests. The
number of appliances to be tested is detailed in BS EN 12056-2, Table NG.1.
Carry out these tests under the supervision of the engineer, affording him the help and facilities he may require.
Upon completion of satisfactory testing to each and every stack pipe, branch and appliance, re-fix all duct covers
and replace ceiling tiles where necessary.
Include for intermediate testing where work is to be concealed by other installations. Where final tests reveal
defects on concealed pipework, include the costs of all necessary works to rectify the defects.
Make final tests upon completion for soundness and performance, witnessed by the engineer or his approved
representative.
Keep a record of all tests carried out to include the following:
- date of test
- location and identification of pipeline
- drawing reference
- method of test
- test pressure
- result of test
- signature of operative carrying out test and company
- signature of witnessing supervising officer or his approved representative

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
S10 COLD WATER

Within this specification and on the accompanying drawings and schedules to provide a complete and functional
installation.
To receive and convey cold wholesome water to all water fittings in the premises, without waste, misuse, undue
consumption or contamination (including degradation of the ‘fluid category’ as defined by the Water Regulations
Guide) of the water supply or the cold water system all in accordance with applicable regulations and standards
and other design parameters.
To receive and convey cold water at a sufficient volume flow rate and a suitable pressure to comply with the
recommended guidance flow rates, storage volumes and maximum/minimum water velocities in pipes and
fittings.
To limit the cold water temperature to a maximum of 2°C above the water temperature provided by the water
supply incoming main, without exceeding the maximum permitted cold water temperature of 20°C.
To equip the cold water system with a simple routine for checking the risk of legionella bacteria.
To install the system such that it can be fully drained down for inspection and maintenance whilst ensuring that
air can freely enter.
To provide a separate fluid category five separated supply for use within the wash down facility and workshops.

European Standard.
Listed below are the British Standards, Codes and Guides relevant to this section of the Specification:
- Oman Regulations and Safety Standards

- The Building Regulations, Part G
- The Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations
- The Water Supply (Water Quality) Regulations
- BS 7592 - Methods for sampling for Legionella organisms in water and related materials
- BS 8000 Workmanship on building sites
- BS 8000-15 - Part 15: Code of practice for hot and cold water services (domestic scale)
- BS 8580 - Water quality. Risk assessments for legionella control. Code of practice
- BS 8558 - Guide to the design, installation, testing and maintenance of services supplying water for domestic
use within buildings and their curtilages – Complementary guidance to BS EN 806
- BS 10175 - Investigation of potentially contaminated sites. Code of practice
- BS EN 805 - Water supply – requirements for systems and components outside buildings

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 806 - Specifications for installations inside buildings conveying water for human consumption:
o Part 1: General
o Part 2: Design
o Part 3: Pipe sizing (simplified method)
o Part 4: Installation
o Part 5: Operation and maintenance
- BS EN 1717 - Protection against pollution of potable water in water installations and general requirements of
devices to prevent pollution by backflow
- BS EN 13076 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. - Unrestricted air gap. Family A.
Type A
- BS EN 13959 - Anti-pollution check valves. DN 6 to DN 250 inclusive. Family E, type A, B, C and D
- BS EN 14154 - Water meters
- EN-ISO 15877 Plastics piping systems for hot and cold water installations - Chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride)
(PVC-C).
- BS EN 14451 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. In-line anti-vacuum valves DN 8 to
DN 80. Family D, type A
- BS EN 14453 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Pipe interrupter with
- permanent atmospheric vent DN 10 to DN 20. Family D, type C
- BS EN 14623 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Airgaps with minimum circular
overflow (verified by test or measurement). Family A, type G
- BS EN ISO6509 - Corrosion of metals and alloys. Determination of dezincification resistance of brass
- BSRIA AG 4/94 - Guide to Legionellosis - temperature measurements for hot and cold water services
- CIBSE TM13 - Minimising the risk of Legionnaire's disease
- CIBSE - Design Guides
- CIBSE - Technical Memoranda
- HSC ACoP L8 - Legionnaire’s disease – The control of Legionella bacteria in water systems
- IOP - Plumbing engineering services design guide
- WRAS - Water Fittings and Materials Directory
- WRAS - Water Regulations Guide
- Water Industry Approved Installation Method (AIM) 08 01 Type BA Device – Verifiable backflow preventer
with Reduced Pressure Zone (RPZ Valve)
- NJUG Vol 1-6 - National Joint Utilities Group Guidelines
ATEX Classifications:
- Zone 0: - An atmosphere where a mixture of air and flammable substances in the form of gas, vapour or mist
is present frequently, continuously or for long periods

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
is likely to occur in normal operation occasionally
is not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for only a short period
- Zone 21: - A place in which an explosive atmosphere in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air is likely
to occur in normal operation occasionally
- Zone 22: - A place in which an explosive atmosphere in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air is not
likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for a short period only
210 SYSTEM DESIGN GUIDE

Design the system to CIBSE.
Design flow rates in accordance with BS 8558, table 5
Do not exceed 1.5 litres capacity in any pipework deadleg serving a single outlet.
Where wash basins are not provided with watertight and readily accessible plugs, or spray or self-closing taps,
install flow control devices to limit the total combined maximum flow (hot and cold) into each basin to 3.6 litres
per minute.
Sanitary appliances, to which hoses serving sprays or jets are attached, are a backflow risk and the degree of
backflow protection required is determined on the basis of the fluid category into which the end of the spray or
jet could be immersed. Hoses or jets serving WC Sanitary appliances are considered a Category 5 risk. The zone
of backflow for any appliance which is served by a spray or jet attached to a flexible hose is the area covered in a
vertical and horizontal plane by the spray or jet with a radius subtended by the length of the hose. Ensure that all
health ablution faucets with a flexible hose and spray handset fitting, shall maintain the handset fitting above the
spill over level of the appliance to avoid backflow and contamination of the water supply.
220 PIPEWORK VELOCITY

On mains pressure systems, limit pipework velocities to 1.5m/sec where installed in non-critical areas and
1.0m/sec in noise sensitive areas.
On gravity based systems, limit pipework velocities to a maximum of 0.8m/sec or lower depending on pressure
available and location of the point of draw off within the system.

A new mains cold water service shall be extended from the primary circuit site wide distribution building
connections, located within the manhole adjacent to the site.
The hose serving all health ablution faucets shall be short enough to prohibit the spray hose from dropping below
the spill over level of the WC.
Cold water supplies to the drench showers shall be on a circulating main to prohibit stagnant water sitting in the
pipework.
Provide a combined service stop / filter ball turn valve at every range or individual draw off point.
Make all connections to taps / fixed draw off points etc. in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations,
including the provision of check valves on connections to mixer taps where required.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
All pipework whether concealed from view or exposed shall be insulated, identified and complete with directional
arrows.
Where pipework is not concealed from view this shall be surface mounted.
Ensure that all water distribution pipe work includes sufficient isolating valves and drain valves to allow the
system to be sensibly maintained and completely drain.
410 METERING
Provide a water meter on the main incoming supply to the building with a pulsed output suitable for connecting
to a building management system (BMS), and connect to the BMS.
On every water meter provide an impulse output signal connected to the BMS to produce a readout of water
consumption.
420 WATER LEAK DETECTION

Provide solenoid valves on the cold water supply to each toilet area in the building to control the water supply to
all urinals and WCs. Control each solenoid valve by the following means, to ensure water is supplied only when
needed, and therefore prevent minor water leaks.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
510 RESPONSABILITIES - GENERAL

To provide, install, test and commission a complete cold water service system to meet the functional and
performance criteria outlined within this section.
511 MAIN CONTRACTOR

To coordinate with the Main Contractor of the Site Wide Infrastructure Package to provide a suitable water supply
to the building.
To undertake the provision of all plant bases, holes and openings as detailed by the Mechanical Installer.
512 MECHANICAL INSTALLER

To undertake the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and setting to work of all elements of the water
supplies and equipment to ensure design intent is achieved.
To site wire from local isolation facilities, test and commission all power wiring to individual plant and equipment,
supplied and installed.
to the building.
513 ELECTRICAL INSTALLER

To provide local power supplies adequate to support the total requirements of the Mechanical items to enable the
Mechanical Installer to complete the site wiring terminations to all of the plant.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
540 CONTROL OF LEGIONELLA BACTERIA/ ENVIRONMENTAL PRECAUTIONS

As a site wide dependency, the incoming water supply to the site shall be chemically treated to provide a
minimum of 48 hours full protection against Legionella and other bacterial contamination.
Ensure all water services are fully in compliance with HSC ACoP L8 and CIBSE TM13.
Avoid long runs of pipework to points with very little or infrequent usage.
Install a check valve on any branch likely to be infrequently used.
Protect pipework from hot sources.
Provide cisterns with close fitting covers. Fit screens to all overflows, warning pipes and vents. Install inlet and
outlet connections at opposite ends of the cistern to prevent areas of stale water. Protect cisterns from hot
sources
Install a cistern washout valve as close as possible to the cistern and ensure that the inlet is as close as possible
to the bottom. Cap/flange the open end. Terminate over a drain but achieving appropriate air gap.
Do not install spray taps or aerators where there is the likelihood of heavy fouling by grease and dirt.
610 GENERAL
Form a goose-neck or sweeping bend at the connection to the water main to relieve stresses. ‘Snake’ the
communication and supply pipe to allow for settlement in the ground.
Surround the mains with suitable bedding material to accommodate any movement.
620 PIPEWORK, FITTINGS AND ANCILLARIES

Install cold water distribution pipework, fittings and ancillaries in accordance with sections Y10, Y11, Y51 and Y90
of this specification.
For all external buried pipework carrying potable water use barrier pipe in accordance with section Y10.
Fit check valves to both hot and cold supplies where a shut off valve is fitted to the outlet nozzle of a mixing
appliance.
630 CISTERNS
Install all cisterns in accordance with section Y21 of this specification.
650 PAINTING AND THERMAL INSULATION

Paint and thermally insulate the cold water system installation in accordance with section Y50 of this specification.

Comply with section Y90 of this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
900 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SERVICES

1010 SITE WIDE WATER SUPPLY CONTRACTOR

Contact the site wide water supply contractor and co-ordinate regular visits by their inspector as necessary.
Obtain formal approval from the site wide water supply contractor for the complete installation to allow provision
of water supply to premises.
Obtain the site wide water supply contractor’s acceptance of compliance with all required
1020 CLEANING
Flush the system using drinking water with a maximum particle size of 150micron. Ensure that at least 20 system
volume changes are used in flushing. The minimum flush velocity is 2m/s.
Where any pipework under mains pressure is to be disinfected inform water authority. Use only chemicals
suitable for use in the public supply for the disinfection process. Ensure that a disinfectant suitable for the
purpose is used. Seek consent to discharge disinfection chemicals as required.
1030 TESTING
Pressure test the system including all equipment as detailed in section Y51.
Test all overflow and warning pipes.
Produce reports in accordance with section Y51.
Ensure removal of all water used for pressure testing purposes.
1040 COMMISSIONING
Commission the system, including all equipment, as detailed in section Y51.
Regulate and balance all cold water distribution systems as detailed in section Y51.
Carry out performance tests to verify that the flow rate achieved at each float valve, draw off tap, shower and
any specialist item meets the specification requirements.
1100 SCHEDULE OF INSTALLER’S SUBMISSIONS

Submit full technical details including drawings of selected cold water storage cistern(s) including all connection
sizes, etc for the contract administrators comment.
Operating and maintenance instructions for all items of equipment including:
- break cisterns and fill controls

- meters
- gauges
- monitoring equipment

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- provide as part of the handover documentation and water log book the flushing and disinfection records as
required by BS8558
- include within the O&M manual pertinent guidance from BS8558 on maintenance regimes including where and
how frequently to make temperature measurements and for the taking of water samples
- include within the O&M manual a clause to the effect that infrequently used float valves should be checked
annually and exercised
- include within the O&M manual a clause to the effect that the maximum time a water fitting may be
disconnected (e.g. for repair) without its feed pipework also being disconnected at the live tee is 60 days

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
S11 HOT WATER

Supply, install, test, commission and set to work a complete hot water installation to meet the requirements set
out within this specification and on the accompanying drawings and schedules to provide a complete and
functional installation.
To provide a complete hot water installation to serve the domestic hot water requirements of the building in
compliance with all applicable regulations, standards and other design parameters.
To control the risks of legionella by generating water at 60°C and distributing it at not less than 60°C for primary
distribution. Also, by ensuring that the minimum temperature anywhere within the system does not fall below
50°C under prolonged maximum draw off conditions.
To enable the system to be thermally sterilised by arranging the hot water generation plant to be capable of
heating the system to 70°C on required occasions.
To reduce the risks of scalding users of the system by avoiding accessible surface temperatures greater than
38°C and by providing blending or thermostatic devices local to, or integral with, each hot water outlet where
installed in WC areas, as indicated on the drawings set to achieve 38°C outlet temperature for showers and 41-
43°C for basins and no more than 48°C for baths. Cleaners sink locations shall be provided with a hot water flow
temperature of between 55°C and 60°C.
To install the system such that it can be fully drained down for inspection or maintenance purposes whilst
ensuring that air can freely enter to prevent risk of collapse.

European Standard.

- The Building Regulations, Part G3
- BS 853 - Part 1: Specification for vessels for use in heating systems. Calorifiers and storage vessels for central
heating and hot water supply
- BS 1566 - Copper indirect cylinders for domestic purposes
- BS 5779 - Specification for spray mixer taps

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 7592 - Sampling for Legionella bacteria in water systems. Code of practice BS 8000 - Workmanship on
building sites
- BS 8000-15 - Part 15: Code of practice for hot and cold water services (domestic scale)
- BS 8551 - Provision and management of temporary water supplies and distribution networks (not including
provisions for statutory emergencies). Code of practice
- BS 8580 - Water quality. Risk assessments for legionella control. Code of practice BS 10175 - Investigation of
potentially contaminated sites. Code of practice
- BS EN 806 - Specifications for installations inside buildings conveying water for human consumption
o Part 1: General
o Part 2: Design
o Part 3: Pipe sizing (simplified method)
o Part 4: Installation
o Part 5: Operation and maintenance
- BS EN 1111 - Sanitary tapware. Thermostatic mixing valves (PN10). General technical specification
- BS EN 1287 - Sanitary tapware. Low pressure thermostatic mixing valves. General technical specifications
- BS EN 12897 - Water supply. Specification for indirectly heated unvented (closed) storage water heaters
- BS EN 13076 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. - Unrestricted air gap.
- Family A. Type A
- BS EN 13077 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Air gap with non-circular overflow
(unrestricted). Family A. Type B
- BS EN 13959 - Anti-pollution check valves. DN 6 to DN 250 inclusive. Family E, type A, B, C and D
- BS EN 14154 - Water meters
- BS EN 14451 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. In-line anti-vacuum valves DN 8 to
DN 80. Family D, type A
- BS EN 14453 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. - Pipe interrupter with permanent
atmospheric vent DN 10 to DN 20. Family D, type C
- BS EN 14623 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Airgaps with minimum circular
overflow (verified by test or measurement). Family A, type G
- BS EN ISO6509 - Corrosion of metals and alloys. Determination of dezincification resistance of brass
- BSRIA AG4/94 - Guide to legionellosis – temperature measurements for hot and cold water services
- CIBSE TM13 - Minimising the risk of Legionnaire’s disease
- CIBSE - Design Guides
- HSC ACoP L8 - The control of legionella bacteria in water systems
- IOP Plumbing Engineering Services Design Guide
- WRAS - Water Regulations Guide Second Edition
- WRAS - Water Fittings and Materials Directory
- Water Industry Approved Installation Method (AIM) 08 01 Type BA Device – Verifiable backflow preventer
with Reduced Pressure Zone (RPZ Valve)
- NJUG Vol 1-6 - National Joint Utilities Group Guidelines

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
210 DESIGN TEMPERATURE

Ensure hot water systems are capable of being maintained at designated temperatures on a constant 24 hour
basis.
Provide a water distribution system to maintain 55°C in the network. No dead leg beyond the maintained
pipework length shall contain more than 0.5 litre of water.
220 SYSTEM DESIGN GUIDE

Design the system to CIBSE.
230 DESIGN FLOW RATES

Select design flow rates in accordance with BS 8558, table 5.
Where wash basins are not provided with watertight and readily accessible plugs, or spray or self-closing taps,
install flow control devices to limit the total combined maximum flow (hot and cold) into each basin to 3.6 litres
per minute.
240 PIPEWORK VELOCITY

On pressurised systems, limit pipework velocities to 1.5m/sec where installed in non-critical areas and 1.0m/sec
in noise sensitive areas.
On gravity based systems, limit pipework velocities to a maximum of 0.8m/sec or lower depending on pressure
available and location of the point of draw off within the system.
250 PRIMARY HEAT SOURCE

The primary heating source shall be 240 volts single phase 50 hertz supply, supplying point of use electric heaters
as described below and in the equipment schedules.
Electric Water Heater:

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Storage capacity 30litres,1000 litres

- Thermostatic setting 10-70°C, set at 60°C
- Factory-fitted temperature and pressure relief valves to open at 7 bar or 90°C and with discharge to drain via
weir/tundish assembly
- The pipework serving each unit shall be fitted with a compatible expansion vessel supplied by the hot water
heater manufacturer
- Replaceable heavy gauge copper inner container, designed for 6 bar working pressure and type tested to 20
bar
- Outer casing to have white plastic top moulding with corrosion proof steel base and centre section, finished in
white stove-enamel. Units to incorporate adequate CFC-free thermal insulation

Carry out the terminations in accordance with the requirements of Section Y of this Specification
Provide a combined service stop / filter ball ¼ turn valve at every range or individual draw off point.
Make all connections to taps etc. in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations, including the provision
of check valves on connections to mixer taps where required.
The extent of visible pipe work shall be kept to a minimum, with pipe work in general being concealed as shown
on the drawings within either service ducts, stud partitions or boxings. Where pipework is not concealed from
view this shall be surface mounted.
All pipework whether concealed from view or exposed shall be insulated, vapour sealed, identified and complete
with directional arrows.
Ensure that all water distribution pipe work includes sufficient isolating valves and drain valves to allow the
system to be sensibly maintained and completely drain.
The extent of visible pipe work shall be kept to a minimum, with pipe work in general being concealed as shown
on the drawings. All visible pipe work in occupied areas is to be chrome plated copper with matched fittings. In
particular in all health ablution rooms, supplies shall be surface mounted chrome as indicated on the architect’s
drawings.
310 TYPE OF SYSTEM

The hot water system shall be a decentralised unitary unvented heater installation.
Each unvented electric water heater shall be installed with an overflow tundish to collect and discharge water to
drain should the water heater malfunction and safely discharge into the adjacent high temperature waste system.
Water heaters shall be installed within a 2m horizontal distance of the safety valve discharge pipework location
into the high temperature waste system.
320 HOT WATER GENERATING PLANT

Decentralised hot water generating plant to comprise electric storage heaters with unvented kit. These shall be
concealed from view (typically to be located below vanity units or in ceiling voids) and be suitable for unvented
mains cold water application. Each unit shall adequately support the connected sanitary equipment.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
410 CONTROL OF HOT WATER TEMPERATURE

Control the hot water storage temperature at 60°C for 24 hours per day, 365 days per year.
All controls shall be integral to the hot water storage heaters and blending valves, no BMS control or monitoring
is required.
Point of use water heaters shall incorporate accurate storage set point adjustment with locking facility, power on
indicator, all necessary temperature and pressure relief fixtures and fittings and resettable over temperature cut-
out. Vented taps will not be used.
Control the output of each flow heater/instantaneous heater using the factory fitted on-board controls.
Temperature and pressure safety discharges from the water heaters shall be terminated in a safe and visible
location to comply with the requirements of the Building Regulations.
Ensure that each high temperature cut out device is independent of the normal temperature control system, will
fail safe and is only able to be manually reset.
Provide suitable safety devices to comply with the Building Regulations, Part G3.
All hot water outlets serving WCs shall be provided with inline thermostatic mixing valves to restrict outlet
temperatures.
Hot water shall be supplied at 60°C from adjacent local wall mounted electric water heaters to blending valves
serving wash basins within toilet areas and when mixing with the cold water inlet shall provide an outlet
temperature of between 41°C and 43°C.
Hot water shall be supplied at 60°C from adjacent local wall mounted electric water heaters to thermostatic
shower mixing valves and when mixing with the cold water inlet shall provide an outlet temperature of 38°C.
Hot water shall be supplied at 60°C from adjacent local wall mounted electric water heaters to serve cleaners
sinks and shall provide an outlet temperature at the hot tap of between 55°C and 60°C
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
510 RESPONSABILITIES GENERAL

To provide, install, test and commission a complete hot water service system to meet the functional and
performance criteria outlined within this section.
511 MAIN CONTRACTOR

to the building.

To undertake the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and setting to work of all elements of the water
supplies and equipment to ensure design intent is achieved.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

514 ALL CONTRACTORS COORDINATED RESPONSIBILITIES

Notification of the Site Wide Water Supply Contractor and obtaining their approval of the system and installation.
Provide facilities on site for inspection of the installation by the Water Inspector. In addition allow for the
following as a minimum:
- Notification of water supplier and obtaining their approval of the system and installation
- Free issue items to other Installers
- Controls wiring and connections to the BMS
- Electrical earthing and bonding
- Painting (specification should refer to Section Y50)
- Fire stopping of pipe penetrations of compartment walls and floors
- Warning signs and notices

Consult the site wide water supply contractor to determine suitable materials, laying techniques and pipe
diameter, prior to laying mains.
Ensure the site wide water supply contractor is given at least seven days written notice in advance of connecting
to their supply main.
Arrange for the site wide water supply contractor to inspect (and sign off as compliant) the completed installation
prior to the handover and occupation.
540 CONTROL OF LEGIONELLA BACTERIA/ ENVIRONMENTAL PRECAUTIONS

As a site wide dependency, the incoming water supply to the site shall be chemically treated to provide a
minimum of 48 hours full protection against Legionella and other bacterial contamination.
Ensure all water services are fully in compliance with HSC ACoP L8 and CIBSE TM13.
Avoid long runs of pipework to points with very little or infrequent usage.
Install a check valve on any branch likely to be infrequently used.
Protect pipework from hot sources.
Provide cisterns with close fitting covers. Fit screens to all overflows, warning pipes and vents. Install inlet and
outlet connections at opposite ends of the cistern to prevent areas of stale water. Protect cisterns from hot
sources and freezing conditions.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Install a cistern washout valve as close as possible to the cistern and ensure that the inlet is as close as possible
to the bottom. Cap/flange the open end. Terminate over a drain but achieving appropriate air gap.
Do not install spray taps or aerators where there is the likelihood of heavy fouling by grease and dirt.
Ensure that potable water points are not installed at the end of long pipe runs from which the draw off is
infrequent or low in volume.
Obtain written authorisation from the Site Wide Water Contractor prior to filling the system and bringing it into
operation.
Maintain the system at design conditions until handover to the employer.
Carry out temperature recording in accordance with BSRIA AG 4/94.
550 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION

The Installer shall include for cleaning and flushing of the complete water pipework installation from the
inspection chamber to all items of plant and equipment. The Installer shall allow for sufficient flushing valves and
loops to be provided to safely carry out the required works
Flush out the system using drinking water with a maximum particle size of 150micron. Ensure that at least 20
system volume changes are used in flushing. The minimum flush velocity is 2m/s.
Cleanse and disinfect the complete system, including incoming mains and all distribution piping as detailed in
section Y25 of this specification.
Repeat disinfection and purity analysis until appropriate quality is achieved. Carry out disinfection on a date
agreed with the client/contract conditions, with an allowance of at least two weeks prior to the building being
occupied, to enable results from the tests to be processed.
Maintain system in a disinfected condition until handover to the employer.
Upon the domestic hot and cold water systems being disinfected, open all draw off points in sequence, once a
week until the systems are handed over. Record each of these operations, witnessed by the clerk of works or
engineer.
600 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Only install WRAS approved water fittings and materials.
610 PIPEWORK FITTINGS AND ANCILLARIES

Ensure hot water distribution, pipework, and ancillaries are in accordance with sections Y10, Y11, Y23, Y52 and
Y90.
Install pressure and temperature gauges to each hot water vessel if specified, or immediately adjacent to the
vessel within the pipework, if not part of the vessel/s.
Fit check valves to both hot and cold supplies where a shut off valve is fitted to the outlet nozzle of a mixing
appliance.
Do not use flexible connections.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
620 THERMAL INSULATION AND IDENTIFICATION

Ensure thermal insulation and identification of hot water distribution pipework is in accordance with sections Y50
and Y54 of this specification.
Physically label all valves above ground with their purpose and service. Alternatively number each valve and the
number related to a suitable diagram – not a chart - fixed in a visible position in the building.
650 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES

Provide thermostatic mixing valves to sanitary appliances where located in high risk areas, public places etc. and
as indicated on the drawings.
Provide thermostatic mixing valves/in-line blending valves to prevent excessive temperature in accordance with
the Building Regulations, Part G3.
Fit valves of the following type dependent on the location of the appliance:
- Type 1: a mechanical mixing/blending valve or tap complying with BS EN 1287 or BS 5779 with maximum
temperature stop
- Type 2: a thermostatic mixing valve complying with BS EN 1287
700 CLEANING AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT

Carry out cleaning and chemical treatment in accordance with section Y25.
Flush the system using drinking water with a maximum particle size of 150micron. Ensure that at least 20 system
volume changes are used in flushing. The minimum flush velocity is 2m/s.
710 CONTROL OF LEGIONELLA

Comply with the relevant parts of all standards detailed in clause 200.
Obtain written authorisation from the Site Wide Water Supply Contractor prior to filling the system for bringing it
into operation.
Ensure removal of all water used for pressure testing purposes.
Upon filling and following sterilisation, ensure system is flushed through using chlorinated mains water in
accordance with BS8558 and that suitable records are kept. Do not carry out the flushing and disinfection
processes until the primary heat source is consistently available to ensure the system is constantly maintained at
design conditions until handover to the employer.
Carry out temperature recording in accordance with BSRIA Application Guide AG 4/94
Repeat disinfection and purity analysis until appropriate quality is achieved. Carry out disinfection on a date
agreed with the client/contract conditions, with an allowance of at least two weeks prior to the building being
occupied, to enable results from the tests to be processed.
Upon the domestic hot and cold water systems being disinfected, open all draw off points in sequence, once a
week until the systems are handed over. Record each operation, witnessed by the CA.
The number of water samples to be taken shall be agreed with the contract administrator.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

Liaise and co-ordinate regular visits with the Site Wide Water Supply Contractor throughout the installation.
Obtain formal approval for the complete installation to allow provision of water supply to premises.
Issue Site Wide Water Supply Contractors acceptance of compliance with the Water Regulations to the
Client/engineer and insert into the operating & maintenance manuals.
Provide a diagrammatic drawing of the system showing all valves so their type and use is clear. Provide
installation drawings showing the route and extent of concealed pipework.
820 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TESTING AND SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

Pressure test systems and commission equipment in accordance with specification section Y51. Record system
temperatures in accordance with BSRIA AG 4/94.
Produce reports in accordance with specification section Y51, BS8558, BS EN 806-5 and BSRIA AG 4/94.
Carry out performance tests to verify that the flow rate achieved at each draw off tap, shower and any specialist
item meets the specification requirements. Record the results in the commissioning report and include it as part
of the handover documentation building water log book. Carry out performance tests to verify that the flow rate
achieved at each float valve, draw off tap and shower and any specialist item meets the specification
requirements.
830 COMMISSIONING
Commission and set to work each hot water heating device in accordance with the requirements of Part G of The
Building Regulations and the manufacturer’s instructions, record the process and its outcomes and place a copy
of the commissioning report in the operation and maintenance manual.
Issue a suitable notice of completion of commissioning to the Building Control Body for the project.

Submit full technical details of the following plant/process for comment:
- provide as part of the handover documentation and water log book the flushing and disinfection records as
required by BS8558
- Include within the O&M manual pertinent guidance from BS8558 on maintenance regimes including where
and how frequently to make temperature measurements and for the taking of water samples
- Include within the O&M manual a clause to the effect that the maximum time a water fitting may be
disconnected (e.g. for repair) without its feed pipework also being disconnected at the live tee is 60 days
- Issue a suitable notice of completion of commissioning to the Contract Administrator

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
S30 COMPRESSED AIR

Supply, Install, Test, Commission and set to work the complete compressed air plant, ancillary equipment and
distribution in accordance with the drawings and this specification.
To provide Breathable Quality compressed air throughout the facility to all final points of use.
The works to be carried out under this section of the specification include the procurement of specialist design
input, system supply, installation and commissioning by the contractor of a complete new compressed air system
service.
200 DESIGN PARAMETERS.

European Standard.
Omani Regulations and Safety Standards
British Standards
British Compressed Air Society – Installation Guide, Guide to the Selection & Installation of Compressed Air
Services, 5th Edition, 2000.
All equipment and assemblies which fall within the scope of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC,
implemented through the Pressure Equipment Regulations 1999, must be designed, manufactured, tested by the
manufacturers, and be certified as compliant with the Directive and The Approved code of practice (ACOP) L 122
“Safety of Pressure Systems”.
Such compliance shall be evidenced by displaying the appropriate CE Mark on the equipment and assemblies.
Comply with all Statutory Regulations, including The Pressure Systems Safety Regulations 2000 and its Approved
Code of Practice. Provide a “Written Scheme of Examination” for the systems.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
210 QUALITY
Supply breathable quality compressed air, dry, clean and free from suspended oil, water and noxious or odorous
gases, at pressures and in quantities required for control functions as shown on the schematics.
Purity classes and test methods for aerosol oil content, humidity solid particles and oil vapour / organic solvent
content shall be in accordance with BS ISO 8573.
220 PRESSURE
Unless otherwise indicated, for high pressure system the maximum pressure will be 13 bar while for low pressure
system the maximum pressure will be 10bar.
221 HIGH PRESSURE MAINS IN OCCUPIED SPACES

Do not install exposed high pressure mains in occupied spaces.
230 CONDITIONS
Achieve maximum duty when operating at altitudes between sea level and 150 metres above sea level at ambient
temperature up to 32°C with a relative humidity of 60%.

The Main Contractor will ensure that all equipment shall be supplied, installed, tested, commissioned and set to
work by an approved Compressed Air Specialist Contractor.
310 GENERAL DISTRIBUTION

Compressed air shall be regulated to the required pressure at the points of use and terminate in the rooms as
indicated on the drawings.
All systems including, plant rooms, distribution pipelines, and vent pipe discharges etc. shall be provided with all
the necessary hazard, warning and identification markings as required.
Each branch shall be individually valved.
320 COMPRESSED AIR PLANT

Clean, dry and oil free compressed air shall be provided via dedicated air production plant and distribution
systems to dedicated workshops as set out with the drawings.
The proposed compressed air installation shall incorporate plant that shall be located in the Mechanical plant
room and monitored by the Building Management System.
Duplicate air production plant shall be provided to ensure robustness of the system within a dedicated plant room
with each unitary plant consisting of an attenuated compressor, receiver complete with control pressure switch,
standby control pressure switch, pressure gauge, relief valve, auto and manual drains , main filter with indicator

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
and auto drain, drier with drain connection and high temperature cut out, oil filter with indicator together with
plant and system relief valves, isolating valves, unloader valves, pressure switches, control line etc.
Each compressor shall be reciprocating type and carbon ring(oil free).The compressed air production plant shall
be sized to achieve a shop air flow rate of 7 l/s at 800kPa at each compressed air point. Compressed air plant
selection shall be based to allow a run time of between 20 to 30minutes with control of the duty compressor via
an on/off pressure switch mounted on the air receiver with a further pressure switch connected to start the
standby compressor on low pressure. Each compressor shall be installed on antivibration mountings fit for
purpose, oil level cut out switch, oil pressure gauge and pressure controls and devices.
Each air receiver shall be sized to restrict the number of compressor starts to ten or twelve starts per hour which
shall be governed between the difference between the differential of the control pressure switch and the lowest
permisable operating pressure.
Driers shall be provided with high temperature cut out and solenoid valves to stop air being supplied to the
system on failure and as an auxillary start to energize the standby unit.
The compressed air pipe work system shall be a ring main system providing flow from two different directions to
each point of use, thereby providing system resilience and thus avoiding starvation of air at ends of branches or
system.
A trapped gulley shall be provided within the plant room. Manual drain and auto drain valves together with
pressure relief valves and safety valves shall each be provided with discharge pipework terminating over the
adjacent trapped gulley with adequate inspection and rodding points provided at each change of direction and
straight lengths exceeding 12m to achieve optimum operation.
A mechanical extract ventilation system shall remove vitiated air from the plant room and discharge to
atmosphere in the position indicated within the Drawings. For details of the plant room ventilation systems refer
to the Ventilation Specification (U10).
A dedicated control panel shall be provided with power and control sections for the starting, stopping and
operation of the compressed air plant and equipment.
The Main Contractor will ensure that all equipment shall be supplied installed tested commissioned and set to
work by an approved Compressed Air Specialist Contractor.
The Compressed Air system provided shall be of breathable quality air allowing for carbon filtration complete with
breathable air quality sensor and test equipment located within the spaces.

Ensure controls comply with BS 6244.
BMS integrated MCC Panels shall be provided by the BMS Control Specialist. The air compressor plant shall
automatically operate through its own MCC Panel.
The following description shall be applicable to each of the MCC Panels and shall include as a minimum:
Power Section
- Door Interlocked Isolator on power section

- Incoming Current Transformers
- Facia mounted Energy Meter with pulsed input into BMS

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Phase Healthy Lamps

- Panel Fan and filter – within panel to avoid overheating
- MCB to control section
- MCB for RCD protected double socket for computer use
Control Section
- Panel fan and filter within panel to avoid overheating

- All necessary transformers
- 24V DC power supply unit
- Panel Live Lamp
- Terminals for fire alarm interface
- ‘Fire Alarm Activated’ lamp
- Push Button Test Lamp
- All necessary interlocking relays
- Set of numbered terminals
- Controller
- I/O Modules
- Interface Unit & Hub
- Terminals for the following sensors
Air Compressor Plant
- Hand/Off Auto switch

- Terminals for hard wired interfaces
- Air Compressor 1 Low Pressure Run Lamps
- Air Compressor 2 Low Pressure Run Lamps
- Air Compressor 1 Low Pressure Fault Lamps
- Air Compressor 2 Low Pressure Fault Lamps
- Air Compressor 3 High Pressure Fault Lamps
- Air Compressor 3 High Pressure Fault Lamps
410 DESCRIPTION OF START-UP

The description of the Air Compressor Plant start- up below applies to the Compressed Air plant serving the
Workshops within the buildings.
The Air Compressor Plant shall have dedicated Hand/Off/Auto switches located on the panel facia. In the Off
position the plant shall not run. In the Hand position the plant shall be permanently enabled unless there is a fire
condition. In the Auto position the compressors shall be enabled under the dictates of start time start signal.
Run and Fault lamps on the panel facia shall be illuminated from hard wire outputs from the compressors.
Control of the duty compressor shall be on/off by a pressure switch in the air receiver. A further pressure switch
shall be provided to start the standby compressor on low pressure.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The driers are provided with a high temperature cut out thermostats complete with solenoid valves to stop air
being supplied to the system on failure and shall also be used to start the standby unit.
Provide drip trays under compressor sets, allow removal for cleaning purposes.
- Application: - Control of air compressor and associated air supply components

- Functions: -
o Start/stop button
o Programme change
o Auto start/stop with run-on timer
- Output display:
o Digital
- Output information: -
o On/Off
o Fault
o Discharge pressure
o Intermediate pressure
o Air temperature
o Oil temperature
o Filter condition - air
o Filter condition - oil
o Timed drainer intervals
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
510 MAIN CONTRACTOR

To undertake the provision of all plant bases, holes and openings as detailed by the Mechanical Installer
520 RESPONSABILITIES – MECHANICAL INSTALLER

The element of work referred to in this specification is for the supply, installation, commissioning and setting to
work of the compressed air plant and distribution system to ensure design intent is achieved.
The Mechanical Installer shall employ a Specialist Contractor to supply install, test, commission and set to work
the entire compressed air system comprising of all required plant and equipment including but not limited to the
compressors, receivers, driers, valves, traps etc. together with all necessary control wiring to make a complete
installation able to perform at its optimum design and efficiency. The Mechanical Installer shall ensure that the
Specialist Compressed Air System Installer employed shall be fully qualified and accredited to carry out the
required works and shall successfully demonstrate these to the Contract Administrator before installation works
commence.
Site wire from local isolation facilities, test and commission all power wiring to individual plant and equipment,

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Allow for completion of the site power wiring terminations including local isolation facilities to all of the installed
compressor plant and equipment from the dedicated control panel mains isolator to adequately support all
associated items of plant.

Supply, install, test, commission and set to work a dedicated electrical power supply to the Compressor plant
electrical control panel mains isolator to adequately support the total requirements of the Compressor Plant and
Ancillary Equipment.
The Mechanical Installer shall complete the site wiring terminations to all of the plant.
522 ALL CONTRACTORS COORDINATED RESPONSABILITIES

Provide facilities on site for inspection of the installation. In addition allow for the following as a minimum:

- Electrical and, if required fire alarm system connections
- Warning signs and notices
530 DETAIL CO-ORDINATION

Agree all proposed methods of fixing the system(s) to structure, roof, cladding, chimneys, equipment, etc. with
the Contract Administrator.
Agree the colours and finishes of all exposed materials of the system(s) with the Contract Administrator.
540 PERMIT TO WORK

Prior to commencement of work and where appropriate (eg where an existing system has to be disconnected
temporarily for joining to a new system), arrange for the issue of a permit to work.
550 WARNING SIGNAGE

Where necessary for high level overhead work, ensure that the safety warning signs are erected and that
adequate safety space is left below the point of work, to alert and offer protection to all personnel including site
operatives.
610 DISTRIBUTION
Compressed Air Distribution Pipework shall be installed using Heavyweight Galvanized Steel Tube.
Ensure the mains system falls to proper drain points and that the fall is at least 25mm in 120 metres in the
direction of air flow.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The distribution pipework shall be run wet throughout with the air drier located within the space.
Compressed Air branch take off lines shall be connected from the top of the distribution main.
Provide drain points complete with strainer, air trap and discharge pipe.
Install isolation valves and pressure gauges on upstream and downstream side of each component.
Install valves in horizontal pipelines and include moisture traps, strainers,
Layout compressed air distribution lines to follow services routes and to group similar plant items.
The compressed air distribution within the buildings shall comprise of a circulation loop at high level complete
with air drier. And branch mains shall be taken off the top of the circulation loop and shall each drop to low level
with a compressed air hose connection point positioned at 1m above the floor for use by authorized maintenance
personnel. Each compressed air point shall be complete with isolating valve, strainer and trap.
Provide sleeves where piping is run through walls or other members.
Where run within building finishes protect pipes from accidental damage during installation. Where run in walls or
columns install pipework within PVC conduit (high impact).
Provide means of isolation at all branches, at all items of plant and equipment, at high level (or ceiling void) in
feeds which drop to low level to outlets in benches etc and where piped services feed a zone, workshop or floor
from risers.
620 AIR COMPRESSORS

Install compressors and associated equipment in positions indicated on drawings and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
Install one compressor for high pressure system with technical data specified on drawings.
Install two compressor for low pressure one in duty on in stand by with technical data specified on drawings.
Clip pneumatic pipework at maximum intervals of 1.0m.
640 COMPRESSED AIR DRYERS

Accessories:
- Hygrometer
- Integrated activated carbon pack and outlet membrane filters
Provide inlet filters on desiccant type.
Dryers shall meet the requirements of BS 6754:1986 ISO 7183 for specification and testing.
650 AIR FILTERS

- Standard: BS ISO 5011 7266
- Material: Cast iron
- Connections: Flanged to BS EN 1092-1, BS EN 1092-2 or BS EN 1092-4 or screwed to BS 21 and BS EN
10226-1 to match equipment and pipelines
- Ancillaries: -

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o Differential pressure monitoring gauge.

o Drain trap.
660 AIR RECEIVERS

- Locate receiver associated with an engine close to the engine. Standard: - BS 5169 or BS EN 286.
- Components: -
o Safety valve
o Pressure gauge
o Condensate drain cock
o Inspection openings
o Control pressure switch
o Stand-by pressure switch
o Automatic drain
o Inlet isolating valve
o Outlet isolating valve
o Supporting feet
- Regulations: Comply with statutory regulations
670 RELIEF VALVES

Relief valves shall be fitted integrally or separately as follows:
- One on the delivery pipe, downstream of each compressor and upstream of any isolating valve, non- return
valve and be capable of discharging the total throughput of the compressor
- The air receiver capable of discharging the total throughput of the compressor(s)
- Downstream of any pressure regulators
680 SAFETY VALVES

Safety valves shall be fitted integrally or separately and be located downstream of each line pressure regulator.
The safety valve shall be in compliance with BS.1123 and arranged to discharge safely so that there is no danger
to personnel in the work area.
The safety valve shall be capable of discharging the total throughput of the plant at a maximum pressure to suit
the particular pressure regulator setting.
Mount vents, safety valves and fusible plugs so that they discharge safely. Install safety valves in accordance with
BS 1123 Part 1.
690 AUTOMATIC DRAIN TRAPS

Automatic drain traps shall be installed for the following:
- Air Receivers
- Separators
- Dryers

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Filters
The drain traps shall be either electrically or mechanically operated and be provided with a discharge pipe to a
suitable tundish so that discharge is visible.
The traps shall also be provided with a manual drain valve and manual bypass.
All condensate to be collected in an oil/water separator, the filtered water to be drained to a local floor gulley.
6100 NON RETURN VALVES (NRV)

Non-return valves shall be fitted in the following locations:
- Downstream of each compressor discharge prior to entering the receiver and after any flexible delivery pipe
- In the pipeline connecting the plant to the pipeline distribution system
6110 ISOLATING VALVES

Isolating valves shall be of the manual ball type and be located as follows:
- On each compressor discharge, upstream of the non-return valve

- Upstream and downstream of multiple receivers, enabling either receiver to be isolated without interruption of
air supply to/from the other
- Upstream and downstream of each air filter/dryer assembly
- Upstream of automatic drains
- Upstream and downstream of each individual pressure regulator, final filter/relief valve assembly
6120 PRESSURE INDICATORS/DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE INDICATORS

The pressure indicators and differential pressure indicators shall be in compliance with BS.1780 or equivalent and
be calibrated in bars. The working range is not to exceed 65% of full-scale range, except on differential pressure
gauges.
For analogue gauges, have a minimum scale length of 90mm.
For digital gauges, have a minimum character height of 14mm.
Pressure indicators shall be located on the following:
- Compressor control unit, indicating receiver pressure

- On each receiver
- Downstream of each pressure regulator
- On the dryer unit
- On the distribution main in the plant room, downstream of the plant isolating valve
- Upstream and downstream of each final filter
Each pressure indicator shall be provided with an isolating valve or cock.
6140 OUTLET TERMINATION

Each outlet is to be provided with equipment as follows:

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- All other supplies to be supplied with compressed air at 6 bar each complete with line valve and quick release
connector
- All connectors should be of the two stage safety release type
6150 PIPEWORK MATERIALS

The pipework materials shall be as follows and typically in accordance with the relevant BCGA Code of Practice:-
Compressed Air – Mild Steel (Galvanized) BS 1387 screwed.
Ensure flexible pipework for air is suitable for the pressures encountered and is not subjected to direct
compression or tension during use.
Install pipework between receivers and associated engines to allow moisture in pipes to run back into receiver. Fit
moisture traps at low points in the system.
Ensure joints and valves are accessible for maintenance purposes.
6160 GUARDS
Fit guards in accordance with BS EN ISO 12100.
Provide cover plates sized to allow inspections and adjustments to be made. Hold the cover plates in position with
spring clips.
6170 INFORMATION PLATES

Achieve maximum duty when operating at altitudes between sea level and 150 metres above sea level at ambient
temperature up to 32°C with a relative humidity of 85%.
700 FIXING TO BUILDING ‘FABRIC’

800 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEM

910 PERFORMANCE TESTS

Carry out performance tests for compressors in accordance with BS ISO 1217 ,BS 5169 and BS EN 286.
Carry out performance tests for air receivers in accordance with BS 5169 and BS EN 286.
Carry out performance tests for all equipment generally in accordance with ISO 3746 and demonstrate
compliance with design parameters.
920 GENERAL
The Mechanical Installers, Specialist Compressed Air Installer shall be responsible for the static and dynamic
commissioning of all works forming part of this Package.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The purpose of this section of the specification is to provide a framework for the Testing, Regulation and
Commissioning procedures to be employed, which shall take due account of the overall work content and
programme of the entire works.
The Specialist Compressed Air Installer shall liaise fully with all other Sub-Contractors and specifically the Building
Energy Management System Specialist and his control and the Principal Contractor, to ensure all systems are
correctly set for effective commissioning.
Dynamic “Testing, Regulating and Commissioning” detailed in this section shall be carried out by a Specialist
Commissioning Engineer experienced in this type of work.
The Specialist Installer shall prepare and issue a Testing and Commissioning Method Statement, including
information such as but not limited to:
- Method of performing sectional testing

- Method of performing whole system pressure tests
- Plant testing method on and off site
- Testing and commissioning programme
- Test equipment to be used
930 WITTNESSING OF TESTS

Generally, all first fix tests are to be witnessed by a competent engineer, whom is familiar with the pre-test
checks and the pipeline set pressures.
All tests should be witnessed by a suitably qualified person to be agreed with the Contract Administrator.
940 SYSTEM TO BE BROUGHT INTO USE

Before the system can be used by staff, a suitably qualified person shall be appointed to verify that they are
satisfied the system has been designed, installed and tested in accordance with the relevant Codes of Practice.
950 TESTS
The tests to be carried out by the Specialist Installer are as detailed in the BCGA Codes of Practice CP4, CP5 &
CP6 and the BCAS Installation Guide, Guide to the Selection & Installation of Compressed Air Services.
The Specialist Installer shall produce a testing and commissioning Method Statement for review prior to testing.
960 RISK ASSESTMENT

Owing to the set pressures and duration of tests, a risk assessment shall be issued, identifying the appropriate
measures the specialist compressed air contractor shall take, in order to reduce risk of injury to third parties, in
the event of a leak or pipe rupture.
The risk assessment shall also identify the personnel responsible for carrying out the tests.
1000 SCHEDULE OF INSTALLER’S SUBMISSION

Submit the following to the Contract Administrator for comment:
- Method statements

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Equipment samples
- Wiring diagrams
- Graphical diagrams
- Completion certificate(s)
- Test and commissioning certificates
- Operating and maintenance manuals

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
S63 SPRINKLER

Provide a complete fire fighting installation, to protect the assets and risk to life inside buildings where it is
required.
Finalise the design and obtain all statutory and required acceptance of the design by the relevant governing
bodies in country and the MoDES appointed Fire Officer.
Supply, install, test and commission a complete fire fighting system as set out within this specification.
Fire Protection will be afforded to protect against risk to life and critical assets. The arrangements will comply
with NFPA standards. The NFPA suite of standards are interlinked and should be considered as a collective.
However, they present a number of alternative design solutions that are each considered as ‘compliant’. The
applied solutions shall therefore, in addition be agreed with the MoDES nominated Fire Officer for uniformity with
regular Omani practices.
The following ‘compliant’ solutions have been applied to Adam Base buildings:
- Sprinkler protection will be afforded in buildings where it is required

- Foam deluge protection will be afforded to all the Hangar
- Gas suppression fire protection will be afforded to all Data/Comms./Server room as showed on the drawings
To equip the sprinkler system such that in the event that it operates, an automatic ‘call-out’ signal is immediately
relayed back to the FM Building over the BMS through the Fire Alarm Interface

European Standard.
Local fire safety codes & regulations:
- NFPA 10 Portable Fire Extinguisher

- NFPA 13 Sprinkler System
- NFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing System 2009 Edition
- NFPA 24 Installation for private fire protection
- NFPA 409 Standard on Aircraft hangers
- NFPA 5000 Building construction and safety code
- NFPA 2001 Clean Agent fire Extinguishing system 2001 NFPA 101 - Life safety code
- NFPA 221 Standard for fire walls & barriers
- Dangerous Substances and Explosive Atmospheres Regulations (DSEAR)

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- EFDC Dirty: - Explosion Proof

210 DESIGN CRITERIA
211 GENERAL
The design of fire fighting systems shall follow the recommendations of the NFPA codes.
The fire fighting systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with the following NFPA codes and
requirements.
- Automatic supervised wet sprinkler system throughout the building to NFPA 13

- Stand pipe systems with 65mm hose reels in cabinets. Sprinklers and standpipes will be served from the same
combined system fed from the external Site Wide Fire Main (if required)
- Clean Agent Automatic fire protection shall be provided as per applicable codes for special hazard areas such
as switchgear, transformer, control rooms, server rooms and special equipment rooms. The gas to be used
shall be of the FM200 type
- The Hangars are protected by overhead sprinkler/foam system (see specification section S71)
- Fire water will be obtained by means of direct connection with the external fire main distribution or by means
of water reservoir as for Bunker
- All controls and alarms requirements shall be connected to the fire alarm system
- Internal distribution shall be in black steel with bitumen based coating or wrapping or a polyethylene slleving
for corrosion protection
- Sprinkler heads shall generally be of the spray type. Where suspended ceilings are present the heads will be
of a decorative type. All system components shall be suitable for the environment into which they are being
installed
System pressure shall be designed so as not to exceed the allowable pressure limits of the final selected
sprinklers. Wherever pressure limits are exceeded, listed pressure-reducing valves shall be provided.
Pipes shall be sized by using hydraulic calculations in accordance with the recommendations of NFPA.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Pressure reducing valves or other restricting devices are used to control the maximum pressure and maximum
flow for each water outlet point.
The Fire fighting system has been designed in such a way that water supplies from fire brigade trucks will reach
all portions of any served building.
All controls and alarms requirements are connected to the fire alarm system.
212 WATER SUPPLY

Fire water will be obtained by means of direct connection to the private site wide Fire main network.
For Bunker as a strategic building fire water will be obtained by a water reservoir.
The supply pipe shall be sized hydraulically to meet the buildings fire fighting flow requirements.
213 SPRINKLER SYSTEM

Fully automated sprinkler systems shall be provided to the buildings in accordance to the NFPA 13 requirements.
The system design shall be based on the hazard classifications that are provided in this specification and on the
accompanying drawings, as agreed at the design stage.
214 WET FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTS

To comply with NFPA 13, 14, 20 and 72 including:
- Pressure Gauges: A listed pressure gauge is to be installed in each system riser. Pressure gauges are above
and below each alarm check valve where such devices are present.
- Waterflow Detecting Devices: The alarm apparatus for a wet pipe system shall consist of a listed alarm check
valve or other listed waterflow detecting alarm device with the necessary attachments required providing an
alarm, interfaced with the Fire Alarm System.
- Relief Valves: A gridded wet pipe system has been provided with a relief valve not less than 1/4 in. (6.4 mm).
215 WET FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PRESSURE REGIMES

The residual pressure and flow rates at discharge points are as defined in NFPA 13 and 14. Pipework is sized
hydraulically in accordance with NFPA 13 to optimise pipe sizes as far as possible.
216 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided and located in accordance with NFPA 10 Standards for Portable Fire
Extinguishers. All portable extinguishers and their cabinets are to be provided with photo luminous safety signs
with appropriate labelling. Locations are indicated on the layout drawings.
Extinguishers shall be provided at all hazard areas such as kitchens, electrical rooms, chemical rooms, generators
rooms etc.
Extinguisher types to be provided are:
- Carbon Dioxide
- Water

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
217 CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM (FM200)

The design concentration for the gas will comply with the requirements of NFPA 2001, UL 2166 and will comply
with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. The discharge duration of the gas will be within 10
seconds for FM200.
The amount of FM200 required to achive the design concentration can be calculated from following formulae:
W = V / S x (C / 100-C) ---- EQ 1 (AS PER FORMULA NFPA 2001, 3-5.1)
S = 0.1269 + 0.0005 T ----- EQ 2 (AS PER TABLE A 3-5.1, NFPA 2001)
Design concentration for FM-200, C (%) = TBC BY SPECIALIST
Required discharge time = 10 Seconds (FOR FM200, PER 3-7.1.2, NFPA 2001)
Detector coverage = 24m²
Minimum Number of detector in multiple of 2 for cross zoning.
(Ionization Smoke detector -1,Optical Smoke detector-1)
Note: Cylinder capacity & Size will vary according to manufacturer.
Room volume considered here is inclusive of ceiling & raised floor Void if any.
The final sizing & Flow calculation shall be carried out by the trained manufacturer specialist.
218 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM AND STANDPIPE

The fire sprinkler system shall be designed and installed in compliance with NFPA 13, and tested and maintained
in compliance with NFPA 25. Areas where the presence of water is not desirable, such as electrical and control
equipment rooms, shall be protected by appropriate gas fire suppression systems, designed, installed and
maintained in compliance with NFPA 2001.
Electrical intake rooms are not protected.
330 WET FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

Standard, wet-type sprinkler protection will be provided inside or where other specialist systems are used in
accordance with NFPA 13.
The minimum pressure available at each sprinkler is designed so that the required design density is achieved or
the required flow at each sprinkler is achieved based on the application of the area whichever is higher. The
minimum pressure requirement stated in NFPA 13 is met.
Automatic air release valves shall be installed at the elevated level of each riser with an isolation valve. All the
isolation valves shall be provided with a switch which is electrically supervised in the Main fire alarm panel. Each
isolation valve shall be individually addressed.
The sprinkler system is zoned & each zone is provided with an isolation valve supervised electrically, flow switch
(connected to the fire alarm system) test and drain valve, pressure gauge, etc to comply with NFPA13.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The outlet of the drain valve is connected to the nearest floor drain. Sprinkler system is provided to all the
enclosed portions of the building except the areas where other specialised systems are used.
331 CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM (FM200)

Clean Agent Automatic fire protection shall be provided as per the applicable codes for special hazard areas such
as UPS room, Data Center, RAFO net, Signal Room, Storage, Radar Room et.
These areas have been identified on the drawings.
Clean Agent Systems are zoned for separate areas.
The clean agent fire suppression systems shall be performance specified for development and certification by an
approved specialist contractor.
350 FIRE EXTINGUISHER

Portable Fire Extinguishers suitable for Class ABC fires will be provided and placed according to Ordinary Hazard
classification for Class A Hazards, as described in the following table:
Requirements for Fire Classification Ordinary Hazard
Minimum rated single extinguisher 2-A
Minimum Floor area per unit A 139m²
Maximum floor area for extinguisher 1045m²

Maximum travel distance to extinguisher 23m
Portable fire extinguishers shall be maintained in compliance with NFPA 10. It is noted that NFPA permits portable
extinguishes to be located in secure locations accessible to staff.

Each sprinkler riser is connected with an alarm check valve & isolation valve. Each alarm check valve does not
serve a portion of floor exceeding 4831 m². If the floor area exceeds 4831 m² an additional alarm check valve
with riser is provided. The zoning of the sprinkler system complies with the requirements of NFPA 13.
The sprinkler system shall be provided with isolation valve supervised electrically, flow switch (connected to the
fire alarm system), test and drain valve, pressure gauge, etc. to comply with NFPA 13.
The outlet of the drain valve is connected to the nearest floor drain. Sprinkler systems shall provide to all
enclosed portions of the building except the areas where other specialised systems are used.
Upon activation of the Fire Alarm System, the sprinkler system isolation valve shall operate and the sprinkler
pipework shall be charged with water. The sprinkler system shall be complete with intelligent heads that will not
discharge before the detection of heat
410 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION

Requirements for compliance with NFPA 5000.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Upon activation of the Sprinkler System the alarm check valve shall relay a signal to the Fire Alarm Interface
within the Electrical Plant Room. The alarm signal shall then be relayed over the BMS to the head end within the
FM Building and any other required locations.
420 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

Fire system equipment that are required to be operational even after a seismic disturbance shall be designed to
withstand seismic forces as defined in 1997 uniform Building Code Zone 2A. The fabrication of equipment,
erection and installation of supports etc shall be carried out in strict compliance with the code requirements.
430 SYSTEM OPERATION ALARM

By means of a water pressure switch cause the fire alarm panel, to operate when the sprinkler system automatic
control valve opens. Use the same pressure switch to activate the automatic alarm at the FM Building.
440 VALVE STATUS

Provide electrical monitoring of the status of all Installation, Control, Stop and Alarm Gong valves. Monitor all
such valves via a micro switch to indicate whether open or shut.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
510 INSTALLER’S RESPONSABILITIES

Design, supply, install, set to work, test, commission, fully certify and handover a sprinkler system in accordance
with the function and performance required by the MoDES appointed Fire Officer.
Appoint a specialist to design, supply, install, test commission and fully certify and handover a complete FM200
fire suppression system to serve the areas indicated on the design drawings.
Obtain, at the appropriate time prior to commencing installation of the works, the written approval of the MoDES
Fire Control Officer, and any other necessary authorities.
Include within the design the following aspects:
- sprinkler installation
- ensure that all components and equipment are of approved types
- co-ordination of sprinkler positions with the architect’s ceiling design
- acoustic and vibration control measures
- piping supports, guides and anchors
- expansion/contraction provision
- drawing production
- automatic controls and associated wiring for the sprinkler installation
- interfaces to the BMS and fire alarm systems ensuring correct communication protocol
Ensure that the electrical and controls installations are made by an approved electrical contracting firm.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

Agree the colours and finishes of all exposed materials of the systems with the Contract Administrator.
530 PERMIT TO WORK

Prior to commencement of work and where appropriate , arrange for the issue of a permit to work.
540 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.
550 PLANNED SHUTDOWN

Two weeks before making the connection of the new sprinkler system to the existing one, notify the Contract
Administrator of the planned date for shutting down the existing system.
610 PIPELINES
611 GENERAL
Install all pipelines fully in accordance with section Y10 of this Specification.
Ensure that the tank infill piping, open piping, all valve trims, all piping downstream of the ‘Alternate’ valve, and
all drainage piping are in Carbon Steel with a bitumen based coating or wrapping or a polyethylene sleeving
conforming to BS 1387 for size up to 150mm NB, and BS 3600 Galvanised after fabrication for sizes over 150mm
NB. Use galvanised wrought steel (Navy pattern with bronze seats, maker’s standard) for unions.
Ensure all piping is free from burrs, rust and scale and thoroughly cleaned prior to installation. During installation
of the Works, plug or cap all open ends with purpose-made iron or plastic closures to prevent ingress of dirt. On
completion thoroughly flush each system out with clean water. Ensure that adequate drain points and air vents
are provided for this purpose.
Use screwed and socketed connections for all piping up to and including 50mm NB. For all piping over 50mm NB,
use welded prefabricated lengths (joined by screwed and socketed joints, grooved mechanical joints or flanged).
Alternatively screw and socket the piping throughout. Check that threads are taper screwed to BS21 and joints
are made with PTFE tape or white compound and hemp to BS 5292. Ensure that where grooves are used, they
are rolled and not cut.
Construct all metallic piping systems to provide electrical continuity throughout to comply with the requirements
of BS 7671. Demonstrate electrical continuity on each completed system. Where items including fittings, joints
and components incorporated into the piping system break the electrical continuity, use bonding conductors to
bridge the items.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
612 GRADIENTS
Ensure gradients of piping are in accordance with the NFPA rules. Prior to installation, agree with the Contract
Administrator all minor adjustments of gradient required to suit site conditions or co-ordination with other
services.
Install sprinkler piping so that the system can be thoroughly drained with the following minimum gradients:
- “Wet” installation: 2mm in 1m all pipes
613 PIPE SUPPORTS

Provide fixings/ supports as necessary to prevent sagging or twisting of the final sprinkler position.
614 DRAINAGE
Where piping within the system will not drain back via the installation control valves, provide a drain valve at
each lowest point that conforms to the following:
- Up to 50mm dia. piping - 20mm drain valve

- 65mm and 80mm dia. piping 32mm drain valve
- 100mm and above - 50mm drain valve
620 PIPELINES ANCILLARIES
621 GENERAL
Install all pipe ancillaries fully in accordance with section Y11 of this specification.
622 INSTALLATION CONTROL VALVES

Provide each sprinkler installation with a set of installation control valves within the intake riser or plant room.
Provide for each installation control valve set all necessary water proving apparatus and alarm gong-testing
facilities including:
- gear operated butterfly valve to BS 5155 or an equal and approved valve with indicator to show when open
and shut, electrical monitoring micro switch and padlock and strap
- approved alarm valves, (or composite alarm valves) to suit type of system, i.e. wet, alternate or dry; in the
case of life-safety systems whether single alarm and bypass arrangement, or duplicate alarm arrangement is
required
- alarm gong and water turbine for sounding an audible warning of system operation
- Pressure switch mounted in alarm gong piping for initiation of an electrical signal on system operation
- drain and test connections
- test valve, pipeline and fittings
- all necessary small bore piping (galvanised), pressure gauges and valves
- all piping, valves, straps, padlocks and identification labels

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
623 ALARM VALVES

Ensure all alarm valves are of the type approved and suitable for the system pressure.
624 STOP VALVES

Check that all sluice valves comply with BS 5163; ensure that all butterfly valves are gear operated and comply
with BS 5155. Make all valves right handed. Clearly mark the controlling wheels of all stop valves showing in
which direction the wheel is to be turned to close it; provide an indicator that shows whether the valve is open or
shut.
625 SPRINKLER TEST VALVE

Provide a test valve adjacent to the highest sprinkler on the installation (or that which is at the most hydraulically
remote location) which is capable of discharging a minimum flow rate equivalent to one sprinkler head operating.
Provide a test valve at the end of each zone.
626 SECURING OF VALVES

Secure all stop valves on the water supply mains with strap and padlock. Secure the main stop valves and the
installation control valves with leather straps and padlocks. Secure all other valves with leather straps.
Fit all drain valves with brass plugs.
630 SYSTEM ANCILLARIES
631 SPRINKLER HEADS

Requirements for Fire Classification Ordinary Hazard
Minimum rated single extinguisher 2-A
Minimum Floor area per unit A 139m²

Maximum floor area for extinguisher 1045m²
Maximum travel distance to extinguisher 23m
Verify the hazard classification, temperature rating and pattern of sprinkler heads required for each area within
the premises.
Locate sprinklers to provide coverage to conform to the hazard classification of each area.
For sprinkler heads fitted to suspended ceilings, use concealed types coloured to match the ceiling colour
specified by the architect, and obtain approval from the Contract Administrator.
632 WATER FLOW ALARM SWITCHES

Ensure all water flow alarm switches are approved.
Incorporate an adjustable time delay relay (capable of operating between 0 and 60 seconds) in all water flow
alarm switches.
Provide test cocks downstream of all switches to test and exercise the switch operation.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
633 PRESSURE SWITCHES

Provide the sprinkler installations with an approved pressure switch at the installation control valve.
634 WATER MOTOR ALARM AND GONG

Provide each sprinkler installation with a water motor alarm and gong.
Provide a 15mm test valve on the installation side of the alarm valve.
Arrange the piping to the Water Motor Alarm to drain through a fitting having an orifice not larger than 3mm
diameter.. Ensure the water alarm gong drainage piping is piped to discharge over a drain point.
635 FIRE ALARM INTERFACE

Allow for a fire alarm interface to relay signals via the BMS upon activation of either the fire alarm or sprinkler
system to the FM building monitoring station.
Upon activation ensure compliance with the Controls section of this specification.
636 PRESSURE GAUGES

On all sprinkler installations provide a pressure gauge fitted immediately above the alarm valve and another
gauge immediately below the alarm and main stop valve.
Provide means to enable each pressure gauge to be readily removed without interruption of installation water
supplies.
637 FLOW MEASURING DEVICE

Ensure that the flow measuring device is complete with all necessary isolating valves. Fit a sluice valve upstream
and a butterfly valve downstream of the device.
700 PAINTING
Paint all steel piping, fittings, supports and brackets in accordance with Y50.

910 GENERAL
920 PAINTING
Apply one coat of primer paint, one coat undercoat and two coats red gloss to all exposed piping and, upon
completion, touch-up to repair any damage caused to the finish by the installation work. Apply ID banding to all
piping in accordance with BS 1710.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
930 LABELLING AND SIGNS

Supply and fit a ‘location plate’ on the valve access route in a position to be agreed with the architect, bearing the
following words:
Sprinkler stop valve inside
Arrange its letters to be at least 35mm in height and the word 'INSIDE' to be in letters of at least 25mm in
height.
Fit all valves with engraved aluminium labels stating their number and purpose.
Individually identify all valves on a schedule (produced in resilient material) wall mounted in the Fire Pump Room.
Include a copy of this schedule with the operating and maintenance instruction manual.
1010 GENERAL
1020 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS

Carry out all tests and inspections to prove that the installation meets with the requirements of the NFPA and
MoDES appointed Fire Officer’s requirements.
Carry out all tests required by the Fire Officer giving adequate notice with regard to timing of tests, etc.
Inspect and test the installation at agreed stages to ensure that the piping is properly secured and clear of
Carry out a low-pressure air test, to establish whether open ends are present, prior to carrying out a hydraulic
test on completion of the installation, or sections thereof.
Perform a static pressure test on the system, using a pressure 1½ times normal working pressure or 15 bar
(whichever is the greater). Run the test for a minimum period of two hours and check that there is no significant
loss of pressure.
Test all alarms and alarm connections associated with the sprinkler installation and prove all interlocks and links
to other systems and remote locations.
Upon completion of the installation of the system carry out functional tests in the presence of all interested
parties to demonstrate to the satisfaction of all present that the installation conforms to the required standards.
When these tests have been accepted by all parties as being satisfactory, issue a completion certificate.
Keep a record of all pressure tests carried out to include the following:
- date of test
- drawing Reference
- method of Test
- test Pressure

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- result of Test
- signature of operative carrying out test and Company
- signature of Witnessing Supervising Officer or his approved representative
Carry out two inspections, the first 6 months and the second 12 months after completion of the installation.
Include the following tasks in the inspection:
Water supplies
- carry out running and proving tests on both pump sets

- check correct operation of float valves on water storage tanks
- check rate of infill to water storage tanks
- exercise and grease stop valves on incoming mains supply, pump suction and delivery piping and ensure that
they open and shut freely
- check operation and seating of non-return valves/alarm valves
- check valve glands for leakage
- check pump glands for leakage
- check operating pressures on pressure switches
- check operation of jockey pump
- check operation of pressure relief valves on pumps
- check operation of remote alarm functions
Installation control valves
- carry out flow and pressure tests

- check satisfactory operation on turbine alarm gong
- exercise and grease all stop valves and ensure they open and shut easily
- check valve glands for leakage
- check seating of alarm valves
General
- check all pressure gauges are registering correctly

- check satisfactory operation of all flow switches and monitored stop valves
- check all small bore piping, valves and ancillaries for satisfactory operation
- check spacing and location of sprinklers in relation to any new walls or partitions erected since completion of
systems
- ensure all valves are suitably secured and labelled
- systems to be left in fully operational condition
1111 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS

Submit the following for the Contract Administrator’s comment:
- selected specialist design proposals

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- specialist technical submissions and proposals for the supply and installation of all items of equipment and
associated components
- manufacturer’s design and installation drawings
- installation and commissioning programme
- installation method statements
- inspection details and certificates
- operating and maintenance manuals for all items of installed components and equipment
- record drawings
- completion certificate(s)
- test and commissioning certificates
- manufacturer’s test certificates to verify compliance

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
S71 FOAM FIRE FIGHTING

To provide a piped distribution system to convey fire-fighting foam from a generating source to the Hangar
building and discharge it into them, when activated by an outbreak of a combustible solids or a flammable liquid
fire.
To ensure that the foam fire-fighting system complies with the requirements of the Local Authority Fire
Prevention Officer and MoDES appointed fire officer.
To arrange that the system operates whether or not the building is occupied.
To ensure that in the event that the system operates when the building is occupied no hazard results to the
building’s occupants.
To ensure that the water supply for producing fire-fighting foam is securely available in sufficient quantity, at all
times.
To configure the fire fighting foam piping to achieve a reasonably evenly distributed delivery of foam. To ensure
that the risk of corrosion, particularly internal, of the foam distribution piping is minimised.
To ensure that the disposal (drainage) systems of bunds and spill areas are not able to adversely affect the foam
firefighting system. To ensure that such drainage systems, including their interceptors, are of adequate capacity
to properly dispose of the water used in firefighting.
The fire fighting systems shall be designed according to NFPA and shall be as follows:
- Automatic supervised wet sprinkler system throughout to NFPA 13 (Refer to S63)

- Sprinklers and standpipes will be served from the fire fighting distribution site utility (Refer to S63)
- Wet Foam System supplied by a bladder tank shall be provided for hangar area fire protection
- The Hangars are protected by overhead sprinkler/foam system to NFPA 409
- All controls and alarms requirements shall be connected to the fire alarm system
- Sprinkler heads shall generally be of the spray type. Where suspended ceilings are present the heads will be
of a decorative type (Refer to S63)

European Standard.
- Local fire safety codes & regulations

- The Health & Safety at Work etc. Act
- The Pipelines Safety Regulations
- The Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences Regulations (RIDDOR

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

- The Water Supply (Water Quality) Regulations (Amendment) Regulations
- CIBSE Guide E - Fire engineering
o HSE L81 The design, construction and installation of gas services pipes. Pipelines Safety Regulations.
Approved Code of Practice and Guidance
o IOP Plumbing Engineering Services Design Guide. Part 9 – Fire protection services NFPA 11 Standard
for Low-, Medium-, and High-Expansion Foam
o NFPA 16 Standard for the Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray Systems
o NFPA 13 Sprinkler System
o NFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing System 2009 Edition NFPA 24 Installation for private fire protection
o NFPA 5000 Building construction and safety code NFPA 101 Life safety code
o NFPA 221 Standard for fire walls & barriers
o NFPA 409 Standard on Aircraft Hangars, 2004 Edition
The design of fire fighting systems shall follow the recommendations of the NFPA codes.
Fire water will be obtained by means of direct connection to private site wide Fire main network.
System pressure is designed so as not to exceed the allowable pressure limits of sprinklers. Wherever pressure
limits are exceeded, listed pressure-reducing valves are provided.
Pipes shall be sized by using hydraulic calculations in accordance with the recommendations of NFPA 13 and 14.
Siamese connections are to be provided for fire fighting system in each building. The Fire fighting system to be
designed in such a way that water supply from fire brigade trucks will reach all portions of any served building.
All controls and alarms requirements are connected to the fire alarm system.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Pressures reducing valves or other restricting devices are used to control the maximum pressure and maximum
flow for each water outlet point.

The Hangar shall be supplied by a combined water and foam system set out herein.
Extend the incoming fire main from the local branch connections from the Site Wide Infrastructure Fire Main,
located within a manhole close to the boundary from the Hangars, to enter the building via the Fire Suppression
Room.
The incoming main shall split to serve the wet sprinkler system at high level within the facility and the foam
bladder tanks located within the Fire Suppression Room.
311 FOAM SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA

The wet Foam system will provide foam coverage on the surface of aircraft and the floor around aircraft, to
provide protection in case of fuel leaks. The system is completely stand-alone, served by balanced flow piped
nozzles at the ceiling level.
The Foam system installation will comply with the requirements of NFPA-11 for fixed spray type systems
The design discharge density of foam-water systems shall not be less than: 0.16 gpm / ft² ( 6.5 L/min-m²)
Aqueous film-forming foam concentrate (AFFF) = 3%
The foam solution shall be designed to discharge for a period of 10 minutes
Design Criteria
- System type: - fixed/ and self-contained (premix)

- Application method: - branch pipe/monitor/spray/pourer/subsurface (base injection) semi-subsurface
- Foam spray system type: - overhead/horizontal/upward
- Method of operation: - automatic/manual
- Foam type: - aspirated/non-aspirated
- Foam concentrate class: - AFFF
- Foam expansion ratio type: - High
- Foam concentration: - 3% by volume
- Min. time for 25% drainage of foam: - 10 minutes Foam application rate: - 6.5 l/m²/minute
- Min. duration of application: - 10 minutes
- Quantity of foam concentrate stored: - 2 x 1000 litres (530 gal.)
- Foam concentrate/foam solution piping: - fully charged
- Proportioning method: - Injection/balanced pressure/
- Water supply source: - fire-water
- Temperature of stored cold water: - 10-20ºC (must be between 5ºC and 38ºC)
The amount of foam required to achive the design concentration can be calculated from following formula.
- Foam Water Flow Rate F = R x T1

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Where:- R = Total Discharge Rate and T1 = Discharge Duration (10 minutes)

- R = A x D , A = Room Area (m²) - , and D = Foam discharge density ( L/ min- m² )
320 PRESSURE GAUGE

Pressure gauges shall be installed above and below each alarm check valve where such devices are present.
330 WATER FLOW DETECTING DEVICES

The alarm apparatus for a wet pipe system shall consist of a listed alarm check valve or other listed water flow
detecting alarm device with the necessary attachments required to give an alarm.
340 RELIEF VALVES

A gridded wet pipe system shall be provided with a relief valve not less than 1/4 in. (6.4 mm)
350 WET FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PRESSURE REGIMES

The residual pressure and flow rates at discharge points are as defined in NFPA 13 and 14.
Pipework will be sized hydraulically in accordance with NFPA 13 to optimise pipe sizes as far as possible.
410 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

Arrange that the fire-fighting foam system automatically generates foam and releases it to the pipe distribution
system on activation of the basement zone of the fire detection and alarm system described in Section W50 of
this specification.
In the event that the fire-fighting foam system is activated manually, arrange for an alarm signal to be received
by the fire detection and alarm system.
420 PLANT ALARM

Ensure that the common fault alarm signal on the control panel of the foam generator is repeated at the BMS.
Arrange that it operates when the firewater pump fails to maintain adequate pressure.
430 AUDIBLE ALARM

Arrange an audible alarm to operate adjacent to the area being protected by the foam system, when the foam
system control panel is in foam-release mode.
440 ELECTRICAL INTERLOCK

Arrange that activation of the fire detection and alarm system automatically isolates the electricity supply to the
foam release area prior to the generation and discharge of foam.
460 LOCK-OFF
Ensure that the system is disabled and cannot generate foam when the lock-off button has been operated.
Provide a signal to the BMS that the system is in lock-off mode.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
470 INTERMITTENT FOAM FLOW

Arrange the foam generating equipment to automatically discharge the foam intermittently
480 REMOTE CONTROL

Install all components required to enable remote control from the Security Guard Room, of particular fixed
monitors, as shown on the drawings.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
510 RESPONSIBILITIES
Employ a specialist installer to design, supply, install, test, commission and certify the foam fire fighting system.

Agree all proposed methods of fixing the systems to structure, roof, cladding, chimneys, equipment, etc. with the
Agree the colours and finishes of all exposed materials of the systems with the Contract Administrator.
512 PERMIT TO WORK

513 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.
610 PIPELINES
Use long radius bends, and not elbows, in the foam distribution piping system. Install all piping fully in
accordance with section Y10 of this specification.
612 CARBON STEEL

Install carbon steel pipelines with a bitumen based coating or wrapping or a polyethylene sleeving for all piping
downstream of the fire water pumps and for all piping downstream of the proportioning device, including all foam
distribution pipes, to Y10. Ensure that the gaskets of flanged joints are non-combustible. Ensure that the piping is
capable of being fully drained out after usage, with minimum gradients of 1:120, and with drain valves where
necessary.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
620 PIPELINE ANCILLARIES
621 GENERAL
Locate all valves outside of the areas being fire protected by the fire-fighting foam system. Install all pipe
ancillaries fully in accordance with section Y11 of this specification.
622 MANUAL ISOLATION VALVE

Fit manually operated readily accessible isolation valves where shown on the drawings, each fitted with a
mechanism to lock it normally open and with an open-shut indicator. For pipes up to 50mm nominal bore use
globe valves to BS EN 13709 and for 65mm and above use butterfly valves to BS EN 593 with lever handle.
623 DRAIN VALVES

Fit drain valves at all low points on foam solution piping and foam distribution piping.
624 NON RETURN VALVES

Fit a non-return valve to BS EN 12334 in every foam discharge pipe downstream of the foam generator where
supplying a sub-surface system.
625 STRAINERS
Install a strainer in the foam solution piping upstream of the foam-maker.
700 EQUIPMENT
710 PROPORTIONING DEVICE

Provide the following type of proportioning device:
- injection type
- balanced pressure type
- induction type
- line proportion type
720 FOAM MAKER/GENERATOR

Provide the following type of foam/generator:
- fixed type
- high pressure type
- mechanical type
- high expansion foam generator
- electrically powered
730 PUMPS
Comply with the pump schedule and with section Y20 of this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
740 TANKS
Comply with the tank schedule and with section Y21 of this specification.
760 FOAM INLET

Install a foam inlet at the ground floor entrance to the plant room in accordance with Specification Section Y11.
800 PAINTINGS
Paint all steel piping, fittings, supports and brackets in accordance with section Y50 of this specification.


Install the following warning signs:
- at the entrances to the areas served by the system

- at the electricity supply of the water pump warning not to isolate it without enacting a procedure for
permission
- adjacent to every isolation valve stating that it should be locked normally open
Fix labels to all tanks indicating their capacity, contents (foam concentrate, foam solution, etc.), and grade.
Clean all piping forming part of this installation, and paint associated brackets and supports in accordance with
1110 GENERAL
Inspect, test and commission the system fully In accordance with BS EN 13565-2.
1120 VISUAL EXAMINATION

Visually examine the installation including the following:
- the piping is supported adequately

- piping is arranged and marked or painted correctly
- hand wheels or levers are fitted to valves with locking mechanisms and clear indication of open/closed
position
- all dry piping is properly drained
- all temporary piping blinds are removed
- all portable equipment is correctly located
- all notices and warning signs are fitted

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- control panels and lock-offs are correctly located

- electrical bonding is complete
- installation drawings and line diagrams have been prepared and fitted at the primary meter and elsewhere as
appropriate
1130 TESTING
Hydraulically pressure test all piping and fittings downstream of the fire pumps to a minimum of 1.5 times the
normal working pressure for one hour.
Flush all foam distribution piping with water and clean out all pipeline strainers, after pressure testing and again
after completion of commissioning.
1140 COMMISSIONING
Commission the installation including the following:
- check that all automatic controls and alarms function as intended

- carry out discharge tests and measure the rate of application of fire-fighting foam
- prove the operation of electrical interlocks
- demonstrate the interlinks with the fire alarm system and BMS
- prove that the drainage system from bunds is normally closed but is of adequate capacity to properly dispose
of fire–fighting foam

- method statements
- drawings of warning signs (to agree the wording)
- commissioning test programme
- inspection and maintenance schedule
- wiring diagrams
- equipment samples
- graphical diagrams
- user training schedule
- operating instructions (copies to be placed near the fire-fighting foam system control panel and at the BMS
monitor screen

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
T90 HEATING SYSTEM
100 GENERAL
For condensation of water condensed chillers installed inside bunkers a geothermal system made of vertical
ground heat exchanger will be provided.
525 GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER

In this system heat is rejected to the ground via a closed loop (ground heat exchanger). The ground heat
exchanger typically consist of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipes which are installed in vertical borehole,
called vertical GHE.
The completed bore shall be located so that it is incorporated into the final ground-loop heat exchanger design. A
completed vertical test bore shall consist of the vertical bore with an approved polyethylene u-bend assembly
installed to the completed bore depth with an approved grouting material installed in the bore annulus
The ground heat exchanger is buried vertically in a boreholes, vertical collectors are used where land is limited,
and for larger installation .
They are inserted as U-tubes into pre-drilled boreholes, generally 100mm to 150mm diameter and 15m to 120m
deep
Vertical bore can be drilled either by a mud-rotary drilling rig or by a compressed-air drilling rig which ever is
most feasible based on geological conditions.
Drilling contractor shall provide a detailed test bore report. The report shall include the following information:
- - Each formation type encountered (drill log)

- - Each formation depth (in feet)
- - Depth of any significant cracks, fissures or caverns encountered
- - All water bearing zones and if encountered
o a. Zone depths
o b. Estimated flow rate
- - Type of drilling equipment used (i.e. mud-rotary, air-rotary, air-hammer, etc.), and rig model number
- - Bag quantity of drill mud used if applicable
- - Total time to drill the test bore excluding shut-downs to obtain water or mechanical break-downs
Drilling contractor shall be responsible for all permits and following all applicable codes and regulations. Where
any discrepancy exists between local codes and regulations and this specification, the more stringent of the two
documents prevail.
Drilling contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the site from any damage resulting from the
drilling operation.
Borehole diameter:
The diameter of the vertical bore shall not be greater than 6 inches (152.4 mm) and shall not be less than 4.5
inches (114.3 mm). The final diameter shall be determined by the drilling contractor's available equipment.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Completed borehole depth:
The completed bore depth shall be within 5% of the final estimated design bore depth for the specific project.
The completed depth shall be determined by the placement of the u-bend. The distance from the bottom of the
u-bend to the surface shall constitute the completed bore depth. At minimum, an additional 5 feet (1.52 m) of
pipe length (on both the supply and return legs) shall be left above the installed u-bend assembly, above ground
level/finished grade.
Polyethylene U-bend assembly
The polyethylene U-bend assembly shall be manufactured from a polyethylene extrusion grade material. The U-
bend shall be factory assembled and pressure tested to 100 psi prior to insertion into the vertical bore. The u-
bend pipe diameter shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm), 1 inch (25.4 mm) or 1-1/4 inch (31.8 mm) as determined from the
table below;
U-Bend Pipe Diameter Completed Bore Depth

3/4in (19mm) Polyethylene 100-200 ft (30.48-60.96m)
1in (25.4 mm) Polyethylene 150-300 ft (45.72-91.44m)
1 1/4in (31.8mm) Polyethylene 250-500 ft (45.72-91.44m)
Any and all connections made below grade shall be done using heat fusion.
Pipe manufacturer and total installed u-bend length shall be reported immediately following bore completion.
Grouting materials
The annular space between the vertical bore wall and the u-bend assembly shall be filled with a bentonite-based
grouting material with a minimum solids content of 20%. The grouting material shall be mixed in strict
accordance to the manufacturers mixing instructions. Grouting material shall be placed using a pressure pump
with a tremie pipe system. The material shall be installed from the bottom to the top of the vertical bore. If any
settling occurs during the initial 24-hour period after installation, additional material shall be added to insure that
grouting material remains at surface level.
In the event that a geological formation is encountered that prevents the grouting material from forming a solid
seal, either a 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) or 3/4 inch (19 mm) granular bentonite material may be use through that
specific formation zone. Upon completion of that specific zone, the grout slurry shall continue to be use until
reaching the surface of the vertical bore.
Grout manufacturer and percent solids shall be reported immediately following bore completion.
526 SCOPE OF WORK

The formation thermal conductivity test is designed to determine the average thermal conductivity of the
formation for the completed bore depth.
Testing agency responsible for data collection oversight and data analysis must have a minimum of ten years
company experience in thermal conductivity testing of vertical bore heat exchangers. Experience must include not
less than 100 successfully completed tests. A list of previous tests shall be made available upon request, including
references and contact information.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The testing device shall be designed so that a constant rate of heated water is supplied in an uninterrupted
fashion to the u-bend assembly.
Temperatures shall have a minimum measured accuracy of ± 0.5°C.
Power transducers shall have a minimum accuracy of ± 2.0 % of reading.
Insulation:
The entire testing device shall be designed to prevent as much heat loss to the environment as possible. The
testing device shall have an equivalent insulation 1.0” fiberglass. Each end of the u-bend assembly shall be
insulated with a 0.5” closed-cell insulation to prevent heat loss or heat gain.
Elapsed time after bore installation before testing:
When the test bore is drilled with a mud rotary drilling device, the test shall be scheduled to start no sooner than
48 hours (2 days) after final bore completion.
In the event that compressed air drilling is employed, the test shall be scheduled to start no sooner than 120
hour (5 days) after final bore completion.
Input heat rate:
- The average heat input shall be within the range of 51.2 Btu/ft (15 watts) and 85.4 Btu/ft (25 watts).
- The average input heat rate shall be reported in the final analysis.
Data Acquisition Frequency:
Data shall be taken at a frequency of no more than every 5 minutes throughout the duration of the test. Data
collected shall consist of the following as a minimum; temperature into the loop, temperature out of the loop,
ambient air temperature within the test unit compartment, ambient outdoor air temperature and watts.
Data collection device shall have the ability to accurately measure the initial ground temperature.
Test Duration:
The duration of the formation thermal conductivity test shall be a minimum of 40 hours from the initial starting
time.
Power interruptions are unacceptable for this type of testing. In the event an interruption occurs which lasts
longer than 5 minutes, power should be restored as soon as possible and the test continued to conclusion.
Provisions shall be made to run the test again based on the analysis of the collect data. In such event, the
vertical bore shall be allowed to thermally rest for a period of at least 14 days prior to re-starting the test.
Test Data Analysis Procedure:
Data analysis shall follow 2010 IGSHPA (International Ground Source Heat Pump Association) standards. Data
analysis personnel shall have an engineering degree from an accredited university with a background in heat
transfer and experience with Line Source theory. Documentation regarding qualifications shall be supplied upon
request.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
55 PIPED SUPPLY SYSTEM
55-40-40/140 INSTANTANEOUS HOT WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

Distribution of cold and hot water inside buildings will be realized with PVC-C pipes. PVC-C pipes are corrosion
resistant pressure pipe, for use at temperatures up to and including 95°C. Pressure rating (130psi to 1130 psi).
Generally resistant to most acids, bases, salts, aliphatic solutions, oxidants, and halogens. Chemical resistance
data is available and should be referenced for proper material selection. Pipe exhibits excellent flammability
characteristics (ULC Listed for Surface Burning Characteristics) and other physical properties. Typical applications
include: Chemical processing, plating, high purity applications, hot and cold potable water system, water and
wastewater treatment, and other industrial applications involving hot corrosive fluid transfer.
90-10-65/345 CHLORINATED POLYVINYLCHLORIDE (PVC-C) PIPELINES IS A THERMOPLASTIC PIPES

General requirements:
Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) is a thermoplastic pipe and fitting material made with CPVC. Industrial
CPVC pipe is manufactured by extrusion in sizes from 1/4” to 12” diameter Sch 40, Sch 80, and SDR(Standard
Dimension Ratio) dimensions.
Standard:
- Pipe:
o To BS EN ISO 15877-2, class 1
o To BS EN ISO 15877-2, class 2;
o To BS EN ISO 15877-2, class 4;
o and To BS EN ISO 15877-2, class 5;
- Fittings:
o To BS EN ISO 15877-3
Colour:
- Manufacture’s standard
55-40-40/120 COLD WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

Pipelines: Polyethylene (PE) pipelines for water supply installation below ground.
90-10-65/365 POLYETHYLENE (PE) PIPELINES FOR WATER SUPPLY

General requirements:
Pipes shall have true section complying with the sizes specified on drawings. All pipes shall be free from cracks,
holes, blisters, voids, projections, defects, roughness and chalcking, sticky or tacky material. Fittings shall have a
minimum pressure rating equal to the pressure rating of the pipe it is attached to. Pipe and fittings must be
marked, pipe markings will include nominal size, OD base (ie.: 12 inch iron pipe sizong,IPS), dimension, ratio,
pressure class, working pressure rating (WPR), manufacturer’s name, manufacturer’s production code including
day, month, year extruded, and manufacture’s plant and extrusion line.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Standard:
- Pipes: To BS ISO 4427-2, PE 100

- Fittings: To BS ISO 4427-3, PE100
- Colour: Black
90-10-65/380 JOINTING MATERIALS FOR PLASTIC TUBES:

Standard:
- Compression: To BS EN 1254-3.
- Electrofusion: To BS EN 12201-3
- Socket and spigot: To BS EN 12201-3
- Solvent cement: To BS EN ISO 1452-3.
- Elastomeric ring seal: To BS EN ISO 1452-3.
55-45-50/115 DRIP IRRIGATION SYSTEM

Drip irrigation, also known as micro irrigation or trickle irrigation, applies water slowly, directly to the soil around
the planting.
Drip irrigation systems using low-flow hoses or emitters can save more than half the water that overhead
sprinklers lose due to evaporation and/ or runoff – they should also reduce the incidence of fungal disease,
because the foliage is never wetted. This type of irrigation generally does not saturate the soil, so there is little
negative effect on overall soil structure and, since the area watered is reduced, weed growth is also reduced.
Another advantage of drip irrigation is that it reduces water contact with leaves, stems, and fruit thus making
conditions less favourable for many diseases. Low volumes of water can be directed to individual plants by laying
polyethylene tubing either on the ground or just below the surface, terminating at a trickle head or with a series
of side branches to individual plants. However, their performance can be altered by root penetration, they can be
easily damaged and are not suited to lawns or broad areas.
Drip systems are commonly used for containerized plantings. They are popular in arid climates because a drip
head applies water to each plant avoiding wastage. Due to the method of application, there is little nuisance to
the public and waste through evaporation is minimized.
Soaker hoses are porous and seep water throughout their length. They can be either placed on the surface of the
soil or buried within the topsoil depth. Regular but not constant water flow ensures that the soil is kept moist
without overwatering, and avoids waste through evaporation and surface runoff. In lawns pipes should be buried
150–300 mm deep and spaced 300–400 mm apart. For shrub planting beds hoses can be buried shallower and at
wider spacings. As for drip systems there is no nuisance to the public and when pipes are buried in the soil there
is no restriction on operating times.
Underground systems are relatively expensive to install but there are many benefits including:
- Water goes direct to root zone where needed.

- Less water lost through evaporation and surface runoff.
- Less fungal attack due to soil/ compost surface remaining dry.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
In drip irrigation water flows through a filter into special drip pipes, with emitters located at different spacing.
Water is discharged through the emitters directly into the soil near the plants through a special slow-release
device.
The drip irrigation system will be supplied by the same underground tanks and pumping system that supplies
sprinkler as decribed below.
Following the components of drip irrigation system are described:
- Remote Control Valve: Use wire connectors and waterproofing sealent to join control wires to solenoid valves.
- Drip emitters:
o Barb mounted, pressure compensating emitter device
o Install emitters types and quantities on the following schedule
Ground cover plant: 1 single outlet each or 1 single outlet emitter per square foot of planting area,
whichever is less
Shrub: 2 single outlet emitters each
Tree: 8 single outlet emitters each
- Use 1/4 inch diameter flexible plastic tubing to direct water from emitter outlet to emission point. Lenght of
emitter outlet tubing shall not exceed five feet. Secure emitter outlet tubing with tubing stakes
55-45-50/175 SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM

The irrigation system will consist of underground tanks which are filled with water or by the recycling water
treatment from sewage system or rainwater collected coming from the roof.
A pumping system installed inside tanks supply different irrigation systems such as pop-up sprinklers and drip
irrigation.
Sprinklers are the most commonly used watering method, particularly suitable for lawns and large areas.
Various sprinkler heads, with different watering patterns are available:
- - Oscillating sprinklers provide overhead watering from a perforated tube, distributing water over a square or
rectangular area.
- - Rotating sprinklers eject water from one or more nozzles that are forced around by water pressure, watering
a circular area.
- - Fixed spray misters simply spray water upward in a limited area
- - Fixed pop-up sprinklers can be installed as part of a permanent underground irrigation system. Installed
below ground, they rise up under water pressure facilitating landscape maintenance and are practically
invisible during system off. These nozzles sit just below the soil surface when out of action and pop up when
in use. They are suitable for irrigating large turf areas but have limited application for playing surfaces of
sports fields, due to potential for injury to players. Permanent systems are convenient but costly to install.
Watering with sprinkler systems is best limited to early morning, late evening or night applications when wind
speeds are at their lowest, water loss due to evaporation is minimized and it is generally less of an inconvenience
to the public.
System performance
- Design:
o In accordance with BS 7562-6 and to BS EN 12484-2

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Water supply:
o Source: Reservoirs placed underground supplied by rainwater and recycled water coming from the
sewage treatment plant. A redundant system made of boreholes will be provided.The water source
should be controlled to ensure that contamination does not occur
o Supply pipelines: Polyethylene (PE) pipelines for water supply
o Storage: Glass Reinforced plastic Underground tanks
o Float valves: Plastic body, diaphragm type float operated valve
- Pumps:
o Submersible pumps;
- Distribution system:
o Distribution pipelines: Polyethylene (PE) pipelines for water supply
o Polyethylene (PE) pipelines for water supply
o Check valves: Shall be to BS EN 12334, swing, straight, for horizontal use and suitable for working
pressure of 16 bars. Ductile iron from basic materials listed in BS EN 12334 Table 5, under ‘copper alloy
faced’ column
o Seating or facing rings are to be renewable. An arrow showing direction of flow is to be visible from
outside and cast integral with the valve housing. End connections will be either flanged to BS EN 1092-2,
or screw ended to BS 21 to suit joints specified for adjoining pipes. Casting surfaces are to be given an
initial coat to protective paint immediately after shot blasting and a second coat on assembly. Protective
coating is to be hot applied coal tar or bitumen to BS 4164 or BS 3416 respectively. Minimum thickness
of coating shall be 250 microns
o Isolating valves: Cast in iron or steel ball valves; Size 50mm and smaller to BS 5154 inside screw, solid
wedge, rising stem and screwed bonnet. Size 65 mm and larger to BS 5163, inside screw, solid wedge,
resilient seated, for valves 350mm and smaller and metal seated for valves 400mm and larger, bolted
bonnet, non rising stem type, suitable for NP 16 for irrigation networks. Material of component parts
from basic or alternative materials listed in BS 5163; End Connections: Size 50mm and smaller screwed
end to BS21. End Connections: Size 65mm and larger flanged end connection to BS EN 1092-2. Valves
larger than 400mm diameter are to have spur gear drive operated by removable key. Valves smaller
than 400mm are to be operated by hand-wheel. Casting surfaces are to be given an initial coat of
protective paint immediately after shot blasting and a second coat on assembly. Protective coating is to
be hot applied coal tar or bitumen to BS 4164 or BS 3416 respectively. Thickness of coat to be 250
microns
o Zone control: On-Off Solenoid operated valves Type: Pilot controlled, single seated, hydraulically
operated, diaphragm type globe valve fitted with solenoid control valve to keep main valve open then
energized and to close tight main valve once de-energized. Construction will be in Cast iron body and
cover, stainless steel main valve trim and all stainless steel pilot system. Control shall comprise auxiliary
controls to permit adjustment of valve opening and closing speeds of up to 2 minutes for opening and
for closing. Accessories shall include adjustable opening speed control, adjustable closing speed control,
interconnecting stainless steel tubing and unions., internal and external coating of epoxy as described
for float valves
o Nutrient supply: Glass fibre reinforced tanks

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o Strainer: Self cleaning filter with stainless steel filter insert for fitting in the ground in front of the tank,
suitable for pedestrian loading
o Controls: The 24 V electrically operated irrigation solenoid valves shall be controlled by the irrigation
program controller and positioned as shown on the Drawings. The controllers shall be interlocked with
the pumping system to ensure that the pumps operate after the irrigation valves are open. The irrigation
control electric cables, connecting the irrigation program controller to the solenoid valves shall be copper
PVC insulated and PVC sheathed. The sizes of cables shall be commensurate with the distances between
the controller and valves, operating pressure and manufacturer’s recommendations. The cables shall be
approved for ground feeders directly buried and rated for 600/1000V. They shall be clipped to the main
water pipework. Multi-runs of cables shall be bunched and tied together at one meter intervals using
PVC tape and clipped to the underside of the water pipework at 2metersintervals using plastic straps. To
allow full flexibility of the system, each valve shall have a separate control cable such that any valve
sequence control may be re-adjusted. Where required, cable junction boxes shall be fitted. These shall
be purpose made boxes fitted with fixed connectors and suitably labeled. These boxes shall be fitted
with glands and gasketed lid to ensure a fully dust tight and weatherproof enclosure IP65. Each solenoid
valve shall be fitted with fixed terminals inside IP 65 box and suitable for wiring from the valve to be
connected. All cable cores shall be fitted with marker ferrules at each and for ease of identification, and
all valves shall be fitted with identification labels
- System accessories:
o Weatherproof equipment enclosures
o Cover for storage tanks
- Execution:
o Installing irrigation pipelines
o Installing fixed sprinkler
- System completion
o Testing irrigation pipework
o Testing sprinkler system
o Commissioning of automatic turf irrigation equipment
o Spares and tools for irrigation system
o Certificates and operating manuals for irrigation system
55-45-50/175 DESIGN OF SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM

Design scope:
Supply, install, test and commissioning the whole irrigation system, based on the requirements and parameters
outlined within this specification and as indicated on the accompanying detail design drawings
- Standard:
o To BS 7562-6, BS EN 806-2, BS EN 806-3 and BS EN 12484-2
- Water supply:
o Quality:To BS 7562-3 and BS 7562-4
o Pressure:150-350 kPa (1.5-3.5 bar)

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Pipeline design:
o Factors affecting size calculations: Flow rates (minimum) for delivery pipes: 8500 l/h
o Suitable discharge rates at distribution points: 720 l/h
o Pump duty: Select pump at or near the most efficient part of the performance curve required duty
o Discharge requirements: Provide adequate flow rates from available water pressure
o Submittals: Typical plan, drawings at suitable scales
55-40-50/230 DURABILITY OF IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT

- Life expectancy (minimum): 20 years
90-10-65/365 POLYETHYLENE (PE) PIPELINES FOR WATER SUPPLY

- General requirements: Jointing materials for plastic tubes
- Standard: Pipes: To BS ISO 4427-2. PE 100; Fittings To BS ISO 4427-3, PE100
- Colour: Black
- Options: Pipeline supports
- Execution: Installing buried pipelines, installing plastic pipellines
90-10-65/380 JOINTING MATERIALS FOR PLASTIC TUBES

- Standard:
o Compression: To BS EN 1254-3
o Electrofusion: To BS EN 12201-3
o Socket and spigot: To BS EN 12201-3
o Solvent cement: To BS EN ISO 1452-3
o Elastomeric ring seal: To BS EN ISO 1452-3
90-10-70/310 PUMPS SELECTION

- Type: Submersible pumps
- General: Select pump at near the most efficient part of the performance curve for required duty
90-10-70/320 PUMPS GENERALLY

- General safety standard: To BS EN 809
- Electrical safety: To BS EN 60335-2-51
- Dynamic balance: To BS ISO 2953
- Test standards: To BS EN ISO 9906 and in accordance with BS EN ISO 5198
- Connections: Flanged, copper alloy and composite to BS EN 1092-3; Flanged, cast iron: To BS EN 1092-2
- Threaded: To BS 21 or BS EN 10226-1
90-10-70/430 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

- Material:

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o Pump casing: Stainless steel

o Impeller: Stainless steel
o Shaft: Stainless steel
90-10-90/305 CONNECTION FOR ACCESSORIES

- Capillary: To BS EN 1254-1
- Compression for plastics pipes To BS EN 1254-3
- Flanged for cast iron: To BS EN 1092-2
- Flanged for copper alloy: To BS 1092-3
- Threaded: Where pressure-tight joints are made on the threads To BS 21 or BS EN 10226-1
Where pressure-tight joints are not made on threads To BS EN ISO 228-1
90-10-90/334 CAST IRON BALL VALVES

- Standard: To BS ISO 7121
- Arrangement: Full bore, Long pattern
- Material: Cast Iron
- Connection: Flanged, Threaded
- Options: Hand wheel
- Execution: Installation valve generally
90-10-90/348 CAST IRON CHECK VALVES

- Standard: To BS EN 12334
- Arrangement: Swing
- Body type: Flanged
- Mounting: Horizontal
- Iron type: Grey
- Connection: Flanged
- Execution: Installation of valves generally
90-10-95/310 FIBERGLASS UNDERGROUND TANKS AND

- General Requirement: Structurally strong, corrosion-resistant, watertight, easily installed and cost-effective.
Designed to be inherently rust-proof and corrosion-resistant and watertight. Equipped for on-site pressure
testing before or after installation.
- Standard: To BS EN 13280;
- Arrangements: One piece cistern and Sectional tanks;
- Class: B
- Duties:
o Capacity: Maximum 50000L
o Application: Cold water storage for irrigation

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Water:
o Quality: Non-potable
- Type and weight of float operated valve: Stainless Steel Float Valves use the weight and buoyancy of their
float to keep water levels constant inside water reservoir tanks. In addition to potable water, it can be used
with other special fluids such as pure water, seawater, etc. This valve is designed to fully open when the
water level reaches the preset low level and to close drip-tight when the level reaches the preset high point.
- Pressure is directed up to the piston, while also being directed down to the disk and spindle. This nearly
equalizes the opening and closing pressures, thus making a large float with great buoyancy unnecessary. A
smaller float is all that is needed to close the vale drip-tight.
- Manholes: 600 x 600mm;
- Division plates: Not required;
- Baffle plates: Not required;
- Weir plates: Not required;
- Inspection at factory: Required;
- Accessories: Internal access and Level switches
90-10-95/470 WARNING AND OVERFLOW PIPES TO FEED

- Material: PVC-U;
- Jointing: Solvent welded;
- Minimum OD: Greater than inlet pipe OD, and at least 22mm
90-15-40/313 IRRIGATION CONTROLS

- Third party product certification: BEAB approved;
- Device type: Fully automatic;
- Display: Digital;
- Operating range: Multi zone;
- Timers:
o Device type: Automated to BS EN 60730-2-7
o Features: 24 hour / 7 day time mode
- Features: Lockable, weather resistant case and Pump start
90-15-40/329 CONTROL VALVES

- Third party certification: WRAS approved
- Standard: To BS ISO 9635-5
- Regulating function: Flow rate and Water level control
- Operation: Autonomous
- Connection: Flanged and Threaded

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
90-15-40/449 ROTARY IMPACT SPRINKLER

- Standard: To BS 7459-1 and BS 7562-5
- Emitters:
o Type= Pop up
- Nozzle:
o Type= Single
o Size: 12mm
- Physical properties:
o Material= Stainless steel
o UV stabilization: Required
- Connection:
o Type= Female threaded
o Size: 1/2 “
- Performance:
o Operating pressure= 1.4 – 5.5 bar
o Discharge= 150-900 l/h
o Operating arc: Adjustable
o Accessories: 0.5 m spiked riser
90-15-40/491 WEATHERPROOF EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES

- Suitability: External
- Physical properties
o Material: Stainless steel
o Colour: To BS 4800,14C 40 green
o Classification: Manufacturer’s standard
90-90-55/430 IDENTIFY PIPEWORK

- Standard: To BS 1710
- Identification type: Adhesive colour bands
55-40-50/605 INSTALLING IRRIGATION SYSTEM GENERALLY

- Standard:
o Generally: In accordance with the relevant parts of BS 6700,BS EN 806-4 and water supply regulations
and the requirements of the water supply undertaker
o Crop irrigation system: To BS 7562-6
o Automatic turf irrigation system: To BS EN 12484-4
- Method:

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o Fixing: Secure and neat in locations and depths suitable for the purpose. Securely fix equipment,
components and accessories parallel or perpendicular to the enclosing structure
o Outlets and valves: Adequately support to prevent pipes being strained during operation
o Open ends of pipes: Temporarily seal with purpose made plugs or blanking caps to prevent ingress of
dirt, insects or rodents during installation
o Storage: Store equipment, components and accessories in original packaging in dry conditions
- Corrosion resistance: In locations where moisture is present or may occur, provide corrosion resistant fittings/
fixings and avoid contact between dissimilar metals by use of suitable washers, gaskets, etc
- Performance: Free from leaks and the audible effects of expansion, vibration and water hammer
- Access: Allow adequate space for inspection, servicing and maintenance
55-40-50/610 INSTALLING IRRIGATION PIPELINES

- Appearance: Install pipes straight, and parallel or perpendicular to walls, floors, ceilings, and other building
elements.
- Joints, bends and offsets: Minimize
- Access: Locate runs to facilitate installation of equipment, accessories and insulation and allow access for
maintenance
- Electrical equipment: Install pipelines 150 mm (minimum) clear of electrical equipment. Do not run pipelines
through electrical enclosures or above distribution boards, controllers or outlets
- Insulation: Allow space around pipelines to fit insulation without compression
- Drains and vents: Fix pipelines to falls. Fit draining taps at low points and vents at high points
- Flushing out: Insert valves at the end of lines and low points of the system to allow debris to be flushed out
of the system
- Thermal expansion and contraction: Allow for thermal movement of pipelines. Isolate from structure. Prevent
noise or abrasion of pipelines caused by movement. Sleeve pipelines passing through walls, floors or other
building elements
55-40-50/630 INSTALLING FIXED SPRINKLER

- Generally: Fix securely and true to line
- Additional support, Locate within 150mm of connections, junctions and changes of direction
90-10-65/615 INSTALLING PIPELINE FITTINGS

- Fabricated junctions and fittings: Same material as pipeline
- Demountable joints: Regularly spaced along pipeline runs and at items of equipment
90-10-65/615 INSTALLING ANCHORS GENERALLY

- Purpose: To resist axial stress transmitted by flexure of horizontal and vertical pipe runs, and loading on
vertical pipes
- Fixings: Provide associated backing plates, nuts, washers and bolts for attachment to, or building into building
structure

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Fixing to building structures: Built

- Building structures: PVC coated overstraps or clamps, with polypropylene strip between pipe and carbon steel
section
90-10-65/690 SPACING OF PIPELINES

- Minimum clearance between insulated pipelines and:
o Walls finish= 25mm
o Ceiling finish or soffit: 100mm
o Floor: 150mm
o Electrical service:150mm;
o Adjacent services: 100mm;
o Uninsulated pipeline: 75mm
o Another insulated pipeline: 25mm
- Minimum clearance between uninsulated pipelines and:
o Walls finish= 25mm
o Ceiling finish or soffit: 100mm
o Floor: 150mm
o Electrical service:150mm;
o Adjacent services: 150mm;
o Another uninsulated pipeline: 25mm
90-10-65/700 INSTALLING BURIED PIPELINES

- Depth of cover: Maximum 2000mm
- Set out: Lay in straight lines
- Concealment: Do not lay under surfaced footpaths or drives
- Trench excavations: Carefully prepare to a firm even base. Remove sharp objects and replace with pea gravel
to give 100 mm (minimum) cover above and below the pipe
- Installation: Thoroughly clean lengths of pipe internally before laying. Temporarily cap until jointing takes
place. After laying and jointing keep leading end capped
- Thrust blocks: Install at changes of direction and blank ends
- Backfilling: Excavated material free from large stones and sharp objects. Leave joints exposed until after
pipeline pressure test. Lay and compact in 300 mm maximum layers. Do not use heavy compactors before
backfill is 600 mm deep
90-10-65/705 PROTECTION OF BURIED PIPELINES

- Earth cover:
o Water pipework= 1500mm maximum
- Protection: Apply an anticorrosive, non-cracking, non-hardening, waterproof sealing tape;

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Application: After cleaning pipework wrap two layers contrawise spirally around the pipe, with 50% minimum
overlap;
- Marker type: Required
90-10-65/710 GENERAL INSPECTION AND TESTING

- Inspections of joints:
o Joints= Cut out, cut open and inspect
- Safety precautions: In accordance with HSE GS 4
90-10-70/610 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS GENERALLY

- Pipeline connections: Arrange to prevent transmission of pipeline forces to pump casing
- Pipeline gauge tappings: Provide in flow and return pipeline connections and in common suction and delivery
pipeline
- Brackets: Support pipeline mounted pumps on purpose made brackets lined with vibration absorbent material;
- Alignment: Align and balance to minimize vibration
- Access: Provide adequate space for service and maintenance
- Identification plate:
o Format: Engraved
o Details: Manufacturer’s name and address, serial number, duty and maximum head, speed and electrical
loading
90-10-90/610 INSTALLATION OF VALVES GENERALLY

- Installation: In accordance with BS 6683
- Isolation and regulation valves: Provide at equipment and on sub-circuits
- Access: Locate valves so they can be readily operated and maintained. Locate next to equipment which is to
be isolated
- Connection to pipework: Fit with joints that suit the pipe material
90-10-95/610 CLEANING
- General: Clean out tanks and cisterns before site testing and commissioning
90-10-95/630 INSTALLING TANKS AND CISTERNS

- Moulded plastic: To BS 4213
- Glass reinforced plastics: To BS EN 13280
- Access: Allow for internal and external inspection and cleaning
90-15-40/605 INSTALLATION OF IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT GENERALLY

- Standards: In accordance with the relevant parts of BS EN 806-5, BS 7562-5 and BS EN 12484-4, water
supply regulations and the requirements of the water supply undertaker;
- Preparation: Before installation, clear surfaces of debris and projections;

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Generally
o Fixing: Secure and neat in locations and depths suitable for the purpose
o Outlets and valves: Adequately support to prevent pipes being strained during operation
o Pipeline support: Prevent strain, e.g. from the operation of taps or valves
o Open ends of pipes: Temporarily seal with purpose made plugs or blanking caps to prevent ingress of
dirt, insects or rodents during installation
- Equipment components and accessories
o Storage: In original packaging in dry conditions
o Fixing: Where appropriate, securely fix parallel or perpendicular to the enclosing structure using
appropriate purpose made fixings
- Performance: Free from leaks and the audible effects of expansion, vibration and water hammer
- Access: Allow adequate space for inspection, servicing and maintenance
- Item to be concealed:
o Accessories
o Cables
o Elements that do not form part of the display
o Filters
o Pipelines and pumps
90-90-55/660 INSTALLING IDENTIFICATION ON PIPEWORK

- Application of basic identification colour: Coloured bands as BS 1710 clause 3.3
- Safety colour identification: On or next to the colour bands
- Information: Abbreviation of name and Colour bands as BS 1710 appendix D
- Direction of flow: Indication arrow
55-40-50/810 TESTING IRRIGATION PIPEWORK

- Standard:
o Pipework generally: To BS 8558 and BS EN 806-4
o Turf irrigation system: To BS EN 12484-5
- Notice (minimum): 3days
- Condition of pipework and equipment prior to testing: Correctly installed, secure and clean, free from leaks
and signs of physical distress
- Test duration (minimum): 1 hour
- Preparation: Secure and clean pipework and equipment. Check it is correctly installed. Fit tank covers;
- Pressure testing: Joints, fittings and components must be free from leaks and signs of physical distress when
tested for at least 1 hour
- Pressure tests:
o System fed directly from the mains: Apply a test pressure equal to 1.5 times the maximum pressure to
which the installation or relevant part is designed to be subjected in operation

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o System fed from storage: Apply a test pressure equal to the pressure produced when the storage cistern
is filled to its normal maximum operating level
- Other test procedures: as recommended by the manufacturer and required by the water undertaker
- Test results: Submit
55-40-50/815 TESTING SPRINKLER SYSTEM

- Standard: To BS 7459-1
- Notice: 3 days
- Condition of sprinkler equipment prior to testing: With no manufacturing defects, such as bubbles, cracks or
projections
- Test required:
o Strenght: To BS 7459-1, clause 6
o Operating: To BS 7459-1, clause 7
o Durability: To BS 7459-1, clause 8
- Other test procedures: as recommended by the manufacturer and required by the water undertaker
- Test result: Submit
55-40-50/820 COMMISSIONING OF AUTOMATIC TURF IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT

- Standard: To BS EN 12484-4, 5
- Equipment: Check and adjust operation of equipment, controls and safety devices
- Outlets: Check operation of outlets for satisfactory rate of flow, and operation of display
55-40-50/850 SPARES AND TOOLS FOR IRRIGATION SYSTEM

- Spares to be supplied: One extra sprinkler head and One replacement filter cartridge
- Tools: Supply tools for operation, maintenance and cleaning purposes
- Keys: Supply keys for valves, vents and cabinets
55-40-50/860 CERTIFICATES AND OPERATING MANUALS FOR IRRIGATION SYSTEM

- Submit prior to completion: Manufacturers’ operating and maintenance instructions for all equipment and
controls. Manufacturers’ guarantees and warranties. Operating instructions for the system as a whole giving
optimum settings for all controls and record drawings showing the location of circuits, fittings, pipes,
apparatus and operating controls
55-85-25/110 FIRE HOSE REEL SYSTEM

Fire hose reels are used for first-aid fire fighting, they provide a continuous flow of water, and they are more
effective as well as safer for fire-figthing.
Hose reel should be sited in prominent and accessible positions on each level adjacent to exits on escape route.
Hose reel should not form obstruction on escape routes and should be installed in recessed cabinets if necessary.
Doors provided for hose reel cabinets should open approximately 180 degrees, so as not to obstruct the hose
being run out in either direction. These doors should not normally be fitted with locks.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- System performance: Water supply

- Source: Hose reel storage tanks
- Pipelines: Steel pipelines
- Support: Services support
- Valves:Isolating valves: Copper alloy gate valves
- Vibration isolation mountings: Isolation hangers
- Outlets: Hose reel
- Plant and equipment identification: Identification and labels for water fire fighting systems; Identifying
pipework Mechanical plant and equipment identification labels generally; and Valve identification labels
generally
- Execution: Installing fire hose reel, installing identification fire hose reel
- System completion: Testing, Inspection and test record; Documentation, Servicing and maintenance
-

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
60 MECHANICAL HEATING COOLING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS
60-45-10/110 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM

Chilled water system will consist of water cooled chiller uquipped with scroll compressor; chiller will supply air
handling units, fan coils, air precision conditioner inside the building as detailed on the drawings. Provide the
systems with all regulation and monitoring devices, insulation, vapour seals, couplings, commissioning
components and safety equipment and ancillaries to ensure proper, safe and efficient commissioning, operation
and maintenance of the complete system. Chillers will be equipped with heat recovery in order to supply re-heat
coils of air handling units.
Chiller evaporator will be plate type (AISI 316). It is insulated externally with closed cell material to reduce
thermal dispersion.
Condenser will be plate type (AISI 316), it is insulated externally with closed cell material to reduce thermal
dispersion.
Filter drier will be of the mechanical cartridge type, made of ceramics and hygroscopic material able to trap
impurities and anty traces of humidity in the cooling circuit.
Liquid separator located on the suction point of the compressor, to protect against any flow back of liquid
refrigerant, flooded start-ups, operation in the presence of liquid.
Liquid indicator one per circuit, for checking the refrigerant gas load and humidity in the cooling circuit.
Thermostatic valve with external equalizer on the out-put of the evaporator, modulates the gas flow to the
evaporator in accordance with the heat load in such a way as to assure a sufficient degree of overheating at the
intake gas.
Taps are located in the liquid and discharge lines and allow to intercept the refrigerant in case of extraordinary
maintenance.
Solenoid valve closes when the compressor turns off, preventing the flow of refrigerant towards the evaporator.
Chiller frame will be constructed with load-bearing structure realized in suitably thick galvanized steel sheets, it is
painted with polyester dust to guarantee resistance to atmospheric agents.
Chiller contains also safety and control components as described below:
- Low pressure transducer, that allows displaying on the microprocessor board display, the value of the
compressor’s suction pressure on the low-pressure side of the cooling circuit
- The high pressure transducer allows displaying on the microprocessor board display, the value of the
compressor’s delivery pressure on the highpressure side of the cooling circuit
- High pressure switch factory calibrated, it is placed on the high side of the cooling circuit, it shuts down
compressor operation in the case of abnormal operationing pressure
- Cooling circuit safety valves calibrated at 45 bar: they cut in relieving the overpressure in the case of
abnormal operating pressures
Electrical components of chiller consist of electrical panel that contains the power section and the management of
the controls and safety devices; it is possible to access the electrical panel by disconnecting the voltage, then

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
using the opening lever of the panel itself. This lever can be blocked with one or more padlocks during
maintenance, in order to prevent the machine being powered up accidentally.
System performance:
Design of chilled water systems (60-45-10/210);Basic design temperatures (60-45-10/220);
System
- Arrangement: Two pipe

- Pipeline circuits: Constant flow for the primary distribution, constant flow and variable flow for secondary
distribution
Pumps:
Close coupled in line pumps (See Y20).
Pipelines:
Carbon steel pipelines (See Y10).
Valves:
- Isolating valves: Ball valves (See Y11) and Butterfly valves (See Y11).
- Check valves: Cast iron check valves type (See Y11).
- Regulating valves: Double regulating valves (See size and details on drawings)
- Accessories: Inertial tank for storage chilled and hot water (See size and details on drawings)
Thermal insulation:
Flexible, closed cell, elastomeric, nitrile rubber insulation that offers reliable protection against condensation and
effectively prevents energy loss (See Y50).
Emitters:
Chilled water cooling coils (See Y43).
Controls:
Control board and control panel with display. On each board trasducers, loads and alarms are connected. The
programme and parameter presets are stored permanently in the controller's memory, to ensure that they are
kept in memory even when the system is not powered (without the need for an auxiliary batteriy).
60-45-10/210 DESIGN OF CHILLED WATER SYSTEM

Design:
In accordance with CIBSE AM 11.
60-45-10/220 BASIC DESIGN TEMPERATURE

General Requirements:
Design temperature schedules.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Design temperatures:
As room data sheets (for office room, meeting room indoor temperature 24.5°C), (for data server room indoor
temperature 22°C).
Products
Automatic Air Vents:
Arrangement: Vertical inlet
Material: Gunmetal
Connection: Threaded
Axial expansion compensators:
- Standard: In accordance with BS 6129-1 and to BS ISO 15348

- Arrangement: Unrestrained
- Material: Bellows:Stainless Steel
- Inner sleeve: Stainless Steel
- Connection: Flanged
Pressure gauges
- Standard: To BS EN 837-1
- Diameter:63mm, 100mm, 150mm
- Scale subdivision: 20kPa (0.2bar) for a maximum scale value of 10bar
- Material: Stainless steel
Temperature gauges:
- Standard: To BS EN 13190
- Format: Bi-metallic
- Diameter:63mm, 100mm, 150mm
- Scale subdivision: 20kPa (0.2bar) for a maximum scale value of 10bar
- Material: Stainless steel
Close Coupled in line pumps:
For Specification (See Section Y20).
- Arrangement: Floor Mounted twin and Pipeline mounted twin

- Application: Chilled Water
- Operation: Duty/stand by
Ball Valves:
Butterly Valves:

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Check Valves:
Double regulating Valves:
- General requirements: Double regulating valves with secured, infinitely adjustable presetting controllable at
any time by means of the flow limiting device
- Standard: To BS 7350
- Material: Valve body made of cast iron, bonnet made of nodular cast in iron, bronze disc, stem made of
dezincification resistant brass
- Connection: Threaded from DN20 to DN50, flanged DN65 to DN300
60-45-10/615 INSTALLING WATER BASED COOLING SYSTEM

- Standard: To BS EN 1264-4
90-10-60/620 INSTALLING EXPANSION COMPENSATORS

- Anchors and guides: Locate to contain movement and resist maximum imposed loads
90-10-60/650 INSTALLING STRAINER

- Y-type: Install in direction of flow with the pocket in horizontal plane
90-10-65/615 INSTALLING PIPELINE FITTINGS

- Fabricated junction: Install in direction of flow with the pocket in horizontal plane
- Demountable joints: Regularly spaced along pipeline runs and at items of equipment
90-10-65/685 WELDING STEEL PIPELINES

- Standard: In accordance with HVAC TR/5
- Welder identification: Mark each weld to identify operative
- Non destructive examination: Visual examination to BS EN ISO 17637
- Completed welds: Wire brush and protect from corrosion
90-10-65/690 SPACING OF PIPELINES

Minimum clearance between insulated pipelines and:
- Wall finish: 25mm

- Ceiling finish or soffit: 100mm
- Floor: 150mm
- Electrical services: 100mm
- Adjacent services: 100mm
- Uninsulated pipeline: 75mm
- Another insulated pipeline: 25mm

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Minimum clearance between uninsulated pipelines and:
- Wall finish: 25mm

- Ceiling finish or soffit: 100mm
- Floor: 150mm
- Electrical services: 150mm
- Adjacent services: 150mm
- Another insulated pipeline: 25mm
90-10-65/710 GENERAL INSPECTION AND TESTING

- Inpection of joints: Cut out, cut open and inspect
- Safety precautions: In accordance with HSE GS 4
90-10-70/610 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS GENERALLY

- Pipeline connections: Arrange to prevent transmission of pipeline forces to pump casing
- Pressure gauge tappings: Provide in flow and return pipeline connections and in common suction and delivery
pipeline
- Brackets: Support pipeline mounted pumps on purpose made brackets lined with vibration absorbent material;
- Alignment: Align and balance to minimize vibration
- Belt tension: Correctly tension drive belts
- Access: Provide adequate space for service and maintenance
- Identification Plate:
o Format: Engraved
o Details: Manufacturer’s name and address, serial number, duty and maximum head, speed and electrical
loading
90-10-90/610 INSTALLATION OF VALVES GENERALLY

- Installation: In accordance with BS 6683
- Isolation and regulating valves: Provide at equipment and on sub-circuits
- Access: Locate valves so they can be readily operated and maintained. Locate next to equipment which is to
be isolated
- Connection to pipework: Fit with joints that suit the pipe material
90-90-55/660 INSTALLING IDENTIFICATION ON PIPEWORK

- Application of basic identification colour: Coloured bands as BS 1710 clause 3.3
- Safety colour identification: On or next to the colour bands
- Information: Colour bands as BS 1710 appendix D
- Direction of flow: Indication arrow and the word FLOW or the letter F and Indication arrow and the word
RETURN or the letter R

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
60-45-10/810 COMMISSIONING CHILLED WATER SYSTEM

- Commissioning: In accordance with BSRIA 2/89.3 and Commissioning Code: Water distribution systems;
- Pre commissioning: In accordance with BSRIA 2/89.3 and CIBSE Commissioning Code: Water distribution
systems.
60-45-95/110 MULTISPLIT SYSTEM

Description:
A split system is an air-conditioning system that uses refrigerant as the heat exchange fluid and has an
evaporator, compressor, and condenser as separate components. In most modern commercial applications, the
compressor and condenser are combined into a single piece of equipment called a condensing unit. Refrigerant
piping, custom-designed to meet the physical requirements of each individual application, connects the system
components. The evaporator, a finned coil, is mounted in a section of ductwork downstream of the furnace
blower.
When it is impractical to use a single split system for a building, or if zoning is necessary to insure uniform
comfort, multiple systems are commonly used. Zoning is achieved by serving a group of rooms with similar
cooling load characteristics with a separate unit. Because of the many unit sizes and combinations available,
multi-unit systems can be matched to the unique combinations of sensible and latent loads in each zone.
Compressor:
DC Inverter driven twin Rotary Electric driven
Pipelines:
All copper pipe up to 1 1/8” (28mm) outside diameter (O/D) shall be fabricated from refrigerant quality tube to
BS EN 12449:1999.
Tube shall be fully annealed up to 7/8”(22mm) outside diameter (O/D) only.
Thermal insulation:
Thermal insulating material used within any building shall, when tested in accordance with BS 476-4:1970, be
classified as non-combustible also free from substances which in the event of a fire would generate appreciable
quantities of smoke or toxic fumes. Insulating materials should be of Class “O” rating as defined by the Building
Regulations
Controls:
Controls will be made through wireless remote control or touch screen wall mounted.
Indoor Unit:
High wall mounted.
90-10-65/390 REFRIGERANT PIPELINE AND FITTINGS

Refrigerant pipeline are designed according to EN12735-1. Nitrogen filled copper tubes in soft annealed coils in
sizes from 1 /4” O.D. to 1 1/8” O.D. & straight lengths in sizes from 3/8” O.D. to 2 1/8” O.D.
Straight lengths in sizes 2 5/8” O.D. to 4 1/8” O.D. are cleaned and caped.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Supply and installation of all interconnecting refrigeration pipework shall be carried in accordance with Section 4,
Part 1, of the “Safety Code for Refrigerating Systems Utilising HFC’s published by the Institute of Refrigeration
and to BS EN 378:2008 All pipework must be suitable for R134A. Longest possible lengths of copper pipe should
be utilised to minimise joints on site.
Tube shall be delivered to site internally degreased and shall be stored in clean dry conditions with ends sealed
until required for installation.
Keep pipework clean and dry during the installation works, ensuring that all pipework unfinished ends are capped
off at all times.
The number of joints, bends and sets are to be kept to a minimum. Butt joints will not be accepted, properly
swaged joints must be formed. Bends and sets are to be machine pulled to an approved radius where possible
Flared joints must only be used when connecting to the manufacturers equipment.
Brazing shall be carried out in accordance with British Refrigeration Association Specification for Brazing and BS
14324:2004. Brazing rods shall be cadmium free and conform to BS EN 1044:1999. At all times, when brazing, a
small amount of dry nitrogen must be purged through the pipe to prevent oxidation and scaling internally.
Any component susceptible to heat during the brazing process that may be damaged must be protected. Soft
solder shall never be used for jointing of refrigeration pipework.
Outdoor unit above Indoor unit:
When the outdoor unit is above the indoor unit, the static pressure gain in the liquid line vertical drop (1/2 psi per
foot) may overcome the frictional pressure loss resulting in a total pressure gain. A pressure gain in the liquid line
is not detrimental to the performance of the system.
On cooling only systems where the outdoor unit is located high above the indoor coil, it may even be possible to
reduce the size of the liquid line. The static gain in the vertical drop will offset the increased friction loss caused
by smaller tubing. In addition, the reduction in the total system charge due to the smaller liquid line will enhance
the reliability of the system.
Every split-system unit is shipped with a factory-mounted sweat fitting.
For split systems, interconnecting refrigerant lines should be sized to match the factory supplied fittings unless
the application dictates different line sizes due to pressure drop, refrigerant velocity constraints and/or line set
lengths.
For cooling systems where the indoor and outdoor sections are installed at the same elevation, refrigerant line
sizes can usually be matched with the factory supplied fittings. There are exceptions for total line lengths
exceeding 23m where pressure drop limitations are exceeded
When sizing refrigerant lines for split-system cooling units, the following factors must be considered:
- Suction line pressure loss due to friction

- Suction line velocity for oil return
- Liquid line pressure loss due to friction
- Liquid line pressure loss (or gain) due to static head

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
90-40-95/310 ELECTRIC DRIVEN COMPRESSOR

Standard: To BS EN 378-1, BS EN 378-2, BS EN 14511-2, BS EN 14511-3, BS EN 14511-4 and BS EN 60335-2-40.
- Type: Rotary Compressor

- Cooling Capacity: From 1.99W To 7.06 W
- EER: From 9.5 To 10.00
- INPUT: From 680W To 2470W
- OIL CHARGE: From 260cc To 750 cc
- NET WEIGHT: From 10.2 Kg To 20.1 Kg
90-40-95/330 INDOOR UNIT

Provide with convenient microprocessor control automatically adjust fan speed to High, Medium or Low.
According to room temperature to maintain a comfortable airflow through the room.
- Power Source: V/Ø/Hz: 230/1/50

- Cooling (kW): Depending on the size of unit (see detailed drawings)
- Input Power: Depending on the size of unit (see detailed drawings)
- EER: Depending on the size of unit (see detailed drawings)
- Dimension: Depending on the size of unit (see detailed drawings)
-
- Pipe connections: Depending on the size of unit (see detailed drawings)
- Max Pipe length: 20m
- Max height difference: 15m
- Operating Range: -10°C - 43°C
90-90-40/360 INSULATION FOR PIPELINE

- Material: Expanded polyethylene (PE) insulation in line extruded on the copper pipe.
- Colour: White
- Insulation thickness: approx. 7-9mm
- Fire resistance: self extinguishing Class 1
- Marking: By laser at every meter
- Odourless and non-toxic: CFC free
- Thermal conductivity at 40° =<0.040 W/mK
- Average temperature: -70°C – 120°C
- Average density approx. 30kg/m³
- Standard: To BS EN 60684-3-151.
60-45-95/620 INSTALLING MULTISPLIT SYSTEM

The lines should be installed so that they will not obstruct service access to the indoor coil, air handling system or
filter.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Install the lines with as few bends as possible. Care must be taken not to damage the couplings or kink the
tubing. Care must also be used to isolate the refrigerant lines to minimize noise transmission from the equipment
to the structure.
Never solder vapor and liquid lines together. They can be taped together for convenience and support purposes,
but
they must be completely insulated from each other
Support all refrigerant lines at minimum intervals with suitable hangers and brackets
Slope horizontal suction lines on cooling only systems approximately 1cm every 3m toward the outdoor unit to
facilitate proper oil return. Pre-charged lines with excess tubing should be coiled horizontally in an inconspicuous
location to avoid oil trapping. Never coil excess tubing vertically
Use long radius elbows wherever possible.
Use PVC piping as a conduit for all underground installations. Buried lines must be kept as short as possible to
minimize the build up of liquid refrigerant in the vapor line during long periods of shutdown.
Pack fiberglass insulation and a sealing material such as permagum around refrigerant lines where they penetrate
a wall to reduce vibration and to retain some flexibility. If multiple line sets are routed through a common
conduit, then all lines must be insulated.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
U10 GENERAL SUPPLY AND EXTRACT VENTILATION SYSTEMS

For all buildings supply, install, test, commission and set to work a mechanical ventilation system that reliably
supplies tempered fresh air via air handling plant to the rooms of buildings which need to be conditioned. The
fresh air shall be filtered, cooled, heated before being supplied to the space to maintain its set point
temperatures. Extract ventilation shall be extracted via a dedicated ductwork system, connecting to the return air
inlet of the extract fan section of the AHU’s, before discharging to atmosphere via exhaust louvres positioned on
the perimeter of the building. The supply and extract mechanical ventilation systems shall operate at optimum
energy efficiency and within the noise parameters stated within this Documentation.
The following are the main functions of a supply and extract ventilation system.
To prevent excessive temperature rise by automatically operating each mechanical ventilation system.
To prevent smells and potentially explosive vapours building up, by automatically and continuously maintaining
an appropriate air pressure regime.
To ensure that in the event of fire in any one area suitable fire protection is provided to prohibit the spread of fire
to adjacent areas in accordance with the fire strategy.

Comply fully with the edition (including amendments and normative references) of each of the following, current
at the time of tender.
European Standard.
- The Building Regulations

- The Construction (Design and Management) Regulations The Health and Safety at Work etc. Act
- BS 9999 - Code of practice for fire safety in the design, management and use of buildings BRE GPG 257 -
Energy-Efficient Mechanical Ventilation Systems
- BSRIA TN 3/90 - Design recommendations for room air conditioning systems CIBSE Guide A - Environmental
design
- CIBSE Guide B - Heating, ventilating, air conditioning and refrigeration CIBSE Guide C - Reference data
- CIBSE TM 21 - Minimising pollution at air intakes
- HVCA DW/144 - Specification for sheet metal ductwork. Low, medium and high pressure/velocity air systems
- HVCA TR/19 - Internal cleanliness of ventilation systems

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Internal Design Conditions
For internal Design Condition Data see technical reports
External Design Conditions for Fabric and Infiltration Gains
For external Design Condition Data see technical reports
210 SECURITY
Vents, ducts, and miscellaneous openings in excess of 620 square centimetres (and over 16 centimetres in its
smallest dimension) that enter or pass through an open areas identified as being Restricted, Confidential or
Secret shall be protected with either bars, expanded metal grilles, commercial metal sound baffles or an intrusion
detection system. Access panels shall be required either side of any security measures for regular inspection.

Air treatment system is appointed to control air quality and relative humidity. It is based on AHU or heat
recovery units that through insulated galvanized steel ducts brings handled air towards diffusers installed in the
conditioned rooms. Return air to the AHU will be through return grilles installed in the false ceiling or in walls
Every inlet/outlet diffuser will be furnished with an equalizer damper.
Each air handling plant allows full fresh ambient external air to enter via the fresh air inlet sand louvre located on
the external wall of the plant room.. An on/off motorised damper shall be provided on both the air inlet ductwork
and exhaust air ductwork to seal the ventilation system whilst not in use. An access panel shall be located in the
adjacent ductwork to one side of each damper for inspection and maintenance purposes
The incoming air shall then be filtered utilizing both panel and bag filters each having side withdrawal together
with side inspection and access maintenance sections on one side.
A supply fan wall shall be provided within the supply air unit section with dual electrical motors , variable control
speed (to modulate the air flow rate), allowing for one fan failing or to be switched off under a maintenance
regime whilst the remaining fans ramp up and deliver the required design air flow rate, thereby allowing
resilience within the air handling unit.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
An extract fan with dual electrical motors separated from the supply AHU will be installed inside the AHUs
The supply and extract system serving each building shall be as detailed on the drawings.
One chilled water coils shall be located to cool the fresh air to the set point off coil condition, a re-heat coil will be
installes inside AHU when it is required.
All ventilation ductwork shall be fitted with fire dampers where crossing fire compartment walls, partitions, floors
and enclosures in the positions indicated on the Architectural fire compartmentation drawings.
Where fire compartment walls, partitions or enclosures form escape routes, smoke fire dampers shall be used.
Main supply and extract branch ducts from air handling plant shall be fitted with equalizer dampers for the
purpose of regulating the systems effectively, efficiently and without noise generation in the occupied spaces
All grilles shall be provided with opposed blade dampers for final trimming to achieve their required design
airflow. All grilles shall be supplied with paint finish to RAL 9010 colour.
Access panels shall be positioned at every change of direction either side of items of equipment and at 18m
intervals to facilitate inspection, maintenance and duct cleaning regime as required under European Directive.
410 BMS CONTROL

Operate the ventilation systems automatically through the BMS integrated panels provided by the BMS Control
Specialist.
420 MAINTENANCE
The BMS integrated MCC Panel shall be provided by the BMS Control Specialist appointed by the Mechanical
Installer.
The panel shall serve the AHU’s
Each MCC Panel shall be located within the HAVC plant room inside the building. Each ventilation system shall
automatically operate through its own MCC Panel.
The following description shall be applicable to each of the above MCC panels which shall include as a minimum
the following:
Control Section
Terminals for the following sensors:
- Mixed air temperature sensor

- Supply air temperature and relative humidity sensor
- Sand Filter pressure sensor
- Supply panel filter pressure sensor
- Supply bag filter pressure sensor
- Return Air temperature and relative umidity sensor
- Intake Air temperature and relative umidity sensor
- Motorized inlet air damper

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Motorized exhaust air damper

- Motorized mixed air damper
- Motorized three ways valve for cooling coils
- Motorized three ways valve for re-heat coils
- Variable control speed for Supply Fan
- Variable control speed for Return Fan
440 DESCRIPTION OF START UP

The description of the Air Handling Unit start- up below applies to the AHUs
The AHU unit supply fan wall shall have dedicated Hand/Off/Auto switches located on the panel facia. In the Off
position the fans shall not run. In the Hand position the fans shall be permanently enabled unless there is a fire
condition. In the Auto position the fans shall be enabled under the dictates of start time start signal.
The AHU extract fan wall shall have dedicated Hand/Off/Auto switches located on the panel facia. In the Off
position the fans shall not run. In the Hand position the fans shall be permanently enabled unless there is a fire
condition. In the Auto position the fans shall be enabled under the dictates of start time start.
When required to start, the supply and extract fans shall be prevented from operating until all motorised dampers
at the fresh air inlet and exhaust louvres have fully opened.
Supply air flow shall be confirmed by the supply fan differential pressure switch with pressure probes located
across the suction and discharge of the fan wall & a discharge pressure sensor. An alarm shall be raised at the
BMS after a programmed time delay should the supply fan airflow switch fail to prove, and the chilled water flow
switch indicates a no flow condition disabled via a hard wired interface. The extract fan shall also be disabled in
the event that the supply airflow is not proven.
Extract airflow shall be confirmed by a pressure sensor located in the return air ductwork. An alarm shall be
raised at the BMS after a programmed time delay should the extract fan sensor fail to read above a pre-set value
(set at commissioning stage).
Should the sand panel filter pressure sensor drop exceed the set point of the panel filter differential pressure
sensor (set at commissioning stage) the Panel Filter Dirty Lamp shall be illuminated on the panel facia & an alarm
raised at the BMS.
In the event that the supply fan panel filter pressure sensor drop exceeds the set point of the panel filter
differential pressure sensor (set at commissioning stage) the Panel Filter Dirty Lamp shall be illuminated on the
panel facia & an alarm raised at the BMS. The same applies for the supply to the intake air bag filter
The BMS installation serving each ventilation system shall provide run and fault conditions to be monitored at the
FM Building. The Contractor shall allow for volt free contacts to be extended to 5m beyond the building boundary
terminating at the BMS access chamber where responsibility for site wide distribution shall be carried out by
others and beyond the scope of this document.
The BMS Control panel shall provide power and control wiring to both the cooling and reheat coil.
On and fault lamps shall be provided on the panel facia for both items of equipment. Each run around coil plant
shall be interfaced with the main AHU plant operational times. A pressure gauge on each system shall register
system pressure and in the event of low pressure alarm shall be provided at the BMS Panel and the fault lamp
shall illuminate.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
450 MOTORIZED DAMPERS

When required to start, prevent the supply and extract fans from operating until all motorised dampers at the
fresh air inlet and exhaust louvres have fully opened.
470 FAN SPEED CONTROL

Vary the speed of the supply and extract fans automatically via the BMS, by signals from duct mounted sensors,
to maintain the lowest ventilation rate without the temperature exceeding set point.
480 ALARMS
Provide airflow failure alarm at the BMS via a differential pressure switch across every fan.
490 FIRE DETECTION MODE
491 GENERAL
Ensure that activation of the fire detection system causes all fans to stop but the motorised dampers at air inlet
and exhaust louvers to remain fully open.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
510 RESPONSABILITIES - GENERAL

To provide, install, test and commission a complete ventilation system to meet the functional and performance
criteria outlined within this specification.
520 MAIN CONTRACTOR


To undertake the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and setting to work of all elements of the ventilation
system and equipment together all as described and set out within this Documentation and on the Drawings to
ensure design intent is achieved.


- Craneage and/or placing of all plant items

- Forming the necessary supports for all plant and equipment

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED


Agree all proposed methods of fixing the system(s) to structure, roof, cladding, equipment, etc. with the Contract
Administrator.
570 PERMIT TO WORK

580 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.600 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
610 AIR DUCTLINES
611 GENERAL
Ensure that all ducting complies with section Y30 of this specification.
612 CLASSIFICATION
Install all ducting to the following pressure classifications of HVCA Specification DW144:
- low pressure outlets - Class A

Ensure all ducting is manufactured and installed to achieve cleanliness standard as defined by HVCA TR/19.
613 ZINC COATED STEEL

Install zinc coated steel ducting of the sizes and in the locations shown on the drawings.
614 FLEXIBLE DUCTING

All flexible ductwork shall be taught and installed in a straight length at all times with no bends or deviations
permitted.
620 AIR DUCTLINE ANCILLARIES
621 GENERAL
Install ancillaries in accordance with section Y31 of this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
622 ACCESS OPENINGS

Install access openings in accordance with sections Y30 and Y31 of this specification, to each item of plant and
equipment and to facilitate a ductwork inspection and cleaning regime.
623 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

Install VCDs in accordance with section Y31 of this specification and additionally where shown on the drawings.
624 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

Install FDs and SDs in accordance with section Y31 of this specification and additionally where shown on the
drawings.
625 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTINGS

Install vibration isolation mountings generally in accordance with section Y52 of this specification and additionally
where shown on the drawings.
630 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS

Install grilles, diffusers and associated plenum boxes as described within this Specification equipment schedules,
in locations indicated on the drawings and in accordance with section Y46 of this specification.
640 BLAST VALVE

Blast valve is used as air intake and outlet valve of Civil Defence and military shelters having high blast resistance
requirements. The valve is also suitable for industrial blast protection applications.
The blast valve comprises an stainless steel pressure disk mounted on a stainless steel spindle mechanism within
nodular cast iron valve body. The valve mechanism is mounted in a rectangular modular wall frame that can
house 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 valve elements. The valve is completely corrosion resistant. All components of the
spindle mechanism are made of stainless steel. Other parts are either hot dip galvanized or coated with epoxy
powder paint.
The valve is designed and tested to withstand multiple long duration (peak duration > 60 ms) blast loads having
peak reflected overpressure of 20 bar and short duration (positive phase duration < 5.0 ms) blast load having
peak reflected overpressure of 60 bar while retaining its full functional ability. The valve withstands a mechanical
shock of the installation wall equivalent to sudden change in velocity of 1.5 m/s and stresses of a dropping test
with an acceleration of 80 g in directions of the three main axis.
The valve is designed to function within the operating temperature range of -20 +80 ºC.
650 SLOT LINEAR DIFFUSER

Linear slot diffusers are designed for the diffusion of air with installation in suspended ceilings. They are suitable
for the diffusion of air in room with height between about 2,6 and 4m or for more height in case of installation
near wall or glass wall.
They are available in lengths of 500mm and 2000mm with increment of 100mm from 1 to 6 slot.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Slot linear diffuser have black or white plastic deflector, with support, and frame if present in natural anodized
aluminium. The plenum box made in sendzimir zinc plated steel. The plenum box connection is made by
aluminium.The frame, if present, can be painted in all RAL colours.
660 VENTILATION VALVE

White ventilation valve for supply or return air. Features minimal noise level even for high pressure loss.
Regulation and calibration of the flow rate is carried out by rotating the central disc Available in four different
diameters:Ø 100mm, Ø 125mm, Ø 160mm, Ø200mm. Supplied for fixing collar.
Painted galvanized sheet metal. White RAL 9010, gloss 70, equivalent to NCS S 0502 Y.
670 TRANSIT AIR GRILLE

General
Transit air grilles are composed of a frame containing the blades pack and a counterframe, both fixed by visible
frontal screws. The blades profile with an upside down “V” shape prevents to see through.
It is commonly installed in the lower part of doors which close depressed environments in order to allow the air
transit (for example in the bathrooms doors).
- Dimension:
o B (mm): (300,400,500,600) mm
o H (mm): (100, 160,200,300,600) mm
- Construction
o Anodised aluminium
- Finish
o Gloss white RAL 9010, polyester powder painted
- Specifications
o Door transit grille pitch 20mm. Construction in anodized aluminium or white RAL9010 painted natural
aluminium
o Blades with an upside down “V” shape. Fixing by visible screws
700 EQUIPMENT
710 AIR HANDLING UNITS

Install the AHU as set out within the Specification equipment schedule, in the location indicated on the drawings
and in accordance with section Y40 of this specification.
720 EXTRACT FANS

Install the Extract Fans as set out within the Specification equipment schedule, in the locations indicated on the
Tender drawings and in accordance with section Y40 of this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
730 AIR FILTERS

Install filters in accordance with section Y42 of this specification and additionally where shown on the drawings,
and referred to elsewhere within this specification.
740 HEATING AND COOLING COILS

Install coils in accordance with section Y43 of this specification and additionally where shown on the drawings.
750 SILENCER AND ACOUSTIC TREATMENT

Install silencers and acoustic treatment in accordance with section Y45 of this specification and additionally where
shown on the drawings.
760 PULSER
Linear Pulsion Devices DLP is constituted by a metallic canalization, preferably of circular shape, in order to better
advantage the air induction from the surrounding equipment.
A particular hole punching pattern is applied on the pulser surface; this pattern is constituted by two kinds of
holes:
The induction holes, which are smaller, determinate the quantity of the air that needs to be recalled by induction
from the surrounding environment, in order to perfectly lend it with the supplty air.
The guide holes, which are bigger, determinate the direction, the speed and the distance at which the
environment air mass, pre-blended by the induction holes, must be moved.
The exit air speed from the holes compared to their diameter, the distance between them, their position on the
DLP’s surface, the DLP’s position in the environment and to the minimum and maximum supply air temperature’s
differences, determinate the DLP’s skill to create the necessary “pressure field”.
- Features:
o Each pulser is fitted with a special device for the setting of the residual speed at the ground and to
ensure the inspection of the duct;
o Pulsers allow to put on to the air handling units allowing the cascade operation aimed at achieving the
maximum energy savings;
o Each pulser will be furnished with an appropriate motorized damper, with opposed blades pitch 150mm,
each driven by a modulating pressure that manages the desired pressure in the primary pulsers.
o Each pulsor is made with circular shape performed with galvanized sheet quality S250GD with
galvanizing Z EN 10346 (140 g/m²) and of appropriate thickness depending on the diameter.
o The modules that made the pulser are net length equal to 1 meter
o Each module will be closed at the construction site by means of special stainless steel rivets
o Tightness between two modules is ensured by applying a special seal
o Modules are coupled together by an omega collar tie
o In order to protect the exposed surface each pulser will be provided with a special protective 1adhesive
film, which will be to remove only after the start-up of the system (no more than 15 days after receipt of
the material)
o Temperature: 70ºC maximum in continuous service.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o For the clamp to the building is recommended to use steel cables type Gripple or similar, disposed in V-
shape anti oscillation, which allow rotation on its axis and in accordance with current standards.
770 EXTERNAL LOUVERS

Install louvers in accordance with section Y46 of this specification and additionally where shown on the drawings.
780 HEAT RECOVERY UNIT

Heat Recovery Units have been designed to guarantee a healthy thermo- humidity condition allowing a suitable
change of air in order to reduce the build-up of gas and unwanted particles present in the environment to be
treated (cigarette smoke, unpleasant odours, sweat, dust).
The heat recovery unit in addition to the ventilation, filtration and recovery of heat, also includes a refrigerating
circuit.
- Panels and structures: The structure is made up of 20 mm thick galvanised self-supporting sandwich panels
with injected polyurethane insulation ( density of 40 kg/m³)
- Fans: Double intake centrifugal fans with forward- curved blades and with directly connected motor. The 230V
- 50 Hz single-phase motor has one speed. The airflow is controlled by an electronic regulator at phase cut.
The two regulators are set in the factory so as to supply the nominal performance; the air volume may be
varied by +/- 15% to the nominal airflow, not to endanger the correct operation of the unit
- Refrigerating circuit: This is a highly efficient and silent heat pump with scroll compressor, four-way valve for
cycle inversion, evaporating coil, condensing coil, liquid receiver, liquid separator, thermostatic valve, liquid
indicator, filter drier, high/low pressure switch and the pressure charge connections with access from the
outside of the units
- Condensate drain pan: Made of aluminium alloy, easily detachable
- Evaporating/condensating coil: With Cu grooved tube and high efficiency Al fins
- Filters: These are cell type with an corrugated septum positioned before the recovery unit on airflow supply
and return. The standard filters are class G3 type in accordance with classification UNI EN 779 with weighted
efficiency of 80%. They are 48 mm thick and are easily withdrawn for cleaning and replacement
- Dirty filters pressure switch: A differential pressure switch is present, pla-ced close to the electronic
controllers, for the detection of the choking of the supply filter. It is possible to set the intervention value.
Thre pressure switch includes clean contacts (NA, NC) to remote the alarm
- Heat recovery unit:This is static with crossflow made of aluminium sheets
- Support brackets: Allow the unit to be rapidly and securely fixed to the false ceiling
- Accessibility: The unit may be inspected from below. The heat recovery unit, filters, condensate drain pan and
fans can be easily removed from below by removing the lower two panels
- Control system: The unit is equipped with an electrical panel with power and regulation section aimed at
guaranteeing the management of all refrigerating circuit functions. Also present: NTC temperature probe on
the internal air recovery, external air temperature probe, pressure probe on the recovery filter. A remote
control terminal is also supplied for the automatic management of the unit, remotable up to 150 meter (cable
not supplied). The unit is equipped for the management of a luminous sign (230V) which switches on in case
of generic alarm or unit OFF, in conformity with the norms in force for rooms for smokers. The following
operations can be performed on the microprocessor: switching on and off of the unit, summer/winter
changeover, setting of set-point parameters, reading of room temperature

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Installation:
The necessary technical space must be verified before installation:
- for the arrangement of the supply and exhaust ducts

- for the passage of the power supply cables
- for the components ( condensate drainage traps, etc.) without which the correct functioning of the unit can
not be guaranteed
- for the correct cleaning and maintenance operations (in the bottom of the unit leave half of the overall width
of the unit plus 100 mm)
Position of the supporting brackets:
The unit must be positioned on a flat surface to avoid:
- the drainage of the motor fan assemblies caused by weight imbalance

- the incorrect functioning of the condensate drain
The unit and the coil and silencer module are equipped with "L" supporting brackets for horizontal installation.
You are recommended to place rubber dampers between the brackets and the walls to decrease the vibrations
generated by the unit.
Unit start-up:
Before the first start-up of the heat recovery unit check the following points:
- the exact positioning of the panels in correspondence with the motor ventilating assembly that require
opening by means of a screw-driver
- the fixing of the unit to the wall
- the earthing of the unit to the buildings earth system
- the connection to the ducts
- the condensate drain connection to the trap
- the insulation of the tubes to the coils
- the ground wires of the electrical components
- the absence of air in the water coils
- the electrical connection has been performed correctly and that all terminals have been sufficiently tightened
- there are no leaks of refrigerant through the use of a leak detector

Paint all steel piping, fittings, supports and brackets in accordance with Y50.
Ensure that all painting, thermal insulation, vapour sealing and cladding of the system is in accordance with
900 OFF-SITE PAINTING AND ANTI CORROSION TREATMENT

Ensure all off site painting and anti corrosion treatments are made.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED


1210 COMPLIANCE
Commissioning of the Ventilation System shall be carried out by an independent commissioning Company and
subject to approval by the Contract Administrator. The Installer shall provide a Commissioning Programme with
their Tender Return setting out the works required to ensure that the system shall comply with the design
requirements set out within the Tender documentation and drawings.

- the ductwork is supported adequately

- ductwork is arranged and identified/insulated correctly
- hand wheels or levers are fitted to valves and dampers with clear indication of open/closed position
- adequate provision and location of access panels to facilitate inspection, maintenance, cleaning and removal
of plant and equipment
appropriate

- Manufacturers calculations for fan selection and duct sizing

- Manufacturers calculations for attenuator selection and acoustic duct cladding
- Manufacturer’s details of all proposed AHU supply and extract fan units
- drawing production schedule and drawings of every ducting system in accordance with section A11 of this
specification.
- method statements
- operating and maintenance instructions
- control systems schematics and wiring diagrams
- testing and commissioning records/sheets/certificates

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
U11 TOILET VENTILATION

To supply, install, test, commission and set to work a mechanical toilet extract ventilation system.
Vitiated air shall be expelled from the toilets, via interconnecting ductwork routing from ventilation valve to the
exhaust louvre located on the perimeter of the building all as identified within the drawings.
To mechanically ventilate the toilet areas of the complex automatically during operating hours to ensure a fresh
and odour free environment.
To ensure that the vitiated air is not recirculated in the building nor enters the adjoining buildings.
To ensure that in the event of fire in any one area suitable fire protection is provided to prohibit the spread of fire
to adjacent areas in accordance with the fire strategy.

European Standard.

- The Construction (Design and Management) Regulations The Health and Safety At Work etc. Act
o BS 5588 Fire precautions in the design, construction and use of buildings
o BS 5925 Code of practice for ventilation principles and designing for natural ventilation
o BS 9999 Code of practice for fire safety in the design, management and use of buildings
o CIBSE Guide AEnvironmental design
o CIBSE Guide B Section 2 Ventilation and air conditioning, Section 3 Ductwork , Section 12 5 Noise and
vibration for HVAC
o CIBSE Guide CSection 4 Flow of fluids in pipes and ducts
o HVCA DW/144 Specification for sheet metal ductwork
o HVCA TR/19 Guide to good practice. Internal cleanliness of ventilation systems

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
210 SECURITY
Vents, ducts, and miscellaneous openings in excess of 620 square centimetres (and over 16 centimetres in its
smallest dimension) that enter or pass through an open areas identified as being Restricted, Confidential or
Secret shall be protected with either bars, expanded metal grilles, commercial metal sound baffles or an intrusion
detection system. Access panels shall be required either side of any security measures for regular inspection.
310 GENERAL
Vitiated air from toilets within buildings shall be mechanically expelled using extract fans to atmosphere via
interconnecting ductwork routing from extract grilles within each room to the exhaust louvres located on the
perimeter of the building.
Where fire compartment walls, partitions or enclosures form escape routes, smoke fire dampers shall be used.
All ventilation ductwork shall be fitted with fire dampers where crossing fire compartment walls, partitions, floors
and enclosures in the positions indicated on the Architectural fire compartmentation drawings. Fire/smoke
dampers shall be installed within the roof space or ceiling voids where ducts cross fire / smoke control curtains.

The BMS Control panel within shall provide power and control wiring to extract fans serving the facilities. Run and
fault lamps shall be provided on the panel facia for the fans. The extract ventilation plant shall be interfaced with
the main AHU plant operational times.
All buildings provided with an AHU system all extract fans from toilets will be always in duty, in all other buildings
extract fans will be connected to the lighting system.
430 MOTORISED DAMPERS

When required to start, prevent the extract fans from operating until all motorised dampers at the fresh air inlet
and exhaust louvres at each air handling plant have fully opened.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
470 FIRE DETECTION MODE

Ensure that activation of the fire detection system specified in Section W50 causes all fans to stop but the
motorised dampers at air exhaust louvers to remain fully open.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS

To provide, install, test and commission a complete extract ventilation system to meet the functional and
performance criteria outlined within this specification.
510 MAIN CONTRACTOR


To undertake the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and setting to work of all elements of the ventilation
system and equipment together with elements of design responsibility and equipment selection of the dedicated
toilet extract ventilation system, all as described and set out within this the Tender Documentation and on the
Tender Drawings to ensure design intent is achieved.

Mechanical Installer to complete the site wiring terminations to all of the plant



Agree all proposed methods of fixing the system(s) to structure, roof, cladding, equipment, etc. with the Contract
Administrator.
560 PERMIT TO WORK

Prior to commencement of work and where appropriate (e.g. where an existing system has to be disconnected

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
570 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.
610 AIR DUCTLINES
611 GENERAL
Ensure that all ductwork complies with Section Y30 of this specification
612 CLASSIFICATION
Install all ducting to the following pressure classifications of HVCA Specification DW144:
- low pressure outlets - Class A

Ensure all ducting is manufactured and installed to achieve intermediate cleanliness standard as defined by HVCA
TR/19.
613 ZINC COATED STEEL

Install zinc coated steel ducting of the sizes and in the locations shown on the drawings except where such
ductwork on the drawings is specifically indicated as being fire rated ducting, plastic or other materials suitable
for the specific purpose of use.
620 AIR DUCTLINE ANCILLARIES

Install ancillaries in accordance with Clause Y31 of this specification.
621 ACCESS OPENINGS

Install access openings in accordance with sections Y30 and Y31 of this specification, to each item of plant and
equipment and to facilitate a ductwork inspection and cleaning regime.
623 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

Install FD’s and SD’s in accordance with Section Y31 of this specification and additionally where shown on the
drawings.
624 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTINGS

Install vibration isolation mountings generally in accordance with Section Y52 of this specification and additionally
where shown on the drawings.
640 TOILET EXTRACT FANS

Install fans in the locations shown on the drawings and in accordance with Sections Y41 and Y92 of this
specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
700 EQUIPMENT
Install the Extract Fans as set out in the locations indicated on the Tender drawings and in accordance with
section Y40 of this specification
800 PAINTING
Paint all steel piping, fittings, supports and brackets in accordance with clauses Y50 of this specification.
Ensure all off site painting and anti corrosion treatments are made in accordance with Section Y91 of this
specification

Comply with Section Y90 of this specification.



- The piping is supported adequately

- Piping is arranged and painted correctly
- Hand wheels or levers are fitted to valves with clear indication of open/closed position
- Electrical bonding is complete
- Installation drawings and line diagrams have been prepared and fitted at the primary meter and elsewhere as
appropriate
1200 SCHEDULE OF INSTALLER’S SUBMISSION

The Mechanical Installer will submit for the Engineer’s comment:
- Manufacturers calculations for fan selection and duct sizing

- Manufacturers calculations for attenuator selection and acoustic duct cladding
- Manufacturer’s details of all proposed AHU supply and extract fan units
- drawing production schedule and drawings of every ducting system in accordance with section A11 of this
specification.
- method statements
- operating and maintenance instructions
- control systems schematics and wiring diagrams
- testing and commissioning records/sheets/certificates

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
U41 FAN COIL AIR CONDITIONING

Supply, install, test and commission a fan coil air conditioning system to control temperature within the offices,
reception, corridors, toilets, store rooms, workshops, plant rooms, etc, all as generally indicated by the this
Specification and drawings, service reference specifications and equipment schedules.
Arrange for the chilled water fan coil units to supply air into the space with a return air path directly into the
return plenum section of the unit. Incorporate fire dampers within fire compartimentation walls, partitions or floor
where indicated on the Tender drawings.
Supply, install, test and commission a back up air precision conditioning system to control temperature within the
Communications and Server rooms, as generally indicated by the Specification, service reference specifications
and equipment schedules.
The Contractor shall allow for all Mechanical, Electrical and Public Health plant and services to provide complete
installations within the Data Centre building to achieve the criteria set out within this Tender Specification, on the
drawings and within the equipment schedules.

European Standard.
- HVCA DW144 - Specification for sheet metal ductwork. Low, medium and high pressure/velocity air systems
With regards to all British Standards and all other reference documents the highlighted areas of this building shall
Explosive Atmospheres Directive (ATEX):
is not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for only a short period.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
311 FAN COIL UNIT COOLING SYSTEM

Provide a fan coil unit air cooling system to the conditioned areas as generally indicated by the drawings, services
reference specification and equipment schedules.
The Installer shall provide either floor, ceiling fan coils and precision air conditioner each complete with
removable casing, having front removable access to motor assembly, filter and controls. Paint finish to RAL 9010
colour. Maximum installed depth of fan coil units shall be 270mm.
The positions of these fan coil units together with chilled water/refrigeration pipework, control and wiring routes
are all as indicated on the Drawings. Details of equipment to be provided by the Installer are detailed within the
equipment schedules which are located within the Specification.
Fan coils will be provided with a temperature probe that acts on the fan of the fan coil.
The Installer shall ensure that the fan coil units shall achieve the required acoustic and thermal design
parameters. See specification section Y47 for fan coil manufacturing/performance requirements.
The Main Contractor shall provide both the mechanical plant room and electrical plant room with an air tight seal
construction to maintain a stable environment for the mechanical plant to operate at optimum conditions. Any
leakage through constructed walls, external doors etc. shall not be tolerated and this will be detrimental to the
operation of the installed mechanical and associated controlled electrical equipment.
The Installer shall provide insulated DW144 “low pressure” class galvanised sheet and flexible circular supply
ductwork from each fan coil unit including inlet and discharge plenum complete with balancing damper as
312 PRECISION AIR CONDITIONER

This section covers the specification of the precision air-conditioning for data centre which requires clean air and
well distributed with precisely controlled temperature and humidity for high sensible heat environment.
The environmental precision control unit shall be water cooled precision air conditioning unit. Each unit shall be a
complete environmental control system factory wired, tested and specifically designed to provide temperature,
humidity and dust control for computer room or telecommunications installations. The temperature and RH of the
room shall be maintained at ±1°C and ±5°C at all time. The precision air- conditioners shall be either floor
standing or ceiling hung type to suit drawings and construction site limitation.
Main Components:
- Structure: The unit shall have heliarc welded steel frame which provides for maximum strength and ease of
access. Side and front panels can be easily opened and removed with quarter-turn fasteners allowing full
access to all unit components. All panels shall include 25mm thick sandwiched polyurethane for thermal
protection. The cabinet shall be with double wall/skinned construction to reduce insulation erosion and
enhanced sound attenuation. All internal joints between frame and panel shall have PE vapour seal to reduce
condensation. The unit shall be totally front service accessible. The compressor shall be housed in separate
compartment to reduce energy wastage and enable easier and better noise treatment
- Coil Section: The unit shall be designed for draw through type with large face areas for low velocity to reduce
turbulence and provide greater efficiency in the cooling and dehumidification process. Chilled water cooling
coils shall consist of staggered rows of seamless copper tubes, mechanically expanded into die-formed

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
aluminum fins. Fins are of corrugated design and coated with hydrophilic to improve heat transfer, at both
indoor and outdoor units which is suitable for corrosive environment and tested under water to 2800kPa with
compressed air. The chilled water cooling coil shall be controlled by built in 3-way control valve via the
environmental control unit microprocessor. The drain pan shall be of stainless steel construction and insulated
with PE insulation. Spot type water detection system shall be provided at the drain pan to provide monitoring
alert if condensate pan becomes overflow. The coil and its components shall be selected such that its
pressure rating is able to withstand the highest expected pressure
- Fan Section: The fan shall be centrifugal forward curve, double width, double inlet blower configuration for
quiet operation. The floor standing unit shall use belt drive system with minimum 2 pulleys / belts for
maximum reliability. The blowers shall be AMCA certified and factory certified that it undergo static and
dynamic balancing to ISO 1940 and AMCA 204/3-G2.5 standard. It shall be AMCA certified for air and sound
performance and class II heavy duty self align pillow block construction with long life bearing designed for
100,000 operation hours. The motor shall be of minimum IP54 totally enclosed and mounted on an adjustable
slide base. The motor shall be 3-phase induction with efficiency complying to MS1525 EEF 1 in terms of
energy efficiency
- Compressor: The unit shall be of twin scroll compressors type with a high EER, low sound power level, best
sound quality due to low discharge pulse and high reliability to meet application requirement. For cooling
capacity more than 30 Kw, the floor standing precision air-conditioners shall have dual compressors with
independent refrigerant circuit for maximum load flexibility. The hermetic motor shall be suction gas-cooled
with high starting torque and the windings shall be inherently protected from overloading, single-phasing
and under-voltage operation. The compressor shall have a check valve which located directly above the fixed
scroll discharge port to prevent the compressor from running backwards after the power has been switched
off. The compressor shall have a rotor-lock valve at suction and discharge connection for easy servicing. The
motor shall be fitted with a thermostat which protects the compressor if a malfunction occurs
- Filter: The filter chamber shall be an integral part of the system, designed within the frame and cabinet. The
filters shall be disposable type 30% efficient (based on ASHRAE 52-76) or EU4 based on European standards
- Stainless steel drain pan: The condensate drain pan shall be fabricated with stainless steel with surfaces
insulated with fire retardant PE foam for long life and minimum contamination
- Condensing sections: The casing of the condensing section shall be heavy gauge steel panels, insulated with
linacoustic fiberglass, tightly fitted with gasket on rigid frame, to guard against leaks of conditioned air. All
steel parts shall be coated with oven-baked epoxy paint, which gives excellent finishing, weather ability and
salt-spray test of minimum 840 hours. Oven-baked epoxy paint shall provide the best painting system, which
even can coat the inaccessible places of part like the edges, the joints or interior surface of hollow sections
- The condenser coils shall be of seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins for heat
rejection performance enhancement as well as corrosion resistance and tested under water to 2800 kPa with
compressed air. The fins shall be hydrophilic coated. Fans shall be propeller type direct driven by 6-pole
weatherproof electric induction motors to reduce noise. Fan motor shall have IP54 enclosure
- The condenser fan blades shall be made of durable alloy material and manufactured with toothed tail-end for
higher efficiency and reduced fan noise. The motor shall be suitable for operation with 415/3/50 electric
supply with +10% or – 15% voltage fluctuation
- Monitoring and Controlling System: Chilled water shall be controlled automatically by built-in micro-processor
controller. The unit shall have 4 rows, 20 character LCD displays. It shall display data centre’s temperature,
humidity, airflow status, cleanliness and shall be able to provide component run times, alarm history, an
automatic self-test of the microprocessor on system start-up. The microprocessor controller shall be of 16 bits

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
type with flash memory to stored customised application programming data. All of these messages shall be
spelled out in full English Language on the LED display. Multiple alarms shall be able to be displayed
sequentially in order of occurrence
The menu selection switch shall permit step-by-step programming and display of the following functions:
- Temperature set point 18 °C to 29 °C (65 °F to 85 °F)

- Temperature sensitivity 0.5 °C to 2.7 °C (1°F to 5 °F)
- Humidity set point 40% to 60% RH
- Humidity sensitivity 1% to 10% RH
- Temperature alarm points
- Humidity alarm points
- Unit start time delay
- Current temperature (°C or °F)
- Current humidity (%RH)
- Humidification
- Dehumidification
- Current % of capacity and the average % of capacity for the last hour of operation for compressors,
humidification, dehumidification, reheat and chilled water
The unit shall have standard alarm system as follows:
- Compressor high pressure

- High and low temperature
- High and low humidity
- No air flow
- Change filter
- Humidifier failure
- Manual override
- Power failure restart
- Compressor short cycle
- Temperature sensor error
- Humidity sensor error
- Firestat tripped
- Local alarm (programmable)
- Maintenance due
313 AIR CONDITIONER FOR HIGH CEILING

Circular unit for ceiling installation only, suitable for high rooms, even if the optimum ratio between the air flow-
rate and the heat / cool output make them suitable for any manufacturing environment.
The casing is made of spun steel on both top and bottom sections which is designed to give greater strength and
quieter operation. The casing is then finished with an epoxy, polyester powder coating of light grey, RAL 9002;

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The circular coil is constructed of copper tubes with aluminium fins;
The helicoidal fan is statically and dynamically balanced;
Standard motors are three phase 400 V;
Closed frame, flange mounted, pre-greased bearings, protection IP 44;
Available with double speed double wiring at 6/8 pole (900-700 r.p.m.).
320 CONDENSATE DRAINAGE SYSTEM

The Installer shall design a condensate drainage system to serve both the chilled water fan coil units serving the
rooms. The positions of all fan coil units shall be as indicated within the Specification and Drawings. Trapped
condensate pipework shall be installed using U-PVC pipe to BS EN 1329 R250 with bracketing provided at correct
centres for support.
Access rodding points shall be installed at every change of direction Condensate drainage shall be run from the
fan coil units to discharge to adjacent waste pipework within toilets as agreed on site by the CA.
Pipework shall be installed strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions complete with identification
bands and flow directional arrows. Where condensate discharge requires lifting the Installer shall provide a good
quality condensate pump having good reliability and life expectancy.

The Installer shall provide a wall mounted controller providing on/off time control to both chilled water and fan
coil units, located within each zone or room served.
Fit each fan coil unit with its own networked, intelligent, stand alone controller and interface connection to the
BMS system.
Ensure the local controllers turn the fan coil units fan on/off as required by its on board time schedule. Local
controller shall also be capable of local set point adjustment.
Provide standard controllers in each space to control the system within that space. Each controller shall be
provided with the following as a minimum:
- Time switched control for all FCU’s

- Operation mode switching (heating/cooling/fan only/auto/off) for all units
- Temperature set point adjust for all units both individually and in groups within preset ranges
- Fan speed switching for all units
- Fault indication for each unit individually
- Filter dirty indication for all units
Allow for initial setting up and programming of all controllers.
In addition to the standard controller in each Mechanical plant room, a general touch screen controller shall be
mounted for control and monitoring of all units within the building. This shall be provided with a Bacnet Gateway
or equivalent, for full BMS interface.
The Installer shall include for all interconnecting power, control wiring, controller, and loose controls necessary to
operate the mechanical fan coil unit plant and equipment at optimum performance at all times.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The controller shall be provided with volt free contacts to facilitate run, set point control and fault monitoring at
FM building. Link all controllers into the site BMS and FM Building controller unit so that global changes can be
made from the supervisor and override on/off signals can be sent and received.
An emergency/ reset stop facility shall be provided within the mechanical plant room for the user.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS

To provide, install, test and commission a complete ventilation system to meet the functional and performance
criteria outlined within this specification
510 MAIN CONTRACTOR


To undertake the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and setting to work together with elements of
design responsibility and equipment selection of the fan coil unit cooling system all as described and set out
within this the Tender Documentation and on the Tender Drawings to ensure design intent is achieved
The Mechanical Installer shall be wholly responsible for the supply, installing, testing, commissioning of all power
and control wiring required for the optimum running, efficiency and operation of the fan coil unit systems
described above all as described and set out within this Documentation and on the Drawings.



- Controls Wiring

Agree all proposed methods of fixing the systems to structure, roof, cladding, chimneys, equipment, etc. with the

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
560 PERMIT TO WORK

Prior to commencement of work and where appropriate (e.g. where an existing system has to be disconnected
570 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.
700 EQUIPMENT
710 FAN COILS UNITS

Select chilled water fan coil units to meet the scheduled performance criteria and in accordance with section Y47.
Ensure compliance with the noise criteria as detailed above.
800 CLEANING
Ensure that all terminal units are adequately protected during construction/installation works.
Prior to enabling any terminal units, inspect and clean if necessary all internal areas of the terminal units. Allow
for temporary intake filter protection whilst pre-commissioning and balancing of discharge ductwork.
Ensure, by inspection that the terminal units and their discharge ductwork are clean at practical completion.
Ensure that the ductwork is provided with adequate access to facilitate the pre- inspection and cleaning of all
supply and extract ductwork at regular intervals as required under current legislation and European directives

Ensure that all painting, thermal insulation, vapour sealing and cladding of the system is in accordance with


1210 GENERAL
Factory test each size of fan coil unit in accordance with section Y47.
Commission air and water distribution from/to fan coil units in accordance with section Y51

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Carry out testing, commissioning, performance and environmental testing of the automatic controls in accordance
with sections Y51 with the necessary attendance given where required.
1220 COMPLIANCE

- the ductwork is supported adequately

- hand wheels or levers are fitted to valves and dampers with clear indication of open/closed position
appropriate

Submit the following for the Contract Administrator's comment:
- selection calculations and terminal unit general arrangement and manufacturing drawings
- schedule of fan coil units with duties and selected sizes
- schedule of diffusers and plenum boxes
- description of Control function for fan coil unit

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y10 PIPELINES
300 CHILLED WATER PIPELINES
310 CHILLED WATER PIPELINES (BLACK STEEL)

For pipework of 20mm, 40mm, 65mm, or any size (up to and including 150mm) where concealed or without
permanent access – use heavyweight steel. All concealed pipework must be welded.
Sizes above 150mm are covered by a different British Standard which doesn’t use the terms ‘medium grade’ and
‘heavy grade’.
311 APPLICATION
For chilled water pipelines with a maximum working pressure of 6 bar gauge and temperature 5°C to 15°C. For
joints on chilled water steel pipework up to 50mm and where not concealed use either welded or screwed
method. Weld all other joints and all joints 65mm and over.
Alternatively, use grooved couplings on joints 65mm and over where not concealed.
312 PIPE: BLACK CARBON STEEL

Use black carbon steel pipe with screwed and plain ends to BS EN 10255, heavy grade, screwed ends BS EN
10226 taper, varnished finish. For pipe sizes up to and including 150mm nominal sizes.
For outside diameters 219.1mm [nominal sizes 200] and above use steel pipe with plain ends to BS EN 10216-1
and BS EN 10217-1, dimensions to BS EN 10220, Table 1, minimum wall thickness 219.1mm [200] (8.0mm),
273mm [250] (8.8mm), 329.3mm [300] to 457mm [450] (10.0mm), Grade 440, with protective finish.
Ensure all pipe has all mill scale, corrosion and grease removed and is protected by zinc phosphate anti- corrosion
primer paint, preferably applied at manufacturer's works. Ensure the pipes are certified as having been so
treated.
313 FITTINGS: BLACK

Use malleable cast iron, reinforced pattern fittings to BS 143 and 1256, or screwed sockets to BS EN 10241,
screwed BS EN 10226 taper.
Use carbon steel, butt welding, pattern fittings to BS EN 10253, of equal thickness to the pipe, Grade 440,
varnished finish.
Use grooved end, ductile iron cast fittings to BS EN 1563, wrought steel to BS EN 12053-1, or factory fabricated
and tested from BS EN 10255 pipe.
314 UNIONS
Use malleable cast iron unions, with ground in spherical bronze seats, to maker's standard.
315 FLANGES: MILD STEEL, RAISED FACE

Use screwed boss type flanges to BS EN 1092-1, Figure 1, Type 13.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Use welding flanges, slip-on boss type to BS EN 1092-1, Figure 1, Type 12.
316 FLANGE GASKETS

Use flange gaskets suitable for chilled water at 6 bar and 15°C.
317 GROOVED JOINT COUPLINGS

Use grooved joint couplings consisting of two ductile iron housing segments to BS EN 1563, pressure responsive
gasket to BS EN 681-1 or BS EN 681-2, rated for water service to 110ºC, with zinc-electroplated bolts and nuts.
400 CONDENSER COOLING WATER PIPELINES
410 CONDENSER COOLING WATER PIPELINES (BLACK STEEL)
411 APPLICATION
For closed system pipework abovegroung installed between condenser and heat rejection equipment for a
maximum working pressure of 6 bar gauge. For joints on condenser pipework up to 50mm and where not
concealed, use either welded or screwed methods. Weld all other joints and joints 65mm and over.
Alternatively, use grooved couplings on joints 65mm and over where not concealed.
412 PIPE: BLACK CARBON STEEL

Use black carbon steel pipe, with screwed and plain ends, to BS EN 10255, heavy grade, screwed BS EN 10226
taper, varnished finish.
For outside diameters 219.1mm [nominal sizes 200] and above use steel pipe with plain ends to BS EN 10216-1
and BS EN 10217-1, dimensions to BS EN 10220, Table 1, minimum wall thickness 219.1mm [200] (8.0mm),
273mm [250] (8.8mm), 329.3mm [300] to 457mm [450] (10.0mm), Grade 440, with protective finish.
413 FITTINGS: BLACK

Use malleable cast iron, reinforced pattern fittings to BS 143 and 1256, or screwed sockets to BS EN 10241,
screwed BS EN 10226 taper, varnished finish.
Use carbon steel, butt welding, pattern fittings to BS EN 10253, of equal thickness to the pipe, Grade 440,
varnished finish.
Use grooved end, ductile iron cast fittings to BS EN 1563, wrought steel to BS EN 12053-1, or factory fabricated
and tested from BS EN 10255 pipe.
414 UNIONS
Use malleable cast iron unions, with ground-in spherical bronze seats, to maker's standard.
415 FLANGES: MILD STEEL, RAISED FACE

Use screwed boss type flanges to BS EN 1092-1, Figure 1, Type 13.
Use welding flanges, slip-on boss type to BS EN 1092-1, Figure 1, Type 12.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
416 FLANGE GASKETS

Use flange gaskets suitable for condenser cooling water.

Use grooved joint couplings consisting of two ductile iron housing segments to BS EN 1563, pressure responsive
gasket to BS EN 681-1 or BS EN 681-2, rated for water service to 110ºC, with zinc-electroplated bolts and nuts.
500 HOT AND COLD WATER – INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL NOT BURIED
Use only pipe, fittings and ancillary components listed in the Water Regulations Advisory Scheme (WRAS) Water
Fittings and Materials Directory.
Irrespective of the maximum working pressure of the system, use brazed fittings on all piping, of all sizes, where
the piping is located in services ducts, services walkways and services shafts.
Where connecting to equipment and ancillaries, screwed connectors, adaptors and couplings are permitted.
Where not exposed, pulled bends are permitted. Except for chromium plated applications and connections to
equipment, do not use compression joints.
Install all tube and fittings, including polyethylene coated tube, strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
700 FIRE MAIN PIPELINES
710 FIRE MAINS PIPELINES - INTERNAL
711 APPLICATION
For wet risers and for water supply to first aid fire hose-reels having maximum working pressure of 16 bar gauge
and temperature 10°C. For joints on pipework up to 50mm use either welded or screwed method where not
concealed. Weld all other joints and all joints 65mm and over.
Alternatively, use grooved couplings on joints 65mm and over where not concealed
712 PIPE
Use carbon steel pipe with a bitumen based coating or wrapping or a polyethylene sleeving used as an external
corrosion protection; carbon steel is according to BS EN 10255, for socket fittings and screwed flanges screwed to
BS EN 10226 taper or grooved.
716 GASKETS
Use gaskets suitable for fire mains water at 16 bar and 10°C, made from ethylene propylene synthetic rubber.

Use couplings consisting of two ductile iron housing segments to BS EN 1563, pressure responsive gasket to BS
EN 681-1 or BS EN 681-2, rated for water service to 110ºC, with zinc-electroplated bolts and nuts.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
1100 COMPRESSED AIR PIPELINES
1110 COMPRESSED AIR PIPELINES INDUSTRIAL (GALVANISED STEEL)

Pipework materials shall be as follows and typically in accordance with the relevant BCGA Code of Practice:
- Compressed Air – Mild Steel (Galvanized) BS 1387 screwed
1124 FLANGES
Use flanges of mild steel flange/copper alloy centre piece, capillary type to BS EN 1092-3, silver alloy brazing
metal to BS EN 1044, Table 3, type AG105, and protected against electrolytic action and corrosion.
1125 FLANGE GASKETS

Use flange gaskets suitable for compressed air at 4 bar.
1200 INSTALLATION
1210 PIPELINES INSTALLATION
1211 PIPELINES INSTALLATION – GENERALLY

Carry out the complete installation comprising new materials, a high quality standard of workmanship, properly
supervised and having regard to the following:
- 1) Health and Safety at Work Act

- 2) Ionising Radiation Regulations
- 3) Radioactive Substances Act
- 4) The Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations and IGEM publications IGE/TD/3, IGE/TD/4 and
IGE/UP/2
Take account of the Quality Assurance requirements of BS EN ISO 9000, and select products that are
manufactured under BSI Kite Mark Scheme, BSI Safety Mark Scheme, and Firms of Assessed Capability.
For domestic water installations use only materials, fittings, gaskets and construction methods that do not impart
taste, odour, colour, release of toxic substances or support microbiological growth. Use only tube, fittings,
materials and ancillary components listed in the Water Regulations Advisory Scheme (WRAS) Water Fittings and
Materials Directory.
Allow for the supply and installation of the materials equipment and accessories specified including the drilling,
plugging, screw, bolt and clamp fixings, of all such items assembled together or secured to any part of the
building structural elements.
An installation may be rendered unacceptable where there is evidence of materials, incorrect for the purpose, in
any way damaged, misaligned, insecurely fixed, not to manufacturers recommendations, or where sub-standard
workmanship is evident in the preparation of pipes and fittings to provide a sound, safe installation, free from
potential difficulties due to air-locking, blockages, contamination or other hazards.
Machine cut pipe ends clean and square, prepare for jointing, deburr, free from rust, scale or any other foreign
matter, thoroughly clean before erection, with approved type screwed plugs, caps or flanges provided to seal
open ends of pipe during construction.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where pipework exposed to view has been specified to be chromium-plated finish, fabricate, dismantle and then
chromium plate the whole of the pipework, valves and stopcocks chromium-plated and then re-fit.
Make connections to equipment using flanges or union connections and any necessary reducing fittings. Where
the equipment flange is of a higher Table pressure than the specified pipeline fit a matching flange and bolts to
the pipe. Where the equipment size is less make the reduction from the pipe size close to the equipment followed
by an isolating valve of the same size as the pipework.
Bond metallic pipework systems in accordance with BS 7671 as part of the electrical work.
When metal pipes are to be insulated ensure that the proposed insulation product does not contain appreciable
amounts of sodium silicate so creating a corrosion risk as detailed in BS5970 clause 8.3.3.
1212 PIPE RUNS AND GRADIENTS

Install pipe runs to follow the horizontal line, paralleled with walls, set around projections and the vertical line
plumb without offsets. Allow adequate clearance between pipes and from surfaces for valve access and for future
insulation. Do not make any joints within the thickness of the building structure or be so close to the surface that
access is difficult.
Arrange branch mains crossing subways or ducts to rise to high level prior to crossing, to maintain maximum
access.
Take heating and hot water branch connections (other than for gravity pipework) off the top of the mains if
serving to above for venting purposes and off the bottom if serving to below for draining purposes. Take
compressed air connections off the top of the mains.
Install compressed air pipelines free of undrained pockets and at all low points fit drain pockets of equal diameter
to the main and connected to the type of automatic trap assembly specified.
1213 PIPELINE FITTINGS AND JOINTS

Provide pipeline break points, for disconnection at branches from headers, mains and risers, at connection to
plant and equipment and at intervals of 24 metres or other convenient lengths in the pipe run. This does not
apply where continuously secure pipe runs are specified, such as in ducts or above ceiling in special areas.
Install break points comprising unions on pipe sizes up to and including 50mm steel, 50mm plastic and 54mm
copper and flanges on pipe sizes 65mm and above for steel, 63mm plastic and 67mm copper, and where
specified for smaller pipe sizes.
Install fittings appropriate for the application and either, screwed BS EN 10226 taper thread, or suitable for
soldering, steel welding, brazing or fusion welding. Use eccentric pattern with the taper of the fitting rising in
direction of flow to facilitate venting and draining. Do not use bushes for reducing purposes other than for
thermometer or other control items. Do not use long screw fitting connections.
Form sets and bends without a joint of any kind within its length and without evidence of rippling, thinning or
other damage or distortion.
Use pulled bends wherever practicable in preference to round elbows unless appearance dictates. Use sweep tees
or twin elbow parallel tees on water circulation pipework with square tees or round elbows only on final draw-off
deadlegs of less than 13 metres, to facilitate draining or venting, or at steam trap assemblies.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
For headers, where fitted with flanged pipe connections, fit flanges on all connections and one or both ends of
the header as appropriate.
Fit puddle flanges where pipes pass through waterproof or oil-proof structures or enter a pipe duct below ground
level. Fabricate the unit to allow access for flange connection, treat it against corrosion, and arrange for it to be
built into the structure by others.
Use black or galvanised unions, malleable iron or wrought iron as appropriate with spherical bronze seats and
screwed BS EN 10226 taper or with plain capillary ends for copper.
Use black or galvanised steel flanges to BS EN 1092-1, copper alloy or composite steel/copper alloy insert or
steel/plastic insert, as appropriate with bolts nuts and washers, black steel, steel cadmium-plated, steel
sherardized or high tensile brass or stainless steel and with protection against electrolytic action and corrosion.
Use flanges which are full face or raised face to match the corresponding flanges on valves and other fittings.
For fittings and jointing of domestic water pipelines follow the recommendations of BS 8558, BS EN 805 and BS
EN 806.
For steel pipes paint screwed threads and exposed pipe threads with zinc phosphate paint immediately after joint
has been made.
Make screwed joints generally in accordance with BS7786, BS 6956 and BS EN 751 parts 1 to 3 inclusive using
the following:
- PTFE tape for LTHW, chilled water, condenser cooling water, ABS or uPVC plastic pipe fittings
- PTFE heavy grade tape, for natural gas
- PTFE tape for potable hot and cold water
- Jointing compound for steam and condense
- For screwed stainless steel joints use jointing tape suitable for use with stainless steel and where necessary
also suitable for use in potable water installations
Use flange gaskets of a grade suitable for the temperature, pressure and operating conditions of each pipeline
specified, and which are at least to the minimum standards for ethylene propylene synthetic rubber, natural
rubber, "Neoprene" or compressed cork in accordance with BS EN 1514, BS 5292, BS 7874, BS EN 681-1, BS EN
682, BS EN 681-2 and BS EN 6956.
For soldered or brazed jointing requiring a clean, flux and scale free bore to the pipe after jointing introduce a
flow of dry nitrogen or carbon dioxide during the process.
Make capillary solder joints in accordance with BS 864-2 (lead free), capillary brazed joints in accordance with BS
EN 12797, BS EN 12799, BS EN 13133, BS EN 13134 and BS 1306 (silver brazing). Ensure all joints comply with
HTM 04-01 for hot and cold water pipelines.
1214 PIPELINE CLEARANCE AND SEGREGATION

Fix pipes with a minimum clearance of 25mm between uninsulated pipes, the finished face of pipe insulation and
adjacent surfaces, a minimum clearance of 100mm from ceiling or finished floor level and a minimum clearance
of 150mm from lighting fittings, power cables, conduits or trunking.
Space pipes to allow for the application of thermal insulation, for adjacent fittings, valves, flanges, boxes and for
future access to pipes in concealed ducts without disturbance to remaining pipes.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
To prevent heat gain (Legionnaires Disease) cold water cisterns and mains do not place pipework in close
proximity to hot pipes or above hot areas of the building.
Do not install ventilation and air conditioning ductwork and town/natural gas services in the same services duct.
Where possible, locate the main soil and surface water drainage below all other services.
1215 PIPE SLEEVES AND COVER PLATES

Fit pipework passing through walls, floors, ceilings and partitions with sleeves of internal diameter at least 10mm
larger than the external diameter of the pipework passing through the sleeve. Fit pipework subject to sideways
movement due to expansion or where insulation is continuous, with oversize sleeves.
Install sleeves of a material similar to that of the pipe, steel or copper and for plastic pipes, rigid plastic or
copper, with lugs to locate in floors and ceiling and treated against corrosion.
Position sleeves correctly around the pipe, normally centrally except where lateral movement of the pipe requires
off-setting of the sleeve and finally built-in by others.
Finish sleeves flush with the finished face(s) of walls, floors, ceiling and partitions but project 75mm above the
floor in wet working areas or ablutions, with the clearance around the pipe sealed with waterproof mastic or
screwed plastic thimbles. Where the sleeve projects above the floor fit the floor plate around the sleeve
For pipework passing through roofs install the sleeves to project 150mm above the finished roof and fit with
sheet metal weathering aprons and skirts for flashing up by others. Galvanise steel fabrications after
manufacture.
Without restricting pipework movement within the sleeve pack the gap with mineral wool for general internal
surfaces, with fire stopping in fire rated structures using non-combustible material approved by the Fire Authority,
and with caulked-in weatherproof material in external walls.
For pipework passing through the structure and fitted with sleeves in areas occupied or otherwise in regular
usage fit cover plates around the pipes (or sleeves in wet areas) to suitably conceal the gap and sleeve end.
Ensure the plates cover the sleeve end even where oversize sleeves are necessary and the pipe opening of
adjacent pipes allow for this provision to produce a neat and tidy appearance.
Use plates of plastic, polished aluminium, or chrome-plate material, to suit application specified.
1216 EXPANSION, ANCHORS AND GUIDES

Take up the expansion of pipework in allowance at bends, changes of direction natural deflection or where
expansion dictates by the fitting of expansion devices or expansion loops and in each case suitable anchors and
guides.
Make allowance for the effect of expansion when pipes are in the cold by leaving appropriate gaps in the
pipework, to be taken up by cold draw during final erection of the pipework. Apply the amount of cold draw,
normally 50% of total expansion of the length under consideration, using flanges and long high tensile steel bolts
to the ends being pulled together. Follow the manufacturer’s data and recommendations in the correct allowance
for cold draw.
Where branch connections are taken off mains, make full allowance for expansion in different planes by suitable
anchors and guides.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Provide expansion loops of the same material as the pipework, formed in one length, with ends flanged and
dimensions and thickness suitable for the movement to be accommodated.
Provide expansion belows axial joints in accordance with BS 6129-1, fully articulated with suitable number of
convolutions to accommodate the movement required. Select and fit the joint in accordance with the
manufacturer's data and recommendations. Do not use screwed connections unless otherwise specified.
Position axial compensator joints, or grooved flexible joints, where specified to accommodate larger movement of
the pipework and to reduce undue stress on the structure, at changes of direction in the pipework in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Where buried mains are not self-anchoring or where joints are not designed to take end loads, install anchor
brackets in ducts or attached to concrete blocks designed to prevent movement at stop ends, bends, junctions,
valve positions and steep gradients.
Fit suitable 'U' bolts, flat strap or other type guides in conjunction with design of anchor and roller/slider supports
to ensure that expansion movement takes place in the same plane as the pipe run without deflection of the
pipework.
For securing steel pipework weld the anchor bracket directly to the pipe. Where this is impracticable use cast iron
chairs and at least two mild steel stirrups bolts (not screwed rod) to grip the pipe.
For securing copper pipework use anchors with wide copper straps brazed to the pipework such that no part of
the pipe touches the steel structure.
Alternatively for securing steel or copper pipework pipe use slip-on flanges with an interposed mild steel channel
section attached to the building structure.
For securing plastic pipes use the pipeline fitting flanges or slip-on flanges with interposed mild steel channel
section attached to the building structure. Do not use pipe clamps likely to cause damage to the pipe.
1217 PIPELINE SUPPORTS

Support the pipework support system from the building structure, generally conforming with manufacturers
recommendations and where specified elsewhere.
Securely support pipework, singly or in groups, graded to levels required for venting and draining and having
regard to the requirements for differential expansion, anchors and guides and thermal insulation sizing.
Install load-bearing insulation rings/blocks at all pipe support positions for all insulated services, incorporating
steel spreader plates as necessary, fully in accordance with the requirements detailed in section Y50.
Ensure that insulated pipe support blocks consist of pre-formed lengths, manufactured from the required base
material and in compliance with the applicable normalised BS EN standard. Ensure that the sections have a bore
size corresponding to the outside diameter of the pipe to which they are fitted. Where available supply supports
as one-piece, hinged snap-on tubes, complete with factory bonded, BL-s1,d0 (Class 0) surface laminate of glass
reinforced aluminium foil, except for nitrile rubber which will not have a surface laminate of glass reinforced
aluminium foil but will be of BL-s3,d0/Class 0 surface rated material. For fibrous insulation support blocks use
products having a self-adhesive overlap whose width does not exceed the thickness of the insulation.
Refer to section Y50 for the required insulation thicknesses. When selecting insulation thickness from the Y50
tables, use the greater thickness when results fall between scheduled temperature differences or thermal
conductivity figures.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that all rigid support blocks are concentric and precisely matched for thickness.
Where pipe support blocks are supplied with a foil flap use products having a self-adhesive overlap whose width
does not exceed the thickness of the insulation.
Irrespective of insulation material proposed, for cold services installed using copper tube use only plastic coated
tube with fittings suitably wrapped in accordance with the piping system manufacturer instructions. For the
avoidance of doubt do not use phenolic foam insulation on bare copper tube for cold services.
For cold fluid installations, where plastic coated pipework has been installed, prior to installing the insulation,
prime and wrap all valves and fittings, in accordance with the system manufacturer’s recommendations, to
provide a complete protective installation inside the insulation.
On cold fluid installations install regular vapour check points by ensuring that each and every support installed on
cold services is fully and carefully vapour sealed both to itself as well as on both sides to the pipe it is supporting.
Support external pipes from below to remove the risk of rain etc penetrating the insulation/cladding via drop
rods.
Provide supports, at the base of vertical pipes and where appropriate intermediate positions, adjacent to valves,
expansion fittings and other special pipeline components, to allow for the additional loading and removal of
components without detriment to the adjoining pipework.
On internal pipework exposed to view, fit approved brackets, hangers or clips as appropriate and of neat
appearance, fixed to the wall/soffit at intervals to give uniform spacing and neat appearance.
Where pipes are suspended use threaded rods of not less than 8mm diameter but otherwise sized by the
specialist supplier. Small single pipes may be suspended using threaded rods of not less than 6mm.diameter. Do
not use calliper hooks.
For metal pipes carrying domestic hot water and any short final run sections of un-insulated metal domestic cold
water pipework either use clips/hangers meeting the specification for vapour sealed services or use clips which
incorporate noise suppression rubber strip to provide both noise and pipe to clip/hanger isolation.
For uninsulated copper pipes carrying fluids other than water use non-ferrous clips/hangers/rollers, or if steel
clips are used and the pipe is to operate no hotter than 90°C use noise suppression rubber strip between pipe
and clip/hanger. Nylon coated ferrous pipe clips may be used. For plastic pipework systems, other than those
carrying a service requiring load bearing insulation inserts use clips/hangers or rollers and chairs specifically
designed for use with plastic pipe systems. Supports for uninsulated sections of plastic domestic hot and cold
water pipework shall incorporate noise suppression and isolating rubber strip.
Support other services and pipe materials using zinc coated/plated steel clips/hangers that may incorporate noise
suppression rubber strip on services operating up to 90°C.
Support mains in ducts on rollers and chairs using fabricated mild steel brackets (painted) or galvanised channel
sections with allowance for building-in or bolting on to the surface of the duct wall.
For pipes at ceiling level or in roof spaces, suspend from rods or straps using adjustable mild steel hangers with
swinging joints or purpose-made angle iron cradles or other steel sections. Use clips on cold pipes and rollers and
chairs on hot pipes and where expansion cannot be readily taken up on hanging brackets.
Fabricated then hot dip galvanise exposed external steel brackets before erection, unless otherwise specified.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Make allowance for the fitting of pipe covering protection, specified in section Y50, at the support positions on
mains that require continuous unbroken weatherproof or vapour proof seal finish, as in the case of chilled water
or cold water pipes.
HDPE Polyethylene pipes and steel pipe systems utilising grooved flexible couplings shall be supported by
brackets or clips which allow axial movement but provide lateral restraint of the pipes.
Pipe support spacings (maximum) for stated pipe materials:
Pipe Bore (mm) Maximum Support Spacing (m)

Nominal Steel Pipe
Horizontal Vertical
Up to 15 1.8 2.4
20 2.4 3.0
25 2.4 3.0
32 2.7 3.0
40 3.0 3.6
50 3.0 3.6
65 3.7 4.6
80 3.7 4.6
100 3.7 4.6
125 3.7 5.4
150 4.5 5.4
200 5.0 6.0
250 5.0 6.0
300 6.1 10.0
350 10.0 12.0
400 10.5 12.6
450 11.0 13.2
500 12.0 14.4
600 14.0 16.8
Pipe Bore (mm) Maximum Support Spacing (m)

Nominal up to 10 C-PVC Polyethylene
Class Class Type 32 Type 50
O,B,C D,E,6,7
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
0.6 0.3 0.45
16 0.6 0.4 0.6
20 0.65 0.4 0.6
25 0.75 0.4 0.6

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
32 0.8 0.45 0.7

40 0.9 0.45 0.7
50 1.1 1.2 0.55 0.85
63 1.2 1.4 0.55 0.85
75 1.4 1.5 0.6 0.9
90 1.5 1.7 0.7 1.1
110 1.7 1.9
140 1.8 2.1 1.3
160 2 2.3
200 2.1 2.5
225 2.3 2.7
250 2.4 2.9
280 2.6 3.1
315 2.9 3.4
400 3.1 3.7
450 3.4 3.7
above 450 3.7 3.7
1218 ELECTRICAL PLANT ROOMS

Route pipework through electrical plant rooms or above positions where electrical plant is to be installed,
including above ceiling level, in conjunction with other trades, to avoid the necessity for pipework to be above
any electrical plant or trunking.
In such positions, where practicable, install pipework without any joints. Where this is not possible use only
welded or brazed joints
1220 VENTING AND DRAINING
1221 PIPELINE VENTING AND DRAINING

For pipework graded to levels required for venting and draining all parts of the system, fit air vents and drain
cocks as specified using square tees.
Introduce air venting devices at high points in water, circulation pipework, high level pipe coils, high level heaters
and all places not naturally vented.
- Vertical air bottles at least 50mm diameter and 100mm long shall be fitted as extensions to the pipework.
Where access to the air bottle is difficult fit an 8mm copper extension tube to bring the manual 8mm vent
cock within reach at low level
- Fit automatic air vents, controlled by lockshield, valves and air release copper pipes run to discharge at the
nearest agreed visible point or drain gully. Install vents as specified under valves and fittings
Where possible make air venting points self-venting on pipe coils and equipment.
Introduce drain cocks, as specified under valves and fittings, at low points on the pipework and on any
equipment forming a low point and positioned allowing good access for operation. Also position drain cocks on

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
the downstream dead side of isolating valves or other valves used to isolate sections of the system for draining
down.
Ensure mains in permanently sealed or screeded over floor ducts are self venting and of welded or brazed
construction throughout.
Do not install valves or drain cocks in sealed ducts, unless otherwise specified.
Give particular attention to maintaining the pipe bores clean during the work where the pipework is to be covered
later. On pipework to be heat tested make provision for carrying out such tests before ducts are sealed.
1222 EQUIPMENT VENTING AND DRAINING

Fit air cocks to heating and cooling appliances. Where access would be difficult without removing front panels,
extend the air cock to a readily accessible position.
Provide drain connections for all plant and equipment drain points including pumps, glands, drain trays, etc. using
single or common (where appropriate) drain lines to discharge into tundishes and then into the most convenient
gullies (preferably back entry) or other drains with trap. On drain lines use fittings with removable plugs or caps
for rodding purposes. End drain lines 100mm to 150mm above the top of the tundishes to provide adequate air
breaks.
Always position temperature and pressure relief pipe outlets so that when they operate unexpectedly they do so
safely.
1230 EXTERNAL PIPELINES
1231 BURIED PIPELINES - TRENCHING

Trench depths will vary to suit requirements of earth cover, and may vary to suit mains or distribution pipes and
where pipes are to be laid together, e.g. minimum of 300mm between gas main and electricity cable.
Lay the pipes on a level bed of sand or granular material, free from sharp stones or other objects, providing
100mm clear thickness under and around the sides of the pipe and 75mm over the top of the pipe. Make
allowance for pockets at joints etc. in order that the pipe rests along its entire length.
Trench to be backfilled by others with selected backfill material compacted by hand tool tamping to a depth of
200mm with further backfilling to surface level using machine compaction.
Pressure test buried pipes with joints exposed before completion of backfilling of trench
Lay plastic warning marker tapes 150mm wide, suitably labelled, in the trench during backfilling at a depth of
approximately 200mm below ground level. For plastic pipes, use marker tape with a stainless steel insert wire
brought out to suitable test point positions at ground level. On no account let the insert wire be rest on the pipe.
Position above ground pipeline markers at intervals along the line of the pipe trench, changes of direction etc.
attach non-corrodible plates, permanently marked with pipe size, contents, depth, direction of flow to flush
concrete blocks in level ground and to raised concrete marker posts in unmade ground.
1232 EXTERNAL PIPELINES – BUILDING ENTRY

Terminate the external pipeline close to the entry into the building space before or at the first isolating position,
i.e. stopcock or isolating valve as appropriate (water) or valve or meter (gas).

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Terminate the external main with a suitable end connection adaptor for the attachment of the stopcock or
isolating valve for the internal mains or distribution pipework.
Completely enclose polyethylene pipe taken inside the building in a continuous metal sleeve (anti-corrosion
protected) bedded in the pipe trench, extending at least 1m from the building and sealed with a mastic material.
Inside the building terminate the sleeve in an approved adaptor before the isolating valve.
Change polyethylene pipes for gas systems to steel pipe, suitably protected, at least 3 metres from the building.
1240 DRAW-OFF TAPS, FLOAT OPERATED VALVES AND SANITARY CISTERNS
1241 DIRECT CONNECTION TO SANITARY FITTINGS

Following normal convention for draw-off taps connect the hot outlet on the left and the cold outlet on the right,
when viewed from the front.
Connect hot and cold copper directly to sanitary fittings and cisterns, draw-off taps and float operated valves for
all specified equipment (sanitary fittings and taps listed elsewhere or by others).
1250 WELDING
1251 PIPELINE WELDING AND BRAZING

Standards and tests
Carry out welding of low carbon steel pipework in accordance with:
- Class II Joints to BS 2971 arc welding, for pipework pressures up to 17 bar gauge
- Class I Joints to BS 2633 arc welding, for pipework pressures over 17 bar gauge
- HVCA Code of Practice TR/5, for pipe sizes up to 200mm and wall thicknesses up to 20mm
Carry out brazing of copper pipework in accordance with:
- BS EN 12797 Brazing. Non-destructive testing

- BS EN 12797 Brazing. Destructive testing
- BS EN 13133 Brazing. Brazer approval
- BS EN 13134 Brazing. Procedure approval
Provide welder approved tests before carrying out any production work on or off site. Arrange for each welder to
carry out specimen butt and branch pipe connection fusion tests and test records to HVCA TR/5, and have them
witnessed.
Provide brazier approved tests before carrying out any production work on or off site. Arrange for each brazier to
carry out standard test piece procedures to BS EN 13133.
Production work
Wire brush and visually inspect completed welds in accordance with BS 2971 and BS EN 970 requirements
Do not use oxy-acetylene welding for steel pipework above 100mm or pipe flanges of any size.
For steel pipework, immediately after completion of a welded joint or following radiographic examination, paint
the pipework with zinc phosphate anti-corrosion primer.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Do not weld galvanised pipework. Where welding is appropriate and a galvanised finish is required, use carbon
steel pipe, welded then hot-dip galvanised after manufacture.
Where arc welding is to be used provide the necessary electrical generating plant.
Do not use gasketed, segmented or cut and shut bends an alternative to standard fittings. ensure all pipe ends
are machine cut, bevelled square and dressed smooth and free from burrs.
For butt welds use matched bores and prepare pipe ends in accordance with BS 2971, Para 20.2. Form branch
welds using proprietary reinforced tees with centre of adjacent branch welds at a distance of not less than twice
the diameter of the largest branch.
Locate welded or brazed joints more than 600mm from an anchor point or guide.
During the progress of the work and on request, cut up to six randomly selected welded or brazed joints for
examination. Rectify or replace any failures. If consistently poor results are found, replace the complete sections
of the work and/or the operative concerned.
1252 RADIOGRAPHIC TESTING OF WELDING

Carry out radiographic examination of steel pipe butt joints in accordance with BS EN 1435, and ultrasonic
examination in accordance with BS EN 1714. Carry out magnetic particle investigation in accordance with BS 6072
and BS EN ISO 9934-1.
Use BS 2971 as the basis for acceptance fault limitations, rectification of welds and visual requirements.
Ensure the examinations are carried out by an independent inspecting authority, and the decision on the
acceptability of any weld is binding.
On completion of the first ten production welds made by each welder, select five of these welds and 10% of
subsequent production welds for examination. Should any weld be rejected or require rectification then select a
further two welds by the same welder for examination. In the event of a further failure in these two welds the
whole of the welds performed by a particular welder may be liable to rejection or require the provision of
radiographic evidence of the acceptability of all the welds in question.
Advise radiographic examination testing procedures to all interested parties, indicating Inspection Authority, the
method to be employed, the location, timing and protection measures to be instituted by way of barriers, shields,
warning lights, notices and emergency procedure.
On completion of the first ten production branch welds made by each welder, select five welds and subject them
to magnetic particle investigation of welds in accordance with BS 6072 and BS EN ISO 9934-1. Accompany test
results by photographic evidence by the AOTC inspector. Rejection and rectification shall follow the procedure for
radiographed welds.
1260 GROOVED JOINTING SYSTEM
1261 GENERAL
Obtain written confirmation from the grooved jointing system manufacturer that the correct type of grooved
jointing components have been selected for the particular requirements. Where grooved jointing is to be used on
more than one service/system, obtain specific confirmation for each service/system.
Do not use a grooved jointing system on pipework to be installed in areas which are liable to mechanical damage.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Install grooved joints in accordance with the manufacturer’s published installation instructions, and the practices
demonstrated during their site training sessions.
Ensure all grooved pipe ends are clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks between the pipe
end and the groove.
Provide all grooved joint couplings, fittings and accessories from a single manufacturer. Provide tools either
manufactured by the same manufacturer as the grooved joint system, or approved by them.
Arrange for the grooved jointing system manufacturer to design the expansion and movement measures required
for the systems, and provide accordingly.
Ensure a quality assurance scheme is in place to provide an audit trail for manufacture and traceability of all
grooved jointing system components.

Ensure the working pressure, end load, temperature rating and finish of the housing and gasket are suitable for
the intended application.
Provide flat face, ductile iron flange adaptors with elastomer pressure responsive gaskets for direct connection to
flanged components.
Rigid type: Provide housings which provide a rigid anti-rotational joint. Use rigid joints on pipe and fitting
connections and on connections to groove end valves.
Flexible type: Provide housings designed to provide a clearance fit at the joint, with controlled linear and/or
angular deflection of the pipe. Use flexible joints to provide noise and vibration attenuation and to accommodate
thermal movement of pipelines. Provide calculations to demonstrate the correct design of the
support/attenuation/movement system, including calculations and pipe support requirements. Ensure the entire
system design is approved by the manufacturer.
1263 GROOVED JOINT GASKETS

Provide EPDM gaskets for use on grooved jointing systems, rated for the system operating conditions on which
they are to be installed. Obtain manufacturer’s approval/confirmation in writing of the gasket selection for each
system on which they are to be used.
Ensure all gaskets are clearly marked with a colour coding system so they can be identified prior to installation.
1264 METHOD STATEMENT

Submit, with the tender return documentation, a method statement for the installation of grooved jointing
systems. Ensure that the method statement is specific to the particular manufacturer being used.
Include in the method statement, as a minimum, the following information:
- training (training programme of site personnel, frequency, certification, retraining/refreshing)

- system components
- procedure
- pipe preparation
- monitoring/identification of groove compliance

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- monitoring/identification of correct assembly operation

- use of correct tools
- 8 calibration certificates for tools
Obtain the approval of the Contract Administrator to the use of grooved jointing systems prior to commencing
any work on site.
1265 TRAINING
Arrange for the grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative to provide on-site training for field
personnel in the use of grooving tools and the installation of the grooved jointing system.
Arrange for the training to be carried out periodically throughout the construction programme to ensure all
personnel required to carry out grooved jointing installations have been suitably trained prior to starting work on
the system.
Arrange for the grooved jointing system manufacturer to provide certification to all personnel trained. Keep a
copy of all such certifications on site for inspection by the Contract Administrator. Only personnel trained and
certified by the grooved jointing system manufacturer are to install the grooved joining system.
Arrange for the manufacturer to review installation practices and to ensure that they are in accordance with their
requirements.
1266 SITE INSPECTION

Arrange for the system manufacturer to visit site to inspect and approve the installation. This can be done on a
joint by joint basis, with each joint being clearly marked to indicate its acceptance.
1267 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER WARRANTS

Arrange for the grooved jointing system manufacturer to warranty the installation for 25 years.
1300 STANDARDS AND REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

Each product and each material selected by the Installer shall comply fully with the latest issue of either the BS or
the equivalent European Standard.
- Health and Safety at Work Act;

- Ionising Radiation Regulations Radioactive; Substances Act;
- The Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations;
- BS 143 and 1256 - Threaded pipe fittings in malleable cast iron and cast copper alloy
- BS 864 - Capillary and compression tube fittings of copper and copper alloy.
- BS 1306 - Specification for copper & copper alloys for pressure piping systems
- BS 1494 - Fixing accessories for building purposes.
- BS 2633 - Specification for Class I arc welding of ferritic steel pipework for carrying fluids.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 2782-11 - Method 1121B, Methods of testing plastics. Thermoplastics pipes, fittings and valves.
Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids. Nominal outside diameters and nominal pressures. Metric
series
- BS 2971 - Specification for Class II arc welding of carbon steel pipework for carrying fluids.
- BS 3416 - Specification for bitumen-based coatings for cold application., suitable for contact with potable
water
- BS 4105 - Specification for liquid carbon dioxide, industrial
- BS 4872 - Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is not required
- BS 5391-1 - Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) pressure pipes Part 1:Specification
- BS 5970 - Thermal insulation of pipework, ductwork, associated equipment and other industrial installations in
the temperature range of -100°C to +870°C - Code of Practice BS 6129-1 Code of practice for the selection
and application of bellows expansion joints for use in pressure systems. Part 1: Metallic bellows expansion
joints.
- BS 6572 - Specification for blue polyethylene pipes up to nominal size 63 for below ground use for potable
water.
- BS 7786 - Specification for unsintered PTFE tapes for general use
- BS 7874 - Method of test for microbial deterioration of elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and pipelines
- BS 6956 - Jointing materials and compounds
- BS 8537 - Copper and copper alloys. Plumbing fittings. specification for press ends of plumbing fittings for use
with metallic tubes
- BS 9990 - Code of practice for non-automatic fire-fighting systems in buildings
- BS EN 545 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water pipelines.
- BS EN 598 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for sewerage applications. Requirements
and test methods
- BS EN 681 - Elastomeric seals. - Material requirements for pipe joint seals used in water and drainage
applications
- BS EN 681-1 - Part 1: Vulcanised rubber
- BS EN 681-2 - Part 2: Thermoplastic elastomers
- BS EN 682 - Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for seals used in pipes and fittings carrying gas and
hydrocarbon fluids
- BS EN 740 - Anaesthetic work stations and their modules. Particular requirements
- BS EN 751 - Sealing materials for metallic threaded joints in contact with 1st, 2nd and 3rd family gases and
hot water.
- BS EN 751 - 1 - Part 1: Anaerobic jointing compounds
- BS EN 751 - 2 - Part 2: Non-hardening jointing compounds BS EN 751 - 3 - Part 3: Unsintered ptfe tapes
- BS EN 805 - Water supply – requirements for systems and components outside buildings

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 806 - 1 - Part 1: General

- BS EN 806 - 2 - Part 2: Design
- BS EN 806 - 4 - Part 4: Installation
- BS EN 806 - 5 - Part 5: Operation and maintenance
- BS EN 969 - Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for gas pipelines.
- BS EN 970 - Non-destructive examination of fusion welds. Visual examination BS EN 1044 - Brazing. Filler
metals
- BS EN 1057 - Copper and copper alloys. - Seamless, round copper tubes for water and gas in sanitary and
- BS EN 1092-1 - Flanges and their joints – Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and accessories, PN
designated.
- Part 1: Steel flanges
- BS EN 1254 - Copper and copper alloys. Plumbing
- BS EN 1403 - Corrosion protection of metals. - Electrodeposited coatings. - Method of specifying general
requirements
- BS EN 1435 - Non-destructive examination of welds. Radiographic examination of welded joints BS EN 1514 -
Flanges and their joints. Dimensions of gaskets for PN-designated flanges
- BS EN 1515-1 - Flanges and their joints. Bolting. Selection of bolting
- BS EN 1515-2 - Flanges and their joints. Bolting. Classification of bolt materials for steel flanges, PN
designated
- BS EN 1563 - Founding. Spheroidal graphite cast iron
- BS EN 1714 - Non destructive testing of welded joints. Ultrasonic testing of welded joints BS EN 1976 -
Copper and copper alloys. Cast unwrought copper products
- BS EN 10088 - Stainless steels
- BS EN 10088-2 - Part 2: Technical delivery conditions for sheet/plate and strip of corrosion resisting steels for
general purposes
- BS EN 10213 - Steel castings for pressure purposes
- BS EN 10216-1 - Seamless steel tubes for pressure purposes.
- Part 1: Technical delivery conditions
- BS EN 10217-1 - Welded steel tubes for pressure purposes. Technical delivery conditions. Part 1: Non-alloy
steel tubes with specified room temperature properties
- BS EN 10224 - Non-alloy steel tubes and fittings for the conveyance of water and other aqueous liquids.
Technical delivery conditions
- BS EN 10226-1 - Pipe threads where pressure tight joints are made on the threads. Taper external threads
and parallel internal threads. Dimensions, tolerances and designation
- BS EN 10226-2 - Pipe threads where pressure tight joints are made on the threads. Taper external threads
and taper internal threads. Dimensions, tolerances and designation
- BS EN 10241 - Steel threaded pipe fittings BS EN 10253 - Butt-welding pipe fittings
- BS EN 10255 - Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading. - Technical delivery conditions

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 10305-3 - Steel tubes for precision applications. Technical delivery conditions. Welded cold sized tubes
- BS EN 10312 - Welded stainless steel tubes for the conveyance of aqueous liquids including water for human
consumption. Technical delivery conditions
- BS EN 12201 - Plastic piping systems for water supply. Polyethylene (PE)
- BS EN 12449 - Copper and copper alloys. Seamless, round tubes for general purposes BS EN 12451 - Copper
and copper alloys. Seamless, round tubes for heat exchangers BS EN 12797 - Brazing. Destructive tests of
brazed joints
- BS EN 12799 - Brazing. Non-destructive examination of brazed joints
- BS EN 10311 - Joints for the connection of steel tubes and fittings for the conveyance of water and other
aqueous liquids
- BS EN 13076 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Family A. Type A
- BS EN 13077 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Air gap with non-circular overflow
(unrestricted). Family A. Type B
- BS EN 13133 - Brazing. Brazer approval
- BS EN 13134 - Brazing. Procedure approval
- BS EN 13349 - Copper and copper alloys – pre-insulated copper tubes with solid covering BS EN 14324 -
Brazing. Guidance on the application of brazed joints
- BS EN 14623 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Air gaps with minimum circular
overflow (verified by test or measurement). Family A. Type G
- BS EN 29454 - Soft soldering fluxes. Classification and requirements. Classification, labelling and packaging
- BS EN 60601-2-13 - Medical electrical equipment. Particular requirements for the safety and essential
performance of anaesthetic systems
- BS EN ISO 887 - Plain washers for metric bolts, screws and nuts for general purposes. General plan BS EN
ISO 898-1 - Mechanical properties of fasteners made of carbon steel and alloy steel. Bolts,
- screws and studs with specified property classes. Coarse thread and fine pitch thread
- BS EN ISO 898-2 - Mechanical properties of fasteners made of carbon steel and alloy steel. Nuts with
specified property classes. Coarse thread and fine pitch thread
- BS EN ISO 1452 - Plastics piping systems for water supply. Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-U)
- BS EN ISO 1456 - Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Electrodeposited coatings of nickel, nickel plus
chromium, copper plus nickel and of copper plus nickel plus chromium
- BS EN ISO 2081 - Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Electroplated coatings of zinc with supplementary
treatments on iron or steel
- BS EN ISO 2082 - Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Electroplated coatings of cadmium with
supplementary treatments on iron or steel
- BS EN ISO 4014 - Hexagon head bolts. Product grades A and B
- BS EN ISO 4032 Hexagon regular nuts (style 1). Product grades A and B BS EN ISO 4033 Hexagon regular
nuts (style 2). Product grades A and B BS EN ISO 4042 Fasteners. Electroplated coatings
- BS EN ISO 6509 - Corrosion of metals and alloys. Determination of dezincification resistance of brass BS EN
ISO 7438 - Metallic materials. Bend test
- BS EN ISO 8835 - Inhalational anaesthesia systems BS EN ISO 9000 - Quality management systems

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN ISO 9453 - Soft solder alloys. Chemical compositions and forms BS EN ISO 9934-1 - Non destructive
testing - Magnetic particle testing –
- Part 1: General principles
- BS ISO 4065 - Thermoplastic pipes. Universal wall thickness table
- BS ISO 8992 - Fasteners. General requirements for bolts, screws, studs and nuts.
- BS ISO 11922-1 - Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids. - Dimensions and tolerances.Metric series
- DIN 50961 - Electroplated coatings – zinc coatings on iron and steel – terms, testing and corrosion resistance
- GIS/PL2 - Technical specification for polyethylene pipes and fittings for natural gas and suitable manufactured
gas
- GIS/PL2-1 - Part 1: General & PE compounds for use in PE pipes and fittings GIS/PL2-2 - Part 2: Pipes for use
at pressures up to 5.5 bar
- GIS/PL2-3 - Part 3: Butt fusion tooling and ancillary equipment GIS/PL2-4 - Fusion fittings with integral
heating element(s)
- GIS/PL2-6 - Spigot end fittings for electrofusion and/or butt fusion purposes
- GIS/PL3 - Technical specification for self-anchoring mechanical fittings for polyethylene pipe for natural gas
and suitable manufactured gas
- HVCA TR/5 - Welding of carbon steel pipework WRAS - Water Fittings and Materials Directory
- WIS No. 4-24-01 - Specification for mechanical fittings and joints for polyethylene pipes for nominal sizes 90
to 1000
- WIS No. 4-32-06 - Specification for PE electrofusion couplers and fittings for cold water supply for nominal
sizes up to and including 180
- WIS No. 4-32-08 - Fusion jointing of polyethylene pressure pipeline systems using PE80 and PE100 materials
- WIS No. 4-32-19 - Polyethylene pressure pipe systems with an aluminium barrier layer for potable water
supply in contaminated land – SIZE 25mm to 630mm

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y11 PIPELINES ANCILLARIES
300 CHILLED WATER AND CONDENSER COOLING WATER
310 APPLICATION
For chilled water and condenser cooling water having maximum working pressure 6 Provide valves and fittings to
metric standard to a pressure/temperature rating of PN10 minimum for ferrous valves and PN16 series 'B'
minimum for copper alloy valves.
320 BALLVALVES
Dezincification resistant, copper alloy, screwed, body and ball, PTFE seat and packing and extended lever.
- Lever handle operation, sizes 15-50mm

- Lockshield key operation, sizes 15-50mm
321 FILTER TYPE SCREWED 15-50MM

A dezincification resistant copper allow body and ball, combined ballvalve and fully isolated integral stainless steel
strainer, with PTFE seat and packing.
330 WEDGE GATE VALVES
331 GENERAL
Dezincification resistant copper alloy, screwed to BS 5154, non-rising stem, screwed bonnet and solid bronze
wedge.
- Wheelhead pattern, sizes 15-50mm

- Lockshield pattern, sizes 15-50mm
332 CAST IRON

Wheelhead pattern to BS EN 1171 inside screw, non-rising stem and bronze trim. Flanged, sizes 65-300mm.
340 BUTTERFLY VALVES - WAFER TYPE BETWEEN FLANGES 65-300MM

Cast iron or SG iron semi lugged wafer type generally to BS EN 593 EPDM lining, nickel plated disc, lever
operated to 300mm size. Use stud bolts and nuts to securely attach the wafer valve to the flange holding back
water pressure during maintenance. Padlock valves required for regulation.
350 CHECK VALVES

Dezincification resistant copper alloy, swing pattern to BS 5154, screwed bonnet and metal to metal seat.
- Screwed, sizes 15-50mm

- Cast, iron swing pattern to BS EN 12334, bolted bonnet and bronze trim.
- Flanged, sizes 65-300mm

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
360 STRAINER
Dezincification resistant copper alloy, 'Y' type, complete with copper or stainless steel screen.
- Screwed, sizes 15-50mm

- Dezincification resistant copper alloy 'Y' type, complete with copper or stainless steel screen.
- Flanged, sizes 65-150
400 HOT WATER AND COLD WATER INTERNAL DOMESTIC
410 APPLICATION
For hot water and cold water internal domestic having maximum working pressure 6 bar gauge and temperature
65°C or working pressure 7 bar gauge and temperature 10°C respectively). Provide valves and fittings to metric
standard to a pressure/temperature rating of PN10 minimum for ferrous valves and PN16 series 'B' minimum for
copper alloy valves.
Provide Water Research Centre (WRC) Listed valves with parts in contact with the water constructed from
dezincification resistant materials.
420 BALLVALVES
Dezincification resistant, copper alloy, body and ball, PTFE seat and packing.
- Lever handle operation, sizes 15-50mm screwed

- Lockshield key operation, sizes 15-50mm screwed
430 WEDGE GATE VALVES

Dezincification resistant copper alloy, screwed or copper capillary union or compression to BS 5154, non- rising
stem, screwed bonnet and solid bronze wedge.
- Wheelhead pattern, sizes 15-50mm

- Lockshield pattern, sizes 5-50mm

Cast iron or SG iron lugged wafer type generally to BS EN 593 'Nitrile' lining, nickel plated disc, lever operated to
300mm size. Use stud bolts and nuts to securely attach the wafer valve to the flange holding back water pressure
during maintenance. Padlock valves required for regulation.
450 STOPCOCKS, SIZES 15-50MM

Where concealed from view in voids, service ducts or in plant rooms.
Where exposed to view in decorated areas of the building use chromium plated ball valves with handles.
460 CHECK VALVES
461 SCREWED, SIZES 15-50MM

Dezincification copper alloy, swing pattern to BS 5154 screwed bonnet and metal to metal trim.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
462 WAFER TYPE BETWEEN FLANGES 65 TO 300MM

Dezincification resistant copper alloy, swing pattern wafer type check valve.
470 STRAINERS

Dezincification resistant copper alloy, 'Y' type, complete with copper or stainless steel screen. Screwed, sizes 15-
50mm.
472 FLANGED, SIZES 65-150MM

Copper alloy, 'Y' type, complete with copper or stainless steel screen. Flanged, sizes 65-150m.
600 FIRE MAINS INSTALLATIONS
610 APPLICATION
For fire mains having a maximum working pressure 16 bar gauge and temperature nominal 20°C). For fire service
requirements, from a dedicated pressurised water mains/tanked supply or where specified, from a separate
branch, suitably valved with by-pass, from the mains cold water supply serving one or more buildings.
Provide valves and fittings of metric standard to a pressure/temperature rating of PN16 minimum for ferrous
valves and PN20 Series B minimum for copper alloy valves.
Provide Water Research Centre (WRC) listed valves with parts in contact with the water constructed from
dezincification resistant materials.
Valves to be lockable where specified.
620 WEDGE GATE VALVE
621 SCREWED SIZES 15-50MM

Bronze, screwed, to BS 5154, non-rising stem, screwed bonnet and solid bronze wedge.
- Wheelhead pattern
- Lockshield pattern

Cast iron, wheelhead pattern, to BS EN 1171, inside screw, non-rising stem, and bronze trim.

Cast iron or SG iron lugged wafer type generally to BS EN 593 'Nitrile' lining, nickel plated disc, lever operated to
300mm size. Use stud bolts and nuts to securely attach the wafer valve to the flange holding back water pressure
during maintenance. Padlock valves required for regulation.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
640 CHECK VALVES

Bronze alloy, swing pattern to BS 5154, screwed bonnet and metal to metal seat.
642 WAFER TYPE BETWEEN FLANGES 65-300MM

Bronze alloy, swing pattern wafer type check valve.
650 STRAINERS

Bronze alloy, 'Y' type, complete with stainless steel screen, 0.8mm diameter perforations.

Cast iron, 'Y' type, complete with stainless steel screen, 1.6mm diameter perforations.
660 FIRE HYDRANT VALVES - UNDERGROUND

Cast iron sluice valve and hydrant to BS 750, copper alloy trim, 80mm inlet, 65mm male thread gun metal outlet
with loose blank cap and chain where outlet is not more than 300mm below chamber cover level to BS 5306, Part
1.
Hydrants, complete with, spindle cap, turn key, separate hydrant indicator plate to BS 3251, Class A, mounted
where specified, and cast iron surface box frame to BS 750 and BS 5306, Part 1, built-in by others. Ensure that
chamber covers are capable of bearing the maximum vehicle load specified and are complete with two lifting
keys.
Screw down pattern to BS 750, Type 2, surface box opening 380mm x 230mm.
Wedge gate pattern with duckfoot bend to BS 750, Type 1, surface box opening 495mm x 215mm.
661 FIRE LANDING VALVES
662 WET RISERS

Copper alloy 65mm screw-down valve to BS 5041, Part 1 and BS 5154, with 65mm female instantaneous hose
coupling to BS 336 and loose outlet blank cap and chain.
Landing valve boxes with 2mm thick corrosion resistant metal construction to BS 5041, Part 4, with wired glass
lockable door (2 Keys) and identified on inside of glass in red letters 75mm high "FIREMAIN OUTLET - WET
RISER".
670 FOAM INLETS

Fit each inlet, serving one space only, with a foam inlet adaptor to BS 336, housed in an inlet box to BS 5041,
Part 5, built in by others, and complete with delivery pipe outlets terminating in foam spreader heads to BS 5306,
Part 1, Clause 24.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
800 SPRINKLER SYSTEM
801 VALVES
811 GENERALLY
Stamp and test any valves required by the Water Authority and bear the full cost of doing so.
812 ALARM VALVES

Use only alarm valves of the type approved and listed by the Loss Prevention Council (LPC) in BS 5306.
813 STOP VALVES

All sluice valves shall be to B.S. 5163. Butterfly valves shall be gear operated and to B.S. 5155. All valves must be
right-handed. Clearly mark the controlling wheels of all stop valves showing in which direction the wheel is to be
turned to close the valve. Provide an indicator which shows whether the valve is open or shut.
814 NON-RETURN VALVES

Use only valves of the type which conform to the requirements of the LPC and Local Water Authority byelaws.
Provide a test cock for each valve between the non-return valve and the supply control valve.
815 DRAINAGE
Provide all sprinkler installation valves with a minimum 50 mm (2") drain facility.
Provide drain valves at the lowest point where pipework within the system will not drain back via the installation
control valves in accordance with the following:
- Up to 50 mm (2") dia. pipework - 20 mm drain valve

- 65 mm (2") and 80 mm (3") dia. pipework - 32 mm drain valve
- 100 mm (4") and above - 50 mm drain valve
816 SECURING AND LABELLING OF VALVES

Secure all stop valves on the incoming supply main connection, pump suctions, pump delivery, pump test and the
main stop valve at the installation control valves by leather straps and padlocks.
Secure all other valves by leather straps. Provide all valves with traffolyte labels with the valve number and
service engraved thereon, securely fixed in an approved manner.
820 WATER MOTOR ALARM GONG

Provide each sprinkler installation with a Water Motor Alarm Gong of the type approved and listed by the LPC.
Locate these on the external face of the building and not located higher than 6 metres above the alarm valve.
Provide a 15mm test valve on the installation side of the alarm valve.
Arrange the pipework to the water motor alarm to drain through a fitting having an orifice not larger than 3 mm
diameter. Use either stainless steel or a suitable non-ferrous material for the orifice plate material. Drain into an
open tundish.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
830 PRESSURE GAUGES

Fit a pressure gauge (gauge 'C') on all sprinkler installations immediately above the alarm valve and another
gauge (gauge 'B') immediately below the alarm and main stop valve. Fit a pressure gauge on the supply side of
the non-return valve on the incoming supply main (gauge 'A').
All pressure gauges shall conform to BS EN 837-1. Pressure gauges shall have scales with divisions not exceeding
0.2 bar.
Provide means to enable each pressure gauge to be readily removed without interruption of installation water
supplies.
840 FLOW MEASURING DEVICE

Supply and install on the sprinkler water supply main a Direct Reading Flow meter. Isolate the flow meter from
the system with two isolating valves as recommended by the manufacturers.
850 PRESSURE SWITCH

Provide each sprinkler installation with an approved pressure switch at the installation control valves.
860 SPRINKLER TEST VALVE

Provide a test valve adjacent to the highest sprinkler on the installation capable of discharging a flow at a rate of
not less than that of the equivalent of one sprinkler head operating.
SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
- Provide samples of the following valves:

o Lockshield valve (radiator)
o Handwheel valve (radiator)
o Extended spindle valve for CHW
- Present calculations for and selections of all non-return/check valves, together with manufacturer's pressure
loss data for the selected valves.
- Submit technical and appearance details for the selected fire fighting system inlet and outlet valve/breeching
boxes.
- Submit details of the proposed automatic gas shut off valve including pressure drop at design flow rate and
power/control details.
1000 COMPRESSED AIR - INDUSTRIAL
1010 APPLICATION
Provide valves and fittings to metric standard to a pressure/temperature rating of PN16 minimum for ferrous
valves and PN16 Series 'B' for copper alloy valves.
1020 BALLVALVES SCREWED SIZES 15-50MM

Copper alloy, body and ball or stainless steel ball, PTFE seat and packing, lever handle operation.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
1030 GLOBE VALVES SCREWED SIZES 15-50MM

Copper alloy, to BS 5154 rising stem, union or screwed bonnet and rubber faced disc.
1040 DIAPHRAGM VALVES SCREWED SIZES 15-50MM

SG iron, Weir type with nitrile rubber Grade 'C' diaphragm and rising handwheel indicator.
1050 GLOBE VALVES FLANGED SIZES 65-300MM

Cast iron, to BS EN 13789, outside screw, rising stem, bolted bonnet and rubber faced disc.
1400 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS

Copper alloy automatic ball, float type air vents screwed inlet to BS 21 complete with strainer lockshield type
isolating valve, non-return valve and suitable supporting bracket.
A 15mm copper discharge from each vent shall run in common mains and discharge in suitable and safe
positions. Where a discharge passes through an outside wall a water tight sleeve shall be fitted and frost
protection provided.
1500 AIR COCKS

Air cocks shall be standard flush type for equipment and pipework venting specified in Pipework and Fittings
section.
1600 THREE-WAY GLAND VENT COCKS

Dezincification resistant copper alloy, screwed BS 21, with tapered plug, square shank for loose lever, bolted
gland, plug position indicator and port markings to indicate: inlet, vent, waste.
1700 DRAIN COCKS

Copper alloy, screwed to BS 21, lockshield, ballvalve, loose lever, detachable hose union end and blank cap and
chain. For pressures up to 10 bar and temperatures up to 120°C.
For hot water drain positions, a flanged wedge gate valve, with handwheel removed shall be fitted followed by a
screwed low temperature drain cock.
For industrial vacuum drain positions, a copper alloy, screwed globe valve, sizes 15-50mm, rising stem, screwed
bonnet, suitable rubber faced disc to BS 5154 or PFEE glass filled disc.
1800 TEST POINTS

Test points shall be provided for the indication of plant and system operating conditions including boilers,
calorifiers, pumps, regulating valves, thermal air and water batteries and shall be fitted on the inlet and outlet
connections.
Test cocks shall have spring loaded ball type self - sealing outlets and cap with re-sealable washer protected by a
lockshield type needle valve.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Test cocks for high temperature hot water shall consist of a flanged needle valves fitted adjacent to the service
connection with 500mm extended capillary tubing terminating in a combined lockshield screwed valve and spring
loaded ball self-sealing outlet with cap and re-sealable washer, all suitably fixed.
Test plug 6mm with extended length so as to protrude above the insulation, with screwed self-sealing cap. The
core shall be of suitable material for the purpose.
1900 HANDWHEEL LOCKING DEVICES

Where required a locking device shall be provided.
2000 THERMOMETERS
2010 GENERAL
Thermometers shall be either stem or dial types, directly mounted vertical or angle centre stem in screwed
pockets, filled with oil, or remotely flange mounted.
Stem thermometer scales shall be a minimum of 150m in length, dial thermometers a minimum of 100mm
diameter generally with 150mm diameter minimum in plant rooms where ease of reading is restricted. Case
finishes shall be brass generally with black stove enamelled finish in plant rooms and chromium plated finish in
specified occupied areas.
Scales shall be white faced with black figures calibrated at 1°C intervals and numbered at 10°C intervals with bold
figures. Dial type gauges shall be calibrated in scale range to indicate 'normal' operating temperatures when
pointer is vertical, or central on scale.
2020 STEM THERMOMETERS

Shall be alcohol in glass type with plain glass dustproof front, revolving cover and perforated stem and pocket.
2030 DIAL THERMOMETERS

- Direct reading, back or bottom mounted:
o Bi-metal
o Gas filled
o Mercury-in-steel
o Vapour pressure
- Remote reading, back or bottom capillary entry:
o Gas filled
o Mercury-in-steel
o Vapour pressure
Protect capillaries by flexible sheath along their length. Maintain slack capillary for application of immersion bulb
into pockets.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
2100 ALTITUDE AND PRESSURE/VACUUM GAUGES
2110 GENERAL
Shall be either single or combined pressure gauges with a minimum of 100mm diameter generally and 150mm
diameter in plant rooms where ease of reading is restricted.
Dial case finishes shall be brass generally with black stove enamelled finish in plant rooms and chromium plated
finish in specified occupied areas. Dials shall be white faced with black figured scales.
Pressure type generally to BS EN 837-1, complete with copper alloy, lever handled, taper plug gauge cock and
union connections and where fitted to compressed air systems a 'U' pattern siphon.
2120 PRESSURE GAUGES

Dials shall be calibrated on the inside scale in bar or metre head on the inside scale to between 1.5 and 2.5 times
the working pressure or head with an adjustable red pointer set at 'normal' working pressure or head of the
system.
Where fitted to boilers or pressure vessels, gauge dials shall be clearly marked with the operating and maximum
working heads in accordance with BS 759.
2200 FLOW MEASUREMENT AND REGULATIONS
2210 APPLICATION
Maximum operating pressures as detailed for each system. For commissioning, continuous flow metering, and by-
pass regulation in one and two valve systems, on chilled water, hot and cold water, as indicated.
See BSRIA Application Guide 2 / 89, Commissioning of Water Systems. Application principles.
Comply with BS 7350 specification for double regulating globe valves and flow measurement devices for heating
and chilled water systems.
2220 ONE VALVE SYSTEM

Comprising on the system return an orifice flow measuring device, either close coupled to or forming an integral
part of a double regulating valve.
2230 PIPELINES
2231 CHILLED WATER, HOT AND COLD WATER

Dezincification resistant copper alloy, screwed BS 21 sizes 15-50mm
Cast Iron, flanged to BS EN 1092-3, sizes 65-300m
2250 TWO VALVE SYSTEM

Comprising, on the system flow an orifice flow measuring device either close-coupled to or forming an integral
part of an isolating valve and a double regulating valve on the system return.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
2260 DOUBLE REGULATING VALVES

Providing approximately equal regulation over full movement of plug with regulation setting remaining, even after
valve has been turned to the off position.
Comprising, regulating disc, double regulating device, set point indicator, rising stem, screwed bonnet, metal to
metal or PTFE seat on copper alloy valves, plus outside screw, bolted bonnet and locking device on cast iron
valves.
Stainless steel trim on cast steel valves.
Copper alloy to BS 5154, screwed to BS 21, sizes 15-50mm
2300 INSTALLATION
When ordering full specification details shall be quoted.
Where more than one valve manufacturer is specified the selection shall generally be made using products by the
same manufacturer except where a full range of valves is not available from the one manufacturer.
Flanged, copper alloy and plastic valves and fittings have flat faced flanges and in accordance with BS EN 1092-3,
mounting pipeline flanges shall be flat faced. Cast iron and cast steel valves have raised face flanges.
Glands on valve stuffing boxes shall be adjusted at normal plant operating conditions in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations, without impairing the valve action by over tightening.
Flow measurement and regulation devices and valves shall be placed in pipeline positions in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
Where copper alloy valves with capillary ends are specified for copper pipelines, adequate care shall be taken to
ensure that there is no damage to the valve operation resulting from the application of heat during the making of
the joint. Screwed valves specified for non ferrous pipelines shall have appropriate non- ferrous adaptors to make
the necessary pipeline joints.
Two complete seats of appropriate keys, wrenches, shall be provided to fit each range of valves, cocks and taps,
for handing over on completion. Each plant room shall be provided with painted, labelled boards with hooks for
the keys.
Thermometers and altitude/pressure/vacuum gauges shall be of similar diameter, quality and general
construction to provide a uniform appearance in each situation. Where there is difficulty in access for ease of
reading, gauges shall be remotely mounted with capillary tube extension.
Boiler mountings shall comply with BS 759, BS 779 or BS 855 as appropriate to the system.
Automatic control valves, where specified, shall comply with the general requirements of the particular system.
2400 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Products shall be BSI kite marked, where available, using approved manufacturers of BSI assessed capability in
accordance with BS EN ISO 9000 and the BVMA Quality Scheme in respect of valves.


STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
European Standard.
- Health and Safety at Work Act

- Ionising Radiation Regulations
- Radioactive Substances Act
- BS 21 - Pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-tight joints are made on the thread
- BS 89 - Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and accessories
- BS 336 - Specification for fire hose couplings and ancillary equipment
- BS 750 - Specification for underground fire hydrants and surface box frames and covers
- BS 759-1 - Valves, gauges and other safety fittings for application to boilers and to piping installations for and
in connection with boilers Part 1: Specification for valves, mountings and fittings
- BS 779 - Specification for cast iron boilers for central heating and indirect hot water supply rated output (44
kW rating and above)
- BS 855 - Specification for welded steel boilers for central heating and indirect hot water supply (rated output
44 kW to 3 MW)
- BS 837-1 - Pressure gauges Part 1: Bourdon tube pressure gauges. Dimensions, metrology, requirements and
testing
- BS 1010 - Specification for draw-off taps and above ground stop valves
- BS 1212 - Float operated valves
- BS 1868 - Specification for steel check valves (flanged and butt-welding ends) for the petroleum,
petrochemical and allied industries
- BS 1873 - Specification for steel globe and globe stop and check valves, (flanged and butt- welding ends) for
the petroleum, petrochemical and allied industries
- BS 2456 - Specification for floats (plastic) for float operated valves for cold water services
- BS 2751 - General purpose acrylonitrile - butadience rubber compounds. Specification
- BS 2879 - Specification for draining taps (screw-down pattern)
- BS 3251 - Specification for indicator plates for fire hydrants and emergency water supplies
- BS 4346 - Specification for joints and fittings for use with unplasticized PVC pressure pipes
- BS 5041 - Fire hydrant systems equipment
- BS 5154 - Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check and gate valves
- BS 5158 - Specification for cast iron plug valves
- BS 5163 - Valves for waterworks purposes.
- BS 5306-1 - Code of practice for fire extinguishing installations and equipment on premises Part 1: Hose reels
and foam inlets
- BS 5353 - Specification for steel plug valves.
- BS 5392-1 - Acrylanitride–-butadiene-styrene (ABS) fittings for use with ABS pressure pipe. Part 1:
Specification

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 5433 - Specification for underground stop valves for water services.

- BS 6700 - Design, installation, testing and maintenance of services supplying water for domestic use within
buildings and their curtilages. Specification
- BS 7350 - Specification for double regulating globe valves and flow measurement devices for heating and
chilled water systems.
- BS EN 303 - Heating boilers. Heating boilers with forced draught burners
- BS EN 593 - Industrial valves. Metallic butterfly valves
- BS EN 1092-3 - Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and accessories, PN
designated Part 3: Copper alloy flanges
- BS EN 1171 - Industrial valves. Cast iron gate valves
- BS EN 1984 - Industrial valves. Steel gate valves
- BS EN 12288 - Industrial valves. Copper alloy gate valves
- BS EN 12334 - Industrial valves. Cast iron check valves
- BS EN 13190 - Dial thermometers
- BS EN 13709 - Industrial valves. Steel globe and globe stop and check valves BS EN 13789 - Industrial valves.
Cast iron globe valves
- BS EN 13397 - Industrial valves. Diaphragm valves made of metallic materials
- BS EN 60051 - Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories
- B.S. EN ISO 9000 - Quality management systems.
- BS EN ISO 17292 - Metal ball valves for the petroleum, petrochemical and allied industries BS ISO 7121 -
Steel ball valves for general-purpose industrial applications
- IGEM / TD / 03 - Steel and PE pipelines for gas distribution IGEM / TD / 04 - PE and steel gas services and
service pipework
- BSRIA Application Guide 2/89 - Commissioning Water Systems – Application principles
- CIBSE Commissioning Code 'W', - Water Distribution Systems.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y20 PUMPS
100 PUMPS GENERAL
110 GENERAL
Select pumps to meet the requirements of this specification and the performance duties shown in the schedules
of the drawings.
Ensure pumps and their drives are segregated such that failure of pump seals shall not result in damage to the
drive motor.
Ensure pumps are quiet, smooth running and effectively isolated from the building fabric.
Provide suitable anti-vibration mountings and flexible connections to all pumps unless stated otherwise.
Ensure that the complete unit is efficiently balanced to eliminate nuisance noise and vibration.
120 DEFINITIONS
The following definitions apply to pumps and equipment used to construct the Works.
122 DIRECT COUPLED

A direct coupled pump is driven through a flexible coupling from the motor, both units mounted on a common
steel or cast iron baseplate. The pump has its own bearings, its duty is adjusted by varying the impeller diameter.
123 CLOSE COUPLED

A close coupled pump motor has a specially extended shaft which enters the pump casing to which an impeller is
directly fitted. The pump does not have its own bearings, and the thrust developed has to be withstood by the
bearings in the motor. Duty is adjusted by varying the impeller diameter.
124 IN-LINE PUMP (FLOOR-MOUNTED)

An in-line pump has its casing arranged to provide the inlet and outlet connections on the same centre line to
facilitate ease of installation.
125 IN-LINE PUMP (PIPELINE-MOUNTED)

A pipeline pump has its connections arranged in line, as for a floor-mounted in-line pump, but is of light
construction and is fitted directly in a pipeline.
130 PUMP/MOTOR ASSEMBLY EFFICIENCIES

Ensure pumps are type tested in accordance with the requirements of BS EN ISO 9906.
Ensure constant speed pumps have a wire to water efficiency of at least 50%, variable speed pumps have a wire
to water efficiency of at least 50% at full load and not less than 35% at any point in the operating range. Draw
the Contract Administrator’s attention to any instance where this cannot be achieved.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Submit certificates and performance curves to the Contract Administrator for comment prior to placing the
equipment on order.
Operate the pumps so as to consume minimum energy consistent with providing the required service and ensure
they are capable of providing an increased duty if required to do so
140 PUMP SELECTION POINT

Select pumps operating in constant volume circuits to have the best efficiency point on the system resistance
curve.
Select pumps operating in variable volume circuits to have the best efficiency point to the left hand side of the
system resistance curve.
Ensure no pump flow/resistance curves exhibit a negative gradient.
Select pumps in variable volume circuits to have a closed valve head of not greater than 120% of the head at the
best efficiency point.
Select pumps in constant volume circuits to have a closed valve head of between 120% and 140% of the head at
the best efficiency point.
Select pumps of the non-overloading type.
150 SUCTION AND DELIVERY CONNECTIONS

Provide taper pieces where necessary to connect to pipework.
Provide isolating valves on the suction and discharge side of each pump.
Provide isolating valves, non-return valves and strainers (where shown) of pipeline size not pump connection size.
Provide altitude gauges, with siphon and cock, on the suction and discharge side of each pump
200 PRODUCT & MATERIALS
210 GENERAL
211 MATERIAL
Ensure all the materials of construction are as called for in the schedules or, if the schedules are silent, the
industry norm for the service in question.
212 DRAIN PLUGS AND AIR COCKS

Provide all pumps complete with a drain plug and, except where the pump is inherently self-venting, an air cock.
213 GLANDS
Use dripless mechanical shaft seals on system temperatures below 120°C.
Where packed glands are provided, run separate drip pipes to discharge visibly over the water sump/gullies in the
plant room floor. Alternatively, provide a galvanised container to receive the discharge. The container shall be of
at least 4.5 litre capacity and of nominal thickness not less than 1.6mm.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
213 BEARINGS
Provide bearings, either sleeve type with oiling ring and reservoir, or ball or roller type with grease lubricator.
Ensure the bearings shall be outside the stuffing box and shaft seal.
Give preference to pumps which exhibit design features that allow for ease of maintenance and inexpensive
replacement of components liable to wear, such as shaft sleeves, wearing rings etc.
220 PUMPS
222 DIRECT COUPLED, CLOSE COUPLED AND IN-LINE MOUNTED PUMPS

Ensure the pump casings are capable of accepting an impeller which is able to provide the selection duty
specified, or an increase of 15% over the highest specified flow rate against the corresponding increases in
system resistance generated by the increased flow rate where selection duty is not specified. Select the motor
and drive mechanism to be able to accommodate the resulting increased power demand.
Allow for trimming each impellor once within the tender price for all pumps connected to motors 7.5kW and
greater.
224 SUMP PUMPS

Protect each pump by a non- ferrous strainer on the suction side which can be removed for cleaning.
Terminate the suction connection at a foot valve of diameter not less than the pipework. Ensure the sump pumps
operate automatically under level control with provision for an alarm to indicate when normal high water level is
exceeded.
225 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

Provide bolts, nuts and fastenings generally of stainless steel, and ensure electrical cable entry is of watertight
construction.
Ensure all materials used are compatible with the fluid in which they are immersed.

European Standard.
- BS 21 - Specification for pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-tight joints are made on threads
(metric dimensions)
- BS 3790 - Specification for belt drives. Endless wedge belts, endless V-belts, banded wedge belts, banded V-
belts and their corresponding pulleys
- BS 5257 - Specification for horizontal end-suction centrifugal pumps (16 bar)
- BS 5944 - Measurement of airborne noise from hydraulic fluid power systems and components
- BS EN 1092 - Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, vales, fittings and accessories, PN designated

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 1151 - Pumps. Rotodynamic pumps. Circulation pumps having a rated power input not exceeding 200
W for heating installations and domestic hot water installations
- BS EN 22858 - End-suction centrifugal pumps (rating 16 bar). Designation, nominal duty point and dimensions
- BS EN 10226-1 - Pipe threads where pressure tight joints are made on the threads Part 1: Taper external
threads and parallel internal threads. Dimensions, tolerances and designation
- BS EN 60335-2.51 Specification for safety of household and similar electrical appliances Part 2.51: Particular
requirements for stationary circulation pumps for heating and service water installations
- BS EN 60470 - High-voltage alternating current contactors and contactor-based motor starters
- BS EN 60947-4-1 - Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 4-1: Contactors and motor-starters.
- Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters
- BS EN ISO 5198 - Centrifugal, mixed flow and axial pumps. Code for hydraulic performance tests
- BS EN ISO 9906 - Rotodynamic pumps. Hydraulic performance acceptance tests. Grades 1 and 2

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y21 COLD WATER STORAGE TANKS/CISTERNS

Provide storage of incoming cold water from the site dependency mains to provide a continuous and
uninterrupted supply for domestic and non-domestic use.

Provide potable domestic cold water storage to the site, to cover 48 hours’ interruption of water supply.
Ensure that all domestic cold water tanks/cisterns, the pipework connecting to those tanks/cisterns and all
associated valves, fittings and other auxiliaries are suitable for use in a potable standard water installation.
210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF WATER SUPPLY AUTHORITY

Invite the Contract Administrator and local authorities to inspect the installation of the storage tanks/cisterns and
the pipework connections at regular intervals during the construction period.
300 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS
310 INCOMING WATER SUPPLIES

The routing and sizing of the incoming mains cold water supplies to the cold water storage tanks/cisterns is
shown on the drawings. Connect mains cold water supplies to each storage tank/cistern detailed in this
specification.
400 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Take each tank/cistern capacity given in the Equipment Schedules and/or on the drawings as the actual storage
capacity, allowing for ball valve clearances and freeboards, and not the capacity derived from the overall
dimensions of the tank/cistern, unless otherwise stated elsewhere.
Insulate all potable water tanks in accordance with section Y50 of this specification to a minimum thickness of
25mm.
Generally, use fittings that comply with sections Y10 and Y11 of this specification and install them in accordance
with the particular requirements of the pipework and fittings manufacturer.
Generally, cleaning and commissioning of tanks/cisterns shall comply with sections Y25 and Y51 of this
specification, respectively.
410 TANK OVERFLOWS AND WARNING PIPES

Each overflow and warning pipe outlet shall be piped to discharge via a tundish mounted on or near the
tank/cistern served.
In general, the routes of overflows and warning pipes from the storage tanks/cisterns are not detailed on the
drawings. However, the Installer will be deemed to have allowed for sufficient pipework and fittings to discharge

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
each overflow carefully into the nearest floor gully or other suitable discharge point and each warning pipe onto a
suitable surface, such that any discharge is easily seen.
420 COMPARTMENTATION OF TANKS

In order to facilitate tank cleaning and other maintenance, sub-divide large sectional tanks into separate
compartments, such that no storage tank/cistern compartment exceeds 2m³ (actual capacity).
Storage cisterns shall not exceed 2m³ (actual capacity).
Provide separate pipework connections and accessories for each storage tank/cistern and each tank
compartment.
430 TANK SUPPORTS

The Main Contractor shall construct a concrete plinth, brick piers or a steel support frame to support each storage
tank/cistern, designed so as to maximise the height of the storage tank/cistern in the plantroom/enclosed plant
area so that the static head of water on the water systems served by the storage tanks/cisterns is also
maximised, all as per the tank manufacturer’s recommendations.
The Main Contractor shall take particular care to ensure that the top of the concrete plinth, brick piers or steel
support frame is/are level and is/are constructed so that levels across the upper surface(s) of the supports do not
vary by more than 2mm in any metre or by more than 6mm in any 6 metres, measured both laterally and
diagonally.
If the tank manufacturer recommends more stringent construction tolerances, then those more stringent
tolerances shall be adhered to.
The Mechanical Engineering systems Installer shall ensure that the Main Contractor is aware of these constraints
when the tank bases are constructed.
440 TANK / CIRSTERN LEAKAGE AND BUNDING

Where shown and detailed on the Tender drawings, provide water leakage catchment bunds, under the storage
tanks/cisterns. Each bund shall be sized to hold the volume of water equal to the actual capacity of the storage
tank/cistern served.
On plan, bund trays shall overlap the storage tanks/cisterns they serve by 500mm on all sides, unless otherwise
stated.
Equip each bund tray, at its lowest level, with a suitably sized drain connection and gravity pipework running to
drain. The bund drain pipes shall be the same sizes as the corresponding tank/cistern overflow pipes.
450 LEAK DETECTION

A leak detection sensor shall be located within the base of each bund and wired back to the nearest suitable BMS
outstation, such that in the event of water leakage from the tank/cistern an alarm is raised by the BMS.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
500 PARTICULAR MATERIALS SPECIFICATION
510 POTABLE DOMESTIC COLD WATER STORAGE CISTERNS

Supply and install an insulated polyethylene potable domestic cold water storage cistern of one-piece construction
in the location shown on the drawings, to meet the design intent/criteria and to include the components listed in
the schedules.

Incorporate water level controls and leak detection for the storage tanks/cisterns, incorporating the following
components and facilities for each storage tank/cistern:
- A high level float switch, which shall be wired via a boss on the side of the tank/cistern and which shall be
arranged to send a signal to the BMS whenever the water level is 50mm or more above the ball valve shut off
level: the normal “tank full” water level
- A low level float switch, which shall be wired via a boss on the side of tank/cistern and which shall be
arranged to send a signal to the BMS whenever the water level is less than 100mm above the service outlets
invert level
- A leak detection sensor shall be located at the base of each bund tray and which shall be arranged to send a
signal to the BMS whenever water is detected in the bund tray
- One temperature sensor per tank/cistern, where the point of water temperature measurement shall be as
described in BSRIA Application Guide AG 4/94
Provide all necessary interconnecting wiring between the switches, sensors and panels, together with all required
controllers and controls software - to effect the following control routines and interlocks.
610 CONTROL ROUTINES, CONTROL INTERLOCKS AND ALARMS
The BMS shall respond to the signals it receives from the level switches and the leak detection sensors installed
in/under the storage tanks/cisterns as follows:
- On receipt of a high water level signal, the BMS shall raise an alarm and shall close the 2-port valve on the
incoming mains water inlet to the tank/cistern to prevent further water inflow to the tank/cistern
- On receipt of a leak detection signal, the BMS shall raise an alarm and shall close the 2-port valve on the
incoming mains water inlet to the tank/cistern to prevent further water inflow to the tank/cistern
700 CLEANING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
710 GENERAL
Generally, carry out testing, including pipework pressure testing, and commissioning in accordance with
sectionY51 of this specification.
On completion of the tank installation, each tank shall be filled with water and checked for leakage. Rectify any
leaks and re-test, where necessary.
Storage tanks/vessels operating at atmospheric pressure shall be tested for structural soundness and water
tightness under "tank full" conditions to establish that there are no resulting distortions or leaks.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Each tank shall be provided with a pressure test certificate.
Also test that overflows and warning pipes function as intended.
Generally, flush out, clean, disinfect and chemical treat all watestorage tanks/cisterns in accordance with the
requirements of BS 6700 (1987) and of section Y25 of this specification.
A certificate shall be issued to confirm that the system is in a satisfactory and safe condition, before any part of
the installation is taken into the services.
The Installer shall be responsible for all arrangements concerned with the disinfection process.
Allow for all testing and commissioning to be undertaken in the presence of the Employer’s Representative and
provide appropriate attendance.
720 CLEANING, DISINFECTION AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT

Note the following health and safety requirements in respect of cleaning, disinfection and chemical treatment:
- Disinfection shall be carried out on each tank/cistern and the associated pipework distribution systems upon
completion of the tank/cistern/pipework installation, but before putting into service.
- Care must be taken to check most rigorously that all corners of the tanks/cisterns have been treated and that
even the most remote parts of the system have been fully sterilised.
- The Installer is reminded of the need to pay particular attention to hygiene and cleanliness in carrying out
work of this nature and to safety requirements when handling sodium hypoclorite.
- Staff assigned to work inside water tanks shall be of good health and shall be fully familiar with the principles
of water supply hygiene.
- Disposable caps and overall shall be worn to work inside the water tanks/cisterns and boots and tools washed
with soap/water before entering a tank. Employees shall also wash their hands before commencing work
inside a tank, which shall then be dried thoroughly.
- The Employer’s Safety Officer should be consulted for advice on occupational hygiene.
730 CONTROLS
European Standard.
- BS 729 - Specification for hot dipped galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles
- BS 7491 - Glass fibre reinforced plastics cisterns
- Part 1 Specification for one-piece cisterns of capacity up to 500 litres
- Part 2 Specification for one-piece cisterns of nominal capacity from 500 litres to 25,000 litres
- Part 3 Specification for sectional tanks
buildings and their curtilage.
- BSRIA AG1/89 - Flushing and Cleaning of Water Systems (Application Guide)

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BSRIA AG2/89 - The Commissioning of Water Systems in Buildings (Application Guide) BSRIA AG4/94 - Guide
to Legionellosis
- CIBSE - Commissioning Code Series W (1989) Water Distribution Systems
Ensure that all work also complies with the requirements of the current Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations
and the current Model Water Bylaws.
Refer to the Equipment Schedules for other requirements and to the Tender drawings for the location of
tanks/cisterns and for the routing of connecting pipework.
In this section Y21, “cisterns” shall mean storage vessels of one-piece construction but all requirements given in
this section for cold water storage “tanks” shall also apply to cold water storage “cisterns”.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y23 STORAGE CALORIFIERS AND CYLINDERS
100 GENERAL
Select all hot water calorifiers and cylinders to meet the performance requirements of this specification and the
performance requirements shown in the schedules, including all connection requirements.
Select all hot water calorifiers and cylinders to ensure that the temperature of the water stored within the vessel
does not fall below 60ºC.
Check that the heat source for all hot water calorifiers and cylinders is as specified on the schedules. Where this
is not the case notify the Contract Administrator in writing.
Provide thermal insulation and cladding to each hot water calorifier and cylinder as defined in clause Y23.250 of
this specification.
Install each hot water calorifier or cylinder so that both, its associated pressure gauge, and its thermometer, can
readily be observed by personnel standing nearby.
Mount each hot water calorifier and cylinder on a concrete plinth base of minimum height 150mm. unless shown
otherwise on the drawings.
100 DEFINITIONS
The following definitions shall apply to hot water storage calorifiers and cylinders used to construct the works.
111 INDIRECT CYLINDER (HEATED ELECTRICALLY)

A closed cylindrical vessel with domed ends having a separate integral means of heating the contents by annular
or coil type electric heating element.
Unvented cylinders are those provided with a water supply directly from a mains cold water service or a boosted
cold water system.
Open vented cylinders are those provided with a water supply from a cistern elevated above the level of the
cylinder.
200 PRODUCTS AND MATERIAL

Ensure that for every hot water storage calorifier and cylinder its construction is as specified on the equipment
schedules.
Manufacture all hot water calorifiers and cylinders from one of the following materials:
- Copper
- steel (copper lined)
- steel (glass-lined)
- stainless steel
Note that where reference is made within the specification and on the equipment schedules to steel calorifiers,
this refers to copper-lined steel or glass-lined steel as listed above.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where reference is made within the specification and on the equipment schedules to direct cylinders, this refers
to cylinders provided with an electric immersion heater as their only means of heating. The provision of a direct
cylinder allowing water from a LTHW system to mix with the domestic hot water system, is under no
circumstances, acceptable.
Ensure that the size of each heat exchanger is at least that recommended in BS 1566, BS 3198 or BS EN 12897
as applicable. Ensure that all primary heating bundles are manufactured to BS EN 12451.
210 STORAGE VESSELS
211 UNVENTED
Fit to all unvented calorifiers and indirect cylinders the following components each as an integral part of the
vessel:
- a pressure and temperature relief valve

- a high temperature limit control system
In the event of a failure of the temperature control thermostat of any immersion heater, ensure that the energy
input from the immersion heater is automatically cut when the vessel temperature reaches a maximum of 85ºC.
Ensure that the high limit control for units with immersion heaters each have a manual reset facility.
Fit a high limit control for units heated using cold water as the primary fluid, using a two-port shut off valve on
the primary flow to the heat exchanger, which shuts off the energy input to the cylinder when its vessel
temperature rises to a maximum of 85ºC. For electrically powered high limit control arrange the two-port valve to
fail closed and therefore be capable of being open only when its power supply is healthy.
To the cold water supply of each unvented calorifier and indirect cylinder fit the following components:
- an isolating valve
- a strainer
- a double check valve
- an expansion vessel
- an expansion relief valve
220 CONNECTIONS
Ensure that every hot water storage calorifier and cylinder is manufactured with all its connections of the required
type and size positioned to suit proper co-ordination with site conditions.
Provide the connections shown on the schedule(s) or listed in section S11 of this specification.
Provide each calorifier with a baffle plate on the cold feed inlet to the unit, arranged to disperse the incoming
cold water and achieve mixing of the cold with the stored warm water.
Where valves are fitted to relieve temperature or pressure, install relief stream piping from them to discharge to a
safe discharge point within the plant room (eg a floor drain), terminating 150mm above floor drains and, where
required, incorporating a tundish.
Where the calorifier shell is manufactured to a design pressure lower than the working pressure of the primary
fluid, fit to the shell, in addition to a secondary fluid pressure relief valve or safety valve, a bursting disc. Install
relief stream piping from the bursting disc to a safe discharge point.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where a calorifier/cylinder is of the copper-lined steel or glass-lined steel type, fit a vacuum breaker to the shell
to prevent the implosion of the lining.
Provide an adequately sized (minimum 100mm clear internal diameter), accessible clean out access door/port at
low level on each calorifier/cylinder/buffer vessel.
230 IMMERSION HEATERS

Provide immersion heater(s) where shown on the equipment schedules or as specified in section S11 of this
specification, fitted by the hot water storage calorifier or cylinder manufacturer as an integral part of the calorifier
or cylinder. Ensure that all immersion heaters comply with BS EN 60335-2-73 and are provided with a thermostat
to BS EN 60730-2-9.
Provide each immersion heater with an integral thermostat allowing the heater to maintain the water temperature
at the preset value. Unless specified elsewhere arrange the thermostat temperature setting to be manually
adjustable locally to the immersion heater.
Ensure that the rating and number of immersion heaters are as shown on the equipment schedules.
240 SACRIFICIAL ANODES

Sacrificial anode(s) in each where required by the equipment schedules.
250 THERMAL INSULATION

Ensure that all hot water storage cylinders and all combination units are pre insulated by the manufacturer at
works using 35mm thick PU-foam having a minimum density of 30kg/m3, or alternatively as recommended in BS
1566, BS 3198 or BS EN 12897 as applicable.
Ensure that all hot water calorifiers are insulated in accordance with section Y50 of this specification.
Unless stated otherwise in section S11 of this specification or in the equipment schedule(s), fit protective cladding
to the thermal insulation of hot water storage calorifiers and cylinders, in accordance with section Y50 of this
specification.
260 SUPPORTS
Mount each hot water storage calorifier or cylinder on a purpose made support comprising either frame, cradle or
feet. Ensure that the support is capable of bearing the weight of the calorifier or cylinder when in operation and
full of water, and provides a secure and stable fixing for the calorifier or cylinder.
Provide protective isolation material between the support frame/cradle/feet and the calorifier or cylinder shell to
prevent electrolytic action between them.

Obtain from the manufacturer a certificate of static hydraulic pressure test and a performance test for the
supplied equipment. Where required by sections S11 of this specification, include within the tender for arranging
for such tests to be witnessed by the Contract Administrator and include for all the Contract Administrator’s
associated travel costs.
Make all such static hydraulic pressure tests at 1.5 times the working pressure defined on the equipment
schedules or to the test pressure determined by the British Standard to which the equipment is manufactured.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Prior to commissioning any hot water storage calorifier and cylinder and its associated components, clean, flush
out and sterilise the water distribution system(s) in accordance with section Y25 of this specification.
Commission each hot water storage calorifier and cylinder in accordance with section Y51 of this specification and
the manufacturer’s instructions.
Check the operation of the temperature controls and safety devices of each hot water storage calorifier and
cylinder and, where required to do so, demonstrate them to the Contract Administrator.

European Standard.
- The Building Regulations, Part G – Hygiene

- The Building (Amendment) Regulations, Part L - Conservation of fuel and power
- Local Water Byelaws/Regulations (where applicable in Scotland and Northern Ireland)
- BS 417-2 - Specification for galvanised low carbon steel cisterns, cistern lids, tanks and cylinders Part 2:
Metric units.
- BS 853 - Specification for vessels for use in heating systems. Part 1: Calorifiers and storage vessels for central
heating and hot water supply Part 2: Tubular heat exchangers and storage vessels for building and industrial
services
- BS 5615 - Specification for insulating jackets for domestic hot water storage cylinders
buildings and their curtilages - Specification (+A1:2009).
- BS EN 12451 - Copper and copper alloys. Seamless round tubes for heat exchangers

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y25 CLEANING AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT
100 GENERAL
Design, provide and carry out appropriate flushing, chemical cleaning and water treatment procedures, including
all necessary equipment, to comply with the above reference documents to prevent, during the Works and to
enable control of risks during the lifetime operation, contamination scale build up, corrosion, erosion, general
fouling, and to maintain the design engineering specification and the safe operation of the systems.
At an early stage of the detailed design appoint a suitably qualified cleaning and water treatment specialist to
carry out the following:
- Ensure adequate provision of dirt pockets at the base of risers, full bore flushing drains and connections,
header flanges, commissioning sets, strainers, air vents and dirt separators, flushing loops, etc. for flushing,
chemical cleaning and water treatment, including pre-treatment, chemical and physical methods and for
system lifetime general maintenance.
- Sample and analyse the incoming mains water service at an early stage to inform the development of the
flushing, chemical cleaning and water treatment strategy.
- Produce a detailed strategy for flushing, chemical cleaning and water treatment in accordance with the above
reference documents and the particular requirements of the building. As a minimum in the strategy include a
method statement which has been agreed with the Contract Administrator and make any amendments
required in the event of non compliance with the reference documents. Ensure the method statement includes
a step procedure for achieving and demonstrating flushing and cleaning velocities, and includes each of the
following requirements:
- static flushing
- dynamic flushing
- degreasing
- biocide wash
- removal of surface oxides
- effluent disposal/final flushing
- passivation
- corrosion inhibitor/biocide dosing
- disinfection of domestic water services and open systems
- Confirm the volume of each of the pipework systems.
- Confirm all manufacturers/suppliers of chemical treatments to be used, including their detailed chemical
content.
- Confirm inhibitor manufacturer’s target range concentration.
- Confirm the concentrations and quantities each of biocide wash, intermediate inhibitor and final inhibitors and
biocides.
- Programme for carrying out flushing, chemical cleaning and water treatment works.
- Produce risk assessments in accordance with HSE L8.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Obtain approvals from local water authority for disposal of contaminated water.
- Carry out pre-commissioning checks.
- Carry out water chemical and microbiological sampling throughout the Works, seven days before practical
completion and at one month intervals for six months after practical completion.
- Completion of flushing, chemical cleaning and water treatment in accordance with the method statements,
the above reference documents and the particular requirements of the building.
- Demonstration of the Works to the Contract Administrator.
- Detailed records of the complete flushing, chemical cleaning and water treatment procedure, for inclusion in
the O&M manuals.
- Procedures and method statements for ongoing water treatment to comply with the above reference
documents and revisions thereof.
110 MAINS WATER

Provide a dedicated mains water supply, where necessary, for system flushing, of adequate size and pressure, to
ensure that the minimum flushing velocities/flow rates can be achieved.
120 PIPEWORK DISTRIBUTION
121 REGULATING VALVES

Ensure that all regulating valves are sized in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Code W such that at the
design flow rate the valve is not less than 25% open. Valves might be prone to blockage if valves are closed
beyond this point.
During the flushing and cleaning procedure allow for low flow, high resistance regulating valves to be bypassed, if
necessary, to ensure that the minimum flushing velocities/flow rates are achieved.
123 STRAINER
Ensure that all strainers have a basket capable of withstanding the maximum pump head without distortion.
Provide pressure test points on both sides of all strainers so that the pressure drop can be monitored. Provide
drain valves on the flanges and/or end caps of all strainers to facilitate local draining of the body and local
pipework prior to basket removal, and to allow back flushing of the strainer. Ensure that the mesh size of the
basket is selected with regard to the particular application and with reference to the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Provide additional strainer baskets of mesh gauge to suit flushing and cleaning. Inspect the
condition of, and clean, all strainer baskets at each stage of flushing and cleaning.
125 PLANT ISOLATION

Ensure that all systems are designed to enable the isolation and bypass of all sensitive plant and equipment such
as boilers, chillers, fan coil units, other terminal units, expansion units, control valves, etc. during the course of
the flushing and cleaning operation.
Provide fixed full bore bypasses, complete with associated isolating valves, as close to the plant as possible.
Only carry out flushing or cleaning of sensitive plant items with the approval of the cleaning/water treatment
specialist and the plant manufacturer.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
126 PUMPS
Agree the use of system pumps for dynamic flushing with the Contract Administrator via the specialist’s method
statement. Provide additional suitable pumps in the event that either all cleaning and flushing velocities are not
able to be demonstrated with system pumps, or approval to use the system pumps is withheld for whatever
reason. Where system pumps are to be used, replace all pump seals on completion of the cleaning process.
127 DRAINAGE
Ensure that there are adequate drain points, of either full bore dimension and capacity or of sufficient dimension
to achieve flushing velocity and drainage, within close proximity to gullies that can be used for draining and
flushing. Obtain approvals from the local water authority for disposal of contaminated water.
128 PIPEWORK VISUAL INSPECTION

Specially prepare easily demountable sections of pipework, complete with isolation valves, on each system to
allow visual inspection of the internal surfaces after chemical cleaning. Agree locations with the Contract
Administrator.
200 SCOPE OF WORKS
201 GENERAL
The following systems are included in the scope of this specification:
- chilled water cooling (CHW)

- condenser water (closed circuit)
- domestic cold water
- domestic hot water
- irrigation water system
Carry out flushing, chemical cleaning and water treatment for closed recirculation systems (eg CHW, closed circuit
condenser water) in accordance with BSRIA AG 1/2001.1, BSRIA AG 2/93, HSE L8, CIBSE TM13, Water Supply
Regulations and clauses Y25.100 to Y25.700 of this specification.
Carry out flushing, chemical cleaning and water treatment for domestic water services (eg domestic cold,
domestic hot, cooling tower make-up, irrigation water) in accordance with BS 6700, BSRIA AG 2/93, HSE L8,
CIBSE TM13, Water Supply Regulations and clauses Y25.100 to Y25.400 and Y25.800 of this specification.
300 CHEMICAL AND MICROBIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS

Arrange for all tests to be undertaken at an independent certified test laboratory which specialist experience of
the systems from which the water is sampled. Issue a report and all the test results to the Contract
Administrator, indicating any non-compliances and contaminants likely to have a detrimental effect on water
systems.
At an early stage of the project sample and analyse the incoming water supplies, to inform the development of
the flushing, chemical cleaning and water treatment strategy. Include a microbiological analysis of the water,
including as a minimum readings for TVC (total viable count) at 37ºC at 1 day, TVC at 22-24ºC at 3 day, iron

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
bacteria, identifying bacteria pseudomonas, sulphate reducing bacteria and nitrate oxidising bacteria, plus any
criteria that do not comply with the EEC Drinking Water Standards.
Repeat the chemical and microbiological analysis of the incoming water and system water one week before any
pressure testing (and again one week before flushing if any of the systems have been filled for more than one
week).
Sample, analyse and report results of chemical and microbiological water samples from each floor of each system
for record purposes during both flushing stages, with a soluble iron test carried out immediately after completion
of the dynamic flush.
Carry out distributed random sampling from each system following the introduction of corrosion inhibitors and
biocide dosing. Take water from representative system extremities and low points. At an agreed position in each
system take samples for record purposes, one to be kept by the Contract Administrator and one for testing by the
specialist. Ensure the test samples include, as a minimum:
Chemical analysis
- sample number
- sample point
- system
- colour
- clarity
- odour
- Solids-visual
- pH at 20ºC
- electrical conductivity at 20ºC
- total dissolved solids at 105ºC
- suspended solids
- ammonical nitrogen as N
- nitrate as N
- nitrite as NaNO2
- total alkalinity as CaCO3
- alkalinity, bicarbonate, as CaCO3
- alkalinity, hydroxide, as CaCO3
- hardness, total, as CaCO3
- chloride
- sulphate
- soluble iron
- total iron
- copper dissolved
- copper total
- zinc dissolved

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- zinc total
- molybdate or chemical inhibitor levels
Microbiological analysis
- TVC at 37ºC/48 hours

- TVC at 22ºC/72 hours
- Microfungi
- Pseudomonas species at 30ºC
- Flavobacterium
- Bacillus
- Nitrate reducing bacteria
- Sulphate reducing bacteria
- Nitrate oxidising bacteria
Repeat this test within seven days before practical completion to demonstrate compliance and provide results to
400 FILLING AND FLUSHING
410 GENERAL
Check content of strainers on a regular basis during these procedures for potential microbiological activity.
Analyse and solid contaminants to check whether they have a microbiological content.
If there are any potential detrimental contaminants, provide for comment a detailed method statement for
determining the most appropriate method of water treatment.
Undertake all necessary corrective water treatment remedial works, to provide at practical completion, systems
which are not conducive to microbiological growth, to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.
Re-visit site each month for six months after practical completion to carry out full microbiological testing as
detailed above, and any necessary corrective measures to ensure the procedures continue to control
contamination, scale build up, corrosion, erosion, general fouling, biological fouling, and the system continues to
operate safely.
420 FILLING AND FLUSHING - STATIC AND DYNAMIC

Undertake all filling, flushing and cleaning of the water systems in accordance with BSRIA AG 1/2001.1.
Assemble each pipework system from pipework and ancillaries which have been stored in a clean condition. Form
joints to leave a clean bore, check for internal contaminants and cap pipework open ends as the Works proceed.
Prior to commencing filling and/or flushing of the pipework systems, undertake a thorough inspection of the
system to ensure that the system is complete and water tight.
Programme the Works to ensure that, once filled, the system clean (dynamic flushing) commences within 48
hours, to minimise the risk of biofilm development.
Ensure that all equipment which is sensitive to sediment remains valved off and bypassed throughout the flushing
procedure.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
During the flushing out process remove any pipeline components likely to restrict flow or suffer damage.
Inject mains cold water into the pipework system via a temporary connection from the mains or via a flushing
tank and temporary high pressure pump.
Leave the system charged for 48 hours to soften any inclusions and then drain down and clean out all dirt
strainers. Refill and drain the system at least two more times checking and strainers each time.
If the system is to be left for more than 48 hours before the commencement of dynamic flushing, re-fill with
biocide dosed water
Carry out dynamic flushing at the velocities indentified in Table A1 of BSRIA AG 1/2001.1 or design velocity plus
10% whichever is the greater. Where it is not possible to achieve these velocities, ie large bore pipework, employ
alternative cleaning methods to the water treatment specialist’s recommendations.
Commence the flushing of horizontal mains to each floor at the top floor and work down through the building.
Take flow measurements at each floor branch commissioning station and any other commissioning station and
provide a record of proof that the required flushing velocity was achieved. Record the values obtained and offer
for witness to the Contract Administrator.
500 FINAL FLUSHING AND PASSIVATIONS
510 FINAL FLUSHING

Remove all chemicals by clean water rinsing and flushing to achieve a neutral pH value of approximately seven.
Achieve this by a dynamic flush of the system, in accordance with BSRIA AG 1/2001.1, taking particular care to
ensure that there are no dead legs.
Forward and backward flush all plant, chillers, boilers, fan coils, etc.
520 OVERALL SUCCESS OF BENCHMARK OF SYSTEM CLEANING AND FLUSHING

At all stages of the water cleaning and treatment process achieve the requirements set out in BSRIA AG
1/2001.1, paragraph 1.4. At each cleaning stage inform the Contract Administrator of the times of demonstration
of completion of the process so as to allow witnessing, and certify the conditions achieved at each stage. Achieve
the criteria detailed in paragraph 1.4.6 to demonstrate the success of the chemical analysis, and achieve the
microbiological cleanliness benchmark contained in BSRIA AG 1/2001.1, table 4 with the ‘Interpretation’ ‘The
water quality is acceptable’ (middle row of the table).
530 PASSIVATION
Carry out passivation immediately after the final flushing in order to render the active metal surfaces passive.
Achieve this by introducing a passivating agent, either as a separate chemical or as part of water treatment
corrosion inhibitor chemicals.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
600 CHEMICAL CLEANING
610 GENERAL
Carry out a soluble iron test to ensure that the concentration of the system does not exceed 5mg/l. Close all drain
cocks and remove, clean and replace all strainers. Commence chemical cleaning within 24 hours of the
completion of the dynamic flushing.
If it is thought that chemical treatment of any part of the plant would prove detrimental, even though the cleaner
is a neutral and non-aggressive formulation, valve these off and exclude them from the entire cleaning
procedure.
620 DEGREASING
Degrease the internal surface of the pipework to ensure that subsequent chemical cleaning operations are
successful. Use a mild alkali formulation such as caustic solution or a detergent, or alternatively an organic
solvent. Arrange for the specialist to provide a detailed method statement confirming the preferred product and
procedure.
630 BIOCIDE WASH

Where systems have not been filled with biocide treated water during pressure testing, subject them to a biocide
wash as part of the chemical cleaning process in order to control bacteria and biofilms which may become
established inside pipework during the installation process.
640 REMOVAL OF SURFACE OXIDES

Do not use inhibited acid cleaning for the removal of surface oxides. Use a formulated product such as polymer
cleaners (dispersants), chelants (complexing agents) or neutral pH cleaners.
Provide a detailed method statement confirming the preferred product and procedure.
Carry out a pressure test of the system after cleaning as the scavenging effect of some cleaning may remove
scale or other heavy deposits.
650 VISUAL INSPECTION

Demonstrate the condition of the internal pipework surfaces to the Contract Administrator by removal of
demountable sections of pipework on each system as detailed in clause Y25.238.
700 CORROSION INHIBITOR / BIOCIDE DOSING

On completion of the foregoing actions, dose the system with a suitable corrosion/scale inhibitor and biocide
dosing. Determine the exact type and concentration following the water analysis described previously.
Give consideration to the use of molybdate based inhibitor in preference to nitrate based inhibitors in order to
mitigate the risk of the formation of biofilms within sealed systems.
For systems that include copper and other metals also include appropriate inhibitors.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
800 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICES

Do not charge, even for pressure testing, any water system, until immediately prior to it being brought into
regular use. If a system is charged, for any reason, more than seven days before regular use do not drain it
down. It is impossible to completely drain down most systems and partially drained pipes constitute a particular
risk. After the disinfection process charge the system and keep it charged.
For all systems, hot or cold, including, water heaters, etc. which are not in regular use, ie daily, thoroughly flush
once per week by opening all taps/valves. This applies to premises temporarily taken out of use or the period
between commissioning and regular use.
Carry out chlorination of the entire domestic hot and cold water services (including supplementary systems
detailed above) throughout the building in accordance with BS 6700, and to the satisfaction of the local water
authority’s representative. Carry out purity tests sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the authority’s
requirements and forward the results of such tests to the Contract Administrator.
Repeat the chlorination until a satisfactory purity level achieved. It is permissible to employ the local water
authority to carry out the chlorination of the systems.
Remove all visible dirt and debris from the cistern and pipework systems. Fill the cistern and distribution pipes
with clean water and then drain until empty. Refill the cistern with water again and close the supply. Add a
measured quantity of sodium hypochlorite solution of known strength to the water in the cistern to give a free
residual chlorine concentration of 50mg/l (50ppm) in the water. Leave the cistern to stand for 12 hours and then
open each tap and draw-off fitting successively working progressively away from the cistern. Close each tap and
draw-off fitting when the water discharged begins to smell of chlorine. Do not allow the cistern to become empty
during this operation; if necessary refill and chlorinate as above. Leave the cistern and pipes charged for a further
one hour.
Open the tap furthest from the cistern and measure the level of free residual chlorine in the water discharged. If
the free concentration chlorine is less than 30mg/l (30ppm) repeat the disinfecting process.
Leave all cisterns and pipes charged with chlorinated water for at least 16 hours, eg overnight, and then
thoroughly flush out with clean water until the free residual chlorine concentration at the taps is no greater than
that present ion the clean water from the water supplier’s mains.
Adopt the above procedures for the main water commencing with flushing through thoroughly, followed by
adding a 50ppm solution to the pipework system, left to stand for one hour. Follow the rest of the procedure as
described above.
Use proprietary solutions of sodium hypochlorite in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions with due
regard for health and safety. Use a graduated container to measure out the volume of solution required for
disinfection. Calculate this from the manufacturer’s literature.
Where chlorinated water has been used to disinfect an installation and it is to be discharged into a sewer, inform
the authority responsible for land drainage and pollution control.
Send copies of the bacteriological analysis results, carried out by an accredited laboratory, certifying the water to
be suitable for consumption and fitness for purpose to the Contract Administrator for record purposes, and
include them in the commissioning report.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

European Standard.
Listed below are the British Standards, Codes and Guides relevant to this section of the Specification: The Water
Supply Regulations

buildings and their cartilages
- BSRIA AG 1/2001.1 - Pre-commission cleaning of pipework systems
- BSRIA AG 2/93 - Water treatment for building services systems
- CIBSE Code W - Commissioning code W: Water distribution systems
- CIBSE TM13 - Minimising the risk of Legionaires’ disese
- HSE L8 - Legionaires’ disease. The control of legionella bacteria in water systems. approved Code of Practice
and Guidance

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y30 AIR DUCTLINES
100 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the ductwork, fittings, associated components and pressure testing used in the conveyance
of air in various air handling systems.
Ensure that the specialist ductwork company selected has sufficient expertise, organisational ability, drawing
office production capacity and site erection capability to deal with a project of this size within the proposed
construction programme.
Construct ductwork and associated parts in accordance with the HVCA DW or other specification identified
subsequently for low, medium or high pressure/velocity air system ductwork, subject to amendments and
additional information included in this part of the specification.
Ensure that selection of equipment which has the effect of changing ductwork connection sizes from those shown
on the tender drawings, is fully conveyed to the specialist ductwork company to ensure that changes are
indicated, and noted as such, on the working drawings.
Ductwork dimensions are internal. Where applicable, make allowance for any internal lining.
Ensure that ductwork installation complies with the requirements for thermal and acoustic insulation specification.
Provide additional duct stiffening for those parts of air systems subject to large pressure variations.
Ensure that ductwork, gaskets, flexible joints, acoustic linings and sealants do not support bacterial growth and
do not produce fire or smoke hazards.
Disinfect ductwork systems as specified.
Clean ductwork systems both inside and out before commissioning the system to advanced level described in
TR/19.
Bond metallic ductwork systems in accordance with BS 7671 as part of the electrical work. Make allowances on
the programme for carrying out electrical bonding and continuity testing of the ductwork systems.
200 DUCTWORK CLASSIFICATION

Prepare fabrication drawings in accordance with CIBSE Guide B3 and construct in accordance with HVCA DW/144,
Part 2, Section 5.1 and Section 6.3.
The pressure and leakage classification shall be as specified in the particular clauses of the specification.
300 DUCTWORK (GALVANISED SHEET STEEL)

Design ductwork to BS 5720 and construct from best quality hot dipped galvanised sheet to BS EN 10143 in
accordance with HVCA DW/144, Parts 3, 4 and 5, subject to the following amendments and additions.
Tables 2, 3 and 4, pages 18 and 19 ensure that nominal sheet thickness are not less than 0.8mm indoors and not
less than 1.6mm outdoors.
Ensure that maximum spacing’s between joints and stiffeners for low pressure ductwork are to Table 3, Page 19
and not Table 2, Page 18. Incorporate flanged joints at 4.8m centres maximum for all rectangular ductwork.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Clause 10.3.2, Page 15. Use welded joints only when no other method of jointing is available, e.g. rectangular to
circular transformation.
Clause 10.5.2, Page 16. Use the alternative methods for tie rods (Fig. 27) using spacers.
Do not use button punch snap lock joints shown in Fig. 4, Page 20 (words deleted).
The thickness of floor plates for access into ducts shall be 2 gauges greater than the relevant ductwork. Use
medium radius bends as fig 87, page 55 in preference to short or long radius bends.
Use square bends for all 90° bends with single skin vanes as fig 30a, page 25.
Use twin bends with turning vanes.
Use "Deflectors" on rectangular supply branches. Use Fig 106 on extract only.
Clause 11.6, page 17; ensure that the slope does not exceed 15 degrees on any one side. Do not use angled
offset as fig 96, page 57.
Use Deflectors or equalising grids for spigots to supply diffusers. Use shoe branch connections on extract spigots.
On Pages 16 and 27, 10.7.4 and 13.3.4, do not use self tapping screws. Do not use Fig.38, Page 31.
Use medium radius bend up to 315mm diameter unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Use conical branch as
fig 137, page 64 for 90° branches.
Do not use square (rectangular body) bends on flat oval ductwork.
Ensure that mild steel fabrications are free from rust with protective finishes as section 27 page 53, applied
before erection.
For flanged joints, use hexagon headed galvanised or cadmium plated set bolts, nuts and washers, with corner
bolts in all angles at not more than 100mm pitch or to suit the pitch on plant items. Use proper length bolts and
set pins for flanges and joints. Ensure that minimum size of bolts is 6mm for 25 x 25 x 3 angles, 10mm on 40 x
40 x 4 angle and 13mm on 50 x 50 x 5 angles. Use flat washers on bolted joints, locking nuts on drop rods to
hanger bearings fig 68 to 75, pages 45 to 46.
Ensure that sheet metal spigots provided to fix to ceiling or wall grilles, or the like are trimmed so that the return
flange does not overlap the grille flange.
Do not use ductwork displaying stripping of the galvanised surface of the sheets during the forming of joints.
Paint raw edges of ductwork one coat of aluminium or zinc rich paint before dispatch from the works and one
further coat on site.
Use external jointing normally. Where authorised use internal joints of the butt strap pattern to give a smooth
internal surface with no reduction in cross-section area of the duct.
Provide angle stiffening external to the ductwork. Where ducts are closely grouped together, prohibiting the use
of external stiffening, use internal bar stiffening, provided the free cross- section area is not reduced by more
than 3%.
For a distance of 1200mm after cooling coils, sprays and humidifiers, use galvanised mild steel ductwork, cold
galvanised at cut edges and the whole internally coated with bitumastic paint as described in the "Painting"
section of the specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Seal openings on ductwork ends and plant items with polythene sheeting and tape as work progresses, to
prevent the ingress of dust, dirt and building rubble.
Thoroughly clean ducts and plant items internally and externally before they become inaccessible due to progress
of work or building operation.
Cover openings and ductwork ends with 1000g polythene sheeting and duct tape before leaving the works.
Ensure that the ducting remains sealed until the actual installation and all spigot openings remain sealed until the
fitting of grilles or diffusers.
Ensure that ductwork runs carrying humid air, such as kitchen canopy and dishwasher extract systems utilise
"reverse joints" and horizontal ducts fall towards the intake point and special care taken in sealing all joints.
Provide a sump with drain point and plug at vertical risers and sets down.
Where ductwork penetrates external walls and floors, fit flanges sealed to the ductwork and wall suitable for
flashing by others. Arrange penetrations through flat roofs to be completely watertight and to allow water to
drain freely on to the roof. Where penetrations are made through pitched roofs, provide a purpose-made roof
sheet, complete with flashing plate. For flat and pitched roofs provide a cravat with a skirt extended over the roof
flashing. Where welding is carried out, galvanised the entire section after manufacture.
Except where fire dampers are to be installed, do not provide ductwork passing through walls, floors and
partitions with purpose made sleeves. Ensure that the closure, by others, of the space around the ductwork is
made with due care and attention not to damage the ductwork.
Construct and stiffen ductwork sleeves with an angle frame, to secure to the building structure and internal
angle(s), suitable for the length of the sleeve, to contain the packing material specified. Where continuous vapour
barrier installation is specified, to be fitted by others, oversize the sleeve accordingly using the dimensions of the
metal finished face of the insulation instead of the enclosed ductwork. Ensure that the internal angle(s) of the
sleeve is not in direct contact with the ductwork or finished face of the vapour barrier insulation section. Fit cover
retaining plates where packing is exposed in plant rooms and occupied spaces and where necessary to maintain
packing within sleeve. Provide clearance all around within the sleeve suitable for packing as follows:
where the need is to eliminate air and noise transference pack the sleeve with mineral fibre or similar non-
flammable fire resistant material.
where the ductwork passes through fire resisting or cavity barrier elements of the structure pack the sleeve with
fire resistant material of fire rating equal to that of the structural elements to which it is fitted.
Ensure that ducts passing through, but not serving, fire hazard rooms, or rooms with sub-compartment walls and
other fire resisting construction, have the same fire resistance for stability and integrity, when tested in
accordance with BS 476, Part 8, as the walls areas, or room through which they pass. Ensure that the ductwork
supports have the same fire resistance, for stability only, as the ductwork requirements.
400 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

Support all ductwork and associated components as scheduled and detailed in HVCA, DW/144, Part 6, pages 43
to 46 and BS EN 10210, subject to the following amendments and additions:
Table 15, page 44: ensure that maximum spacing’s of supports shall not exceed 2.4m.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Insert compressible material of suitable strength and thickness, between all ducts and supports to reduce
transmissions of noise and vibration. Ensure that the material overlaps the support by 3 mm each side and is
continuous where the support or clip band exists.
500 ACCESS OPENINGS

Provide access doors and other openings in ductwork for the following purposes:
- for personnel, for maintenance and replacement of plant items

- for routine maintenance, lubrication and adjustment of items not requiring full man access
- for cleaning normal purpose ducts, a minimum of one at each change of direction, at intervals not exceeding
12 metres in straight ducts and at all points where cleaning would be obstructed by plant or equipment
- for large bends, tees and junctions where access for cleaning through a single door is difficult and where air
turns are present, install access doors on all legs of ductwork
- for cleaning, where frequent cleaning will be necessary, openings shall be in the form of a 450mm x 450mm
access panels at 3m intervals and positioned to enable easy reach for cleaning the inside of the duct
- for inspection and installation of equipment concealed in ducting, eg hand and motorised dampers; control
sensors
- for adequate access to fire dampers to replace fusible links
- hand holes required to permit jointing of ductwork sections in critical locations
- wiring of roof extract units, axial flow fans and motors etc
- hand holes adjacent to control thermostats and probes including drilling of holes for these thermostats and
probes
600 TEST HOLES

Provide test holes located as detailed in the CIBSE Commissioning Code Series A, Page 19, Clause A-3.1.6, and
BSRIA Application Guide 1/75 and 1/77, Pages 4 to 7, clause 1.4, BS 5720, Section 6 and DW/144, Part 7, Section
20.6, Page 47.
Provide test holes with plastic or rubber bungs to provide an airtight joint.
700 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK – METAL AND FABRIC

Fit flexible ductwork as described in HVCA DW/144, Part 7, clauses 25 and 26, Pages 51- 53, but excluding
bendable ductwork unless otherwise specified.
Apply BS 476, Parts 6 and 7 and BS 9999.
Fit flexible ductwork of internal diameter equal to the external diameter of the rigid ductwork. Use minimum bend
radius ratio R/D of 2 and a maximum length of 2 metres installed without kinking of the ductwork. Use flexible
ductwork where specified and/or drawn.
Include a tear resistant fabric inner liner for flexible fabric ductwork.
Do not pass flexible ductwork through fire resistant building construction nor use at extract points where deposits
of flammable substances are likely to occur in high fire risk areas.
Do not use flexible ductwork to change direction between sections of rigid ductwork.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Secure flexible ductwork to rigid ductwork by means of hose or band clips and ensure that the whole unit has a
standard of airtightness equal to that of the rigid ductwork.
Ensure that flexible ductwork is suitable for an operating temperature range of -5°C to +90°C and complies with
the following:
- B.S.476, Part 6, Fire Propagation - Index of Performance. I not exceeding 12 and i = 6.

- 1B.S.476, Part 7, Class 1, surface of very low flame spread.
800 FLEXIBLE JOINTS

Fit flexible joints as described in HVCA Specification DW/144, Part 7, Section 26, page 52, and BS 9999.
Fit purpose-made flexible joints on the inlet and discharge connections of all fans. Where axial flow fans are used
with attenuators fit joints between the attenuators and the ductwork.
Fit proprietary flexible joints in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Securely fix all joints to a
standard of airtightness equal to the remainder of the connected equipment. Correctly align connected equipment
and do not use joints to cover for poor alignment.
Use ductwork flexible joints manufactured from jute base PVC leaded cloth.
Use Neoprene coated glass fibre 1.14mm thick flexible joints for final connections to ceiling- mounted grilles,
diffusers or other air terminal units where shown on the drawing.
Ensure that all joints have fire resistance properties of at least 15 minutes integrity to BS 476 : Part 8 and comply
with BS 476, Part 7, Class 1 surface of very low flame spread.
Do not use canvas or asbestos material joints
900 CONNECTIONS TO BUILDER'S WORK

Connect to builders work ducts in accordance with DW/144, Part 7, Section 28 on page 53.
Where fire dampers are installed in fire blanket compartment divisions, ensure that the dampers are
independently supported from the building structure, and not by the duct. Ensure that the fire rating of the
supports is at least equal to that of the fire division.
1000 EXTERNAL DUCTWORK

To ensure water drains from insulated external rectangular ductwork slope the top with sufficient fall both ways
from the centre line, or one way if more appropriate. This may be achieved by either forming the top sheet of the
duct or an additional continuous piece of sheet metal pop riveted to the top of duct.
1200 PROTECTIVE FINISHES
1210 GENERAL
Provide protective finishes in accordance with DW/144, Part 7, Section 29, page 54 and Appendix E, page 85.
1220 MILD STEEL SECTIONS

Ensure that mild steel sections are galvanised after manufacture to BS EN ISO 1461.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
1230 EXTERNAL DUCTWORK

Ensure that external ductwork is manufactured from galvanised sheet metal, cold galvanised at cut edges and the
whole coated with bitumastic paint, whether it is to be insulated or not.
1300 IDENTIFICATION OF DUCTWORK

Identify ductwork as described in DW/144, Appendix B, page 80 and provide as part of the insulation work.
1400 AIR LEAKAGE TESTING

Carry out air leakage testing strictly in accordance with HVCA DW/144, pages 75-79, Appendix A and HVCA
DW/143. Include all system components including air handling units in the tests.
Test the system to the pressures and leakage classifications given in the particular clauses of the specification.
1500 DUCTWORK CLEANING AND FUMIGATION

Ensure that before final assembly into a ductwork system all ductwork sections and components have all holes
and openings cut and the edges dressed smooth and internally inspected to ensure removal of swarf, dirt or
other foreign matter likely to be a source of future infection.
As work proceeds cover all openings and on completion blow through each system, with filters removed, with the
fan unit operational for at least 12 hours before commissioning.
Additionally, where specified, clean each completed system internally employing a specialist company using steam
air lances, high volume vacuum or chemicals as appropriate. Blow the system through again before
commissioning.

European Standard.
- BS 476 - Fire tests on building materials and structure

- BS 2569 - Specification for sprayed metal coatings
- BS 4652 - Specification for zinc-rich priming paint (organic media)
- BS 4921 - Specification for sherardized coatings on iron or steel Articles
- BS 5720 - Code Of Practice For Mechanical Ventilation and Air-Conditioning Of Buildings BS 9999 - Code of
practice for fire safety in the design, management and use of buildings BS EN 1366 - Fire resistance tests for
service installations
- BS EN 1505 - Ventilation for buildings. Sheet metal air ducts and fittings with rectangular cross- section.
Dimensions
- BS EN 1506 - Ventilation for buildings. Sheet metal air ducts and fittings with circular cross-section.
- Dimensions

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 10143:1993 - Continuously Hot-Dip Metal Coated Steel Sheet and Strip. - Tolerances on Dimensions
and Shape.
- BS EN 10210 - Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain steels
- BS EN 12097 - Ventilation for buildings. Requirements for ductwork components to facilitate maintenance of
ductwork
- BS EN 12236 - Ventilation for buildings. Ductwork hangers and supports. Requirements for strength
- BS EN 12237 - Ventilation for buildings. Ductwork. Strength and leakage of circular sheet metal ducts BS EN
ISO 1461 - Hot dipped galvanised coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles. Specifications
- and test methods
- BS ISO 10294 - Fire resistance tests. Fire dampers for air distribution systems HVCA DW/143 - A practical
guide to Ductwork Leakage Testing
- HVCA DW/144 - Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork HVCA DW/154 - Specification for Plastics Ductwork
- HVCA DW/191 - Code of practice for resin bonded glass fibre ductwork. Metric HVCA TR/19 - Guide to Good
Practice: Internal Cleanliness of Ventilation Systems CIBSE Guide B3 - Ductwork
- CIBSE Com Code A - Air distribution systems.
- BSRIA AG 3/89.3 - Commissioning Air Systems. Application procedures for buildings HSC ACOP L24 -
Workplace Health and Safety and Welfare Regulations

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y31 AIR DUCTLINES ANCILLARIES
100 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
110 ACCESS OPENINGS

Provide access openings generally as described in DW/144, Part 7, Section 20, Pages 47and 48, but with the
following additions:
Design considerations of CIBSE Guide B, Section 3, also apply.
Provide access covers above false ceilings and other concealed spaces of the hinged type. Elsewhere provide
covers with cam type fixing where exposed to view. Attach all covers to the frame by means of hinges or wire
cable.
For access doors located within ductwork having external thermal or acoustic insulation, provide the double skin
type, sandwiching a layer of thermal or acoustic insulation, as appropriate, of the same thermal performance as
the ductwork external insulation.
Ensure the duct opening and the access door itself is reinforced to prevent distortion. Provide a sealing gasket
together with clamping type latches to ensure an air and moisture seal between the door and the duct. Where
the inside of the duct is accessible to personnel, ensure the latches have handles both inside and outside the door
and that the duct floor is reinforced to take the persons weight.
120 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

Support all ductwork and associated components as scheduled and detailed in HVCA, DW/144, Specification Part
6, Pages 43 to 46 and BS EN 10210, subject to the following amendments and additions.
Ensure mild steel sections used in the fabrication of hangers and supports are free from rust and protected in
accordance with Part 7, Section 27, page 53.
Clause 19.3.1, Page 43 – do not use stranded wire.
Provide support brackets around thermal insulation and repair seal on ductwork systems incorporating cooling
coils, or with provision for their future inclusion or where vapour proofed insulation is specified. Provide a
continuous unbroken vapour seal on ductwork where specified.
Bolt or rivet sloping or vertical ducts supports to the duct, as figures 76 and 77, page 46.
Design brackets and supports in accordance with the best commercial practice, with a safety factor of 6.25.
Forward detail drawings of all fixing methods and brackets to the Contract Administrator for comment prior to
construction.
Position additional supports adjacent to coils, dampers, diffusers and similar equipment.
Do not use ductwork supports for supporting ceilings, light fittings, or any other trades’ equipment.
Do not drill or weld any structural steelwork unless particularly specified or with prior written agreement. Support
all ductwork and associated equipment from the building structure.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Pack the support legs of floor supported items of plant off the floor slabs with purpose made metal packing
pieces to the full thickness of the finished screed.
Cut off drop rods and bolts close to the nuts. Keep drop rods and supports clear of ductwork insulation
thicknesses.
Allow for the necessary steelwork adaptors, bolts, nuts, washers, screws and plugs for the fixing of supports
including drilling and plugging for same. Do not drill structural steelwork for ductwork supports.
130 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

Provide general purpose dampers of proprietary manufacture and in accordance with HVCA DW / 144
Specification Part 7, Section 21 Page 48 – “Regulating Dampers”.
Provide isolating, balancing and control (ie power actuated) dampers in the positions shown on the drawings.
Provide balancing dampers in all positions necessary to comply with BSRIA Applications Guide 3 /8 9, Figure 1,
Page 3, CIBSE Guide B, Section 3, and CIBSE Commissioning Code Series A and where shown on the drawings.
Except as specified subsequently provide all isolating, balancing and control dampers of the single or multileaf
type. Where the minor duct dimension exceeds 100mm, use multileaf dampers. Where damper blades would be
required to span in excess of 1200mm, use multiple frame dampers.
Provide single and multileaf damper blades fabricated from galvanised mild steel or stainless steel. Use double
skin aerofoil dampers on all medium and high pressure systems. Ensure blades are mounted on robust plated or
stainless steel spindles carried in non-ferrous or ball bearings.
Provide single and multileaf dampers of the opposed blade type. When required in a mixing application use
parallel blades type.
On systems where insulation and vapour sealing is specified, ensure all dampers are of the double skin type to
allow the insulation and vapour seal to be carried over the casing.
On medium and high pressure systems demountable use double skin casings with only the operating spindle
penetrating the outer casing to minimise leakage at bearing points.
Ensure all dampers are suitable for motorised/actuator operation where applicable. Rigidly mount all motors or
thrustors, and carefully align on control dampers strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations.
Provide low leakage dampers which are similar in construction to multileaf balancing dampers but with additional
seals on blade edges. Fit top and bottom frame sections with stops to reduce air leakage between the blades and
the frame.
Provide fully airtight dampers which are similar in construction to multileaf balancing dampers but with additional
stops on top and bottom frame sections. Fit additional seals to blade edges, between blades and frame, top and
bottom stops and joints between gears and blades.
Fit all supply air grilles and diffusers, except those on supplies from fan coils , with integral balancing dampers.
Fit all return air grilles, except those connecting to a return air ceiling void plenum or direct to fan coil units, with
integral balancing dampers.
Provide balancing dampers at terminals of the opposed blade multileaf type designed to give close control of
airflow evenly across the face of the terminal with minimum noise regeneration.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
140 PULSER
Linear Pulsion Devices DLP is constituted by a metallic canalization, preferably of circular shape, in order to better
advantage the air induction from the surrounding equipment.
A particular hole punching pattern is applied on the pulser surface; this pattern is constituted by two kinds of
holes:
The induction holes, which are smaller, determinate the quantity of the air that needs to be recalled by induction
from the surrounding environment, in order to perfectly lend it with the supplty air.
The guide holes, which are bigger, determinate the direction, the speed and the distance at which the
environment air mass, pre-blended by the induction holes, must be moved.
The exit air speed from the holes compared to their diameter, the distance between them, their position on the
DLP’s surface, the DLP’s position in the environment and to the minimum and maximum supply air temperature’s
differences, determinate the DLP’s skill to create the necessary “pressure field”.
- Each pulser is fitted with a special device for the setting of the residual speed at the ground and to ensure the
inspection of the duct;.
- Pulsers allow to put on to the air handling units allowing the cascade operation aimed at achieving the
maximum energy savings;
- Each pulser will be furnished with an appropriate motorized damper, with opposed blades pitch 150mm, each
driven by a modulating pressure that manages the desired pressure in the primary pulsers.
- Each pulsor is made with circular shape performed with galvanized sheet quality S250GD with galvanizing Z
EN 10346 (140 g/m²) and of appropriate thickness depending on the diameter.
- The modules that made the pulser are net length equal to 1 meter
- Each module will be closed at the construction site by means of special stainless steel rivets
- Tightness between two modules is ensured by applying a special seal
- Modules are coupled together by an omega collar tie
- In order to protect the exposed surface each pulser will be provided with a special protective 1adhesive film,
which will be to remove only after the start-up of the system (no more than 15 days after receipt of the
material)
- Temperature: 70ºC maximum in continuous service.
- For the clamp to the building is recommended to use steel cables type Gripple or similar, disposed in V-shape
anti oscillation, which allow rotation on its axis and in accordance with current standards.
150 SLOT LINEAR DIFFUSER

Linear slot diffusers are designed for the diffusion of air with installation in suspended ceilings. They are suitable
for the diffusion of air in room with height between about 2,6 and 4m or for more height in case of installation
near wall or glass wall.
They are available in lengths of 500mm and 2000mm with increment of 100mm from 1 to 6 slot
Slot linear diffuser have black or white plastic deflector, with support, and frame if present in natural anodized
aluminium. The plenum box made in sendzimir zinc plated steel. The plenum box connection is made by
aluminium.The frame, if present, can be painted in all RAL colours.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
160 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS

Provide fire/smoke dampers of proprietary manufacture, multi-blade or shutter type as described in DW/144, Part
7, Section 22, 23 and 24, pages 49 to 51 (words deleted), subject to the following additions:
- Provide installation frames as shown in Fig. 78, Page 50, incorporating provision for expansion within the
surrounding structure together with lugs for building into the structure. Ensure the frame and damper,
constructed from corrosion resistant materials, comply with BS 9999.
- Provide single or a combination of dampers with an overall fire rating not less than two hours in accordance
with BS 476, parts 20-24, and provide certification to indicate compliance.
- Ensure anti-leakage rates are in accordance with the system requirement, where pressure testing is
applicable.
- Fit an external visual indication of the open/closed status of the damper and the direction of air flow. Provide
a facility for the periodic manual release and resetting of any mechanism for test purposes and adequate
access for easy replacement of mechanisms.
- Unless otherwise specified for smoke or heat detection operation arrange for fire dampers to be held in the
open position by a quick release device incorporating a fusible link set to fuse at 72°C+2°C. Provide one spare
fusible link for each 10 fire/smoke dampers and handed over on completion.
- Where specified fit a device to allow dampers to operate on an electric or pneumatic signal from a remote
control.
- Where specified fit a device to allow damper open/closed status to be monitored.
- For smoke protection applications design the dampers to be powered to the closed position and to fail safe to
the fully open position. Provide manual or remote resetting as indicated.
- Provide dampers for fitting into fire rated transoms or partitions with a minimum fire rating as the building
element into which the damper is fitted, and of a thickness to suit the building construction.
- Either or both of the following two optional paragraphs may be used instead of the paragraphs above.
- Provide dampers constructed from corrosion resistant materials, complete with non- vision transfer grille,
which maintain integrity and do not permit passage of flame or smoke.
- Provide dampers with operation by fusible link or heat/smoke detection of the fire protection system and
spring closed.
170 BLAST VALVE

Blast valve is used as air intake and outlet valve of Civil Defence and military shelters having high blast resistance
requirements. The valve is also suitable for industrial blast protection applications.
The blast valve comprises an stainless steel pressure disk mounted on a stainless steel spindle mechanism within
nodular cast iron valve body. The valve mechanism is mounted in a rectangular modular wall frame that can
house 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 valve elements. The valve is completely corrosion resistant. All components of the
spindle mechanism are made of stainless steel. Other parts are either hot dip galvanized or coated with epoxy
powder paint.
The valve is designed and tested to withstand multiple long duration (peak duration > 60 ms) blast loads having
peak reflected overpressure of 20 bar and short duration (positive phase duration < 5.0 ms) blast load having
peak reflected overpressure of 60 bar while retaining its full functional ability. The valve withstands a mechanical

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
shock of the installation wall equivalent to sudden change in velocity of 1.5 m/s and stresses of a dropping test
with an acceleration of 80 g in directions of the three main axis.
The valve is designed to function within the operating temperature range of -20 +80 °C
180 HIGH PENETRATION AIR DIFFUSER

Ceiling swirl diffuser are suitable in room up to a height of 4m. They will be equipped with blades that can be
adjusted to achieve a horizontal as well as a vertical throw pattern.
Swirl Diffusers with square or circular face with swirling horizontal discharge of supply air with high induction,
consisting of a pressed front face with radially angled fixed air guide blades. Optionally with fixed top entry
plenum or top entry plenum with internal sub frame, maximum tile thickness 20 mm, or with circular side entry
plenum box with circular spigot and additional options of lip seal or volume control damper. To measure
reference pressure, the spigot can be fitted with sheathed cable adjusted volume control damper and measuring
nipple on request. Plenum boxes complete with holes in top flange or fitted bracket for mounting. The diffuser
face can be fixed or removed by means of a centre fix screw.
Construction:
- Sheet steel painted to RAL 9010 (white)

Blades:
- Plastic, similar to RAL colour 9010

- Aluminium painted to the RAL colour of the faceplate
Diffusers can be provided with following accessories:
- Plenum box : Galvanised sheet steel, with integrated perforated straightener (supply air model only) and
fixing lugs;
- Damper: Galvanised sheet steel;
- Panelled cover plate: Sheet steel painted to RAL 9010;
- Volumetric Flow Meter: mounting made of galvanised sheet steel;
- External insulation: thermal insulation at the outside of plenum box;
-

European Standard.
- The Building Regulations Approved Document B: Fire Safety (Volume 2) – Buildings other than dwellings
- BS 476 - Fire tests on buildings materials and structure

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 476-20 - Part 20: - Method for determination of the fire resistance of elements of construction
- BS 476-21 - Part 21: - Methods for determination of the fire resistance of loadbearing elements of
construction
- BS 476-22 - Part 22: Methods for determination of the fire resistance of non-loadbearing elements of
construction
- BS 476-23 - Part 23: Methods for determination of the contribution of components to the fire resistance of a
structure
- BS 476-24 - Part 24: Method for determination of the fire resistance of ventilation ducts BS 4652 -
Specification for zinc rich priming paint (organic media)
- BS 4921 - Specification for sherardized coatings on iron or steel
- BS 9999 - Code of practice for fire safety in the design, management and use of buildings
- BS EN 1751 - Ventilation for buildings. - Air terminal devices. - Aerodynamic testing of dampers and valves
- BS EN 10143 - Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip. Tolerances on dimensions and shape
- BS EN 10210 - Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain steels.
- Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
- BS EN 10346 - Continuously hot-dip coated steel flat products. Technical delivery conditions BS EN 13501 -
Fire classification of construction products and building elements
- BS EN 13501-3 - Part 3: Classification using data from fire resistance tests on products and elements used in
building services installations: fire resisting ducts and fire dampers
- BS EN 13662 - Fire resistance tests for service installations
- BS EN 13662-2 - Fire dampers
- BS EN ISO 1461 - Hot dip galvanised coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.
- Specifications and test methods
- BS ISO 10294 - Fire resistance tests. Fire dampers for air distribution systems BS ISO 10294-1 - Part 1: Test
method
- BS ISO 10294-2 - Part 2: Classification, criteria and field of application of test results
- BSRIA AG 3/89.3 - Commissioning air systems - Application procedures for building CIBSE Commissioning
Code A - Air distribution systems.
- CIBSE Guide B - Heating, ventilating, air conditioning and ventilation. Section 3: Ductwork HVCA DW/43 -
Practical guide to Ductwork Leakage Testing
- HVCA DW/144 - Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork
- HVCA DW/155 - Guide to good practice for the installation of fire and smoke dampers

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y40 AIR HANDLING UNITS
110 AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHUS) CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
111 GENERAL
Make each assembly of compact construction consisting of a rigid metal framework with galvanized or zinc coated
mild steel double skinned panels of at least 1.0mm thick for the outer skin and at least 0.8mm thick for the inner
skin, strengthened as necessary to prevent distortion and drumming. Arrange the panels for easy removal and
refitting where access for inspection, maintenance or the passage of large components, such as fans, motors or
coils, is required. Ensure that all panels achieve a fully flush appearance both internally and externally.
Where required provide access doors. Make each such door of sufficient size to allow reasonable man-access and
the passage of tools, equipment and/ or replacement components. Fit every such access door with floating hinges
and heavy-duty, cast aluminium, chrome or plastic coated wedge-action sealing handles. Arrange the hinges so
that the doors can be lifted off for improved access. Arrange all such doors safely operable against air pressure to
prevent injury.
Use lift-out panels where access requirements do not allow for the swing of the door. Provide all access doors
and panels with sealing gaskets to minimise leakage. Ensure that all doors and panels and their frames are stiff
enough to effectively compress such gaskets to make an airtight seal.
Fit quick release fasteners to lift out panels; do not use bolt-on type fittings.
Construct the AHU panels using the ‘dry-fold panel’ principle or the ‘tray and inverted tray method’ to encapsulate
insulation of the specified thickness. Whichever construction method is used ensure that the panels are
completely sealed.
‘Sandwich’ the insulation material between the double-skin of each panel. Use insulation material that does not
deform, erode or migrate into the air stream and which has a thermal conductivity of less than 0.04kW/mK.
Where appropriate include a vapour seal with the insulation.
Fit the double skin panels into a framework of rolled hollow section rigid construction, manufactured from 1.6mm
minimum thickness galvanised steel sections, extrusions and corner pieces, or a framework of similar strength
construction.
Assemble all components using bolts, anti-vibration lock washers and nuts or other approved quick-release
fastenings. Do not use self-tapping screws to secure access panels.
Where AHU’s are constructed in sections (modular construction), make each section capable of being used as an
individual item or as part of a complete unit. Make each such section of a size capable of being transported along
a pre-planned route to its final location. Package, protect and seal every individual section to prevent damage in
transit and on site.
Achieve an overall appearance for each AHU that is straight at top and sides by arranging all sections with a
common height and width, unless agreed otherwise in writing with the Contract Administrator.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Mount each AHU on a permanent, robust, galvanised rolled steel channel, fabricated base frame, complete with
lifting lugs for transportation, handling and support purposes. Make each such base frame sufficiently deep to
accommodate the cooling coil and recuperator condensate drainage traps. For AHU’s that have cooling coils,
make such base frames at least 200mm deep and, for heating-only AHU’s, at least 100mm deep, unless stated
otherwise in the schedules.
Where shown on the drawings make the AHU’s suitable for stacking. When installed in such a manner, ensure
that the underneath unit shows no sign of compression and all its doors and removable panels operate as
required. Prior to assembly of the unit, paint any part that will become inaccessible.
Obtain the AHU manufacturer’s written confirmation that all factory made electrical installations are in accordance
with BS 7671.
There are numerous ‘hybrid’ types of AHU available from manufacturers, (eg units with pre-piped and charged DX
refrigeration systems and condensers mounted upon them; ‘plug’ type fans) for which the engineer should
include appropriate clauses in the relevant ‘U’ section of the project specification to supplement this section.
112 DOUBLE-SKINNED INSPECTION PORTS

Unless stated otherwise in the AHU schedule(s), install an inspection port (window) in each section that contains
a fan. Make every such inspection port 150 mm minimum diameter, or 150mm minimum square, and double-
skinned and sealed to prevent condensation obstructing the view through them.
113 PURPOSE-BUILT MOUNTING POINTS

Unless stated otherwise in the AHU schedule(s), provide a purpose-built mounting point for each control motor,
sensor, switch or instrument mounted on each AHU. Provide adequate space between components of the AHU to
enable all such motors, sensors, switches and instruments to be sited for proper operation.
120 PAINT FINISH

Unless stated otherwise in the AHU schedule(s), deliver every AHU section to site with a high quality factory
applied 35-micron minimum thickness paint finish to its interior and exterior, including the base frame. Ensure
that the paint system is applied upon completion of all factory pre-assembly fabrication processes, thereby
achieving complete coverage of all surfaces with no bare metal edges.
121 AIR LEAKAGE - GENERAL

Ensure that every AHU complies with the same specification for air-tightness as the ductwork to which it is
connected or, if more airtight, to the standard stated in the schedules. Prior to placing an order for each AHU
provide to the Contract Administrator a manufacturer's test certificate certifying that the required standard of air-
tightness has previously been achieved for the particular type being ordered.
122 AIR LEAKAGE – LEAK TEST

Unless stated otherwise in the AHU schedule(s), leak test the entire assembly of each AHU from intake to
discharge flange in accordance with Table 2 and the method specified, in DW 143 for ductwork.
Have all such tests witnessed and provide to the Contract Administrator a certificate confirming that the specified
air-tightness standard has been achieved.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
130 AIR HANDLING UNITS

Provide all exposed air inlet and exhaust connections with insect screens and weather louvres. Also, provide all
inlets with moisture eliminators and bottom drain outlets, situated behind the inlet louvres to prevent the ingress
of moisture into the adjoining sections.
130 CONTROL AND DISCHARGE OF CONDENSATE

Ensure the air handling unit controls and discharges to drain all condensate under all external ambient conditions,
irrespective of the cooling/dehumidification design conditions specified.
Meet the design requirements without the use of droplet eliminators. If this cannot be done due to technical
constraints, notify the Contract Administrator in writing.
Where the Contract Administrator has approved their use, ensure eliminators are specifically warranted for
performance. Provide specific notice of necessary drain trap criteria for successful draining. Determine peak
condensate flow for pump selection. Ensure that, at all air handling inlet conditions, all condensate is drained
away from the unit via purpose made condensate drain facilities. In the event of non-compliance, carry out all
necessary remedial works.
200 ACCESSORIES AND COMPONENTS
210 FAN SECTION

Make the fan section of every AHU of a rigid metal framework, clad, stiffened and strengthened as necessary to
prevent drumming and distortion. Provide maintenance access panels where necessary. Ensure that the
replacement of bearings and fan impeller is readily accomplished.
Use fans that are rated in accordance with BS 6583.
Where required in the AHU schedule(s) provide a diffuser section at the fan outlet.
Ensure that every fan assembly is complete with its fan impeller, casing, drive shaft, bearings, motor and slide rail
assembly, drive, drive guard, flexible discharge duct connection, steel base-frame and anti vibration mountings.
Unless stated otherwise in the schedule(s), fit the motor inside the AHU casing of the fan section with the
motor(s) in the airstream, together with the fan, drive and its guard.
Depending on the unit size, enclose the fan pulley, motor pulley and drive belts in a space-saver wire mesh guard
mounted behind the fan section access door, or by a fully enclosed double-sided wire mesh guard.
Where stated in the schedules fit the motor and drive external to the airstream. Where required by the AHU
schedule(s) install duty and standby motors.
At every fan base and according to the unit size, use rubber block, rubber-in-shear or open spring anti vibration
mountings, to effectively prevent fan vibrations from being transmitted to the AHU casing.
At every fan discharge fit a non-flammable flexible duct connection of 100mm minimum operational length, to
effectively prevent fan vibrations from being transmitted to the AHU casing.
Arrange that every motor is factory wired to an emergency stop isolator mounted externally on the unit.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Fix a permanent sign to the fan section access door of each AHU, warning that the fan must be isolated and
allowed to stop before the door is opened.
220 FILTER SECTION
221 GENERAL
Ensure that the filter type, minimum filtration efficiency class and position of all filters within each AHU is in
accordance with the respective AHU schedule(s) and with the drawings.
Ensure that all filters comply with BS 476-7 and that their media comply with the test requirements of BS EN 779
or BS EN 1822 as appropriate, and are rot-proof, non-combustible, and do not generate smoke.
Mount all filters in galvanised mild steel side access/ withdrawal housing frames with baffle plates that prevent
unfiltered bypass. Alternatively, depending on unit size, mount filters in front withdrawal frames with an AHU
access section provided upstream (the dirty face) of the filter, to facilitate filter replacement.
Under each filter bank treat the floor of the AHU with a suitable coating to protect it against corrosive moisture,
which might be condensed out of the airstream.
222 HIGH EFFICIENCY FILTERS

Install filter cells within a purpose-made frame in compliance with the filter manufacturer's instructions and BS EN
1822.
223 FLUSH MOUNTED DIAL TYPE PRESSURE GAUGE

Unless stated otherwise in the AHU schedule(s), fit a flush mounted dial type pressure gauge to each filter section
that indicates the differential pressure across the filter.
224 INSTALLATION AND SPARES

Unless stated otherwise in the AHU schedule(s) provide and install, after final tests and commissioning, a new set
of filters in every AHU to ensure that the Works are handed over to the employer with clean filters at practical
completion. Properly dispose of the removed filters.
Additionally, where stated in the AHU schedule(s), supply a set of new, properly packaged, spare filters, and hand
them over in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Administrator.
230 RE-HEAT SECTION
231 GENERAL
Install re-heat coils, set out in the AHU schedule(s). Ensure that the air velocity at the face of the fin block of
each does not exceed 4.0m/s, based upon the ‘fan capability air flow rate’.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
230 CARTRIDGE TYPE COILS

Unless stated otherwise in the AHU schedule(s), make all coils of the cartridge type, supported on rails and
installed so that they can readily be withdrawn from the side of the AHU in the direction indicated on the
drawings.
240 COOLING COIL SECTION
241 GENERAL
Install cooling coils of the duty and primary cooling medium set out in the AHU schedule(s). Ensure that the air
velocity at the face of the fin block of each does not exceed 2.3m/s, based upon the ‘fan capability air flow rate’.
Downstream of each cooling coil provide space within the same section for droplet eliminators to be installed.
(Refer to clause Y40.260 of this specification regarding the eliminators.)
260 CONDENSATE DRAIN PANS AND ELIMINATOR
261 GENERAL
Beneath cooling coils, fit a drain pan with drain point. Extend each such drain point via a drain pipe that
discharges over a tundish.
Incorporate a 'U' trap in each drain pipe having a water-seal depth of not less than twice the fan static pressure.
Fit to each such trap a priming tapping for maintaining the water seal. Where the AHU section operates at a
negative pressure, position the drain point low enough to prevent condensation being retained in the drain pan.
Extend a drain pipe from each such tundish to a floor drain, gulley or other suitable place.
262 MOISTURE ELIMINATOR

Unless stated otherwise in the AHU schedule(s), provide moisture eliminators downstream of cooling coils that
prevent droplet carry-over to the airstream. Provide a sloping drain pan with drain outlet at every such eliminator.
270 SOUND ATTENUATORS/VIBRATION ISOLATORS
271 GENERAL
Where required, install sound attenuators, acoustic treatment and vibration isolators each of a duty sufficient for
the purpose, and to ensure that in-room noise criteria and external noise criteria specified for the project, are
met.
Mount sound attenuating splitter assemblies at the locations indicated on the drawings or in the AHU schedules.
Ensure that all such splitters are designed in accordance with BS EN ISO 7235 and mounted at spacing’s
necessary to prevent deformation as well as to meet the required noise performance.
Construct each such splitter from inorganic, non-combustible mineral material meeting the requirement of BS
476-7, Class 1 spread of flame and apply a facing to each that prevents migration of acoustic material into the air
stream. In sections of each AHU where there may be free moisture or condensation, use a type of surface
protection that prevents water-logging of the acoustic insulation. Ensure that all such acoustic insulation is of the

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
non-shedding type. Additionally, fit to the acoustic insulation a perforated plate that prevents erosion at air
velocities of up to 20m/s through the passageways between splitters.
280 MIXING AND DAMPER SECTIONS
281 GENERAL
Unless stated otherwise in the AHU schedule(s), provide an inlet damper and an outlet damper on each AHU.
Make all isolating and shut-off dampers of multi-leaf opposed blade construction.
In air mixing sections of each AHU, arrange multi-leaf parallel blade dampers so that they achieve efficient mixing
of the air streams.
To every manually operated damper fit a quadrant control with lockable lever.
Manufacture all damper blades from galvanized steel or extruded aluminium material of aerofoil section, each
with a cadmium plated drive spindle rotating in dirt protected, maintenance free, nylon bearings.
Arrange each motorized dampers with a linkage so that it is suitable for being connected to a single drive motor/
actuator and is suitable for having the motor mounting bracket fixed to it.
Ensure that all dampers are complete with suitable linkages, pointers and labels that clearly indicate the fully
closed, the locked setting and the fully open positions.
282 ACTUATORS
Where the project has an automatic controls specialist Installer, arrange for all damper motors and actuators to
be supplied by such Installer, unless stated otherwise in the AHU schedule(s).
290 HUMIDIFIER
Humidification section provides for the increasing of the moisture of the inlet air to the suitable temperature
which depends of the working environment, humidification section with contact humidifier will be provided
This section consist of a section housing, a humidifier, and a negative or positive pressure condensate drain
siphon. It is also fitted with a double-wall inspection window.
A humidification cartdridge is made of non-flammable material in a rust resistant housing and is characterised by
its high water absorption capacity and large water to air flow area. A droplet eliminator is required for every
section in which air flow velocity exceeds 3.5 m/s.
At the humidified air outlet, a free space of 300-600 mm width shall be provided. Upon installation, all fissures
towards the housing must be sealed.
Humidifier do not have a water pump, therefore it is essential that the mains cold water supply connected to the
uni has adequate pressure and flow rate for the humidifier being installed.
Mains cold water is fed to the water distribution header via a constant flow valve, the constant flow valve ensures
that the correct flow rate is supplied to the water distribution header of each cassette.
The water flows downward through the corrugated surface of the humidifier cassette. Some of the water ia
absorbed by the droplet separator and the rest runs down into the bottom tray.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
As the supply air passes through humidifier, a proportion of the water absorbed by the media evaporateson
contact with the air to produce humidified air.
The water that reaches the bottom tray is discharged directly to the wastewater system through the discharge
pipe.
The cold water supply is to be provided with a shutoff valve in order to be able to shut off the water supply
during service. If the water contains large particles a filter having a pore size of 500µm should be installed.
300 UNIT PERFORMANCE

Ensure that the air flow performance of every AHU conforms with the testing procedure specified in BS ISO 5801,
BS 848-l.
Ensure that the capacity rating of every cooling coil and every heating coil is determined in accordance with BS
5141-1 and -2.
In addition to the requirements set out elsewhere within this specification, ensure that every AHU has been
manufactured and tested in accordance with BS EN 1886 and has achieved the following minimum criteria or, if
otherwise stated in the AHU schedule(s), the criteria so stated:
- Casing air leakage - Class “B” Casing strength - Class “1

- Filter bypass leakage Class “F9”
- Casing thermal transmittance Class “T3”
- Casing thermal bridging factor Class ”TB2”
Ensure that every AHU casing has independently verifiable minimum sound insertion loss values of:
Frequency(Hz) 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K

Insertion loss (dB) 15 12 22 30 35 32 35 37
400 STANDARD AND REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

European Standard.
- BS 476 - Fire test on building materials and structures

- BS 476-7 - Part 7: Method of test to determine the classification of the surface spread of flame of products
- BS 5141 - Air heating and cooling coils
- BS 5141-1 - Part 1: Method of testing for rating of cooling coils
- BS 5141-2 - Part 2: Method of testing for rating of heating coils
- BS 6583 - Methods for volumetric testing for rating of fan sections in central station air handling units
(including guidance on rating)

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 7671 - Requirements for electrical installations. IEE Wiring Regulations.

- BS EN 779 - Particulate air filters for general ventilation. - Determination of the filtration performance
- BS EN 1822 - High efficiency air filters (HEPA and ULPA)
- BS EN 1886 - Ventilation for buildings. Air handling units. Mechanical performance
- BS EN 13053 - Ventilation for buildings. Air handling units. Rating and performance for units, components and
sections
- BS EN ISO 7235 - Acoustics. Laboratory measurement procedures for ducted silencers and air- terminal units.
Insertion loss, flow noise and total pressure loss.
- BS ISO 5801, BS 848-1 - Industrial fans. Performance testing using standardized airways HVCA DW/143 - A
practical guide to Ductwork Leakage Testing
- HVCA DW/144 - Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y41 FANS
100 GENERAL
110 FAN SELECTION

Size the fans, motors and drive system adequately to:
- be able to achieve the selected duty specified or provide an increase of 15% over the highest specified flow
rate against the corresponding increases in system resistance generated by the increased flow rate where
selection duty is not specified.
200 PRODUCT AND MATERIALS
210 CENTRIFUGAL FAN

Provide centrifugal fans capable of giving the specified performance when tested in accordance with BS 848.
Provide evidence supporting claimed fan efficiencies and for noise levels to the Contract Administrator. Provide
fan sets comprising either single inlet single width, or double inlet double width fans, with the motor and drive
external to the air stream, unless otherwise specified.
Select fans for the variable air volume units with maximum efficiency at maximum system design flow rate. If the
fan selected does not fall within the manufacturer's recommended range at minimum fan speed and resulting
system resistance, then choose the nearest fan size to satisfy this requirement.
Select fan duties selected for operation with dirty filters. Do not select the fans on a flat head part of the curve,
and select the static head at no flow (closed damper) to be at least 20% greater than that at design condition.
Ensure that no part of the fan curve has a negative gradient within the operating range.
Provide the fan manufacturer with full details of each system, including drawings, to ensure that the
manufacturer is aware of the system configuration and the fan inlet and outlet conditions. Select the correct fans
to meet the specified performance requirements.
Construct fan casings of mild steel sheet or plate with angle stiffeners and base angles to ensure freedom from
drumming, and constructed so that impellers may be easily withdrawn after installation. Fit a drain plug to the fan
casing at the lowest point, and where necessary provide an access door in the casing for inspection of the
impeller.
Supply impellers as backward curved non- overloading aerofoil type. Only use forward curved impellers where
specifically permitted in writing by the Contract Administrator. Provide impellers of mild steel of riveted or welded
construction, with spiders or hubs of robust design and capable of running continuously at twenty per cent in
excess of the normal speed. Key the impellers to a substantial mild steel shaft and statically and dynamically
balance the impeller with shaft at working speed, and test for overspeed before leaving the manufacturer's
works. Design the assembly so that fan rotational speeds, at the duty point, are at least 35% below the first
critical speed.
Rigidly mount shaft bearings on a pedestal either side of the fan and fit sealed for life races or ball bearing
Plummer blocks with remote greasers to ensure smooth running throughout the working life of the fan. Select

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
bearings for a minimum design life of 20,000 hours at maximum catalogue rating (as opposed to operating duty).
Provide extended lubrication facilities wherever the fans are housed in a casing such as air handling units.
Select motors to provide sufficient torque during starting to provide the most economic 'run up' times. On high
resistance systems fit motors with high torque characteristics. Ensure motors are suitable for operating at the
voltages and frequency specified in the electrical services section of the specification.
Ensure connection boxes on motors are easily accessible. Mount the fans and motors on a common base frame,
with suitable anti-vibration mountings. Mount the motor on single adjustment slide rails where possible, otherwise
use standard slide rails to give correct alignment and belt tensioning. Use vee or wedge belt drives in all
instances. Supply all the belts and pulleys as matched sets.
Where indicated, control the flow rate of the fans by inlet guide vanes, which are:
- built into the eye of the fan and result in a totally stable performance throughout the range down to the fully
closed position. Evidence of their stability shall be provided by the tenderer at the tender stage
- designed for maintenance-free operation and have permanently lubricated bearings of stainless steel and
nylon sleeves. They shall not contain any intermediate linkages within their mechanism
- asymmetrically placed to minimise the actuating forces
- for double inlet fans, arranged to be driven by a single actuator for their combined operation
- flutter free throughout their movement and the construction of the linkage system minimises friction and lost
motion
230 AXIAL FANS

Ensure axial flow fans are capable of giving the specified performance when tested in accordance with BS 848
and provide evidence supporting claimed fan efficiencies and sound power spectrums to the Contract
Administrator. Provide single stage or multi-stage fans to suit the duty required. Take care in the selection of
each fan, to ensure that fans are not chosen for duties at the end of the frame or motor range. Where possible
make at least 3 to 4 pitch angle selections available above the desired condition for the chosen frame and motor
size. Where called for in the schedules or indicated on the drawings provide the fans complete with pitch control
gear to enable the fans performance to be altered while the fan is in motion. Arrange for the actuator to operate
the pitch control gear to be provided by the controls specialist.
Unless otherwise indicated, ensure casings are rigidly constructed of mild steel stiffened and braced as necessary
to minimise drumming and vibration. Provide cast iron or fabricated steel feet when necessary for bolting the fan
unit to suitable supports. Ensure the length of the casing is greater than the length of the fan and motor or fans
and motors. Terminate inlet and outlet ends of the casing in flanged rings for easy connection or removal of the
inlet and outlet ducts.
Construct impellers of either steel or aluminium. Provide blades of aerofoil section and either secured to the hub
or formed in one piece with the hub. Key the hub to a substantial mild steel shaft carried in two bearings.
Statically and dynamically balance the impeller and shaft. Provide either ball, roller or ring oiling sleeve type
bearings, and extend lubricators to the outside of the casing.
Unless otherwise indicated provide axial flow fans driven by electric motors, either:
- direct driven by the motor in the air stream

- belt driven by a motor external to the casing

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- direct driven by a motor external to the casing

Where axial flow fans are belt driven and the motor is external to the casing, manufacture the belt guards from
galvanised sheet steel and provide air seals to prevent leakage.
Where axial flow fans are direct driven by a motor external to the casing, ie bifurcated type, place the motors
either between the two halves of the casing in the external air, or within the fan casing provided that effective
ventilation is given to the motor.
Where hot gases or vapours are being handled ensure the motor and its bearings are suitable for operation at the
temperature or conditions they may experience.
Provide terminal blocks in suitable boxes on the outside of the casing.
250 TOILET EXTRACT FANS

Provide toilet extract units, either mounted units or duct-mounted centrifugal fans as shown on the drawings.
Construct casings from sheet steel or aluminium, stiffened or braced where necessary to eliminate drumming and
vibration. Mount fans on a heavy gauge framework and attach to the case by anti-vibration mounts to minimise
mechanical noise and vibration. Provide an easily removed cover to facilitate servicing of fans and motors.
Provide fans of the high efficiency, double inlet, double width, centrifugal type with forward curved impellers,
either direct or belt-driven by electric motors. Fit an air operated flow switches in each fan outlet to sense failure
of airflow and to activate the standby switching and warning signals.

European Standard.
- BS 848 - Fans for general purposes

- BS EN 60085 - Electrical insulation. Thermal classification

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y42 AIR FILTRATION
100 PRODUCTS/MATERIALS
110 GENERAL
Supply non-synthetic filters of the efficiency and type shown on the schedules and install them in the locations
111 FILTER TYPE AND LOCATION

Location EU Grade Dust Spot Efficiency
HEPA FILTER 14 99.999 to 99.9995 %
Bag filter 8,9 - Semi Hepa
Prefilter , flat filter 4 -90-95%
Select all filters suitable for the ‘component selection’ air flow rate shown in the schedule(s).
Ensure that every filter is suitable for the full range of air flow rate specified for each system, and does not
collapse at any, including the lowest, specified air flow rate.
120 FILTER BYPASS

Ensure that every filter fits tightly into its frame and fix every such frame so that there is no bypass of air around
the filter/frame assembly.
130 SPARE FILTER MEDIA

Unless stated otherwise in the AHU or filter schedules, provide and install, after final tests and commissioning, a
new set of filters in every filter unit to ensure that the Works are handed over to the employer with clean filters
at practical completion. Properly dispose of the removed filters.
Additionally, where stated in the AHU or filter schedules, supply a set of new, properly packaged, spare filters,
and hand them over in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Administrator
140 HIGH EFFICIENCY FILTERS

Where high efficiency (ie efficiencies greater than 97% against BS 3928 sodium flame test) filters are
incorporated into ducting, install all filter cells within purpose-made frames. Pay special attention to the sealing of
filters, frames and ducting to ensure that the complete assembly conforms to the filter manufacturer's
instructions and BS 3928 and DIN 1946. Do not rely upon the use of adhesive tape to seal filters and filter
frames. Supply with every filter case a device that enables the soundness of the seal to be demonstrated.
At practical completion of the Works supply, in accordance with the directions of the Contract Administrator, two
leak-test instruments for the employer.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Construct on the upstream and on the downstream side of each filter bank, an access and test chamber of
800mm minimum length. Provide each such chamber with an access door 150mm larger in width and in
height/length.
Ensure that every such access door is sufficiently large to facilitate man access for replacing and testing the
filters, incorporates a double-glazed viewing port, opens against the normal operating air pressure of the access
chamber, and is mounted on floating hinges.
Have every HEPA filter installation tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 14644, BS 5726 and BS EN 12469, by a
company specialising in the testing and validation of HEPA filter installations.
Testing of filters fitted to extraction systems to BS 5726 and BS EN 12469
Ensure that all such testing of terminal HEPA filters takes place when the system is operating in the unoccupied
mode, ie at approximately 20% of normal full air flow rate.
Install bulkhead lights.
200 ACCESSORIES
Unless stated otherwise in the AHU or filter schedule(s), supply and fit an inclined tube manometer across each
filter.
Secure each manometer to a suitable backing frame. Ensure that the scale length of each manometer is
graduated to provide a working range of at least one third of the full scale dimension. Mark the "clean to dirty"
range clearly marked on the scale of each manometer.
Position each gauge to provide an easy visual check of the filter condition. Install flexible tubing from the suction
and discharge ports of each manometer connected to the upstream and downstream pressure tappings on the
filter bank.
Fit a label at each manometer location identifying the system which it serves and the maximum operating
pressure drop of the associated filter.

European Standard.
- BS 3928 - Method for sodium flame test for air filters (other than for air supply to I.C. engines and
compressors)
- BS 5726 - Microbiological safety cabinets. Information to be supplied by the purchaser to the vendor and to
the installer, and siting and use of cabinets. Recommendations and guidance
- BS EN 779 - Particulate air filters for general ventilation. Determination of the filtration performance

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 1822 - High efficiency air filters (HEPA and LUPA)

- BS EN 12469 - Biotechnology Performance criteria for microbiological safety cabinets BS EN ISO 14644 -
Cleanrooms and associated controlled environments
- DIN 1946 - Ventilation and air conditioning
- DEO Specification 037 - Air conditioning, air cooling and mechanical ventilation for buildings

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y43 HEATING/COOLING COILS
100 GENERAL
Ensure that all the components of every air heating or cooling coil, including its rows of tubing, it’s bends,
headers, fins, pan, baffle plate and casing and, are each factory assembled and tested by a manufacturer
specialising in this type of work.
Ensure that all coils having water or glycol for their primary medium, comply with BS 5141 and are performance
tested in accordance with BS EN 1216. Ensure that the threads of screwed pipe connections are tapered and in
accordance with BS EN 10226-1 and that, where pipe connections are flanged, they comply with BS EN 1092.
Ensure that the casing of every heating or cooling coil is made of galvanised sheet steel, not less than 1.2mm
thick, having galvanised steel flanges of size and drillings that match those of the ducting or plant chamber to
which it is connected.
Install every heating coil and every cooling coil fully in accordance with the written installation instructions of its
manufacturer.
Where coils are mounted in ducting, support them so that their weight is not transmitted to the adjoining ducting,
and ensure that they can be removed and refitted without disturbing such ducting.
For every heating or cooling coil ensure that an access panel or door is provided upstream of it and another
downstream of it, to enable it to be inspected and cleaned
110 AIR HEATING COILS

For every air heating coil, including those comprising more than one row, ensure that its overall resistance to air
flow does not exceed 60.0Pa, it’s face velocity does not exceed 4.0m/s and its resistance to primary water flow
does not exceed 10.0kPa.
Ensure that every air heating coil is tested, air under water, to one and a half times the working pressure or
2MPa, whichever is the greater.
120 AIR COOLING COILS

For every air cooling coil, including those comprising more than one row, ensure that its overall resistance to air
flow does not exceed 125.0Pa, it’s face velocity does not exceed 2.3m/s and its resistance to primary water flow
does not exceed 20.0kPa.
Ensure that every air cooling coil is tested, air under water, to one and a half times the working pressure or
2MPa, whichever is the greater.
At the bottom of casings of cooler batteries form a watertight drain pan under the fin block, coil bends and
headers, complete with centre drain connection.
Extend the drain to the side of the coil casing in galvanised steel pipe not smaller than 40mm nominal diameter
and terminating in a male thread to BS EN 10226-1. From every such drain termination install condensate drain
piping to discharge over the nearest suitable floor drain or other suitable discharge point.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Manufacture the drain pan from sheet stainless steel. Thermally insulate the whole assembly, including the drain
pipe, with 12mm closed cell, flexible, elastomeric, nitrile rubber based foam insulation or equivalent material, to
prevent condensation occurring under operating conditions. Where coils are stacked in sections provide a
separate drain pan for up to each 1.2m of section height.
200 PRODUCTS & MATERIALS
210 WATER/GLYCOL AIR HEATING COILS – GENERAL

Ensure that all copper coil tubing complies with BS EN 12451, that the secondary extended heating surface of
either aluminium or copper fins is bonded to them, and that provision is made for thermal expansion and
contraction of the tubes.
Arrange all flow and return pipe connections and headers to ensure an equal flow of water through each coil
tube. Position both the flow and return pipe connections on the same side of the coil casing. Make pipe
connections up to and including 50mm diameter and up to a pressure of 350kPa screwed or flanged. Where pipe
connections are 65mm diameter and larger, and for all sizes where pressure exceeds 350kPa, make them
flanged.
Provide a manually operated air vent and a drain connection on each coil.
230 IN-DUCT ELECTRIC HEATERS

Install duct mounted electric air heaters in the positions indicated on the drawings.
Ensure that the casing of every in-duct electric air heater is made of galvanised heavy gauge mild sheet steel,
having galvanised steel flanges of size and drillings that match those of the ducting to which it connects.
Use heating elements of the sheathed type complying with BS 7351, designed to operate at black heat under
conditions where high humidity or free moisture may be present. Make each element in grid form, built-up from a
helical coil of 80/20 nickel-chrome wire centrally embedded in refractory material and encased in a seamless
heat-resisting nickel-chromium-iron alloy tube. Assemble the elements in banks of suitable rating for the required
duty and mounted upon a single plate by screwed thimble flanges.
Connect each element, via heavily insulated heat-resisting cables, to substantial terminals within a terminal box,
and bolt the terminal box to the heater casing with a moisture-tight gasket. Arrange the terminal box
conveniently for on-site wiring to either a single-phase or a three-phase and neutral electricity supply, as
appropriate.
Ensure that all electric air heaters are controlled so that the power source is isolated in the event of inadequate
airflow. Incorporate in each in-duct electric air heater a manually reset high temperature safety cut-out affording
effective protection to all parts of the air heater, and with electrical contacts to enable remote signalling of its
operation. Arrange the thermal capacity of the heater such that the high temperature safety cut-out is not tripped
upon failure of the airflow. Provide contacts to enable remote signalling of operation of the high temperature
safety cut-out
240 WATER/GLYCOL AIR COOLING COILS –GENERAL

Ensure that all copper coil tubing complies with BS EN 12451, that the secondary extended cooling surface of
copper fins is bonded to them, and that provision is made for thermal expansion and contraction of the tubes.
Select the fin spacing to comply with the heat transfer requirements, but between 300 and 475 fins per metre.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Install all cooling coils in contra-flow pattern with the primary fluid entering at the leaving-air end, and leaving at
the entering-air end.
Arrange all flow and return pipe connections and headers to ensure an equal flow of water through each coil
tube. Position both the flow and return pipe connections on the same side of the coil casing. Make pipe
connections up to and including 50mm diameter and up to a pressure of 350kPa screwed or flanged. Where pipe
connections are 65mm diameter and larger, and for all sizes where pressure exceeds 350kPa, make them
flanged. Make the wall thickness of all pipe connections not less than that of the equivalent heavy thickness
series of BS EN 10255.
Where a coil is designated as having glycol as its primary fluid, ensure that it is suitable for a 30% glycol solution
unless stated otherwise in the schedule.
300 ACCESSORIES
310 ELIMINATOR PLATES

Make provision downstream of every cooling coil to prevent the ‘carry-over’ of condensate from the coil into the
airstream. Achieve this by incorporating a space downstream of each cooling coil, fitted with a drain pan and
drain pipe and ready to accommodate eliminators where required by the schedules or, in the event that the
Contract Administrator agrees that they should be fitted.

Wherever reference is made to a British Standard (BS) an equivalent European Standard, which is recognized by
European Standard.
- BS 5141 - Specification for air heating and cooling coils

- BS 7351 - Specification for metal-sheathed heating elements for industrial use
- BS EN 1092 - Flanges and their joints. - Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and accessories, PN
designated
- BS EN 1216 - Heat exchangers. Forced circulation air-cooling and air-heating coils. Test procedures for
establishing the performance
- BS EN 10226-1 - Pipe threads where pressure tight joints are made on the threads Part 1: Taper external
threads and parallel internal threads. Dimensions, tolerances and designation
- BS EN 10255 - Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading. Technical delivery conditions
- BS EN 12451 - Copper and copper alloys. Seamless, round tubes for heat exchangers

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y45 SILENCERS/ ACOUSTIC TREATMENT
100 GENERAL
111 SPECIALIST MANUFACTURERS

Employ the services of a specialist manufacturer to provide the acoustic materials detailed herein
112 NOISE LEVELS

Ensure that all noise and vibration levels specified for internal and external areas are not exceeded due to the
operation of the engineering services installation. Give particular consideration to the following, as applicable:
- plant noise transmission to the conditioned space via the distribution ductwork
- plant noise breakout from ductwork distribution systems
- plant airborne noise transmission through the plant room structures
- plant structure borne noise and vibration transmission
- plant noise transmission to exterior positions
- velocity generated noise within the ductwork distribution system
- noise from terminal fittings such as grilles, diffusers etc.
- noise and vibration transmission from fan coil units
- acoustic crosstalk between separate areas
- pipe-borne noise
- noise from boilers and flues
The noise and vibration control equipment is the minimum required to meet the specified noise and vibration
levels and has been selected to suit the equipment on which the designs have been based. Provide details of the
plant to be installed to the specialist manufacturer of acoustic products to ensure that the specified noise and
vibration levels are achieved.
Provide a fully documented set of the specialist manufacturer's calculations to the Contract Administrator for
comment four weeks prior to ordering plant and noise and vibration control equipment to demonstrate that the
selected plant and the selected noise and vibration control equipment enable all specified noise and vibration
criteria to be achieved. Provide, at no extra cost to the Contract, sufficient noise and vibration control equipment
to meet all specified noise and vibration criteria.
Demonstrate all specified noise and vibration levels are satisfied. Carry out acoustic commissioning tests with all
plant and machinery running normally and delivering the design conditions of ventilation, temperature and
humidity. In the case of contractual deficiency, and if requested by the Contract Administrator, return at any time
during the Contract to take additional readings at no additional cost to the contract in order to demonstrate the
satisfaction of all specified noise.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
113 INTERNAL NOISE RATINGS

Ensure noise levels produced within internal areas due to the operation of the engineering services installation
are less than or equal to the specified noise ratings in Tables 1 to 3 below
Where a range of noise ratings is specified satisfy the lower noise level, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the
Where a type of space is included in the building with no equivalent space included in the list of noise ratings,
bring this matter to the attention of the Contract Administrator by writing.
Table 1. Recommended room Noise Ratings in commercial buildings

AREA NOISE AREA NOISE
RATING RATING
Apartment-Luxury 25 Control Rooms (for critical speech 35
communications)
Apartment-Standard 30 Hotel Bedrooms-Luxury 25
Banqueting Suites 30 Hotel Bedrooms-Standard 30
Bars 35-40 Kitchens (excluding areas below extract 45-55
hoods)
Boardrooms 30-35 Laboratories (excluding areas close to 35-45
fume cupboards)
Canteens 40 Workshops 40-50
Car Parks 50-60 Laundries 45
Changing Rooms 40 Libraries 30
Circulation Areas 40 Lifts (passenger) 40
Cloakrooms 40 Loading Docks 55
Computer Rooms- 40 Lounges 35-40
manned
Computer Rooms- 50-60 Offices-Cellular 30-35
unmanned
Conference Rooms 35 Offices-Open Plan 35-45
(<8m)
Conference rooms 30 Plant Rooms 75
(>8m)
Court Rooms 25-35 Printing Rooms 45
Creches 35 Rest Areas 35
Dealing Rooms 40-45 Restaurants 35-40
Exhibition Halls 40-45 Shops 35-40
First Aid Rooms 35 Storage Areas 45
Reception Areas 35-40 Toilets 40-45

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Table 2. Recommended room Noise Ratings in leisure buildings

RATING RATING
Amusement Areas 40 Projectile Galleries 40
Billiard/Snooker Halls 35 Saunas/Solaria 35
Bowling Alleys 40 Sports Hall (20-30 if multi-use) 40
Function Rooms 35 Squash Courts 40
Ice Rinks 40 Swimming Pools 40-45
Indoor Bowls Green 35 Weight Training/Gyms 35
Table 3. Recommended room Noise Ratings in arts buildings

RATING RATING
Art Galleries 25-35 Projection Rooms 35
Cinemas 30 Rehearsal Halls-Drama 25
Concert Halls 20 Rehearsal Halls-Music 20
Conference Halls 25-30 Rehearsal Rooms 25-30
Dimmer Rooms 40 Scene Docks 40
Dressing Rooms 35 Sound Control Rooms 20-25
Foyers 35 Stage Door 35
Lighting Control 25 Theatres 20-25
Rooms
Multi-purpose Halls 20-30 Wardrobe 35
Ensure noise levels produced at the boundary of the site by the engineering services installation do not exceed
the environmental noise criteria specified by the Local Authority. If a boundary noise criterion has not been set by
the Local Authority at tender stage, the boundary noise criterion to be defined as follows, for design purposes
only;"the operation of the engineering services installation will not cause an increase of more than 1dBA in the
existing corrected background noise level at the boundary (as measured in accordance with BS 4142). A 6dB
safety margin shall be allowed to account for the cumulative effects of other noise sources associated with the
Development"

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
210 ATTENUATORS
211 RECTANGULAR ABSORPTIVE ACOUSTIC ATTENUATORS

Provide acoustic attenuators that are purpose built units constructed by the specialist manufacturer, so designed
and installed in the ductwork that they maintain all acoustic criteria shown in this specification, offer low
resistance to air flow, have adequate strength and cohesion to resist erosion by air flow, and do not produce
dust.
Provide the insertion losses expected from the attenuators for each of the 63Hz to 8000Hz octave frequency
bands inclusive under the design operating conditions. Provide air flow noise generated by the attenuators for
each of the 63Hz to 8000Hz octave frequency bands inclusive under the design operating conditions
Ensure attenuator acoustic performance data have been derived from tests carried out in accordance with BS EN
ISO 7235.
Provide the pressure losses expected from the installed attenuators at the design air volume flow rates in
accordance with BS EN ISO 7235.
Provide attenuator outer casings constructed to comply with the relevant clauses of DW/144, in accordance with
the design operating pressures and velocities of the ductwork systems in which they are to be installed. Provide
attenuator casings constructed from galvanised sheet steel with lockformed and mastic sealed joints of the
minimum thicknesses listed in the following Table 4. Provide attenuators fitted with appropriate flanges, as
detailed in the following Table 5. Provide attenuators fitted with intermediate stiffeners, where required, to
comply with the requirements of DW/144.
Table 4. Minimum permissible thickness of attenuator side panels

Dimension of Longest Side (Width or Minimum thickness of sides
Height)
Class 'B' Class 'C' Class 'D'
Up to 500mm 0.8mm 1.0mm 1.0mm
501mm - 750mm 1.0mm 1.0mm 1.0mm
751mm - 1000mm 1.0mm 1.0mm 1.2mm
1001mm - 1500mm 1.0mm 1.2mm 1.2mm
1501mm - 3000mm 1.2mm 1.2mm 1.6mm
3001mm and above 1.2mm 1.6mm 1.6mm
Table 5. Flange types to be used for attenuators (proprietary flanges to be specified to

match ductwork flanges)
Dimension of Longest Side (Width or Flanges Used
Height)
Class 'A' & 'B' Class 'C' & 'D'
Up to 500mm 20mm proprietary 30mm proprietary
501mm - 1000mm 30mm proprietary 40mm x 40mm RSA
1001mm - 1500mm 40mm proprietary 50mm x 50mm RSA
1501mm - 3000mm 50mm x 50mm RSA 50mm x 50mm RSA

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
3001mm and above 65mm x 50mm RSA 65mm x 50mm RSA
Provide aerodynamically shaped inlet sections of all baffle elements such that the specified pressure drops
according to BS EN ISO 7235 are not exceeded. Provide baffle elements that are rigidly held in place within the
attenuator casing, with half width baffle elements fixed to each side wall of the attenuator. Normally, provide
baffle elements which are oriented vertically, parallel to the attenuator outer casing. However, where attenuators
are located close to bends etc., ensure the baffle elements are correctly oriented relative to the air flow. Where
baffle elements are installed horizontally, provide baffles which are suitably stiffened to prevent flexing and
restriction of the airways under all conditions, including during the transit of the attenuators.
Provide baffle elements containing sound absorbent material which is inert, non-flammable, non-hygroscopic and
packed to a minimum density of 48kgm-3. Provide sound absorbent material faced with mineral fibre tissue, or
equivalent, retained in position by perforated galvanised steel face sheets or flattened expanded galvanised Z5
steel to ensure that no egress of acoustic infill medium into the air stream will occur even under adverse airflow
conditions. Use non-flammable adhesives and mastics. Ensure that all insulating materials and coverings are of
non-combustible material covered with a material that complies with flame spread requirements of BS 476, Part
7, Class 1. Ensure that all materials and coverings are to class 0 surface rating of Building Regulations.
Provide sound absorbent material installed so that exposed surfaces are bonded or covered to prevent erosion
with air stream velocities of up to 25 metres per second. Draw to the Contract Administrator's attention any
instance where the airway velocity in any installed attenuator is in excess of 20m/s.
If specified elsewhere, provide sound absorbent material which is hermetically sealed or faced, as required, with
a polyester wrapping to prevent erosion. Provide perforated galvanised sheet metal or flattened expanded
galvanised Z5 steel to protect the sealed fill.
Clearly mark the direction of air flow on the outer casing of each attenuator. Clearly mark each attenuator with a
unit label which indicates the attenuator reference and location.
Block ends of silencers prior to deliver to site to prevent damage. Remove any damaged or soiled attenuators
from the site and replace with factory new equipment at no additional cost to the contract. Site repairs are not
acceptable.
300 COMMISSIONING
310 GENERAL
This document sets out a clearly defined test procedure for acoustic commissioning tests to establish room Noise
Ratings due to the operation of the building environmental engineering systems.
320 ACOUSTIC TEST EQUIPMENT

Make all sound measurements with a precision sound measurement system conforming to the Type 1
requirements of BS EN 61672, or better.
Use sound measurement system complete with all the facilities required to enable the specified measurements to
be obtained including, as a minimum:
- The facility to measure using both "slow" and "fast" time weighting characteristics.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- The facility to measure both "Linear" and "A" weighted sound levels over the frequency range 20Hz to 20kHz.
The accuracy of the "A" weighting filter network must conform to the Type 1 requirements of BS EN 61672, or
better.
- The facility to measure octave band filtered sound. The frequency weighting characteristics of the octave filter
set employed must conform to the requirements of BS EN 61672.
Acoustically calibrate the sound measurement system in absolute sensitivity at a reference frequency of 1000Hz.
Calibrate the sound measurement system immediately prior to, and immediately following, each series of test
measurements. Record any variations in sensitivity of greater than 0.5dB.
Record the sound level in each octave frequency band from 63Hz to 8000Hz inclusive at each measurement
location. In addition, record the overall "A" weighted sound level at each measurement location.
Make all sound readings with the sound measurement system set to either the “Slow” time weighting, or set to
the “Fast” timing weighting and the "LAeq" (equivalent continuous) setting, if this facility is available.
In each area of the building tested, take sound readings at a minimum of 5 separate locations except where the
room has a floor area of less than 9m². Choose the 5 measurement locations such that:-
No measurement location is closer than 1.0m from any surface, including walls, floor, ceiling, desk or partition.
No 2 measurement locations are closer than 1.0m to each other.
In offices a minimum of 2 measurement locations are at seated head height (~1.2m above floor level), and a
minimum of 2 measurement locations are at standing head height (~1.8m above floor level). In other areas,
choose the measurement locations according to the expected normal position for occupants of the room.
No measurement location to be closer than 1.0m to any ventilation system diffuser or grille.
Where the room has a floor area of between 4m² and 9m² take two measurements, and where the floor area is
less than 4m² take one measurement. Take these measurements either at seated head height (1.2m above floor
level) or standing head height (1.8m above floor level) depending on the expected normal position for occupants
of the room.
Average the octave band sound readings in each area over all measurement locations in that area. Plot the
average sound level in each octave frequency band on a set of standard octave band Noise Rating (NR) curves.
Plot the background noise levels and the system's + background noise levels on the same NR curve.
Where the system's + background noise level minus the background noise level lies between 3dB and 9dB in any
octave frequency band, account for the effects of the background noise in the evaluation of the system's noise.
Use the corrected system's noise level to check for contractual deficiencies in that area.
Where the system's + background noise level minus the background noise level is less than 3dB, then an
accurate evaluation of the system's noise is not possible. In such cases in the event of contractual deficiency,
defer the sound readings until the background noise decreases to at least 3dB below the system's + background
noise (eg during the evening or night time periods).
The state of interior finish of the test area during the noise measurements will affect the measured noise levels.
Where internal areas are not fitted out as per the occupied building, apply a correction factor (C) to the measured
internal noise levels according to the equation:
C = 10 log10 (Tf/Tu )
Tf is the measured or calculated reverberation time for the fully fitted out internal area under consideration.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Tu is the measured or calculated reverberation time for the internal area under consideration at the time of the
acoustic tests.
Apply the correction factor, C, to each of the frequency bands measured. Do not apply the correction factor in
cases where the measured noise level is dominated by direct rather than reverberant noise.

European Standard.
- BS 476-7 - Fire tests on building materials and structures Part 7: - Method of test to determine the
classification of the surface spread of flame of products
- BS 4142 - Method for rating industrial noise affecting mixed residential and industrial areas.
- BS EN 20354 - Measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation room. BS EN 60651 - Specification for
sound level meters.
- BS EN 61260 - Specification for octave band and one-third octave band pass filters. BS EN 61672 - Electro
acoustics. Sound level meters
- BS EN ISO 140-3, BS 2750-3 Acoustics measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building
materials. Part 3: Laboratory measurement of airborne sound insulation of building elements.
- BS EN ISO 354 - Acoustics. Measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation room
- BS EN ISO 7235 - Acoustics. Laboratory measurement procedures for ducted silencers and air- terminal units.
Insertion loss, flow noise and total pressure loss
- BS EN ISO 11691 - Acoustics. Measurement of insertion loss of ducted silencers without flow. Laboratory
survey method
- HVCA DW/144 - Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork. - Low, medium and high pressure velocity air systems

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y46 GRILLES / DIFFUSERS / LOUVERS
110 GRILLES
Ensure grilles and registers for supply air have two sets of adjustable blades, one set horizontal and one set
vertical. Unless otherwise indicated, provide an opposed blade multi-leaf or rhomboidal type damper as an air
flow rate controller for supply air registers.
Provide grilles and registers for extract air with a single set of adjustable blades either horizontal or vertical, or a
lattice or egg crate front as indicated. Ensure the air flow rate controller for extract air registers has a damper of
the opposed blade multi-leaf type.
Ensure the blades of all grilles and registers are adjustable from the front and shall have a friction device to retain
set positions. Ensure the air flow rate controller of all registers is adjustable from the front.
120 DIFFUSERS
Unless otherwise indicated, provide each diffuser with an air flow rate controller and a means of altering the
discharge air flow pattern. Ensure all controllers are adjustable from the front of the diffuser. Provide cone type
diffusers, where indicated, with finish as indicated.
Provide linear diffusers of the fixed blade type, or include means of independently adjusting the direction of the
air jets, as indicated. Use the method of air volume flow rate control as indicated. Where linear diffusers are
mounted in a continuous line, ensure provision for ensuring alignment between consecutive diffusers and each
diffuser is provided with means to ensure uniform air flow distribution along the diffuser. Ensure plenum boxes
and duct connections in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.
Ensure circular diffusers, with adjustable air flow pattern, have the cone retained by a screwed spindle fitted with
upper and lower stop pins or other approved method.
130 LOUVRES
Protect all air intake and exhaust points with louvres designed to prevent ingress of rain.
Paint ductwork immediately behind a vertical intake or exhaust louvre on all internal surfaces with epoxy resin or
bitumastic paint for a length from the louvre equal to the louvre height, or to the nearest equipment item,
whichever is the lesser.
Fabricate frames and blades from galvanised mild steel sections and sheet, or from aluminium alloy of adequate
stiffness to prevent vibration and/or damage. Fully protect all louvres against corrosion and provide in the finish
indicated.
Assemble galvanised mild steel louvres with non-corrodible bolts.
Fit vermin/bird screens to all external louvres and ensure they are removable for cleaning.
Fix louvres by bolting through the casing flange or side casing to structural members. Achieve an effective
weather and acoustic seal using packing and filling materials as necessary.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
140 DAMPERS
Ensure damper adjustment mechanisms are concealed from casual view, finished matt black, and are operable by
hexagonal wrench or screwdriver.
For any particular type of grille, register or diffuser provide two sets of tools for setting and adjusting.
200 WORKMANSHIP
Ensure the testing and rating of air terminal devices is in accordance with BS EN 1751, BS EN 12238, BS EN
12239, BS EN 12589 and BS EN ISO 5135.
Base the sizes of all terminal devices on the dimensions and/or duty indicated and provide the air volume flow
rate, air diffusion velocity and any other requirements as specified. Do not exceed the specified sound power
levels.
Use steel, aluminium or other material as indicated for the materials of construction. Protect all items against
corrosion and provide in the condition indicated. Ensure visible internal fixings are a matt black finish, unless
otherwise specified.
Provide a resilient sealing strip around the full perimeter of all air terminal devices located on walls or ceilings.
Where indicated, incorporate special devices to prevent pattern staining.
Fix each air terminal device shall be firmly in position, level and aligned with adjacent terminals.
Do not use press-in spring clip fixings other than for sill or floor mounted air terminals. Use removable grille or
diffuser cores where indicated.

European Standard.
- BS 4533-102.19 - Luminaires Part 102: Particular requirements

- Section 102.19: Specification for air-handling luminaires (safety requirements)
- BS EN 1751 - Ventilation for buildings. - Air terminal devices. - Aerodynamic testing of dampers and valves
- BS EN 12238 - Ventilation for buildings. Air terminal devices. Aerodynamic testing and rating for mixed flow
applications
- BS EN 12239 - Ventilation for buildings. Air terminal devices. Aerodynamic testing and rating for displacement
flow applications
- BS EN 12589 - Ventilation for buildings. Air terminal units. Aerodynamic testing and rating of constant and
variable rate terminal units
- BS EN 13264 - Ventilation for buildings. Floor mounted air terminal devices. Tests for structural classification

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN ISO 5135 - Acoustics. Determination of sound power levels of noise from air-terminal units, dampers
and valves by measurement in a reverberation room

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y47 FAN COIL UNITS
100 PRODUCT/MATERIALS
110 ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE

Select fan coil units in accordance with the technical schedules to ensure that the total noise level in the
conditioned space does not exceed the specified acoustic criteria.
Select fan coil units and their associated attenuators where required to ensure that the specified noise criteria in
the conditioned space is not exceeded.
Demonstrate that the fan coil unit supplier has comprehensive test data available for the equipment which
covers:
- sound power level for the fan discharge, at the required air flow rate, and a range of external static pressures
that cover the range of the selected equipment
- additional acoustic data is available to show their effect when heater or cooler batteries or other non standard
components are used
- all data is presented in terms of octave band sound power level data, for the octave range 63Hz to 8kHz
- standards to which his tests have been performed, along with the tolerances to be expected on repeat tests.
Details of the test room dimensions, and test sample layout to be provided
- dynamic test data available, to show that the selected fan coil unit achieves the required level, under the
conditions of airflow where maximum in duct sound power levels are specified
- adequate sound insulation to the attenuator/heater/cooler battery casing and its connection to the terminal
unit to ensure that breakout through them does not cause the breakout level from the terminal unit only to be
exceeded
Adopt the terminal units limiting noise criteria on the following basis:
Design Basis
- Room Noise Level - Refer to Y45 for room noise levels

- Reverberation Time - 0.9 seconds maximum
Maximum Discharge Sound Power Level in dB re 10-12W:
FREQUENCY 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8KHZ
SWL 63 53 45 38 35 33 32 30DB
Note: The above is a discharge sound power level, ie not in duct.
Maximum Sound Power Level in dB re 10-12W radiated from the terminal unit shall not exceed:
FREQUENCY 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8KHZ
SWL 66 58 53 48 46 43 40 35DB

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The above levels are maxima, under all operating conditions, due to all noise sources associated with the fan coil
units.
The above figures are indicative and for guidance. Make all necessary calculations and allowances in your
selections to ensure the units meet the specified acoustic room noise criteria.
120 CONSTRUCTION
Provide fan coil units constructed as specified below:
121 CASING
Form casings from minimum 1.2mm thick heavy gauge sheet steel stiffened to prevent distortion, drumming and
vibration and to ensure a quiet and reliable operation of the fans and the damper/actuator mechanism where
fitted. Provide all units with a suitably secured large access panel. Ensure the filter can be maintained without the
need to remove the access panel.
Line casings with dual function CFC and HCFC free thermal and acoustic insulation with a density of 100kg/m³.
Lining material to be in compliance with Building Regulations Class ‘0’ and BS 476, Class ‘1’, and suitable for use
within the temperature range of 0°C to 100°C.
Fit and seal all access panels with neoprene gaskets.
Provide the casing with suitable fixing locations to allow easily adjustable support positions. Install units utilising
individual support rods for each corner. Provide neoprene or rubber washer inserts between support rods and fan
coil to reduce vibration transmission.
Provide melamine label securely fixed with screws in a prominent as-fixed location with reference number
attached.
Treat all internal or external casing support and reinforcement members to prevent corrosion. Provide all bolts,
nuts, screws, etc. in stainless steel or bright cadmium coated steel.
All joints in the casings to be sealed airtight.
Provide fan coil units of the chassis type and provided with flanged ductwork connections for supply and return
air ductwork connections generally as shown on the drawings. Select fan coil units to achieve the specified
thermal and acoustic performance when running at low speed.
Where mounted within ceiling voids, ensure all accessories and interconnecting cabling comply with BS 476, Class
‘0’, as defined by the Building Regulations, in that they meet the requirements of BS 476-6 (I not greater than 12
and I not greater than 6) and have a Class ‘1’ rating in accordance with BS 476-7. Ensure the whole assembly is
approved by the District Surveyor/Building Control Officer.
Deliver the units to site in suitable protective packaging that will prevent damage, dents, etc. during both the
delivery and installation period.
122 COOLING COILS

Construct air coils with seamless copper tubes and aluminium fins. Arrange all tubes horizontally and where there
are more than one row, stiffen. Provide tubes with brazed copper return bends. Design coil block circuitry to
ensure correct contra flow and prevention of air locking.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Encase batteries in a substantial mild steel frame casing “built up” from rolled steel angles or channels of welded
or bolted construction. After construction galvanise these frames and all components of the cooling coils, where
not otherwise protected against corrosion by a method approved by the Contract Administrator. Provide fins with
smooth drawn collars of length equal to fin spacing and mechanically bonded to tubes. Provide fins of the plate
type, corrugated to ensure maximum air contact.
Provide all cooling coil headers with an air valve and drain valve.
Typical battery connections are shown on the drawings. Clearly label all flow and return water connections.
Select cooling coils of sufficient area to prevent suspended moisture from being carried over from the cooling
coils into the air stream when the fan is operating at high speed.
Ensure all cooling and heating coils fit across the air stream such that there is no bypass of air around the coils.
Provide a neoprene gasket around the perimeter of each coil.
Factory test all coils to 20 bar. Provide coils which are suitable for an operating pressure of 12 bar static head.
Select and configure all heating coils to suit their scheduled output/flow rates and scheduled on/off water
temperatures. Size heating coil based on a maximum leaving air temperature of 28ºC. Size cooling coil based on
a minimum off coil temperature of 13ºC.
123 CONDENSATE DRIP TRAY

Extend the drip tray below the complete pipe/valve assembly. Provide drip trays manufactured from 1.2mm thick
hot dipped galvanised steel welded at each corner. Degrease the drip tray prior to anti-condensation insulation
and vapour seal being applied to all surfaces of the drip tray.
Ensure the condensate drip tray is not less than 15mm deep and has a fall to an integral 15mm condensate
connection.
Design the condensate drip tray to allow easy removal for inspection and cleaning.
124 FILTER
Provide units complete with either a nylon non-woven filter bonderised with a synthetic resin or a fine woven
mesh of galvanised steel welded to a rigid galvanised steel frame. Unless stated otherwise arrange for the filter to
be withdrawn through the underside of the unit on ceiling mounted fan coil units by means of a hinged quick
release mechanism.
125 FANS
Provide tangential or DIDW forward curved centrifugal fans having aluminium impellers. Statically and
dynamically balance the fans in accordance with BS ISO 1940-1 to ensure quite running and mounted onto the
extended shaft of the motors or the external rotor type of an external rotor type motor. Fit the complete fan and
motor assembly with neoprene rubber mounts.
Ensure that aerodynamic noise generation at the fan impellers maintains the specified background noise levels in
all areas served by fan coil units when operating at low speed maintaining the design volumes.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
126 MOTORS
Provide motors of the variable speed type complete with maintenance free sealed for life, sleeve bearing type or
with sealed for life, maintenance free precision roller bearings. motors to be suitable for an electric supply of
230V, 1Ph, 50hz and conform to relevant British Standards and have a power factor greater than 0.9. Provide
permanent split capacitor motors with built in thermal overload protection complying with BS 5000-11 and BS EN
60034-3. Achieve speed control by means of a multi-tapped transformer with not less than six tapped positions.
Replace any fan/motor assembly that displays evidence of rattle or vibration.
Insulate motors in accordance with BS EN 60085 (Class 130). Provide electric(s) which contain protection against
burn-out, stall, thermal overlaid, etc.
127 DISCHARGE DUCT AND PLENUM

Provide fan coil units complete with a matched factory insulated and vapour sealed galvanised mild steel
discharge plenum of sufficient size to allow spigots to be taken from the side or front of the plenum.
Where necessary ensure duct work is acoustically lined using a suitable material.
130 VALVE AND PIPEWORK ASSEMBLY

Provide each unit with a factory assembled valve and pipework package arranged as follow:
- key operated air vents

- key operated drain cocks
- motorised control valves
- binder test points
Provide coil connections via union adapters to facilitate removal of assembly.
Contain the whole valve assembly over an extended drip tray.
Provide large capacity fan coil units (8.0kW sensible cooling and above) generally as the smaller unit but with the
following exceptions:
- casings - lifting lugs and units shall be capable of moving on rollers or a fork lift truck
- motors - totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). Use pulley drives
- silencing - provided where necessary to achieve the specified NR levels
131 CONTROLS
Provide fan coil units with a complete factory assembled and tested pre-wired complete control system inclusive
of all necessary isolators, fuses, wiring terminals, fully addressable, communicable DDC controller, actuator,
motorised valves, relays and return air temperature sensor complete with fixing bracket.
Contain the control equipment/transformer in a factory mounted purpose control housing fixed to the unit. Ensure
all cabling to and from the unit is glanded and terminated within the housing. Submit the housing and mounting
details for comment by the Contractor Administrator.
Provide each unit with a 230V, 50Hz ac supply to terminals within an easily accessible terminal box integral with
the unit.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Provide temperature probe that acts on the fan.
200 TESTING
210 MANUFACTURER’S MOCK-UP TEST

Provide a mock-up at the manufacturers works to show that the fan coil units are capable of achieving the
specified acoustic criteria.
Demonstrate one unit of each proposed size to an agreed number of operating volumes within its chosen range.
Submit details of the proposed unit, and their duties to the Contract Administrator for comment.
Provide a mock up room which has the same nominal floor area and height as the area to be served in the
building, by the largest terminal unit.
Provide the mock up room with a false ceiling generally of the same type as proposed for the project, along with
the typical weaknesses to simulate return air paths. Ensure the false ceiling depth is within 10% of that on the
project. Provide carpet tiles for the floor.
Provide the fan coil units complete with cooler battery, low velocity ductwork, plenum box and selected diffusers,
to simulate a typical office layout.
Prior to recording any noise levels, establish the background in the test room, at least 10dB below NR35. Operate
the units individually at the agreed air volumes, and verify by separate measurement.
Record a minimum of four noise measurements in the test room, at least one metre from a wall or other
measurement positions, and 1.2m above the floor. Ensure no individual measurement exceeds the specified room
noise criteria by more than 2dB, and that the logarithmic average of all the measurements does not exceed the
specification.
Record sound levels using a sound level meter and octave band filter set complying with IEC 651, Type 1.
Demonstrate that this has been calibrated before use to a traceable source within the last two years.
Provide a report listing all test details, and measurements, to show compliance with the specification

European Standard.
- BS 476 - Fire tests on building materials and structures

o Part 6: Method for fire propagation for products
o Part 7: Method of test to determine the classification of the surface spread of flame of products
- BS 5000-11 - Specification for rotary electrical machines of particular types or for particular applications
o Part 11: Small-power electric motors and generators

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 60034-3 - Rotary electrical machines
o Part 3: Specific requirements for cylindrical rotor synchronous machines
- BS EN 60085 - Electrical insulation. Thermal classification
- BS ISO 1940-1 - Mechanical vibration. Balance quality requirements for rotors in a constant (rigid) state
o Part 1: Specification and ventilation of balance tolerances
- Ensure each fan coil unit complies with the requirements of the Statutory Authorities and the Fire Officer.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y50 PAINTING AND THERMAL INSULATION
110 GENERAL
The objectives of this specification are, for the building engineering services systems referred to herein:
- To prevent burn injury to personnel caused by contact with the hot or very cold surfaces of such systems.
- To reduce to acceptable levels for such systems:
o the deterioration of their external metal surfaces by corrosion
o their indirect release of atmospheric pollutants caused by the combustion of fossil fuels,
o by heat gain from, or heat loss to, their surroundings
o their wastage of energy by heat gain from, or heat loss to, their surroundings
o the risk of condensation on their external surfaces
- To improve the appearance of such systems by painting or covering them where they are exposed to view by
building occupants or the general public. (ie not where concealed from view by being in ceiling voids, services
ducts – including walkway ducts, trenches, etc.)
- To protect insulation from mechanical damage in all situations where it is vulnerable such as plantrooms.
- To provide protection from adverse operating conditions, the elements and from attack by wildlife for
exposed/external services
- To comply with statutory maximum heat loss/gain requirements where these apply
- To only use insulation materials whose global warming potential is less than 5.
Do not use this specification for the thermal insulation of pipework or ductwork directly buried in the ground or in
floor screeds.
As far as energy wastage and indirect atmospheric pollution from combustion of fossil fuels is concerned, the
thicknesses of pipeline thermal insulation given in this specification are generally based upon compliance with
maximum heat loss/gain defined by Part L of The Building Regulations, the Non-domestic Building Services
Compliance Guide and thicknesses defined in BS 5422 and the TIMSA Guidance for Achieving Compliance with
the Building Regulations.
The Domestic Building Services Compliance Guide requires lower heat losses per metre from equivalent sized
pipes but these are calculated at lower fluid temperatures. The net result is that the non-domestic insulation
thicknesses are in fact more onerous.
Where insulated support blocks used are a less effective insulator than the main insulation sections re- calculate
the required thicknesses to ensure that the overall installation heat loss/gain meets the required W/m maxima.
Where segmental insulation is used ensure that all section faces mate closely together when installed.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
200 SCOPE OF THE WORKS
210 GENERAL
This specification is based on the understanding that any/all necessary asbestos removal/treatment work will
have been arranged and both adequately and competently carried out by others with appropriate independent
sign off by an HSE licenced analyst in advance of any work related to this specification commencing.
As required by the specific project arrange for the removal from the site and proper disposal, with appropriate
chain of custody documentation, of any existing non-asbestos containing thermal insulation materials, together
with their associated coverings and cladding, that are specified or noted within the contract documents for
removal.
Be responsible for the preparation and, where specified, the painting of the surfaces to be insulated, the
preparation and painting of brackets and supports of surfaces to be insulated, and the supply, delivery, handling,
application, sealing, protection and finishing of all materials necessary to complete the thermal insulation, vapour
sealing and cladding works, and for ensuring that for all building engineering services systems where their
specification refers to this section Y50, unacceptable energy wastage, condensatio, ingress of moisture,
penetration by oil and flammable liquids, and thermal danger to personnel, is prevented.
Be responsible for the preparation and painting of ferrous parts of pipework and ductwork systems where
uninsulated
Ensure that the whole of the thermal insulation works is executed by a specialist Insulation Installer that is a
member of the Thermal Insulation Contractors Association (TICA).
Ensure that all preparation and painting works are executed by suitably skilled and properly supervised personnel.
Apply thermal insulation, and where specified vapour sealing and cladding, to the pipework and ductwork
systems described herein including all supports and hangers and ancillaries (e.g. joints, fittings, flanged joints,
unions, valves, commissioning sets, dirt pockets, separators, strainers, and orifice plates, expansion bellows and
compensators, pipework anti-vibration flexible couplings, filters, dampers, duct access doors/ panels), and
associated plant and equipment (e.g. cisterns, overflows, warning pipes, tanks, buffer vessels, calorifiers,
cylinders, heat exchangers, relief stream pipework from safety devices, the impeller casing of electrically driven
pumps [except those in HWS secondary and Condenser water systems], boiler feed tanks, boilers, flues, the
internally mounted exhaust pipes and silencers of CHP units and electricity generators, air handling units, supply
and recirculation fan casings, duct mounted heating and cooling coil casings, supply duct attenuators), where
they are not themselves manufactured with integral insulation.
Unless otherwise particularly specified do not thermally insulate nor clad: - disposal (including rainwater, drains,
soil, waste and vent pipes), compressed air, instrument air, fire-fighting (including hose reel, dry riser, wet riser,
sprinkler, suppressant gas and foam) systems; drain pipework from cooling equipment condensate trays nor
associated traps;; discharge pipes from manual and automatic air vents; drain cocks and drain valves; the
actuators of safety valves; pressure and temperature relief valves; expansion vessels; electric motors and
associated drives; valve and damper actuators and linkages; instruments; gauges and their associated siphons
and isolating cocks; non-recirculation air extract ducts; exhaust ducts; ductwork anti-vibration flexible
connections, sound attenuators in recirculation ducts and sound attenuators in exhaust ducts.
Co-ordinate with the pipework and ductwork installers to ensure that the thermal insulation work and vapour
sealing work are fully effective when complete, and that sections of insulation and cladding are arranged to be
readily removable and able to be refitted where access for maintenance is required.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Co-ordinate with the electrical installer to ensure that all metal cladding is satisfactorily electrically bonded.
Be responsible for the supply, delivery, offloading and temporary storage of all materials required for the
preparation, painting, insulation, vapour sealing and cladding works, including paints, insulation, fixings,
insulation hangers, self-adhesive tapes, sealants, cleaning fluids, solvents, adhesives and paints, and ensure that
sufficient quantities are supplied to allow a reasonable margin for cutting, waste and making good damage and
loss.
Be responsible for the supply, delivery, offloading, storage and maintenance of all tools and equipment required
for the preparation, painting, insulation, vapour sealing and cladding works, including the erection, moving,
manhandling and dismantling of all access equipment needed for the safe implementation of the works.
Be responsible for the proper removal from site of all waste materials, tools and equipment associated with the
preparation, painting, insulation, vapour sealing and cladding works.
Formally bring to the attention of the Employer the fact that the thicknesses of insulation specified herein are
equal to or greater than those that appear in the Energy technology Criteria List qualifying thickness tables given
in BS 5422 and hence qualify for ‘enhanced capital allowances’ against taxation under the UK Government’s
package of climate change measures. For refrigeration applications, confirm in writing that the requirements of
BS 5422 2009 Annexe F are met.
The installer, and all sub-contractors and suppliers, is required to operate an Environmental Management System
(EMS) in accordance with the latest edition of ISO 14001. Certify that all insulation products comply with the
“EMS requirements for insulation products” detailed in BREEAM 2011, credit Mat 04, Table 12-2.
Submit to the Contract Administrator a Technical Submission detailing the following:
- Technical and declared performance of all proposed insulation materials and thicknesses
- Technical and declared performance of all support blocks proposed including demonstration of the closed cell
content where the material is phenolic foam
- Sealants and tapes proposed
- Proposed hot and cold valve/flange insulation
- Proposals for sealing brass items and fittings on plastic coated pipe installations on cold fluid installations.
- Demonstration of compliance with required system maximum W/m heat gains/losses
- Where ABS and elastomeric nitrile materials are used in combination a warranty covering their combined use.
- Performance details for proposed finishes and protective cladding
220 INSULATION ADJACENT TO FIRE BARRIERS

For a distance of 1.0m. on both the upstream and downstream sides of fire dampers in insulated ductwork and of
fire stopped pipe sleeves adjoining insulated pipework, supply and install mineral wool insulation with a BL-s1,
Class 0 rated surface finish, irrespective of what is specified elsewhere, for fire control purposes.
This clause does not apply where building engineering services are fire-clad, as specified elsewhere.
Do not use proprietary insulation fire sleeves unless they have been successfully tested in accordance with BS
476-20, agreed with the Contract Administrator and the Employer, and approved by Building Control.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
300 CLEANING AND PAINTING
310 SCOPE OF THE WORK

Clean all items, and paint items specified herein, that have been installed within the scope of the Mechanical
Installer’s contract or sub-contract, together with those parts of existing building engineering services systems to
which connections are being made, and limited to the immediate vicinity of such connections.
Except where otherwise specified, paint only those items that are ferrous (including: - cast iron, cast steel,
malleable iron, mild steel and wrought iron) but not stainless steel, nor those items treated and coated at works
with a primer paint or a finish intended as the final protective finish or final decorative finish (including anodised,
cadmium plated, chromium plated, electroplated, electro-painted, electrostatic powder coated, galvanised,
painted, plastic coated, polyester powder coated, powder coated, stove enamelled, zinc plated).
Paint items listed as follows:
- the following items to which thermal insulation is applied: - (a) pipework (including joints, fittings, flanged
joints, unions, air bottles and dirt pockets, and including vent and pressure relief stream pipework) ,
condenser water and chilled water systems, as described herein; (b) plant and equipment (including tanks,
buffer vessels, calorifiers, and exhaust pipes and silencers of electricity generators) where they are not
themselves manufactured with integral final finish; (c) ductwork, but limited to touching-up damage to zinc
coating
- the following uninsulated fluid carrying items: - (a) pipework (including joints, fittings, flanged joints and
unions) for disposal (including rainwater, drains, soil, waste and vent pipes), industrial compressed air, natural
gas, fuel oil, fire-fighting (including hose reel, dry riser, wet riser, sprinkler, suppressant gas and foam); (b)
plant and equipment ( expansion vessels, convectors valves, cooling towers, diffusers, grilles, louvres and
cowls (where they are not themselves manufactured with primer or final finish); (c) externally mounted
ductwork and touching-up damage to zinc coating of internally mounted ductwork
- all items not directly a fluid carrying part of building engineering services systems (including: - pipe clips; drop
rods; threaded rods; hangers; clamps; brackets; secondary steelwork; services support frames in walkway
ducts, trenches and service shafts; cistern, tank and plant support frames and feet; trench and duct covers;
services support gantries; secondary steelwork; access or maintenance ladders, stairs and platforms; services
‘walkover’ walkways; safety handrails and balustrades
Paint ferrous items that have a works applied black varnish finish including steel and iron piping and fittings.
Do not paint bearings, pipe expansion rollers, other moving parts, test points, and all other similarly inappropriate
items.
Do not paint damper operating and/or locking mechanisms, valve operating levers, hand wheels and spindles.
Do not paint pipework, ductwork and other items made of aluminium, brass, bronze, copper, or gunmetal, except
where installed outside of buildings.
Do not paint plastic.
Do not paint stainless steel threaded drop or support rods.
Do not paint the components of proprietary pipe and duct hanging systems that have a factory applied protective
finish.
Do not use aluminium based paints in the vicinity of flammable liquids or gases, nor of pipes conveying them.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where items that are factory finished are in such close proximity to items that require painting (eg the bolts, nuts
and washers of a flanged joint or the screw fixing of a bracket to a wall) that it is impractical to avoid painting
them, paint them.
Ensure that all paints are suitable for the operating temperatures of the installations for which they are used, and
that they are applied in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions.
On completion of all painting, grease all rollers, sliding pipe supports and other moving parts with graphite grease
unless contrary to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
After painting in accordance, installations that are uninsulated and exposed within buildings, co-operate with the
contractor responsible for decoratively painting them, in all appropriate respects including:
- temporarily removing and refitting duct mounted diffusers and grilles, once
- identifying pipework installations that need to be decoratively painted particular colours (eg hose reel fire
main (red))
Clauses Y50.320, Y50.330 and Y50.340 of this specification apply to normal environments within buildings and to
normal external rural and urban environments as defined in BS EN ISO 12944. Where internal environments are
of high humidity or bear corrosive chemicals, and where external environments are industrial or near the sea, use
a cleaning regime and paint system that achieves medium durability in accordance with BS EN ISO 12944.
320 CLEANING
Thoroughly clean all items where required by clause Y50.310, by removing rust, white rust (from zinc coatings),
loose mill scale, loose material, defective coatings, grit, weld spatter, welding and brazing residues, salts, plaster,
concrete, cement, dust, dirt and all other debris from their surfaces using hand methods (including scraping,
chipping, brushing and emery cloth, as appropriate) without damaging their surfaces and leaving factory applied
protective coatings intact. On ferrous items use a steel wire brush.
Additionally, from the external surfaces of all copper pipework and fittings that are to be uninsulated and
exposed, remove all oil, grease, soldering fluxes and brazing residues by degreasing using suitable solvents,
without damage to the installation.
Additionally degrease the external surfaces of all items that are installed outside of buildings and required by
clause Y50.310 to be painted, using suitable solvents, without damage to the installation.
330 PAINTING INTERNAL INSTALLATIONS

Immediately after cleaning, paint all pipework system installations within buildings, where required by clause
Y50.310, with one coat of zinc phosphate anti-corrosion paint.
Immediately after cleaning, touch-up damage to the zinc coating on the inside and on the outside of all steel
ductwork installations within buildings, with zinc rich paint, to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.
Immediately after cleaning, treat, with an approved proprietary cold paint-bond fluid, all galvanised items and all
galvanised steel ductwork installations within buildings, where required by clause Y50.310, that will remain
uninsulated, be exposed and be decoratively painted.
Where items with a factory applied primer or finished coating suffer damage, bring the matter promptly to the
attention of the Contract Administrator and either touch-up the damaged coating to the satisfaction of the
Contract Administrator, or implement such other course of action that the Contract Administrator decides is
appropriate.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Additionally, paint with one coat of black heat resisting paint prior, where insulated, to the installation of thermal
insulation, and where located in:
- walkway ducts, trenches, service shafts and plant rooms, and where not of stainless steel nor treated and
coated at works with a finish intended as the final protective finish or final decorative finish, all of the
following:
- pipe clips; drop rods; threaded rods; hangers; clamps; brackets; building engineering services support
frames; cistern, tank and plant support frames and feet
340 PAINTING EXTERNAL INSTALLATIONS

Immediately after cleaning and degreasing, paint all items installed outside of buildings, and where required by
clause Y50.310, with the appropriate paint system listed as follows:
- Plain steel/iron: Primer 1: zinc phosphate 75 DFT

Primer 2: micaceous iron oxide 75 DFT
Undercoat to suit finished coat 35 DFT
Finish gloss coat 35 DFT
- Galvanised steel: Wash etch primer
Primer micaceous iron oxide
Undercoat and finish coats as for plain
steel
Finish gloss coat
- Non-ferrous metals: Wash chromate etch primer -
Primer micaceous iron oxide 50DFT
Undercoat and finish coats as for steel
Apply all paint coats in appropriate weather conditions (i.e. dry, dew-free, moderate temperature, not windy and
without strong sunlight) to the minimum dry film thicknesses (DFT) in microns shown.
Where the faces of items will be concealed once fixed (e.g. mounting plates that will bear on concrete bases)
arrange that such faces are cleaned, degreased and primed before final fixing.
Ensure that all paints are compatible with any adjacent paint systems applied by others, and that final gloss coat
colours are as required by the Contract Administrator.
Do not apply undercoat and finish coat to thermally insulated items.
400 DETERIORATION
Should any plant, equipment, duct or pipe supplied and installed by the Installer, become rusty or lose its works-
applied paint (or primer) due to the duration of the contract and/ or water/ humidity on site or any other reason,
clean off and prime the whole of the work throughout the affected section(s) with one coat of the appropriate
anti-corrosion paint as specified above, prior to final painting or insulating and as soon as the deterioration is
noticed.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Remove from the site and replace at no cost to the contract all plant or equipment supplied and installed by the
Installer, that has not been kept in good rust-free condition, and cannot be refurbished to the Contract
Administrator’s satisfaction, whether it is to be insulated or not.
500 THERMAL INSULATION – MATERIALS

Ensure that all insulation materials are odourless, non-hygroscopic, non-toxic, do not decompose or otherwise
suffer deterioration within the applicable operating range of temperature and vibration, do not support fungal life
and do not attract vermin or rodent attack.
Ensure that all materials comply with the standards listed in clause 1600 below for manufacture and testing of
their properties.
Ensure that only first class quality new materials are used. Use materials that have been produced by a
manufacturer operating a certified Quality Assurance system.
Whether the completed (composite) insulation works are concealed or exposed to view, ensure that all finished
thermal insulation work, including cladding, vapour barriers, adhesives and paints, have a BL-s1, d0 reaction to
fire performance as tested to BS EN 13501-1 or until July 2013 a Class 0 surface spread of flame fire rating as
defined in the Building Regulations, Approved Document B, Appendix A.
Ensure that sectional pipe insulation and support blocks consist of pre-formed lengths, manufactured from the
required base material and) in compliance with the applicable normalised BS EN standard. Ensure that the
sections have a bore size corresponding to the outside diameter of the pipe to which they are fitted. Where
available supply sections as one-piece, hinged snap-on tubes, complete with factory bonded, BL- s1,d0 (Class 0)
surface laminate of glass reinforced aluminium foil, except for nitrile rubber which will not have a surface
laminate of glass reinforced aluminium foil but will be of BL-s3,d0/Class 0 surface rated material. For fibrous
insulation sections and support blocks use products having a self-adhesive overlap whose width does not exceed
the thickness of the insulation.
When selecting insulation thickness from the following tables, use the greater thickness when results fall between
scheduled temperature differences or thermal conductivity figures.
Irrespective of insulation material proposed, for cold services installed using thin wall carbon steel tube use only
plastic coated tube with fittings suitably wrapped in accordance with the piping system manufacturer instructions.
For the avoidance of doubt do not use phenolic foam insulation on thin wall carbon steel tube for cold services.
For cold fluid installations, where plastic coated pipework has been installed, prior to installing the insulation,
prime and wrap all valves and fittings, in accordance with the system manufacturer’s recommendations, to
provide a complete protective installation inside the insulation.
Submit samples of all types of materials intended to be used including paints, insulation, proprietary load bearing
insulation rings/inserts/strips for use at pipework and ductwork supports, valve and flange insulating mattresses,
vapour seals, coverings, finishing materials, sealants, adhesives, insulation hangers and other fixing materials, to
the Contract Administrator for approval, prior to installation.
Deliver the sections to the site suitably packed in protective cartons that provide protection from the weather and
from physical damage, and that show clearly the diameter(s) of pipework for which they are suitable.
House all materials in a dry place until required for use.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that all materials are completely free of chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), hydrochlorofluoro-carbons (HCFCs)
and asbestos of any type.
On metal pipes use only thermal insulation free from nitrites and whose ammonia content does not exceed 0.2 %
by mass. Do not exceed 0.05% by mass of water soluble chloride ions in insulating material used for stainless
steel.
When metal pipes are to be insulated ensure that the proposed insulation product does not contain appreciable
amounts of sodium silicate so creating a corrosion risk as detailed in BS5970 clause 8.3.3.
Do not use isocyanurate, polystyrene or polyurethane thermal insulation materials.
For service temperatures below 100°C only use insulation material having a declared thermal conductivity, at
mean operating temperature, of less than 0.050W/mK.
When selecting phenolic foam insulation thicknesses use the aged conductivity value not the initial conductivity.
700 THERMAL INSULATION – WORKMANSHIP
710 GENERAL
Only first class workmanship will be accepted. Carry out all installation in accordance with BS 5970 and the
selected insulation manufacturer(s) installation instructions. Replace, free of charge, all work condemned by the
Contract Administrator as having been carried out in an untidy or inappropriate fashion.
Do not apply any insulation to systems of pipework, ductwork and associated plant and equipment before they
have been inspected, nor until their surfaces are clean and dry, nor before the required ‘cold draw’ has been
applied to thermal expansion bellows, nor before the specified static pressure testing or leakage testing of them
has been successfully completed to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.
Thoroughly clean all surfaces of all pipework and ductwork and associated brackets and supports, until free of all
of corrosive substances (such as excess soldering flux), building materials, debris and moisture, in accordance
with clause Y50.300, shortly before any paint or insulation is applied.
Ensure that materials that can cause galvanic corrosion are not installed in contact.
Ensure that all insulation is applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Do not use mineral fibre insulation on cold water, refrigerant and chilled water services, nor in any ceiling voids
above, floor ducts within, nor hollow partitions adjacent to, such areas.
Ensure that all adhesive, vapour seal and joint cover materials are non-flammable, suitable for the range of
ambient temperature and humidity encountered and compatible with the insulation and pipework materials used.
Ensure that all insulation, however fixed, fits tightly in contact with the surface to which it is applied and that all
abutting sections, segments and slabs are close butted with their edges being mitred, chamfered or otherwise
shaped to suit.
Ensure that thermal insulation completely covers the surfaces to be insulated with no unsealed gaps and no ‘cold
bridging’ except where unavoidable.
For vessel and duct insulation, ensure that complete overall contact is maintained by fixing the insulation onto the
vessel or duct surface by means of a suitable adhesive compound, that has no corrosive or detrimental effect on
the vessel or duct, thoroughly applied to both the vessel or duct surface and the insulation.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where insulated pipework or ductwork passes through the roof or external walls of a building, or passes from an
external underground services duct into a building, extend the insulation and protection of the external services
for a minimum of 100mm beyond the internal face of the building’s walls or roof. Arrange for a sleeve of
appropriate dimensions to be installed for every such pipe or duct for the full thickness of the wall or roof, and
seal it to the insulation’s protection by a suitable weatherproof flexible sealant.
Ensure that all insulation work is of even thickness and homogenous, has no irregularities either in the insulation
material or in the material covering and is left securely fixed, smooth, clean, neat, tidy and properly finished.
Ensure that all pipes and ducts are insulated individually, and that no adjacent pipes or adjacent ducts are
combined together in a common insulation covering.
Cut away the insulation and neatly finish and vapour seal its edges around instrument points, tappings, pressure
sensors, thermostats, sensing devices, detectors, name plates, plant instructions, access doors, damper spindles
and quadrants, etc. so that these components are clearly visible and accessible.
At all tees and at all bends in pipes up to 100mm external diameter, form single mitred joints in the insulation. At
all bends in pipes of external diameter greater than 100mm external diameter, form segmented joints with a
minimum of three mitres in the insulation or use preformed profiled insulated bends.
At all air flow and air pressure test points in insulated ductwork form a removable area of sealed and cladded
insulation.
At all pipework anti-vibration couplings insulate with flexible insulation material and, where the system requires a
vapour barrier, ensure that it is continuous.
Where insulation is manufactured with an aluminium foil facing ensure that at all joints, cut edges, exposed ends
and abutting pieces of insulation the facing is sealed with self-adhesive foil tape to prevent the release or
migration of fibres and particles of insulation material.
For all insulated pipework and insulated ductwork install the insulation and vapour barrier continuous through and
inside of all pipework and ductwork supports to ensure that the effectiveness of thermal insulation is not
undermined by the brackets. At every such support achieve this by installing a proprietary ‘load bearing insulation
ring’/insert to BS 5970, Figures . 12, and 14 for pipes and figures 15 and 17 , for ducts, , of adequate
compressive strength to ensure that it does not deform in service, and of the same thickness as the adjoining
insulation, to enable the insulation finish to be smoothly continuous across the support. Install every such
insulation ring/ insert/strip so that it is centred on the point of support, extends 50mm beyond the support both
upstream and downstream, is made of high density insulating material suitable for the temperature condition of
the pipework/ductwork system concerned, and is fitted with a metal load distribution plate where recommended
by the ring/insert/strip manufacturer.
Ensure that all vapour barriers are continuous. At all exposed edges of insulation (eg where pipe insulation meets
valve insulation; where insulated parts of the system are adjacent to uninsulated parts; where the insulation
adjoins a removable component;) seal the insulating material to the surface being insulated with a suitable
vapour sealing mastic to prevent any ingress of moisture or water vapour. Additionally (except for closed cell,
flexible, elastomeric nitrile rubber based foam material), fix to the duct or pipe an ‘end-cap’ for the insulation,
made of sheet cladding material folded in ‘angle’ or ‘Z bar’ form (‘crocodile-cut’ to fit curved surfaces), to provide
a means for protecting the exposed edge of the insulation and to provide a surface for the fixing of self-adhesive
glass reinforced aluminium foil tape, to effectively seal the vapour barrier of the insulation by ‘dressing’ it to the
pipe or duct surface. Where the vapour barrier is penetrated (e.g. by instrument tappings) seal the vapour barrier

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
to the penetrating component with a suitable vapour sealing mastic to ensure that an unbroken vapour seal finish
is achieved.
Form all valve, flange or other removable boxes without sharp edges that could damage the vapour barrier.
Wherever possible arrange joints in cladding on the face of the installation not normally in view.
Where closed cell, flexible, elastomeric, nitrile rubber based, foam insulation is fitted inside buildings and exposed
to sunlight, or fitted external to buildings use UV and impact resistant insulation with integral polymeric covering.
Clear away waste materials, spillages, etc. regularly during the period of the insulation work and finally on the
completion of this work. At final completion of this work, or of sections of this work, clean up thermal insulation
fibres and particles by vacuum cleaner.
720 SAMPLE TESTING OF INSULATION MATERIAL

Remove a 1.0m length sample of every type of insulation used on this contract, from positions selected by the
Contract Administrator, and forward them to an industrial research laboratory or testing laboratory to determine if
they comply with the specification.
The actual tests required to be carried out will be decided by the Contract Administrator dependent upon the
particular circumstances and will be any combination of: specified composition, thickness, vapour barrier
permeance or means of application.
Should any of the samples fail to meet the specified requirements, take two further samples of the same type of
insulation from locations agreed with the Contract Administrator, and similarly forward them for testing.
800 DAMAGE OR DISTURBANCE OF EXISTING INSULATION

Where damage is caused to existing insulation and finishes on any building engineering service, make good the
damage to restore the integrity of the existing installation.
900 INSULATION OF PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONS GENERALLY

Insulate the pipework installations (including piping, ancillaries, plant and equipment) in accordance with the
following Clauses (which are arranged on a ‘services system’ basis), using insulation of thermal conductivities in
the ranges given in the following tables and with thicknesses consequently derived from the following tables.
Insulate heating and domestic hot water services, installed in internal areas/ceiling voids etc where heat gain
from pipes may cause overheating, using thicknesses from the ‘Ext’ columns in the relevant tables.
910 COLD WATER INSTALLATION
911 PREPARATION AND PAINTING BEFORE INSULATION IS APPLIED

Clean off all loose material before pipework insulation is applied.
Install load bearing insulation rings/blocks at support positions as specified in clause 710.
912 INSULATION MATERIALS

For external pipework use only materials with a declared thermal conductivity of 0.04W/mK or less.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
To prevent moisture ingress and the condensation of moisture from the surrounding air, insulate all cold water
service pipework installations, except where exposed to view (eg those under or adjacent to sanitary fittings),
with pre-formed insulation sections, having an enhanced vapour barrier as Clause Y50.620. For elastomeric nitrile
insulation where more than one layer of insulation may be required to achieve the specified thickness build up
the subsequent layers where possible using pre-formed sections otherwise use sheet material.
Use as insulation material Closed cell, flexible, elastomeric, nitrile rubber based foam with a nominal density of 65
kg/m³.
913 INSULATION THICKNESSES

Minimum insulation thicknesses for internal pipework are based on Table 8 of BS 5422:2009, and for unheated
spaces thicknesses are based on a combination of BS 5422:2001 Table 14 and Table 29, of BS 5422: 2009 with
some interpolation:
Nominal Max Minimum insulation thickness for fluid temperature of 10°C, ambient at 25 C and
pipe size heat surface emissivity of 0.05
(mm) gain Declared thermal conductivity (W/mK) at insulation mean temperature
W/m 0.025 0.03 0.035 0.04 0.045 0.05
Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext
15* 2.72 14 30 16 42 18 58 20 78 23 - 25 -
20 3.05 15 30 17 42 20 58 22 78 24 - 27
25 3.41 16 21 18 26 21 38 24 49 26 64 29
32 3.86 17 22 20 28 22 39 25 51 28 64 31
40 4.11 17 23 20 30 23 41 26 52 29 65 32
50 4.78 18 25 22 31 25 42 28 53 31 65 34
65 5.51 20 27 23 33 27 44 30 54 33 66 37
80 6.17 20 29 24 35 28 46 31 55 35 66 38
100 7.28 22 31 26 37 30 48 34 56 37 66 41
150 9.89 24 33 29 39 33 50 38 57 42 66 46
For ‘internal’ insulation the above thicknesses are based on a nominal water temperature of 10°C. For lower
water temperatures, increase the thicknesses in accordance with Table 8 of BS 5422: 2009. W/mK.
920 HOT WATER SERVICE INSTALLATIONS

Install load bearing insulation rings/blocks at support positions as specified in clause 710 above.

To control heat loss and prevent moisture ingress, insulate all hot water service pipework installations (including
cold feed and open vent pipes) except where exposed to view in rooms (eg those under or adjacent to sanitary
fittings, dead legs and room heating coils) with pre-formed insulation sections, having a vapour barrier as Clause
Y50.610.
For external pipework use only materials with a declared thermal conductivity of 0.04W/mK or less.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
For elastomeric nitrile and fibrous insulation where more than one layer of insulation may be required to achieve
the specified thickness build up the subsequent layers where possible using pre-formed sections otherwise use
sheet material.
kg/m³.
923 INSULATION THICKNESS

Use the required minimum thicknesses of insulation from the ‘Int’ column in the following table, which, for heated
spaces of buildings is based on Table 17 of BS 5422:2009. For unheated spaces of buildings use insulation
minimum thicknesses taken from column Ext’ which is based on a combination of Table 14, of BS 5422: 2001 and
Table 29 from BS 5422:2009 for specified conditions 1 with some interpolation:
Nominal Max Minimum insulation thickness for fluid temperature of 60°C, ambient at 15 C and surface
pipe size heat emissivity of 0.05
(mm) loss Declared thermal conductivity (W/mK) at insulation mean temperature
W/m 0.025 0.03 0.035 0.04 0.045 0.05

Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext
15* 7.13 14 30 19 42 25 58 33 78 43 - 55 -
20 7.83 15 30 21 42 27 58 35 78 45 - 57
25 8.62 17 21 22 28 29 38 37 49 47 64 58
32 9.72 18 22 23 30 30 39 38 51 47 64 57
40 10.21 19 23 25 31 32 41 40 52 49 65 60
50 11.57 20 25 26 33 33 42 41 53 50 65 60
65 13.09 22 28 28 35 35 44 43 55 52 66 61
80 14.58 22 31 28 37 35 46 43 56 51 66 60
100 17.2 23 33 29 40 36 48 43 57 51 67 60
1000 INSULATION OF PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONS GENERALLY
1010 REFRIGERANT INSTALLATIONS

Where condensation can occur provide load bearing insulation rings at support positions.
Install load bearing insulation rings/blocks at support positions as specified in clause 710 above.

Do not use polyethylene foam. To prevent moisture ingress and the condensation of moisture from the
surrounding air, control heat gain and loss (eg in cooling and heating VRV systems), protect personnel, and
separate copper piping from galvanized steel support tray, insulate refrigerant pipework installations with pre-
formed insulation tubes or sections having an enhanced vapour barrier as clause 620 above. Use tube rather than
split insulation wherever possible.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
For elastomeric nitrile insulation where more than one layer of insulation may be required to achieve the specified
thickness build up the subsequent layers where possible using pre-formed sections otherwise use sheet material.
Use insulation material of the following type:
kg/m³.
1030 CHILLED WATER INSTALLATIONS

Operating temperature between 6ºC and 12ºC

Clean off all loose material and, for black steel pipework, coat thoroughly with zinc phosphate anti-corrosion paint
before pipework insulation is applied. Install load bearing insulation rings/blocks at support positions as specified
in Clause 710 above.

To control heat gain, prevent moisture ingress and prevent the condensation of moisture from the surrounding
air, insulate all chilled water pipework installations (including cold feed and open vent pipes) with pre-formed
insulation sections, having an enhanced vapour barrier as Clause 620 above.
For elastomeric nitrile insulation where more than one layer of insulation may be required to achieve the specified
thickness build up the subsequent layers where possible using pre-formed sections otherwise use sheet material.
kg/m³.
1033 INSULATION THICKNESSES

For control of both surface condensation and heat gain use the required minimum thicknesses of insulation from
the following table, which is based on Table 8 of BS 5422:2009 for internal services, and interpolated from Table
5 of BS 5422: 2009 for external services (using the part of the table for a fluid temperature of 0°C) where the
ambient temperature will be hotter :
Minimum insulation thickness for fluid temperature of 5°C, ambient at 25°C and
surface emissivity of 0.05
Max Declared thermal conductivity (W/mK) at mean insulation temperature
Nominal Heat
pipe size Gain
(mm) 0.025 0.03 0.035 0.04 0.045
Minimum thickness of insulation (mm)

W/m Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext
15 3.27 19 24 22 28 25 32 28 36 31 40
20 3.58 20 26 24 30 27 35 30 39 34 43
25 4.01 21 27 25 32 29 37 32 41 36 46

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Minimum insulation thickness for fluid temperature of 5°C, ambient at 25°C and
surface emissivity of 0.05
Max Declared thermal conductivity (W/mK) at mean insulation temperature
Nominal Heat
pipe size Gain
(mm) 0.025 0.03 0.035 0.04 0.045
Minimum thickness of insulation (mm)

W/m Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext Int Ext
32 4.53 23 29 27 34 31 40 35 44 39 49
40 4.82 24 31 28 36 32 42 36 47 40 52
50 5.48 26 33 30 38 34 44 39 49 43 55
65 6.3 27 35 32 41 37 47 42 53 46 59
80 6.9 29 37 34 43 39 50 44 57 48 63
100 8.31 31 39 36 46 42 53 47 60 52 67
125 9.49 32 42 38 49 44 56 50 64 55 71
150 10.97 34 44 40 51 46 59 52 67 58 75
200 13.57 37 47 43 55 50 64 56 72 63 81
250 14.5 39 50 46 59 53 68 60 77 67 86
300 15.5 41 56 48 66 55 77 63 87 70 98
1060 COLD WATER SERVICE STORAGE CISTERNS AND FEED & EXPANSION CISTERNS
Do not insulate the faces nor the external flanges of cisterns/tanks that incorporate an insulated ‘sandwich’
construction.
To prevent moisture ingress and the condensation of moisture from the surrounding air, insulate all external
surfaces of all internally located cold water service bulk storage cisterns/ tanks and feed and expansion cisterns
(including both ‘one-piece’ and sectional types) with insulation having an enhanced vapour barrier as Clause 620
above, using Closed cell, flexible, elastomeric, nitrile rubber based foam with a nominal density of 65 kg/m³.
For externally mounted cisterns use the thickness from “Ext” “other surfaces” in the table for cold water services
and for internally mounted cisterns which are not pre-insulated use thicknesses from “Int”.
Apply the insulation to the top, bottom (except where support positions are at centres of 500mm or less) and all
sides of the tank. Insulate inspection covers individually.
Attach the insulation to the cistern/tank surfaces with sufficient suitable adhesive to provide a secure fixing. Use
metal or nylon ‘insulation hangers’ on the insulation material providing their ‘clips’ are pulled in tight, their
‘spindles’ cut off close.
For externally flanged sectional cisterns/ tanks, fix the insulation material to the surface of the cistern/tank panels
leaving the flanged joints exposed and uninsulated.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
For internally flanged sectional cisterns/tanks, fix the insulation material to the surface of the cistern/tank panels
covering the panel joints.
For any large internally installed sectional cistern/ tank where it is necessary to walk or crawl on its top for access
to instruments, vent connections, inspection manholes, and suchlike, use insulation materials which are able to
withstand such periodic access without damage and provide further fixed protection outside the insulation in the
form of appropriate crawl way/walkway access board(s).
Insulate overflows and warning pipes as for cold water services.
1070 PUMPS AND DRIP TRAYS

Ensure that every baseplate-mounted and pedestal-mounted type cold water and chilled water pump or pump
set, is mounted on a sheet galvanised steel drip tray, and that every such drip tray has been fitted with a plastic
drain pipe routed to discharge over the nearest suitable floor drain.
To prevent condensation and control heat gain, coat the impeller casing only, of every cold water or chilled water
pump with 50mm thickness thermal insulation putty, overwrapped with a suitable tape to form a vapour barrier.
To provide personnel protection and control heat loss, insulate the impeller casing only, of every pump. Use the
thickness required by ‘Nominal pipe size’ in the particular table above for the respective pipework service,
according to the nominal size of the pump discharge.
Do not insulate condenser water pumps.
Where any pump is insulated with applied insulation rather than a removable jacket/muff fit a removable
embossed aluminium sheet purpose-made box.
1080 VALVES, PIPE JOINTS AND OTHER EQUIPMENT OF PIPEWORK SYSTEMS

Do not insulate nor clad the actuator (including the handwheel, hand lever, spring of pressure relief valves,
electric motor, pneumatic actuator, diaphragm housing, lock shield) of valves.
Where purpose-made valve insulation boxes are in wet areas or external locations as later in this specification,
seal them with suitable flexible sealant to produce a completely watertight installation.
Where such purpose-made boxes are in external installations for which hot-dip zinc-aluminium coated steel sheet
cladding is used, make them of the same material as the cladding.
1100 THERMAL INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSTALLATIONS

Clean off all loose material and touch-up with zinc phosphate anti-corrosion paint all parts of the external
surfaces of sheet galvanised steel ductwork where the galvanising is damaged, before thermal insulation is
applied.
Where externally mounted horizontal rectangular ductwork is to be fitted with zinc-aluminium coated sheet steel
cladding, fix, before its insulation is applied, the required ‘Z’ section to its underside, in accordance with clause
below.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
1120 DUCTWORK INSULATION GENERALLY

To control heat gain, control heat loss, prevent moisture ingress and prevent the condensation of moisture from
the surrounding air, insulate all rectangular, circular and flat-oval supply ductwork (including fresh air intakes), all
recirculation ductwork (including extract ductwork that forms part of a recirculation system), and all heat
recovery ductwork, with insulation material having a vapour barrier either as clause 610 above or, where closed
cell, flexible, elastomeric nitrile rubber based foam material is used, as clause 620 above.
Do not insulate non-recirculation extract ducts nor exhaust ducts except where required to provide fire
protection/resistance.
On horizontal rectangular ducts arrange the insulation of the top and bottom surfaces of the duct to overlap that
of the sides. On vertical rectangular ducts arrange the insulation of two opposite surfaces to overlap that of the
other two.
Secure the insulation to the ducts with sufficient suitable insulation bonding adhesive, fully in accordance with the
insulation and adhesive manufacturers’ written installation instructions.
On every rectangular insulated duct where any duct width, height or side is greater than 300mm, in addition to
adhesive, use proprietary glued on or self-adhesive nylon ‘insulation hangers’ on its underside and on its vertical
sides, so that no ‘insulation hanger’ is more than 300mm from another, and no insulation edge or corner is more
than 150mm from an ‘insulation hanger’. Secure the insulation to the hangers with proprietary 50mm diameter
plastic clips and cut off the ‘pin’ of every hanger close to the clip fully in accordance with the hanger
manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Vapour seal the hanger clip by covering with a crossed double
layer of self-adhesive glass reinforced aluminium, B-s1,d0,/class ‘0’ tape, except where nitrile rubber insulation
material is used in which case cover the clip with a glued on layer of nitrile rubber foam to maintain the vapour
barrier. Where the cut ends of the clips may penetrate the insulation vapour barrier install additional anti-
penetration protection over the clip ends prior to over-taping.
On every circular insulated duct up to 315mm diameter, in addition to adhesive, secure the insulation by
aluminium bands of 12mm minimum width, at 600mm intervals. On every circular insulated duct over 315mm
diameter, in addition to adhesive, secure the insulation by aluminium bands of 12mm minimum width, at 450mm
intervals.
Seal all cut edges of insulation at access doors, dampers, control sensors and the like, using self-adhesive glass
reinforced aluminium, class ‘0’ tape, or, where nitrile rubber insulation material is used, with a suitable waterproof
bonding adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction.
1130 INSULATION MATERIALS FOR RECTANGULAR DUCTS

Insulate rectangular ductwork using Closed cell, flexible elastomeric, nitrile rubber based foam sheet with a
nominal density of 65 kg/m³ and a declared conductivity at 10°C 0.035 W/mK.
1150 INSULATION THICKNESSES FOR DUCTWORK

Insulation thickness for duct will be 30mm.
1160 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

Ensure that all access doors and access panels in insulated ductwork and equipment, are of the proprietary
sheet galvanised steel, double skin, internally insulated type.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
1170 FIRE RESISTING DUCTWORK

Where required/specified install fire resisting ductwork system(s) complying with the requirements of Building
Regulations part B and the ASFP Blue Book latest edition.
Install fire resisting ductwork systems strictly in accordance with the Blue Book and chosen manufacturer’s
instructions.
Where pins are used to support insulation as part of the fire resisting duct system use only welded pins not self-
drill type.
Refer to standard specification section Y30.
1200 MEASURES TO ACCOMMODATE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION AND VIBRATION

Insulate all pipework expansion loops as for the pipe service.
Provide all pipework thermal expansion bellows and compensators with removable insulation as specified for
valves. Where the adjoining pipework is clad, encase every such insulated bellows and compensator with a box as
specified for valves. Ensure that every such box incorporates the means for expansion and contraction to be
taken up without hindrance to the action of the bellows or compensator.
When applying insulation to pipework thermal expansion bellows of corrugated tube construction, fit a curved
sheet metal cover to support the insulation material and prevent its fibres from dropping into the convolutions of
the bellows.
Where allowance has to be made for the vibration movement of equipment connected to insulated pipework (eg
at pump connections) finish the edge of the insulation on the adjoining rigid pipework in a neat and approved
manner and enclose the anti-vibration pipe coupling in flexible insulation material. Where the pipework system
requires a vapour barrier, seal the foil facing of the flexible insulation to that of the adjoining insulation using self-
adhesive glass reinforced aluminium foil tape of 75mm minimum width, rated at B- s1,d0/Class 0 surface spread
of flame, to maintain the continuity of the vapour barrier. Fit over the insulated anti-vibration pipe coupling and
its joints, a removable insulated box that permits ready access for the inspection, removal and reinstallation of
the anti-vibration pipe coupling without disturbing the adjoining rigid pipework insulation. Where appropriate
make the box of sufficient size to enclose adjacent components, eg valves.
Do not insulate anti-vibration pipe couplings on condenser water pipework.
1300 TEST POINTS

At every ‘test measurement’ hole in insulated ducting ensure that the hole is fitted with a grommet before
applying the insulation.
At every such location arrange a piece of the insulation (and cladding where applicable) to be readily removable
and re-fittable to facilitate the use of measuring instruments. Where such holes are arranged in a row (e.g. for air
flow measurement), arrange a single piece of insulation (and cladding where applicable) to cover the entire row
of holes.
Fix to the duct, for the perimeter of the duct insulation surrounding the removable piece, a ‘frame’ to provide a
means for protecting the exposed edge of the insulation and to provide a surface for (except for nitrile rubber
insulation material) fixing self-adhesive glass reinforced aluminium foil tape, to effectively seal the aluminium foil

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
facing of the duct insulation by ‘dressing’ it to the duct surface. Make the frame of sheet metal cladding material
folded in ‘angle’ or ‘Z bar’ form (‘crocodile-cut’ to fit curved surfaces).
Make a removable ‘access panel’ of sheet metal cladding material, secured to the adjoining ‘frame’ with PK
screws. Fix insulation with adhesive to the inner face of the removable ‘access panel’ and, where the insulation
has an aluminium foil facing, seal all cut edges of it with self-adhesive glass reinforced aluminium foil tape.
Where the test point is in a wet area seal the ‘access panel’ to the adjoining cladding with suitable flexible sealant
to produce a completely watertight installation.
1400 PROTECTION OF THERMAL INSULATION

Fit protection against physical damage to pipework, ductwork and plant and equipment insulation and any
associated vapour barrier, in accordance with the following clauses, in the following locations:
- plant areas, including

- external areas and installations (e.g. rooftops, compounds and exposed distribution) places where the
insulation is near equipment that requires routine attendance for its operation and/ or maintenance
- areas where the insulation is vulnerable to mechanical damage from moving vehicles, items being transported
or items being manhandled, including: - car parks, commercial and institutional kitchens, laundries, loading
bays, materials stores, test laboratories, warehouses and workshops.
- wet areas
- places where the insulation is vulnerable to damage by personnel movement including where it is unavoidably
installed below normal head clearance height, is liable to be climbed over, etc. For the purpose of this clause
‘plant areas’ means ‘any area or room or part thereof containing any of the following’:
o heat transfer equipment
o fans, air handling units
o pumps, boosters, pressurisation equipment
o cisterns, tanks, cylinders
- For the purpose of this specification ‘wet areas’ are:
o rooms in which the insulation is vulnerable to spillages of water
o places where the insulation is occasionally vulnerable to rainwater if temporarily uncovered
- Examples of such ‘wet areas’ are:
o kitchens, including covered services trenches in kitchen floors
o sluice rooms
o communal shower rooms
o car parks, unless fully enclosed, e.g. underground or in basements
o workshops where washing down processes take place
o fully covered external underground trenches (but not those covered by open steel- grid flooring, nor
underground walkway service ducts that are constructed to be dry)
For the purposes of this cladding and protection specification ‘external’ locations are those outside the building
envelope and include
- underground service trenches covered by open steel-grid flooring

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- plant areas and services at ground level

- services mounted on high level gantries
- services mounted externally on the walls and under soffits of buildings
- rooftop mounted installations
Cladding system used is with Aliminium 0.7 – 0.9 mm.
Ensure that accessories (e.g. temperature sensors, trace heating cable terminations, manometer tubing, etc.) are
completely installed before the protection is added, and are not damaged by the protection.
Arrange all horizontal cladding joints so that the higher piece overlaps the lower piece and stagger longitudinal
joints on adjoining sheets, to assist in shedding water and preventing moisture ingress.
Use cladding material fabricated and installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Ensure
that the completed cladding system in external and wet areas provides a completely weather-proof installation
and in internal areas a complete protective cover.
Ensure that the installed cladding system does not damage the insulation nor compromise its vapour barrier.
Ensure that all laminated composite multi-layer aluminium polyester cladding products comply with class B
surface spread of flame to BS EN 13501 part 1 (previous applicable standard was BS 476 class 0)
Do not use factory made composite insulation/cladding products on ductwork installations or where pipework
insulation is required to have a vapour barrier.
Only install laminated composite multi-layer aluminium polyester cladding products when ambient conditions and
surfaces are dry.
Ensure that laminated composite polyester aluminium cladding products are installed strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations and that minimum 150mm wide sealing tape is used ensuring 75mm
overlapping seals in all cases.
Where polyester aluminium laminated composite cladding products are installed hand over one full roll of sealing
tape to the Contract Administrator for the client to use for repairs to the cladding system.
1420 CLADDING SYSTEMS

Use embossed aluminium cladding,
Roll or press all aluminium cladding sheets to the required diameters. Provide a slip joint, of 500mm overlap, at
every 3600mm.
Secure the aluminium cladding at both ends of every sheet and at 300mm centres maximum, using aluminium
bands arranged to mask circumferential joints, and having reusable fasteners. Pop rivets may be used as an
alternative, except on cold water service and chilled water service to ensure, as far as practically possible, that
the vapour barrier is continuous and undamaged.
Cut and segment as necessary to fit bends and junctions. ‘Ball-swage’ all circumferential joints at bends.
1430 PROTECTION OF INSULATION GENERAL

Protect insulation on pipework and ductwork, and plant and equipment where it has not been fitted with
protective cladding at the manufacturer’s works, in the locations and using a protection system as detailed in
later in this specification and the subsequent cladding system clauses.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
For plant and equipment not fitted with insulation at the manufacturer’s works, insulate it using insulation
materials described in the appropriate tables of this specification, for the service concerned and to thicknesses
noted for ‘other surfaces’ in the appropriate table.
Secure the insulation to the plant and equipment with adhesive and by encompassing it with aluminium bands of
12mm minimum width, at 300mm intervals, or other suitable fixing arrangement, all of which will be unaffected
either by chemical reaction with the plant surface and the surrounding environment, or by the heat generated by
the plant.
Apply the insulation cut in segments and suitably shaped to fit domed and other non-flat surfaces. Seal all joints
(except for nitrile rubber insulation material) with self-adhesive glass reinforced aluminium foil tape of 75mm
minimum width. Seal joints in elastomeric nitrile insulation using adhesive applied strictly in accordance with the
insulation manufacturer’s instructions.
Unless specified in the particular sections of this specification, do not protect from physical damage, pipe or duct
insulation installed greater than 3000mm above finished floor level within buildings.
For internal locations where the cladding is penetrated (eg by damper handles, instrument probes) form a piece
of cladding material cut to fit closely around the penetration and fit to effectively and neatly cover around the
penetration. Secure such aluminium covers with PK screws and any multi-layer laminated aluminium polyester
composite material covers with adhesive.
For all penetrations of the cladding in external and wet locations fit a purpose made cover plate or collar of the
same material as the cladding (eg at pipe support drop rods, damper spindles, instrument mountings and
wherever a pipe, conduit or similar connection passes through the cladding), Secure each cover with self- sealing
stainless steel pop rivets dipped in mastic prior to fitting for the alu-zinc steel cladding and using adhesive for the
other cladding systems. Seal each cover with suitable flexible sealant to produce a completely weatherproof
installation.
Where access is required (eg to fire dampers) form an opening in the cladding to suit the opening in the
insulation, and neatly finish the cladding with a collar of the same material and thickness as the cladding, leaving
no edges of insulation exposed. Wherever a pipe, conduit or similar connection passes through the cladding in
areas which are neither wet nor external fit a purpose made cover plate or collar of the same material as the
cladding, secured with PK screws for aluminium and adhesive for other cladding products.
Ensure that plant and equipment manufacturer’s labels are readily observable and covered neither by insulation
nor by cladding.
Where access is required (eg to bursting discs) form an opening in the cladding to suit the opening in the
insulation, and neatly finish the cladding with a collar of the same material and thickness as the cladding, leaving
no edges of insulation exposed. In wet and external areas secure the collar with adhesive and seal its edges with
suitable flexible sealant, and where necessary glass fibre reinforced aluminium tape, to produce a completely
watertight installation.
Where components need to be removed for routine maintenance (eg at the flanged joints of heater battery
chests and manholes), completely encase each of them with a removable insulated box of the same material as
the cladding where alu-zinc sheet has been used otherwise using 0.9mm embossed aluminium. Arrange such
boxes to overlap the adjoining cladding and seal the junctions For wet and external areas seal all joints of the box
with suitable flexible sealant to produce a completely watertight installation.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
In wet areas fit protection against physical damage and to render watertight the pipework and ductwork
insulation and plant and equipment inclusive of this specification.
Where possible ensure that installations vulnerable to wetting and in external locations are arranged without
penetrations of the insulation by valve spindles, damper spindles, instrument mountings, brackets, etc. Where
such penetrations are unavoidable, minimise their vulnerability to water ingress by arranging them to be
downward facing, or in vertical surfaces.
Where possible arrange that all external ductwork is circular in cross section. Where horizontal ductwork is
rectangular or flat-oval type, arrange where possible, that the ductwork is fitted with a slight gradient to assist in
shedding rain. Where zinc-aluminium coated steel sheet is used for cladding external services, ensure that all
cladding of external pipework, ductwork and plant is of the same material throughout the project.

European Standard
- The Building Regulations, Approved Documents and associated second tier documentation including both the
Domestic and Non-Domestic Building Services Compliance Guide as applicable
- The Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations (COSHH)
- BS 476 - Fire tests on building materials and structures
- BS 476-4 - Part 4: Non-combustibility test for materials
- BS 476-6 - Part 6: Method of test for fire propagation for products
- BS 476-7 - Part 7: Method of test to determine the classification of the surface spread of flame of products
- BS 476-20 - Part 20: Method for determination of the fire resistance of elements of construction (general
principles). Note that parts of BS 476 are likely to be overtaken by the harmonised standard BS EN 13501 by
July 2013. As yet (Feb 2013) BSI have not decided what to do about the future of BS 476.
- BS 3533 - Glossary of thermal insulation terms
- BS 3958 - Thermal insulating materials
- BS 3958-2 - Part 2: Calcium silicate preformed insulation
- BS 3958-3 - Part 3: Metal mesh faced man-made mineral fibre mattresses
- BS 3958-4 - Part 4: Bonded preformed man-made mineral fibre pipe sections
- BS 3958-5 - Part 5: Specification for bonded man-made mineral fibre slabs
- BS 5422 - Method for specifying thermal insulating materials for pipes, tanks, vessels, ductwork and
equipment operating within the temperature range -40°C to +700°C
- BS 5970 - Code of practice for thermal insulation of pipework and equipment in the temperature range -100°C
to + 870°C

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 10083 - Steels for quenching and tempering

- BS EN 10083-1 - Part 1: General technical delivery conditions
- BS EN 10084 - Case hardening steels. Technical delivery conditions
- BS EN 10085 - Nitriding steel. Technical delivery conditions
- BS EN 10087 - Free cutting steels. Technical delivery conditions for semi-finished products, hot rolled bars and
rods
- BS EN 10095 - Heat resisting steels and nickel alloys
- BS EN 10223 - Steel wire and wire products for fences
- BS EN 10223-2 - Part 2: Hexagonal steel wire netting for agricultural, insulation and fencing purposes
- BS EN 10250 - Open steel die forgings for general engineering purposes BS EN 10250-4 - Part 4: Stainless
steels
- BS EN 10327 - Continuously hot-dip coated strip and sheet of low carbon steels for cold forming. Technical
delivery conditions
- BS EN 10346 - Continuously hot-dip coated steel flat products. Technical delivery conditions
- BS EN 12664 - Thermal performance of building materials and products. Determination of thermal resistance
by means of guarded hot plate and heat flow meter methods. Dry and moist products of medium and low
thermal resistance.
by means of guarded hot plate and heat flow meter methods. Products of high and medium thermal
resistance.
by means of guarded hot plate and heat flow meter methods. Thick products of high and medium thermal
resistance.
- BS EN 13166 - Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory made products of phenolic foam (PF).
Specification
- BS EN 13467 - Thermal insulating products for building equipment and industrial installations. Determination
of dimensions, squareness and linearity of preformed pipe insulation
of trace quantities of water soluble chloride, fluoride, silicate, sodium ions and Ph
of water vapour transmission properties of preformed pipe insulation
- BS EN 13470 - Thermal insulating products for building equipment and industrial installations.
- Determination of the apparent density of preformed pipe insulation
- BS EN 13471 - Thermal insulating products for building equipment and industrial installations.
- Determination of the coefficient of thermal expansion
of short term water absorption by partial immersion of preformed pipe insulation
- BS EN 13501 - Fire classification of construction products and building elements. Part 1: Classification using
data from reaction to fire tests.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 14303 - Thermal insulation products for building equipment and industrial installations. Factory made
mineral wool products (MW). Specification
flexible elastomeric foam (FEF) products. Specification
calcium silicate (CS) products. Specification
phenolic foam (PF) products. Specification
- BS EN ISO 8990 - Thermal insulation. Determination of steady-state thermal transmission properties.
Calibrated and guarded hot box
- BS EN ISO 12944 - Paints and varnishes. Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective Protective paint
systems
- ASFP - Blue Book
- WRAS - Water Regulations Guide

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y51 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEM
100 COMMISSIONING PLAN
110 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED

The systems that will be commissioned in this project are shown in the following tables.
111 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Element description Yes/n Notes and comments

o
Cooling generation plant Yes Refer to clause 760
Chilled water systems Yes Refer to clause 760
Refrigeration systems Yes Refer to clause 760

Ventilation systems Yes Refer to clause 770
112 ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

o
High voltage power systems Yes Refer to section Y81
Low voltage power systems Yes Refer to section Y81
Lighting installations Yes Refer to section Y81

Security systems Yes Refer to section Y81
Public address systems Yes Refer to section Y81
Emergency power systems Yes Refer to section Y81

Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) Yes Refer to section Y81
systems
Standby generators Yes Refer to section Y81

Fire and smoke alarm systems Yes Refer to section Y81
Communications system Yes Refer to section Y81
Public address / paging systems Yes Refer to section Y81
Lightning protection systems Yes Refer to section Y81

Information and communication Yes Refer to section Y81
technologies (ICT) installations
Renewable power generation No

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
113 PLUMBING SYSTEMS

o
Drainage systems Yes Refer to clause 710
Domestic hot and cold water Yes Refer to clause 720

systems
114 SPECIALIST SYSTEMS

o
Compressed air systems Yes Refer to clause 731
Sprinkler installations Yes Refer to clause 744
200 GENERAL
210 COMMISSIONING PERIODS

Identify clearly as an integral part of the construction programme the periods representing the testing and
commissioning of the engineering works and separately identify all associated costs in the tender make up sheet.
220 LABOUR, MATERIALS AND OTHER PROVISIONS

Allow for all labour, materials, equipment and plant necessary to achieve the standards and performance
specified for testing and commissioning.
Provide all test equipment necessary for testing and commissioning and on request demonstrate that the
instruments used are accurate within the permitted tolerances when compared with recognised standards, and
that they have been calibrated within the last 12 months.
Provide adequate specialist staff to operate and maintain the systems throughout the testing and commissioning
procedures.
230 SPECIALIST COMMISSIONING ENGINEER

Directly employ a specialist company to undertake commissioning of the mechanical engineering systems.
Appoint the specialist commissioning engineer at the most appropriate time in the pre-construction period to
ensure the necessary involvement and site visits for examination of drawings and exchange of information.
Ensure that the specialist company undertakes a review of the installation drawings and include any additional
components deemed by the specialist to be required to ensure all systems are fully commissionable. Advise the
Contract Administrator, well in advance of the start of testing and commissioning, of any issues identified by the
commissioning specialist as being likely to affect the successful outcome of the commissioning.
These clauses relate to commissioning of the mechanical engineering systems. The commissioning of other
engineering systems, or items of plant, may be undertaken by the installer or the manufacturer but
commissioning of interfaces between systems is to be witnessed by all parties concerned and proven to operate
to the satisfaction of all parties concerned.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
240 WITNESSING AGENT

Appoint a "witnessing agent" to undertake the duties detailed in CIBSE Commissioning Codes. These duties are
separate from and are not to be confused with the witnessing carried out by the Contract Administrator or his
representative.
250 COMMISSIONING METHOD STATEMENT

Submit, well in advance of the programmed commissioning stage, a method statement showing a full
understanding of the testing and commissioning requirements. Set out in the statement the methods and
resources to be employed at each stage of the process and a programme to identify all the systems involved,
their dependency on the operation of other mechanical and electrical systems and on the availability of water,
electricity and energy sources.
260 RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS

Repeat as necessary, until satisfactory, any testing and commissioning and/or re-commissioning arising from
rectification, at any stage, of defects in workmanship, materials, performance, misadjustments and other
irregularities.
270 REPORTS AND RECORDS

Submit throughout the commissioning period, on a weekly basis, commissioning progress reports.
Keep progressive records of testing and commissioning results and other "as installed" information for completion
of record drawings and operation and maintenance manuals.
280 WITNESSING AND NOTIFICATION

Allow a minimum of seven working days’ notice, in writing, for appropriate persons to attend inspections and
witness tests or demonstrations at works or on site.
Provide all necessary facilities and assistance for the employer's insurance company representative to attend
inspections or witness tests, as required.
All client costs associated with abortive witnessing (i.e. where the system(s) being demonstrated fail to achieve
the specified performance, and the demonstration has to be repeated at a later date) may be deducted from
monies owing to the installer.
290 DEFINITIONS
The definitions apply as listed in BSRIA publications BG2/2010 and AG 3/89, for commissioning of air and water
systems in buildings.
300 INSTALLATION OF COMMISSIONABLE SYSTEM
310 GENERAL
Follow the recommendations, on planning, installation, inspection, reporting and documentation of the BSRIA
publications BG 2/2010 and AG 3/89, the CIBSE Commissioning Codes and HVCA DW Ductwork Specifications.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Follow the defined position of the various parties in the commissioning process as set out in BSRIA TM 1/88. Pay
particular attention to the following:
- Protect sensitive or fragile items of plant and electrical equipment from dirt, damp and other damage.
- Observe manufacturers’ setting to work procedures and recommendations.
- Determine and record correct operation of automatic or manually operated sequence fire control, alternative
working selection, or duplicate plant changeover controls.
- Ensure safety in the event of failure of, and following sudden resumption of, electricity supply by the correct
operation of safety interlocks and equipment protection devices designed to protect personnel, such as those
associated with the high voltage side of electrostatic filters and with remote electrically operated plant.
- Lock in their finally commissioned positions all regulating valves, dampers and devices. Where locking is not
possible, permanently mark the final agreed setting positions.
- Ensure grease or lubricant is applied as required for working parts at all times and prior to handover. Fit
extended grease nipple points to all inaccessible positions.
- After completion and acceptance of commissioning, return all systems and consumables to an ‘as new’
condition.
- Ensure sufficient tappings for pressure measurement are installed adjacent to differential pressure control
valves and flow limiting valves to enable these valves to be properly commissioned.
320 COMMISSIONING SET SELECTION

Select commissioning set sizes against the manufacturer’s recommendations for flow rate, flow velocity and signal
pressure. Ensure the signal pressure generated by the commissioning set, at the specified water flow rate, is
between 1.0kPa and 4.5kPa. Verify the pressure loss imposed on the system by the commissioning set (allowing
for the combined effect of the orifice plate and the regulating valve) does not exceed 8.0kPa. Where it is
necessary to meet the above requirements reduce or expand from the line size shown on the general
arrangement drawing to the size of commissioning set selected. Include for all necessary fittings and pipe lengths
necessary to accommodate this change of size. Install minimum straight upstream and downstream pipe lengths
as recommended by the manufacturer at the size of the commissioning set selected.
Unless specified otherwise in the particular specification, use fixed orifice commissioning sets only: Do not use
variable orifice commissioning sets or cartridge type automatic balancing valves.
400 TESTING AT WORKS

Ensure inspecting and testing at manufacturer’s works comply with standards and codes of practice, and, if
specified, are witnessed by the appropriate parties.
Include in the operation and maintenance manuals duplicate test certificates for works tests.
500 STATIC TESTING
510 GENERAL
Carry out satisfactory pressure, air leakage and thermal expansion tests before the application of paint, insulation
or other cladding, as appropriate.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
520 CONCEALED SECTIONS OF WORK

Individually test while still visible, any sections of a system that are to be permanently buried or concealed.
530 PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING

Carry out pressure and air leakage testing in sections as the work proceeds and to suit the construction
programme.
Carry out pressure and air leakage testing on complete systems, following any cleaning or scavenging, but before
any disinfection or fumigation specified.
Fill each system with the appropriate hydraulic or pneumatic test medium at normal pressure and inspect for
leakages.
Apply the full pressure tests specified and with the pressurising equipment disconnected, hold these pressures for
the period specified, without signs of leakage or distress to the system.
540 THERMAL EXPANSIONSYSTEM

In conjunction with programme requirements, high temperature hot water systems up to operating conditions,
allow the system to cool and then check for leakages.
Where early concealment of a system is dictated by the particular nature of the programme for the works make
allowance for temporary provision of heating or cooling equipment.
550 PROTECTION OF SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

When pressure testing, remove or isolate items of equipment set to operate below the test pressure. If not
removed, limit expansion joint movement using bolts.
560 DRAINING AFTER TESTING

Drain pipework systems following testing and refill with clean water, treated water, preserving solution, inert gas
or low pressure air as appropriate to suit the stage of the programme for the works and as recommended in
section 4 of BSRIA BG 2/2010.
570 PIPEWORK DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

Comply with procedures in HVCA Guide to Good Practice for Site Pressure Testing of Pipework. and the
precautions in HSE Guidance Note GS4.
Test concealed or buried pipework before any permanent covering is applied and advise appropriate personnel, in
advance, of the time pressure tests may be witnessed.
572 UNDERGROUND PIPEWORK GENERALLY

Hydraulically pressure test as follows:
Test to a gauge pressure not less than twice the operating pressure for a period of one hour unless otherwise
specified in the particular specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
580 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT TESTING

For tanks and cylinders operating at atmospheric pressure, test the structural soundness and water tightness
under ‘tank full’ conditions. Ensure that there are no resulting distortions or leakages.
Hydraulically test calorifiers and heat exchangers in accordance with BS 6880.
Pressure test boilers to twice the operating pressure or to the manufacturer’s safety limit, whichever is the lower
pressure.
Unless otherwise agreed, inspect fans for balance under supervision of the manufacturer’s representative.
600 COMMISSIONING
610 COMMISSIONING CODES

Commission installations in accordance with the procedures, checks and suggested tolerances provided in the
CIBSE Commissioning Codes, and BSRIA Guides.
620 INSTALLATION (STATIC COMPLETION)

Achieve a state of readiness to commence commissioning when each commissionable system has been
successfully completed as follows:
- installed in accordance with the specification and drawings with all outstanding remedial works completed
- final installation inspection carried out, all mechanical and electrical inspection and pre- commissioning check
lists completed
- successfully pressure and leakage tested as specified
- flushed and cleaned and refilled or protected, all in accordance with section Y25 and BSRIA BG 2/2010, as
specified
- all test certificates, reports and manufacturers’ information collated
- surrounding areas clean, and free from obstruction for access to commissionable equipment
- identification and labelling complete
- with all dampers, valves, control devices, test points, gauges, thermometers and other specified items
adjusted and in good working order
- with the installation checked safe mechanically and electrically for safe operation and ready for commissioning
Do not commence commissioning until the building is in a condition suitable for commissioning works to
commence.
700 PARTICULAR TEST PROCEDURES

Where a system is not covered in the following sub-clauses, carry out test procedures in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Carry out the following procedures as necessary in accordance with the relevant British or other Standards.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
710 DISPOSAL SYSTEMS (R)
711 FOUL DRAINAGE ABOVE GROUND (R11)

As the work progresses, inspect and test the pipework section by section. Upon completion, test the system with
all sanitary fittings fixed and working. Submit systems to two separate tests, Air Test and Hydraulic Performance
in accordance with BS EN 12056-2.
Carry out all tests required by the District Surveyor/Building Control Body
720 WATER SUPPLY (S1)
721 COLD WATER (S10)


- piping is arranged, insulated and painted correctly
- hand wheels or levers are fitted to valves with clear indication of open/closed position
appropriate
- all valves have been suitably labelled
Carry out checks and procedures in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Code W, and check lists in BSRIA AG
2/2010. Prior to commissioning, clean water systems as detailed in BSRIA AG 8/91. Flush out, cleanse and
disinfect the complete system, including incoming mains, storage cisterns and all distribution pipework as detailed
in section Y25.
Contact local water supply authority and co-ordinate regular visits by their inspector. Obtain formal approval by
water authority for complete installation to allow provision of water supply to premises. Issue water supply
authority acceptance of compliance with the current Water Supply Regulations.
Pressure test pipework system and commission including all equipment.
Hydraulically pressure test mains cold water pipework in accordance with water authority requirements and HVCA
Guide to Good Practice for Site Pressure Testing of Pipework, for underground ductile spun iron or polyethylene
pipes: spun iron 2 x mains pressure; PE 1.5 times mains pressure or 10 bar, whichever is the greater.
Where HDPE or similar non-metallic pipework is used, obtain the manufacturer’s assistance to ensure correct
procedures for the pressure testing. Prior to commencement of pressure testing, provide a certified
manufacturer's drawing showing all restraint and provisions for expansion and demonstrate that such
requirements have been met.
Test all overflow and warning pipes for flow and discharge.
Regulate and balance all cold water distribution pipework systems in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Code
W.
Following successful commissioning, disinfect mains and potable cold water internal pipeline systems in
accordance with BS 8558 and BS EN 806 and provide certification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Produce reports and water management log book(s) in accordance with BS 8558 and BS EN 806 , BSRIA AG 4/94
and CIBSE TM13.
722 HOT WATER (S11)

Refer to clause 721.
Record system temperatures and outlet temperatures in accordance with BS 8558 and BS EN 806 , BSRIA AG
4/94 and CIBSE TM13.
Produce reports and water management log book(s) in accordance with BS 8558 and BS EN 806 , BSRIA AG 4/94
and CIBSE TM13.
Following successful commissioning, disinfect potable hot water internal pipeline systems in accordance with BS
8558 and BS EN 806 and provide certification.
On satisfactory completion of the commissioning of the hot water system and all associated equipment, operate
the completed systems at design temperatures and pressures for a period of at least 8 hours. Allow the system to
cool down and examine for any defects. Rectify any defects and retest the system until satisfactory. On
completion reset all gauges, controls and thermostats to the agreed specified normal operating values.
723 PRESSURISED WATER (S13)

Test all pipework under pressure. Test and commission pressurization equipment and pressure booster sets in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Refer also to clauses 721 and 722.
730 GAS SUPPLY
731 COMPRESSED AIR (S30)

Pressure test all pipework in accordance with the HVCA Guide to Good Practice for Site Pressure Testing of
Pipework.
Perform air leakage tests on steel, copper and plastic pipes. Isolate the system into convenient sections and
slowly raise the air pressure in each section to 0.5 bar. Test each joint with soap solution or similar and rectify
any leaks. Progressively increase the air pressure to one and a half times the maximum operating pressure of the
system, retest each joint with soap solution or similar and rectify any leaks.
Carry out the commissioning and testing of packaged compressors and dryers in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
740 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
741 FIRE HOSE REELS (S60)

- all piping and hose reels are supported adequately

- piping is installed and painted correctly
- hand wheels or levers are fitted to valves with clear indication of open/closed position

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- valve locking mechanisms are correctly set

- valves are correctly labelled
- line diagrams, warning and operating notices have been installed
Pressure test the entire system including the pump set in accordance with clause Y51.770. Ensure all hose reel
isolating valves are fully open and all hoses fully retracted for the test.
With all hoses fully extended, flush out the entire system through all hose reels, until it is clear of all deposits.
Carry out the performance test in accordance with BS 5306-1 except that the flow rate at both simultaneously
operating hose reels will be individually measured at 0.5l/s when both are achieving the design throw.
Demonstrate the automatic starting and stopping of the pump set and associated alarm signals at the BMS, when
a hose reel is operated.
743 WET RISERS

Flush out upwardly the piping and landing valves to clear debris when each wet riser pipe is complete and ready
to be used as a dry riser. After completion of pressure testing, arrange for the local Fire Officer to inspect the dry
risers and confirm their acceptance.
On completion of flushing, static pressure test each wet riser, pump installation for not less than 15 minutes.
Where there is a need (eg where the project is being handed-over in phases; where areas of the building are
released for work by other trades), static pressure test in sections.
During static pressure tests inspect all piping joints and landing valves for leakage.
After the static pressure tests are complete, test the pump set in accordance with the pump manufacturer’s
written instructions and as follows:
Subsequently leave all wet riser systems in a ready-for-use condition with all valves closed or open according to
requirements and with all valve locking devices locked.
744 SPRINKLERS
Carry out all tests and inspections to prove that the installation meets with the requirements of the Building
Regulations, LPC standards, BS 5306-1 and BS 5306-2.
Carry out all tests required by the District Surveyor or Building Control Body giving adequate notice with regard to
timing of tests, etc.
Inspect and test the installation at agreed stages to ensure that the pipework is properly secured and clear of
Prior to carrying out a hydraulic pressure test, carry out a low pressure air test to check that there are no open
ends in the system.
Run the hydraulic pressure test for a period of two hours at 150% normal working pressure or 15 bar whichever
is the greater. Ensure no significant pressure loss occurs during the test.
Fully test all pumps through their full range of capabilities, up to and including nominal ratings. Ensure all duties
are within the tolerances specified in LPC standards.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Upon completion of the installation of the system carry out tests in the presence of all interested parties to prove
to the satisfaction of all present that the installation conforms to the required standards.
When these tests have been accepted by all parties as being satisfactory, issue a completion certificate as defined
in LPC standards. In addition issue an LPCB Certificate of conformity (as required in LPS 1048) and register the
installation as a Certified Sprinkler System.
Keep a record of all tests carried out to include the following.
- date of test
- drawing reference
- method of test
- test pressure
- result of test
- signature of operative carrying out test and company
- signature of witnessing Supervising Officer or his/her approved representative
Include for two inspections to be carried out six months and twelve months from the time of practical completion.
This inspection to include the following:
Installation control valves:
- Carry out flow and pressure tests

- Check satisfactory operation on turbine alarm gong
- Exercise and grease all stop valves and ensure they open and shut easily
- Check valve glands for leakage
- Check seating of alarm valves
General
- Check all pressure gauges are registering correctly

- Check satisfactory operation of all flow switches and monitored stop valves
- Check all small bore pipework, valves and ancillaries for satisfactory operation
- Check spacing and location of sprinklers in relation to any new walls or partitions erected since completion of
systems
- Ensure all valves are suitably secured and labelled
- Leave systems in fully operational condition
745 FIRE HYDRANTS

Visually examine the installation for correctness including:
- that all joints are complete but temporarily exposed

- that hand wheels are properly fitted to valves with clear indication of the direction of turn to open or close
Prior to testing, fill the system with water and discharge it via an end wash-out valve. Flush out any debris

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Comply with BS 8558, BS EN 806, BS EN 805, BS 7592, CIBSE Technical Memorandum TM13 and the local water
supplier’s requirements. Carry out purity tests from water samples and obtain laboratory analysis to ensure
compliance with The Water Supply (Water Quality) Regulations. Submit the results in writing to the Contract
Administrator.
Give adequate notice of testing to all relevant parties.
For every hydrant fitted with a means for automatic draining, check that the draining arrangement correctly
operates both when the hydrant is in use and when it is idle.
Liaise with the local Fire Officer to enable the demonstration of the fire hydrant system. Ensure that the entire
system operates to the satisfaction of the Fire Officer.
Charge the system with water to twice the pressure that the installation is designed to be subjected to under
normal operation. Maintain the test pressure for 1 hour. During this period check that there are no leaks from
joints and valves. Repair any leaks and retest the system.
Carry out a flow test after the completion of the static testing. Pass water through the system under pressure and
record the flow and pressure readings. Submit the results in writing to the Contract Administrator.
747 FOAM FIRE FIGHTING


- piping is arranged and marked or painted correctly
- hand wheels or levers are fitted to valves with locking mechanisms and clear indication of open/closed
position
- all temporary piping blinds are removed
- all portable equipment is correctly located
- all notices and warning signs are fitted
- control panels and lock-offs are correctly located
Hydraulically pressure test all piping and fittings downstream of the fire pumps to a minimum of 1.5 times the
normal working pressure for one hour.
Flush all foam distribution piping with water and clean out all pipeline strainers, after pressure testing and again
after completion of commissioning.
Commission the installation including the following:
- Check that all automatic controls and alarms function as intended

- Carry out discharge tests and measure the rate of application of fire-fighting foam
- Prove the operation of electrical interlocks
- Demonstrate the interlinks with the fire alarm system and BMS
- Prove that the drainage system from bunds is normally closed but is of adequate capacity to properly dispose
of fire–fighting foam

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
760 COOLING SYSTEM

Undertake factory load and operational tests sufficiently early so that any remedial measures required can be
incorporated within the programme.
Follow the procedures given in CIBSE Commissioning Code R for use and handling of refrigerants, pressure and
leak testing, evacuation and dehydration, charging and lubrication of refrigeration systems. Also follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
Carry out procedure for preliminary checks, testing, charging, setting to work and adjusting detailed in
Commissioning Code R.
Use instruments and apparatus detailed in CIBSE Commissioning Code R. Apply tolerances defined in CIBSE
Commissioning Code R.
Carry out checks and procedures in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Code W, and check lists in BSRIA BG
2/2010. Prior to commissioning, clean water systems as detailed in BSRIA AG 1/2001.
Obtain system design performance, flow rates and velocities from the drawings, specifications and schedules.
Where there is conflict between the drawings, specifications and schedules, draw this to the attention of the
Contract Administrator and seek clarification on the values to be used for commissioning. In the commissioning
method statement, record the design information to be used for commissioning, or make reference to the other
specific documents in which it is contained.
Set to work and regulate constant volume water distribution systems in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning
Code W and procedures in BSRIA BG 2/2010.
Use instruments for measurement detailed in BSRIA BG 2/2010, Section 5.
770 VENTILATION
771 GENERAL SUPPLY AND EXTRACT VENTILATION SYSTEMS

Carry out checks and procedures in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Code A, Section A1 and check lists in
BSRIA AG 3/89, Section D3. Prior to commissioning, clean air ductwork systems and remove all debris.
Air leakage test all air ductwork including associated equipment in accordance with HVCA DW ductwork
specifications.
Set to work and regulate air distribution systems in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Code A, and
procedures detailed in BSRIA AG 3/89, Section C.
Use instruments and methods of measurement detailed in CIBSE Commissioning Code A, Appendix AA3.1 and in
BSRIA AG 3/89, Section C2.
Obtain system design performance, flow rates and velocities from the drawings, specifications and schedules.
Where there is conflict between the drawings, specifications and schedules draw this to the attention of the
Contract Administrator and seek clarification on the values to be used for commissioning. In the commissioning
method statement, record the design information to be used for commissioning, or make reference to the other
specific documents in which it is contained.
Determine the air quantities by the velocity pressure method, using a pitot tube and inclined gauge manometer
or electronic manometer.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where, due to space limitations or air turbulence within the ductwork, the total air quantity cannot be determined
by the velocity head method, calculate volume flow rates using a manometer at the main outlet or discharge
louvres. Likewise, for the same conditions, the air quantities at the inlets or outlets or branch ducts may be added
to provide a result for the branch duct connection.
Adjust ductwork dampers, diffusers and grilles to provide specified air movement, without draughts and free from
excessive air turbulence or unacceptable noise.
Locate test points at appropriate positions in the ductwork where air turbulence is minimal.
Allow for one change of pulley and/or belts for each fan drive, as necessary, when operating the fan units and
measuring the actual system characteristics, to achieve the specified performance.
772 TOILET EXTRACT

Follow commissioning procedures as detailed in clause Y51.771.
780 AIR CONDITIONING
783 FAN-COIL AIR CONDITIONING

Provide factory test results for each size of fan coil unit in accordance with section Y47
For waterside controlled FCU’s ensure correct operation of control valves by adjustment of the set point
conditions to force cooling valves to modulate fully open to maintain the desired environmental conditions..
Take static pressure readings at all ducted discharge connections from FCUs; this ensures a proportional balance
between all outlets.
Clear debris from condensate systems of all room units and test to ensure adequate flow is achieved from each
unit.
790 OTHER SYSTEMS
791 CENTRAL CONTROL/BUILDING MANAGEMENT

Test and commission the system in accordance with , BSRIA AG 9/2001, Part C2, CIBSE Commissioning Code C
and CIBSE Guide H.
Undertake tuning of control loops as necessary in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Code C.
Carry out commissioning of automatic control systems in accordance with the control equipment manufacturer's
manual.
Ensure control systems are commissioned in conjunction with air and water distribution systems.
Thoroughly bench test all control equipment and control panels/motor control centres at the manufacturer’s
factory prior to delivery to site.
Ensure that these tests include a demonstration of the complete control sequence and are available for
witnessing by the Contract Administrator and/or client’s representative
Demonstrate the operation of the complete system including process and management level software.
Provide a programme and submit a method statement for each test.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where external signals are required, provide these using physical connections to a test rig facility (ie
potentiometers/switches/lamps, etc).
Check that each transducer and control point is connected to the correct terminals within the terminal cabinet,
and demonstrate to the Contract Administrator’s satisfaction that these checks have been carried out before
proceeding with commissioning.
Carry out performance and acceptance tests in accordance with clause 900.
Give seven days’ notice to the Contract Administrator of the intention to provide the acceptance demonstrations
once the commissioning is complete.
Check each transducer to ensure that its output lies within the acceptable tolerances and that it responds to
changes in the measured variable. Check sensors to ascertain accuracy within limits; check pressure switches for
switch points and hysteresis; check humidity sensors for accuracy using a wet and dry bulb thermometer. Bring
any "out of limits" readings to the notice of the Contract Administrator prior to rectification by the appropriate
supplier.
Check each control output to ensure that the correct item of equipment is operated by each controller within the
panel, and demonstrate to the Contract Administrator’s satisfaction that these checks have been carried out.
Carry out a demonstration to the Contract Administrator at a supervisor terminal that every point detailed can be
accessed and has a true engineering value; and that all specified modes of operation and control function
correctly, including all alarms, high and low limit values. Where required by the Contract Administrator,
demonstrate the accuracy of the engineering value of particular points, as shown on the BMS, by comparison
with suitable calibrated measurement instrumentation. Provide sufficient manpower, all necessary test
equipment, consumable items and portable telephones to conduct the demonstration efficiently. Ensure all test
equipment has valid test certificates.
Ensure that all safety interlocks, overrides and fail-safe conditions are operational prior to starting the plant and
demonstrate these to the Contract Administrator’s satisfaction prior to starting plant in BMS auto mode.
Simulate, and prove effective, fault conditions for all critical alarms, safety devices and control interlocks as soon
as practical once BMS control mode is selected. Carry out an audit of the wiring and hardware installation. Test
start of system from power-down; review time schedules and alarm levels, grouping and selected control
parameters.
Provide trend graphs to demonstrate the stable control of the plant. Employ simulated inputs to check stability
over the design environmental range.
Submit commissioning documentation and schedules for approval during the design phase showing each plant,
point, interlock and control algorithm, and the stages of checks and commissioning required. Complete date and
engineer reference against each cleared item. Make completed copies available to the engineer prior to
acceptance testing. Provide a complete set of the commissioning documentation as part of the system
documentation. Document the overrides, control and software configuration for each item of plant and ensure
that this documentation is available on site at all times once the plant item has been left running under automatic
control.
792 SPECIALISED EQUIPMENT

Commission specialist equipment at a suitable stage in the program such that the equipment can be put into
storage or operated continuously, to avoid re-contamination

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
800 COMMISSIONING AND TESTING REPORT
810 CONTENT
Prepare and supply two copies of the typed commissioning report, each bound, or presented in a ring binder
folder sectioned with index to cover each engineering service. Base the commissioning report on the information
required by the CIBSE Commissioning Codes, and include the following topics:
- works test certificates

- site test certificates
- commissioning inspection reports
- commissioning results and final settings
- performance and acceptance test reports
- pressure vessel certificates and electrical certificates as required by the employer's insurers
820 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING SHEETS

Ensure air handling equipment commissioning sheets include all the design information and measured data in the
pro-forma air distribution system plant performance test sheet in BSRIA AG 3/89, but also the following items:
- for units containing mixing chambers, the total air volume, return air volume and outside air volume (m³/s)
- air side and water side coil pressure drops
- filter pressure drops
- fan curves with operating points marked on (multiple points for variable speed fans)
830 EXHAUST/EXTRACT FAN COMMISSIONING SHEETS

Ensure fan commissioning sheets include all the design information and measured data in the pro-forma air
distribution system plant performance test sheet in BSRIA AG 3/89. Provide fan curves with operating points
marked on.
840 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS, COMMISSIONING SHEETS

Ensure diffusers, grilles and registers commissioning sheets include results/information for the following items:
- fan systems and/or zone number

- room number or area designation
- outlet code number, corresponding to outlet code number on air balance code drawing
- size of outlet - manufacturer's listed size
- type of outlet - manufacturer's model designation
- manufacturer of outlet
- manufacturer's effective area for each size
- required air flow rate (m³/s) at each outlet
- initial air flow rate (m³/s) at each outlet
- final air flow rate (m³/s) at each outlet
- setting of regulating device

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- all relevant measuring device calibration charts

- percentage of design volume achieved
850 WATER SYSTEM COMMISSIONING SHEETS

Ensure the water system proportional balance commissioning sheets include all the design information and
measured data in the pro-forma water balance test sheet in BSRIA BG 2/2010. Include all relevant measuring
device calibration charts.
Ensure that the pump commissioning sheets include all the design information and measured data in the
appropriate pro-forma plant performance test sheet in BSRIA BG 2/2010. Include pump curves with the operating
points marked on (multiple points for variable speed pumps).
For all plant items record the following:
- inlet water temperature (where appropriate)

- leaving water temperature (where appropriate)
- pressure drop across item of plant (kPa)
860 HEATING COIL AND HEAT RECOVERY COIL COMMISSIONING SHEETS

Ensure the commissioning sheets for heating and cooling coils include the following design information and
measured data.
- Manufacturer, model, serial number and rated capacity

- Pressure drop across control valves (for 3 port valves, measure in full flow and bypass)
- By pass DRV settings
- Air flow rate
- Air temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb) and pressure on coil
- Air temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb) and pressure off coil
- Water temperature and pressure on coil
- Water temperature and pressure off coil
- Water pressure drop across coil
900 PERFORMANCE AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING
910 GENERAL
Commission all systems and plant, to the design performance specified, and obtain satisfactory results prior to
making arrangements for performance demonstration and acceptance.
Use record sheets as detailed in BSRIA publications BG 2/2010 and AG 3/89 to establish results, actual and
design, for the final acceptance of the commissioning and performance testing stages.
Ensure all necessary calibration data, pump and fan characteristics, curves and details of plant duty are readily
available on site, together with copies of all commissioning results and a set of ‘Record’ drawings of the
installation, showing all plant settings, air volumes, temperatures, water flow rates, pump heads and noise level
readings as measured in the final commissioned state. Include these in the commissioning and testing report.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
920 DEMONSTRATION
Demonstrate each commissioned system or item of plant, in a manner appropriate to the function and
performance requirement, that each system installation performs correctly, provides the duties required and
maintains conditions within the specified limits under varying plant loading.
930 CONTROLS
Include the proper functioning of automatic controls, protective and alarm devices during acceptance tests, as
well as demonstrating that the commissioning results are acceptable and within tolerances previously agreed with
the Contract Administrator. Where unacceptable results are obtained, re-commission the system after any
necessary adjustments or modifications.
940 ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS

Prepare and submit for comment a method statement for all environmental tests and performance monitoring at
least eight weeks prior to the tests’ commencement.
Carry out performance tests on the system at times when outside conditions permit the systems to operate in the
region of their maximum duties (i.e. maximum cooling duty for cooling systems).
It is unlikely that demonstration will be possible of maximum cooling conditions before building handover.
Therefore, make provision for a re-visit to the site after the building is completed to carry out outstanding
environmental tests.
The object of the trials is to demonstrate that the monitored systems performed as required, including scheduled
starts and stops, for a seven day period, without need for adjustment of any control set points or changing of any
equipment. It follows therefore that sufficient pre-trial test runs must be carried out such that you are confident
that the system and its controls will operate satisfactorily during the trial periods.
Should any part of the system or its controls fail during the trial, or require adjustment, the trial will be
considered void and restarted, unless agreed otherwise by the Contract Administrator.
Check the calibration of all sensors prior to starting the trial to prevent abortive work. Provide a signed certificate
detailing the calibration check results for each sensor. Also provide copies of calibration certificates for all test
equipment used.
As a condition of system acceptance, demonstrate the stability of room temperature and humidity control by
installing thermo-hygrographs or data-loggers in selected rooms, or rooms where performance is critical or
suspect, to record room temperatures and humidity over a minimum period of seven days. Record data at a
minimum frequency of fifteen minute intervals. Agree the number and positions of data-loggers/thermo-
hygrographs, in advance with the Contract Administrator. Generally place them at working plane level (0.9m
above finished floor level) and site them away from the influence of draughts or direct solar gain. For the
avoidance of doubt, the use of BMS sensors for this purpose is not acceptable. If systems fail or need
adjustment, continue monitoring until stability has been demonstrated for a minimum period of seven consecutive
days.
Ensure that environmental tests are carried out under the following conditions
- all windows, doors, screens, etc in place and doors kept shut as much as possible during test
- all lights, grilles, tiles, etc installed in ceiling
- all grilles and diffusers set up correctly

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- all air balancing, water balancing, controls, terminal units and plant commissioning complete, certificates
issued and any witnessing successfully carried out
- automatic controls operating in fully automatic mode, with set points set as specified
- simulated sensible and latent heat gains (electric heaters/humidifiers) in place and operational throughout
950 PERFORMANCE AND ACCEPTANCE TEST RESULTS

Ensure performance and acceptance test sheets include the following information both specified and actual.
- control settings for all plant

- control settings for control panel equipment
- set points included in building management system
- record of temperature and pressure test points
- record of positions of all regulating devices
- record of temperatures in all occupied spaces together with associated outside temperature
- record of relative humidities in all rooms that are air-conditioned together with outside relative humidity
- supply and return air temperature and humidity for each individual ventilation system
- chilled water and heating water flow and return temperatures (primary and secondary circuits)
- noise level readings of plant and equipment
- noise level readings in occupied spaces
- external ambient noise level
Reference, index and include the complete set of graphs as part of the handover documentation in their own
clearly identified ring binder. It is accepted that at handover, only one of the two trial periods will have been
completed and consequently that the second set of results will be recorded and enclosed at a later date.
Also include all sensor and test equipment calibration certificates in this document. Schedule the operating
parameters and time schedules that have been set into the control systems during the two trial periods to enable
the data log results to be analysed. At the end of the trial period, provide all monitoring data for the entire trial
period on data CD/DVD.
960 APPROVALS
Once the installations are in a suitable condition arrange for inspections to take place by statutory bodies and
others who are required to give approval to any of the engineering systems.
Obtain approvals in writing and include copies of the approvals in the operating and maintenance instructions.
1000 SCHEDULE OF COMMISSIONING DELIVERABLES
1010 DOCUMENTATION
- Produce a commissioning method statement.
- Issue ductwork leakage testing method statement with proposed sectional testing drawings, with acceptance
criteria, for comment.
- Issue static pressure testing method statement, with acceptance criteria, for comment.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Issue integrated performance testing method statement with acceptance criteria for comment.
- Produce a commissioning logic diagram and programme for integration into the construction and finishes
programmes
- Produce a flushing, chemical cleaning and water treatment method statement.
- Produce a flushing, chemical cleaning and water treatment logic diagram and programme for integration into
the construction, commissioning and finishes programmes.
- Provide calibration certificates for all instrumentation used during the testing and commissioning of the
building engineering systems.
- Issue a static testing report and certificates.
- Issue a commissioning report detailing the results of the commissioning and commenting on the performance
of systems
- Record all plant settings including appropriate reference to plant items. The records should be incorporated
within the operating and maintenance manuals. Modify and update operating details to reflect commissioning
results.
- Issue an environmental testing report.
- Issue an acoustic testing report.
- Provide disinfection certificates for mains and potable water systems and water treatment certificates for all
water systems.
- Issue “Written Scheme of Examination”.
1020 DEMONSTRATION / WITNESSING

The Contract Administrator may require to witness, or have demonstrated, to him/her or his/her representative,
any or all of the following:
- the flushing, cleaning and water treatment of all water systems

- the pre-commissioning activities in accordance with the commissioning specification
- normal emergency, shutdown and standby mode operation of plant and systems
- that the equipment is capable of the performance and method of operation specified
- that the overall and complete systems perform correctly in the required manner and as intended by the
specification including return visits for seasonal tests
- leakage testing of ductwork
- ventilation system commissioning results
- operation and resetting of fire dampers (in presence of District Surveyor/Building Control Body if required)
- performance test of life safety ventilation systems (in presence of District Surveyor/Building Control Body)
- preliminary static pressure testing of pipework
- final static pressure testing of pipework
- operation of all hot and cold water outlets and authentic equal pressures at hot and cold water system outlet
points
- measurement of domestic hot water temperature at each outlet
- demonstration of disinfection

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- operation of all drainage outlets, including condensate drainage systems

- water systems commissioning results, including, for variable volume water distribution systems,
demonstration of setting of differential pressure control valves, and demonstration of part-load operation
- operation of principal plant items in accordance with the specification
- demonstration of electrical testing/commissioning; cable insulation testing; cable continuity testing; earth loop
impedance testing; prospective short circuit current testing; circuit labelling
- controls/BMS testing and commissioning: demonstrate that the BMS equipment and systems supplied function
and operate in accordance with the specification and drawings
- partial load testing of plant
- the functional testing of all safety interlocks
- acoustic tests: full octave spectrum measurements in each internal space and externally at each site boundary
- the operation of plant and systems for specified periods of time to prove plant reliability

European Standard.
- BS 1710 - Specification for Identification of pipelines and services

- BS 5306 - Code of Practice for fire extinguishing installations and equipment on premises
- BS 5410 - Code of Practice for oil firing
- BS 5482 - Code of Practice for domestic butane- and propane gas - burning installations
- BS 5482-1 - Part 1: Installations at permanent dwellings, residential park homes and commercial premises,
with installation pipework sizes not exceeding DN 25 for steel and DN 28 for corrugated stainless steel or
copper
- BS 5864 - Installation and maintenance of gas-fired ducted air heaters of rated input not exceeding 70 kW net
(2nd and 3rd family gases). Specification
- BS 6230 - Specification for installation of gas-fired forced convection air heaters for commercial and industrial
space heating (2nd and 3rd family gases)
- BS 6880 - Code of Practice for low temperature hot water heating systems of output greater than 45 kW
- BS 7592 - Sampling for Legionella bacteria in water systems – Code of practice
- BS 8558 - Guide to the design,installation, testing and maintenance of services supplying water for domestic
- BS 9990 - Code of practice for non-automatic fire-fighting systems in buildings
- BS EN 752 - Drain and sewer systems outside buildings

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 806 - Part 1: General

- BS EN 806 - Part 4: Installation
- BS EN 806 - Part 5: Operation and maintenance
- BS EN 12056 - Gravity drainage systems inside buildings
- BS EN 12056-2 - Part 2: Sanitary layout, pipework and calculation
- BS EN 12056-3 - Part 3: Roof drainage, layout and calculation
- BS EN 13280 - Specification for glass fibre reinforced cisterns of one-piece and sectional construction, for the
storage, above ground, of cold water
- BS EN 15004 - Fixed firefighting systems. Gas extinguishing systems BS EN 15004-1 - Part 1: Design,
installation and maintenance ASHRAE - ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Applications
- BCGA CP4 - British Compressed Gas Association Code of Practice 4 - Industrial Gas Cylinder Manifolds &
Distribution Pipework/Pipelines (excluding acetylene)
- BFPSA - Code of practice for gaseous fire fighting systems
- BSRIA TM1/88.1 - Commissioning of HVAC Systems: Guidance on the division of responsibilities BSRIA BG
29/2011 - Pre-commission cleaning of pipework systems
- BSRIA AG 3/89.3 - Commissioning Air Systems – Application procedures for buildings
- BSRIA AG 4/94 - Guide to legionellosis – temperature measurements for hot and cold water services
- BSRIA AG 9/2001 - Standard specification for BMS
- BSRIA AG 11/2010 - Commissioning job book
- BSRIA AG 16/2002 - Variable flow water systems: design, installation and commissioning guidance
- BSRIA AG 17/2002 - Fire extinguishing systems, a guide to their integration with other building services
- BSRIA AG 20/95 - Commissioning of pipework systems
- BSRIA AG 1/91 - Commissioning of VAV systems in buildings
- BSRIA AG 17/2000 - Achieving minimum outdoor air – commissioning and test procedures
- BSRIA BG 8/2009 - Model commissioning plan
- BSRIA BG 2/2010 - Commissioning Water Systems
- CIBSE Guide H - Building control systems
- CIBSE Commissioning Code A - Air distribution systems
- CIBSE Commissioning Code B - Boilers
- CIBSE Commissioning Code C - Automatic controls
- CIBSE Commissioning Code M - Commissioning management
- CIBSE Commissioning Code R - Refrigerating Systems
- CIBSE Commissioning Code W - Water distribution systems
- CIBSE Knowledge Series KS09 - Commissioning variable flow pipework systems
- CIBSE TM13 - Minimising the Risk of Legionnaires Disease
- DCLG - Building Regulations Approved Documents
- DCLG - Domestic building services compliance guide
- DCLG - Domestic ventilation compliance guide

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- DCLG - Non-domestic building services compliance guide

- DoH HTM 02-01 - Medical gases – Medical gas pipeline systems
- HSE GS4 - Safety in pressure testing
- HVCA DW/143 - A Practical Guide to Ductwork Leakage Testing
- HVCA TR/6 - Guide to Good Practice for Site Pressure Testing of Pipework
- HVCA TR/20 - Installation and testing of pipework systems
- IGE/UP/1 - Strength testing, tightness testing and direct purging of industrial and commercial gas
installations.
- IGE/UP/1A - Strength testing, tightness testing and direct purging of small low pressure industrial and
commercial Natural Gas installations.
- IGE/UP/1B - Tightness testing and direct purging of small Natural Gas installations
- IGE/UP/4 - Commissioning of gas fired plant on industrial and commercial premises.
- LPS 1048 - Loss Prevention Standard 1048: Requirements for the approval of sprinkler system contractors in
the UK and Eire, LPCB
- UKLPG CoP 17 - Purging LPG vessels and systems
- UKLPG Cop 22 - LPG piping system design and installation

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y52 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTINGS
100 GENERAL
110 SPECIALIST MANUFACTURER

Employ the services of a specialist manufacturer to provide the acoustic materials detailed herein.
120 VIBRATION CRITERIA

Supply and install vibration isolators where specified, and also wherever otherwise required, such that vibration
generated by the engineering services installation including plant, pipework, ductwork and all ancillary items of
equipment installed as part of the Works, does not cause any specified noise and vibration criteria to be
exceeded. Where no vibration criteria are specified, the relevant maximum vibration amplitudes specified in BS
6472 are not to be exceeded by the installation.
130 DURABILITY OF VIBRATION ISOLATORS

Mount all mechanical plant likely to produce vibration that results in the specified noise and vibration criteria
being exceeded on durable vibration isolators, with adequate lateral restraint. Select vibration isolators suitable
for the loading, operating and environmental conditions which will prevail. Pay special attention to vibration
isolators which will be exposed to atmospheric or adverse interior conditions, apply appropriate finishes to
prevent excessive corrosion.
140 STATIC DEFLECTION

Select the static deflection of vibration isolators to give the necessary degree of isolation efficiency under the
lowest normal operating speed of the isolated plant. Allow for asymmetric load distribution such that the
minimum static deflection is achieved on all vibration isolators under normal operating conditions. Carefully level
machines and bases. Replace any vibration isolators which are "bottomed out", or where the springs have
deformed from a cylindrical shape, at no extra cost to the Contract.
150 COLOUR CODING

Colour code or otherwise clearly mark all vibration isolators to indicate the rated load and deflection capacity to
facilitate identification during installation.
160 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

Make all external connections to vibration isolated plant using flexible connections. Take particular care to ensure
that the connection of pipes, ducts, shafts, electrical conduit etc., to vibration isolated plant neither short circuits
the plant vibration isolation, nor impedes the free movement of the vibration isolated plant. Select the vibration
isolation system to support the operating weight of the plant and equipment to be isolated only. Support all
associated pipework, valves, filters, ductwork etc., and their contents independently so as not to impose
additional forces on the isolator system. Select and arrange all flexible connections to accommodate this
requirement.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
170 ISOLATION OF PIPEWORK

Resiliently isolate from the building structure all pipework of 50mm diameter and above and all ductwork within
plant rooms for a minimum of 15 metres from the motor driven plant.
Vibration isolation and structure borne noise
Resiliently isolate from any part of the building structure all plant, pipework and ductwork as specified, or as
otherwise required, to achieve the specified noise and vibration criteria. Pay particular attention to areas where
low noise levels are specified. Avoid the mounting of any item of plant, pipework or ductwork from lightweight
(stud) partitions. If unavoidable, make the Contract Administrator aware of all such instances. Supply the
Contract Administrator with full details of the resilient mounting arrangements between the service item and the
partition.
200 PRODUCTS / MATERIALS
210 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
211 HELICAL SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATORS

Provide helical spring isolators manufactured from sheet steel and springs of substantial thickness, and treated
with a rust resistant protective coating. Provide isolators with the necessary damping and load adjustment
devices and which also incorporate rubber or neoprene elements in-series with the springs to prevent the
transmission of high frequency vibration.
Provide springs with an outside diameter of not less than 75% of their operating height. Select spring mounts to
have at least 50% overload capacity before becoming coil bound.
Ensure vibration isolators incorporating snubbers or restraining devices are designed so that these devices have
no significant effect during the normal operation of the isolated plant.
212 RUBBER OR NEOPRENE VIBRATION ISOLATORS

Provide rubber or neoprene vibration isolators consisting of a steel top plate and base plate completely embedded
in oil-resistant neoprene. Provide isolators that include a tapping through the top plate and bolt holes in the base
plate so they can be bolted to the supporting structure and the isolated equipment as required.
220 VIBRATION ISOLATION HANGERS
221 HELICAL SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATION HANGERS

Provide helical spring isolators manufactured from sheet steel and springs of substantial thickness, and treated
with a rust resistant protective coating. Provide isolators with the necessary damping and load adjustment
devices and which also incorporate rubber or neoprene elements in-series with the springs to prevent the
transmission of high frequency vibration.
Provide springs with an outside diameter of not less than 75% of their operating height. Select spring mounts to
have at least 50% overload capacity before becoming coil bound.
Ensure vibration isolators incorporating snubbers or restraining devices are designed so that these devices have
no significant effect during the normal operation of the isolated plant.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
222 RUBBER, NEOPRENE OR GLASS FIBRE VIBRATION ISOLATION HANGERS

Provide rubber, neoprene or glass fibre hangers that incorporate a rubber, neoprene or glass fibre vibration
isolation element housed in a steel cage.
Provide hangers that allow the lower hanger rod to move laterally at least 15o before a vibration short circuit
occurs.
230 INERTIA BASES
231 SPRING ISOLATED INERTIA BASES

Provide spring isolated inertia bases of a fully welded steel construction. Ensure the depth of the frame is not be
less than one twelfth of the largest dimension, or 100mm, whichever is the greater. Include in the frame an
appropriate quantity and distribution of height reducing spring fixing brackets. Provide spring fixing brackets that
are either mounted external to the frame, or recessed into the frame, as specified.
Ensure the weight of the inertia base, including concrete at approximately 2300 kg/m3, is equal to a least twice
the total weight supported. Arrange the supported equipment and ancillary weights on the inertia base so as to
distribute the load as evenly as possible over the mounting positions. Ensure the inertia base is sufficiently large
to provide support for all parts of the equipment, including any parts that overhang the equipment base.
Provide frames finished with red oxide primer unless otherwise specified.
232 NEOPRENE PAD ISOLATED INERTIA BASES

Provide neoprene pad isolated inertia bases comprising a concrete base cast onto permanent shuttering,
supported on neoprene pad(s) to give the required minimum static deflection, the whole resting on a plinth as
required.
Ensure the weight of the inertia base, including concrete at approximately 2300 kg/m3, is equal to a least twice
the total weight supported. Arrange the supported equipment and ancillary weights on the inertia base so as to
distribute the load as evenly as possible over the mounting positions. Ensure the inertia base is sufficiently large
to provide support for all parts of the equipment, including any parts that overhang the equipment base.
240 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

Select all flexible connectors to achieve the specified noise and vibration criteria.
Provide flexible connections on ductwork and pipework as specified elsewhere. Ensure the aggregate stiffness of
all flexible connections fixed to any one item of isolated plant is insignificant in relation to the stiffness of the
supporting vibration isolators. Make due allowance for the stiffening effect produced by the internal pressure,
both negative and positive, of the system.
Fit flexible connections between all fan inlets and outlets and their associated system ductwork. Provide acoustic
flexible connections having a mean sound reduction index of not less than 22dB. Ensure the material used
complies with those requirements of flexible connections specified elsewhere.


STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
European Standard.
- BS 6472 - Guide to evaluation of human exposure to vibration in buildings

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y54 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEM
100 PIPEWORK AND DUCTWORK
110 GENERAL
Provide all services (pipework and ductwork), irrespective of whether insulated or not in plant spaces, tank
rooms, roof spaces, false ceilings and ducts etc., with colour coded identification bands and labels to BS 1710 for
pipework and HVCA DW/144 for ductwork indicating service, size and direction of flow.
Apply the identification bands and labels, on suitable ground colours, either by painting or by PVC tapes. Where
colour coding is painted on, use heat-proof paint. If not self-adhesive fit the PVC tape using double sided
adhesive tape.
Fix the identification bands and labels at all junctions, at both sides of service appliances, bulkheads, wall
penetrations, service duct openings and at intervals of 12m maximum plus any other places where identification
is considered necessary by the Contract Administrator.
Paint on the identification of all exposed services external to buildings. Do not use PVC tapes in this application.
120 MAINS WATER OUTLETS

Above all mains cold water tap outlets fix a melamine or anodised aluminium label marked "DRINKING WATER" in
7mm high letters.
200 ACCESS PANELS

Provide ceiling tiles and other panels for commissioning and maintenance, of items such as valves, drain cocks,
stop cocks, trapping sets, controls, pressure switches, motors dampers and test points.
Provide and fix to the outside surface of all access ceiling tile and enclosure panels, both hinged and demountable
patterns, raised coloured discs or squares indicating the location of items of equipment.
Agree the coloured identification, means of fixing and display and charting for each individual location, for the
installation as a whole.
300 VALVE LABELS
310 MANUFACTURER’S LABELS

Ensure all mechanical and electrical equipment and plant (other than minor items) bears the manufacturer's
name, together with any particulars required for its identification for the supply of spares and for its duty. The
information may be either cast on, or stamped on to a plate securely fixed to the plant.
320 VALVE LABELS

Provide all valves including automatic control valves forming part of the installations (except valves on heaters,
pipe coils, branch circuits in rooms and draw-off branches in rooms where the circuits are obvious) with
permanent and approved labels fixed securely in an agreed manner on to the valves. Ensure that the pipeline and

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
valve reference numbers are engraved or stamped in plain block letters on the labels. Do not use self adhesive
labels.
Record the identifying number associated with each and every valve on the "record" drawings.
330 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT LABELS

On all mechanical plant and equipment shall, in addition to manufacturer's labels, permanently and clearly
uniquely label with identification name, reference number and function in the particular installation, eg "Pump No.
2, Constant Temperature Heating", in accordance with what is shown on the "record" drawings.
On all specified electrical plant and equipment fixed or handed to others for fixing, suitably and clearly label with
identification name, reference number and function in the particular installation. On thermostats and all other
equipment with adjustable settings, in addition include their normal or range of normal settings on the label.
Fix permanent and approved labels, engraved or stamped in plain block letters, by screws or nuts and bolts, to
the wall adjacent or directly on to the plant and equipment as appropriate.
Where it is more convenient to do so, eg for small electrical equipment, fix printed wall charts, giving any of the
above information, in convenient and logical position(s) and the plant or equipment labels only consist of a
reference number.
Ensure the labelling follows the system used on scheme drawings and schedules.
Show the identification names, reference numbers, on the "record" drawings.
The unique reference labelling may also be included in the order to be marked on packaging.
400 WALL CHARTS

Provide and fix in convenient and appropriate positions, the following printed wall charts framed, with hard back
and glass front, or photographically printed on laminated plastic, black on white, or suitably engraved dual colour
melamine sheet. Agree the final positions with the Contract Administrator before fixing:
- schematic layout of the mechanical installation - a fully detailed drawing with each pipeline and system clearly
identified
- valve charts, giving the pipeline, operation and position of all labelled valves
- "method of operation" and "safety procedures" wall chart adjacent each control panel
- "identification of pipeline" - an explanatory wall chart in tabular form, setting out the colour codes, providing
identification to pipelines to BS 1710, Appendix D, Table 3, and ductwork to HVCA DW/144
Provide identification names, reference numbers etc., as those shown on the "Record" drawings.
500 HAZARD WARNINGS SIGNS

Provide and install hazard warning signs on any services below 2.0m headroom within designated access or
escape routes in plant rooms or access voids. The hazard warning signs shall be either painted yellow and black
at 45° or purpose manufactured tape. Seek the Contract Administrator’s comments as to where and how the
signs should be erected.
Install warning signs adjacent to each item of machinery which is subject to automatic stop and start control.
Agree the format and material of construction of the label with the Contract Administrator. The wording shall be:

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
DANGER
THIS EQUIPMENT MAY START WITHOUT WARNING.
ISOLATE ELECTRICAL SUPPLY BEFORE WORKING ON THE PLANT.
Put warning notices by the discharge pipe outlets from all temperature and pressure vent and overflow pipes, to
warn of the particular danger.

European Standard.
- BS 1710 - Specification for identification of pipelines and services

buildings and their curtilages. Specification
- HVCA DW/144 - Specification for sheet metal ductwork
- DoH HTM 02-01 - Medical gases. Medical pipeline systems

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y90 FIXING TO BUILDING FABRIC
110 FIXING TYPES

Where appropriate securely fix all engineering components to the building fabric using any of the following
methods:
- Expanding bolts such as “Redheads” and “Rawlbolts” or similar for heavy loads fixed to masonry or concrete;
- white metal or plastic wall plugs and screws for light loads to masonry or concrete
- screws into wood for light fixings
- clamps and adaptors to fix to structural steelwork, if approved by the Contract Administrator in writing
- proprietary adaptors for proprietary cast in fixings when provided as part of the building
Employ all fixings within the loading recommendations of the manufacturer.
130 FIXING METHODS NOT ALLOWED

Do not use the following fixing methods:
- drilling structural steel work

- hanging supports with loose back plates under floor screed
- wooden or fibre wall plugs
- built-in fixings unless specifically detailed in the specification or on the drawings
200 HOLES FOR FIXINGS

Drill all holes required for fixings.

European Standard.
- BS 5080 - Structural fixings in concrete and masonry

- BS 8000 - Workmanship on building sites

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y61 HV/LV CABLES AND WIRING
100 GENERAL ITEMS
110 CABLES
Use only cables that have received product certification from the British Approvals Service for Cables (BASEC) or
equivalent third party certification.
Ensure that the neutral conductor of a 4-wire three-phase final or distribution circuit is of equal cross sectional
area to a phase conductor.
In the case of recessed tungsten and fluorescent luminaires or heat producing or emitting equipment that have
final connections using flexible cables, make the final connections using heat-resisting flexible cables.
Where heat producing/emitting equipment is directly wired, fit heat-resisting sleeving, of temperature rating not
less than 185ºC, over conductors within electrical equipment.
Do not use any current carrying conductor less than 1.5mm2 other than for ELV control and signaling applications
where conductors must be no smaller than 0.75mm2.
120 INSTALLATION
Do not use thermoplastic insulated (PVC) cables if the expected ambient temperature exceeds 50ºC. Do not use
thermosetting insulated (XLPE) cables if the expected ambient temperature exceeds 70ºC. In applications where
the ambient temperature exceeds these limits, install heat-resisting cables back to the first switch or distribution
board or a termination box that is not in an area with elevated temperature.
Where it is permissible for cables to traverse channel-ways or similar on continuously mounted fluorescent
luminaires, ensure that the cable rating is appropriate for the temperature inside the channel or duct by applying
the appropriate de-rating factor. Do not use thermoplastic insulated (PVC) cables if the expected temperature
exceeds 50ºC. Do not use thermosetting insulated (XLPE) cables if the expected temperature exceeds 70ºC.
Do not use thermoplastic insulated (PVC) cables for final connections to any appliances containing a heating
element or any appliance emitting heat. Wherever a final connection is within flexible conduit, make it using heat-
resisting cables. Install such cables from the rigid-conduit end of the flexible conduit.
Ensure cables are not in direct contact with any form of polystyrene used in the building.
Ensure that all cables are installed and dressed to give a neat and workmanlike installation.
Wherever cores less than 4 mm2 are terminated in tunnel and similar terminations, double them back on
themselves. Whenever preparing a cable for connection by stripping insulation from it, ensure that the stripping
tool does not damage the conductor. Strip back only so much of the cable that none of its conductor beyond its
termination is exposed, and that the termination compresses only its conductor and not its insulation. Do not use
soldered connections or lugs.
Terminate all conductors requiring bolted connections with compression lugs using an automatic compression
crimp tool that releases only after obtaining the correct crimp depth. Ensure that the cable, the compression lug,
the die used and the crimping tool are all compatible. For small compression lugs, use an appropriate hand-

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
crimping tool to BS EN 50109. Test every crimped termination and every mechanical termination for mechanical
soundness immediately after making.
Make all bolted terminations using suitable bolts, nuts and shake-proof washers; tighten connections to the
torque recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
Ensure that all cable joints and connections are electrically and mechanically sound.
For low voltage cables identify conductors using colours and cable markers as given in BS 7671.
Identify all cables using a proprietary alphanumeric marker system. Provide cable references at both ends of the
cable and at every fourth floor within the riser and include in the Tender for up to fourteen alphanumeric.
When cable markers with a limited fire hazard (LFH) rating are required, provide zero halogen markers made
from self-extinguishing material.
Arrange cable routes so that cables, hangers, cleats, and the like, do not come into contact with or in close
proximity to, pipe services.
Where cables rise from below the floor, protect them by metal conduit or capping to a height of 300 mm above
the floor surface. Increase the height of such protection to 2m where the cables are prone to mechanical
damage.
Ensure that all installation work results in a workmanlike installation consistent with recognised ‘good practice’ in
the industry.
130 CABLE TIES

Where cables use cable ties complying with BS EN 62275, use the following minimum classification of such cable
ties:
1. 6.1 According to material: - may be metallic, non-metallic or composite
2. 6.2 according to minimum loop tensile strength: - sufficient to support the mass of the cables and any loads
that may be imposed during the installation or any subsequent alteration of the installation and not less than
180N
3. 6.3 according to temperature: - maximum temperature not less than 85°C; minimum temperature not higher
than -5°C for indoor application and not higher than -15°C for outdoor application
4. 6.4 according to the flame application time: - not less than 30 seconds
5. 6.5 according to environmental influence: - for outdoor application, declared by the manufacturer as resistant
to UV and, for any metallic component, resistant to atmospheric corrosion.
Use ties that, when affected by fire, emit levels of smoke and corrosive gases no greater than the cable that they
support.
Where a cable is fire resisting, select its fixings to maintain the overall fire performance of the cable installation.
140 CABLE CLEATS

Select cleats of duty to suit the application with the following minimum BS EN 61914 classifications:
1. 6.1 according to material: - 6.1.1 Metallic, 6.1.2 Non-metallic or 6.1.3 Composite are acceptable

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
2. 6.2 according to maximum a and minimum temperature - A. maximum temperature not less than 85°C. B.
minimum temperature not higher than -5°C for indoor application and not higher than -15°C for outdoor
application
3. 6.3 according to resistance to impact: - not less than 6.2.3 Medium for indoor applications; not less than 6.2.4
Heavy for external applications
4. 6.4 resistant to type of retention or resistance to electromechanical forces or both: - not less than 6.4.1 and
6.4.3 for intermediate restrains. Where single core cables are installed, cleats and intermediate restraints shall
comply with 6.4.4 and be capable of withstanding two short-circuits without any adjustment of the cleats and/or
intermediate restraints between short-circuits 6.5 according to environmental influences: - - for outdoor
application, declared by the manufacturer as
resistant to UV and, for any metallic component, resistant to atmospheric corrosion.
Avoid excess pressure of cleats and other fixings on cables to prevent deformation of the plastic sheathing.
Non-metallic and composite cable cleats and intermediate restraints shall have adequate resistance to flame
propagation. Where a cable is fire resisting, select its fixings to maintain the overall fire performance of the cable
installation.
For single core SWA cables, use aluminium or proprietary plastic cleats / brackets for restraints as opposed to
steel in order to reduce the effect of eddy current heating within the brackets.
150 CABLE GLANDS

Select cable glands intended for the type of cable with which they are used. Select cable glands complying with
the following standards:
- for cable glands, and glands for non-armoured cable: - BS EN 50262. Ensure that the classification of the
gland as detailed in 6 Classification is compatible with the cable, the installation, and the intended purpose
- -for armoured cable: - BS 6121-1 with the gland selection compliant with BS 6121-5. Ensure that the
protective connection to earth for the gland is certified to a current at least equal to the maximum expected
for the installation
- -for mineral insulated cables: - BS EN 60702-2
- for high voltage cables: - a cable entry as described in BS 2562 fitted with a preparatory gland
- arrangement that provides the performance of a cable gland detailed in BS EN 50262, but not
- necessarily including the threaded entry. Ensure that the protective connection to earth for the gland is
certified to a current at least equal to the maximum expected for the installation.
Fit cable glands with shrouds. Ensure that glands for flexible cables include an effective cable guard.
Use cable glands, shrouds and all associated components that, when affected by fire, emit levels of smoke and
corrosive gases no greater than the associated cable.
Where a cable is fire resisting, select the gland to maintain the overall fire performance of the cable installation.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
200 LV CABLES IN CONDUIT AND TRUNKING
210 CABLES
Select cable for the method of installation that meets the requirements of the relevant Standard referred to in
clause 1100 or in the relevant ‘system’ section of this specification. This clause applies primarily to the following:
- thermosetting insulated non-sheathed single core cable to BS EN 50525 - 2 – 31. . harmonised code H07Z-R,
Cable code 6491B (Low smoke and fume cable)
- PVC insulated non-sheathed single core cable to BS EN 50525 - 2 – 31. harmonised code H07V-R,
- Cable code 6491X
- heat resisting rubber insulated non-sheathed single core cable to BS EN 50525 – 2 - 42 harmonised code
H07G-R
- heat resisting silicone rubber insulated non-sheathed single core cable to BS EN 50525 – 2 – 41 harmonised
code H05SJ-K.
It also applies to insulated and sheathed single core cables or insulated and sheathed multi-core cables with or
without a circuit protective conductor described below when installed in conduit or trunking:
- thermosetting insulated sheathed single core or multicore cable to BS 7211, Table Cable code 6181B, Table 5
Cable code 624#B. Use Class 2 multi-stranded conductors for cables of 4.0 mm2
- and above. Use Class 1 single-stranded conductors for cables below 4.0 mm2 (Low smoke and fume cable)
- PVC insulated and sheathed single core or multicore cable to BS 6004, Table 3 or 5 Cable code 619#Y or
Table 4 or 5 Cable code 624#Y. Use Class 2 multi-stranded conductors for cables of 4.0 mm2 and above. Use
Class 1 single-stranded conductors for cables below 4.0 mm2
- thermosetting insulated PVC sheathed single core cable to BS 7889, Table 3, harmonised code H07Z-R, CMA
code 6491XY.
This clause also applies to cables of other types where installed in trunking or conduit for support or mechanical
protection.
Use only cables that, when affected by fire, emit low levels of smoke and corrosive gases unless specified
otherwise in the relevant ‘system’ section of this specification or on the drawings.
Use only new cables with each coil having its manufacturer's seal intact giving the size, classification and the like.
Ensure that the sizes of all cables including circuit protective conductors (CPCs) are in accordance with BS 7671.
Design the cable sizing with a grouping correction factor for the actual circuits within the same containment, plus
a further factor for not less than 25% additional future circuits.
Where an installation includes an extension or alteration to a pre-existing installation, do not add cables where
their installation would result in the grouping correction factor for the total number of circuits reducing the
current carrying capacity of the cables below that required by BS 7671.
Where cables are routed outside of their associated trunking for making the final connection to an energy meter,
use sheathed and insulated single cables. Ensure that such cables where outside the trunking, are as short as
practicable and meet the metering requirements of the supply company. This method of connection is generally
applicable only for directly metered supplies of 100A or less.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
220 INSTALLATION
Install all cables in compliance with BS 7540.
Install cables only of the same voltage band within the same conduit and trunking system. Do not install cables
forming part of a fire alarm and detection system in the same cable containment as other circuits.
Provide a dedicated cable containment system exclusive to the wiring system serving a Group 2 medical location
(as defined in chapter 9 of ‘Guidance Note 7 [Special Locations] to BS 7671’, published by the IET) where
electrical equipment is supplied through a safety-isolating transformer.
Ensure the electromagnetic compatibility of equipment connected with wiring routed within the same conduits
and trunking.
Do not install cables when the temperature is below the minimum installation and handling temperature given in
BS 7540. If the cables have been exposed to such temperature allow a warming up time before the cables are
used.
Ensure that all conduit and trunking is de-burred and free from sharp edges, water, chemicals, building debris,
dust and other contaminants before cables are installed, and throughout the period of the installation contract.
In instances of close ceiling-mounted tungsten luminaires, install heat-resisting cables from the luminaire to the
respective lighting switch.
Carry out all wiring of multi-point circuits in a ‘loop-in' system, and do not use joints or connections, other than
those required for the connection of switches, fuses, socket outlets, motors and the like. Do not make cable joints
within trunking.
Do not allow cables to exceed the capacity of the conduit and/or trunking as defined in the ‘Selection and
Erection of Equipment’ Guidance Note 1 published by the IET.
In the event of any insulation being damaged, eg while cables are being drawn or laid in, remove and replace the
whole of the cable length. Damage includes any instance of bending to a radius less than the normal use
minimum bending radius given in BS 7540.
Do not bend cables during installation to a smaller radius than the normal use minimum bending radius specified
in BS 7540. Take into account that the minimum bending radius allowed for installation work, is within a limited
range of ambient temperatures.
Ensure that the sheathing and insulating materials of cables are not damaged while drawing cables into conduit.
"Comb" cables as drawing-in proceeds.
Do not draw cables into conduit occupied by cables. If conduits, occupied by cables, have to be used for
additional circuits or alterations, then isolate, identify, label, disconnect and withdraw all wiring from the conduit.
Replace the wiring by drawing it back into the conduit with the new wiring.
Do not draw cables into trunking but lay them in, irrespective of whether the trunking is installed ‘lid-up’,
‘liddown’,bor ‘lid-on-side’. "Comb" cables as laying-in proceeds and lay the neutral and circuit protective
conductor of each circuit with each phase cable of that circuit. Where trunking is installed lid-down, support the
cables with proprietary cable retainers at intervals not exceeding 1.0m. Ensure that cables are not trapped
between the trunking body and it’s lid or fastening.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where cables of several circuits occupy the same trunking, bind the cables of each individual circuit together at
intervals not exceeding 2m, by labelling ties or other similar means. Ensure that the ties permanently and clearly
show the circuit reference number.
Leave sufficient slack in the cables at conduit and trunking expansion joints.
Where cables are left unattended before installing them in conduits or trunking, temporarily form them into coils,
bind them and securely support the resulting coils at high level.
230 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS (CPCS)

Do not use conduit or trunking as a CPC medium. Install CPCs and ensure that they are of the same grade and
temperature rating as the live conductors of that part of the circuit. Use green and yellow coloured insulation for
CPCs as required by BS 7671.
Ensure that each circuit has its own CPC emanating from the distribution position and installed in the same
trunking/ conduit as the live conductors of that circuit.
Ensure that every CPC is sized in accordance with BS 7671.
Identify the CPC on all equipment clearly, by a cable marker at the earthing terminal. Fix a label adjacent to the
earthing terminal of every equipment box, appliance box and the like, stating: ‘PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR - DO
NOT DISCONNECT’ .
300 INSULATED AND SHEATHED CABLES
310 CABLES
Select cable for this method of installation that meets the requirements of the relevant Standard referred to in
clause 1100 or in the relevant ‘system’ Section of this specification. This clause applies primarily to the following:
- thermosetting insulated sheathed single core or multicore cable to BS 7211, Table 3 CMA code
- 6181B, Table 5 CMA code 624#B (Low smoke and fume cable)
- PVC insulated and sheathed single core or multicore cable to BS 6004, Table 3 CMA code 619#Y or Table 4
CMA code 624#Y
- thermosetting insulated PVC sheathed single core cable to BS 7889, Table 3, harmonised code H07Z-R, CMA
code 6491XY
Use Class 2 multi-stranded conductors for cables of 4.0mm2 and above. Use Class 1 single-stranded conductors
for cables below 4.0mm2.
Ensure that the cross-sectional area of the integral circuit protective conductor complies with BS 7671.
Identify conductors using colours as given in BS 7671. Fit coloured sleeves over bare copper CPCs, where
stripping-back the sheath has exposed them. Fit coloured sleeves to BS EN 60684 where the standard colour of
the phase or neutral conductor is at variance with the identification colour given in BS 7671 (for example: when
the blue conductor in a two core cable is used as a switchwire).

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
320 INSTALLATION
321 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Do not install cables when the temperature is below the minimum installation and handling temperature given in
BS 7540. If the cables have been exposed to such temperature allow a warming up time before the cables are
used.
In the event of any cable being damaged remove and replace the whole of the cable length. Damage includes
any instance of bending to a radius less than the normal use minimum bending radius given in BS 7540.
in BS 7540. Take into account that the minimum bending radius allowed for installation work, is within a limited
range of ambient temperatures.
Ensure compliance with the requirements of BS 7540 in respect of instances where the sheath temperature may
exceed 50ºC by ensuring that:
- either the cable is located so that persons or animals will not touch it, or
- the cable is de-rated to prevent its temperature from rising above 50ºC.
Do not bury these cables underground. Only install these cables in external locations if contained within conduits
or trunking.
Do not install these cables in Hazardous Areas.
Install and fix all cables as required by BS 7540 using single pin or saddle clips. Use clips that emit levels of
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire no greater than the cable that they support. Where cables are
supported on cable tray, or supported in other similar ways, fixing of the cables using cable ties is acceptable.
Where cables are fixed using cable ties ensure that the rating of the cables is not affected beyond that allowed
for by the grouping factors applied.
Where cables are supported from a catenary system use only proprietary catenary fixing clips suitable for the
environment they are installed in.
Provide accessory boxes for all terminations and accessories.
Where cables enter boxes ensure that all cable sheaths pass fully into the box via a rubber insert bush and web.
In areas where class 4 conduit or trunking is installed (eg in kitchens, plantrooms and areas subject to
dampness), use packed glands with neoprene washers in lieu of the rubber insert bushes. Within every box
ensure that the CPC has sleeving coloured green/ yellow in accordance with BS 7671, where connecting to the
earthing terminal. Install a separate green/ yellow sleeved CPC from the earthing terminal of the box to the
earthing terminal of the accessory or appliance.
Wire lighting circuits on the ‘three-plate-rose’ system and wire socket outlets on the ‘ring-final-circuit’ system
unless otherwise specified.
Do not use these cables for final connections to any heat emitting appliance nor to any appliance containing any
heating element.
Fit heat-resisting sleeving of temperature rating not less than 185ºC, over conductors within electrical equipment,
including tungsten luminaires where the temperature at the termination may exceed the temperature rating of
the cable.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
322 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR SURFACE INSTALLATIONS

Comply fully with clause 321 of this specification.
Install cables as inconspicuously as possible, taking advantage of the features of the building by fixing in corners,
along skirting boards, mouldings and the like, and around fitments and the like.
Where cables are installed in roof spaces or lofts, clip them to the side of joists and rafters. Where traversing
between adjacent joists or rafters, supply and fix a ‘binder-joist’ or suitable batten and clip the cable to its side.
323 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCEALED INSTALLATIONS

Comply fully with clause 321 of this specification.
Protect cables by means of galvanised metal capping where concealed in solid masonry walls.
Where cables are routed in hollow partitions ensure they are mechanically protected by virtue of their position or
otherwise by metallic conduit. Ensure that cables installed in hollow partitions are arranged in such a way that
they are effectively supported.
Where cables are concealed within solid walls or partitions, route them vertically in the zone directly above or
below the electrical accessory they serve. Do not install horizontal cabling to or from accessories.
Where cables are routed through joists, drill through the neutral axis of each joist perpendicular to its surface,
ensuring that there is at least 50mm of joist above and below the hole. Do not notch joists.
Terminate all lighting points in a ceiling rose box mounted flush to the ceiling. Ensure that every such box is of
heavy-gauge, self-extinguishing PVC to the relevant British Standard, reinforced with tapped metal inserts.
Do not lay cables directly on suspended ceilings. Where groups of cables are routed above suspended ceilings,
clip them directly to the soffit or secure them to cable trays (or similar containment). Where single cables are
routed above suspended ceilings, secure them to a catenary wire or route them through a length of rigid
suspended conduit bushed at both ends. This also applies to sheathed multi-core flexible cables connecting
electrical equipment fixed in the ceiling void (eg fan-coil units) or recessed into the suspended ceiling (eg
luminaires).
Where sheathed multi-core flexible cables are used to make final connections to electrical equipment and
luminaires, ensure that cord-grips are used at both ends to secure the sheath of the cable in order to prevent
strain on the conductors.
400 FIRE-RESISTING CABLES OF VOICE ALARM AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
410 CABLES AND CABLE SYSTEMS

For public address systems that are used for announcing the evacuation of a building (including voice alarm
systems), emergency voice communication [EVC] systems and for fire detection and alarm systems, use
fireresisting cable systems of ‘standard fire resistance’ (PH 30) or ‘enhanced fire resistance’ (PH 120) as required
by the appropriate part(s) of BS 5839.
One or more of the following wiring systems shall be utilized:
- Mineral insulated cable systems complying with BS EN 60702-1 and BS EN 60702-2 and BS EN
- 60332-1-2

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Fire-resistant cables complying with IEC 60331-1 or IEC 60331-2 or IEC 60331-3 and with BS EN
- 60332-1-2
- Fire-resistant cables complying with test requirements of BS EN 50200 or BS 8434 or BS 8491,
- appropriate for the cable size and with BS EN 60332-1-2
- A wiring system maintaining the necessary fire and mechanical protection.
- The wiring system selected shall meet the requirements of the appropriate part(s) of BS 5839 relative to the
application and shall be mounted and installed in such a way that the circuit integrity will not be impaired
during a fire.
BS 5839 specifies cables to BS EN 60702-1, BS 7629-1 and BS 7846 as being suitable when appropriately selected
for the application.
Examples of a system maintaining the necessary fire and mechanical protection could be:
- constructional enclosures to maintain fire and mechanical protection, or

- wiring systems in separate fire compartments.
Use clips that emit levels of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire no greater than the cable that they
support.
Ensure that all accessories, including, but not limited to fixings, supports, terminations, terminals and glands are
compatible with the cable selected and together with the cable containment and supports form a cabling system
that meets the required integrity standard. Produce documentary evidence and technical information that
demonstrates that the cable system as a whole is consistent in its fire-resistance rating; ensure that such
documentation is incorporated in the building health and safety file and forms part of the relevant operation and
maintenance manuals.
Flexible soft skin cables may be used in all situations except where specifically forbidden; by clause 420 of this
specification, by any particular specification or on any drawing.
Obtain written assurance from the manufacturer of the fire alarm, voice alarm and EVC systems installed, that the
proposed cabling system is compatible with the fire alarm, voice alarm or EVC system. Ensure that the assurance
documentation is incorporated in the building health and safety file and forms part of the relevant operation and
maintenance manuals.
420 INSTALLATION
Install fire-resisting cables in compliance with BS 5839-1, BS 7540 and the cable manufacturer's guidance.
Fix fire-resisting cables to fire-resisting structure and secure with fire-resisting fixings.
Where there is risk of damage by rodents, use armoured cable or install the cable within steel conduit.
Do not install cables when the temperature is below the minimum installation and handling temperature
recommended by the cable manufacturer. If the cables have been exposed to such temperature allow a warming
up time before the cables are used.
In the event of any cable being damaged remove and replace the whole of the cable length. Damage includes
any instance of bending to a radius less than the normal use minimum bending radius given by the cable
manufacturer.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
by the cable manufacturer. Take into account that the minimum bending radius allowed for installation work, is
within a limited range of ambient temperatures.
Do not bury flexible soft skin cables underground.
Do not install flexible soft skin cables in Hazardous Areas unless appropriate certification exists for the cable and
installation.
For surface installations install cables as inconspicuously as possible, taking advantage of the features of the
building by fixing in corners, along skirting boards, mouldings and the like, and around fitments and the like.
Protect cables by means of galvanised metal capping where concealed in solid masonry walls. Where cables are
routed in hollow partitions ensure they are mechanically protected by virtue of their position or otherwise by
metallic conduit. Ensure that cables installed in hollow partitions are arranged in such a way that they are
effectively supported.
Where cables are concealed within solid walls or partitions, route them vertically in the zone directly above or
below the accessory they serve. Do not install horizontal cabling to or from accessories.
Where cables are routed through joists, drill through the neutral axis of each joist perpendicular to its surface,
ensuring that there is at least 50mm of joist above and below the hole. Do not notch joists.
Do not lay cables directly on suspended ceilings. Where groups of cables are routed above suspended ceilings,
clip them directly to the soffit or secure them to cable trays (or similar containment). Where single cables are
routed above suspended ceilings, secure them to a catenary wire or route them through a length of rigid
suspended conduit bushed at both ends.
500 FIRE-RESISTING CABLES FOR GENERAL APPLICATIONS
510 CABLES AND CABLE SYSTEMS

For wiring and interconnection where it is required to maintain circuit integrity under fire conditions for longer
periods than can be achieved with cables of conventional construction, one or more of the following wiring
systems shall be utilised:
- Mineral insulated cable systems complying with BS EN 60702-1 and BS EN 60702-2 and BS EN
- 60332-1-2
- Fire-resistant cables complying with IEC 60331-1 or IEC 60331-2 or IEC 60331-3 and with BS EN
- 60332-1-2
- Fire-resistant cables complying with test requirements of BS EN 50200 or BS 8434 or BS 8491,
- appropriate for the cable size and with BS EN 60332-1-2
- A wiring system maintaining the necessary fire and mechanical protection.
The wiring system selected shall meet the requirements of the appropriate part(s) of BS 5266 or BS 8519 relative
to the application and shall be mounted and installed in such a way that the circuit integrity will not be impaired
during a fire.
BS 5266 and BS 8519 specifies cables to BS EN 60702-1, BS 7629-1 and BS 7846 as being suitable when
appropriately selected for the application.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Examples of a system maintaining the necessary fire and mechanical protection could be:
- constructional enclosures to maintain fire and mechanical protection, or

- wiring systems in separate fire compartments.
Wiring for control and bus systems of safety services shall be in accordance with the same requirements as the
wiring which is to be used for the safety services. This does not apply to circuits that do not adverselymaffect the
operation of the safety equipment.
Use clips that emit levels of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire no greater than the cable that they
support.
520 INSTALLATION
Install fire-resisting cables in compliance with BS 7540, BS 8519 and the cable manufacturer's guidance.
For all other ‘installation’ matters comply with clause 320 of this specification.
600 MINERAL INSULATED, COPPER COVERED (MICC) CABLES
610 CABLES
Use only cables that comply with BS EN 60702.
Use mineral insulated cables with copper conductors, mineral insulation (inorganic type), copper sheaths and a
halogen free outer covering, unless specified otherwise in the relevant ‘system’ Section of this specification or on
the drawings.
Do not use cables of less than 1.5mm2.
When MICC cables are used in fire detection and alarm systems ensure that their outer coverings are coloured
red and that this colour of sheath is not used for any other application in the same building.
Use 500V grade for:
- socket outlet circuits

- lighting circuits except discharge lighting
- fire alarm systems
- call systems
- reduced low voltage systems.
Unless otherwise specified in the relevant ‘system’ section of this specification, use 750V grade for:
- motor wiring
- 400V 3 or 4 wire circuits
- discharge lighting circuits.
620 TERMINATIONS
Ensure the equipment for terminating MICC cables complies fully with BS EN 60702 and is of the same
manufacture as the cable.
Ensure seals comply with the following:

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- installations up to 105ºC - cold ‘screw-on’ pot type, sealed with plastic compound or alternatively,
- shrink-on type sealed by the application of heat
- installations between 105ºC and 185ºC - cold ‘screw-on’ pot type sealed with suitable plastic compound and
bonded glass-fibre caps or, alternatively, shrink-on type sealed by the application of
- heat.
Within 24 hours after sealing both ends of each MICC cable make a 500V dc (Megger) insulation resistance test
of each seal to prove an infinity reading.
Ensure that all terminations on surface installations have brass compression glands conforming to British
Standards and are fitted with shrouds. In areas where installations are concealed within the fabric of walls and
the like, use proprietary MICC clamps to the conduits and adaptable boxes.
Use proprietary male/female cable gland arrangements where cables are terminated in plain hole boxes.
Where glands are omitted or, where the termination is made into a non-metallic enclosure, provide patent CPC
tails with the protective conductor brazed to each pot by the manufacturer and suitably sleeved.
Insulate cable tails with sleeving to suit the prevailing temperature conditions. Ensure that sleeving for tungsten
luminaires is of the medium temperature range for use up to 185ºC.
Ensure that phase and neutral conductors have markers on the sleeving colour-coded in accordance with BS
7671. Ensure that CPC tails have green/yellow striped sleeving. Ensure that all such sleeving is anchored and
sealed to the pot.
Where MICC cables are used in hazardous areas (ie where gases, vapours or dust present a risk of
explosion), terminate them with glands and seals that have been certified for use in the hazardous area.
Ensure that the type of termination used is compatible with the electrical installation in the hazardous area (eg
flameproof, intrinsically safe). Ensure that the certification meets the current standards (eg ATEX) and include a
copy of the certification in the O&M instruction manuals.
Ensure the environmental conditions when making terminations are such that the work can be carried out without
detriment to the completed termination.
630 BOXES
Ensure that all boxes used for terminating or jointing MICC cables are conduit boxes of Class 4 protective finish to
BS EN 61386. Install boxes of the 'terminal', 'through', 'tee', or 'crossing' circular patterns for all lighting points.
Ensure steel boxes have lugs suitably tapped to receive brass cover fixing screws (not selftapping).
Fit a heavy steel cover to each box, unless an accessory or fitting is mounted.
Where boxes are in exterior locations or in areas of continual dampness, use conduit boxes or adaptable boxes
having external lugs and a waterproofing seal between the box and the cover; where they are in other areas, use
adaptable boxes that do not have external lugs.
Ensure that all conduit boxes and adaptable boxes have terminal blocks supplied and fixed where used as
junction boxes with permissible cable joints. Ensure terminal blocks have brass connectors shrouded in porcelain
or heat-resisting material capable of withstanding, without deterioration, the same temperatures as the pots,
insulation and sleeving. Ensure the box is of a size to allow for the terminal block and to facilitate neat
connections.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure all conduits, accessories, or adaptable boxes, to which flexible cables, or flexible conduits are fitted, or
upon which accessories or equipment are mounted, have earthing terminals that are securely fixed to the box.
640 INSTALLATION
Install all MICC cables in compliance with BS 7540. Ensure that MICC cables are installed only by electricians who
have received a course of instruction on the handling, jointing and termination of MICC cables.
Also ensure that the installers are fully instructed in the use of the specialist tools recommended by the
manufacturer of the cable that is used in the installation.
Where cables are buried underground comply with clause 900 of this specification.
Secure cables by means copper saddles with a halogen free covering, meeting the same performance
requirements as the cable outer covering, using 30mm x 4.0mm diameter. roundhead brass fixing screws.
Use multiple saddles where several cables are installed together. Where cables are specified with no outer
covering use copper saddles with no covering.
Ensure the maximum spacing of fixings complies with the recommendations of the manufacturer and in any case
do not exceed:
Overall Diameter of the MICC Maximum Horizontal Spacing Maximum Vertical Spacing
Cable
Below 9mm 600mm 800mm
9mm thro 15mm 900mm 1200mm
Over 15mm 1500mm 2000mm
Where MICC cables are concealed in masonry walls ensure they are securely fixed in position before the wall is
plastered or rendered. Where cables are routed in hollow partitions ensure they are mechanically protected by
virtue of their position or otherwise by metallic conduit. Ensure that cables installed in hollow partitions are
installed in such a way that they are effectively supported.
Route MICC cables vertically only when they are concealed within a wall and are directly above or below the zone
of the electrical accessory they serve.
Where surface-mounted equipment is installed on a concealed MICC installation, ensure that the cables terminate
in a flush mounted box, and that the back of the equipment is drilled and bushed for back entry.
Then install the equipment over to conceal the box.
For surface installations ensure cables are installed neatly on the surface and routes are truly horizontal, vertical
or parallel with the features of the building.
Ensure that the routes of cables laid in floor screeds are planned to avoid areas where there is a possibility of
floor fixings. Avoid centres and edges of doorways to allow for fixing closure bolts and the like.
Ensure that cable crossings in floor screeds are kept to a minimum and maintain a screed cover of 25 mm above
cables.
Ensure that MICC cables fixed to galvanised cable tray have an outer covering. Fix saddles using brass roundhead
screws, washers and nuts.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Make connections to items of equipment subject to vibration, adjustment or withdrawal, by terminating the
cables in an appropriate adaptable box, sited adjacent to the item being connected. Enclose the final connection
from the box in metallic flexible conduit or install a 360º loop not less than 150mm diameter immediately
adjacent to the cable entry to the equipment. Allow a clear space of not less than 10mm at the point where the
cable crosses itself.
Ensure all cables are installed, straightened and suitably dressed with rollers and the like, to give a neat and
workmanlike installation. Ensure that there is no damage to the cable sheath or outer covering.
At termination positions, arrange cable conductors to minimise crossing.
Fit surge suppressors to all cable ends connected to motors with star connection up to and including 2Kw size.
Segregate MICC cables used for a fire alarm installation, from all other cable categories, by providing separate
containment.
700 ARMOURED CABLES – LOW VOLTAGE
710 CABLES
Use cables having Class 2 stranded copper conductors, unless specified otherwise in the relevant ‘system’ Section
of this specification or on the drawings.
The abbreviation “XLPE/SWA/LSF” indicates: XLPE compound insulation; polymeric material bedding single steel
wire armouring; black low smoke and fume sheath overall; 600/1000V grade in accordance with BS 6724.
The abbreviation “XLPE/AWA/LSF” indicates: XLPE compound insulation; polymeric material bedding single
aluminium wire armouring; black low smoke and fume sheath overall; 600/1000V grade in accordance with BS
6724.
The abbreviation “XLPE/SWA/LSF/FR/F#” where # is either 2,30,60 or 120 indicates: XLPE compound insulation;
polymeric material bedding single steel wire armouring; black low smoke and fume sheath overall; 600/1000 V
grade fire resisting cable in accordance with BS 7846. F# indicates the category of fire resistance as given in BS
7846 and in the absence of the inclusion of this designation use F120 cable.
The abbreviation “XLPE/SWA/PVC” indicates: XLPE compound insulation; polymeric material bedding; single steel
wire armouring; black PVC-sheathed overall; 600/1000V grade in accordance with BS 5467.
The abbreviation “XLPE/AWA/PVC” indicates: XLPE compound insulation; polymeric material bedding; single
aluminium wire armouring; black PVC-sheathed overall; 600/1000V grade in accordance with BS 5467.
Use only cables that, when affected by fire, emit low levels of smoke and corrosive gases unless specified
otherwise in the relevant ‘system’ section of this specification or on the drawings.
Where cable sizes are not detailed then size these in accordance with BS 7671.
Ensure that all cables are of the same manufacture and delivered to site in continuous lengths complete with end
caps.
At the manufacturer’s works subject all cables to the routine tests detailed in the relevant British Standards.
Submit duplicate copies of test certificates to the engineer.
On every single-core cable operating on ac systems ensure that its armouring is non-magnetic (ie is not steel).

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
720 TERMINATIONS, STRAIGHT JOINTS, TEES AND BRANCHES

Make all cable joints using a proprietary cast resin kit system, cold shrink system or heat shrink joint system
supplied by one manufacturer and install strictly in accordance with its instructions. Install mechanical protection
for the cable joint (in the case of a cast resin joint kit the encapsulation is considered to provide this). For shrink
joints use a further encapsulation when buried or if on cable tray or similar arrangement cover the joint with a
metal tray or equivalent.
Make connections at joints using connectors designed for LV applications that are correctly sized for the type and
size of conductors. Connections may utilize either compression tooling or be of the shear bolt type. For
compression connectors use a compression tool that does not release until the correct compression has been
achieved and ensure compatibility between the tool, die and connector. Ensure that the resistance of the jointed
conductors is no greater than that of the equivalent length of a conductor without a joint and that the insulation
resistance between cores, and between cores and earth, is no less than that of the original cable.
At joints utilise solder-less earthing connections comprising a constant force spring and earthing connection for
the armour connections. Ensure that the conductivity and fault current capability of the earth connection across
the joint is at least equal to that of the cable without the joint.
Fit cable glands complying with BS 6121-1 at all terminations. Select glands in accordance with BS 6121 -5 and
use brass compression glands for steel wire armoured cables and use aluminium alloy glands suitable for
accepting an insulated insert for single-core aluminium armoured cables. Use non-ferrous gland plates for single-
core cables. Ensure that all glands have cone grip armour clamps with suitable provision for cross joint bonding.
Where armoured cables are used in hazardous areas (i.e. where gases, vapours or dust present a risk of
explosion), terminate them with glands and seals that have been certified for use in the hazardous area.
Ensure that the type of termination used is compatible with the electrical installation in the hazardous area (eg
flameproof, intrinsically safe). Ensure that the certification meets the current standards (eg ATEX) and include a
copy of the certification in the O&M instruction manuals.
Ensure the environmental conditions when jointing or terminating cables are such that the work can be carried
out without detriment to the completed joint or termination.
730 INSTALLATION OF ARMOURED, PVC OR XLPE INSULATED CABLES

Do not install cables when the temperature is below the higher of:
- the minimum installation and handling temperature recommended in the installation

- recommendations appendix of the appropriate cable standard or the minimum installation and handling
temperature given by the cable manufacturer.
Allow a warming up time before the cables are used if the cables have been exposed to such temperatures.
Do not bend cables to a radius smaller than the larger of:
- the minimum installation radius specified in the installation recommendations appendix of the
- appropriate cable standard
- the minimum installation radius recommendations of the manufacturer.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where cables need to be pulled by winches or use similar mechanical aids, use them fully in accordance with the
cable manufacturer’s instructions. Record the pulling tension and do not exceed the allowable maximum for the
method by which the winch is attached to the cable.
Ensure cables, wherever installed including those fixed on walls or installed in accessible ducts, are fixed at
intervals to prevent sag, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure bends are fully
supported.
Fix cables, including those in building engineering services ducts, using cable cleats complying with clause 140 of
this specification and galvanised bolts where:
- the cable is rated as in free air (Reference method C (20) of BS 7671)

- the cable is rated as on trays with the cables in a group spaced (Reference method E or F (31) of BS 7671)
- the cable is rated as in trenches (Reference method B (54 or 56) of BS 7671). Note that the rating of cables is
based on cables in a group being spaced, unless otherwise specifically indicated.
- Fix cleats so that the maximum spacing between supports does not exceed the lower spacing of those
recommended by the manufacturer of the cable and the cleat. Ensure that the cleat and fixing selection takes
into account the full details of the installation including the static load of the cable and any load imposed by,
but not limited to, wind, icing and the load for wind including icing.
- When the selection takes into account the full details of the installation including the static load of the cable
and any load imposed as described above, the fixing may use plastic covered, galvanised, perforated steel
strip and galvanised bolts where:
- the cable is rated as open and clipped direct with the cables in a group touching (Reference method C (20) of
BS 7671)
- the cable is rated as on trays with the cables in a group touching (Reference method E or F (31) of BS 7671).
Ensure the material used for cleats, any covering on a metal cleat and the plastic covering of any strip fixing has
properties in a fire condition at least equal to that of the cable.
Where the cable is fire resisting select the fixing so that the overall fire performance of the cable installation is
maintained.
Avoid excess pressure of cleats and other fixings on cables to prevent deformation of the plastic sheathing.
Provide suitable supporting steelwork and/ or galvanised cable tray where cables cross open spaces.
Protect such steelwork by a rust-inhibiting paint.
Unless specified otherwise in the relevant ‘system’ section of this specification or on the drawings, arrange the
installation of single core cables neatly in close trefoil using cable cleats and intermediate restraints complying
with clause 140 of this specification.
Install fixings at intervals compliant with the cleating system certification for a maximum fault current at least
equal to that of the installation. Install the neutral conductor adjacent to the group fixed in a similar manner.
When approaching terminations, ensure the cores remain in close trefoil for as long a distance as possible,
keeping the splayed length to the minimum that practical considerations will permit, having regard to minimum
bending radii. Where single core cables are installed with more than one cable per phase cleat the cables in three
phase groups with the neutral alongside each group using cleats as described above.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where single core cables are specifically detailed to have a flat spaced installation, arrange them neatly at the
required spacing fixed to a nonmagnetic cleating system otherwise as described above for cables in trefoil. Install
fixings at intervals compliant with the cleating system certification for a maximum fault current at least equal to
that of the installation. Install the neutral conductor adjacent to the group fixed in a similar manner. Where single
core cables are installed with more than one cable per phase cleat the cables in three phase groups with the
neutral alongside each group using cleats as described above.
Fix cables laid in racks, hangers or on steelwork at intervals to prevent sag, in accordance with BS 7671.
Ensure the armouring is independently bonded to the switchgear and at termination points, using the “banjo” of
the gland and single green/ yellow cable. Ensure the armouring is bonded for continuity at all points. Use copper
conductors of the correct size in accordance with BS 7671.
Where cables pass through walls and floors fit them with permanently fixed oversized sleeves each packed with
fire resisting infill. Ensure where cables rise or fall on walls they are protected to a height of 2 m with a sheet
steel guard where prone to mechanical damage.
Ensure all cables are installed, straightened and dressed to give a neat and workmanlike installation.
Where armoured cables are installed or terminated into electrical equipment in hazardous areas ensure that a
sealed gland with ATEX certification is used of the correct size and type for the cable and the equipment into
which it is installed. Ensure that the gland is correctly rated for the gas group of the particular gas or vapour.
Where solvent vapours are present ensure that the sheath of the cable and the gland material will not be
degraded.
800 CABLES FOR HIGH VOLTAGE APPLICATION

These clauses apply to cables for use with system nominal voltages above 3.3kV and up to 11kV.
810 CABLES
Use cables of the following types as indicated in the system sections of this specification or explicitly detailed on
the drawings.
The abbreviation “XLPE/SWA/LSF” associated with a cable connected to a high voltage system indicates: copper
conductors; XLPE compound insulation; single steel wire armouring; red LSF compound-sheathed overall; with a
3.8/6.6 kV to 19/33 kV voltage designation in accordance with BS 7835.
The abbreviation “XLPE/AWA/LSF” indicates: copper conductors; XLPE compound insulation; single aluminium
wire armouring; red LSF compound-sheathed overall; with a 3.8/6.6 kV to 19/33 kV voltage designation in
accordance with BS 7835.
The abbreviation “XLPE/SWA/PVC” associated with a cable connected to a high voltage system indicates: copper
conductors; XLPE compound insulation; single steel wire armouring; red PVC-sheathed overall; with a 3.8/6.6 kV
to 19/33 kV voltage designation in accordance with BS 6622.
The abbreviation “XLPE/AWA/PVC” indicates; copper conductors XLPE compound insulation; single aluminium
wire armouring red PVC-sheathed overall; with a 3.8/6.6 kV to 19/33 kV voltage designation in accordance with
BS 6622.
The abbreviation “XLPE/SWA/PE” associated with a cable connected to a high voltage system indicates: copper
conductors; XLPE compound insulation; single steel wire armouring; red MDPE sheathed overall; with a 3.8/6.6
kV to 19/33 kV voltage designation in accordance with BS 6622.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The abbreviation “XLPE/AWA/PE” indicates: - copper conductors XLPE compound insulation; single aluminium
wire armouring; red MDPE sheathed overall; with a 3.8/6.6 kV to 19/33 kV voltage designation in accordance
with BS 6622.
The abbreviation PICAS indicates a three-core utility cable with stranded aluminium conductors, belted paper
insulation, corrugated aluminium sheath and a red PVC overall sheath, with a 6.35/11kV voltage designation
constructed in accordance with the Energy Networks Association specification ENA TS 09-12.
Use only cables that emit low levels of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire for use within buildings
unless an alternative is specifically detailed in the relevant ‘system’ section of this specification or on the
drawings.
Ensure all cables are of the same manufacture and delivered to site in continuous lengths, complete with end
caps.
At the manufacturer’s works, subject cables to the routine tests detailed in the relevant British Standards. Submit
duplicate copies of test certificates to the engineer.
820 JOINTING AND TERMINATING HV CABLES

Use cable accessories (terminations and joints) complying with, or that have been tested in accordance with BS
EN 50393 and BS EN 61442. Select accessories that are compatible with the cables with which they are used.
Make connections and terminations using lugs and connectors designed for HV applications and are correctly
sized for the type and size of conductors. For terminations also ensure compatibility with the equipment terminal.
Ensure that all terminations and connectors include a moisture block. Connections and terminations may utilise
either compression tooling or be of the shear bolt type. For compression connectors use a compression tool that
does not release until the correct compression has been achieved and ensure compatibility between the tool, die
and connector.
Utilise solder-less earthing connections comprising a constant force spring and earthing connection to bond
conductor screens. Also use solder-less connection arrangements for the overall screen and armour connections.
At joints ensure that the conductivity and fault current capability of the earth connection across the joint is at
least equal to that of the cable without the joint.
detailed otherwise in the relevant ‘system’ section of this specification or on the drawings. Use glands that are
compatible with the cable and the type of termination selected.
The use of cold shrink, cold applied or heat shrink technology for the stress control and insulation at terminations
is technically acceptable.
The use of cold shrink and heat shrink technology for the stress control and insulation at joints is technically
acceptable.
Although there is a choice of joint and termination types the generic risk assessment for the jointing and
termination of cables indicates that - by avoiding the use of applied heat in the process and therefore removing
fire hazards, hazards associated with escaping flammable gas and the exposure to fumes – the cold shrink and
cold applied techniques represent a lower total risk. Demonstrate that the installation practices make the
potential risk associated with the above hazards negligible when using techniques that apply heat.
Provide overall protection for joints by means of an outer case filled with resin compound or equivalent additional
mechanical protection. Where joints are directly buried, ensure that the joint is supported by means of paving

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
flags laid immediately below the bedding sand on which the finished joint rests. Extend the flags for a distance of
700mm beyond each end of the joint. Where joints are installed in locations other than buried for example in
buildings, cable ducts or other similar instances support the cable joint by means of a cable tray or ladder.
Make HV cable terminations at equipment cable boxes. Include a terminal boot to insulate the equipment
terminal cable lug connection. Use non-ferrous gland plates for single-core cables. Make the termination straight
without a cross or significant roll of the cores in the cable box. Achieve this requirement by one of the following
methods:
- make the final connection to equipment by means of three single core cables at each end of the circuit and
install a trifurcating joint within 10 m of the final termination at each end, to make a transition to the three
core cable. PREFERRED SOLUTION
- install any circuit of less than 50m in length in single core cables. PREFERRED SOLUTION
- make the final connection to equipment at one end by means of a three core termination made straight and,
at the other end of the circuit, by means of three single core cables with a trifurcating joint installed within
10m of the final termination, to make a transition to the three core cable
- make the final connection to equipment at both ends by means of a three core termination made
- straight, and install a cross joint within the circuit route to restore correct phasing
- make the final connection to equipment at one end by means of a three core termination made straight. At
the other end, at a cast resin transformer, power factor correction cubicle or similar equipment that does not
include a cable box and where the space for cable termination is unrestricted, make the final connection by a
cross joint.
When terminating cables at equipment with cable boxes designed as compound filled ensure that the finished
clearances in the box are sufficient for the installed cable and termination type. Examples of works needed to
ensure compatibility are extending the box by lowering the gland plate and the replacement of the cable box with
a newly fabricated steel box. Do not reuse cast iron cable boxes; replace them with fabricated steel boxes.
Other than as detailed above join cables only when they cannot be supplied or installed as a continuous single
length. Obtain written agreement of the engineer if cables have to be joined inside buildings.
Use only suitably qualified and experienced persons for the jointing and termination of HV cables who have
received a course of instruction on the proposed cable joint and in the use of the specialist tools recommended
by the manufacturer. Ensure that a copy of the training certificate is included in the O&M instruction manuals and
the joints and terminations are traceable to the individual concerned.
Ensure the environmental conditions for jointing or terminating cables are such that the work can be carried out
without detriment to the completed joint. Once the cable seal has been broken ensure that the jointing work on
the cable end is undertaken continuously until completed and the cable sealed against the ingress of moisture.
830 INSTALLATION OF HV ARMOURED CABLES

Do not install cables when the temperature is below the higher of:
- the minimum installation and handling temperature recommended in the installation recommendations
appendix of the appropriate cable standard or,
- the minimum installation and handling temperature recommended by the cable manufacturer.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Allow a warming up time before the cables are used if the cables have been exposed to such temperatures.
Do not bend cables to a radius smaller than the larger of:
- the minimum installation radius specified in the installation recommendations appendix of the appropriate
cable standard
- the minimum installation radius recommendations of the manufacturer.
Arrange single core cables neatly in close trefoil fixed with cable cleats and intermediate restraints complying with
clause 140 of this specification. Fix at intervals compliant with the cleating system certification. When
approaching terminations, ensure the cores remain in close trefoil for as long as possible, keeping the splayed
length to the minimum that practical considerations will permit, having regard to minimum bending radii.
Arrange cable routes so that cables, hangers, cleats, and the like, do not come into contact with, or in close
proximity to, piped services. Ensure a separation of not less than 600mm from other building engineering
services.
Where HV cables are routed within buildings or externally and not underground, install them on continuous
ladder rack, heavy duty cable tray or in accessible service ducts. Fix the cables at intervals, in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations using cleats complying with clause 140 of this specification.
Secure each cleat to the tray, cable ladder or service duct using bolts. Ensure that the cleat and fixing selection
takes into account the full details of the installation including the static load of the cable and any load imposed
by, but not limited to, wind, icing and the load for wind including icing. Provide suitable supporting steelwork
and/ or galvanised cable tray where cables cross open spaces. Protect such steelwork by a rust-inhibiting paint.
Where cables need to be pulled by winches or similar mechanical aids, use such aids fully in accordance with the
cable manufacturer’s instructions. Record the pulling tension and do not exceed the allowable maximum for the
method by which the winch is attached to the cable.
Where cables pass through walls and floors fit them with oversized sleeves permanently fixed, packed with fire
resisting infill. Ensure where cables rise or fall on walls they are protected to a height of 2m with a sheet steel
guard where prone to mechanical damage.
Ensure all cables are installed, straightened and dressed to give a neat and workmanlike installation.
Perform tests after installation of cables in accordance with the requirements of the installation appendix of the
particular Standard to which the cable was manufactured.
900 INSTALLATION OF CABLES UNDERGROUND

For each respective cable type, comply with the general requirements (including but not limited to installation
temperatures, pulling tension, bending radius, etc.) specified in the relevant clauses of this Section of the
specification.
Install underground cables in accordance with NJUG publication “Guidelines on the Positioning and Colour Coding
of Utilities' Apparatus”.
Where appropriate install underground cables in accordance with Guidance Note 7 to BS 7671, Special Locations,
published by the IET.
Install only MICC and armoured cable types (HV and LV) underground. Bury LV cables to a minimum depth of
600 mm to the top of the cable in unmade ground and of 800 mm in made-up ground, i.e. roadways, and the
like. For HV cables increase these depths respectively to 800 mm and 1000 mm.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where it is not possible to comply with the depths specified above install additional protection for the cable so
that the overall protection is equivalent to being buried at the normal depth. Additional protection may comprise
the installation of overlapping stainless steel plates of 8mm minimum thickness permanently marked to indicate
cables are buried below the plate.
Rest cables on a 50mm deep bed of sifted sand and riddled earth, then cover with a further depth of 50 mm of
the same material. The rating of cables shall be based on the thermal resistivity of the surrounding ground being
1.2 mK/W. The electrical installer shall also make allowance for the ground temperature in all final selection of
cables. Ensure that the selected sand and backfill material are such that the design thermal resistively of the
ground in which the cable is buried is not exceeded. Use only excavated material for backfill in areas that will
remain unmade ground, for example grass verges; in other areas use crushed stone fill that will ensure the
bearing capacity of the final surface is achieved.
Install two layers of permanently coloured yellow PVC marker tape 150mm wide along the entire length of the
cable. Place the lower layer 50 mm above the cable and the higher layer 300mm above. Mark the tape
"ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW - CAUTION" in black lettering printed continuously along its length. For HV cables,
substitute the lower layer of tape with cable tiles having the words “HV ELECTRICAL CABLE BELOW – CAUTION”
cast in them.
Ensure that backfill does not contain stone, brick, or any sharp material and is fully consolidated by means of a
rammer to the 300mm level before the second tape is laid. Only then carry out the final backfill to ground level
and suitably consolidate.
Ensure that cables are protected by circular conduits complying with BS EN 61386-24 encased in concrete under
roadways and at all other areas of vehicular traffic.
Where single core cables are laid direct in the ground to form a three phase circuit, lay them in touching trefoil
unless specifically detailed otherwise in the relevant ‘system’ Section of this specification or on the drawings. Bind
the trefoil group together using heavy-duty cable ties at intervals of one metre install the neutral conductor
adjacent to the group. Do not energise cables until the cables are buried, as the support in the event of a fault
condition is by means of the surrounding ground. Where single core cables are installed with more than one cable
per phase install the cables in three phase groups with the neutral alongside each group as described above. If
the cables are to be energised prior to being buried use cleats and intermediate restraints as detailed in clause
Y61.140 of this specification, to secure the cables.
Ensure cable conduits for cables underground are circular non-metallic and comply with BS EN 61386-24.
Use conduit system type 450 or 750, resistance to impact normal. Do not use conduits smaller than nominal size
50mm (37mm internal diameter.) Select a non threaded entry system (socket and spigot type). For conduits
installed straight between points select a rigid system; for conduits that require deviation from a straight route,
select pliable conduits.
For cables installed in conduits seal around the cables at all ends of conduits (including where they enter a
building), by a waterproof and gas-proof seal of self-extinguishing plastic foam of a type approved by the Energy
Networks Association. Fit suitable end caps to all unused spare conduits.
Ensure cables installed direct in ground have a minimum spacing of 300mm from HV/ EHV cables, of 600mm
from communication cables, alarm cables and gas services, and of 800mm from heating services.
Install cable route markers where cables are laid in grass verges, paved areas and the like. Space the cable route
markers at 45 m intervals on straight routes. Also place markers over all tee joints, at changes of direction, where

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
cables cross roads, and at building entries. Ensure that all markers are of a proprietary type, 200mm square
50mm deep, concrete with plastic inserts indicating the depth and voltage of the cable(s), and are laid level with
the finished surface.
Produce accurate plans with dimensions so that the location of any cable can be determined with a maximum
uncertainty of 100mm from local fixed features. Where multiple cables follow a route record the relative positions
of the cables and indicate the locations of any cables that cross and the relationship with key features of any
other buried service.
1000 MODULAR WIRING

Provide a modular wiring system that complies with BS 8488 – Prefabricated wiring systems intended for
permanent connection in fixed installations – Specification.
Provide fully dimensioned manufacturing and installation drawings of the entire modular wiring system for
comment prior to installation.
Unless specifically detailed otherwise in the relevant ‘system’ Section of this specification or on the drawings,
provide 5% as spares for all connectors and provide ordering details for replacement parts.
Ensure that the system components provide separated systems for lighting, power, clean earth power, IT
earthing systems, data and communications, bus systems and other ELV controls. Ensure that
connections/connectors for these types of components cannot be interchanged.
Ensure that the distribution units are secured to surfaces in concealed locations (eg to cable tray where in a void
beneath a raised access floor or, where in a ceiling void, to the soffit of the floor or roof above.)
Ensure that the interconnecting cables are of a type producing low emissions of smoke and corrosive gases when
affected by fire, compliant with BS EN 50525 - 2 – 31.
Ensure that the system incorporates installation couplers complying with BS EN 61535.
Ensure that all interconnecting cables are mechanically protected by flexible metallic conduits and suitable for the
environment in which they are installed. Ensure that plug-in connections are mechanically and electrically secure
and that they cannot be inadvertently dislodged. Make sure that all connections are shrouded and are of the
male/female type to ensure that no live parts can be exposed to touch when a component is unplugged. Ensure
that the components containing the interconnecting cables are selected, manufactured and installed so that they
are routed orthogonally, i.e. at right angles.
Ensure that the cables and connectors are sized to have current ratings not less than the circuit protective device
at the origin with any grouping de-rating factor applied. When calculating cable sizes, ensure that the orthogonal
routing of conductors is accounted for in the design cable lengths.
Ensure where the wiring system comprises a number of circuits connected to separate overcurrent protection
they shall emanate from LV switchgear and controlgear assembly, which conforms to the relevant part of BS EN
60439, BS EN 61439 or BS EN 61534.
Where the LV switchgear and controlgear assembly contains the wiring system overcurrent protection, the
connector to the LV switchgear and controlgear assembly shall conform to BS EN 61984 and the installation
coupler to the LV switchgear and controlgear assembly shall conform to BS EN 61535.
Ensure earth continuity and continuity of the circuit protective device throughout, which may be specified as a
dedicated clean electrical earth.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that the flexible conduit wiring sections are routed orthogonally (i.e. at right angles to each other) and are
secured to the sub-floor slab or soffit.
Ensure that each individual section of the installation is distinctly and durably marked with the following
information: - Mark of origin (trade mark / manufacturers identification mark / name of responsible vendor),
Rated current and reference installation method from BS7671 Table 4A2, Rated voltage, IP code if higher than
IP20, Manufacturers model number or type reference, Unique manufacturing batch reference for traceability, and
electrical test status in line with BS8488.
Ensure that the complete assembled system is designed, installed, tested and commissioned to BS 7671.
The specialist manufacturer / supplier shall provide system design information, validating conformity with
BS7671. This information can be for the complete system and not provided with each wiring section.

Where a Standard referred to in this section conflicts with a standard referred to in an associated ‘engineering
system’ section (eg S10, T31, V21, etc.) of this specification, the Standard referred to in the engineering system
section prevails.
the British Standard Institution, would also apply (see latest BSI Standard Catalogue etc.). Each product and each
European Standard.
- BS 2562 Specification for cable boxes for transformers and reactors

- BS 5467 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, armoured cables for voltages of 600/1000 V and 1900/3300
V
- BS 5839-1 Fire detection and fire alarm systems for buildings Part 1: Code of practice for system design,
installation, commissioning and maintenance
- BS 6004 Electric cables. PVC insulated, non-armoured cables for voltages up to and including 450/750 V, for
electric power, lighting and internal wiring
- BS 6121 Mechanical cable glands Part 1: Armoured glands. Requirements and test methods Part 5: Code of
practice for selection, installation and inspection of
- cable glands and armour glands
- BS 6622 Electric cables. Armoured cables with thermosetting insulation for rated voltages from 3.8/6.6 kV to
19/33 kV. Requirements and test methods
- BS 6387 Specification for performance requirements for cables required to maintain circuit integrity under fire
conditions
- BS 6724 Electric cables. Thermosetting, armoured cables for voltages of 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V, having
low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 7211 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, non-armoured cables for voltages up to and including
450/750 V, for electric power, lighting and internal wiring, and having low emission of smoke and corrosive
gases when affected by fire
- BS 7540 Electric cables. Guide to use for cables with a rated voltage not exceeding 450/750 V
- BS 7629 Electric cables. Specification for 300/500 V fire resistant screened cables having low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire
- BS 7835 Electric cables. Armoured cables with thermosetting insulation for rated voltages from 3.8/6.6 kV to
19/33 kV having low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire. Requirements and test
methods
- BS 7846 Electric cables.600/1000 V armoured fire resistant cables having a thermosetting insulation and low
emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire
- BS 7889 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, unarmoured cables for a voltage of 600/1000 V
- BS 8434 Methods of test for assessment of the fire integrity of electric cables Part 1: Test for unprotected
small cables for use in emergency circuits. BS EN
- 50200 with addition of water spray Part 2: Test for unprotected small cables for use in emergency circuits. BS
EN 50200 with 930°C flame and with water spray BS 8491 Method for assessment of fire integrity of large
diameter power cables for use as components for smoke and heat control systems and certain other active
fire safety systems
- BS 8519 Selection and installation of fire-resistant power and control cable systems for life safety and fire-
fighting applications - Code of practice
- BS EN 50086-2-4 Specification for conduit systems for cable management Part 2: Particular requirements
Section 2.4: Conduit systems buried underground
- BS EN 50200 Method of test for resistance to fire of unprotected small cables for use in emergency circuits
- BS EN 50262 Cable glands for electrical installations
- BS EN 50266 Common test methods for cables under fire conditions. Test for vertical flame spread of
vertically-mounted bunched wires or cables
- BS EN 50267 Common test methods for cables under fire conditions. Tests on gases evolved during
combustion of materials from cables
- BS EN 50393 Test methods and requirements for accessories for use on power cables of rated voltage 0,6/1,0
(1,2) kV
- BS EN 50525-1 Electric cables. Low voltage energy cables of rated voltages up to and including 450/750 V
(U0/U). General requirements
- BS EN 50525 Parts 2-81 Electric cables. Low voltage energy cables of rated voltages up to and including
450/750 V (U0/U). Specific requirements for different types of cables
- BS EN 60332 Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions
- BS EN 60439 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
- BS EN 60684 Flexible insulating sleeving
- BS EN 60702-1 Mineral insulated cables and their terminations with a rated voltage not exceeding 750 V.
Cables
- BS EN 60702-2 Mineral insulated cables and their terminations with a rated voltage not exceeding 750 V.
Terminations

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 61034 Measurement of smoke density of cables burning under defined conditions

- BS EN 61386 Conduit systems for cable management
- BS EN 61442 Test methods for accessories for power cables with rated voltages from 6 kV (Um = 7,2 kV) up
to 36 kV (Um = 42 kV)
- BS EN 61534 Powertrack systems
- BS EN 61535 Installation couplers intended for permanent connection in fixed installations
- BS EN 61914 Cable cleats for electrical installations
- BS EN 61984 Connectors. Safety requirements and tests
- BS EN 62275 Cable management systems. Cable ties for electrical installations
- IEC 60331 Tests for electric cables under fire conditions. Circuit integrity.
- ENA TS 09-12 Impregnated paper insulated corrugated aluminium sheathed 6350/11000 volt cable.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y62 BUSBAR TRUNKING
100 GENERAL - BUSBAR SYSTEMS

Refer to BS 7671, Appendix 8, for specific details.
Ensure the busbar trunking is designed for horizontal installation, rising mains or for feeder application as
indicated on the drawings and/or specification.
Ensure the current rating is as indicated on the drawings and/or specification.
Ensure the equipment is suitable for the voltage, frequency, number of phases, including any neutral and
earthing requirements as indicated on the drawings and/or specification.
Ensure the busbar trunking system is designed and manufactured to comply with BS EN 60439, Part 2.
Ensure the powertrack system is designed and manufactured to comply with BS EN 61534.
Ensure that the conductor bars are of pure electrical copper or aluminium.
Ensure the conductor bars are insulated from each other to provide excellent electrical and thermal
performance.
Ensure that the conductor bars are arranged in true sandwich formation such that the distance between them is
less than the thickness of each phase conductor.
Ensure that phase and neutral bars are of the same cross section. Reduced neutral bars will only be acceptable if
instructed by the engineer. Do not use phase reducers.
Provide an integral earth bar.
Ensure that conductor joints consist of pre-tapped fishplates suitable for bolts to be tightened to a
determined torque as defined by the manufacturer.
Ensure that all conductor joints are enclosed in sheet steel cover(s) to prevent unauthorised adjustment of the
torqued bolts.
Provide manufacturer’s purpose-made fittings, including all panel flanges, bends, flexibles, tee pieces, offsets and
special lengths etc., where a change of direction or termination occurs in a busbar run.
Ensure that all sheet metal cut ends are de-burred and painted prior to assembly.
Provide manufacturer’s fixing brackets to suit the trunking profile, unless otherwise specified. Fix the brackets to
the manufacturers recommended spacings.
Ensure that where the busbar enclosure passes through a fire rated floor or wall, it is fitted with the
manufacturers purpose-made fire barrier, and provide a fire seal around the trunking enclosure.
Provide crossing plates on both sides of the aperture to ensure a tidy finish, when the busbar trunking passes
through a floor or wall.
Provide tapping positions along the length of the trunking as indicated in the specification and/or drawings.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure the trunking is suitable for normal mechanical loads, unless otherwise specified, and that it will not be
used to support other equipment.
Ensure the phase sequence is maintained along the length of the busbar trunking system and be identical to all
systems in the installation. Busbar phase colour to be clearly marked in each trunking unit.
200 BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEMS

Ensure busbar trunking has ingress protection rating as stated elsewhere within this specification.
Ensure the busbar trunking is capable of withstanding the prospective fault current detailed on the
drawings/specification.
Ensure busbar trunking enclosure material and finish is as indicated in the specification and/or drawings.
Fully insulate the busbars with non-flammable low smoke and fume material.
Ensure the busbar trunking is designed to permit cutting on site.
Ensure the busbar trunking is provided with self-aligning mechanical and electrical joint sleeve(s) for busbar
section jointing, or pre-fabricated interlocking joints.
Provide busbar with facility for other specified tapping connections as described in specification and/or drawings.
Provide busbar trunking with hinged cover on each tapping outlet.
Provide end cap(s) manufactured from non-hygroscopic, self-extinguishing, halogen-free material.
Ensure flanges are available on the trunking to accept the manufacturers suspension flanges.
Provide factory fitted thrust block(s) for rising main applications.
Ensure that the busbar trunking is fitted with proprietary fittings, to allow for thermal expansion in the busbar
and movement across building expansion joints.
Incorporate a remote control bus in the enclosure for control purposes as indicated in the specification and/or the
drawings.
Provide busbar complete with 2no. sets of conductors to accept 2no. separate incoming power supplies as
indicated in the specification and/or drawings.
Where required, provide vibration absorber connection bar to enable flexible connection between busbar and
power equipment e.g. transformers.
300 TAPP OFF UNITS

Ensure the tap-off current rating is as indicated on the drawing and/or specification.
Ensure the tap-off unit has ingress protection rating of IP specified elsewhere within this specification.
Ensure the tap-off unit is fitted with protective device(s), eg HRC fuse(s), circuit breaker, motor protection, fuse
switch etc. as indicated in the specification and/or drawings.
Ensure the tap-off unit is either the plug-in type or bolt-on type to suit the type of busbar trunking, as detailed
elsewhere in the specification.
Ensure the tap-off unit is pre-wired.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Provide pre-wired, tap-offs with pre-determined phasing.
Ensure that the tap-off unit can be removed without the need to de-energise the busbar, if it is a plug-in type.
Ensure that the tap-off unit is manufactured so that current carrying metal is not exposed during insertion.
Provide safety device on the tap-off unit to ensure non-reversibility of the pins, when it is connected to the
busbar.
Provide tap-off blanking plates for all tap-off outlets not fitted with tap-off units.
Provide mechanical tap-off interlocking devices(s) to enable segregation of different types of systems, eg voltage,
frequency etc. supported by the same busbar enclosure.
Provide attachments to tap-off units, eg transmitters and receivers for control purposes as detailed in the
specification and/or drawings.
400 BUSBAR FEED UNIT

Ensure the feed unit current rating is as indicated on the drawing and/or specification.
Ensure the feed unit is the centre feed type.
Ensure the feed unit has ingress protection rating of IP Engineer to specify the IP rating.
Ensure the unit is a sealed box with cable termination.
Ensure the unit is manufactured from self-extinguishing material.
Fit the unit with an isolating switch, unless otherwise specified.
Provide feed unit capable of accepting separate power supply feeds.
Provide feed unit with flanged end.
Provide feed unit for direct bolting-on to power supply.
Provide the unit(s) with terminals sized to accommodate the incoming cabling detailed elsewhere in the
specification and/or the drawings.
500 SUPPORT SYSTEM

Install the busbar either flat or on edge as indicated on the drawings/or specification, and in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions.
Ensure the busbar is supported by proprietary brackets.
Ensure that adequate secondary supports are provided to ensure a safe installation.
600 BUSBAR EARTHING

Provide a complete earthing system for the busbar trunking system to comply with the requirements of BS 7430.
Provide a copper strip of the size indicated in the specification and/or the drawings, outside of the trunking
system, and along its full length, and bond to the protective conductor of the incoming cable at the feeder unit.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

Provide the manufacturer’s ASTA and type test certification.
Megger test the installation and provide the results to the engineer.
Test all the busbar joints and connections to ensure that the system is continuous and provide test readings
which should be within the tolerances set by the manufacturer.

section prevails.
European Standard.
- BS 159 Specification for high voltage busbar and busbar connections

- BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures.
- BS 1434 Specification for copper for electrical purposes. Copper sections in bars, blanks and segments for
commutators
- BS 6423 Code of practice for maintenance of electrical switchgear and controlgear for voltages up to and
including 1 kV
- BS 6931 Glossary of terms for copper and copper alloys
- BS 6946 Specification for metal channel cable support systems for electrical installations
- BS 7430 Code of practice for earthing
- BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations. IEE Wiring Regulations
- BS EN 1652 Copper and copper alloys. Plate, sheet, strip and circles for general purposes
- BS EN 1654 Copper and copper alloys. Strips for springs and connections
- BS EN 1976 Copper and copper alloys. Cast unwrought copper products
- BS EN 1978 Copper and copper alloys. Copper cathodes
- BS EN 10209 Cold-rolled low carbon steel flat products for vitreous enamelling. Technical delivery conditions
- BS EN 12163 Copper and copper alloys. Rod for general purposes
- BS EN 12164 Copper and copper alloys. Rod for free machining purposes
- BS EN 12165 Copper and copper alloys. Wrought and unwrought copper forging stock
- BS EN 12166 Copper and copper alloys. Wire for general purposes
- BS EN 12167 Copper and copper alloys. Profiles and rectangular bar for general purposes

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 12420 Copper and copper alloys. Forgings

- BS EN 13599 Copper and copper alloys. Copper plate, sheet and strip for electrical purposes
- BS EN 13600 Copper and copper alloys. Seamless copper tubes for electrical purposes
- BS EN 13601 Copper and copper alloys. Copper rod, bar and wire for general electrical purposes
- BS EN 13602 Copper and copper alloys. Drawn, round copper wire for the manufacture of electrical
conductors
- BS EN 50149 Railway applications. Fixed installations. Electric traction. Copper and copper alloy grooved
contact wires
- BS EN 60439-2 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies Part 2: Particular requirements for busbar
trunking (busways)
- BS EN 60445 Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identification. Identification
of equipment terminals and conductor terminations
- BS EN 60529 Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
- BS EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 1: General rules
- BS EN 61534 Powertrack systems
- BS EN 62208 Empty enclosures for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies. General requirements
- BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dipped galvanised coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles. Specifications and test
methods.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y63 SUPPORT COMPONENTS – CABLES
110 GENERAL
This specification applies to cable tray systems and cable ladder systems for cable management. The specification
is also applicable for metal channel cable support systems for electrical installations where they are used as
support devices for cable tray systems, cable ladder systems or independently for cable management. Note the
term ‘manufacturer’ used in this specification includes the term responsible vendor as used in BS EN 61537.
Obtain all cable system components and fixings from a single manufacturer.
Allow 30% of the base area of the cable tray length or cable ladder length and of the safe working load (SWL) as
spare capacity for future cables when sizing support components.
Ensure that all ferrous metal for support components, their fixings and suspension components are hot dip
galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461.
Use metal channel support systems that comply with BS 6946 or support devices that are part of the cable tray
system or cable ladder system to support cable runway.
Ensure that all surfaces, which are likely to come into contact with cables during installation or use, do not cause
damage to the cables.
Ensure that all surfaces are safe for handling and that sharp edges and burs are removed.
Take care to avoid any electrolytic action between dissimilar metals. Never allow any copper cable or fitting to be
in contact with the galvanising. Generally ensure that cables have an outer covering of polymeric material that
prevents contact between the metal parts of the cable and the supports. Where cables have no outer covering
then lay them on a layer of polymeric material securely fixed to the support components.
Ensure that any additional polymeric material does not add to the spread of fire, smoke or the generation of
corrosive gases in the event of a fire.
Use standard fittings that are supplied as part of the cable tray system or cable ladder systems; if local situations
make it impracticable fabricated fittings are acceptable provided they are of the same quality and the same
protective finish as the standard fittings.
Ensure that sets and bends are sized to allow for the minimum permissible radius of the largest cable and that
cables retain their relative positions on all bends and sweeps.
Fit grommets to all holes cut into the support components.
Maintain electrical continuity at all joints with suitable earthing links. Ensure that joints have all burrs removed
and are made by fishplates and screws.
Ensure that the weight of cables is uniformly distributed on the cable tray system or cable ladder system and
does not exceed the SWL specified by the manufacturer.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
120 INSTALLATION
Comply with the written installation instructions of the cable tray system or cable ladder system manufacturer.
Use butt joints to connect adjacent cable tray or ladder lengths or to connect to fittings. Fix the butt joints with
mushroom-headed steel roofing bolts that comply with BS 1494. Do not weld any joints. Ensure that every
connection is mechanically strong, allowing no relative movement between the two components.
Install the cable runway on mild steel support devices having suitable protective coating, fixed to the structure at
not more than 1 metre intervals, or at such spacing as to ensure the SWL of the system is not exceeded. Use
external fixing devices of expanding masonry bolts or equal. Alternatively, use proprietary steel channel
permitting easy adjustment and modification. Proprietary clamp fixings onto the flanges of structural beams are
also permitted.
Allow 75mm minimum space between any part of the cable tray or cable ladder system and structure to give ease
for securing the cable fixings and general maintenance.
Avoid any obstruction and all other services to ensure that the installation can be properly installed and
maintained.
Ensure that internal fixing devices and external fixing devices do not come into contact with cables in a way that
may give rise to damage of the cables.
Prime and paint all metalwork, fixing bolts, mild steel supports, brackets, etc, where the manufacturer’s
galvanised coating is damaged, or where no galvanised coating has been applied, with two coats of zincenriched
paint.
210 CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS

For wire mesh cable tray systems see clause Y63.230.
211 GENERAL
Ensure that cable tray lengths and fittings that form the cable runway comply with BS EN 61537 are of perforated
sheet steel meeting classification D in accordance with 6.7 in BS EN 61537 and are formed with a return flange.
Ensure steel complies with BS 1449-1, and is hot dip galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461.
Ensure that cable tray systems have electrical continuity characteristics in accordance with 6.3.2 of BS EN 61537,
can fulfil a PE function and are bonded and earthed throughout. Fix copper connectors across all joints of the
cable trays in order to maintain the earth continuity. Ensure that the length of the copper connector is slightly
longer than the distance of its attachment points to allow for movement or expansion of the joint.
Use medium-duty trays internally, heavy-duty trays for external work.
212 INSTALLATION
Cut cable trays along a line of plain metal only; do not cut through the perforations. Remove all
burrs from cut edges so that surfaces are smooth and clean before painting. Treat all cut edges with a cold
galvanized paint.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Achieve the jointing of cable tray lengths and the fixing of the cable runway tray to support devices, by means of
sherardised mushroom headed bolts and nuts with the threaded portion away from the cables.
Where cable tray systems are installed across building expansion joints fit a proprietary slip connector fixed at
one end only.
220 CABLE LADDERS
221 GENERAL
Ensure that cable ladder lengths and fittings that form the cable runway, comply with BS EN 61537 meeting
classification Z in accordance with 6.8 in BS EN 61537 are of steel to BS 1449-1, hot dip galvanised to BS EN ISO
1461. Select a type that have slotted side sections and rungs, and have side sections that are profiled for rigidity.
Ensure that cable ladder systems have electrical continuity characteristics in accordance with 6.3.2 of BS EN
61537, can fulfil a PE function and are bonded and earthed throughout. Fix copper connectors across all joints of
the cable ladder in order to maintain the earth continuity. Ensure that the length of the copper connector is
slightly longer than the distance of its attachment points to allow for movement or expansion of the joint.
Use a dropout plate of the same width as the cable ladder to support the cables as they exit the ladder.
Ensure that the inside radius of all bends in the cable runway is greater than 300mm and large enough to
accommodate the minimum bending radius allowed for any cable installed on the ladder.
222 INSTALLATION
Use flexible couplers to joint cable ladder systems across expansion joints of the building structure. Do not use
rigid fittings across expansion joints.
Ensure that all supports are properly spaced, at a distance not exceeding 1500 mm, to adequately support the
weight of the ladder and cables. For sides, bends and intersections provide supports at a distance not exceeding
300 mm.
Treat all cut edges with a cold galvanized paint.
Fit ladder covers, when specified, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
230 WIRE CABLE TRAYS
231 GENERAL
Ensure that wire mesh cable tray (cable basket) lengths and fittings that form the cable runway comply with BS
EN 61537, are made of high strength steel wires, hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461, and are formed into wire
mesh pattern with intersecting wires welded together. Do not use wire mesh cable tray lengths or fittings which
have been electro-galvanised (eg to BS EN 12329).
Use wire mesh cable tray lengths and fittings from lateral and longitudinal sidewall steel wires with minimum
diameters of: 4mm for basket widths up to 100mm, 5mm for basket widths of 150mm and 200mm and 6mm for
basket widths of 300mm.
Ensure that wire mesh cable tray systems have electrical continuity characteristics in accordance with 6.3.2 of BS
EN 61537, can fulfil a PE function and are bonded and earthed throughout. Fix copper connectors across all joints

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
of wire baskets to maintain earth continuity. Ensure that the length of each such copper connector is slightly
longer than the distance of its attachment points, to allow for movement or expansion of the joint.
Check that all wire ends along the basket’s sides are rounded during manufacturing, to ensure the safety of
cables and installers.
Use only centre support hangers, trapeze hangers or wall brackets, to support the wire basket system.
232 INSTALLATION
Use side action bolt cutters with offset jaws to cut mesh wires; do not use saws, nor cutters with centre cut jaws.
Make cuts at the intersection of longitudinal and lateral wires. Treat all cut edges with a cold galvanized paint.
Use serrated flange locknuts and bolts for all splicing assemblies.
240 CABLE CLEATS

Use cable cleats that are made from materials that are resistant to corrosion without the need for treatment or
special treatment. Ensure that plastic materials are non-brittle down to -20°C. For low smoke and fume (LSF)
cables, use non metallic or aluminium cleats made from LSF material. Use trefoil cleats for single core cables.
Ensure that cleats are of such a size that they can be tightened down to grip the cables without exerting undue
pressure or strain. For vertical cables, use two-bolt cleats which grip the cables firmly enough to prevent them
from slipping.
Space cable cleats in accordance with the minimum spacings in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Locate cleats immediately before and after any bends in the cable.
250 CABLE INSTALLATION

Install cables individually, lay the cables in or on support components, do not draw the cables.
Fix cables to support components at minimum spacing’s in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Where cables are fitted to support components that are:
- mounted in the horizontal plane running horizontally but with cables fitted to the underside, or
- mounted in the vertical plane running horizontally, or
- mounted in the vertical plane running vertically
Secure them using plastic coated metal straps or proprietary cleats of a pattern recommended by the cable
manufacturer.
Where cables are laid in support components that are mounted in the horizontal plane running horizontally,
secure them with low halogen, self-extinguishing, ultra-violet resistant ties. Do not use wire or similar material for
cable ties. Ensure each tie secures the cables of only one circuit.
Secure HV cables in accordance with the requirements of section Y61 of this specification.
Ensure that all fixing bolts/studs are sherardised and where necessary of sufficient length to allow stacking of
cables.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

section prevails.
European Standard.
- BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip

- BS 1449-1 Part 1: Carbon and carbon-manganese plate, sheet and strip
- BS 1494 Fixing accessories for building purposes
- BS 1494-1 Part 1: Fixings for Sheet, Roof and Wall Coverings
- BS 6946 Specification for metal channel cable support systems for electrical cables
- BS EN 12329 Corrosion protection of metals. Electrodeposited coatings of zinc with supplementary
- treatment on iron or steel
- BS EN 61537 Cable management. Cable tray systems and cable ladder systems
- BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dipped galvanised coatings on prefabricated iron and steel articles.
- Specifications and test methods.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y71 LV SWITCHGEAR AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
110 SWITCHGEAR
111 SWITCHGEAR: 500V

This clause covers circuit breakers (CBs), switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse combination
units.
Supply, deliver, offload, erect, connect, test and commission complete all loose switchgear, manufactured panels
and 'on-site' constructed panels in the locations defined on the drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ sections of
this specification.
Ensure that all switchgear complies with BS EN 60947 and BS EN 60947-3.
Ensure that all short circuit ratings, current ratings, number of poles and fusing arrangements are as indicated on
the drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ sections of this specification.
Contain the neutral connection/link of each circuit breaker, switch, disconnector, switch-disconnector and fuse
combination unit within its respective enclosure/moulding.
Ensure that all multi-pole isolators comply with BS EN 60947-3 and are of Utilisation Category AC-23A.
Ensure that all fuses comply with BS EN 60269-1 are of high breaking capacity and, unless stated otherwise in
the relevant ‘system’ Sections of this specification, afford Class ‘gG’ protection. Ensure that they are of the make
and ratings indicated on the drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ Sections of this specification. Fit fuse carriers
rated at 200A and over, with wedge or bolted contacts. Provide spare fuses of the number and sizes indicated in
the relevant ‘system’ Sections of this specification.
Ensure that all isolators and fuse-switches, are suitable for padlocking in the OFF position. Where isolators and
fuse-switches are used for fire alarm, intruder alarm, UPS supplies, etc., ensure that they are also suitable for
padlocking in the ON position.
Ensure that all protective devices are of the same manufacture for that particular type.
112 SWITCHGEAR: 250V

Make all switchgear of 500V rating except that where, in single phase installations, there is no other phase within
2.0m in the same room, 250V switchgear is permitted.
Where 250V switchgear is thus permissible consumer units may be installed but not where they would form part
of a switchpanel that has more than one phase. In such cases use 500V distribution boards.
120 CONSUMER UNITS

Use only consumer units that are 250V rating and conform to BS EN 60947-3.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that outgoing circuit protection is afforded by BS 1361 cartridge fuse links appropriate to the circuit rating,
unless miniature circuit breaker (MCB) units are indicated on the drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ sections of
this specification.
Ensure that all consumer units are complete with a suitably sized integral double pole isolator and with
multiconnection earth and neutral terminal bars having a separate connection for each conductor.
Carry out neutral and earthing connections to the terminal bars so that the respective circuit neutral and earth
cables follow the same pattern and direction as those of the phase conductors.
130 RESIDUAL CURRENT-OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCBS)

Ensure that all RCCB units comply fully with BS EN 61008-1 and are of the sensitivities, load ratings and pole
configurations indicated on the drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ sections of this specification. Unless otherwise
specified use RCCBs having a sensitivity of 30mA.
Adhere to the selected RCCB manufacturer's installation requirements. Ensure that the respective breaker trips lie
within the time limits recommended for the category of breaker.
140 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
141 HRC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Ensure that all distribution boards (DBs) have a minimum rating of 400V with the number of ways and fuse
ratings as indicated on the drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ sections of this specification. Ensure they are of
the same finish and manufacture as the main switchgear/panels selected for the works and conform to BS EN
60947-3.
Supply all DBs complete with cartridge type fuses complying with BS EN 60269-1. Ensure that every DB is
complete with multi connection earth and neutral terminal bars having a separate connection for each conductor.
Ensure that within TP&N distribution boards the earth and neutral terminal bars have sufficient terminations for
the maximum number of single phase circuits that the board can accommodate.
Ensure that adequate provision is made within every DB to receive the specified cabling and that it is physically
sized to suit the proposed installation location.
Ensure that insulated barriers and phase segregation barriers are properly fitted in every DB to prevent accidental
contact.
Ensure that all cable entries into every DB are made to uphold the ingress protection rating of the associated DB
which must be a minimum of IP31 to BS EN 60529.
Allow for duplicate CPC’s to achieve high integrity earthing.
Mount distribution boards so that they are readily accessible and fixed firmly to masonry by plated anchors each
having a loose bolt and washer or by other approved fixing, or by nuts, bolts and washers to a painted mild steel
framework.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
142 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB) DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Ensure that all MCB distribution boards are similar to HRC fuse distribution boards and comply with BS EN 60947-
3. Supply them complete with MCBs of the sizes indicated on the drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ Sections of
this specification.
Ensure that every MCB conforms to BS EN 60898-1, Type C (instantaneous trip current range) with 10kA short-
circuit capacity rating unless indicated otherwise on the drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ sections of this
specification.
Securely clamp every MCB to its busbars, or properly install the plug-in type.
Use combined MCB/RCCB units where indicated on the drawings, and ensure compliance with clause Y71.300 of
this specification.
Allow for duplicate CPC’s to achieve high integrity earthing.
Ensure that where the selected manufacturer’s RCCD unit(s) takes up more than one way on a board, a larger
board is provided so as not to compromise the number of spare ways required on the drawings or in the relevant
‘system’ sections of this specification.
Ensure that within TP&N distribution boards the earth and neutral terminal bars have sufficient terminations for
the maximum number of single phase circuits that the board can accommodate.
150 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT

Ensure that all automatic power factor correction equipment is contained within appropriate enclosures and is of
the ratings as indicated on the drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ sections of this specification.
Ensure that all unit capacitors are of suitable rating and contained in a sheet steel enclosure complete with
appropriate fixings.
Ensure that all capacitors comply with BS EN 60871-1 and are suitable for operation on a 400V, 3-phase, 50Hz
supply unless indicated otherwise on the drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ sections of this specification.
Provide capacitors consisting of elements wound from a metallized plastic film dielectric, vacuum processed and
encapsulated in an epoxy resin container, mounted in a sheet steel tank. Alternative forms of construction may
be offered for consideration.
Ensure dielectric losses of the selected capacitors are less than 25W/kVAr.
Fit capacitors with an automatic discharge device to achieve full discharge within one minute after
disconnection.
Provide a power factor control relay, complete with associated control equipment to maintain the specified
corrected power factor.
Ensure that the control equipment provides the following facilities:
- automatic disconnection of all capacitors in the event of mains failure, with a two minute delay before re-
connection
- target power factor setting adjustable from 0.8 inductive to unity
- time delay between switching of stages to ensure capacitors are sufficiently discharged before reenergisation

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- push button operated manual override incorporating time delay as above

- adjustable switching programmes
- visible indication of capacitor stages
Protect each capacitor stage with HRC fuses of current rating no less than 1.5 times its rated capacity current.
Ensure that every capacitor control contactor is rated for its switching duty.
Ensure that all power factor equipment is automatically disconnected prior to the operation of the standby
generator(s).
160 SWITCHBOARDS
161 CUBICLE TYPE SWITCHBOARDS

Ensure that all cubicle type switchboards (cubical panels) are manufactured in accordance with BS EN 60439 and
accommodate the switchgear and are of the form indicated on the drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ sections of
this specification.
Ensure that all cubical panels are manufactured with a minimum thickness of 16 gauge zintex-coated braced
sheet steel finished with epoxy-based paint on all surfaces and support frames.
Ensure that all cubical panels are protected to a minimum of IP31 to BS EN 60529.
Ensure that all cubical panels are fully fault-rated to a minimum level of 50kA for one second duration.
Ensure that all cubicle panels are of the front access type unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or in the
relevant ‘system’ sections of this specification.
Ensure that all cubicle panels are complete with a 100mm high metal plinth.
Ensure that all cubical panels are readily extendible and install spare cubical panels as indicated on the drawings
or in the relevant ‘system’ sections of this specification to accommodate the metering equipment etc. for the
electricity companies.
Provide cubical panel sections with removable eye bolts in each corner for lifting purposes.
Ensure that all connections between busbars and associated switchgear are adequately rated for load and fault
currents.
Within each cubicle panel, enclose its busbars in an earthed metal chamber. Ensure that a removable metal cover
provides an earthed barrier between the operator and the live connections.
Ensure that all penetrations of live busbars into outgoing circuit compartments or cable chambers are fully
shrouded. Ensure all busbars have a minimum current rating of that of the switchgear controlling the incoming
supply to the cubical panel.
Throughout the full length of each panel install a suitably sized earth bar. Provide bonding connections to each
item of switchgear, and cable plates.
Where a cubicle panel is delivered to site in sectionalised form ensure that the manufacturer or his agent
reassembles, retests, and certifies it on site.
To control all outgoing circuits use fuse switches, MCCBs or ACBs as indicated on the drawings or in the relevant
‘system’ sections of this specification. To permit the renewal of fuses, ensure that their fuse carrier assemblies

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
are fully isolated when the associated fuse switch is in the OFF position. Ensure that all fuse switches have double
break, silver or electro-tinned contacts, safety interlocks, and ON/OFF indication.
Ensure that all ACBs and MCCBs installed in cubicle panels are Ics (rated service short-circuit breaking capacity)
duty as defined in BS EN 60947, and tested within a minimum switchboard enclosure.
Ensure that all ACBs are of the withdrawable pattern each complete with control/ switching devices, interlocks,
locks, etc., and safety shutters which completely shroud the main fixed isolating contacts automatically when the
breaker section is withdrawn.
Ensure that all operating handles for switchgear are of the rotary, toggle or retractable types and are
manufactured such that the cover cannot be removed while the switch is in the ON position.
Fuse switch units fitted with solid copper links appropriately rated may be used as isolators for circuits up to
1600A provided they are suitable for the fault duty.
Provide labels to all switchgear, cable chamber covers and busbar covers with the appropriate designations or
warning notices as necessary. Issue label schedules to the engineer for agreement of designation.
162 UNIT TYPE SWITCHBOARDS

Ensure that all unit type switchboards consist of switchgear units and fusegear in accordance with this
specification section Y71, together with all matching cable boxes, terminations, conduits and wiring
interconnections, as indicated on the drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ sections of this specification.
For each unit type switchboard, mount all switchgear and fusegear on a painted mild steel angle frame within the
dimensions of the space shown on the drawings.
Where unit type switchboards are sited over formed floor trenches supply and fix all necessary support steelwork
to span the trenches.
Make all required floor/wall fixings by using plated anchors each having a loose bolt and washer.
Ensure that each busbar chamber spans the whole length of the associated switchboard and is readily extendible.
Ensure that all copper busbars are of the minimum rating of the main incoming switch, suitably colour coded both
on the bars and on the chamber cover.
Ensure that all connections between busbars and their respective switchgear and distribution gear are by copper
bars, copper rods or copper cables, suitably fixed with clamps and bolts.
Mount suitable cable trunking and matching steel cabinet on the frame to accommodate metering, CTs and other
equipment of the local electricity companies where required.
Incorporate instrumentation in accordance with clause Y71.300 and the relevant ‘system’ sections of this
specification, and as indicated on the drawings.
Ensure that each unit type switchboard is complete with protective conductors bonding all components fully in
accordance with BS 7671. Provide a main earth terminal.
Do not carry out through wiring.
Assemble all unit type switchboards from one manufacturer's equipment with common finish.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
200 SWITCHGEAR AND LV PANELS – GENERAL
210 DRAWINGS
Before manufacture commences submit to the engineer for comment drawings showing the proposed
switchboards, including dimensions, construction details, layout, internal connections and identification markings.
220 TERMINATIONS AND SWITCHBOARD CONNECTIONS

Provide the selected manufacturers of LV panels with details of all cable sizes, cable types, switchgear and panel
locations, both during tender enquiry and post-tender periods, so that if necessary, panels, switch unit sizes,
terminations, etc. are properly adjusted to suit the particular project requirements. Include all costs associated
with such adjustments in the tender.
Provide all switchgear with suitable means of accepting the types and sizes of connected cables.
Provide connection rail enclosures and cable gland plates for cubicle boards.
Ensure that all small wiring within every panel complies with BS 6231 using type 'B', PVC insulated 600V grade
stranded copper conductors having a cross section of not less than 1.5 mm2.
Terminate wiring on readily accessible fully shrouded terminal rails adjacent to the instruments.
Ensure that terminal markings and conductor identification fully comply with clause Y82.213 of this specification
and BS 5472.
Ensure that terminations of voltages in close proximity are segregated by insulated barrier plates.
Ensure terminal rails are of the appropriate current rating, of sufficient size to suit the cable conductors being
installed, are fitted with purpose-made supports are of robust construction, and further comply with the
following:
- the voltage rating is 500V

- DIN rail mounted
- the terminal fixing to rails has spring loaded fronts, ie retention is not dependent only on the terminal
mouldings
- terminals are locked to the terminal rail
- clamping screws are captive of high tensile steel and operate against a plate to prevent damage to the
conductor. Do not use pinch screws or push-on terminals
- insulation materials are carbon-free non-hygroscopic and suitable for continuous operation at
- temperatures of -50C to 1300C
- contain safety features to eliminate accidental contact by any operator
Do not route outgoing cables through the busbar chamber.
Ensure that suitable cable gland plates are fitted to receive the respective cables where vertical cable chambers
form part of the panel construction.
Wire to terminal rails all relays, multipole contactors, instruments and other components accommodated within
panel compartments.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
230 SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE

Ensure that all remote switch devices used for local isolation have facilities for padlocking the device in the ON or
OFF position as appropriate. Ensure that all switches conform to tables I & II of the relevant British Standards.
Ensure that all switchgear specified with Castell interlocks are sequenced correctly and that the correct number of
keys is supplied.
240 IDENTIFICATION AND NOTICES

Ensure that all identifications and notices comply with clause Y82.230 of this specification and BS 7671.
Fix identification and warning labels of minimum size 75mm X 25mm to each item of equipment. Fix all labels
with plated screws.
Ensure that all identification labels are white with in-filled black letters 6mm high.
Ensure that warning labels are white with in-filled red letters 20mm minimum high.
Ensure that the basic circuit chart for distribution boards is in accordance with BS 7671.
250 PHASE COLOURING

Clearly mark all switchgear and distribution boards on the external vertical face by discs showing the phase.
Mark busbars with a coloured tape band.
260 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Ensure that each current transformer (CT) complies with BS EN 60044-1 and, unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings or in the relevant ‘system’ sections of this specification, has a 5 amp secondary. Ensure that the rated
VA output is suitable for the type and magnitude of the connected burden.
Ensure that all current transformers for metering and control purposes are of accuracy Class 3 minimum.
Ensure that the accuracy limit factor for 5P and 10P protective CTs is appropriate for the protection scheme and
greater than the highest available setting of any instantaneous element. Ensure the 'knee' point voltage of Class
PX CTs is sufficient for correct operation of the protection scheme and can maintain stability for 'through fault'
conditions.
Use current transformers of the 'bar' primary type unless otherwise approved by the engineer. Match sets of CTs.
Terminate all connections from secondary windings at terminals integral with or adjacent to the CTs. Lace
secondary windings and arrange to prevent contact with the 'main' circuit. Earth one terminal of the CT
secondary circuit.
Do not insert isolating contacts in circuits between CTs and protective devices.
Ensure that the removal of the protection relay from its case will 'short circuit' the connected CT.
Provide all protection relays with facilities for testing:
- prepared method - direct secondary injection at the relay

- alternative method - a CT with a test winding, and terminals brought out to convenient locations
Arrange every such test winding so that injection of 10 Amp represents the full load current in the main circuit.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
270 INSTRUMENTS AND METERING

Ensure that all indicating instruments are of an approved manufacture and size to conform with BS EN 60051-1.
Ensure that the markings on the dials include the scale divisions, the instrument transformer ratio, and British
Standard grading.
Ensure all instruments are:
- flush mounted
- back connected
- provided with means for zero adjustment
- minimum dial width 72mm
- metric fixings
- minimal terminal size of M4
Ensure that all ammeters are of the moving iron type, quadrant scale, accuracy class 1.5. Ensure that the
minimum reading is less than 10% of the full load. Connect ammeters in the black phase unless a selector switch
is specified.
Ensure that selector switches for ammeters are of the 5-position type including the OFF position to give the
values in each phase and in the neutral conductor.
Scale voltmeters so that the normal reading, which is marked with a red line, appears on 2/3 full scale deflection.
Provide a selector switch below each voltmeter.
Provide HRC fuses to each voltmeter. Provide double insulated cables between the busbars and the meter fuses.
Provide single insulated cables between the meter fuses and the meter.
Submit drawings of the location and general arrangement of meters to the engineer for comment before
manufacture commences.
Fit all incoming supply compartments with voltmeters and ammeters.
Fit all outgoing circuits with ammeters and selector switches as detailed on the drawings.
Ensure that kWh/MD meters comply with BS EN 62053-11.
280 TESTING
Provide type test certificates, for the class of switchgear to be supplied.
Ensure type testing is in accordance with BS EN 60439.
Include in the Tender all costs for inspection visits to the works by the engineer. Give the engineer two weeks
notice of each test.
290 RUBBER MAT(S)

Where deemed necessary through appropriate risk assessments install rubber mats of 11kV tested pattern in
accordance with BS 921 as necessary in each switch room.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

section prevails.
European Standard.
- BS 88 Low-voltage fuses
- BS 33-3 Low-voltage fuses Part 3: Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by unskilled persons
- BS 89 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories
- BS 90 Specification for direct-acting electrical recording instruments and their accessories
- BS 159 Specification for high-voltage busbars and busbar connections
- BS 842 Specification for a.c. voltage-operated earth-leakage circuit breakers
- BS 921 Specification. Rubber mats for electrical purposes
- BS 1361 Specification for cartridge fuses for a.c. circuits in domestic and similar Premises
- BS 2754 Memorandum. - Construction of electrical equipment for protection against electric shock
- BS 3036 Specification. Semi-enclosed electric fuses. (ratings up to 100 amperes and 2400 volts to earth)
- BS 4293 Specification for residual current-operated circuit-breakers
- BS 5424 Control gear for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c. and 1200 V d.c.
- BS 5472 Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear for industrial use Terminal marking and
distinctive number. General rules
- BS 5685 Electricity meters
- BS 6231 Electric cables. Single core PVC insulated flexible cables of rated voltage
- 600/1000V for switchgear and controlgear wiring
- BS 6272 Specification for low voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use Terminal marking.
Terminals for external associated electronic circuit components and contacts
- BS 6423 Code of practice for maintenance of electrical switchgear and control gear for voltages up to and
including 1 kV
- BS 7194 Specification for direct-current and low-frequency electronic measuring instruments with a digital
display
- BS 7264 Shut capacitors for a.c. power systems having a rated voltage above 1000 V
- BS 7288 Specification for socket outlets incorporating residual current devices
- BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations. IEE Wiring Regulations

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 13602 Copper and copper alloys. Drawn, round copper wire for the manufacture of electrical
conductors
- BS EN 60044 Instrument transformers
- BS EN 60076 Power transformers
- BS EN 60079 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
- BS EN 60255 Measuring relays and protection equipment
- BS EN 60269-1 Low-voltage fuses Part 1: General requirements
- BS EN 60529 Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
- BS EN 60871 Shunt capacitors for a.c. power systems having a rated voltage above 1000 V
- BS EN 60898 Specification for circuit-breakers for overcurrent protection for household and similar
installations
- BS EN 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
- BS EN 60947-3 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
- Part 3: Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units
- BS EN 61008-1 Electrical accessories. Residual current operated circuit-breakers without integral overcurrent
protection for household and similar uses (RCCB’s) Part 1: General rules
- BS EN 62053 Electricity metering equipment (a.c.). Particular requirements
- BS EN 62053-11 Electricity metering equipment (a.c.). Particular requirements Part 11: Electromechanical
meters for active energy (classes 0.5, 1 and 2)

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y72 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLLERS
110 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLLERS – GENERAL

Design, construct and install all motor starters, controllers and associated switchgear so that its operation and
maintenance can comply with the Electricity (Factories Act) Special Regulations; the Health and Safety etc. Act,
the Electricity at Work Regulations and subsequent safety legislation and regulations current on the date the
equipment is ordered. Submit type test certificates in accordance with BS EN 60439-1 for all switchgear and
control gear assemblies to the Contract Administrator when the panel and assembly drawings are submitted for
comment.
Install the motor starters and controls, building management system, packaged plant and all other
interconnected equipment to form a complete and working system. Co-ordinate the designs of all interconnected
units, their wiring and terminal connections so that they are mutually compatible and function as a whole in
accordance with the design intent. Ensure that the cable access systems required are adequately sized, supported
and spatially co-ordinated with other equipment and the building structure.
Ensure that all cable terminals are big enough to take the sizes of cables specified. Ensure there is ample space
within panels, isolators, etc. to accept the tails of the cables specified.
Prepare schematic, wiring and general arrangement drawings of the motor starters, controllers and all equipment
connected and submit the drawings to the Contract Administrator for comment at least four weeks before
manufacture is required to begin. Produce the drawings at A3 size at least and include final details of all the
motors ordered.
Schedule the details of all motors and packaged plant ordered and ensure that the wiring, fuse protection, starter
contactors, overload relays and all other circuit elements are correctly selected according to the rules in this
specification, the documents referred to above and the component manufacturer's published application data.
Design and manufacture all purpose-built assemblies incorporating motor control gear and associated equipment
and components to comply with the standards referred to in this specification and with the component
manufacturers' recommendations.
Protect equipment against physical damage and from ingress of water, dust and other contaminants during
delivery, storage and installation.
120 MOTOR STARTERS
121 GENERAL
Motor starter means the contactor and controls package required to start and protect a motor drive from the
specified forms of overload and abuse.
Motor drives below 5.5kW output may have direct-on-line starting. Fit all motor drives of 5.5kW output and above
with Star/Delta starters, or with such other form of assisted starting as is scheduled in the particular specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Fit motor drives with outputs above 25kW, if suitable for star/delta starting, with closed transition Star/Delta
starting.
If the power supplies to motor drives are interrupted, arrange for all motor starters to open and to remain open
until restarted deliberately by one of the following methods. Ensure motor drives with hand controls only can be
restarted by hand. Fit motor drives subject to automatic control with automatic sequencing arranged to ensure
that the drives are restarted in correct sequence and without overloading the main supply system.
Design automatic controls so as not to allow motor drives to be started more frequently than once every ten
minutes unless a lesser interval between motor starts is allowed by the particular specification.
Where Duty 1 and Duty 2 motors are provided for the same item of plant, hard-wire interlock the associated
starters to prevent simultaneous operation.
Where two-speed motors are fitted with separate windings for each speed provide a separate starter for each
speed. Hard-wire interlock the starters to prevent simultaneous operation, with a time delay relay fitted to
provide a delay of up to 10 seconds when switching from High to Low speed.
122 CONTACTORS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION

Install motor starters which comply with appropriate parts of BS EN 60947 and include the following features:
- contactors rated for continuous duty, Category AC-3 and sized to carry at least the maximum continuous
current they are required to carry with the motor or other equipment served at full load
- plus 10%
- thermal-magnetic overloads chosen to suit the motors and starter connections finally selected, compensated
for ambient temperature and with loss-of-phase protection. Ensure the units incorporate manual reset, local
visual fault indication and auxiliary contacts for remote fault indication
- individual protection against short circuits by fuses to BS 88. Select the contactor and fuse combination to
provide Type 'C' protection co-ordination to BS EN 60947 - 1. Ensure that a short circuit fault downstream of
the motor starter causes no damage to starter
- thermistor protection units for those motors for which thermistor protection is specified. Ensure the units
incorporate manual reset, LED fault signalling and a test button to check correct operation
- auxiliary contacts for the control and signalling functions specified elsewhere.
123 DIRECT-ON-LINE (DOL) MOTOR STARTERS

Install direct-on-line motor starters embodying the following features:
- a single contactor
- thermal-magnetic overload set for the motor rated full load current
124 STAR/DELTA (S/D) MOTOR STARTERS

Install Star/Delta motor starters embodying the following features:
- three contactors: line, delta and star

- mechanical interlock between the delta and star contactors to prevent simultaneous operation
- variable time delay for change from Star to Delta of 5 - 20 seconds. Set the delay time so that the change
from star to Delta takes place after the motor current has fallen to a value less than rated full load

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- ensure that the time delay to making of the delta contactor allows sufficient time for the star
- contactor to break
125 CLOSED-TRANSITION STAR/DELTA MOTOR STARTERS

Install closed-transition Star/ Delta motor starters embodying the following features:
- four contactors: line, Delta, Star and resistance, all sized for the load current carried plus 10%
- a resistor in series with each winding, rated for up to 5 seconds on load
- mechanical interlock between the Delta and Star conductors to prevent simultaneous operation
- variable time delay for the time in Star connection of 5 - 20 seconds. Set the delay time so that the change
from Star to resistance takes place after the motor current has fallen to a value less than rated full load
- variable time delay for the time with the resistors in series with the windings of 0.5-1.5 seconds. Set the delay
time so that the resistors remain in series with the motor windings until the motor current has fallen to a
value less than rated full load
- short out then disconnect the resistors at the expiration of the 0.5-1.5 seconds time delay(Note that a motor
requiring starting by the closed-transition Star/ Delta method has its three windings brought out to separate
pairs of terminals. Six conductors plus an earth protective earth conductor are required between the motor
and its starter).
126 PART WINDING MOTOR STARTERS

Install starters for motors with part-windings embodying the following features:
- two contactors, each sized for half the motor rated full load current plus 10%
- fit each contactor with a thermal-magnetic overload set to half the total motor nameplate full load current
- A variable time delay before making the second contactor of 5-25 seconds. Set the delay time so
- that the total motor current has fallen to less than 1.5 times full load before the second contactor makes
127 ELECTRONIC SOFT START

Provide electronic soft-starters sized by their manufacturer to suit the motors finally ordered. Allow
for the motors to operate continuously at their maximum continuous rating (Duty S1).
Fit input/output filters if required to reduce mains harmonic distortion or to keep electro-magnetic radiation within
acceptable limits. Fit varistors or equivalent input device to prevent damage to the unit by mains overvoltage
spikes.
Mount soft-starters in type tested motor control panels designed for continuous operation in plant room ambient
temperatures up to 40°C. Ensure that the heat rejected by the soft starter is safely dissipated without
overheating, and without affecting other equipment in the panel. Where available mount the soft starter through
the back of the motor control panel.
Provide the following facilities:
- adjustable acceleration ramp up to 30 seconds

- adjustable current limit from 2 to 5 times full load current
- combined acceleration ramp and current limit to control starting torque

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- motor thermal overload protection and early warning indication

- fault detection, diagnostic facilities and alarm signalling to the BMS
- shorting contactor for use with motor drives where energy saving is ineffective
- starter trip and reset to OFF on loss of power supplies
Submit the following details of the proposed soft-starter to the Contract Administrator for comment before
ordering:
- maker's specification and literature

- proposed starter mounting details
- proposed wiring and connection details, including control connections
- proposed commissioning and adjustment procedure
130 MOTOR DRIVES
131 EDDY CURRENT COUPLING DEVICES

Fit the eddy-current drive with a 4-pole energy efficient motor and belt drive system complying with specification
Y92.
The drive size required shall be advised by the manufacturer to deliver the output power specified.
Mount the motor outside the air-handling or similar plant.
Provide the following control facilities:
- motor isolator with early break contact to trip the starter and drive controller when the motor is
- isolated
- starter AUTO/OFF/HAND control switch
- Run (Green) and Trip (Red) panel mounted signal lamps
- Start/Stop control by the BMS when the starter control switch is to AUTO
- starter Fault/Trip signal to the BMS
- 230V, 1ph, 5A power supply to the drive controller via starter auxiliary contacts and fuse to be
- specified by the controller manufacturer.
- speed control HAND/AUTO switch
- speed control from the BMS or local drive controller
- drive mounted tachogenerator for speed feedback control
- local drive speed indicator
- adjustable drive acceleration ramp
- drive torque limited to 100% motor full load torque
Submit the following details of the proposed eddy-current drive to the Contract Administrator for comment before
ordering:
- maker's specification and literature

- proposed drive, starter and controller mounting details
- proposed wiring and connection details, including control connections

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- proposed commissioning and adjustment procedure
132 VARIABLE FREQUENCY INVERTER DRIVES

Provide inverter drives sized by the inverter manufacturer to match the motors finally ordered.
Ensure inverter drives for fans and pumps normally deliver a voltage output proportional to their frequency
output at frequencies below 50Hz. Provide confirmation that the motors and inverter units finally selected are
suitable for the required duty, including any allowance for motor de-rating specified by the motor manufacturer.
Select the motor drive pulley sizes so that the motors deliver their selected maximum output with the inverter
output at 50Hz. Provide inverters whose minimum inverter frequency is 10Hz and the maximum 57.5Hz, or the
frequency at which the motor is delivering full power, whichever is the lesser.
Provide the following inverter control features:
- power supply via BS 88 fuses of a size specified by the inverter manufacturer and a local isolating switch to
disconnect all power from the inverter and motor when required
- inverter power input circuits protected against mains voltage short duration spikes of up to 2 kilovolts
- drive start by signal from the building management system or locally by a panel mounted
- Hand/Off/Auto switch or otherwise
- drive frequency controlled by a 0-10V signal from the building management system, or by local panel
mounted inverter frequency control
- a frequency display, either digital or analogue scaled 0-60Hz
- protection against inverter overheating, motor over current, external short circuits, motor single
- phasing and earth faults
- simple fault diagnosis facilities and a common fault signal to the building management system
- where the inverter is mounted remotely from the motor drive provide a local steel cased isolator with early
break contact to shut down the inverter, for motor maintenance
Mount inverters as close to their associated motors as practicable. Connect inverters to their associated motors
them via unbroken lengths of armoured cable, except for the steel clad isolating switches where the inverters are
necessarily mounted remotely from the motors. Ensure earthing arrangements are as specified by the inverter
manufacturer and comply with BS 7671.
Fit input and output electrical filters to the inverter if required to reduce harmonic distortion of the mains and
electro-magnetic radiation to within acceptable limits.
140 MOTOR CONTROL PANELS
141 CONSTRUCTION
Construct the motor control panels with rigid framed enclosures and with panels in zinc coated mild steel at least
1.6mm thick for panels up to 600mm x 600mm and at least 2mm thick for larger panels. Round all edges and
corners to a minimum radius of 3mm. Passivate the panels and finish all surfaces with a wear resistant paint
system in the maker's standard colour. Provide details of the proposed panel construction and paint system with
the drawings submitted to the Contract Administrator for comment.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Design and construct the panels containing motor starters and controllers with protection to IP54 and design the
panels for continuous operation. Size and/or ventilate to maintain all internal components within their maker's
specified temperature limits with a plant room temperature up to 40°C .
142 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Type test motor control panels and their internal assemblies to BS EN 60439-1. Provide details of type testing
when submitting drawings to the Contract Administrator for comment.
Design all equipment and wiring for 50Hz electrical supplies of 400V (3 ph) or 230V (1 ph) plus or minus 6%.
Design and construct all electrical equipment to be suitable for use in local ambient temperatures up to 40°C and
with relative humidities up to 90% with occasional occurrences of moderate condensation. Proof all equipment
against moderate amounts of dust and corrosion by salt laden air where specified. Use only materials resistant to
mould growth and attach by vermin.
Protect all connecting cables against overload and short-circuit faults by appropriately sized fuses to BS 88.
Select fuses protecting motor circuits to suit the motors finally installed according to the fuse manufacturer's
recommendations for the form of motor starting employed.
Gland cable and conduit entries to maintain the IP54 protection specified. Where light cables need to enter the
panel via trunking, provide a purpose made watertight upstand at least 75mm high to form a water resistant
junction between the panel and the cable trunking.
Terminate all incoming and outgoing cables in terminal blocks close to the cable entry positions. Terminate
control cables carrying voltages of 110V and above in disconnectable terminal blocks for essential working
without isolating the main supplies, using appropriate safety procedures.
Ensure all fuses installed in the motor control panel provide satisfactory discrimination with sub-circuit fuses
within the panel and with the panel's main supply fuse.
Shroud all cable terminals, live parts of the switchgear and other components, including live parts to the rear of
switchgear, against accidental direct contact when testing and inspecting the panel. Install fuses either as part of
fuse/switches or in shrouded fuse holders.
Identify and mark all cables, cable terminals, fuses, switchgear and other components with permanent labels
using the circuit references used in the installation and on as-fitted drawings.
143 MOTOR CIRCUIT WIRING

Unless specified differently elsewhere, install wiring types as scheduled below:
- PVC/SWA/XLPE, 600/1000V grade, insulated and sheathed, with stranded copper conductors, run on cable
tray or clipped direct - connections to the main LV switchboard, to motor drives and to control devices
operating at 230V
- PVC insulated, 600/1000V grade, stranded copper conductors - control panel internal power wiring
- screened and sheathed twisted pairs with stranded copper conductors, as specified by the controls specialist,
run in conduit or trunking - sensors and motorised valves etc. operating at voltages less than 230V. Take
account of cable lengths and voltage drops in specifying conductor sizes. Except for the wiring specified by
the controls specialist the minimum size of conductor used shall be 1.5mm²

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Use crimped lugs by AMP or equivalent for all minor cable terminations, with the cable insulation secured at the
termination by a crimped plastic skirt. Prepare cable terminations in accordance with the crimp manufacturer's
instructions and using the tools specified. Leave sufficient lengths on cables to ensure there is no tension on any
connection.
144 CONTROL CIRCUITS

Design control circuits for operation of contactors to operate at 230 V. Provide control circuit wiring to be at least
1.5mm² and sized so that voltage drop even during motor starting is never great enough to prevent correct
operation of all devices served.
145 CONTROL RELAYS

Install control relays of the plug-in type which shall conform to BS EN 55014-1 and BS 5992 with contacts rated
for operation up to 230 volts, 5A, 50Hz.
Enclose control relays in dust proof covers.
146 CONTROL SWITCHES

Provide front panel rotary switches for the following duties:
- single speed, single motor drives: HAND/OFF/AUTO.

- two-speed motor drives: HIGH SPEED/LOW SPEED/OFF/AUTO
- motor drives with Duty 1 and Duty 2 motors: DUTY 1/DUTY 2 selector switch for use when the
- motors are in hand control with HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switches for each drive. Arrange for all selector
switches serving plant subject to AUTO control to have auxiliary contacts to signal to the building
management system when the drives are in auto control.
147 LAMP INDICATIONS

Provide indicator lights for the following functions for each drive served:
- RUN: Green Lamp

- TRIPPED: Red Lamp
- PANEL LIVE: White Lamp
148 PANEL LABELS FOR INFORMATION AND WARNING

Fix permanent engraved labels to all panels to provide information and warning to suitably qualified persons
carrying out operation and maintenance:
- a label indicating the function of each switch and lamp indication

- a label on each openable panel door reading: "WARNING - ISOLATE PANEL BEFORE MAINTENANCE". In
addition, a self adhesive warning label is to be fixed to each door giving access
- to 400 volt circuits
- a key diagram showing the source and identification of all power supplies entering a panel, their
- function and means of isolation

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
150 MOTOR ISOLATION

Provide all motor drives with local isolators for safe mechanical and electrical maintenance of the drives served,
including motor drives within packaged plant.
Install isolators with metal cases, protected to IP54 and with early break contacts to trip the drive starters where
assisted start is provided.
Fit a permanent engraved label near each motor drive to read: "ISOLATE MOTOR BEFORE MAINTENANCE".
160 STAND ALONE MOTOR STARTERS

Mount stand-alone motor starters in type-tested steel enclosures protected to IP54.
Equip the starters with the following equipment and controls as appropriate:
- panel isolating switch

- ammeter
- HAND/ OFF/ AUTO and SPEED control switch
- Motor Run (Green) and Trip (Red) indicating lamps
- motor starter
- labels and warning notices
Ensure that it is possible to measure motor current safely with a suitable clip-on ammeter for commissioning
purposes.
170 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE

Install measures to prevent electro-magnetic interference with control panel operation and to prevent
electromagnetic interference from control panels affecting other electrical equipment. Measures likely to be
required include:
- supply motor control panels direct from the main LV switchboard

- wire control systems in twisted pair cable. Run control cables away from mains cables
- use armoured cables for power circuits and full size neutral conductors
- fit voltage surge suppression devices to mineral insulated cables, relay and contactor operating coils and
vulnerable electronic equipment
- fit input and output harmonic filters to electronic inverters and motor soft starters
200 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

300 AS FITTED DRAWINGS, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Provide three copies of the following documents bound into durable hardback folders:
- description of equipment operation

- schematic and wiring diagrams and panel general arrangement drawings
- inspection and test certificates

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- data sheets and manufacturers' addresses for all panel components

- recommended spares list
- schedule of recommended periodic inspection and maintenance, including safety precautions

Submit the following drawings and documents in connection with the motor starters and controllers specified
above:
- control panel and assemblies type test certificates (see item 242)
- control panel schematic and general arrangement drawings (see item 300)
- details of control panel construction and finish (see item 241)
- details of control panel labels and key diagrams (see item 248)
- control panel works test certificates (see item 300)
- control panel site testing and commissioning results (see item 300)
- control panel as-fitted drawings and operation & maintenance manuals (see item 400)

Comply fully with the edition (including amendments and normative references) of each of the following,
current at the time of tender.
Where a Standard referred to in this section conflicts with a standard referred to in an associated
‘engineering system’ section (eg S10, T31, V21, etc.) of this specification, the Standard referred to in the
engineering system section prevails.
Wherever reference is made to a British Standard (BS) an equivalent European Standard, which is
recognised by the British Standard Institution, would also apply (see latest BSI Standard Catalogue etc.). Each
product and each material selected by the Installer shall comply fully with the latest issue of either the
BS or the equivalent European Standard.
- The Health and Safety etc. Act

- The Electricity at Work Regulations
- BS 5992 Electrical relays
- BS EN 55014-1 Electromagnetic compatibility. Requirements for household appliances,
- electric tools and similar apparatus Part 1: Emission
- BS EN 60073 Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and
- identification. Coding principles for indicators and actuators

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 60204-3 Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines Part 3: Particular

- safety and EMC requirements for sewing machines, units and systems
- BS EN 60439-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies Part 1: Type-tested and
- partially type-tested assemblies
- BS EN 61000-5-7 - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 5-7: Installation and mitigation
- guidelines. Degrees of protection by enclosures against electromagnetic
- disturbances (EM code)
- BS EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3: EMC requirements
- and specific test methods
- BS EN 62208 Empty enclosures for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
- General requirements
- BS EN 62262 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment against
- external mechanical impacts (IK code)

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y73 LUMINAIRES AND LAMPS
110 LUMINARIES
Ensure that all luminaires comply with all relevant British Standards.
Ensure that all luminaires are suitable for the location and environment in which they are to be installed.
Supply, erect, and connect all luminaires complete with all associated components including glass ware, diffusers,
lamps, appropriate control gear and gasket seals, in the positions shown on the drawings.
Supply operating manuals, maintenance instructions and parts manuals for all luminaires. Ensure that these
documents provide maintenance and care data including periodic and preventative maintenance procedures and
intervals, expected lifetime, diagnostic procedures and complete ordering information and sources for all parts
provided.
Fit luminaires with cover glass to protect against ultra-violet emissions and risk of explosion from lamps where
appropriate.
Provide secondary support for translucent covers, diffusers and gear trays to prevent them from falling when the
primary fixing is released where appropriate.
Ensure that, for each luminaire type supplied, the manufacturer claims that his published photometric
performance data is within the tolerances defined by BS EN 13032.
Provide only luminaires that comply with BS EN 61547 for EMC immunity.
Ensure that luminaires have sufficient physical protection to satisfy BS EN 60529 and BS EN 62262.
Do not permit luminaires which are fixed onto, or recessed into, suspended ceilings to have their weight borne by
the ceiling unless written approval is obtained from the Contract Administrator.
Suspend luminaires from the structure or from false ceiling support beams using steel strapping or circular steel
suspension or proprietary fixing methods. Use at least two fixings for luminaires up to 300mm wide and four
fixings for sizes over 300mm wide.
Provide plug-in ceiling rose/three/four pin socket outlet complete with plug, for each recessed luminaireinstalled
in a suspended ceiling. Install in a convenient accessible position to facilitate the removal of the luminaire.
Supply and fix all materials for fixing and suspending the luminaires from the building structure, building fabric, or
system of beams provided by others for the support of false ceilings and/or other services or equipment, unless
specified otherwise.
Ensure that the luminaire backplate fully covers the conduit box in concealed installations. Use white break joint
rings where the conduit boxes cannot be concealed by the luminaire backplate.
Do not use luminaires for through-wiring unless the luminaire is specifically designed for that purpose and
incorporates a segregated wiring channel.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that the noise level at 250Hz. emitted by the control gear of fluorescent luminaires does not exceed the
following:
- 36W/40W - 25dB
- 58W/65W - 28dB
- 70W/75W - 30dB
- 100W/125W - 35dB
Ensure that all fluorescent luminaires are individually power factor corrected. Use shunt connected capacitors to
achieve a minimum 0.85 p.f.
Before installing any luminaire ensure that it is appropriately selected for all aspects including: - the type of
installation, the location in which it is installed, the ceiling void size, the ceiling type (including tee section size)
and the lamp voltage.
Provide an assembly of luminaire and exhaust air device or luminaire and supply air device to meet the design
requirements for illumination and air flow. Ensure that every such assembly can be integrated and flush mounted
into the associated false ceiling.
Allow for the path of exhaust air in the diffuser. Provide an outlet for the air either by a series of circular openings
in the top of the assembly or by a circular spigot for direct connection to extract or exhaust ducting.
Ensure that the fixing is capable of carrying the weight of the whole assembly.
111 EMERGENCY LIGHTING LUMINAIRES

Ensure that all Emergency Lighting luminaires comply with BS EN 60598 and BS 5499.
Comply with ICEL 1001; ensure that emergency lighting luminaires are marked with the ICEL certification labels.
112 EXIT SIGNS

Ensure that exit signs comply with BS 5499.
113 HAZARDOUS AREA LUMINAIRES

Comply with the following standards:
- BS EN 60079
- BS EN 60598
114 SIGNS AND HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS

Ensure that signs and high voltage installations comply with BS 559 and BS EN 50107-1.
Ensure that neon transformers comply with BS EN 61050.
120 LAMPHOLDERS
121 GENERAL
Comply with the following standards:
- Lamp caps - BS EN 60061-1

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Lamp holders - BS EN 60061-2

- Lamp holders with enhanced safety features – BS 7895
- Bayonet lampholders – BS EN 61184
- Lampholders for tubular fluorescent lamps and starter holders – BS EN 60400
- Edison screw lampholders – BS EN 60238
Ensure that lampholders in luminaires of similar type and rating are identical.
Ensure that metal lampholders incorporate an earthing terminal.
122 TUNGSTEN FITTINGS

Provide a shade carrier ring for separately mounted lampholders for tungsten filament lamps.
Ensure that the phase conductor is connected to the centre contact of Screw Lampholders.
123 MOUNTING
Securely mount lampholder in luminaire when it is the sole support for the lamp.
Provide integral cord grip when lampholders are suspended by cord.
When mounted directly to conduit systems use a backplate lampholder for the conduit box.
130 CONTROL GEAR AND COMPONENTS

Ensure that control gear and components are suitable for lamp type, wattage and starting characteristics.
131 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS AND STARTERS

Ensure that fluorescent lamp ballasts and starters comply with the following standards:
- Ballasts:
o BS EN 61347
o BS EN 60921
o BS EN 60925 for d.c. supplied electronic ballasts
o BS EN 60929 for fluorescent lamps to BS EN 60081 and BS EN 60901
o BS EN 60730-2-3 for ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps
- Starters:
o BS EN 61347
o BS EN 60927
Use low distortion ballast lumen factor 0-15 or greater.
132 DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS AND STARTERS

Ensure that discharge lamp ballasts and starters comply with the following standards:
- BS EN 61347
- BS EN 60923 for ballasts

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 60927 for starters
133 CAPACITORS
Use capacitors in accordance with BS EN 61048 and BS EN 61049 in tubular fluorescent, high pressure
mercury and low pressure sodium vapour discharge lamp circuits.
134 SUPPLY TERMINALS

Use screw terminals for supply cables and circuit protective conductors, size to terminate up to three 2.5mm2
conductors. Provide separate terminal blocks for each incoming circuit, with marking to identify each circuit.
135 FUSE
Include a fuse holder and BS 1362 fuse in each incoming circuit phase connection.
136 INTERFERENCE
Comply with BS EN 55015.
137 REMOTE GEAR

Locate control gear in separate enclosure with the same degree of protection and finish specified for the
luminaire. Comply with the luminaire manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum cable length between gear
and lamp.
140 LAMPS
141 TUNGSTEN FILAMENT LAMPS

Comply with BS EN 60064, BS EN 60432-1, BS EN 60630 and BS 6179.
Supply electronic step-down converters for filament lamps to BS EN 61347 and BS EN 61047.
142 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

Ensure that fluorescent lamps comply with the following standards:
- BS 1853-2 for UK tubular lamps;

- BS EN 60901 and BS EN 61199 for single capped lamps;
- BS EN 60081 and BS EN 61195 for double capped lamps;
- BS EN 60969 and BS EN 60968 for self ballast lamps.
143 TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMPS

Ensure that tungsten halogen lamps comply with BS EN 60357 and BS EN 60432-2.
144 HIGH PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOUR LAMPS

Ensure that high pressure mercury vapour lamps comply with BS EN 60188 and BS EN 62035.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
145 METAL HALIDE LAMPS

Ensure that metal halide lamps comply with BS EN 62035.
146 HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR LAMPS

Ensure that high pressure sodium vapour lamps comply with BS EN 62035.
147 LOW PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR LAMPS

Ensure that low pressure sodium vapour lamps comply with BS EN 60192.
148 TRANSFORMERS FOR LOW VOLTAGE (LV) LUMINAIRES

Ensure that transformers comply with the following standards:
- BS EN 55014;
- BS EN 61547;
- BS EN 61347;
- BS EN 61047;
- BS EN 61558.
Ensure that transformers are each housed in a sheet steel casing with a demountable lid. Ensure that each such
unit has a primary anti surge fuse, secondary fuse and that each output to luminaire is fused. Fit with a thermal
cut out which has an automatic reset.
Ensure that all such transformers have soft start characteristics, 0.5 to 1.0 second ramp up, runs in silent
operation and have an automatically regulated secondary voltage.
Locate transformers in well ventilated areas which are easily accessible.
Where dimming transformers are used, obtain the luminaire manufacturer’s written assurance that the
transformer is compatible.
149 LAMP MANUFACTURER

Ensure that lamps of the same type are obtained from the same manufacturer.
150 SUPPORT SYSTEMS
151 CONDUIT
Use conduit of the same type as that used for the lighting system, and no less than 20mm.
152 ROD
Use continuously threaded rods made from cadmium plated steel with matching washers and nuts.
153 CHAIN
Use cadmium plated steel chain with load carrying capacity of not less than twice the weight of the complete
luminaire.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
154 FLEXIBLE CORD

Ensure that the temperature rating of the flexible cord is suitable for the operating temperature of the
luminaire or lampholder. Ensure that every such cord is adequate for the mass that it supports.
155 WALL BRACKET

Ensure that every wall bracket is suitable for supporting the associated luminaire.
156 BALL AND SOCKET

Provide ball and socket as top support, complete with cover fixed to circular conduit box.
157 COLUMNS AND BOLLARDS

Ensure that columns and bollards comply with BS EN 40.
158 OPTICAL FIBRE LUMINAIRES

Ensure optical fibre connections comply with BS EN ISO 11149.
160 ACCESSORIES
161 LIGHTING TRACK

Where indicated on the drawings or in section V21 or V42 of this specification, provide track for fixing luminaires
in accordance with BS EN 60570.
162 INTEGRAL PHOTO-CELL

Incorporate an integral photo-cell on each luminaire where indicated on the drawings or in the schedules.
200 WORKMANSHIP
210 GENERAL
Install luminaires complete and as indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise stated, install luminaires plumb,
square, and level with ceilings and walls, and in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures.
Do not use the permanent lighting installation for temporary lighting purposes during the contract period unless
prior written approval is obtained from the Contract Administrator. Where such approval is given provide new
lamps at the handover for the employer's use.
Fix every surface mounted luminaire to a conduit box (or boxes) which have porcelain screw type
connectors.
Fix all luminaires and pendants with brass roundhead screws.
Provide all pendant luminaires with a suspension system and an associated flexible cable to a minimum length of
600 mm unless otherwise defined.
Connect all metalwork on luminaires to the circuit protective conductor with proper and approved earthing
arrangements for metalwork.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Upon completion of the installation and after circuits have been energised, apply power and demonstrate to the
Contract Administrator the capability and compliance with requirements of all luminaires and circuits.
Correct or remove and replace malfunctioning units, then re-test and demonstrate to the Contract Administrator’s
satisfaction. Ensure that all lamps are fully operational; replace all burnt out lamps at no extra cost to the
contract. When directed by the Contract Administrator, remove all temporary protective covering from luminaires.
220 ORIENTATION
Install luminaires in the positions indicated on the drawings and in horizontal plane, unless shown otherwise on
the drawings.
230 CLEANLINESS
Ensure that all luminaires are clean and grease free on handover. Thoroughly clean all luminaires after
installation, leaving the installation in a new, clean condition at handover.
240 INSTALLATION
241 RECESSED FITTINGS

Install luminaires flush with the finished surface of the associated ceiling, wall or floor into which they are fitted.
242 SEMI-RECESSED FITTINGS

Install luminaires in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions to achieve the extent of recessing
required.
243 WALL MOUNTED FITTINGS

Install luminaires at the height indicated on the drawings.
244 MATERIAL SUPPORTIVE SURFACE

Ensure that the fire classification of luminaires is appropriate. Do not mount luminaires on flammable
surfaces.
245 POTENTIALLY EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES

Ensure that the installation complies with BS EN 60079 for the potentially explosive atmospheres.
246 AREAS WITH INFRA-RED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Install luminaires in areas with infra-red control systems or data bearers, so as to cause minimum
disturbance to the infra-red transmission system in accordance with BS 7693.
247 SIGNS AND HIGH VOLTAGE DISCHARGE LIGHTING

Comply with BS 559 and BS EN 50107-1.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
248 EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMPS

Use the same wattage lamp on all luminaires fed from a common transformer. Supply each such luminaire on
common transformer, by a separate cable of the same cross-sectional area.
250 SUPPORTS
Ensure that every support is adequate for the weight of the associated luminaire.
Provide the following minimum number of supports for each luminaire longer than 600mm:
Luminaire Width (mm) Minimum number of supports

≤ 300 2
> 300 4
251 CONDUIT
Where luminaires are supported from conduit, provide a conduit box forming an integral part of the lighting
conduit system at each point of suspension. Ensure that all such suspensions are vertical. Use tube of the same
corrosion resistance as the conduit of the lighting system.
Secure the luminaire body with back nuts and washers where the conduit enters it.
Where the temperature of the material may exceed 60°C or the mass suspended exceeds 5kg, do not
support luminaires directly from conduit boxes made from non-metallic or heat sensitive materials.
252 TRUNKING
Where luminaires are supported from trunking, use proprietary clamps or brackets that are compatible with both
the luminaire and the trunking.
Where the temperature of the material may exceed 60°C or the mass suspended exceeds 5kg, do not
support luminaires directly from trunking made from non-metallic or heat sensitive materials.
253 DIRECT FIXING

Install luminaires in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
254 LUMINAIRES LOCATED IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS

Support luminaires directly from building fabric and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Suspend luminaires at the height indicated on the drawings. Ensure that all suspensions hang vertically unless
otherwise indicated.
255 ROD
Use washers, nut and lock nut at top and bottom of rod. Paint cut ends with calcium plumbate primer or zinc rich
paint.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
256 CHAIN
Use a ‘hook cover’ for suspension from a circular conduit box. For connection to luminaires use luminaire
manufacturer’s own chain hook but, if not available, use a hook with standard screw threaded end and secure it
to the luminaire body with nuts and washers. Where indicated use captive hooks.
257 FLEXIBLE CORD

Suspend cord from ceiling rose.
258 BALL AND SOCKET

Install cable through ball and socket connected to the conduit box.
259 COLUMNS AND BOLLARDS

Confirm locations with the Contract Administrator before excavation.
Mount column or bollard on a base as recommended by the manufacturer.
Ensure columns and bollards are vertical unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or the schedules or in
section V21, V40 or V41 of this specification.
Install a circuit protective conductor to connect the luminaire to the earthing terminal in the service
compartment; make the circuit protective conductor the same size as the live conductors. Bond the
accessible metal parts of the column or bollard to the earthing terminal.
260 CONNECTIONS
261 LUMINAIRES
Use the appropriate size of grommet where cables enter through the hole in the luminaire body.
Ensure that the earthing terminal of BS EN 60598 - Class 1 luminaires is connected to the conduit circuit
protective conductor of the supply circuit.
Clip, or tie back with suitable proprietary devices, loose wiring within luminaires, at 300mm intervals.
262 DIRECT TO CONDUIT

Terminate circuit wiring in a terminal block within the supporting conduit box. Use flexible cord from the terminal
block to the luminaire.
Terminate circuit wiring at the supply terminals of the luminaire. Take all conductors through the same cable
entry into luminaire.
263 DIRECT TO TRUNKING

Terminate circuit wiring in a terminal block in an adaptable box located on the side of the trunking. Use flexible
cord from the terminal block to the luminaire.
Terminate circuit wiring at the supply terminals of the luminaire. Take all conductors through the same cable
entry into the luminaire.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
264 SUSPENDED FROM TRUNKING

Where luminaires are suspended from trunking, secure plug and socket to BS 546, adjacent to, or on the side of,
trunking. Terminate circuit wiring at the socket. Take flexible cord from plug to the supply terminals of the
luminaire.
265 RECESSED FITTINGS

Where luminaires are recessed in a suspended ceiling, terminate circuit wiring at plug and socket to
BS 546, located not more than 500mm from the access through the ceiling. Use flexible cord from plug to supply
the terminals of the luminaire.
Where luminaires are recessed in a suspended ceiling, terminate circuit wiring in a terminal block within the
conduit box.
266 MICC CABLES

Fix cable gland to luminaire and continue conductors to the supply terminals of the luminaire.

section prevails.
European Standard.
- BS 476-20 Fire tests on building materials and structures Part 20: Method for determination of the fire
resistance of elements of construction. General principles
- BS 4533-102-19 Luminaires Part 102: Particular requirements Section 102.19: Specification for air-handling
luminaires (safety requirements)
- BS 5225-1 Photometric data for luminaires Part 1: Photometric measurements
- BS 546 Two-pole and earthing-pin plugs, socket outlets and socket-outlet adapters
- BS 559 Specification for design, construction and installation of signs
- BS 1362 Specification for general purpose fuse links for domestic and similar purposes (primarily for use in
plugs)
- BS 1853-2 Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting service. Part 2: Specification for lamps used in the
United Kingdom not included in BS EN 60081, BS EN 60901, BS EN 61195 and BS EN 61199
- BS 5225 Photometric data for luminaires

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 5499 Graphical symbols and signs. Safety signs including fire safety signs
- BS 6972 Specification for general requirements for luminaire supporting couplers for
- domestic, light industrial and commercial use
- BS 7693 Guide to uses of infra-red transmission and the prevention or control of interference between
systems
- BS 7895 Specification for bayonet lampholders with enhanced safety
- BS EN 40 Lighting columns
- BS EN 13032 Measurement and protection of photovoltaic data of lamps and luminaires
- BS EN 50107-1 Signs and luminous-discharge-tube installations operating from a no-load rated output voltage
exceeding 1 kV but not exceeding 10 kV Part 1: General requirements
- BS EN 55014 Electromagnetic compatibility. Requirements for household appliances, electric tools and similar
apparatus
- BS EN 55015 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of electrical lighting and
similar equipment
- BS EN 60061 Specification for lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the control or
interchangeability and safety.
- BS EN 60064 Tungsten filament lamps for domestic and similar general lighting purposes.
- Performance requirements
- BS EN 60079 Explosive atmospheres
- BS EN 60081 Double-capped fluorescent lamps. Performance specifications
- BS EN 60188 High-pressure mercury vapour lamps. Performance specifications
- BS EN 60192 Low pressure sodium vapour lamps. Performance specification
- BS EN 60238 Edison screw lampholders
- BS EN 60357 Tungsten halogen lamps (non-vehicle). Performance specifications
- BS EN 60400 Lampholders for tubular fluorescent lamps and starterholders
- BS EN 60432 Safety specification for incandescent lamps.
- BS EN 60570 Electrical supply track systems for luminaires
- BS EN 60598 Luminaires
- BS EN 60630 Maximum lamp outlines for incandescent lamps
- BS EN 60730-2-3 Automatic electrical controls for household and similar use Part2-3: Particular requirements
for thermal protectors for ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps
- BS EN 60901 Single-capped fluorescent lamps. Performance specifications
- BS EN 60921 Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps. Performance requirements
- BS EN 60923 Auxiliaries for lamps. Ballasts for discharge lamps (excluding tubular fluorescent lamps).
Performance requirements
- BS EN 60925 Specification for performance requirements for D.C. supplied electronic ballasts for tubular
fluorescent lamps

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 60927 Auxiliaries for lamps. Starting devices (other than glow starters). Performance requirements
- BS EN 60929 A.C. supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps. Performance requirements
- BS EN 60968 Specification for self-ballasted lamps for general lighting services. Safety requirements
- BS EN 60969 Specification for self-ballasted lamps for general lighting services.
- BS EN 61047 DC or AC supplied electronic step-down convertors for filament lamps.
- BS EN 61048 Auxiliary lamps. Capacitors for use in tubular fluorescent and other discharge lamp circuits.
General and safety requirements
- BS EN 61049 Specification for capacitors for use in tubular fluorescent and other discharge lamp circuits.
Performance requirements
- BS EN 61050 Specification for transformers for tubular discharge lamps having a no-load output voltage
exceeding 1000 V (generally called neon-transformers).
- General and safety requirements
- BS EN 61184 Bayonet lampholders
- BS EN 61195 Double-capped fluorescent lamps. Safety specifications
- BS EN 61199 Single-capped fluorescent lamps. Safety specifications
- BS EN 61347 Lamp controlgear
- BS EN 61547 Specification for equipment for general lighting purposes. EMC immunity requirements
- BS EN 61558 Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products
- BS EN 62035 Discharge lamps (excluding fluorescent lamps). Safety specifications
- EN 62262 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment against external mechanical
impacts (IK code)
- BS EN ISO 11149 Optics and optical instruments. Lasers and laser related equipment. Fibre optic connectors
for non-telecommunication laser applications
- ICEL 1001 Scheme of Product and Authenticated Photometric Data Registration for Emergency Luminaires and
Conversion Modules, Published by the Industry Committee for emergency Lighting

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y74 ACCESSORIES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
100 LIGHTING SWITCHES

Ensure lighting switches comply with the relevant BS / BS EN.
Ensure switches are capable of switching the full rated inductive or resistive load, and where connected to
fluorescent loads in excess of 600 Watts, use minimum 15 amp rating.
Install switches with boxes of 37mm minimum depth with adjustable lugs to ensure switchplates are true and
square where required. Fit boxes flush with wall finish and make any adjustment to depth with extension rings.
Ensure all switch boxes are compatible with the wiring system used and are complete with CPC terminal.
Where several switches of the same phase are required in the same position, use a multi-gang switch box to
accommodate all switches on a common faceplate.
Where switches are specified for installation in situations exposed to weather, or continual dampness, ensure
they are of the weatherproof pattern in accordance with the relevant B.S. and minimum IP56 rating.
Where different phases are present at one switch location, segregate each phase in a separate compartment and
cover each compartment by its own internal warning plate suitably engraved, "WARNING 400 VOLTS PRESENT".
Mount switches adjacent to the closing side of doors where possible.
200 SOCKET OUTLETS

Ensure socket outlets comply with the relevant BS, are switched and shuttered, are mounted in single or multi-
gang assemblies and are of the type and rating as indicated in the specification or on the drawings.
Fit plug tops to appliances with fuses of the correct rating.
Install all socket outlets with suitable boxes of not less than 35 mm depth with adjustable lugs to ensure socket
plates are true and square. Where required fit boxes flush with finished surface (e.g. floors, skirtings or walls)
and make any adjustments to depth using extension rings. Install back boxes constructed from pressed
steel/PVC/pressed steel and PVC as detailed in the Particular Specification.
Ensure all socket outlet boxes are compatible with the wiring system used and are complete with CPC terminal.
The dual earth terminal requirement equally relates to any non socket outlet accessories connected to the same
circuit.
Ensure cover plate finishes match the lighting switches and are flush or surface to suit the mounting box.
Ensure the earth terminal(s) of each socket is connected to the box earth terminal with a green/yellow insulated
protective conductor. Do not use cover screws for earth continuity.
Use indicating pattern outlets for appliances with a heating element.
Where socket outlets are specified for installation in situation exposed to weather or continual dampness, ensure
that they are of the weatherproof pattern in accordance with the relevant B.S. and minimum IP56 rating.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
300 FUSED CONNECTION UNITS

Ensure these are to the relevant BS and are double-pole switched or unswitched insulated patterns with plates to
match the socket outlets.
Where used as a flex outlet for an appliance, ensure they are of the flex outlet pattern with cable anchoring
clamp.
Fit fuses of the correct rating.
Install fused connection units with suitable boxes of not less than 35 mm depth with adjustable lugs to ensure
the connection unit are true and square. Fit boxes flush with the wall finish and make any adjustment to depth
using extension rings. Install back boxes constructed from pressed steel/PVC/pressed steel and PVC as detailed in
the Particular Specification.
Ensure all boxes are compatible with the wiring system used and are complete with CPC terminal.
Ensure the earth connection of the connection unit is connected to the box earth terminal with a green/yellow
insulated protective conductor. Do not use cover screws for earth continuity.
400 LAMPHOLDERS
Provide ceramic interiors for screw type lamps and when used in areas exposed to weather or continual
dampness.
Provide brass lampholder with ceramic interiors when integral with luminaires.
Provide lampholder with compression cord grip with integral moulded grip.
Ensure batten lampholders are heat resistant and skirted.
Ensure metal lampholders are effectively earthed using an earth terminal fixed to the lampholder by the
manufacturer.
Ensure low energy lampholders have a non-standard interface.
Ensure all bayonet lampholders are safety type unless specified otherwise.
500 CEILING ROSES

Provide ceiling roses for all lighting points with a luminaire suspended by a flexible cable without an integral
mounting.
Ensure ceiling roses conform to the relevant BS of the white insulated pattern incorporating 2, 3 or 4 terminals,
as necessary and complete with cord grips.
600 LAMPS
Ensure all lamps are new at handover, allowing reasonable time for testing etc.
"Break-in" fluorescent lamps used on dimming circuits for at least forty hours. Ensure lamps shall comply with the
relevant BS.
700 FLEXIBLE CABLES

Use flexible cables for pendant luminaires and for final connections to equipment (fixed, or portable).

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure these are 300/500 volt grade to BS 6500, Table II, PVC insulated white circular with high conductivity
tinned copper conductors of minimum size 1.0 mm2.
Ensure the maximum mass of any suspended luminaire is 5 kg unless additional support is provided.
Use heat resistant flexible cables for all non pendant type luminaires.
Use heat resistant flexible cables for making final connections to equipment (fixed or portable) with a heating
element or equipment fixed to pipework or appliance forming part of a heat distribution system; ensure the
flexible cables are 300/500V grade complying with the relevant BS.

Ensure double pole and triple pole and neutral control switches are in accordance with relevant BS (Category
AC22) respectively and are suited as other accessories defined in particular specification items.
Ensure each switch is of the surface or flush pattern as appropriate and install with suitable back box and flylead.
Ensure switch plates are complete with pilot lamp and where defined in Particular Specification items, engraved
with coloured lettering identifying the equipment being controlled.
If cable outlet plates are required for final connections to equipment, suite these to other accessories.
900 SHAVER SOCKETS

Install shaver sockets in accordance with BS7671, fed from a local lighting circuit, and ensure they are
manufactured in accordance with BS EN 61558.
Ensure mounting back boxes are installed flush with the wall surface in concealed installations. Install back boxes
constructed from pressed steel/PVC/pressed steel and PVC as detailed in the Particular Specification.
1000 COOKER CONTROL UNITS

Ensure cooker control units are manufactured to the relevant BS, and are complete with a suitably rated DP
switch and where indicated a 13A switched socket outlet, both with indicating lamp, and suitable back box.
Install back boxes constructed from pressed steel/PVC/pressed steel and PVC as detailed in the Particular
Specification.
Mount the cooker control unit alongside the cooker, not directly behind or above.
Effect final connections via a fixed cooker connection unit mounted directly behind the cooker. Where split level
hobs and ovens are to be provided, see particular specification items for the required final connection details.
1100 FUSED CLOCK CONNECTORS

Install fused clock connectors for all mains voltage clock points. Ensure connectors are specifically designed for
clock connections and are of the fused plug and socket type, complete with appropriately sized flexible cable for
final connections.
Connect clock connectors to the 'local' lighting circuit feed unless otherwise stated on the drawings or in
particular specification items.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Install all clock connectors with boxes of suitable depth with adjustable lugs to ensure outlet plates are true and
square. Fit boxes flush with wall finish and make any adjustments to depth with extension rings. Install back
boxes constructed from pressed steel/PVC/pressed steel and PVC as detailed in the Particular Specification.
Ensure all boxes are compatible with the wiring system used and are complete with CPC terminal.
1200 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

Ensure all accessories are mounted in line with current best practice and at heights to meet accessibility
requirements.

section prevails.
European Standard.
- BS 88-3 Low-voltage fuses Part 3: Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by unskilled persons (fuses
mainly for household or similar applications).
- Examples of standardized systems of fuses A to F
- BS 546 Specification. Two-pole and earthing-pin plugs, socket-outlets and socket outlet adaptors
- BS 646 Specification. Cartridge fuse-links (rated up to 5 amperes) for a.c. ad d.c. service
- BS 1361 Specification for cartridge fuses for a.c. circuits in domestic and similar premises
- BS 1362 Specification for general purpose fuse links for domestic and similar purposes (primarily for use in
plugs)
- BS 1363-1 13 A plugs, socket-outlets, adaptors and connection units. Specification for rewirable and non-
rewirable 13 A fused plugs
- BS 1363-2 13 A plugs, socket-outlets, adaptors and connection units. Specification for 13 A switched and
unswitched socket-outlets.
- BS 1363-4 13 A plugs, socket-outlets, adaptors and connection units. Specification for 13. A fused connection
units switched and unswitched
- BS 2950 Specification. Cartridge fuse-links for telecommunication and light electrical Apparatus
- BS 4177 Specification for cooker control units
- BS 4573 Specification for 2-pin reversible plugs and shaver socket-outlets
- BS 4662 Boxes for flush mounting of electrical accessories. Requirements and test methods and dimensions
- BS 5733 Specification for general requirements for electrical accessories
- BS 6396 Electrical systems in office furniture and educational furniture. Specification

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 6500 Electric cables. Flexible cords rated up to 300/350 V, for use with appliances and equipment intended
for domestic, office and similar environments
- BS 6991 Specification for 6/10 A two-pole weather-resistant couplers for household, commercial and light
industrial equipment
- BS 7071 Specification for portable residual current devices
- BS 7288 Specification for socket outlets incorporating residual current devices (S.R.C.D.s)
- BS 7895 Specification for bayonet lampholders with enhanced safety
- BS 8300 Design of buildings and their approaches to meet the needs of disabled people
- BS EN 55014-1 Electromagnetic compatibility. Requirements for household appliances, electric tools and
similar apparatus Part 1: Emission. Product family standard
- BS EN 55015 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of electrical lighting and
similar equipment
- BS EN 60269 Low voltage fuses (also known as BS 88-1)
- BS EN 60309-1 Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes Part 1: General requirements.
- BS EN 60309-2 Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes Part 2: Dimensional
interchangeability requirements for pin and contact-tube accessories
- BS EN 60320 Appliance couplers for household and similar general purposes
- BS EN 60598-1 Luminaires. General requirements
- BS EN 60598-2 Luminaires. Particular requirements.
- BS EN 60669-1, Switches for household and similar fixed-electrical installations Part 1: General requirements
- BS EN 60670-22 Boxes and enclosures for electrical accessories for household and similar fixed electrical
installations Part 22: Particular requirements for connecting boxes and enclosures
- BS EN 60730-2 Specification for automatic electrical controls for household and similar use Part 2: Particular
requirements
- BS EN 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
- BS EN 61058 Switches for appliances
- BS EN 61009 Residual current circuit breakers with integrated overcurrent protection for household and
similar uses (RCBO’s)
- BS EN 61184 Bayonet lampholders
- BS EN 61558 Safety of power transformers, power supply units and similar devices

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y80 EARTHING AND BONDING COMPONENTS
100 GENERAL
Install the whole of the earthing and bonding installations in accordance with the requirements of BS 7671,
Regional Electricity Company requirements, BS 7430, and other relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice.
Ensure all enclosures, equipment, exposed conductive parts, extraneous conductive parts, metallic trunking,
metallic conduits, metallic cable trays and any other metalwork, other than any live part, forming protection or
part of the electrical installation, including apparatus and appliances, are effectively bonded to earth and do not
form part of the earth fault path of the protective conductor system.
Ensure all LV socket outlets have a green/yellow PVC insulated 2.5 sq mm stranded copper conductor as a 'fly
lead' connected between earth terminals secured to both socket assembly and socket box.
Provide each lighting switch grid with an earth terminal and 'fly lead' as detailed above.
Provide fly leads as described above for all hinged panels of switches, switchgear, control cubicles, distribution
boards, etc. Route/protect the 'fly leads' to obviate damage to the cables when panels are opened and closed.
Provide protective conductors in the form of tinned copper tape for the full length of all busbar trunking systems.
Ensure the size of this tape shall be in accordance with BS 7671 and fix externally to the side of the trunking
using brass bolts and double (locking) nuts. Ensure maximum fixing centres are 900mm and each section of
rising busbar trunking is effectively bonded to the tape.
Ensure all main water pipes, main gas pipes other service pipes and ventilation ducting (including ductwork
flexible connections, riser of central heating and air conditioning systems) oil pipe services, storage tank, piped
gas systems, etc, and the exposed metallic parts of the building structure are effectively connected to the main
earthing terminal points using, where applicable, earthing clamps which conform to BS 951.
Ensure the installation has all incoming services bonded to earth at the point of entry. For the purposes of this
clause a building is defined as a separate structure. Structures linked by a corridor, subway or bridge are
considered to be separate structures.
Bond together services entering/leaving plant rooms, boiler houses, calorifier rooms, bathrooms, kitchens and
other wet-process areas, and bond to the electrical installation protective conductor system.
Extraneous metalwork to be bonded includes:
- Metal ceiling grids by bonding each primary grid member using a 4 sq mm PVC insulated copper conductor;
- Metallic balustrades and handrails
- Metallic ladders and companion ways
- Suspended metal floor systems including supports/frames; minimum two bonds per room plus one additional
bond per fifty square metres
- All other exposed metallic parts and equipment permanently secured to or forming part of the building
structure including exposed metalwork of hollow partitions and separate sections of duct/pipework insulation
metallic covering
Ensure that all exposed or extraneous conductive parts, having a resistance to earth of less than one

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Mohm are bonded to the electrical services earth.
Prove each circuit protective conductor prior to making any supplementary bonding connection.
Fix copper tape to the building structure by means of purpose-made 'spacer bar' saddles.
Make joints in copper tape by:
- Tin joints prior to assembly with minimum of two copper rivets

- Minimum two brass bolts and sweated overall
- Cadweld, or similar, in accordance with manufacturers instruction
Ensure that where holes are drilled in the copper tape for connection to items of plant the effective cross
sectional area of the connection is not less than that required to comply with BS 7671. Tin the connected surface
area.
Ensure bolts, nuts and washers for any fixing of the earth tape are bronze.
210 EARTH – SUPPLIES RECEIVED AT LOW VOLTAGE

Earth is normally the earth terminals or earthed cable sheath of the electricity supply installation, provided the
company has given written approval for the use of their earthing system for this purpose.
Where the supply of a TT system requiring a connection to earth supplied by the consumer, install an earth
electrode system to meet the site and soil conditions. Provide solid drawn high conductivity copper rods, 15mm
diameter and 1200mm sections with internal screw and socket joints.
Fit sections with hardened steel tips and driving caps. Ensure depth of the driver rods are a minimum of 2400mm
and the spacing is at least equal to their length. Ensure no electrode is within 3000mm of the building
foundations.
Make connections by using proprietary clamps and provide with a concrete inspection pit with removable covers
inscribed "EARTH".
Provide earthing terminals at all main incoming supply positions and connect to earth. Ensure main and/or sub-
main panels have an earthing terminal and are effectively connected to earth.
220 SUBSTATION EARTHING/CONNECTIONS TO SWITCHGEAR

Ensure the minimum earthing requirements for substation earthing and associated connections to switchgear etc.
conform with BS 7430 and as detailed in the following section/tender drawings.
Ensure the position of the LV neutral earth link affords correct operation of the specified earth fault protection.
Bond sheath and/or armour at one end only where single core, lead covered or aluminium live armoured cable's
are installed. Mount glands on insulated gland plate at the unbonded end. Bond secondary connection of
transformers/generators at the switchboard end.
Install an earth electrode system to meet the site and soil condition. Comprises solid drawn high conductivity
copper rods of proprietary manufacture, 15mm diameter 1200mm long section with internal screw and socket
joints.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Fit rod sections with hardened steel tips and driving caps. Ensure the depth of driver rod is a minimum of 2400
mm and the spacing between rods is at least equal to the driven length. Ensure no electrode is within 3000 mm
of the building foundations.
Interconnect earth rods using minimum 25 mm x 3 mm copper tape.
Divide the earth rod system into two equal parts so that testing can be carried out on each half without loss of
earthing facilities.
Ensure that each part of the system achieves a resistance less than 1.7 times combined system value.
Connect each part of the system to proprietary testing links using insulated conductors, terminating at the
substation earth bar.
Make joints in earthing conductors by any of the following methods.
Tin jointed area of conductor, install minimum of four rivets, then sweat joint solid.
Proprietary crimps, by purpose made automatic machine, ensuring that a crimp, once started cannot be released
until full pressure, and crimp depth has been achieved.
Proprietary fusion welding system.
Ensure connections to the earth electrodes are readily accessible for periodic inspection, and protected against
mechanical damage and corrosion. Make the connection to the rod by means of a purpose made clamp and lay
below ground level in a concrete inspection pit having a removable cover prominently inscribed "Earth".
Carry out soil resistivity and other tests, as detailed in the relevant British Standard.
inscribed "EARTH".
Provide earthing terminals at all main incoming supply positions and connect to Earth. Ensure main and/or sub-
main panels have an earthing terminal and are effectively connected to Earth.
230 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS

Provide circuit protective conductor by:
- Copper circuit protective conductors with yellow/green insulation

- Armouring and/or metal sheaths of armoured cable
- An integral protective conductor of any multi-core cable
Size protective conductors in accordance with BS 7671 and as indicated on the drawings, but not less than 1.5 sq
mm.
Terminate all circuit protective conductors, when fixed to bolted connections, using compression type lugs made
with an automatic purpose made machine.
Bond the metal sheaths and/or armouring of paper and PVC insulated cables to the metal parts of the equipment
to which they are connected, utilising a proprietary brass earthing tag and brass nut and bolt.
When flexible conduit is used, ensure the protective conductor at the equipment end is made-off to the
equipment earth terminal. Install the protective conductor within the conduit and suitably sized for the circuit(s)
passing through.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
240 TN-S SYSTEMS

Ensure that earthing, bonding and neutral switching isolation comply with requirements of BS7671, the
requirements of the Protective Multiple Earthing Approval, and those of the Regional Electricity Company.
250 EXTENSION AND ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING INSTALLATIONS

Check existing installations which are being extended to ensure that the existing earth continuity conductors and
earthing leads comply with BS 7671.
Where a connection is made to another earth continuity conductor or earthing lead, supply and fix a
permanent label indelibly marked with the words “SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH - DO NOT REMOVE".
260 GENERATORS
Install an independent earth electrode system conforming to BS 7671.
Connect an earth lead between the earth electrode/electrodes and the star point on the generator.
Bond the star point and metal framework of the generator to the Site Wide Electrical Contractors earth point
(after obtaining their permission) and/or the 'main' incoming earth point.
Ensure the size of the earthing lead and earth bonding leads are at least the same as the earthing lead of the
installation, i.e. do not size according to the rating of the generator.
270 EXTERNAL SOCKET OUTLETS AND EQUIPMENT

Note that the term "external socket outlet and equipment" applies to any socket outlet or equipment which itself
is located outside the equipotential bonding zone of the main electrical installation or provided for the specific
purpose of enabling mobile or portable equipment to be used outside this zone.
Protect all external socket outlets by a residual current device (RCCB) having an operating current not
greater than 30mA.

section prevails.
European Standard.
- Protective Multiple Earthing Approval 1974

- BS 951 Electrical earthing. Clamps for earthing and bonding purposes. Specification

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 4444 Guide to electrical earth monitoring and protective conductor proving.

- BS 5958 Code of Practice for control of undesirable static electricity.
- BS 7361 Cathodic protection.
- BS 7361-1 Part 1: Code of practice for land and marine applications
- BS EN 13636 Cathodic protection of buried metallic tanks and related piping
- BS EN 15112 External cathodic protection of well casing
- BS EN 62305 Protection against lightning

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y81 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
100 GENERAL
Carry out inspection and tests to comply with any British or European standards as necessary on all equipment
and installations.
Where a substation, HV/LV transformer, HV switchgear, LV switchgear, generator, or UPS system has been
completely assembled at a manufacturer's works, arrange for the employer's representative to inspect and
witness tests on the completed equipment at the works. Allow the employer and Contract Administrator at least
14 days notice of the tests.
Whether this opportunity is accepted by the employer or not, make available the complete set of test results and
inspection reports to the Contract Administrator after the tests have been completed and before the equipment is
installed.
Retest on site any such item of equipment that has been partially dismantled for transportation, unless otherwise
agreed with the Contract Administrator.
Submit a detailed programme of testing to the Contract Administrator at least seven days prior to the
commencement of the tests on site. Notify manufacturers or specialists where necessary.
Arrange for the attendance of a tester to carry out all required tests. Ensure that this tester is not the same
person who made the installation, unless agreed with the Contract Administrator.
Supply all test instruments. Ensure they are calibrated immediately prior to commencement of testing and
operated by trained personnel. Arrange for all calibration certificates to be available for inspection at the time of
the tests. Prior to commencement of tests ensure the Contract Administrator is asked to comment on the
suitability of the proposed test equipment and methods of testing being adopted.
Arrange and carry out disconnection or similar operations to satisfy the requirements for testing, etc, and the
reinstatement of the installation after tests.
Carry out the test procedures in the following clauses in addition to any tests required by the particular system
section, or any other ‘Y’ section, of this specification, as a minimum.
200 PARTICULAR TEST PROCEDURES

Carry out the following procedures as necessary in accordance with the relevant British or other standards and, if
appropriate, the relevant Health Technical Memoranda (HTM).
210 GENERAL
211 SUBSTATION
Test and inspect substation components at the manufacturer’s works, whether the substation is packaged or
made up of discreet elements.
Test the components of the substation as detailed in the following clauses.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
212 TRANSFORMERS
Test and inspect substation components at the manufacturer’s works, whether the substation is packaged or
made up of discreet elements.
Test and inspect power transformers fully in accordance with BS EN 60076-5.
Under this standard, test and demonstrate that the transformer can withstand a short circuit, both thermally and
dynamically.
Test and inspect power transformers as detailed in BS EN 60076-3.
Under this standard, test and demonstrate that the transformer insulation can withstand a test voltage of the
magnitude stated in the standard. Use a combination of the following tests depending on the requirements of
table 1 in the standard and the type of winding in the transformer:
- Lightning impulse test

- Switching impulse test
- Long duration ac test
- Short duration ac test
- Separate source ac test
On every transformer that has an on-load tap-changer, ensure that the tap-changer is capable of carrying the
same overcurrents due to short circuits as the windings, and that the equipment complies with BS 5611.
On every transformer test every relay that has been installed.
Test every temperature sensor that has been installed in the oil or embedded in the windings or core, and verify
its correct operation, be it alarm or shut down.
220 SWITCHGEAR
221 HV SWITCHGEAR
Inspect and test all HV switchgear fully in accordance with BS EN 60298 including:
- That it has been designed and constructed in compliance with section 5

- That type testing and routine tests are in accordance with sections 6 and 7
- That during transportation and erection of the switchgear, section 10 of the standard is fully observed
Ensure that all switchgear has been ASTA type tested and has their approval and certification.
Inspect all equipment. Check that it is installed complete according to the installation drawings and this
specification, and that it is clean and free from damage. Check that all notices and labelling are correct.
Check all connections are correct and tightly fastened.
Test cabling, switchboard and switchgear insulation at voltages to be agreed with equipment manufacturers and
the Contract Administrator in accordance with BS EN 62271-200.
Check the operation of all switchgear, including trip testing using injection current testing where appropriate.
Comply with the relevant aspects of A32 of this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
222 LV SWITCHGEAR
Ensure that, the Work’s test engineer, fully in accordance with the factory’s safety regulations, controls all tests
undertaken at the manufacturer’s works.
Ensure that, in the presence of the employer’s representative, all tests undertaken at site are controlled by the
installer/manufacturer.
Inspect and test switchgear fully in accordance with BS EN 60439, and in particular BS EN 60439-1 to comply
with type testing or partial type testing.
Ensure that all meters fitted to any switchgear have a valid calibration certificate.
During commissioning ensure that all switchgear and distribution boards have been correctly labelled and all
distribution board schedules are correct and in place.
223 HV AND LV SWITCHGEAR FUNCTIONAL TESTS

Carry out functional tests on switchgear to verify correct operation of the following:
- Motorised operation of any switchgear

- Contacts, whether volt-free or not
- Power factor correction including sequencer and contactors
- Isolation testing of both mechanical and electrical interlocks
- Castell key operation
- Any other control function on the switchgear
In carrying out the above tests ensure that interlocks and keys effectively prevent any cross phasing, paralleling
of unintended action by the switchgear.
224 PROTECTION TESTS

Within all switchboards, test every protective relay to ensure it functions correctly.
Verify the action of all such relays by secondary injection methods.
Check that the system has been graded and that the correct settings have been set up.
Check that the grading settings have been correctly recorded in test sheets and that these settings are recorded
in the maintenance manual.
230 CABLES
231 HV CABLES
Test all installed HV cables as detailed in section V11.
Carry out all pressure tests under a ‘permit to test’ issued by the authorised person. Make all such tests in the
presence of the Contract Administrator.
On every paper insulated cable carry out the “crackle est” on the impregnated bindings before making each joint,
to ensure that they contain no water moisture.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
232 LV CABLES
Test all installed LV cables fully in accordance with BS 7671.
The conducting of the tests and the subsequent recording and certification of the results remain the responsibility
of the installer. Ensure that, throughout all such tests, both ends of every cable are monitored by a competent
person.
When testing long cables that probably have considerable capacitance, be aware of the dangers of stored energy
and the need to earth down, in a controlled manner, all cores after each test.
On every paper insulated cable carry out the “crackle test” on the impregnated bindings before making each
joint, to ensure that they contain no water moisture.
240 GENERATORS
241 STANDBY GENERATORS

Test all generators fully in accordance with BS ISO 8528-6.
Include the following tests:
- Simulation of loss of mains

- Simulation of return of mains
- 100% Load test
- 110% Load test
- Step Load test
- Auto and manual synchronisation if applicable
- Compatibility between generator and UPS
- Auto fuel replenishment from bulk including testing level switches in both bulk and daily service tanks
- Critical shut down interlocks and alarms
- Normal shut down interlocks and alarms
- Noise level tests
250 BACKUP, ALARM AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
251 UPS SYSTEMS

Arrange tests on UPS systems by both the manufacturer and the installer in the presence of the Contract
Administrator or Client’s representative.
Carry out the comprehensive tests as laid down in BS EN 62040-3, section 6.
- Light load test

- Full load test
- Full load test with generator start up
- Battery test

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Maintenance bypass test

- Static bypass test
- Functional tests of interlocks
- Simulation of power loss and return
- Efficiency tests
- Inspection of input and output waveforms
Carry out full UPS system tests on each system at the equipment manufacturer's factory.
Carry out the tests in the presence of the Contract Administrator and Client's representatives before dispatch of
the equipment to site.
Test each UPS system under simulated full load conditions on completion of the installation works at site. The
tests to include total simulation of mains failure and the automatic operation of the standby generator system.
Demonstrate fully the UPS systems battery support with a total discharge at the 20 minute and 40 minute battery
period as appropriate at specified full load condition and demonstration of the recovery time over the specified 12
hour period.
Arrange and co-ordinate all tests providing 48 hours notice that the Contract Administrator may be present.
Include standby generator manufacturers in all UPS tests at manufacturers premises who will be responsible for
the verification of the UPS system tests and the information issued to them at design stage for interfacing of the
generator to the UPS systems.
Allow costs for provision of paper charge recorder for duration of the system tests at site. A minimum period of 5
days on line operation shall be required for each of the UPS systems.
Include the recorded test results in the operating and maintenance manuals as a record of all 'on line' tests and
issue at Contract completion.
Complete all tests in the presence of the UPS equipment manufacturer’s engineers. The equipment manufacturers
in conjunction with the installer to allow for all such time and attendance allowing a minimum of 2 days testing at
site.
252 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

Test emergency lighting installations generally as outlined in BS 7671 after first disconnecting all luminaires to
prevent damage to the electronic circuits.
- Visual inspection
- Simulated power loss
- Simulated power return
- Duration test of three hours
Carry out an emergency illuminance test in accordance with annex A of BS 5266 or submit lighting calculations
for the scheme.
Submit the completion certificate in annex B of BS 5266-1 to the Building Control Officer, using either the light
level calculations by the designer and submit with the certificate, or the results of an illuminance test.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
General
Fully test the complete emergency lighting installation in accordance with BS 7671, BS 5266-1 and BS EN 1838,
BS 5266-7 including latest amendments and provide measured reading of all tests undertaken.
Carry out on completion of the installation works, together with any specialist equipment supplier /manufacturer,
the complete testing, commissioning and demonstration of the system operation as detailed below:
Carry out adjustments and calibration of all automatic control devices and systems to provide optimum operation.
Make available a suitable operative, familiar with lighting controls, as may be required to assist in any specialist
equipment supplier/manufacturer throughout the commissioning period.
Ensure that CAD record drawings of the lighting installation and associated controls are completed and available
on site to specialist equipment supplier/manufacturers prior to commissioning commencement.
Prepare a schedule of tests to be applied to the system to demonstrate correct operation of the installation.
Replace all failed lamps of the installed luminaires during the course of the contract Works.
Thoroughly clean all luminaires installation and ensure they are in a new clean condition at handover. Do not use
the permanent lighting installation for temporary lighting purposes during the contract, unless prior written
approval is given, by the Contract Administrator.
Tests to be conducted prior to commissioning
- A visual inspection of the whole installation covering equipment and cable where accessible, to verify:
o compliance with BS 5266-1 and BS EN 1838, BS 5266-7
o compliance with all other applicable British Standards
o correctly selected and erected in accordance with BS 7671
o not visibly damaged so as to impair safety
o correctly labelled and installed
o free from defects
- Inspect and test the electrical installation in accordance with BS 7671 and record all results on
- approved test record sheets Test conductors and other circuit components prior to them being connected to
electronic components in order to avoid damage during the electrical installation test procedures. Electronic
equipment shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions.
- Clearly note on the circuit charts and in operating and maintenance procedures the presence of electronic
components with an indication that testing procedures may result in damage.
- Where any part of the installation is to be concealed within the building make fabric tests to ensure that the
installation is satisfactorily prior to commencement
- Upon completion of the Works subject the whole installation to the tests detailed and note every defect,
correct them and bring to the attention of the Contract Administrator
- Execute all tests within the programme of building works
- Provide all labour and test instruments for carrying out the works. Ensure that the instruments are correctly
calibrated and certified for the limits of accuracy required and are operated by competent persons, trained in
the use of the instruments. If, in the Contract Administrator’s opinion a particular instrument is not suitable
then provide an acceptable alternative

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The Contract Administrator shall be at liberty to demand the use of any testing instrument or apparatus that may
reasonably be considered necessary in the execution of the testing.
Test the following items, where relevant, in the sequence indicated. Standard methods of testing, in respect of
some of the following are given in BS 7671:
- Continuity of conductors
- Continuity of protective conductors, including main and supplementary equipotential bonding
- Earth electrode resistance where applicable
- Insulation resistance
- Insulation of site built assemblies
- Protection by electrical separation
- Protection by barriers or enclosure provided during erection
- Insulation resistance/impedance of floors and walls
- Polarity
- Earth fault loop impedance
- Operation of residual current devices
In the event of any test indicating failure to comply, repeat that test and those preceding the results which, may
have been influenced by the faults indicated, after the fault has been rectified.
Tests to be conducted during commissioning
Test the operation of all luminaires and emergency lighting luminaires accessories and items o equipment and
check for proper function.
Demonstrate the operation of each self-contained luminaire under simulated mains failure condition to prove the
luminaire output for the specified time and that the battery is fully recharged within 2 hours.
Demonstrate the operation of each central battery system supported luminaire under simulate mains failure
condition to prove the luminaire output for the specified time and that the battery to b fully recharged within 24
hours. Carry out functional test of all light switches, emergency lighting test switches and control devices.
Procedure
Carry out the full tests as listed above.
Fully demonstrate the complete operation of the emergency lighting installation to the satisfaction of the Contract
Administrator and Client’s representative.
Arrange a mutually agreed programme for the above demonstrations with the Contract Administrator, providing
at least ten working days notice.
Prepare a method statement for the tests, stating how they are to be undertaken.
Submit the programme for comment at least four weeks in advance.
Documentation
Issue copies of all documentation to the Contract Administrator for comment prior to inclusion in the final
handover document.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Provide maintenance/instruction manuals in the form of hard cover binders detailing the whole operation of the
lighting control, recommended regular testing and maintenance in accordance with
the requirements of this specification.
Bind one set of lighting layout drawings in the manual using clear plastic sleeves and in accordance
with the requirements of the specification.
Forward all documents to the Contract Administrator for comment prior to handover.
Provide two copies (or the number specified in the prelims) of final version of manual, incorporating
copies of test certificates and test results at handover.
Obtain full details from all specialist suppliers/manufactures and include in your tender for the provision of a full
12 months maintenance and system inspection and test.
Lighting installation instruction
Allow for all specialist equipment suppliers/manufacturers to provide a minimum of one full days instruction of the
complete emergency lighting system for the employer’s representative prior to the contract completion date, and
ensure that the demonstration also includes for the automatic testing and monitoring system where specified.
Include a practical demonstration of the installation and equipment. Arrange the required demonstration and
agree the time and dates with regard to the overall project programme of works.
Ensure that ‘As Fitted’ drawings and manuals are available before the demonstration and instruction.
253 FIRE ALARM

Arrange for the manufacturer or his representative to test the whole fire alarm system fully in accordance with BS
5839 and section W50 of this specification.
- Visual inspection
- Functional test of all devices including manual, automatic and interface types
- Audibility test
- Lower loss test
Arrange that the commissioning and test certificate is completed and produced for scrutiny before any part of the
project can be handed over and accepted.
General
Carry out, on completion of the installation works, together with the selected specialist equipment manufacturers,
the complete testing, commissioning and demonstration of the system operation as detailed below.
Make available suitable operatives, familiar with the fire detection system, as may be required to assist the
manufacturer throughout the commissioning period.
Ensure that CAD record drawings of fire alarm systems are completed and available on site to manufacturers
prior to commissioning commencement.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Provide all specialist equipment, to test and demonstrate automatic operation of all items linked to the fire
detection system.
Prepare a schedule of tests to be applied to the system to demonstrate that the fault diagnostic routines function
as required. Ensure that the tests are largely composed of simulated faults that are artificially imposed on the
system. Check all visual units, alphanumeric displays, and printers to establish that all programmed messages are
displayed correctly. Ensure all control panel switches undergo functional demonstration of correct operation.
Tests to be conducted prior to commissioning
Prior to commissioning carry out the following tests:
- a visual inspection of the whole of the installation, covering equipment and cabling in subways, walkways,
crawlways, ceilings and floor voids where accessible
- insulation resistance tests to cover all circuits forming part of the system and made between phases, phase to
neutral, phase to earth and neutral to earth. Ensure that the method of undertaking
- insulation resistance tests do not adversely affect any sensitive system components, and if required, isolate
sensitive devices prior to undertaking the tests
- correct polarity of the alarm devices, bells sirens, klaxons, etc, and all items where correctness of polarity is
essential
Tests to be carried out during commissioning
During commissioning carry out testing in accordance with the requirements of BS 5839 and BS EN 54, and is to
include, but not be limited to, the following:
- the operation of all panels, accessories and items of equipment and a check for proper function, including
such items as may have been supplied by others but wired under the electrical installation
- Carry out these tests under normal operating conditions, including the discharge and recharging of the
‘battery’ system, and the results noted
- functional test of all manual “break glasses”
- functional test of all smoke detectors by use of an approved smoke generator testing device
- functional test of all “fixed temperature” or “rate of rise” heat detectors, by an approved heat source testing
device
- simulated tests for fire or fault alarm at detectors and manual contacts as may be instructed by the Contract
Administrator, with all tests agreed and recorded onto a system check list to be approved prior to any witness
testing being carried out testing of all sprinkler sensors and fusible link units testing of all visual indicators
under simulated operational conditions with sounders out of circuit testing of auxiliary signals to remote
panels and via British Telecom lines, etc
- five simulated faults, at randomly chosen locations on each loop circuit and sounder interface secondary
circuit, for each of the following type:
o open circuit
o short circuit
o sensor removal/alarm device removal
o earth fault

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- simulated charger and battery faults for all power supply units (panels, interface units, etc), followed by a
battery discharge test (ie 24 hour quiescent detection of the full alarm system, followed by 30 minutes alarm
operation)
- simulated operation of mechanical plant where such faults (if any) are required to operate fire alarm system
(eg fire/smoke dampers)
Ensure that during routine fire alarm system test, certain functions are inhibited, ie gas supply shut-off valve,
smoke damper operation, etc. Provide suitable key switch facilities.
Audibility Tests
Carry out, prior to full commissioning of the rest of the system, the following tests:
- Fully test the fire alarm system audible alarm facility to ensure that the correct audibility levels are achieved
as required by the relevant Standards.
- Conduct tests in the presence of the Contract Administrator and Fire Officer.
- Carry out tests on completion of the installation when all mechanical plant is fully functioning to ensure that
realistic results are obtained, including all normal background noise levels.
- Measure and record the sound pressure level i.n each room, area or plant space. Carry out a
- number of tests and record in each area to obtain average values.
- Inform the Contract Administrator, in writing, of any areas where the required audibility levels are not
achieved.
Arrange for the manufacturer to carry out the audibility tests twice. Carry out the first test on completion of the
system when all mechanical plant is fully functioning to ensure that realistic results are obtained. Carry out the
second test approximately six months later when the building is operating under normal conditions.
Carry out both tests in the presence of the Contract Administrator.
Include within the tender cost for the provision of any additional sounders and wiring required following audibility
testing.
Procedure
Carry out the full tests listed above. Thereafter, fully demonstrate the complete operation of the system to the
satisfaction of the Contract Administrator and Fire Officer.
Arrange a mutually agreed programme for the above demonstrations with the Contract Administrator providing at
least ten working days notice. Prepare a method statement for the tests stating exactly how they are to be
undertaken. Submit the programme for comment at least four weeks in advance.
Arrange presence on site of all specialist equipment (including smoke generation equipment), suitable calibrated,
necessary to simulate tests on fire alarm equipment and systems connected to same.
Ensure all test equipment instructions and instruments are available during installation and testing.
Documentation
- Provide the required fire alarm system test certificate(s), to be issued by the specialist manufacturer, in the
forms, as detailed in BS 5839 and other relevant standards
- Record all audibility test results and present in tabulated form

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Issue copies of all documentation including the above to the Contract Administrator for comment prior to
inclusion in final handover documentation
- Provide maintenance/instruction manuals in the form of hard cover binder detailing the whole operation of the
fire alarm systems, recommended regular testing and maintenance in accordance with the requirements of
the specification
- Bind one set of fire alarm system record drawings in the manual, using clear plastic sleeves and in accordance
with the requirements of the specification
- Forward all above documents to the Contract Administrator for comment prior to handover
- Provide two copies (or the number specified in the prelims) of final version of manual, incorporating copies of
British Standards test certificates, and test results, at final handover
- Provide a full set of zoning diagrams to depict the exact zoning arrangement as required by the British
Standards. Frame, glaze and mount adjacent to the main panel and repeater panel in agreed positions to
facilitate clear recognition of alarm condition location
- Programme the fire alarm system to ensure all detectors are in the correct zone. Base the zoning
arrangement on the arrangement shown on the drawings and/or as required by the British Standard
- Allow for making minor adjustments to the zoning arrangement to suit the final position of the fire doors and
other zone boundaries. Agree all such adjustments with the Contract Administrator
- Maintenance contract - Provide full details and include within your tender for the provision of a full 12
- Months system maintenance and system inspection and test as recommended by BS 5839
Fire alarm system instruction
- Allow for the equipment manufacturers to provide a minimum of one full days instruction of the complete
system for the employer’s representative after the contract completion date
- Include a practical demonstration of the installation and equipment. Arrange the required demonstration and
agree the time and dates with regard to the overall project programme works
- Ensure that ‘As Fitted’ drawings and manuals are available before the demonstration and instructions.
Spare components
Ensure the undernoted items are provided as ‘SPARES’, and handed over at completion of the project.
Ensure all items are new, unused and contained within the manufacturer’s standard packaging and suitably
labelled as to type and use. Provide typewritten schedules detailing the quantities supplied of each item.
Handover all spares in one consignment. Obtain signature for receipt. Ensure spares quantities are 10% (ten per
cent) with a minimum of 3 (three) of any one type and or rating.
Ensure spares generally comprise:
- ‘end of line’ resistors or diodes

- smoke detectors (each type as installed)
- heat detectors (each type as installed)
- frangible elements or glasses for manual call points (minimum quantity 10)
- sounders (each type as installed)
- special keys for testing or operating equipment

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- fuses or other safety devices contained within the fire alarm panel(s)
- spare detection bases
- all similar necessary spares associated with any extinguishing system installed
Agree all spares requirements for each particular project with the Contract Administrator.
254 INTRUDER ALARM

Arrange for tests to be carried out by the installer fully in compliance with section W41 of this specification.
- visual inspection
- functional test of all devices
- walk tests of all volumetric devices
- auto dial unit tests
255 ACCESS CONTROL

Arrange for tests to be carried out by the Installer fully in compliance with section W40 of this specification.
- visual inspection
- functional tests on all doors
- tests of the interconnection with the fire alarm and other systems
256 PUBLIC ADDRESS

Arrange tests of the public address system by the installer to standards laid down in section W12 of this
specification, and generally as outlined in BS 7671.
If the public address system forms part of the fire alarm system, perform the tests in accordance with BS 5839.
Ensure that commissioning meets the requirements of BS EN 60849 with particular attention to ‘RASTI
measured intelligibility’.
With the system manufacturer, fully test, commission and demonstrate the system in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations and those of the standards listed in W12 of this specification, and as detailed
below. Liaise with manufacturers of the interfaced systems to ensure all tests and demonstrations are fully co-
ordinated.
Tests
- Full audibility test to demonstrate RASTI of greater than or equal to 0.5 is achieved
- Test of microphone unit
- Test of amplifier/control unit(s)
- Full operational test of the VES to demonstrate its compliance with this section of the specification
- Full functionality test of the VES to demonstrate full integration with the FAS during FAS operation

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Procedure
Fully demonstrate the complete operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.
Prepare a fully detailed method statement for the test, commissioning and demonstration stating exactly how
these are to be carried out including interface with the fire alarm system. Submit the statement to the Contract
Administrator for comment one month in advance of the test.
Fully test the VES to ensure the correct audibility levels are achieved.
Provide three hard copies of the results on A1 or A0 layout drawings and include in the O&M instruction manuals.
Provide electronic copies of the drawings in AutoCAD 2000 format on a CDROM.
Documentation
Issue a system test certificate detailing compliance with all the relevant British Standards and this specification.
Issue two hard copies of all documentation immediately to the Contract Administrator for comment prior to
inclusion in the handover documentation.
Following receipt of comments, amend all documentation (including ‘as fitted’ drawings, O&M manual
documentation and system instruction drawings & manuals) and issue three hard copies and three electronic
copies of all documentation. Provide electronic text documents in either Microsoft Word or Excel format, and all
drawings in AutoCAD 2000 format.
System Instruction
Instruct the employer’s representatives on the operation of the system.
Include a practical demonstration of the installation and equipment. Arrange the required demonstration and
agree the times and dates with regard to the overall contract programme works.
Ensure that the "as fitted" manuals and drawings are made available for the employer’s demonstration and
instruction.
260 MISCELLANEOUS – LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER
261 VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL BUSBAR SYSTEMS

Test all busbar systems fully in accordance with BS 7671 and to the requirements specified in section Y62.
- visual inspection
- insulation tests
- earth bonding and continuity tests
262 LIGHTING AND POWER INSTALLATIONS

The application of this clause includes the systems and equipment described in the following sections of this
specification:
- electricity generating plant (V10)

- LV supply/public utility supply (V12)

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- CHP (V15)
- LV distribution (V20)
- general lighting (V21)
- general LV power (V22)
- extra low voltage supply (V30)
- DC supply (V31)
- UPS (V32)
- emergency lighting (V40)
- street/area/flood lighting (V41)
- studio/auditorium/arena lighting (V42)
- electric underfloor heating (V50)
- general lighting and power (small scale) (V90)
- fire detection and alarm (W50)
- earthing and bonding (W51)
- wiring for mechanical systems (W63)
- control panels (W64)
- trace heating (Y24)
- busbar trunking (Y62)
Inspect and test the complete installation fully in accordance with BS 7671.
Test the installed lighting system progressively during construction and upon final completion of the whole
installation. Test the complete lighting system, including luminaires, control devices and all associated equipment
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Carry out the inspection and tests in the same sequence as set out in BS 7671, and in such time to allow any
remedial work to be completed within the contract period. Ensure tests also include any part of an existing
installation related to the new work.
Carry out the following BS 7671 tests before making the system live:
- Visual inspection, including: the cable containment is supported adequately

- all luminaires are complete with lamps and accessories
- lamps are of the correct colour, rating and manufacturer selection
- control devices have been correctly installed
- all switch plates align straight and true
- all required labelling has been provided
- luminaires and lamps are in clean condition
- continuity of protective conductors including main and supplementary equipotential bonding
- continuity of ring final circuit conductors
- insulation resistance
- site applied insulation resistance

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- verification of protection by separation of circuits

- verification of protection against direct contact by barrier or an enclosure provided during erection
- electrical resistance of floors and walls that provide protection against direct contact.
- P olarity
- earth electrode resistance
- Carry out the following BS 7671 tests after making the system live:
- earth fault loop impedance
- prospective fault current
- functional testing (testing of RCDs, RCBs, interlocks, etc)
Measure the installed cable lengths for underwater lighting circuits and submit a report in writing to the Contract
Administrator.
Verify that the control devices for underwater lighting operated correctly.
Test and commission the lighting system in accordance with CIBSE Commissioning Code L.
Engage the specialist equipment installer/manufacturer to set-up, prove the operation and function and fully
commission the lighting management system together with its associated control devices.
Set up, prove the operation and function and fully commission all individual control devices including
switches, presence detectors, photocell sensors, and contactor/relay units, etc.
Carry out adjustments and calibration of all automatic control devices and systems to demonstrate optimum
performance and operation.
Record all control arrangements, settings, sequences and functions on completion of commissioning and
demonstrations.
Demonstrate the operation of all control functions to the entire satisfaction of the Contract Administrator and
employers’ representative after commissioning has been fully completed.
Include in the Tender for a one-day period to train the client’s representative on all operational and maintenance
aspects of each and every specialist control system, in compliance with A37 of this specification.
Provide out of hours attendance, as necessary during periods of darkness, for the demonstration and
verification of operation and function of particular lighting systems.
Make average illuminance measurements of the installed lighting system, as recommended by the CIBSE Code for
Lighting, throughout all areas of the building. Incorporate the results on the lighting system ‘Record’ layout
drawings.
Where section W53 of this specification requires that a specialist be employed to report on electromagnetic
compatibility issues, ensure that the specialist carries out an ambient electromagnetic interference (EMI) survey
of the areas of the building described in section W53 of this specification, using an appropriate instrument. Make
an inspection to ensure that the specialist’s recommendations have been fully implemented before making the
electrical system live.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
After the electrical system is live but before the protected systems and equipment are operated, arrange for the
specialist to make EMI tests to confirm that the electric and magnetic field strengths are within the required
limits.
Ensure that the EMI survey and tests are made in accordance with appropriate Standards including BS
CISPR 16, BS EN 50147-1 and BS EN 55011.
263 DC SUPPLIES AND BATTERIES

Carry out, on any dc supply installed, all relevant tests required by BS 7671 and in this specification.
Carry out initial tests as recommended by the manufacturer on any rechargeable batteries installed, and in
compliance with a relevant standard such as BS EN 60896–11.
264 STREET/AREA/FLOODLIGHTIN VISUAL INSPECTION

Visually inspect the completed installation including the following:
- all cable containment is supported adequately

- all luminaires are complete with lamps and accessories
- all lamps are of the correct colour, rating and manufacturer selection
- all control devices have been correctly installed
- all switch plates align straight and true
- all required labelling has been provided
- all luminaires and lamps are in a clean condition
Carry out a visual appraisal of the completed and energised lighting system in conjunction with the Contract
Administrator.
Testing
Give the Contract Administrator advanced notice to allow the opportunity to attend all tests and inspections.
Fully test the lighting system installation in accordance with BS 7671.
Test the installed lighting system progressively during construction and upon final completion of the whole
installation.
Test the complete lighting system, including luminaires, control devices and all associated equipment in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Records
Record the following details for all tests carried out:
- date
- location and identity of lighting system
- drawing references
- method of test
- result of test
- name and signature of the person witnessing the test

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Give the Contract Administrator a copy of each record sheet.
Commissioning
Engage the specialist equipment installer/manufacturer to set up, prove the operation and function, and fully
commission the lighting control system, together with its associated control devices.
Set up, prove the operation and function and fully commission all individual control devices including
switches, presence detectors, photocell sensors and contactor/relay units.
Carry out adjustments and calibration of all automatic control devices and systems to demonstrate optimum
performance and operation.
Record all control arrangements, settings, sequences and functions on completion of commissioning and
demonstrations.
Demonstrate the operation of all control functions to the entire satisfaction of the Contract Administrator after
commissioning has been fully completed.
Include in the tender for training days to train the Client’s representatives on all operational and maintenance
aspects of each and every specialist control system, in compliance with A37 of this specification.
Provide out of hours attendance as necessary during periods of darkness, for the demonstration and
verification of operation and function of particular lighting systems.
After all street and road lighting has been tested and commissioned in accordance with V41 of the specific
building Volume 2 Specification, operate it for a minimum of 100 hours, then take illuminance readings.
Ensure that all such readings are compliant with of the specific building Volume 2 Specification.
After all floodlights have been tested and commissioned in accordance with V41 of the specific building Volume 2
Specification, operate them for a minimum of 100 hours and then take illuminance readings.
Ensure that all such readings are compliant with section V41.200 of this specification.
270 MISCELLANEOUS – MOTORS
271 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLLERS

Subject the panels to physical inspection, high pressure voltage testing to BS EN 62271-200, sequence and
component operation testing before dispatch. Provide certificates recording the works inspections and tests.
Allow time in the programme and attendance for the Contract Administrator to inspect the control panels at the
maker's works on completion of manufacture and test and before delivery. Give ten working days notice of
readiness for inspection.
Following installation on site, check and provide evidence that all wiring connections are correct. Check also that
the functioning of all components and controls is correct, including the correct functioning of all interfaces with
associated equipment. Measure power wiring insulation and earth loop impedance and record the results.
Following on site completion of the installation and all site tests allow programme time and provide attendance
for the Contract Administrator to inspect the installation and to verify test results.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Special units such as variable frequency inverters shall be checked and commissioned by the makers, or
according to the makers' specific instructions for the units fitted.
Measure and record all motor currents. Set motor overloads to motor nameplate full load currents. Note that
Star/Delta starters normally have overloads installed in the Delta loop and set to full load current x 0.58.
Ensure that during commissioning and test no motor which has reached normal operating temperature is started
more frequently than twice in one hour, or according to the motor maker's instructions if different.
Carry out, on any dc supply installed, all relevant tests required by BS 7671 and within this specification.
272 MOTOR DRIVES

Ensure that every belt coupling is accurately aligned and tensioned in accordance with the belt manufacturer's
instructions.
Set all starter overloads to the motor nameplate full load current.
Where thermistor relay operation is fitted, check it.
With the motor delivering its maximum required duty measure (with suitable true r.m.s. instruments) and record
the following:
- for 3-phase motors - each phase-to-phase voltage (400V nominal); for 1-phase motors – the phaseto- neutral
voltage (230V nominal)
- for 3-phase motors - each phase current; for 1-phase motors – the line current
- the motor shaft speed
- for belt coupled machines - the driven pulley shaft speed
280 MISCELLANEOUS – OTHER SYSTEMS
281 EARTHING AND BONDING

Where a building is equipped with a lightning protection system, test the system in accordance with this
specification but, test its bonding to other systems under also under this specification and section W51 of the
specific building Volume 2 Specification.
Test that all earthing and bonding is fully in compliance with BS 7671 and BS 7430, and prove all protective
conductors are fully in accordance with BS 4444.
Provide the Contract Administrator with a method statement for carrying out all testing works prior to
commencing works. Do not commence the works until the agreement of the Contract Administrator is
obtained.
Provide all test equipment and engineering personnel to complete the tests.
Undertake all necessary survey and testing to establish ground conditions and soil resistivity prior to
commencement of the works in accordance with BS 7430 and BS 1377. Provide all test results to the Contract
Administrator. Do not commence the works until the agreement of the Contract Administrator is obtained.
Carry out full impedance/continuity testing of all service carriers prior to connecting to the earthing system to the
Contract Administrator’s satisfaction.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
On completion of the Contract Works, carry out all necessary tests to prove the effectiveness of the complete
earthing system. Ensure that the earth electrode system achieves an overall resistance of less than 1Ω/40Ω
noting the requirement to provide additional electrodes if the systems fail to meet the specified resistance to
earth.
282 TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND DATA

Where external and internal telephone wiring is installed, carry out testing fully in accordance with the
telephone service provider’s (TSP) specification and section W10 of this specification.
Where internal and site-wide telephone and data wiring form one integral wiring system, test it as detailed in
section W30 of this specification. As a minimum carry out testing as recommended to meet the specific system
specification and criteria.
Obtain from the TSP a warranty for the system.
283 RADIO AND TELEVISION AERIAL SYSTEMS

Arrange tests by the installer fully in compliance with section W20 of this specification.
Ensure that the tests include signal strength tests at every outlet.
284 CCTV
Carry out tests fully in compliance with section W42 of this specification.
- all wiring
- effective operation of all cameras in differing light levels
- correct setting of all pan and tilt limits and associated automatic control
- correct supply voltage at all parts of the system
- fields of view checked
- effective operation of supplementary lighting
- operation of recording systems under alarm and quiescent conditions
- all alarm inputs and outputs
- walk tests on any volumetric device operated cameras
- simulated power loss
Test the CCTV system of sports grounds to meet the requirements of PSDB 14/95 and appendices B, C & D of
PSDB 09-01.
285 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

Ensure that the complete lightning protection system is fully tested by the specialist installer all in accordance
with BS EN 62305.
Arrange a mutually agreed programme for the demonstration of the lightning protection system with the Contract
Administrator. Prepare a method statement for the test, commissioning and demonstration stating exactly how
these are to be carried out and submit the statement to the Contract Administrator for comment.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
With its test link removed and without any bonding to other services, measure the earth resistance of every
individual earth electrode. Ensure such resistance in Ohms does not exceed ten times the number of down
conductors on the structure.
Measure with the test links in place the resistance to earth of the complete lightning protection system at any
point on the building. Ensure that all results from this test do not exceed ten Ohms. Carry out this test prior to
bonding to other services. If the overall resistance exceeds 10 Ohms provide, at no additional cost to the
employer, any means (eg the addition of earth mats or plate electrodes) as recommended by BS EN 62305, to
reduce the overall resistance.
Fully tabulate all test results and issue to the Contract Administrator; also allow for all witnessing of the testing
procedure by the Contract Administrator.
286 THERMAL IMAGING/ACOUSTIC VIBRATION TESTING

In locations where voltage tests suggest unexpected volt drops on smaller boards, or noise is experienced on any
board, the Client or Contract Administrator may opt for a thermal image survey of all cable terminations, bus bar
field connections and general switchboard components or an acoustic vibration test.
Carry out the survey using a thermal imaging camera capable of producing a hard copy or of producing a digital
image that can be viewed on a computer and printed there from.
Arrange for the survey to be carried out by a specialist company or for the camera to be operated by a person
specifically trained in its use.
Carry out an acoustic vibration survey to ascertain the origin of any unusual or unacceptable noise.
300 INSTRUMENTATION
Supply all test instruments for the tests required. Ensure that all such instruments are calibrated and supply the
current calibration certificate for each. Ensure that all such instruments comply with BS EN ISO 10012.
400 CERTIFICATES AND SCHEDULES

Ensure that all completion certificates, test certificates, schedules and reports required by the relevant BS or
European or other standards are recorded and produced before hand over of the project.
Deliver to the Contract Administrator at least two copies of each piece of such documentation including detailed
schedules of visual inspections.

section prevails.
Wherever reference is made to a British Standard (BS) an equivalent European Standard, which is

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
recognised by the British Standard Institution, would also apply (see latest BSI Standard Catalogue etc.). Each
product and each material selected by the Installer shall comply fully with the latest issue of either the BS or the
equivalent European Standard.
- BS 4444 Guide to electrical earth monitoring and protective conductor proving

- BS 4737 Intruder alarm systems
- BS 5000 Rotating electrical machines of particular types or for particular applications
- BS 5000-3 Part 3: Generators to be driven by reciprocating internal combustion engines.
- Requirements for resistance to vibration
- BS 5000-11 Part 11: Small-power electric motors and generators
- BS 5266 Emergency lighting
- BS 5266-1 Part 1: Code of practice for the emergency lighting of premises
- BS 5306 Code of practice for fire extinguishing installations and equipment on premises
- BS 5611 Application guide for on-load tap-changers
- BS 5839 Fire detection and fire alarm systems for buildings
- BS 6266 Code of practice for fire protection for electronic equipment installations
- BS 7594 Code of practice for audio-frequency induction-loop systems (AFILS)
- BS CISPR 16 Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus and methods
- BS EN 54 Fire detection and fire alarm systems
- BS EN 1838, BS EN 5266-7 Lighting applications. Emergency lighting
- BS EN 50132 Alarm systems - CCTV surveillance systems for use in security applications
- BS EN 50147 Anechoic chambers
- BS EN 50147-1 Part 1: Shield attenuation measurement
- BS EN 55011 Industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio frequency equipment. Electromagnetic disturbance
characteristics. Limits and methods of measurement
- BS EN 60034 Rotating electrical machines
- BS EN 60060 High-voltage test techniques
- BS EN 60076 Power transformers
- BS EN 60076-3 Part 3: Insulation levels, dielectric tests and external clearances in air
- BS EN 60076-5 Part 5: Ability to withstand short-circuit
- BS EN 60439-1 Part 1: Type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies
- BS EN 60849 Sound systems for emergency purposes
- BS EN 60896 Stationary lead-acid batteries

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS EN 60896-11 Part 11: General requirements and methods of test. Vented types. General requirements and
methods of tests
- BS EN 60947-3 Part 3: Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units
- BS EN 61180 High-voltage test techniques for low-voltage equipment
- BS EN 61557 Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1000 V a.c. and 1500 V d.c. Equipment
for testing, measuring or monitoring of protective measures
- BS EN 62040 Uninterruptible power systems (UPS)
- BS EN 62040-3 Part 3: Method of specifying the performance and test requirements
- BS EN 62271 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear
- BS EN 62271-200 Part 200: AC metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and
up to and including 52 kV
- BS EN ISO 10012 Measurement management systems. Requirements for measurement process and
measuring equipment
- BS ISO 8528 Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven alternating current generating sets
- BS ISO 8528-6 Part 6: Test methods
- ENA ER G59/1 Recommendations for the connection of embedded generating plant to the Distribution
Network Owner’s systems
- HTM 05-03 Fire safety in the NHS. Operational provisions
- HTM 05-03B Part B: Fire detection and alarm systems
- HTM 06-01 Electrical services supply and distribution
- HTM 06-02 Electrical safety guidance for low voltage systems
- HTM 06-03 Electrical safety guidance for high voltage systems
- HTM 08-02 Lifts
- HTM 08-03 Bedhead services
- HTM 2005 Building management systems
- HTM 2005-3 Volume 3: Validation and verification
- HTM 2035 Mains signalling
- HTM 2035-3 Volume 3: Validation and verification/operational management
- PSDB 14-95 Home Office - Performance testing of CCTV perimeter surveillance systems
- PSDB 9-01 Home Office - Guidance notes for the procurement of CCTV for public safety at football grounds.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y82 IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
100 GENERAL
Provide all identification labels and notices in accordance with BS 7671.
Where there are live parts which are not capable of being isolated by a single device provide a warning notice
that states the location of each isolator. Ensure that every such warning notice is in a prominent position and
clearly visible before access to the live parts can be gained.
Ensure that, where a nominal voltage exceeding 230V exists, a warning label stating the maximum voltage is
present and clearly visible.
Ensure that all identification labels and notices are installed in a visible position, without interference to the
operation and maintenance of equipment.
Ensure that labels and notices are sized in proportion to the equipment on which they are mounted and that they
are securely fixed.
Obtain approval from the Contract Administrator, with regard to style, colour, lettering, size and position of all
labels and notices. Provide samples, at no cost to the contract, for the Contract Administrator’s approval.
Identify every termination and joint box by an externally fitted label indicating the type of service contained such
as ‘bells’, ‘radio’, ‘fire alarm’.
110 MATERIALS AND MARKING

Only use materials for labels and notices with a predicted life span equal to or greater than the lifespan of the
installation to which they refer.
For labels and notices which are fitted outside buildings, select the appropriate material and marking method
from the following list:
- Rigid, laminated, ABS sub-strate material, of three or five layers of different colours, machine engraved in a
contrasting colour
- Rigid plastic, hot press printed
- Pressure sensitive labels to BS 4781, printed
- Brass, engraved
- Stainless steel, engraved
For labels and notices which are fitted within buildings, select the appropriate material and marking method from
the following list:
- Rigid, laminated, ABS sub-strate material, of three or five layers of different colours, machine engraved in a
contrasting colour
- Thermosetting rigid plastic, screen printed
- Flexible plastic, screen printed or manuscript lettering
- Rigid plastic, hot press printed
- Pressure sensitive adhesive labels to BS 4781, printed

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Aluminium or aluminium alloy, letter pressed, letter engraved or letter embossed

- Stainless steel, engraved
120 FIXING
Use only fixing methods and materials with a predicted life span equal to or greater than the lifespan of the
installation to which they are applied.
Fix every label and notice using materials compatible with it and with the surface to which it is being fixed.
Use only non-corrodible fixings for external labels and notices.
Thoroughly clean surfaces of dust, loose materials and protective/oily films before fixing labels and notices to
them. Fix labels and notices to a surface only after all finishing to that surface is complete.
200 LABELLING OF EQUIPMENT
210 CABLES
With the exception of final sub-circuit wiring enclosed in conduits or trunking, provide all cables (including those
routed underground, on trays, on ladders or in ’baskets’) with identification labels. Fix identification labels at each
end of the cable, at either side of wall/ floor/ roof penetrations, and (except for underground cables) at
approximately 12 metre intervals as well as at convenient inspection points. Additionally, for underground cables,
fix a label to each cable where it emerges from the ground.
Ensure that all such labels show the following information:
- Reference number of the cable

- Points of termination (ie the locations where the cable starts and finishes)
- Size and number of conductors
- Type of cable (eg LSF, XLPE, PVC) and date of installation
- Operating voltage of cable
211 CABLE CONDUCTOR COLOUR CODING

Identify cable conductors in accordance with BS 7671; note that a lighting sub-circuit switch wire is a phase
conductor in a single phase circuit.
212 CABLE SHEATH IDENTIFICATION

Submit for approval by the Contract Administrator the colour and coding methods of both internal and
external cable sheaths.
Unless otherwise stated in the system sections of this specification, for fire alarm cables use red, for telephone
and data cables use grey, for intruder alarm and nurse call cables use white, for television aerial cables use
brown and for speaker cables use black.
213 TERMINAL MARKING AND CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION

Apply identification markers, in accordance with BS 7671, to all conductor termination points.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Arrange for the manufacturer of switchgear and control gear to mark their terminals in accordance with BS 5472
and BS 6272. Use a unique reference to identify each element in the switchgear or control gear. Mark the unique
reference on or adjacent to each element. Identify each terminal for connection to external wiring or cabling
using a reference system complying with BS EN 60445 based on the element reference and the appropriate
element terminal reference.
Use lettered or numbered ferrules or sleeves to BS 3858 to mark each auxiliary conductor or control cable core
with the identity of the terminal to which it is connected and the reference of plant or equipment to which it is
connected and the identity of the terminal at the remote end.
Identify the main circuit conductors in accordance with BS 7671.
Ensure that the material of cable markers is at least the same standard, or better, as the cables they identify, ie
LSF.
214 UNDERGROUND CABLES

Provide cable route and indicate the following information:
- Type of cable and date installed

- Operating voltage of cable
- Depth at which cable is buried
Mark and protect direct buried cables with one of the following:
- Concrete cable covers

- Clay ware cable covers
- Recovered plastic cable tiles
- Recovered plastic cable tiles with integral yellow printed black warning tape
- Plastic tape yellow printed black
220 CONDUIT AND TRUNKING COLOUR CODING

In areas of mechanical plant or voids accommodating mechanical services, or where otherwise indicated in the
‘engineering system’ sections of this specification or on the drawings, identify electrical conduits in accordance
with BS 1710.
Apply colour ‘orange’ to BS 4800, by one of the following methods:
- Painting on service as a band over 150 mm

- Applying an adhesive tape (of wrap-around type services) over a length of 150 mm
Place such identification colours at bulkheads, wall penetrations and any other place where identification is
necessary.
230 SWITCHGEAR
Ensure that all switchgear is fitted with labels in accordance with BS 7671 and BS EN 60439 to indicate duty of
unit, its voltage, phase and current rating, protective device rating, size of conductor involved, and all other
necessary details.
Use an agreed serial coding system; provide at the switch a legend of the coding system.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Identify loose switchgear such as fused switches, switch fuses, distribution boards, isolators, indicating switches,
starters and control switches controlling remote equipment, by an externally fitted approved label or engraving,
indicating the equipment controlled.
240 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Clearly identify the circuit ways either by the miniature circuit breaker or fuse bases and carriers being indelibly
numbered in an approved manner or by a label. This may be by means of a numbered plan or a printed
statement held in a pocket on the inside of the door, to the effect that the numbering of the ways is from left to
right, or top to bottom.
Internally
Identify every outgoing way with a renewable circuit chart, in a transparent plastic envelope, permanently fitted
inside the cover of every distribution board.
Clearly indicate for each circuit, in typed script, the following information:
- Circuit identification number

- Cable size
- Fuse or circuit breaker rating (including whether an RCD or not)
- Description of item supplied and area supplied by circuit
Label all cable connections internally with their circuit reference. Use lettered or numbered ferrules or sleeves to
BS 3858.
Externally
Clearly identify each distribution board, with a label that is compatible with the schematic and wiring diagrams,
and complies with BS 7671.
250 MOTOR AND STARTER LABELS

Fit identification labels to all motors, starters and starter panels. Ensure the positive identification of respective
motors and starters. Ensure that all such labelling is compatible with schematic and wiring diagrams and complies
with BS 4999.
Check that every motor bears secure markings indicating the type of lubricant to use (if any) at its bearings and
its correct direction of rotation. Where it does not, bring the matter to the attention of the Contract Administrator.
Check that every motor fitted with surge suppressors or thermistors bears secure markings indicating that
insulation test voltages must not be applied. Where it does not, bring the matter to the attention of the Contract
Administrator.
260 COLOUR CORRECTED LUMINAIRES

Fit a warning or identification disc under the lamp(s) of luminaires containing colour corrected fluorescent tubes
or other corrected light sources, to remind maintenance staff to install the correct lamps.
270 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT LABELS

Label all electrical plant and equipment with the labels specified in the appropriate British Standards for that plant
or equipment.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Fit labels on all items of electrical equipment, switches, etc, that include the following information:
- Service controlled
- Circuit reference
- Voltage and number of phases
- Circuit protection type and rating
Label all 'accessory boxes' internally with their circuit reference. Identify externally the midpoint of the ring main
circuit.
Use 6mm high letters with engraving (in a contrasting colour), except where otherwise stated.
Where voltage above ELV exists, label all electrical plant and associated controlling equipment, using safety signs.
280 INDICATOR LAMPS AND PUSH BUTTONS

Use indicator lamp and push button colours in accordance with BS EN 60073.
290 FINAL CIRCUIT ACCESSORIES

Label all electrical final circuit accessories such as socket outlets, fused connection units, cooker outlets, isolators
etc., with labels that indicate the circuit reference.
Where accessories directly serve items of electrical equipment, include on the label the equipment served.
Label all 'back boxes' internally with their circuit reference.
Identify externally the mid-point of the ring main circuit.
Use 6mm high letters with engraving (in a contrasting colour), except where otherwise stated.
Where voltage above ELV exists, label all electrical plant and associated controlling equipment, using safety signs.
300 SIGNS NOTICES AND DIAGRAMS
310 SAFETY SIGNS

Ensure that each safety sign is of the correct type and in complies with BS 5499.
Provide with each safety sign supplementary or text signs complying with BS 5499.
Identify each substation and main switchroom with safety signs and supplementary signs complying with BS 5499
and, for any associated fire extinguishing system, with BS 5306. Ensure that all such notices and signs give
details of:
- Name of the substation or switchroom

- The presence of High and Low voltages
- Administrative instructions for access
- Location and method of contacting controlling authority;
- Actions to be taken in emergency

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
320 ADDITIONAL SAFETY SIGNS

Provide additional safety signs at locations shown on the drawings or noted in the engineering system
sections of this specification or as appropriate, in accordance with BS 5499.
Ensure that all such additional safety signs comply with HSE L64.
330 MAINTENANCE NOTICES

Fix notices giving warning of and instructions on, any special maintenance procedures to plant and equipment.
Examples of ‘special procedures’ are: - to ensure that certain people are informed before maintenance is done on,
say, a standby generator; not isolating the power supply to a sprinkler water pump without first obtaining a
‘permit to work’.
Upon completion of the installation or maintenance work, ensure that notices of periodic inspection and testing
are fixed in a prominent position at every installation.
340 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

In the following locations, permanently fix to a nearby wall of the room, a purpose made schematic diagram,
showing all the electrical connections to equipment and plant served:
- At main switchgear
- At sub-main switchgear
Ensure that all such diagrams comply with BS 5070 and BS EN 61082-1, and that their symbols are in accordance
with BS EN 60617.
350 EARTHING
Adjacent to the final connection of the electrical system of the building to the earth electrode or earthing
terminal, provide a clear and permanent warning label stating “Safety Electrical Connection – do not remove”.
To special purpose earthing conductors and connection points, fit labels describing the purpose and any
instructions necessary for their operation and maintenance.
400 SHOCK TREATMENT CARD

Provide a copy of the "Electrical Times" Shock Treatment Card at each main switch panel position. Ensure that
the card gives the following information:
- Instructions for isolating a person from live conductors

- Artificial respiration and resuscitation methods
- Location of the nearest telephone and the telephone number of whom to contact for assistance


STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
section prevails.
European Standard.
- The Health and Safety (Safety Signs and Signals) Regulations

- BS 1710 Specification for identification of pipelines and services
- BS 3858 Specification for binding and identification sleeves for use on electric cables and wires
- BS 4781 Specification for pressure-sensitive adhesive plastics labels for permanent use
- BS 4800 Schedule of paint colours for building purposes
- BS 4999 General requirements for rotating electrical machines
- BS 5070 Engineering diagram drawing practice
- BS 5306 Code of practice for fire extinguishing installations and equipment on premises
- BS 5472 Specification for low voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use. Terminal marking and
distinctive number. General rules
- BS 5499 Graphical symbols and signs. Safety signs including fire safety signs

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y89 SUNDRY COMMON ELECTRICAL ITEMS
100 GENERAL
110 DEFINITION
Use the definitions given in BS 7671. Where a term is not defined in BS 7671, use that given in the
International Electrotechnical Vocabulary (IEV) of the International Electrotechnical Commission.
120 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

Ensure the electricity supply provided is at 400/230V, 50Hz, 3-phase, 4-wire, unless detailed otherwise in the
‘engineering system’ sections of this specification. Check that the fault level at the origin, and the earth-loop
impedance external to the installation is as given in the ‘engineering system’ sections of this specification and
inform the engineer if they are not. Ensure that the size and rating of the overcurrent device at the origin, and
the method of earthing used in the installation, is as given in the ‘engineering system’ sections of this
specification or as indicated on the drawings.
130 DESIGN CRITERIA

The main distribution schematic diagram and/or the ‘engineering system’ sections of this specification, indicates
the design criteria applicable at the time of tender.
Do not make any change to the installation that invalidates such design criteria without prior written agreement
from the engineer.
210 FAULTY MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

Replace any material or installation rejected under clause A33.600 at no cost to the contract including all costs
arising from any associated building works or the works of other trades, together with all costs arising from delay
in the replacement of rejected items.
220 SUPPORTS AND FIXINGS

Supply and install complete all necessary support steelwork, including brackets and suspension/ threaded rods
etc., to support the electrical installation defined in this specification and shown on the drawings.
Paint all such support steelwork to suit the class of installation, ie standard paint finish (Class 2) for interior areas
and galvanised finish (Class 4) for exterior areas, unless otherwise defined in the ‘engineering system’ sections of
this specification.
Do not fix electrical services to any support steelwork that is subject to vibration or heat transfer.
Do not support electrical services from any suspended tile ceiling system but provide independent support fixings.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
300 ANCILLARIES
310 FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIERS

Where the installations pass through fire or smoke barriers (including fire compartment walls and floors), fit
sleeves or transit frames, as appropriate, around cables (including those supported by trays, wire trays or cable
ladders), and fire-seal the gap between them and the cable(s). Similarly, fit fire barriers inside cable trunkings
and inside busbar enclosures/trunking.
Carry out all such work to the requirements of Building Regulations and those of BS 7671.
Arrange the integrity of the fire and smoke barriers through which such cables, conduits, trunking, busbar
systems, etc., pass, by advising the Contract Administrator of the need for him to arrange for making good
around the sleeves, transit frames and trunkings with appropriate fire stopping materials.
320 EXPANSION JOINTS

Ensure that every expansion joint in conduits, trays, trunkings, and busbar enclosures/trunking is of a
recognised pattern supplied by the appropriate equipment manufacturer.
Where cleated cables cross expansion joints clamp loosely within the adjacent fixing saddles/cleats to allow
movement and, where necessary, install formed loops.
330 ENCLOSURES
Where site fitted electrical components (including relays, contactors, RCDs) are not installed within a distribution
board, consumer unit or control panel, install them within a proprietary enclosure. Ensure that every such
enclosure is ingress protected to suit its location, is manufactured from a material that resists combustion, and is
equipped with DIN rails or detachable mounting frame for mounting the equipment.
340 OTHER SUNDRY COMPONENTS

Ensure that all other sundry components used are proprietary and are of a recognised pattern, supplied by the
appropriate service manufacturer.
400 WORKMANSHIP
Comply with the positions and heights given in clauses Y89.510 and Y89.520, and Approved Document M, unless
otherwise agreed in writing with the engineer. Prior to installation of any sockets, switches, controls, etc., agree
the positions with the building control authority responsible for the project.
410 POSITIONING
Comply with the requirements of clause A11.1000.
Although every endeavour has been made to show details of the design on the drawings, check all measurements
and work to the larger scale, formally issued, detail plans in the possession of the clerk of works or main
contractor to verify the positional dimensions of accessories and associated electrical equipment. Do this before
commencing work. In the absence of large scale drawings being available, agree all positions with the architect.
The symbols representing electrical accessories and equipment on drawings are not drawn to scale; do not scale
dimensions from the drawings.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Install wall mounted socket outlets, switches, telephone outlets, TV outlets and control items (e.g. adjustable
thermostats) with their nearest edge at least 350mm horizontally from room ‘internal angle’ corners.
Where socket outlets are above worksurfaces in kitchens but where there is no wheelchair manoeuvring space
under such worksurfaces, position at least one outlet on the wall to which one end of every such worksurface
abuts, but with its centre no more than 150mm horizontally from the front edge of the worksurface, and no more
than 100mm above the worksurface.
Install door entry phones, card readers and manual controls for powered door systems within 200mm
horizontally of the associated door frame, except that, where the door opens towards the user, set-back such
items 1400mm horizontally from the swinging stile (leading edge) of the door (so that wheelchair users do not
have to move to avoid contact with the door as it opens).
Install lighting pull cords at 150mm maximum horizontally, from the door frame of the swinging stile (leading
edge) of the associated door and as close to the wall as possible.
420 MOUNTING HEIGHTS IN WALLS

This clause does not include mounting heights for landing push buttons, keypads and ‘indicator arrows’
associated with lifts, nor for emergency stop buttons associated with escalators and conveyers.
In car parks and garages comply with appropriate Statutory Petroleum Regulations for mounting heights of
socket outlets.
Within the same room, mount all items of the same category at the same height unless otherwise agreed with
the Engineer.
The heights given in this clause apply to the accessory and not to the conduit box to which it is fitted. They are
measured from finished floor level (FFL) unless stated otherwise. Apply them unless otherwise detailed in the
‘engineering system’ Sections of this specification or on the drawings.
Where a range of heights is given in this clause, it means that the bottom edge of the accessory is no lower than
the lowest height in the range, and the top edge of the accessory is no higher than the highest height in the
range, unless stated otherwise. Apply them but make due allowance for coordinating with any building feature,
e.g. wall tiling.
Where the specified height coincides with the top of wall tiling, leave a clear gap of 50mm above the tiling.
Where items are below a worktop, mount them 100mm clear below the underside of the worktop.
CAWS CATEGORY OF Mm AFFL NOTES

ITEM/ACCESSORY
V20 Utility meters 1200-1400
Distribution boards 750 - 1200
V21 Lighting switches 900 - 1200 And level with door handles
Lighting pull cords 900 - 1100
V22 Sockets outlets and switched 450 - 1000
sockets outlets

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
CAWS CATEGORY OF Mm AFFL NOTES

ITEM/ACCESSORY
Switches for permanently wired 450 - 1200 Higher if needed for particular
appliances (e.g. fused connection
appliances.
units)
Socket outlets, switched socket 100 - 200 To centre above worksurfaces in
outlets and switches for
kitchens and laboratories
permanently wired appliances
Isolators, push buttons, starters, 750 - 1200
cooker control units
Cooker connection units 450 - 750
Shaver socket outlets, hot air 800 -1000 To bottom edge
hand driers
Flex-outlets (see note) To suit the circumstances
Powered window controls 800 - 1000
V40 Safety signs (emergency exit 2000 - 2500 To bottom edge
signs)
W10 Doorbell pushes, door entry 750 - 1200
‘phones
Telephone outlets 450 - 1000
W11 Emergency assistance alarm pull 100 To lower red bangle
cord
800 - 1000 To upper red bangle
W14 Emergency assistance alarm reset 800 - 1000 To bottom edge
button
W20 TV outlets 450 - 1000
W23 Clocks 2500
W40 Manual controls (including push 750 - 1000
pads and green emergency break
glass units) for powered door
systems
Swipe card readers 950 - 1000 To centre of reader
W50 Fire alarm manual call points 900 - 1200 And level with door handles *
Alarm sounders 2500 To centre
Visual alarms 2100 Minimum
W60 Room thermostats and 1400 To top of thermostat or humidistat
humidistats that room occupants
adjust
Room thermostats, temperature (see note) At height recommended by
and humidity sensors that are not manufacturer
adjustable by room occupants

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

section prevails.
the British Standard Institution, would also apply (see latest BSI Standard Catalogue etc). Each product and each
European Standard.
- Building Regulations Approved Document M: Access to and use of buildings

- Disability Discrimination Act
- BS 5839 Fire detection and fire alarm systems for buildings
- BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations. IEE Wiring regulations
- BS 8300 Design of buildings and their approaches to meet the needs of disabile people
- CAE & RIBA Designing for Accessibility

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Y92 MOTORS DRIVES
100 GENERAL
The public electricity supply voltage and tolerance is 4-wire 400V (±10%), 3-phase, 50Hz or 2-wire, 230V
(±10%), 1-phase, 50Hz. Ensure that all electrical equipment and wiring required in connection with the works are
suitable for these supplies and for the location in which they are installed. Adjust motor supply voltages as close
as reasonably possible to the nominal supply voltage, and within 400V (±4%) 3-phase, 230V (±4%) 1-phase as
appropriate.
Ensure that all motors supplied in connection with this specification are suitable for the environment in which
they are installed. Where there is a risk of explosion install flameproof motors in accordance with BS EN 60079-1.
Unless otherwise indicated, ensure that all electrical equipment is suitable for use in ambient temperatures up to
40°C and relative humidities up to 90%. Shade electrical equipment from the direct rays of the sun.
Proof equipment against atmospheric corrosion, including that of saline air where indicated, and ensure that all
materials of the equipment are not susceptible to mould growth nor attack by vermin.
Where motors and the driven machines are obtained as factory assembled packaged units ensure that the
packaged equipment manufacturer accepts responsibility for the adequacy and compatibility of the motor and
coupling with the driven machine’s characteristics, including the starting requirements, together with the design
margins specified elsewhere.
Where motors and the driven machines are obtained from different suppliers, ensure that the motor and coupling
is adequate for and compatible with the driven machine’s characteristics, including the starting requirements,
together with the design margins specified elsewhere.
210 MOTORS (3 PHASE)

Make all motors 3-phase except where specified otherwise.
Ensure that the efficiency of every motor complies with IE2 or IE3 in accordance with BS EN 60034-30.
Make all motors installed within buildings with protection against water and dust to IP55. Make all motors
installed externally with protection to IP56.
Make all motors code IC411 to BS EN 60034-6 (totally enclosed fan ventilated – TEFV) except where specified
otherwise. Where motors are installed in circumstances where they are in danger of overheating make them code
IC416 (with machine mounted independent driven cooling fan).
Where motors are controlled by variable frequency inverters, provide motors capable of the required duty without
overheating.
Provide thermal protection for all motors:
- Of 11kW and above

- For all motors enclosed in ductwork

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- For all other motors where particularly so specified

Arrange thermal protection by thermistors mounted in the motor stator end windings, one in each phase, and
designed to trip at 160°C.
Make motor starting performance Design H to BS EN 60034 -12 for direct-on-line (DOL) starting up to and
including 5.5kW and Design HY for assisted starting 7.5kW and above, except where specified otherwise.
Ensure that the inertia of each motor and its connected load is within the capability of the motor and type of
motor starting selected.
Make motor insulation Class 'F' and motor designed temperature rise within Class 'B'.
Ensure that all motors are designed for continuous running duty (S1).
Make single speed motors 4-pole 1500 rpm type, except where specified otherwise.
Make dual speed motors with separate windings for each speed, except where specified otherwise.
Where particularly specified, make dual speed motors with Dahlander-wound windings.
Fit surge suppressors across motor windings to limit transient voltages to 1200V peak.
Ensure that motors are dynamically balanced to 'normal' balance standards defined by BS EN 60034-14.
Provide the motor fan and fan cowl of polypropylene type material or equal unless all metal construction is
specified elsewhere. Provide a corrosion resistant paint finish to all motors.
Arrange for final selection of motor sizes by the motor manufacturer, who will require the following data in
addition to that specified above:
- Mechanical mounting details

- Direction of rotation
- Details of driven load, including speed of rotation and external inertia (kg m²)
- Transmission method
- Details of duty for which required, including use of inverter to control the speed
For all motors ordered submit, before delivery, their details to the Contract Administrator for comment and for
checking the electrical supply arrangements.
220 MOTORS (1 PHASE)

Some packaged units, (eg small ventilation fans, small pumps, fan coil units, fan convectors), may be fitted with
single phase motors selected and supplied by the packaged unit manufacturer. For all such units ensure that the
packaged unit manufacturer specifies the starting and protection requirements that are required.
Make all single phase motors of the capacitor-start, capacitor-run type, unless specified otherwise.
230 MOTOR - MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Unless agreed otherwise with the Contract Administrator, provide every motor drive and the associated driven
unit as a complete factory built, adjusted, tested and guaranteed assembly.
Provide every motor drive with a robust, rigid, accurately and easily adjusted mounting arrangement.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that the driven equipment is capable of being accelerated and driven by the motor specified, without
danger to its mechanical integrity, including impellers, bearings and mechanical supports. Ensure that all
mechanical resonances are well outside normal operating speeds.
240 BELT COUPLINGS

Provide belt-coupled machines with pulleys constructed from close-grained cast iron and statically and
dynamically balanced. Ensure that all pulleys are accurately centred and aligned with the shafts on which they are
mounted. Unless agreed otherwise with the Contract Administrator, make pulleys on drives up to 30kW rating of
the taper bush type and those on drives over 30kW of the key secured type.
Ensure that the pulley ratio selected operates driven fans or pumps at their optimum speed for the required duty,
whether the motor is connected to a conventional starter or is controlled by a variable speed inverter.
Ensure that the pulleys selected for each motor and driven load and the distance between shafts are the
appropriate size and type and optimum for each application as recommended by the belt manufacturer.
Include in the Tender for one pulley change on every belt coupling during commissioning.
Ensure that all belts are selected and installed strictly in accordance with the belt manufacturer's published rules.
Ensure that all belts are selected for continuous operation at motor full output, or for the intended mode of
operation of specific equipment, if that be more arduous.
Where belt-coupled machinery is provided with endless wedge or V belts ensure that they comply with BS 3790.
Use raw edge, moulded notch, narrow section V belts where recommended by the belt manufacturer for
couplings utilising small pulleys.
Use flat belts where high drive efficiency and freedom from maintenance is required.
Submit proposed belt and pulley selections to the Contract Administrator for comment before equipment
manufacture begins.
For every wedge or V belt installed, supply one spare new belt.
250 DIRECT COUPLING

Where directly driven machines are fitted with shaft couplings, ensure that they are of the flexible type (eg Gates
‘Eurogrip’ to DIN 740 Part 2) to prevent the transmission of excessive torsional vibrations from the motor to the
driven member.
Ensure that on completion each motor is accurately aligned to the driven machine and the coupling secured.
260 GUARDS
Provide all exposed moving items (including pulleys, belts, shafts and couplings) with suitable guards complying
with PD 5304. Ensure that all guards prevent access to transmission from all directions, are rigid and firmly fixed.
Where fan, coupling and motor are all mounted inside an air handling unit the casing of the AHU can be deemed
to be the guard, except where the AHU fan compartment is large enough for a person to crawl into or walk into.
In such cases, fit an enclosing guard.
Provide access via pivoted covers to the ends of all shafts, for the use of a tachometer. Ensure that guards allow
the adjustment of motor position for drive alignment and belt tension.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that the cooling of motors and couplings is not impaired by the guards.
Zinc coat all guards to protect against corrosion.
300 COMMISSIONING
Ensure that every belt coupling is accurately aligned and tensioned in accordance with the belt manufacturer's
instructions.

section prevails.
European Standard.
- BS 3790 Specification for belt drives. Endless wedge belts, endless V-belts, banded wedge belts, banded V-
belts and their corresponding pulleys
- BS EN 60034 Rotating electrical machines
- BS EN 60034-6 Part 6: Methods of cooling (IC Code)
- BS EN 60034-12 Part 12: Starting performance of single-speed three-phase cage induction motors
- BS EN 60034-14 Part 14: Mechanical vibration of certain machines with shaft heights 56 mm and higher.
Measurement, evaluation and limits of vibration severity
- BS EN 60034-30 Part 30: Efficiency classes of single-speed, 3-phase, cage-induction motors (IE-code)
- BS EN 60079 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
- BS EN 60079-1 Part 1: Flameproof enclosures ‘d’
- PD 5304 Guidance on safe use of machinery
- DIN 740 Power transmission engineering. Flexible shaft couplings

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
V10 ELECTRICITY GENERATION PLANT

The Site Wide Infrastructure Electrical Supply Contractor (ESC) shall coordinate with the Building Contractor to
provide 11kV generators as back-up supplies, 11kV infrastructure main network and LV generators as back-up
supplies to the selected buildings’ low voltage main distribution switchgear.

section prevails.
European Standard.
- Oman Regulations and Safety Standards Public Utilities and Street Working Act (PUSWA) BS 7671
Requirements for electrical installations. IEE Wiring Regulations 50HZ within statutory tolerances.
- The electrical supply to meet the building electricity maximum demand load requirements.
- Connect the LV distribution system, to BS7671, as TN-S system comprising separate neutral and earth
throughout.
- With regards to all British Standards and all other reference documents the highlighted areas of this building
shall be considered for compliance in line with all necessary criteria for an Explosives Building.
Explosive Atmospheres Directive (Atex)
- Zone 0: An atmosphere where a mixture of air and flammable substances in the form of gas, vapour or mist is
present frequently, continuously or for long periods.
not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for only a short period.

The Adam base shall be powered from the Primary station 33/11 KV, there are 11 kV rings incoming and
outcoming the zones of the base, switchgears and generator back-up as described within V10 and V11.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The 11kV rings shall be distributed throughout the site in rings arrangements to feed the transformer substations
strategically located about the site and the generator building and chiller compound.
1.0 General
This specification relates to the 11kV generator design, manufacture, testing, and delivery, offloading and
positioning, (incl. cranage) and installation of prime rated diesel engine generators complete with sound
attenuation to 65dba, engine ventilation fans, synchronization controls, master controls, controls and projection,
engine management systems, oil storage, fuel polishing, automatic voltage control, alternator and auxiliary
systems.
The main 11kV generators shall be configured to an N+1 unit configuration with soft mains transfer and mains
paralleling G59-2 protection. Under a phase failure condition and loss of power to both 11kV incomers the
generators shall start and synchronies together.
Each generator shall comprise the following:
- An acoustically treated ISO EN 8528 and NFPA 110/100 for fire rated fighting requirements
- Interconnected frame mounted panels for synchronisation and the respective engine control system.
- Each generator shall have 8 hour day tank (5500 litre) located within generator room
- Each generator shall have 3 day bulk storage tank (48000 litre) located within bulk fuel store
- The standard radiator cooled generating set is approximately 8m long x 3.6m wide x 3.1m high.
- Attenuation shall be provided based on achieving a noise level of 85 dBA @ 3m from the generator room wall,
the inlet and discharge attenuation equipment along with motorised dampers shall be approximately as
follows (subject to final equipment selections):
o Inlet attenuator: 1.8m long x 3.6m wide x 4.4m high
o Outlet attenuator: 2.3m long x 3.6m wide x 4m high
- The radiator and attenuators are approximately 3.6m wide, the generator base frame is 2.25m
- wide.
- Three attenuator will require a minimum of 10.8m
- Provide for day tanks and local link boxed and control panels
- An 8 hour tank will nominally be 5,500 litres capacity
- A 3 day tank will nominally be 48,000 litres capacity per set.
System shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to the requirements of the relevant applicable IEC
(International Electrotechnical Commission) and ISO (International Standards Organisation) standards and in
compliance with local codes, with particular reference to the Iraq Ministry of Electricity regulations.
Should no IEC or ISO standard be available in any case, relevant British (BSI) or National standards shall apply.
In case none of the above standards would be available, additional standards might be considered among those
listed here below:
ANSI American National Standards Institute
API American Petroleum Institute
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers NEMANational Electrical

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Manufacturers Association NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
UL Underwriters Laboratories
The listed Standards and Codes, together with their all parts and subparts, shall be applied considering their
latest applicable issue available.
The measurement system is the SI metric unit system.
1.0.1 List of abbreviations:
The following abbreviations shall be used in the present specification:
- IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

- ISO International Standards Organisation
- ANSI American National Standards Institute
- API American Petroleum Institute
- IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
- NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
- NFPA National Fire Protection Association
- UL Underwriters Laboratories
- EC European Community
- ESR Essential Safety Requirements
- HV High Voltage
- MV Medium Voltage
- LV Low Voltage
- AC Alternating Current
- DC Direct Current
- MCC Motor Control Center
- PMCC Power Motor Control Center
- THD Total Harmonic Distortion
- UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply system
- IP Mechanical Degree of Protection
- OH Overhead
- AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator
- ECP Electrical Control Panel
- UCP Unit Control Panel
- CT Current Transformer
- VT Voltage Transformer
- SF6 Sulphur Hexafluoride Gas
- S/S Substation

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- PVC Polyvinyl Chloride

- XLPE Cross-linked polyethylene
- NC Normally Closed
- NO Normally Open
- GIS Gas Insulated Switchgear
- ASB Auxiliary Services Board
- ACSR/AW Aluminum Conductor Aluminum Clad Steel Reinforced
- OPGW Optical Fiber Ground Wire
- OGW Overhead Ground Wire.
2.0 Equipment Performance Duties
Where equipment performance duties are specified and/or required by detailed design then these shall be
selected within the following tolerances:
- Required duty minus 0%

- Required duty plus 10%
If manufacturer’s type test equipment are within tolerances and allow negative tolerances, then the associated
duty of the equipment shall be increased so that the minimum duty is never below that required to comply with
the design intent.
3.0 Electromagnetic Compatibility
All items of electrical plant and equipment, including those associated with mechanical plant and lift
installations, shall full comply with the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and all subsequent amendments
associated with electromagnetic compatibility.
In general, all electrical plant and equipment shall be designed such that:
- Full manufacturer’s technical literature associated with all OEM items, components, etc., used
- in the construction of the equipment.
- The performance of any items of plant and equipment is not affected by electro-magnetic
- disturbances within the environment in which the plant and equipment has to operate.
The Contractor shall ensure that all items of electrical plant and equipment have the required EMC Directive
Declaration of Conformity, and copies shall be provided upon request.
4.0 Component/System Compatibility
All elements of the building engineering services shall be selected by the Contractor to suit the application they
are intended for. For example, components installed in an external environment shall be suitable for external
temperature and the climatic weather conditions they are to be installed in. Weatherproof devices/services shall
be installed where susceptible to the influences of rain.
All building engineering services components/systems shall be installed using products in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations paying particular attention to the environment they are to be installed in.
Also all components shall have a minimum ingress protection not less than as listed below or in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations if greater:

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- External IP55
- Under Cover (no rain but still external climate) IP54
- Internal IP31
5.0 Minimum Standards
This specification shall be deemed to provide better than minimum standards of electrical performance and
resilience and additionally identifies specific functions required for the system. It does not necessarily cover
standard control methods and protection. For this reason the manufacturer shall provide standard ranges of
equipment as a base and include for any specific requirements of this document as bespoke items of equipment,
or otherwise declare the departures as applicable.
The Specialist Sub-contractor shall provide full details of the proposed installation for approval prior to
manufacture. In addition, the installation must comply with all national and local, mandatory/statutory
documentation and manufacturing/installation standards which are current at the time of appointment to install
the installation, to minimise water pollution by means of secondary containment and latest editions of applicable
documents referenced therein.
6.0 Generator Conditions
The generator sets will be located in Oman, and the sets shall be able to operate to specification at temperatures
of + 50°C.
Each generating set shall operate at 11KV, 50Hz and be suitable for installation and operation in a ventilated
acoustic fire rated enclosure and shall be capable of starting and operating continuously at a full rated prime load
of 3MVA/2.4MWe @ 0.8pf. Load K-factor to be assumed as K=8.
Each generator set shall be provided with dual output circuit breakers which shall be rated to provide the full
output of the generator at prime rating. Both circuit breakers shall be normally closed to provide supplies to both
HVSB G1 and G2 and shall be manually operated for emergency operation.
Each generator set comprising the system shall be manufactured and shall perform in compliance with all relevant
parts of BS ISO 8528 latest edition and in general terms shall comply with the Class G2 of BS ISO 8528-1 latest
edition in terms of load handling and the ability to control voltage and frequency deviations under varying load
conditions. The manufacturer, however, shall select both prime mover and alternator to maintain the criteria for
Class 3 performance when step load functions are controlled to 40% of individual set capacity under cold start
conditions and 45% with a warm engine. Alternator construction, excitation and voltage regulation shall be
suitable for non-linear load as identified elsewhere in this Specification as generally expected for operation with a
large proportion of Data Centre and Chillers load.
A pessimistic harmonic profile giving a load K-factor of 8 is given in Appendix 2. However, it is not the intention to
stray outside the manufacturer’s standard alternator construction so the Specialist Sub- contractor is requested to
state the maximum K factor applicable to the machine offered with his tender, short delivery periods being the
important criteria.
7.0 Functional Requirements
All the generating sets shall operate in the event of a failure the normal mains electricity supply.
The system shall be designed and controlled such that all the generators start and synchronise to the

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
generator main panel with only three closing their respective output breakers feeding the main incomer
switchboards. The generator synchronising system shall incorporate all facilities to control these circuit breakers.
All generating sets shall start automatically on sensing a failure in the normal mains supplies or a deviation
outside acceptable limits and to shut down semi- automatically after the re-establishment of the normal mains
supplies. Start and shut down facilities shall include:
- A mains failure time delay to guard against unnecessary start up of the generator in response to transient
dips or fluctuations of mains supply, set at 3 seconds but adjustable up to a maximum of 10 seconds
- A mains return time delay to allow the mains supply to stabilise before the load is reconnected to the mains
supply. The timer shall be adjustable from 0-600 seconds and manual switching facilities shall be available to
override this facility
- A run on timer to allow the engine and room ventilation to run off-load for a short time after the load has
been re-connected to the mains supply, set at 15 minutes but adjustable between 1-45 minutes
- Alternator contactor time delay to allow alternator voltage and frequency to stabilise before connecting the
load to the alternator
- Providing the provision is standard, a dual starter motor and battery provision (2 No), the operation of which
will allow three consecutive cranking cycles in succession should the engine fail at the first two attempts
Should any generator set fail to start at the third attempt then the starting circuit shall automatically lock in the
“SET FAILED TO START” condition, with visual warning light to indicate same. In this event, the remaining two
sets shall support the full load.
Governing of the engine, when coupled to its alternator, shall comply with ISO 3046 Class A1 electronic control
with overspeed governing.
The system load is such that the quantity of machines when fully synchronised to the output switchboards
provides N+1 redundancy at prime rated continuous output of each generator. The selection of all components
forming part of the installation shall be such that the system shall operate within the parameters of BS ISO 8528-
1 Class 3 when the output load steps are controlled. The limitations of single load steps shall therefore be
restricted to 40% of the capacity of the full output of N machines in cold start conditions and 45% in warm
engine conditions.
8.0 Arrangement of Equipment
Each generating set shall comprise the following major components:
- Diesel engine of rated output appropriate to the rated output of the generating set and complete with cooling
system. The Specialist Sub- contractor must clearly state within his submission the manufacturer of the
engines.
- Direct coupled self-exciting alternator and associated Automatic Voltage Regulator. The Specialist Sub-
contractor shall declare which alternator is the basis of his submittal.
- A starting and control combined cubicle control panel associated with synchronisation with the other
generator in each pair. Parallel operation with the mains is not a requirement, but the general protection
strategy shall be as described in the following section of this Specification.
- Fuel filler point shall be provided for each generator set to be housed on the generator acoustic fire rated ISO
container plinth. Subject to local by-laws and building control.
- Duplicate starting batteries, chargers and motors providing these are standard.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Double skin vertical flue from each generator.

The engine/alternator units, all auxiliaries and components shall be mounted via anti-vibration mounts on a skid
type base plate with levelling pads, all pre- assembled in the fire rated ISO container at the factory.
The control cubicle shall be supplied for floor mounting. All components, which must be held in correct alignment,
shall be located by means of dowels or fitted with bolts. Lifting points for the attachment of slings shall be
provided and positioned to ensure safe handling.
The diesel engine and generator is to be mounted on a sub base which in turn shall be fixed via antivibration
mountings to the main underbase and the floor of the fire rated ISO container. The anti-vibration mountings shall
be resistant to fuel and lubricating oil and shall have high-friction seatings or fixings to prevent movement whilst
the set is in operation.
The inside floor of the container shall be sealed to a minimum height of 75mm to form a drip tray, which shall
include fuel leak detection and a hand operated bilge pump to manually decant any accumulation of leaked or
spilled fuel into a suitable container (by others) for safe disposal.
All auxiliary components, connections, fixings and wiring necessary for the safe and satisfactory operation of the
set shall be included whether or not they are specifically referred to in this specification.
9.0 Protection Strategy
The Protection Strategy for the entire installation including all individual generators and respective paralleling
switchgear and output shall be such that on loss of the Utility mains all sets shall automatically start in a safe
manner and synchronise together to provide an output replicating the „mains‟ supply to maintain the building
under such conditions.
Each individual set shall be provided with an intelligent control device which shall monitor vital set functions such
as water temperature, oil pressure and other safety factors and suitably control the set if these parameters fall
outside of acceptable limits. The control device shall also monitor the output performance of each machine
including voltage and frequency, such that the machines can be synchronised together to operate as an (N+1)
parallel system and shall monitor such things as reverse power to any machine and disconnect this machine if
unacceptable conditions occur. Outputs shall be available from these controls to operate individual output circuit
breakers thereby allowing all machines to synchronise to the „lead machine‟ of the system and energise the
generator output panels.
A system of controls shall be provided to operate the connection of the dual output panels to the associated
Consumer Switchboard once full parallel operation of the generators has been achieved. Output circuit breakers
shall include overcurrent and earth fault protection subject to detailed fault and circuit analysis.
Connection to the Consumer Switchboards shall be via circuit breakers interlocked to their respective Utility
“mains‟ circuit breaker. The exact protection details shall be specified at a later design stage.
The generator control system shall be dedicated to the generator system but shall be capable of communicating
the status of all operating modes on a per machine basis and any faults that occur on the system.
10.0 Generator Enclosure
- Generator
o The generators shall be housed in generator building as shown on the drawings.
- Access

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o A minimum of two outward opening single personnel access doors shall be provided of suitable size for
access and normal maintenance activity.
- Engine Aspiration and Cooling Ventilation
o This shall be supplied via air inlet/outlet splitter attenuators mounted at each end of the module. The air
intake and discharge louvres shall be of the fixed blade weather type with internally fitted bird mesh
screen.
- Dampers
o The air intake damper shall be motorized. On the discharge end it shall be of the gravity flap type with a
fire retardant flexible connection to the radiator.
- Exhaust Silencer System
o Provides for the supply and mounting of external exhaust gas silencers to meet the specification on the
roof of the enclosure. The exhausts shall be mounted so as to provide clean lines and be seen to be part
of the enclosure.
- Noise Specification
o To meet local environmental control conditions.
- Paint System
o Paint the exterior of the module as the manufacturer‟s standard colour, in a suitable two-pack Acrylic
paint system with an exterior dft of 120 microns. The interior will be finished in a similar paint system
with a dft of 75 microns. The floor and base frame shall be painted black (RAL9005) in oil resistant
paint. Heat resistant paint shall be applied around the exhaust egress area to avoid discolouration and
blistering.
- Local Circuits
o Power requirements within the container shall be fed from a type A split-load 200A TPN distribution
board to BS EN 60439-3 within the enclosure provided by the specialist Sub- Contractor. The distribution
board shall be equipped with Type C MCBs for the following 230V circuits:
Battery charging (2 circuits)
Cold start heater(s )
Ancillary generator circuits
Lighting
Small power
Fuel pumps (2 circuits)
Anti-condensation heater (alternator)
Space heaters
Leak detection panel (fue l and/or coolant)
Fuel polishing
Fill point (circuit in nearest set to the tank only)
Trace heating for both fuel and lubrication oil pipework
o The current rating of the MCBs shall be determined by the provider and a circuit chart shall be provided,
adhered inside the door.
- Lighting

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o Lighting shall be provided by IP54 low energy, high frequency fluorescent luminaires designed to
produce 400 lux 1000 mm above finished floor level. All luminaires shall be 3-hour ICEL approved
emergency.
o External bulkhead M3 luminaires shall be provided over each doorway, sufficient to illuminate the steps
from each exit. A 3mm diameter breather hole shall be drilled to the underside of each external
luminaire. Separate switching shall be provided outside and inside each enclosure, two-way between
access doors.
- Fire Alarm
o The enclosure shall be equipped with a fusible link operated dead weight fire valve and two emergency
exit pushes. Subject to the manufacturer‟s standard provision, the enclosure shall also be equipped with
fixed temperature heat detectors and a single zone control panel, having volt free contacts for fire and
fault and an auxiliary relay which shall be interfaced with the solenoid circuit of the dead weight valve to
release same under fire conditions. The high threshold detector shall be to a temperature setting advised
by the Specialist Sub-Contractor.
- Small Power
o 3 No. maintenance (230V) sockets shall be provided.
11.0 GENERATOR REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE

The engine type of each set shall have a substantial record of reliability whilst operating on continuous duty and
when operating at 110% rated duty, for a minimum of 1 hour.
The engine shall have a minimum cold load acceptance of 60% of its full rated load capacity in one step and
within 20 seconds from initiation of the starting sequence at the minimum ambient air temperature specified.
The engine shall be of the 4-stroke, direct injection, compression-ignition type, totally enclosed and with an in-
line or vee cylinder configuration. It may be naturally aspirated or exhaust gas turbo-charged.
The engine for the generating set shall be water cooled using suitable additives for local environmental condition
(-40°C to +50°C).
The engine shall be rated in accordance with ISO 3046 and be capable of operating continuously at any load
within the range and the conditions specified, on fuel oil complying with BS EN 2869 Class A2. The nominal speed
shall not exceed 1500 rev/min.
All chain or gear drives shall be located in oil-tight cases and be pressure lubricated.
Belt drives will not be acceptable for fuel injection or lubricating oil pumps.
The engine fuel system shall be isolated so that leakage from any part of the system cannot contaminate the
engine lubricating oil.
The engine shall be fitted with an electronic governor, meeting the requirements of ISO 3046/4: 1997 Class A.1,
giving a steady state speed stability of ± 0.25%, utilising a 24 volt dc actuator.
As this application is for two sets to run in parallel, the governor shall provide automatic and proportional load
division between parallel AC generators and still maintain isochronous speed. At the same time both the phase
sequence and voltage levels must be maintained.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
12.0 COOLING SYSTEM – AIR

Cooling air for the engine and for the lubricating oil shall be circulated by the engine driven fan. The number of
air changes within the enclosure shall be adequate for the engine when running on continuous full load and on
10% overload for one hour in accordance with ISO 8528 and under the operating conditions specified. The supply
air shall be drawn in via the inlet attenuator.
13.0 COOLING SYSTEM – WATER

A sealed or pressurised radiator of the air blast type shall be provided on the set. It shall have separate sections
for water, and for lubricating oil if appropriate, and shall be fitted with an integral header tank with level
indication.
The radiator shall be mounted on the Generator set base plate fan upstream of the radiator and driven by vee-
belts from the engine crankshaft.
Unless otherwise indicated, the radiator shall terminate in a flange to which trunking shall be attached, duly
isolated to prevent vibration borne noise transmission, so that hot air from the cooling system may be discharged
via the exhaust air plenum, terminating in outlet grilles mounted on the outside of the enclosure.
Tenderers shall state the radiator airflow and the maximum permissible inlet and outlet pressure drop to ensure
satisfactory operation.
Engine driven pumps(s) shall circulate the jacket water, and lubricating oil if appropriate, through the radiator
sections.
A thermostatically controlled diverter or by-pass valve shall be fitted in the engine cooling water discharge
pipework, with a return to the circulating pump suction, to maintain the circulating water at the optimum
temperature irrespective of load.
14.0 FUEL SYSTEMS

Each generator shall be equipped with the following:
Electronic solenoids to open on generator running shall be installed within each generator container.
Monitored electro-thermal fusible link operated dead weight fire valves in the fuel supply lines shall be provided
with an emergency push button station at each exit.
These devices shall be linked by steel wire and pulleys and shall cause the fuel oil emergency shut off valve in the
fuel oil pipeline to close and an alarm via a mercury switch or similar, with volt free contacts on the drop valve.
As for all other alarms, connections for field wiring shall be provided in the control panel, readily identified by
suitably worded labels adjacent each terminal.
Where provided, the engine mounted fuel pumps shall draw the fuel on demand from the plinth mounted storage
tank, and shall be fitted with non-return valves to prevent drain back of the fuel oil. The requirement for a daily
service tank for each set is not envisaged.
Bulk Storage Tank shall be equipped with the following:
The fuel tanks within or above the base plinth of the fire rated ISO Container shall be suitable for 72 hours
continuous running of the respective generator set at 100% full load and shall be built and tested to meet local
by-laws and requirements.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Provisionally, each generator set skid/plinth mounted fuel tank capacity is sized at 8 hours continuous running
actual capacity shall be calculated by the Specialist Sub- Contractor and declared with the tender submission.
The tank shall also be fitted with the following:
- A clearly visible and valved dial type contents gauge (indicating litres) adequately protected against accidental
damage. The gauge shall auto close when not in use
- Offset fill line complete with ball valve and aluminium drip cap
- Vent assembly with gauge flame trap
- Outlet assembly complete with gatevalve
- Sludge drain assembly complete with gate valve and plug
- Overfill alarm
- Bund alarm
- Low and high level switches
- 4–20mA analog output for use by the remote alarm/monitoring system
The generator fuel tanks shall be provided with a remote fill point cabinet where the fill pipework will
terminate with access through a lockable door. The fill point cabinet base shall form a drip tray to collect all
spillages during the tanker filling process and shall be equipped with bottom exit containment (galvanized conduit
and draw wire) for security provisions (by others).
The fuel pipe work shall be paint finished to the manufacturers standard colour in a suitable two pack Acrylic
paint system with an exterior dft of 120 microns.
15.0 ENGINE INSTRUMENTATION

Each engine shall be provided with instrumentation as applicable, which shall connect an easily visible
panel isolated from harmful vibration and incorporate the following as a minimum:
- Lubricating oil pressure gauge

- Cooling air, or cooling water, outlet thermometer
- Lubricating oil outlet thermometer
- Provision only for test thermometer(s) in each exhaust gas outlet manifold, each turbocharger
- inlet, and turbo-charger outlet. Brass plug(s) shall be fitted at the test point(s)
- Battery charger output voltage
- Hours-run meter - to indicate total hours run
- Engine starts counter
16.0 LUBRICATION SYSTEM

Each engine shall have a forced lubrication system throughout using an integral gear driven pump with a coarse
strainer on the suction side and a full flow filter, of nominal micron rating not greater than 10, on the delivery
side. Manual lubrication of any part of the engine will not be accepted.
The engine lubricating oil sight glass shall be easily accessible and be clearly marked to indicate maximum and
minimum levels.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The engine sump shall have an easily accessible drain point, or suitable drain pipe, fitted with a BSP plug, and
shall also be fitted with a Murphy gauge to give visible indication of sump oil level.
If weekly test runs are insufficient to prevent the drying out of the bearings, a system shall be provided to
lubricate the bearings, preferably intermittently, using the normal 230 volt ac supply at site, or by automatic pre-
start priming using a 12 or 24 volt dc motorised pump energised by the engine starting battery.
The lubrication system shall be suitable for use in extreme high and low temperatures of +40 OC and – 40 OC
and to operate for a minimum of 72 hours without attendance.
17.0 STARTING SYSTEM

Duplicate starter motor, battery and charger arrangements are preferred if available as a standard offering; they
shall be employed for each set to provide automatic changeover to back-up systems in the event of failure of any
part of the primary starting circuit. The primary and secondary starter arrangements shall be fault monitored by
the control panel.
Each engine shall be capable of starting from any crankshaft position, using a 24/110 volt dc supply, by axial type
starter motor(s) engaging with the flywheel.
Starter motor(s) shall disengage automatically when the engine starts and/or when de-energised and shall be
easily accessible. Terminals shall be fitted with non-conducting protective shrouds.
The starting cycle shall consist of 3 attempts to start with 10 second cranking followed by a 10 second rest. The
starter motor batteries shall be arranged on a non-corrodible spill-proof tray or rack and isolated from harmful
vibration. They shall be of the heavy duty lead-acid (commercial transport, h.d. cranking application) type and of
sufficient capacity to crank the diesel engine above the minimum firing speed for 6 starts in an eight hour period.
In addition the batteries shall also supply the maximum demand from the control cubicle and an additional
demand of 24 watt when the set is operating.
DC cables shall be suitably rated for the full cranking current and shall be multi-stranded for flexibility, insulated
in oil resistant PVC/PVC sheathing. Cable lugs shall be of the low-maintenance type, covered with a grease cap.
An approved type battery charger shall be provided, preferably in the control cubicle or on the set, isolated from
harmful vibration. It shall have sufficient capacity to maintain the charge of the batteries under all specified
duties and during long periods of inoperation. It shall be fitted with an ammeter having a range suitable for the
measurement of charge and discharge current, not for the starter motor demand. The battery charger shall be
automatically switched off when an engine start signal is received and reinstated when the engine stops. The
charger cabinet shall be wall mounted inside the enclosure, preferably next to the distribution board feeding it,
with the ammeters at eye level (1.6m) and labelled as to function.
18.0 COLD STARTING

Thermostatically controlled 230 volt ac heater(s) shall be fitted in the engine water jacket and/or engine sump or
alternator as appropriate, to facilitate cold starting. The heaters shall be switched to operate automatically from
the control panel. The generator shall be suitable of starting in the extreme temperatures of + 50°C and - 40°C.
19.0 EXHAUST SYSTEM

Engine manufacturers recommendations for exhaust system designs to conform to the noise limitation
requirements shall be provided. The maximum noise level reading from the exhaust system shall not exceed 85

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
dB (A) at a distance of 3 metres in any direction from the enclosures although his will be subject to local
requirements, although this shall be subject to local requirements.
The set shall be provided with a high quality residential type exhaust system suitable for mounting on the roof of
the container. The exhaust system shall include one (or two) exhaust silencer(s), stainless steel expansion
bellows, four 90° bends, all with BS flanged or BSP screwed ends, drawing facilities and all gaskets, joints and
fixings. The exhaust piping and acoustic silencer within the generator enclosure shall be suitably insulated to
reduce radiated heat and noise.
The Specialist Sub-contractor shall supply a complete independent exhaust system for each set complying with
the engine manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with particular requirements, these being a riser
encased exhaust system from ground level to above the roof level of the building It is important that no exhaust
fumes will enter the large building air intake louvres, irrespective of prevailing wind conditions.
All supports, hangers, clips, one hour FR insulation and other fixings necessary for complete installation shall be
provided. The flue system shall be of stainless steel twin wall construction, with drainage provision in the base of
the vertical rise section.
Hot surface protection (1.6mm perforated stainless steel plate; 30% free area; max 6mm aperture) shall be
provided in all areas where there is risk of injury from hot surfaces, i.e. at ground level and on the roof itself.
Hot surface warning labels to be provided where required. The installer will be responsible for the flue design and
all associated support steelwork.
A 22mm copper drain pipe shall be provided from the base of the vertical exhaust section, fixed to the wall at 1
metre intervals to a height above the ground apron of approximately 600mm.
20.0 GUARDS
All exposed hot or moving parts and in particular the fan(s), belt drive(s), coupling(s), and flywheel(s), shall be
guarded in accordance with any relevant standard relating to the safe operation of machinery and the Health &
Safety requirement pertaining to the site.
To enable adjustment and inspection of drives, secured cover plates of suitable dimensions shall be provided in
the guards at the appropriate points.
21.0 DRIVES
All belt drives shall utilise multiple endless vee belts, resistant to fuel and lubricating oils. The number of belts
fitted to each drive shall be one more than is necessary to transmit the maximum power requirement.
An easily accessible belt tensioning device shall be fitted to each drive and it shall be possible to change the
belt(s) without major dismantling and reassembly.
22.0 ALTERNATOR
The alternator shall be capable of delivering the specified MVA output continuously at 11KV and operate within
±5% band of the rated voltage, at a power factor of 0.8 lagging and at rated frequency, plus 10% overload for
one hour in any period of 12 hours within the operating conditions specified.
The output rating of each alternator in MVA, the voltage, number of phases, and frequency shall be as indicated.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The alternator may be flange and/or foot-mounted twin end-shield bearings which shall be coupled through an
approved type of intermediate flexible coupling.
The alternator shall be of the rotating field brushless self excited (permanent magnetic) type, or separately
excited, and coupled directly to the engine.
The machine shall be both screen protected and drip-proof.
The alternator shall be two bearing type using ball or roller type suitable for operation over long periods without
the need for replacement or replenishment of lubricant. Oil lubricated bearings shall be fitted with a clearly visible
and protected oil level gauge.
The insulation shall comply with BS 2757 Class F temperature rise and shall have an oil and moisture proof finish
with a surface which will not retain dust or condensation.
Radiated interference from all sources shall be suppressed to the limits specified in Annex B of BS EN 60034-
1:2004 with RFI suppression equipment to BS EN 55014.Rotating machine VDE0530 (IEC34-1).
Motor windings NEMA MG1 (IEC60034).
23.0 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATION

Automatic voltage regulators shall be an approved solid state type specifically to operate in conjunction with the
specified excitation system which shall maintain the setting for long periods without attention, and shall be
provided with manual adjustment from the control cubicle for setting the alternator output within limits of ±5%
of the rated voltage. It may be integral to the alternator(s) or mounted on the control cubicle(s) subject to the
specific arrangement appropriate to a paralleling cubicle for two sets.
The output voltage shall be maintained within ± 0.5% from no load to full load including cold to hot variations, at
any power factor between 0.8 lagging and unity, inclusive of a speed variation of 5%. After any change of load
the voltage shall not vary by more than ± 16% of the rated voltage and shall return to within ± 0.5% of rated
voltage within recovery times detailed in BS4999 part 140 for grade VR2-22 control.
On starting the voltage overshoot shall not exceed 15% and shall return to 2.5% of rated voltage in not more
than 3 seconds. Over voltage protection shall be provided so that if the above limits are exceeded the set shall
lock-out.
For the alternators to operate in parallel in each system, they shall be provided with the regulation system which
will enable them to share the kVAR of the group load on a proportional basis. The kW of the shared load will be a
function of the speed governing system specified.
24.0 CONTROL EQUIPMENT

The operation and control of the system shall be effected by a dual redundant PLC system which shall
control all necessary set functions including synchronisation output switchgear and all necessary safety features
of the system. The system shall control duty cycling of the machines such that hours run times are equalised.
The control equipment shall be designed to operate in conjunction with the specific site arrangements
independently controlling each machine forming part of the system. The control panels shall have the following
facilities:
- Control of the automatic starting and stopping of each engine

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Fault indication and automatic engine shutdown and alarm condition

- Automatic regulation of each alternator voltage, load synchronisation and load sharing if multiple sets form a
system
- Full electrical protection of both alternators and output cabling
- Reverse power protection on multiple, parallel system
- Mains voltage sensing for use with the mains-to-generator transfer arrangements (and vice versa) to form a
fully automatic standby system
The control panel shall be provided with standby power from the generator’s main batteries capable of
maintaining the synchronisation controls and status indication for a period of 24 hours and carry out a
minimum of 2 complete cycles of synchronising generators, transferring load to generators and return to mains at
the end of the 24 hour period. This assumes that all motorized circuit breakers are self powered.
Each generator shall take its request to start from a master common control (MCC) section as a central common
point to address all mains failure scenarios for both systems. The generator available signal shall be identified on
the primary side of the input breaker to the MCC. Generator Set fault, failure, lock out, off line and standby
conditions shall be provided as outputs from each generator control panel to the MCC.
Load sharing of the machines shall be achieved by the use of a fully integrated microprocessor based
programmable logic control system (PLC), programmed to address individual relays, contactors, motorised circuit
breakers or automatic transfer switches.
A specific routine shall be programmed for the reinstatement of essential supplies, as identified by the project
specification and drawings, for the normal operation of systems under generator support on the basis of N+1
generators being available. The ladder logic of the engine/alternator management system shall be approved
before putting into commission.
The common controls shall contain the following necessary controls, re- programmable PLC, alarm annunciator,
fuses, designation labels, etc. with individual visual indication in the event of any one or
combination of the following status conditions:
- System in auto
- System in manual control
- Mains No. 1 failure
- Mains No. 1 available
- Main No. 1 on load
- Generator No. 1 on load
- Skid / Plinth fuel tank No 1 Low Fuel Level
- Skid / Plinth fuel tank No.1 Leak Detected
The above combination status conditions, needs to be repeated for twelve in total generator sets.
A set of PLC communications modules for connection between the common control PLC and the generator control
panels shall form part of the MCC section. The system shall also have facilities for all critical data to be able to
communicate with the EMS providing overall monitoring and control of the electrical systems to the building.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The Specialist Sub-contractor shall liaise with the Consultant with regard to the protocol for these controls to
facilitate the design and installation of the interconnecting communications cabling by the Main Contractor.
The control panel shall be complete with all necessary internal small wiring, fuses, relays, designation
labels, incoming and outgoing generator and switchboard interface terminals.
25.0 CONSTRUCTION
The control equipment shall be housed in a sheet steel fabricated cubicle(s), which shall be totally enclosed,
vermin-proof, drip-proof and dust-protected with adequate access for installation, maintenance and repair,
located on the set. In certain instances where base plate mounted cubicles are used they shall be fitted with anti-
vibration mountings.
Control panels shall generally be manufactured from sheet steel not less than 2mm thick be of cubicle type
construction and comply with BS EN 600947 to provide IP41 degree of protection.
The cubicle(s) shall contain all necessary equipment and instrumentation to start, operate, control and stop the
generating set(s) and shall incorporate facilities for connection of all control cabling between the cubicles and the
respective engine/alternator to enable the specified control to be achieved.
Terminal boxes shall be easily accessible and suitable for the connection of cables without distortion or cramping.
Terminals shall be suitable for connection of pressure crimped or soldered lugs and shall give full face contact
with the cable lugs. The main terminals of the machine shall be of robust construction and be secured by nuts,
flats and locking washers.
26.0 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Each alternator shall be provided with dual output circuit breakers on or next to the set control panel and shall
comply with IEC 157.1.
The breaking capacities of circuit breakers shall be at least equal to the prospective fault level at the point of the
distribution system where the breaker is installed from the alternator output.
Breaking Capacity Performance certificates shall be available for Category of Duty P2 to the aforementioned
standards; the nominal rating/frame size shall be as shown on the schematic drawing.
Each circuit breaker shall be designed with a quick-make/quick-break contact arrangement, with the speed of
operation being independent of the operator and the operating mechanism trip-free, t prevent the contacts being
held closed in the event of a fault such as a short circuit or overload.
Circuit breakers shall be fully tropicalised (T2) as standard. (Summer operation).
Circuit breakers shall be designed for minimal maintenance. They shall be available in fixed and draw-out models
and in 4-pole versions.
Circuit breakers main contacts shall be housed in a reinforced polyester casing and provide double insulation from
the operator and breaker front face, yet shall still be fully maintainable.
Free tripping with priority opening shall be provided on all poles (common operating shaft).
The operating mechanism shall be of the O-C-O stored energy spring type, with a closing time less than or equal
to 60ms.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Circuit breakers shall be opened and closed via a stored energy mechanism. The spring mechanism shall be
automatically charged by a 230 volt mains fed electric motor. The maximum time to charge the springs shall not
exceed four seconds. It shall be possible to manually override and charge the spring by hand, should the need
arise.
It shall also be easy to convert from hand to motor operation on site, without the need of special tools. Contacts
shall be designed to be maintenance-free in normal usage. The contact assembly shall automatically show the
need for the contact to be replaced, through an integral mechanical indicator.
A mechanical indicator shall be placed on the front face of the air circuit breaker and linked to the main contact
assembly in such a manner as to positively indicate the contact status. It shall only be possible for "OFF" to be
indicated when all the contacts are parted and isolated by the required distance. Arc chutes shall be common on
the whole range and removable on site, to allow their condition to be checked.
Three definite positions of the draw-out portion within the air circuit breaker assembly shall be possible:
- Connected Position - all main and auxiliary circuits engaged

- Test Position - all main circuits disconnected; auxiliary circuits engaged
- Isolated Position - all circuits disconnected
Where a door is provided, door interlock shall be provided so that it shall not be possible to open the door until
the air circuit breaker draw-out portion is in the disconnected position.
Independent, insulated safety shutters shall be provided over the incoming and outgoing main circuits. A mal-
insertion system shall be provided, to prevent insertion of a circuit breaker draw-out portion of a higher current
rating than that of the fixed portion.
The racking handle shall be stowed on the air circuit breaker so that it is accessible from the front and does not
affect the door interlocking.
All electrical auxiliaries, including the motor spring charging mechanism, shall be fully field-adaptable
without any adjustment or the necessity for special tools. They shall be fitted into a compartment which, under
normally loaded conditions, has no metalwork energised from the main poles exposed.
It shall be possible to connect all auxiliary wiring from the front face of the air circuit breaker. This wiring shall be
taken through a set of disconnecting contacts, so that all auxiliary wiring is automatically disconnected in the
isolated position.
All accessories shall be common throughout the full range.
Mechanical indication on the front of the air circuit breaker shall be provided to indicate the following:
- Main contacts closed, "ON"

- Main contacts open, "OFF"
- Springs "charged"
- Springs " discharged"
- Circuit breaker in "connected" position (draw-out only)
- Circuit breaker in "test" position (draw-out only)
- Circuit breaker in "disconnected" position (draw-out only)
All indicators must be clearly visible.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
All draw-out air circuit breakers shall be completely mechanically interlocked to prevent the insertion or
withdrawal of the breaker with the contacts closed.
It shall be possible to provide padlocking/key locking of the draw-out breaker in the following positions:
- Breaker operating push-buttons.

- Racking interlocks to prevent insertion or movement of the draw-out portion in the fixed chassis
Breakers shall have the facility to be interlocked together, either horizontally or vertically, by direct mechanical or
cable linkage.
A negligible safety perimeter to earthed metal shall be a standard feature (draw-out version).
Circuit breakers shall be fully documented and the following literature shall be available: main catalogue;
installation guide; instruction manual; transparent characteristic curves.
27.0 EARTHING
A suitable earthing system shall be provided between each of the. Standby Generator sets and the paralleling
panels to allow safe operation of the system and to ensure the synchronisation of the sets to the two panels
referred to above. Neutral Earthing Contactors with neutral earthing resistor of suitable size shall be provided at
the main switchboard.
28.0 ENGINE CONTROL

Duty selector switches shall be arranged to enable periodic testing of the equipment with or without load
transfer.
The duty selector switch shall be four position switch OFF/AUTO/MANUAL/TEST. In the OFF position it
shall not be possible to start the generator from any source whatsoever. In the AUTO position the set shall start
on failure of the normal supply or on the falling below 85% of the normal voltage between any two lines or line
to neutral. In the MANUAL position the set shall start and run without load transfer. However, should the normal
mains fail during testing, the set(s) shall immediately serve the essential load. After test and when the selector
switch is returned to AUTO the set shall run on for a pre-set run-on time and then shut down.
It shall be possible to switch from MANUAL to AUTO or vice versa without affecting the operation of the set,
when it is in use.
When either set is stopped, other than under lock-out conditions, it shall be self-resetting and ready for the next
starting sequence.
A manually re-set approved overspeed trip shall be provided and shall operate at 15% over normal rated speed.
The overspeed trip shall be equipped with a pair of auxiliary contacts which shall close on overspeed and remain
closed until manually re-set.
All switches and push-buttons shall be clearly marked to indicate their function and shall generally be located on
the front face of the control cubicle. Push-buttons shall be of the impulse type with holding circuits to ensure
completion of the selected function. The STOP push-button shall be of the mushroom head type, coloured red,
and prominently located. Operation of the STOP push-button shall stop the respective set in either MANUAL,
AUTO or TEST and shall have auxiliary contacts to bring up an alarm.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
29.0 SET CONTROL PANEL

The control cubicle shall contain, as a minimum, the following features in the engine control section:
- Oil pressure gauge in N/m2

- Oil temperature gauge in 0C
- Cooling water temperature gauge in 0C
- Combined engine shaft speed tachometer and hours run recorder
- Water jacket immersion heater "on/off" indicator light protected by a set of H.R.C fuses or MCBs
- Visual and audible warning device to indicate engine "Fail to Start" and reset push button to cancel the
audible alarm
- Test "start" push button and engine "Stop" button
- Battery charging set complete with charger ammeter, battery voltmeter, input switch, normal/boost switch,
fuse, indicator lights and relay to disconnect charger during engine starting and running time
- Visual and audible circuits to indicate "High Cooling Water Temperature", "High Oil
- Temperature", "Low Oil Pressure" and "Engine Overspeed" complete with reset push buttons to cancel audible
alarm signals
- Stall lockout to prevent recranking of the engine upon fuel failure of stall condition
- Adjustable time delay to allow generator set to continue running after restoration of mains supply
- Automatic start
- Automatic start equipment sensed by the under voltage relays on the incoming mains supply
- Hand-off auto switch for each generator
Each alternator control section of the generator panel shall include, as a minimum, the following instruments and
controls:
- Terminal voltage indicating instrument (0-10000V) and selector switch for phase-to-neutral and phase-to-
phase measurement
- Over voltage and under voltage visual and audible alarms with reset button for cancellation of audible alarm
- Visual and audible alarm of overheating of stator by means of thermistors fitted in the stator windings, with
reset button for cancellation of audible alarms
- Ammeter and selector switch to a suitable current range
- Frequency indicating instrument
- Power factor indicating instrument
- Restricted earth fault protection relay
- Reverse power protection relay (for multiple set installations)
- Motor operated circuit-breaker with overcurrent protection on all phases
- MW indicating instrument (3 phase 4 wire unbalanced load type) to a suitable range
- MVA indicating instrument to a suitable range
- Synchroscope and check relays for manual operation of multiple sets
- Automatic synchronising equipment

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
30.0 SET LOCK-OUT

Each set shall immediately stop and lock-out to prevent further starting when:
- The set fails to start after three successive attempts

- The lubricating oil pressure falls to an unsafe condition
- The cylinder head temperature exceeds a safe maximum, or the cooling water outlet temperature exceeds a
safe maximum, as applicable
- The overspeed trip has operated
- The respective circuit breaker has tripped on fault
A direct temperature sensing device shall be used to measure cylinder head temperature in air cooled engines.
In all cases re-set of the lock-out shall only be by hand.
Alarms and lock-out systems shall not operate during the normal shut down procedure.
Individual indicator lamps shall be illuminated by the operation of any lock-out detailed above, and a lamp shall
remain illuminated until the lock-out has been reset. Auxiliary contacts for BMS wiring shall be provided for all
alarm functions.
A lamp test switch or push-button shall be provided and biased to the NORMAL position. Operation of the switch
or push-button shall illuminate all indicator lamps.
31.0 ALARMS
An alarms monitoring interface panel shall be supplied within the generator package and shall form a dedicated
section of the generator control panel for interconnection with the alarm monitoring system.
All voltage transformers and current transformers necessary for remote monitoring shall be provided within these
works to specifications as dictated by the control specialists. All items requiring interface shall be brought to a
numbered terminal strip in a compartment from which field wiring shall be installed by others.
Current transformers shall have their secondary terminals short-circuited until the controls specialist completes his
section of work.
Each generator set shall be monitored for cylinder block coolant temperature, oil pressure, common alarm, air-
flow failure, voltage, current, power factor, MVA, frequency, circuit breaker status, battery charger fault, failure to
start.
The fuel system diesel oil level shall be monitored in the ISO Container plinth mounted fuel storage tank and
repeated at local gauges located adjacent to the tank and at the fill point. A fill guard alarm system shall be
provided which shall repeat adjacent to the tank and report to the site monitoring system. The fuel transfer
pumps shall be monitored for run and trip conditions, and report to the site monitoring system.
Fuel Storage
- Fuel Tank - Low Fuel Level

- Fuel Tank - Leak Detected
- Fuel Tank - Fuel Line Leak Detected
The above sequence of field wiring interfacing, applies to each of the generator sets.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Generators
- Generator 1 not in auto

- Generator 1 fire valve operated
- Generator 1 EPO operated
- Generator 1 fire alarm fault
- Generator 1 leak detected in container
- Generator 1 VCB closed
- Generator 1 VCB tripped
- Generator 1 VCB open
- Generator 1 common fault
- Generator 1 set running
The above sequence of field wiring interfacing, applies to each of the generator sets.
310 SITE WIDE INFRASTRUCTURE – ELECTRICAL SUPPLY CONTRACTOR (ESC)

The Electrical Supply Contractor (ESC) shall provide the electrical infrastructure from the Adam Airbase electrical
11kV ring incoming supply with electrical intake, 11kV switchgear and 11kV generator back-up and distribute the
11kV ring as described within V10 and V11. The ESC shall provide the 11kV ring arrangement to feed the
transformer substations strategically located about the site and the generator building and chiller compound and
the associated incoming low voltage electrical supplies to terminate at the incoming circuit breaker/fuse switches
on the main switchgear panel or at the local distribution boards for the buildings as shown on the schematics and
described above.
The ESC shall provide a complete installation including cabling, connections and all accessories up to the main
switchgear panel/consumer unit terminals.
The ESC shall provide all cables to be installed underground in cable trenches/ducts arranged as shown on the
drawings.
320 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS

The ESC shall liaise with the Adam Airbase supply authority to ascertain/confirm the following characteristics on
which the electrical installation design shall be based:
- nominal voltage/frequency
- prospective short circuit current
- over current protective device
- type of earthing arrangements
- source impedance

11kV and low voltage system fault protection and PLC controls shall be provided by the ESC as detailed on the
schematics and V10, V11 and V12.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
The Electrical Supply Contractor (ESC) shall be responsible for the electrical infrastructure as described above and
the provision of the LV supply terminating at the incoming circuit breaker/fuse switches on the main switchgear
panel or their fused cut out and the provision of the main Protective Multiple Earthing (PME) earthing terminal
within each building. The ESC shall obtain the electrical characteristics of the incoming 11kV supplies and shall
design the electrical infrastructure accordingly to ensure the fault levels, loads and switching arrangements are
fully coordinated. The ESC shall design the electrical infrastructure based on the final equipment selections.
The Installer shall be responsible for providing the remainder of the electrical installation within the buildings.
The Main Contractor will be responsible for the provision of all builderswork, trenching, backfilling, cable ducts,
transformer bases, etc. on site.
Studies and calculation
General
During the detail design the following studies and calculations regarding the configuration of
the electric system shall be executed.
- Electrical load flow and load analysis.

- Short-circuit studies
- Stability studies
- Electrical system protection and coordination studies
- Harmonics studies
- Insulation coordination studies
- Cable sizing calculations
- Grounding studies
- Lighting calculations
Electrical Load Flow and Load analysis
Electrical load flow study shall be performed on the whole electric system to perform the analysis of
the system’s capability to adequately supply the connected load.
The study shall provide the following information utilized for the equipment sizing:
- Active and reactive power flow and power factor in each branch of the system
- Bus voltages
- Optimum tap settings for power transformers
- The possibility and extent of overloads on transformers, generators, and tie circuits during normal and
emergency conditions
- The present load on each feeder for consideration and location of future loads

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Short circuit studies
Short-circuit studies shall be performed in accordance with IEC 60909, and shall show maximum and
minimum prospective fault levels at each bus-bar for 3 phase, 2 phase and earth faults.
The following parameters shall be shown:
- Initial symmetrical short circuit current I”k

- Peak short circuit current Ip
- Symmetrical short circuit breaking current Ib
- Steady state short circuit current Ik
- DC component of short circuit current IDC at the break point
On the basis of the available short-circuit current calculated, it shall be specified the current withstand ratings and
it shall be verified that all involved equipment and components of the electric system are suitable to withstand
the available fault currents.
Stability Studies
Stability studies shall determine the ability of plant generating system to remain in synchronism with the
remainder of the electric system during and shortly after system disturbances including short circuits, generator
tripping and starting of large motors. Emergency generators shall not be considered in the stability study.
The results shall be used to:
- Verify selection of equipment and system configuration

- Determine the need for load shedding following a fault, or loss of generation, and maximum
- acceptable load shed times
- Confirm the protection scheme and relay setting.
- Confirm stability of the system, and maximum acceptable fault clearance times
- Verify motor starting capability.
- Verify motor restart capability and develop restart sequences
Electrical System protection and co-ordination study
Studies shall compare the calculated short-circuit currents with the withstand and interrupting ratings
for a given protective device in order to verify that the system components will not be damaged when
subjected to larger currents than they are expected to handle.
In particular the studies shall determine the relay settings in order that:
- The protective relays clear the faulty condition before stability is lost and consequently other parts of the
system will be untimely lost
- The closest upstream protective device shall detect and clear the system fault without the operation of
another protective relay further upstream in the electric system
- The back-up protection shall be assured in such a way that, if the closest protective device fails to operate,
the next set of protective devices should be co-ordinated in order that they shall operate before extensive
damage result

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Harmonic studies
Studies shall verify harmonics on the system and equipment to be in accordance with acceptable limits (i.e. max.
5 % of harmonic voltage on every system voltage) taking full account of significant non linear loads and variation
of plant operating loads. Harmonic levels shall not invalidate equipment certifications for hazardous areas. Action
shall be taken either by equipment over-sizing, increasing impedance or by additional filtration to meet these
limits.
Insulation coordination studies
Insulation coordination studies shall be performed in compliance with the requirements of the
applicable IEC Standards.
The results of insulation coordination studies shall be used to determine:
- The necessary and sufficient insulation characteristics of the various components of the electric system in
order to obtain uniform withstand to normal voltages and to overvoltages, of various origins, to which the
equipment are subjected
- The type and the number of insulators to be provided in a string of overhead lines
- The clearances between phase conductors and between phase conductors and ground
- Characteristics and position (shielded angle) of the earth wire of overhead lines
- Bushings and transformers insulation characteristics
- Surge arrester types, characteristics, and their installation locations. (g) The proper grounding of metal frames
and devices

530 PERMIT TO WORK

Prior to commencement of work and where appropriate arrange for the issue of a permit to work.
540 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.
550 INSTALLATION
Low voltage electricity supplies as set out within the Site Wide Infrastructure design. Each building Installer /
Main Contractor shall negotiate and liaise with the Electrical Supply Contractor (ESC) regarding the organisation,
co-ordination, programming, connection and completion of the electrical supplies and associated services to each
building and shall take responsibility for any failure in this regard and note that no consequential claims will be
entertained as a result of failure to observe these requirements or any requirements of the supply company.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Liaise fully with all parties to properly co-ordinate all incoming electrical service arrangements in accordance with
all related standards and requirements.
The Installer / Main Contractor shall liaise fully with the ESC and achieve confirmation in writing that the
proposals for incoming service arrangements are satisfactory, including all final connection details, service entries,
position of service runs along highway, requirements for chambers, pits etc.

For small installations where the Electrical Supply Contractor’s equipment is required to be mounted on a
backboard, the following clauses apply.
610 BACK BOARDS

Provide wall mounted back board panels within meter rooms for mounting of electrical equipment. Back boards to
consist of 18mm thick resin bonded marine ply with white matt paint finish.
Fix back boards securely to walls of meter rooms making allowances for weights of equipment which will be fixed
to boards.
620 CABLE TAILS

Provide LSF cable tails within class 4 surface cable trunking systems for connection from the Electrica Supply
Contractors metering equipment to the incoming fuse switch.

800 IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SERVICES


manufacturer’s recommendations and those of the Standards listed in W12 of this specification, and as detailed
ordinated.
910 PROCEDURE
Prepare a fully detailed method statement for the testing, commissioning and demonstration stating exactly how
these are to be carried out including interface with all other systems. Submit the statement to the Contract
Provide the results on A1 or A0 layout drawings and include in the O&M instruction manuals. Provide
electronic copies of the drawings in AutoCAD 2008 format on a CDROM.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
920 DOCUMENTATION
Issue a system test certificate detailing compliance with all the relevant British Standards and this
specification.
receipt of comments, amend all documentation (including ‘as fitted’ drawings, O&M manual documentation and
system instruction drawings and manuals) and issue three hard copies and three
electronic copies of all documentation. Provide electronic text documents in either Microsoft Word or Excel
format, and all drawings in AutoCAD 2008 format.

Provide Drawings, specifications, schedules, method statements, etc. as detailed in Section A of this specification.
Prepare all installations and record drawings, supply proper operating and maintenance instructions and provide
adequate demonstration to and training of the Client’s representatives, for the system in accordance with the
standards listed in clause V12.200 and the relevant ‘A’ sections of this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
V11 HV SUPPLY / DISTRIBUTION / PUBLIC UTILITY SUPPLY

provide 11kV generators as back-up supplies, 11kV infrastructure main network and LV generators as back-up
supplies to the selected buildings’ low voltage main distribution switchgear.

section prevails.
European Standard.

- Public Utilities and Street Working Act (PUSWA)
- 50HZ within statutory tolerances.
The electrical supply to meet the building electricity maximum demand load requirements.
Connect the LV distribution system, to BS7671, as TN-S system comprising separate neutral and earth
throughout.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

General
This specification describes the metal-enclosed air insulated medium voltage switchgear for indoor applications (i)
transformer feeders, (ii) motor starters, (iii) capacitor feeders and (iv) other distribution incoming/outgoing
feeders as required for this project as set out in the data sheets and single line diagrams.
Standards and Reference Documentation
The latest revision of the following IEC/AS standards shall apply:
- 62271-200 HV metal-enclosed switchgear

- 62271-1 HV Switchgear & Controlgear – Part 1: Common Specifications
- 62271-100 Circuit breakers
- 60470 Contactors
- 60282-1 Protection fuse
- 62271-102 Earthing switches
- 60265-1 Switch disconnectors.
- 60044-1 Current transformer
- 60044-2 Voltage transformer
- 60125 Protection relays.
Design Criteria
Rated Normal Currents
- The rated normal currents of components are stated in the data sheet and shall be valid for ambient
temperature of 45° C.
Temperature limits and environment.
- For switchboards and equipment installed indoors in unpolluted and non corrosive atmosphere, the ratings are
guaranteed under the following ambient conditions:
- Environmental conditions according to IEC Standards
- Maximum temperature 45°C
- Maximum 24 h average temperature 35°C
- Minimum (corresponds to “minus 5 °C indoor class”) -5°C
- Maximum relative humidity: 90/95 %
The switchboard shall be suitable for installation and service up to an elevation of 1000 m above the sea level.
Internal arc fault test:

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The arc proof panels shall be in compliance with IEC 62271-200 in accordance with classification AFLR minimum
time duration of 1 sec ensuring operator safety.
Panel housing description
General
The switchboard shall be an indoor, air insulated and metal enclosed in accordance IEC/AS 62271-200
classification PM with single busbar system. It shall be suitable for local and remote control, and may
communicate to the control system by field bus connection.
Switchboard shall be designed in order to:
- - ensure service continuity to IEC/AS 62271-200 classification LCS2A

- - guarantee high degree of operator safety -
- - ensure easy installation and reduced construction costs
- - be easily adaptable to future arrangement and extensions on both sides of the switchboard
Power cable connection preferably will be done by cable from bottom front.
Busbar shall be copper and insulated.
All operations shall be performed with arc fault contained door closed for maximum operator safety. This safety
regulation shall be observed even during loss of control voltage.
Cubicle design and compartments
Enclosure and internal partitioning of the cubicles are of high quality aluminium-zinc coated steel sheets, 2 mm
thick. The front is closed off by pressure resistant doors which open to an angle of 120°. Every panel of the
switchboard is divided in various compartments both for power equipment (busbars, circuit breaker, fused
contactor, instrument transformers) and for auxiliaries (instrument compartment, wiring ducts for
interconnections) which are segregated by metal partitions.
Correct operation performance is ensured by integrated mechanical interlocks, mechanical position indicators and
inspection windows to ensure utmost safety for operators.
Main busbar compartment
This compartment located in panel upper back part contains the main busbar system, which is supported and
connected to the circuit breaker and fused contactor fixed insulating contacts by means of branches.
Depending on rated current they have to carry the main busbars are made of electrolytic copper flat bars or D-
shaped cross section tubes, suitable to withstand thermal and electro dynamic stress of a short circuit current.
The main busbars and tee-off conductors are insulated by means of shrink-on sleeves or epoxy.
Feeder compartment
Feeder compartment shall be accessible from panel front by opening the door. This compartment shall include:
- branch system for connecting the power cables to the circuit breaker or fused contactor fixed insulating
contacts
- fault make earthing switch with operation from panel front
- mechanical interlock between circuit breaker or fused contactor and earthing switch
- current transformers

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- voltage transformers, fixed or withdrawable

- other components on request
4mm aluminium gland plate shall be provided for power cables entry.
Cable sealing ends shall be visible at any time via viewing window on compartment door.
Circuit Breaker or Contactor compartment
This compartment is to accommodate withdrawable circuit breaker or fused contactor, and for truck racking in
and out with door closed.
The following components are mounted in this compartment:
- the primary disconnects, namely bushing insulators containing power connections of the circuit breaker or
fused contactor, and busbar compartment
- metal shutters automatically operated by the movement of the circuit breaker or fused contactor truck
- shutters shall be independently operated and padlockable
- the circuit breaker or fused contactor truck position switches.
Position of the withdrawable truck can be observed at any time via the viewing window on the door.
Low voltage compartment
The low voltage compartment shall be a separate compartment from high voltage section.
The low voltage compartment shall be placed above the circuit breaker or fused contactor compartment. The Low
voltage compartment shall house the following equipment:
- terminal links and wiring

- auxiliary equipment of circuit breaker or fused contactor, and cubicle (fuses, low voltage MCBs,
- measuring instruments, protection relays, control and signalling devices, etc.).
- truck operated auxiliary contacts signalling circuit breaker or fused contactor service, test and
- isolated.
Installation facility
The panels are to be delivered to site as factory assembled, tested units.
The switchboard must be ready for operation after cubicles (or cubicles assemblies) have been positioned side by
side in a single row, bolted together, power and control cable connected.
Doors and external covers coating or painting on the switchboard cubicles
The doors and cover plates shall be cleaned and treated against corrosion before receiving a high quality powder
coating of paint. The finishing coat is standard colour Light Grey RAL 7035 outside and panel interior to natural
quality aluminium-zinc coated gloss finish.
Degree of Protection
The protection degrees in compliance with IEC 60529 are the following:
- IP4X on the external housing

- IP2X inside the compartments

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Switching devices
Circuit breakers
The switchboard shall be equipped with fully type tested withdrawable vacuum circuit breakers. They have to be
triple pole.
Test certificates, as evidence of successful completion of type tests shall be submitted on request.
All circuit breakers shall be routine tested in accordance with IEC/AS 62271-100.
The circuit breaker shall be equipped as follows:
- with stored energy spring mechanism for motor charging and emergency manual operation
- with mechanical push buttons for closing and opening
- with mechanical indicators for switch position and mechanism position
- with mechanical counter
- with shunt release OFF
- with shunt release ON
- with auxiliary signalling contacts
Contactors
The switchboard can be equipped with fully type tested withdrawable vacuum contactors that comply with IEC/AS
60470. They have to be triple pole and are protected by primary H.R.C. fuses that comply with the IEC 60282-1.
Test certificates, as evidence of successful completion of type tests shall be submitted on request.
All contactors shall be routine tested in accordance with IEC/AS 60470.
The contactor shall be equipped as follows:
- with solenoid type operating mechanism or magnetic operating mechanism with electrical holding or
- mechanical latching as required.
- with emergency manual operation for mechanical latching contactor
- with mechanical indicators for switch position and mechanism position
- with mechanical counter
- with auxiliary signalling contacts
Fused switch disconnectors
The switchboard can be equipped with fixed air insulated fused switch disconnectors suitable to operate lines and
transformers. The switch disconnectors comply with IEC/AS 60265-1 and the H.R.C.
protection fuses with the IEC 60282-1.
Other main features
Earthing switches
Each panel shall be equipped with a cable earthing switch to earth power cables.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Bus metering and bus section panel shall be equipped with a busbar earthing switch to earth main bus. The earth
switch shall have fault make capacity and can withstand the short circuit current. Earthing switch shall be
interlocked and manually operated from the front of the switchboard.
It shall be possible to observe earth switch blade via viewing window on panel front for operator safety. Earth
switch operations can be prevented by means of padlocks.
Protection and control
The functions of protection, metering and control of the switchboard will be implemented by protection relay.
The hardware including wiring for detection of measurements and switching conditions shall facilitate
universal use of the switchgear panels.
Setting of protection parameters must be possible both by laptop/notebook and manually at the panel. The
technology used must permit the connection to control system by a bus system.
In the case of interruption of the auxiliary power supply, the entire software, all saved data and the counters
must be preserved in a non-volatile manner without batteries.
Technology used must be capable of monitoring both itself and the release circuits.
Conventional instrument transformers
Conventional inductive resin insulated voltage and current transformers according to IEC/AS 60044-2 and IEC/AS
60044-1 shall be applied and designed according to metering and protection requirements. It is manufacturer’s
responsibility to match instrument transformer performance to connected protection or metering devices.
Voltage transformers shall be either fixed installation or mounted on withdrawable trucks as shown on single line
diagram.
Cable terminations
The cable compartment shall be comfortably accessible from the front thus making switchboard a wall standing
installation. Panels can be terminated with either single or three core cables.
Interlocking features
Mechanical interlocks must be provided to ensure proper operation, prevent dangerous situations and
maloperation that might jeopardise operator. In particular the following interlocks shall be provided:
- circuit breaker or fused contactor truck can only be moved from test/disconnected position (and back) when
earthing switch are OFF.
- circuit breaker or fused contactor truck is mechanically interlocked OFF when racking
- circuit breaker or fused contactor truck can only be switched ON when in the test or service position
- in service or test positions, circuit breaker and fused contactor truck can only be switched OFF manually when
no control voltage is applied and cannot be closed ON
- connecting and disconnecting of the control wiring is only possible in the test/disconnected position of the
withdrawable part
If the panel is equipped with an earthing switch, the following mechanical interlocks shall be provided:
- earthing switch can only be switched ON if the withdrawable part is in test/disconnected position or
- outside of the cubicle

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- if earthing switch is ON, the withdrawable part cannot be moved from the test/ disconnected position
- switch disconnector and cable earthing switch shall be mechanically interlocked with each other.
- Interlocks between panels:
- busbar earthing switch can only be switched ON when all withdrawable parts in the busbar section are
earthed
Other interlocks:
- the shutters can be independently padlocked

- access to the earthing switch operating-shaft can be padlocked
- access to the low voltage compartment, circuit breaker or fused contactor compartment, cable
- compartment and withdrawable truck operating shaft can be padlocked
- mechanical interlock to prevent racking in circuit breaker or fused contactor truck having a different rating
Abbreviations
- Abbreviations Definition
o R resistance
o RCT Winding resistance in a current transformer
o RN Neutral Point earthing resistance
o Rs Stabilization resistance in a differential circuit
o Ssc Short circuit power
o T Tripping time delay
o Td Tripping time
o THD Total harmonic distortion
o Tmin Circuit breaker breaking time(minimum time before separation of 1st pole)
o tr Protection overshoot time
o U Phase-to-phase voltage
o Un Rated phase-to-phase voltage
o Us Phase-to-phase voltage threshold
o V Phase-to-neutral voltage
o Vk Knee-point voltage
o Vn Rated phase to neutral voltage
o Vrsd Residual voltage
o Vs Phase-to-neutral voltage threshold
o VT Voltage transformer
o X reactance
o Xd Synchronous reactance
o X’d Transient reactance
o X”d Subtransient reactance
o Z0(subscript) Zero-sequence impedance

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o Z1(subscript) Positive sequence impedance

o Z2(subscript) Negative sequence impedance
o Za Equivalent impedance
o Zn Apparent rated impedance (transformers, capacitor, motorm generator)
o ZN Impedance between the neutral point and earth
o Zsc Short-circuit impedance
- Auxiliary devices
o C - Closing relay/contactor
o CL - Auxiliary relay, closed
o CS - Control switch
o D - "Down" position switch relay
o L- Lowering relay
o O - Opening relay/contactor
o OP - Auxiliary relay, open
o PB - Push button
o R - Raising relay
o U - "UP" position switch relay
o X - Auxiliary relay
o Y - Auxiliary relay
o Z - Auxiliary relay
o Actuating quantities
o A -Air/amperes/alternating
o C - Current
o D - Direct/discharge
o E - Electrolyte
o F - Frequency/flow/fault
o GP - Gas pressure
o H - Explosive/harmonics
o I0 - Zero sequence current
o I-, I2 - Negative sequence current
o I+, I1 - Positive sequence current
- Main device
o A - Alarm/auxiliary power
o AC - Alternating current
o AN - Anode
o B - Battery, blower, bus
o BK - Brake

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o BL - Block (valve)
o BP - Bypass
o BT - Bus tie
o C - Capacitor, condenser, compensator, carrier current, case, compressor
o CA - Cathode
o CH - Check (valve)
o D - Discharge (valve)
o DC - Direct current
o E - Exciter
o F - Feeder, field, filament, filter, fan
o G - Generator/ground
o H - Heater/housing
o L - Line, logic
o M - Motor, metering
o MOC - Mechanism operated contact
o N - Network, neutral
o P - Pump, phase comparison
o R - Reactor, rectifier, room
o S - Synchronizing, secondary, strainer, sump ,suction (valve)
o J - Differential
o L - Level/liquid
o P - Power/pressure
o PF - Power factor
o Q - Oil
o S - Speed/suction/smoke
o T - Temperature
o V - Voltage/volts/vacuum
o VAR -Reactive power
o VB - Vibration
o W - water/watts
- Other suffix letters
o A - Accelerating, automatic
o B - Blocking, backup
o BF - Breaker failure
o C - Close, cold
o D - Decelerating, detonate, down, disengaged
o E - Emergency, engaged

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o F - Failure, forward
o GP - General purpose
o H - Hot, high
o HIZ - High impedance fault
o HR - Hand reset
o HS - High speed
o L - Left, local, low, lower, leading
o M - Manual
o O - Open, over
o OFF - Off
o ON - On
o P - Polarizing
o R - Right, raise, reclosing, receiving, remote, reverse
o S - Sending, swing
o SHS - Semi-high speed
o T - Test, trip, trailing
o TDC - Time-delay closing contact
o TDDO - Time delayed relay coil drop-out
o TDO - Time-delay opening contact
o T -Transformer, thyratron
o TH - Transformer (high-voltage side)
o TL - Transformer (low-voltage side)
o TM - Telemeter
o TOC - Truck-operated contacts
o TT - Transformer (tertiary-voltage side)
o U – Unit
- Main device parts
o BK - Brake
o C - Coil, condenser, capacitor
o CC - Closing coil, closing contactor
o HC - Holding coil
o M - Operating motor
o MF - Fly-ball motor
o ML - Load-limit motor
o MS - Speed adjusting or synchronizing motor
o OC - Opening contactor
o S - Solenoid

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o SI - Seal-in
o T - Target
o TC Trip coil
o V – Valve
o Pressure switch - Lowest pressure
o Reclosure - Main contactor open
o Relay - De-energized position
o Relay (latched-in type)
o Rheostat - Maximum resistance position
o Speed switch - Lowest speed
o Tap changer - Center tap
o Temperature relay - Lowest temperature
o Turning gear - Disengaged position
o Vacuum switch - Lowest pressure that is highest vacuum
o Valve - Closed position
o Vibration detector - Minimum vibration
- Reference positions of devices
- Adjusting means - Low or down position
- Clutch - Disengaged position
- Contactor - De-energized position
- Contactor (latched-in type) - Main contacts open
- Density switch - Standard reference
- Disconnecting switch - Main contacts open
- Flow detector - Lowest flow
- Gate - Closed position
- Level detector - Lowest level
- Load-break switch - Main contacts open
- Power circuit breaker - Main contacts open
- Power electrodes - Maximum gap position
- TDPU - Time delayed relay coil pickup
- THD - Total harmonic distortion
- U - Up, under
Definitions
- Key words/Definitions
o Polarization voltage: In a direction phase protection function, the phase-to-phase voltage value in
quadrature with the current cos phi = 1. In a directional earthfault protection function, it is the residual
voltage.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o Power factor: Ratio between the active power and the apparent power. For sinusoidal signals, the power
factor is equal to cos phi.
o Power system: Sett of electrical-power production and consumption centres interconnected by various
types of conductors.
o Protection settings: Protection function settings determined by the protection-system study.
o Protection system: Set of devices and their settings used to protect power systems and their opponents
against the main fault.
o Protection-system study: Rational selection of all the protection devices for a power system, taking into
account its structure and neutral earthing system.
o Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF): Protection used for rapid decoupling of a source supplying a
power system in the event of a fault.
o Reactive power in Mvar: The part of the apparent power that supplies the magnetic circuits of electrical
machines or that is generated by capacitors or the stray capacitance of the links.
o Recloser: Automatic device that recloses a circuit breaker that had tripped on a fault.
o Residual current: Sum of the instantaneous line currents in a polyphase power system.
o Residual voltage: Sum of the instantaneous phase-to-earth voltages is a polyphase power system.
o Restricted earth fault protection: Protection of a three-phase winding with with earthed neutral against
phase-to-earth faults.
o Short-circuit: Accidental contact between conductors or between a conductor and earth.
o Short-circuit power: Theoretical power in MVA that a power system can supply. It is calculated on the
basis of the rated power system voltage and the short-circuit current.
o Solidly earthed neutral: The power-system neutral is earthed via a connection with zero impedance.
o Source transfer: Operation whereby a power system is disconnected from one source and connected to
another. The may or may not be parallel connected.
o Subtransient: Period lasting between 0 and 100 ms following the appearance of a fault.
o Symmetrical components: Three independent single-phase systems(positive sequence, negative
sequence and zero sequence) super imposed to describe any real system.
o System reconfiguration: Operation, following an incident, involving switching of circuit breakers
o and switches to resupply power system loads.
o Time delay: Intentional delay in the operation of a protection device.
o Time-based discrimination: Discrimination system in which protection devices detecting a fault are
organized to operate one after the other. The protection device closest to the source has the longest
time delay.
o Total harmonic distortion: Ratio of the rms value of the harmonics to that of the fundamental.
o Transient: Period lasting between 100 ms and 1 second following the appearance of a fault.
o Tripping threshold: Value of the monitored parameter that trips operation of the protection device.
o Voltage sensor: Devise used to obtain a value related to the voltage.
o Zero-sequence generator: Three-phase transformer used to create a neutral point in a power system for
neutral earthing.
- Protection Functions

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o This section of the report indicates the recommended protection for the project taking into consideration
the ANSI codes in respect of the protection functions used. The main protection functions are listed with
a brief definition in the ANSI table below. They are listed in numerical order by ANSI C37.2 code.
- ANSI code/ Name of function/ Definition
o 12 / Overspeed / Detection of rotating machine overspeed
o 14 / Underspeed / Detection of rotating machine underspeed
o 21 / Distance protection / Impedance measurement detection
o 21B / Underimpedance / Back-up phase-to-phase short-circuit protection for generators
o 24 / Flux control / Overfluxing check
o 25 / Synchro-check / Check before paralleling two parts of the power system
o 26 / Thermostat / Protection against overloads
o 27 / Undervoltage / Protection for control of voltage sags
o 27D / Positive sequence undervoltage / Protection of motors against operation with insufficient voltage
o 27R / Remanent undervoltage / Check on the disappearance of voltage sustained by rotating machines
after the power supply is disconnected
o 27TN / Third harmonic undervoltage / Detection of stator winding insulation earth faults (impedant
neutral)
o 32P / Directional active overpower / Protection against active overpower transfer
o 32Q / Directional reactive overpower / Protection against reactive overpower transfer
o 37 / Phase undercurrent / 3-phase protection against undercurrent
o 37P / Directional active overpower / Protection against active underpower transfer
o 37Q / Directional reactive overpower / Protection against reactive underpower transfer
o 38 / Bearing temperature monitoring / Protection against overheating of rotating machine bearings
o 40 / Field loss / Protection of synchronous machines against faults or field loss
o 46 / Negative sequence, unbalance / Protection against unbalanced phase current
o 47 / Negative sequence overvoltage / Negative sequence voltage protection and detection of reverse
rotation of rotating machines
o 48-51LR / Excessive starting time and locked rotor/ Protection of motors against starting with overloads
of reduced voltage, and for loads that can block
o 49 / Thermal overload / Protection against overloads
o 49T / RTDs / Protection against overheating of machine windings
o 50 / Instantaneous phase overcurrent / 3-phase protection against short-circuits
o 50BF / Breaker failure / Checking and protection if the circuit breaker fails to trip after a tripping order
o 50Nor50G Instantaneous earth fault / Protection against earth faults:
o 50N: residual current calculated or measured by 3 CT’s
o 50G: residual current measured directly by a single sensor (CT or core balance CT)
o 50V / Instantaneous voltagerestrained phase overcurrent / 3-phase protection against short-circuits with
the voltage-dependent threshold
o 50/27 / Inadvertent generator energization / Detection of inadvertent generator energization

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
o 51 / Delayed phase overcurrent / 3-phase protection against short-circuits with voltage –dependent
threshold
o 51Nor51G / Delayed earth fault / Protection against earth faults:
o 51N: residual current calculated or measured by 3 CT’s
o 51G: residual current measured directly by a single sensor (CT or core balance CT)
o 51V /Delayed voltage-restrained phase overcurrent / 3-phase protection against short-circuits with the
o voltage-dependent threshold
o 59 / Overvoltage / Protection against excessive voltage or sufficient voltage detection
o 59N / Neutral voltage displacement / Insulation fault protection
o 63 / Pressure / Detection of transformer internal faults (gas, pressure)
o 64REF /Restricted earth fault differential / Earth fault protection for star-connected 3-phase windings
with earthed neutral
o 64G /100% generator stator earth fault / Detection of stator winding insulation earth faults (impedant
neutral power systems)
o 66 / Successive starts / Protection function that monitors the number of motor starts
o 67 / Directional phase overcurrent / 3-phase short-circuit protection according to current flow direction
o 67N/67NC / Directional earth fault / Earth fault protection according to current flow direction (NC:
Neutral compensated)
o 78 / Vector shift / Vector shift disconnection protection
o 78PS / Pole slip / Detection of loss of synchronization of synchronous machines
o 79 / Recloser / Automated device that recloses the circuit breaker after transient line fault tripping
o 81H / Overfrequency / Protection against abnormally high frequency
o 81L / Underfrequency / Protection against abnormally low frequency
o 81R / Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF) / Protection for fast disconnection of two parts of the power
system
o 87B / Busbar differential / 3-phase protection against busbar internal faults
o 87G / Generator differential / 3-phase protection against internal faults in AC generators
o 87L / Line differential / 3-phase protection against line internal faults
o 87M / Motor differential / 3-phase protection against internal faults in motors
o 87T / Transformer differential / 3-phase protection against internal faults in transformers.

11kV and low voltage system fault protection shall be provided by the ESC as detailed on the schematics and
V10, V11 and V12.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
within each building. The ESC shall obtain the electrical characteristics of the incoming 11kV supplies and shall
design the electrical infrastructure accordingly to ensure the fault levels, loads and switching arrangements are
fully coordinated. The ESC shall design the electrical infrastructure based on the final equipment selections.
The Installer shall be responsible for providing the remainder of the electrical installation within the buildings.

530 PERMIT TO WORK

540 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.
550 INSTALLATION

610 BACK BOARDS


STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
to boards.
620 CABLE TAILS

Provide LSF cable tails within class 4 surface cable trunking systems for connection from the Electrical
Supply Contractors metering equipment to the incoming fuse switch.



ordinated.
910 PROCEDURE
Provide the results on A1 or A0 layout drawings and include in the O&M instruction manuals. Provide
electronic copies of the drawings in AutoCAD 2008 format on a CDROM. All tests shall be carried out according to
relevant IEC/AS standards.
Type tests
The metalclad switchgear is to be type tested at a recognised and well-reputed test laboratory. Type test
certificates shall be available for verification as evidence of successful completion of type tests.
Routine tests
Tests to be carried out according to IEC/AS Standard requirements. The following tests apply:
- Wiring and function test

- Equipment verification test
- Low voltage circuit insulation test
- High voltage power frequency test
Factory inspection tests
Notification for factory tests along with list of proposed tests shall be submitted as required.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Site tests
The site tests shall include the following:
- Power frequency withstand test (at 80% of the prescribed power frequency withstand voltage)
- Insulation resistance
- Functional test of the fully installed and wired equipment delivered
Quality plan
Internal quality system shall be certified as per ISO 9001. A dedicated quality control plan will be provided on
request.
920 DOCUMENTATION
documentation and system instruction drawings and manuals) and issue three hard copies and three
electronic copies of all documentation. Provide electronic text documents in either Microsoft Word or Excel
format, and all drawings in AutoCAD 2008 format.
Data and documentation to be submitted with the offer:
- information about the type of the switchboards and the equipment offered
- single line diagram with front view of the switchboards complete with overall dimensions (preliminary)
- foundation drawing complete with fixing system and floor openings (preliminary)
- weight of the switchboards (static and dynamic)
- spare parts suggested for start up and 2 years of operation (on request)
- type test certificates (on request)
Data and documentation to be submitted in case of order:
- single line diagram with front view of the switchboards complete with overall dimensions (as built)
- circuit diagrams per typical units
- panel sections per typical units
- foundation drawings complete with fixing system and floor openings (as built)
- installation and maintenance manual of the switchboards and main equipment
- test certificates of the switchboard.
On request training can be offered to be held in the workshops of the manufacturer. Conditions will be
agreed depending on contract but as a general rule the course will include:
- copies of the training manual

- lunch during working days will be served at the canteen of the supplier
- training material

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

Provide Drawings, specifications, schedules, method statements, etc. as detailed in Section A of this specification.
standards.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
V12 LV SUPPLY / PUBLIC UTILITY SUPPLY

provide low voltage electricity supplies from the site wide infrastructure main network to the buildings low voltage
main distribution switchgear panels or incoming fuse switch/consumer units.

section prevails.
European Standard.

The electrical supply to meet the building electricity maximum demand load requirements.
throughout.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

System
The Adam air base is powered by an existing primary station, that makes a transformation of voltage 33/11 kV.
The main electrical distribution of the base is at a voltage of 11 kV, the cables are underground type.
The main electrical distribution is divided in rings.
Each ring makes available power to an area of the base.
The entity of electrical loads presupposed the presence of a number of medium voltage rings and a number of
low voltage substations (11 kV-415 V).
The characteristics of the low voltage substation are the following:
- Distribution system type: TN-S

- Rated voltage: 11 kV-415 V
- Maximum short circuit current 10,86 kA
- Maximum allowed voltage drop 2,5 %
Transformer
The transformer shall be of the naturally cooled outdoor oil immersed core type and shall comply with the
requirements of IEC 76/BSS 171 except that the temperature rise shall not exceed 50 Deg.C of winding by
resistance and 40 Deg.C of oil by thermometer.
The normal rating specified shall be the continuous rating under the worst temperature conditions encountered in
Oman stipulated m Clause 01 of OES-11. Tenders shall state in the schedule the equivalent IEC/BSS continuous
rating for the transformers offered along with the Oman continuous rating.
The normal voltage ratio of the transformers on normal tapping and on no load shall be 11000/433V.
The transformers shall be capable of carrying the1r full normal current continuously under the worst temperature
conditions encountered in Oman and at any tapping, without the temperature rise of oil in the hottest region
exceeding 40 Deg.C as measured by thermometer and of the winding not exceeding by 50 Deg.C as measured by
resistance over an ambient temperature of 50 Deg.C.
The transformers shall be wound to IEC/BSS vector reference Dyn11 and L.T. neutral shall be brought out.
The 11 KV winding of the transformers shall have tapping with a range of +5% to -5% m steps of 2 1/2%
operated by an off circuit tapping Switch, with clearly, marked position indicator. Locking facilities shall be
provided such that the lock can be inserted only when the switch is on a definite tap. Lock with two keys shall be
supplied for each transformer. The tap Switch shall preferably be mounted on the tank side.
The impedance voltage of the transformers shall be 4.75%.
The transformers shall be capable for sustaining a three phase symmetrical short circuit on the LV side with
power maintained on the HV side without damage or distress for 3 seconds.
Transformers shall be designed and constructed to withstand without damage the thermal and dynamic effects of
external short circuits under the conditions stipulated in Clause 0.01 of OES-11.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Thermal ability to withstand short circuits is to be demonstrated by calculations as per BS 171 - Part 5 1978/IEC
76- Part 5 1976.
The dynamic ability to withstand short circuit is to be demonstrated by test or reference to tests on transformer
of similar design and rating conducted by recognised independent test laboratory.
The core shall be constructed of the best quality low loss, cold rolled grain oriented electrical steel laminations.
The cords plates shall be insulated from one another to reduce the core loss to a minimum and the core shall be
held together by bolts and clamping plates all of which shall be adequately insulated. The completed core shall be
provided with lifting eyes to facilitate its removal from the transformer tank and shall be adequately braced and
supported to prevent movement during transit or service.
All windings shall be fully insulated to IEC 76-3 for uniform insulated and for a system highest voltage of 12.5KV.
The insulation shall be Class "A" to BSS 2757. End connection of winding to be properly insulated.
The tank shall be designed to house the transformer core and windings and arranged to prevent any movement
of the core structure inside the tank. Provision should be made to enable the core to be lifted out and ease for
maintenance and inspection.
The tank shall be mild steel welded construction of adequate dimensions with minimum plate thickness as
follows:
- Bottom 5 mm
- Sides 4 mm
- Tope 5 mm
- Radiator 1.2 mm
- Corrugated type thickness 1.2 mm
All gaskets used for making oil tight shall be with cork or similar material as base, bonded by oil resisting
synthetic material or rubber, gaskets of plain synthetic materials not permissible.
The rate of the transformers are:
- 500 Kva
- 1000 KVA

The ESC shall provide a complete installation including cabling, connections and all accessories up to the main
switchgear panel/consumer unit terminals.
The ESC shall provide all cables to be installed underground in cable trenches/ducts arranged as shown on the
drawings.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

- source impedance

Low voltage system fault protection up to the building’s main switchgear circuit breaker/fuse switch or consumer
unit to be provided by the ESC.
Where a main switchgear panel is to be installed, provide the panel complete with gland plates and terminations
to facilitate the connection of the incoming low voltage cables by the ESC. Provide the main switchgear panel
with a suitable compartment or facility for the installation of the ESC’s separate or integral current transformers
and metering equipment as appropriate.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
within each building. The ESC shall obtain the electrical characteristics of the power supply from the national grid
and about the characteristics of the existing primary station. The ESC shall design the electrical infrastructure
based on the final equipment selections. The Installer shall be responsible for providing the remainder of the
electrical installation within the buildings.

530 PERMIT TO WORK


STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
540 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.
550 INSTALLATION

610 BACK BOARDS

to boards.
620 CABLE TAILS





STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
below. Liaise with manufacturers of the interfaced systems to ensure all tests and demonstration are fully co-
ordinated.
910 PROCEDURE
Provide the results on A1 or A0 layout drawings and include in the O&M instruction manuals. Provide electronic
copies of the drawings in AutoCAD 2008 format on a CDROM.
920 DOCUMENTATION
documentation and system instruction drawings and manuals) and issue three hard copies and three electronic

Provide Drawings, specifications, schedules, method statements, etc. as detailed in Section A of this Specification.
standards listed in clause V12.200 and the relevant ‘A’ sections of this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
V20 LV DISTRIBUTION

To distribute low voltage (LV) electrical power, safely and reliably, around the site starting with the cables
connecting the main LV switchboard(s) to the mains intake, and finishing at the output terminals of all site
distribution boards, power distribution units, mechanical systems supply points and/or the main switch input
terminals of all items of equipment that have their own integral isolator.
To ensure that in the event of the mains power failure, power supplied by the uninterruptible power supply,
described in section V32 of this specification, are distributed only via those parts of the system designated on the
LV Schematic drawing.
To ensure that in the event of the mains power failure, power supplied by the central battery system described in
section V40 of this specification is distributed only via those parts of the system connected to the emergency
lighting system.
To ensure that in the event of a site wide mains power interruption, power is supplied by the essential supply to
the building is distributed only to those areas and systems in the building designated as ‘essential’ as set out on
the LV Schematic drawing.
To ensure that none of the electricity supplies to other buildings on the site are interrupted at any time during the
Works except where planned well in advance and agreed with the Contract Administrator in writing.
The engineer’s design is intended to achieve full discrimination throughout the installation on the basis of generic
devices only. Ensure that full discrimination is achieved using devices supplied by your chosen manufacturer and
demonstrate this prior to installation.

section prevails.
European Standard.
- The Electricity Act (As amended by the Utilities Act)

- The Meters (Certification) Regulations
- The Construction (Design And Management) Regulations

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- The Health & Safety at Work etc. Act

- The Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity (Amendment) Regulations
- The Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences Regulations (Riddor)
- BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations. IET wiring regulations
- BS EN 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and Controlgear assemblies
- ENA G5/4-1 Engineering recommendation – Planning levels for harmonic voltage distribution and
- non linear equipment for transmission systems and distribution networks in the UK
- EFDC Dirty: Explosion Proof
- Oxygen Workshop: DSEAR Classification - Potentially Hazardous Zone 2
- Oxygen Office : DSEAR Classification - Potentially Hazardous Zone 2
- Battery Bay: DSEAR Classification - Potentially Hazardous Zone 2
- CFC Workshop: DSEAR Classification - Potentially Hazardous Zone 2
- Oxygen Office: DSEAR Classification - Potentially Hazardous Zone 2
- Hydraulic Centre: DSEAR Classification - Potentially Hazardous Zone 2
Supply Contractor (ESC) are as follows:
- LV supply voltage 415V/240V

- Frequency 50Hz

The LV distribution system for this installation extends from the local site infrastructure supply to the outgoing
terminals of all final distribution boards and local isolating switches in the Electrical Plant Room.
As the meters are within this building the incoming supply to it are covered within section V12 of this
specification.
The main switch for this building is located within the Electrical Plant Room See clause V20.620 for further
details.
The main switchboard has power factor correction equipment provided as described in clause V20.630.
The main switchboard has overcurrent devices and outgoing ways as described in clause V20.620.
The submain cables from the main switchboard to the sub distribution boards and final isolation switches are as
described later in V20.
There is battery system to serve the emergency lighting system as described in section V40 of this specification.
Provide dual, “Power On” indicator lights clearly showing when each phase of the supply is energised.
Final circuits shall be capable of complete isolation of all conductors from the supply.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Those areas identified in clause 200, shall be compliant with the ATEX and DSEAR Regulations. All equipment
selected, supplied, installed, tested and commissioned shall be compliant with these regulations and intrinsically
safe.

Arrange for the main switchboard manufacturer to supply and install ammeters, voltmeter, power factor
indicators and energy meters together with the matching current transformers as required, and as detailed in the
switchboard schedules, and section Y71 of this specification.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
The Electrical Supply Contractor (ESC) will be responsible for the provision of the LV supply terminating at the
incoming circuit breaker/fuse switches on the main switchgear panel or fused cut out and the provision of the TN-
S earthing terminal.
The Installer shall be responsible for providing the remainder of the electrical installation.
The installer is to confirm and specify the incoming device and switching arrangements. Main devices and
isolators shown are indicative only and will require appropriate revision for sizing and tripping characteristics of
each board device to ensure compliance with BS7676:2011 and attain sufficient discrimination and disconnection
times to essential and non-essential supplies.
520 PERMIT TO WORK

Prior to the commencement of work and where appropriate, arrange for the issue of a permit to work.
610 INCOMING SUPPLY

Coordinate and arrange with the Electrical Supply Contractor (ESC) for the supply and install of the incoming LV
supply cables from the local transformer as indicated on the site wide infrastructure drawings to the fused cut
out.
Type of Supply: TN-S
Type of Cable: Armoured Single core
Insulation: XLPE
Number of Cores: as infrastructure drawings
Conductors: Stranded copper – size as design.
611 INCOMING CABLE

Supply and install an incoming cable from the fused cut out to the main switch as shown on the drawings, and in
accordance with section Y61 of this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
612 CONTAINMENT AND SUPPORT FOR INCOMING CABLE

Install the incoming cable, ducted externally to the building, entering the building in a built in duct with slow
radius bend to floor level within the main switch room/electrical plant room. Support the cable from entry into the
building to the main switch using cable tray in accordance with section Y63 of this specification and as shown on
the drawings, allowing for the following:
Internal: heavy duty cable ladder (refer to drawings)
heavy duty return flange perforated cable tray (refer to drawings)
Material: Steel
Finish: Galvanised
Size with spare capacity
Install the incoming cable external to the building directly buried in the ground as shown on the drawings.
613 TERMINATION TO MAIN SWITCH

Terminate the incoming cable to the main switch. Connect the earthing conductor as required by BS 7671 and as
shown on the drawings and schematics.
620 MAIN SWITCHBOARD AND METERS
621 MAIN SWITCHBOARD TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION

Provide a main switchboard in each of the as follows:
Type: Panelboard / flameproof – Front access floor mounted panelboard
IP Rating: IP40 Internally and IP65 Externally
Form: Form 2
Material: Steel
Finish: Powder Coated / Galvanised
Protection: BS EN 60529, IP 31 Minimum
ASTA Type Tested as a composite assembly
Inter Panel gas tight barriers
All uninsulated cables and electrical components at least 150mm above finished floor level.
Fit all incoming and outgoing cables from above with watertight glands. Install all minor control cables in glanded
and watertight conduit.
Provide all switchgear and switch fuses with means of locking them in the open/closed position as
appropriate.
Label all switchgear and switch fuses with permanent identification labels using the descriptions on the drawings
and contained in section Y82 of this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
622 MAIN SWITCH

Supply and install a main switch as follows:
- mounted within the main switchboard

- type of switch: ACB
- switch rating as design drawings and available from manufacturers
- overcurrent protection as design drawings and available from manufacturers
- earth fault protection as design drawings and available from manufacturers
- enclosure type as design drawings and available from manufacturers
- material: Steel
- finish: Galvanised
623 OUTGOING CIRCUITS

Provide outgoing circuits as follows:
Provide busbars within the main switchboard within as a split supply, “Essential” and “Non-Essential”.
Install within the outgoing ways of the main switchboard MCCB’s of the ratings shown on the drawings. For
details of the distribution board refer to the schedules within the appendices of this specification.
624 METERS
Provide within the main switchboard, energy check meters as specified in the drawings/schedules and as listed in
the current edition of Schedule 4 of the Meters (Certification) Regulations.
Mount on the incoming switchgear panel a true RMS ammeter, a true RMS voltmeter and a power factor meter.
Ensure that the ammeter is switchable between phase and neutral currents, and that the voltmeter is switchable
to measure the voltages between phases and between each phase and neutral.
Mount on the incoming switchgear panel an instrument to measure, display and record the true RMS voltage,
current and the power factor of each phase of the incoming supplies. Include the harmonic distortion of the
incoming supply currents, to establish compliance with ENA Engineering Recommendation G5/4-1, and the need
to install measures to reduce mains harmonic distortion.
Arrange for the switchboard manufacturer to supply and install energy meters on all outgoing circuits on the main
switchboard to satisfy Building Regulations requirements. Each meter shall include voltage, current, kWHrs, kVAr,
frequency and power factor.
630 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

Ensure that the equipment complies with Y71 of this specification and the following:
Provide as part of the main switchboard a central power factor correction system controlled by an integral PFC
sequencing relay.
Allow provision for 3 no. harmonic filters to be fitted post installation following monitoring of the system and
taking readings whilst the system is running at full capacity.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
640 SUB MAINS DISTRIBUTION
641 SUB MAINS CABLE

Supply, install and connect sub mains cables from the main switchboard to the distribution boards, isolating
switches and other plant as detailed on the drawings and in the schedules.
Type of cable: armoured single core or multi-core
Insulation: XLPE/LSF
Armouring: non-magnetic / steel wired armour or aluminium depending on final cable selection (multi core or
single core)
No. of Cores: as design drawings and/or schedules
Conductors stranded copper
Size: as design drawings and/or schedules
Special items: concentric cables, cables in parallel
642 CONTAINMENT AND SUPPORT FOR SUB MAINS CABLE

Supply and install sub mains cable containment and support as detailed on the drawings and in the
schedules.
Type: heavy duty cable ladder, heavy duty return flange perforated cable tray
Material: steel
Finish: galvanised
Size: as design with spare capacity
Supply and install final circuit cable containment and support as detailed on the drawings in the schedules.
Type: trunking
Material: steel (IP4X)
Finish: galvanised
Size: as design with spare capacity
650 FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

Supply and install the following components in accordance with section Y71 of this specification and the
following:
Distribution boards - Supply and install distribution boards as detailed in the distribution board schedule.
Isolating switches - Supply and install isolating switches for large plant as specified in the distribution board
schedules or shown on the drawings.
Motor control panels – Connect, in accordance with section Y61 of this specification, the sub mains cable direct
into the main switch of every such panel where a separate isolating switch is not specified.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Manufacturers - Unless agreed otherwise by the engineer in writing ensure that all switchgear is made and
supplied by one manufacturer.
Refer to distribution board schedules within the appendices of this specification.



1000 SCHEDULE OF INSTALLER’S SUBMITTALS

In accordance with section A11 of this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
V21 GENERAL LIGHTING

To provide a complete internal artificial lighting that will meet the design criteria and reflect the architectural and
aesthetic requirements of each area and location respectively.
To ensure the internal lighting system solution and installation provides a safe, comfortable, balanced and
interesting visual environment. To consider the vertical illuminance of surfaces within an environment, in
conjunction with, the recommended horizontal working plane illuminance.
To achieve good quality colour appearance and colour rendering.
To achieve the recommended levels of illuminance and luminance by selection of particular luminaire, lamp
source and optical control, together with the selection and recommendation of the associated environmental
reflectance properties.
To ensure that all luminaires and ancillary controls are suitably selected to be compatible with the environment in
which they are installed.
To ensure that, those parts of the lighting system that are within hazardous areas are incapable of causing an
explosion.

section prevails.
European Standard.

- The Building Regulations - Part L – The conservation of fuel and power
- Requirements of the Building Control and Fire Officers
- 2000/55/EC Directive of the European Council - Energy efficiency requirements for ballasts for fluorescent
lighting
- BS 1853-2 Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting service. Part 2: Specification for lamps used in the
United Kingdom not included in BS EN 60081, BS EN 60901, BS EN 61195 and BS EN 61199
- BS 5266-1 Emergency lighting Part 1: Code of practice for the emergency lighting of premises
- BS 5588 Fire precautions in the design, construction and use of buildings

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
conditions
- BS 6972 Specification for general requirements for luminaire supporting couplers for domestic, light industrial
and commercial use
- BS 7346-6 Components for smoke and heat control systems Part 6: Specifications for cable systems
- BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations. IET Wiring Regulations
- BS 9999 Code of practice for fire safety in the design, management and use of buildings
- BS EN 12464-1 Light and lighting. Lighting of work places Part 1: Indoor work places
- BS EN 12464-2 Lighting of work places Part 2: Outdoor work places
- BS EN 55015 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of electrical
- lighting and similar equipment
- BS EN 60598 Luminaires
- BS EN 60901 Specification for single-capped fluorescent lamps. Performance specifications
- BS EN 60929 A.C. supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps. Performance requirements
- BS EN 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
- BS EN 61000-3-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 3-2: Limits. Limits for harmonic current emissions
(equipment input current ≤ 16 A per phase)
- BS EN 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4-5: Testing and measurement techniques. Surge
immunity test
- BS EN 61347 Lamp control gear
- BS EN 61558-2-1 Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products Part 2-1:
Particular requirements and tests for separating transformers and power supplies incorporating separating
transformers for general applications
- BS EN ISO 9241 Ergonomics of human-system interaction
- CIBSE Code for Lighting
- CIBSE Commissioning code L Lighting

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Zone 21: A place in which an explosive atmosphere in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air is likely to
occur in normal operation occasionally.
- Zone 22: A place in which an explosive atmosphere in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air is not
likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for a short period only.
210 DESIGN CRITERIA

The electrical power supply and the light sources are chosen to provide the following levels of illumination:
- Offices / open space: 300 lux

- Corridors - Stairs: 200 lux
- Services: 200 lux
- Hall: 200 lux
- Archives - stores: 500 lux
- Technical rooms: 200 lux
The following coefficients of reflection of the rooms is taken as a basis of calculation:
- ceilings: 0.7
- walls: 0.5
- floor: 0.1
Lamp replacement interval 3 years (planned maintenance).
Lamp cleaning interval 1 year.

Luminaires shall be selected to complement the design of the buildings where possible. Refer to the
luminaire schedule for all luminaires.
Low energy lighting sources will be utilised, to incorporate the following criteria:
- All fluorescent luminaries will be high frequency

- Fluorescent lamps will be required to be tri-phosphor types
Lighting shall be controlled by local wall switches and photocells in all areas as shown on the layouts.
The power supply to the lighting systems shall be fed from the lighting distribution board within the Electrical
Plant room.
310 EXTERNAL CIRCULATION AREAS

The lighting in the external circulation areas generally comprises surface mounted bulkhead with die-cast
aluminium body and opal polycarbonate diffuser, IP65, round or oval shape with grille or visor for compact
fluorescent or discharge lamps.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
External luminaires shall be wall mounted adjacent to the CAT ladders, above entrance doors and as indicated on
the drawings, controlled off of a photocell, the position of which shall be determined by the installer.
410 GENERAL
Supply and install the lighting system controls and control equipment of the type and manufacture as indicated
on the Schedules, below and as particularly detailed by the Manufacturers.
Install lighting controls and equipment within the locations and at the positions indicated on the drawings.
Ensure the lighting control system(s) provide(s) selective and variable switching via manual or automatic means
to enable illuminance and luminance levels to be adjusted, to facilitate an energy efficient mode of control and
operation and to enable luminaires to be systematically switched off during periods of nonoccupancy of the
space(s) or during periods outside of the normal core operating hours of the building.
All lighting in areas where dimmable luminaires are indicated on the Tender drawings shall have dimmable
switching.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
510 PERMIT TO WORK

Prior to commencement of work, and where appropriate, arrange for the issue of a permit to work.
520 ELECTRICAL INSTALLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

The electrical installer’s responsibilities include those described in the appropriate ‘A’ sections of this specification,
and also include, but are not limited to, those described in this clause.
Select appropriate fittings to achieve the design criteria and supply, install, test and commission a lighting system
comprising final circuits distribution, control devices and equipment, luminaires and optical accessories, complete
with lamps, throughout all areas and locations of the building(s).
Supply and install luminaires of the type indicated on the drawings and as particularly detailed under the
Schedule of Luminaires contained within the appendices of this specification.
Install all luminaires complete with fixings, suspensions, glassware, louvres, diffusers, reflectors, optical
controllers, control gear and lamps, together with all required ancillary components, accessories and attachments,
as described within this specification and as detailed on the drawings, and connect them to the final lighting
circuits as indicated in the distribution board schedules.
Install luminaires throughout the building(s) within locations and at the positions indicated on the drawings,
including: recessed and semi-recessed type luminaires within suspended ceiling areas, (comprising either a
removable lay-in tile or a plasterboard sheet with plaster skim finish); ceiling mounted surface luminaires, in plant
rooms and stores, etc.; and wall mounted luminaires of both the decorative and functional type.
Further to A31 of this specification, the layout of components and luminaires on the drawings are
diagrammatic only, therefore make due allowance in the Tender for final positions of all items of equipment to be
within one metre, either side of the position indicated.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that the main contractor provides a plywood or similar strengthening back pattress for all surface and
recessed compact luminaires contained within an individual ceiling tile where the ceiling system is not capable of
supporting the luminaire weight.
In plant rooms ensure the luminaires are positioned to coordinate with the layout and installation of all
mechanical plant and associated equipment.
Wire and connect all luminaires to final radial circuits emanating from local distribution boards in accordance with
the lighting circuit references detailed within the schedules and indicated on the drawings.
530 WARNING SIGNAGE

Where necessary for high level overhead work, ensure that safety warning signs are erected and that adequate
safety space is left below the point of work, to alert and offer protection to all personnel including site operatives.
610 GENERAL
Install all components in accordance with the relevant clauses of the appropriate ‘Y’ Sections of this specification.
620 CONDUIT SYSTEM

Install a conduit cable containment system for all un-armoured insulated lighting final circuit cables and where
applicable for the fixing of luminaires.
Provide throughout the various areas of the building a surface or concealed, class 4 galvanised steel or white
plastic high impact PVC conduit containment system fixed to walls, to soffits of structural slabs, within service
ducts and shafts, within ceiling voids, and in prepared chases as applicable.
Install sections of conduit from the lighting distribution cable trunking and extend to luminaire outlet positions or
wall accessory outlet positions and terminate at a conduit outlet box of the appropriate type.
630 CABLE TRUNKING SYSTEM

Install a trunking cable containment system for all un-armoured insulated, and all insulated and sheathed, lighting
final circuit cables.
Supply and install, as indicated on the drawings, a surface, or concealed cable trunking containment system for
the lighting final circuit cables and where applicable for the fixing of luminaires.
Install a cable trunking containment system to avoid multiple runs of conduit, comprising either a dedicated or
shared (i.e. lighting and small power supplies) single compartment system, or a multi-compartment trunking for
the distribution of various cable supplies and cable systems.
Within the stores provide a surface mounted cable trunking containment system, fixed direct to the underside of
the structural roof beams, for the installation of the lighting final circuit cables, together with the fixing and
support for the low-bay luminaires.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
640 CABLE TRAY/BASKET SYSTEM

Install cable tray/basket systems for the fixing of all single and multi-core insulated and sheathed, armoured and
screened soft skin lighting final circuit cables.
Install the cable tray/basket containment system, concealed within suspended ceiling voids, along the routes
indicated on the design drawings.
650 WIRING SYSTEM

Wire and connect all luminaires to final radial circuits emanating from local distribution boards in accordance with
the lighting circuits references detailed in the schedules and indicated on the drawings.
Wire and connect the lighting installation throughout using single core 6491B (XLPE-LSF) insulated cables with
stranded copper conductors to BS 7211 rated at 450/ 750V, with minimum conductor size of 1.5mm2.
Run cables enclosed within a ceiling void mounted galvanised cable trunking with conduit extending to luminaire,
controls and switch locations.
Ensure containment and accessories are installed at a suitable height, within the ceiling void, to facilitate future
access for maintenance, from the office floor.
Within plant rooms and certain semi-exposed and external locations, install the lighting system using surface
mounted galvanised conduit, IP rated luminaires and accessories. Install concealed conduit to the perimeter
lighting of the main entrance canopy and terrace areas.
Ensure the wiring installation, to all luminaires, within the fire fighting access corridor, staircase and lift lobbies, is
carried out using fire resistant cables in accordance with BS 9999 and BS 6387, category CWZ.
700 EQUIPMENT
710 GENERAL
Install the complete lighting system in accordance with the relevant clauses of the appropriate ‘Y’ sections of this
specification.
720 LUMINAIRES
Where luminaires are supported directly from the ceiling T bar grid, ensure adequate additional fixings are
provided by the ceiling installer to support the entire weight of every such luminaire and its attachments, without
causing any distortion to the ceiling line or level. In addition, provide a direct single fixing from the body of every
such luminaire to the structure, using galvanised steel chain and hook backplates.
Ensure that ceiling and wall mounted luminaires, where installed to plasterboard surfaces, are fixed via conduit
boxes installed flush with the ceiling/wall face, with the conduit boxes supported directly from the
conduit/trunking system or structure.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Liase as necessary with the luminaire and ceiling tile manufacturer, together with the ceiling installer, to ensure
compatibility between the luminaire and the ceiling systems for proper installation.
Ensure all recessed luminaires maintain the ceiling fire barrier rating and integrity of the respective fire
compartment or area. Provide proprietary fire rated canopies for recessed luminaires where necessary.
Ensure luminaires specified with thermoplastic diffusers comply with Category Tp (a), as defined in the Building
Regulations. Provide copies of manufacturer’s test certificates to verify compliance.
Ensure that all suspended luminaires utilise propriety ‘cable drop’ accessories for final connection.
Ensure that every luminaire is accurately aligned, to fit flush and square against adjacent/ abutting structures or
surfaces to provide a neat straight and true appearance in their relation to the building structure.
Set out the lighting system installation in accordance with the co-ordinated reflected ceiling plan drawings and
the Architect’s detailed room loaded layout drawings. Check the positions of all windows, door swings, roof lights
and fitments etc., before commencing the installation of the lighting system.
Ensure luminaires fully comply with the following:
- manufactured to meet the requirements of BS EN 60598

- manufactured to provide Class 1 protection against electric shock
- protected to an ingress class, as referred to in BS EN 60598, of IP 20 minimum
- suitable for operation at 240V, 50Hz, SP&N
- incorporates integral high power factor correction (HPC) to 0.95
- manufactured to meet the requirements of the appropriate electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Directive of
the European Council and appropriately CE marked.
Supply all luminaires complete with a fused terminal block to BS 1363.
Ensure all low voltage tungsten halogen luminaires are each provided with an individual 240/12V transformer.
Secure every such transformer to the building structure; do not allow it to rest on false ceilings. Provide all
luminaires with high frequency (HF) control gear unless stated otherwise on the drawings or in this specification.
721 BALLASTS
Provide all fluorescent luminaires with warm start, high frequency electronic ballasts.
Ensure luminaire ballasts comply with BS EN 60929, BS EN 61347, 2000/55/EC and the following criteria:
- - efficiency > 90%

- - harmonics - compliance with BS EN 61000-3-2
- - mean time to failure - 50,000 hrs at max ambient temperature, operating 24 hours per day
- - lamp failure - ballast to sense end of lamp life and extinguish tube; ballast to automatically reset after supply
has been isolated and restart upon replacement of lamp
- - over voltage - provide protection to BS EN 61000-4-5
722 LAMPS

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Provide all fluorescent luminaires with lamps from one manufacturer to match as follows:
- T5 or T8 fluorescent lamp ranges, 4000K, triphosphor, colour-rendering index Ra 85, colour rendering group
1B
- compact source TC - fluorescent lamp ranges, 4000K, colour rendering index Ra 85 colour rendering
- group 1B
- tungsten halogen lamps with dichroic reflectors, colour rendering index Ra 100, and colour-rendering
- group 1A
- 3000/3500K (warm white/white) where specified for certain applications, ie 2D and GLSensure fluorescent
lamps comply with BS 1853
730 CONTROL DEVICES
731 SWITCHES
Supply and install all lighting control switches, including wall mounted type and ceiling mounted pull-cord type, at
the positions shown, and connect to the lighting switch control circuits shown, on the drawings.
Ensure switches are of the appropriate way type and grouped into ganged switch plates.
Install flush mounted switches throughout the main internal areas of the building. Within plant rooms, stores and
semi-exposed locations install surface mounted switches.
Install all lighting control switches at 1000mm from finished floor level to underside, unless otherwise indicated
on the drawings, or as particularly detailed elsewhere in this specification.
Ensure local manually operated switches are positioned adjacent to all respective access doors to and from each
area.
Supply and install manually operated lighting control switches, rated at 20A per pole, of the grid switch assembly
construction, surface or flush mounting to suit, of the appropriate way type and complete with rocker or key
pattern switch inserts.
Install metal clad style switches for surface mounted installations within plant rooms, etc.
Provide each switch complete with white insert, cover plate, pressed steel box and earth fly lead, together with
neon indicator insert where particularly detailed.
Where different supply phases are present within multi-gang switches, provide phase barriers between switches,
or other suitable phase barriers or voltage warning labels (eg “Danger 415V”). Ensure warning labels are
permanently fixed internally and externally to every such switch.
732 OCCUPANCY DETECTORS

Occupancy detection for all presence/absence lighting controls are to be microwave type.
Switching capacity shall be a minimum of 6A for fluorescent loads.
Sensors to be flush mounted within ceiling, and be complete with adjustable occupancy sensitivity and switching
delay.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
733 TIME SWITCHES

Ensure that all time switches comply with BS EN 60730.
734 PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL UNITS

Ensure that all photoelectric control units comply with BS 5972.
System as a minimum to have the following:
- 25A inductive switching capacity

- IP55 minimum degree of ingress protection to BS EN 60529
- Switching settings, including adjustable switching time delay, on lighting level 20lx, off lighting level 70lx.
- Timed on: programmable 7 day 24 hour clock. Timed off: programmable 7 day 24 hour clock.
800 INSTALLATION
810 GENERAL
When interconnecting sensors, controllers and luminaires, only use the manufacturers’ recommended cable types.
811 INSTALLING DAYLIGHT SENSORS

Locate daylight sensors in a position which is representative of the daylight level in the area under control.
812 INSTALLING OCCUPANCY SENSORS

Locate occupancy sensors in a position to suit the occupancy pattern of the area under control. Shield the sensors
from erroneous influences.
813 CLEANING AND CABLE INSPECTION

Upon completion of the installation, clean all detector lenses using anti-static cleaning fluid.
Check that all cable connections are secure.
814 LABELLING
Provide identification labels for all equipment and sensors. Label the central controller and its output circuits,
describing each item’s purpose.

When fixing accessories to the structural steelwork use proprietary brackets or clamps. Do not drill or weld to the
structural steelwork.


STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

Comply with section Y81 and clause A32.900 of this specification.

Provide submittals in accordance with section A11 of this specification.
1211 SUBMITTALS DURING CONTRACT

- selected manufacturer’s design proposals

- manufacturer’s technical submissions and proposals for the supply and installation of all items of equipment
and associated components
- lighting design input data and calculation output sheets
- record drawings
- manufacturer’s test certificates to verify compliance with Category Tp (a) for luminaires specified with
thermoplastic diffusers

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
V22 GENERAL LV POWER

Provide distributed power supplies throughout the building at 415V/TP&N and 240V/SP&N 50Hz and any other
voltages/frequencies within definition of LV, e.g. welding supplies, aircraft supplies for essential and
uninterrupted fixed or portable equipment.
Provide adequate current for the loads' characteristics whilst remaining within equipment voltage and
frequency tolerance. Ensure that all aspects of steady state and transient load characteristics are taken into
account in circuit design and selection of circuit components, particularly earth leakage. Ensure that circuit design
makes due allowance for anticipated fault levels, installed length, environmental influence, diversity and
installation method and that circuit disconnection is achieved safely within periods prescribed in BS 7671.
Provide protection grading for complete discrimination under fault conditions. Provide a means of fault
clearance and isolation on every circuit and co-ordinate protection of cables and switchgear.
Ensure that outlets are suitable for the connected equipment and the environment in which they are installed.

section prevails.
European Standard.

- The Electricity at Work Regulations
- BS 1363 13 A plugs, socket-outlets, adaptors and connection units
- BS 6724 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulating, armoured cables for voltages of 600/1000 V and 1900/3300
V, having low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire
- BS 7346 Components for smoke and heat control systems
- BS 7540 Electric cables. Guide to use for cables with a rated voltage not exceeding 450/750 V

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 7629-1 Electric cables. Specification for 300/500 V fire resistant screened cables having low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire Part 1: Multicore and multipair cables
- BS 7638 Application guide for calculation of short-circuit currents in low-voltage radial systems
- BS 7657 Fuses (cut-outs), ancillary terminal blocks and interconnecting units up to 100 A rating, for power
supplies to buildings
- BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations. IET Wiring Regulations
- BS EN 60269 Low voltage fuses
- BS EN 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and Controlgear assemblies
- BS EN 60898 Electrical accessories. Circuit-breakers for over current protection for household and similar
installations
- BS EN 61180 High-voltage test techniques for low voltage equipment
310 EXTENT
Final circuit wiring and connections from distribution boards and switchboards to socket outlets, connection units,
and isolators for fixed equipment. Final connections to equipment. Refer also to sections V20, Y60, Y61, Y62,
Y63, Y71, and Y74.
All distribution and final points to be surface mounted where possible to avoid chasing of concrete.
Ensure where necessary that the installations shall be compliant with the ATEX and DSEAR Regulations.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
320 SMALL POWER
321 CIRCULATION AREAS

Provide low voltage power socket outlet installations to circulation areas for cleaning and maintenance purposes.
Install twin BS 1363, 13 amp double pole socket outlets with dual earth terminals spaced at not less than 10m
centres. Mount at low level on walls around the perimeter of the areas and wire to the local power distribution
board.
In toilet areas provide supplies to fixed equipment such as:
- water heaters
- hand dryers
- urinal control valves
Refer to finishes and mounting height schedules, and any wall elevation drawings provided.
Match finish of accessories in the area.
322 PLANT ROOMS/ANCILLARY AREAS/WORKSHOPS

Design the power socket outlet installations within the plant room, roof spaces, workshops and ancillary areas, to
provide power services for as indicated on the drawings.
Provide metal clad surface-mounted twin 13 amp switched socket outlets in each of these areas and connect to
the local power distribution board.
Supply power for the LV plinth within the building as indicated on the drawings and schematics.
323 OFFICE AREAS

Supply and install power for office based computer equipment via clean earth power as indicated on the drawings
and schematics circuits to incorporate BS 1363 interfaces with RCD protection as required. 240V 1Ph 50Hz 13A
supplies shall be required for general office equipment.
410 CIRCUIT CONTROL

Provide each final circuit with a protective device, to allow automatic disconnection of the supply in the event of a
downstream fault. This device may also act as a means of manually isolating the circuit. Provide a means of
locking off.
Select device characteristics to suit the load and prospective fault conditions:
- MCCBs BS EN60947-2
- MCBs BS EN 60898 Type C or D or IEC 947-2 as appropriate; minimum fault rating 9kA
RCD's - either combined with MCB, or protecting part or whole of distribution board, or located at the load, 30mA
sensitivity.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
420 LOCAL ISOLATION

Provide local isolation of each circuit at outlet or equipment positions by:
- unplugging
- fuse removal
- isolating switch
- isolator
- isolating switch breaking remote control circuit only if the installer complies with BS EN 60947-3 and is
suitable and marked with the symbol for isolation (see BS EN 60671)
Refer to BS 7671 for full schedule of devices.
430 HAZARDOUS AREAS

Those areas identified within clause 200 shall be compliant with the ATEX and DSEAR Regulations. All equipment
safe.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
Supply, install, test and commission a general LV power system comprising final circuit’s distribution, control
devices and equipment throughout all areas and locations of the building(s).
Supply and install equipment of the type and manufacture indicated in the equipment schedules contained within
the appendices of this specification.
Further to clause A31 of this specification, the layout of components and equipment on the drawings are
diagrammatic only, therefore make due allowance in the Tender for final positions of all items of equipment to be
within one metre, either side of the position indicated.
In plant rooms ensure the outlets are positioned to coordinate with the layout and installation of all mechanical
plant and associated equipment.

530 PERMIT TO WORK


STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
540 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.

Install all components in accordance with the relevant clauses of the appropriate ‘Y’ Sections of this specification.
610 CONDUIT SYSTEM

Install a conduit cable containment system for all unarmoured insulated small power final circuit cables and
where applicable for the fixing of outlets and accessories.
Provide galvanised steel conduit to contain cables for all connections to wall mounted outlets and accessories,
etc. Provide a surface mounted installation throughout the various areas of the building.
Conduits shall be fixed to walls, to soffits of structural slabs, within service ducts and shafts, within ceiling voids,
and in prepared chases as applicable.
Install sections of conduit from the small power distribution cable trunking / tray and extend to outlet positions or
wall accessory outlet positions and terminate at a conduit outlet box of the appropriate type.
620 CABLE TRUNKING SYSTEM

Install a trunking cable containment system for all unarmoured insulated, and all insulated and sheathed, small
power final circuit cables.
630 CABLE TRAY/BASKET SYSTEM

Install cable tray/basket systems for the fixing of all single and multi-core insulated and sheathed, armoured and
screened soft skin small power final circuit cables.
Install a cable tray containment system following routes selected by the Installer to avoid multiple runs of cable.
The Installer shall identify all cable tray routes and sizes in his installation drawings.
Provide the cable tray/basket comprising steel galvanised finish, medium or heavy duty, with a 25mm return
flange.
640 WIRING SYSTEM

Wire and connect all outlets and accessories to final radial circuits emanating from local distribution boards in
accordance with the small power circuits references detailed in the schedules and indicated on the drawings.
Wire and connect the small power installation throughout using single core 6491B XLPE/LSF insulated cables with
solid copper conductors to BS 6491B rated at 450/ 750V, with minimum conductor size of 2.5mm2.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Within the building provide a surface mounted cable tray containment system, fixed direct to the underside of the
structure, for the installation of the small power final circuit cables.
Run cables enclosed within a ceiling void mounted on galvanised cable trays with conduit extending to small
power outlet and accessory locations.
Ensure containment and accessories are installed at a suitable height, within the ceiling void, to facilitate future
access for maintenance, from the room floor.
Install concealed conduit to the perimeter lighting of the main entrance canopy and terrace areas.
650 STANDARD 13 AMP SOCKET OUTLETS AND FUSED CONNECTION UNITS

Fit switched socket outlets and connection unit into a back box of sufficient depth to prevent damage to wiring
tails. Fit manufactured fly lead of 1.5mm² with green/yellow PVC insulation.
Use galvanised steel boxes.
Connect each socket outlet and connection unit on the ring main or radial principle. Do not spur off ring mains.
Refer to Schedule of Mounting Heights and Schedule of Finishes.
Provide 240V supplies terminated in 13A fused connection units for the following fixed equipment. Select and fit a
BS cartridge fuse to suit the equipment rating:
- fixed network components of automatic control systems

- alarm and indication panels
Outlet types:
- switched / unswitched with or without indicator

- flex outlet through faceplate
- flex outlet at remote plate
- remote outlet directly behind wall mounted equipment.
Connect to equipment with white three core flexible cable. Use heat resisting min 85°C rated, or higher if
necessary to suit equipment, insulated conductors and provide fixed base terminal block in outlet plate box if it is
located more than 2m from connection unit.
For direct fixed wiring connections into equipment use heat resisting min 85°C rated, or higher if necessary to
suit equipment, insulated single core LSF cables between switched terminals of connection unit and equipment
terminals. Do not introduce unnecessary terminal blocks.
Refer to the schedule of mounting heights and any available wall elevation drawings.
660 ISOLATING SWITCHES

In concealed areas, use flush-mounting, double-pole switched pattern with cable outlets where necessary and
cover plates finished to match lighting switches and socket outlets. In plant rooms and surface areas use surface-
mounting cover plates with metal clad finish.
Fit isolating switches into a back box of sufficient depth to prevent damage to wiring tails. Fit manufactured fly
lead of 1.5mm2 with green/yellow PVC insulation. Use galvanised steel boxes.
Connect each isolating switch on the ring main or radial principle. Do not spur off ring mains.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Connect to equipment with white three core flexible cable. Use heat resisting main. 85°C rated or higher if
necessary to suit equipment insulated conductors and provide fixed base terminal block in outlet plate box if it is
located more than 2m from connection unit.
For direct fixed wiring connections into equipment use heat resisting min. 85°C rated or higher if necessary to
suit equipment insulated single core LSF cables between switched terminals of connection unit and equipment
terminals. Do not introduce unnecessary terminal blocks.
Refer to the Schedule of Mounting Heights and any available wall elevation drawings.
670 ISOLATORS
Supply, install and connect complete all isolators for three phase power supplies to equipment within the building.
Connect each isolator to the circuits supplied from the respective panel or distribution board. Ensure that the
mounting heights of isolators are as detailed for isolating switches elsewhere in this section.
Generally, make final connections to the items of equipment with rigid steel conduit installed either flush or
surface, as appropriate, to a position adjacent to the equipment terminal box terminating in a standard conduit
box with fixed connector block. Make final connections to the equipment with multicore heat resistant cable
enclosed in flexible conduit, terminating directly on to the terminal box of the equipment.
Supply and fit to the front cover of each isolator a melamine identification label, white with engraved lettering
infilled in black to identify the item of equipment in 3.5mm high upper case lettering.
700 EQUIPMENT
710 GENERAL
Install the complete power system in accordance with the relevant clauses of the appropriate ‘Y’ Sections of this
specification.
720 ACCESSORIES
Supply and install all accessories at the positions shown and connect to the circuits shown on the drawings.
Install surface mounted accessories throughout the main internal areas of the building. Within plant rooms, stores
and semi-exposed locations install surface mounted accessories.
All surface mounted outlets and accessories shall be fixed within matching surface boxes.
Provide each accessory complete with white insert, cover plate, box and earth fly lead, together with neon
indicator insert where particularly detailed.



STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED


1110 SUBMITTALS DURING CONTRACT

- selected manufacturer’s design proposals

- manufacturer’s technical submissions and proposals for the supply and installation of all items of equipment
and associated components
- lighting system samples
- lighting design input data and calculation output sheets
- record drawings
- manufacturer’s test certificates to verify compliance with Category Tp (a) for luminaires specified with
thermoplastic diffusers

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
V32 UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY (UPS) SYSTEM

Provide an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system to provide a fully uninterruptible supply of electrical power
to the designated boards at all times, but particularly during loss of the main electrical supply for the specified
time period.
The designated loads are shown on the drawings.
Ensure that the UPS system is complete in all respects to perform the intended specified role taking into account
the characteristics of the mains supply, the load to be supported, the interface and interaction with standby
generators, the environmental conditions of the UPS room and the specified acoustic requirements.
Pay particular attention to the load characteristics (i.e. automatic switching of loads, unbalanced loads, switched
mode power supplies etc) and the interaction of UPS and standby generators in order to achieve stable operation
at all times of both UPS and generators.

section prevails.
European Standard.

- BS EN 50171 Central power supply systems
similar appliances Part 1: Emission
- BS EN 62040 Uninterruptible power systems (UPS)
-

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that the technical performance applies to all UPS systems at each systems specified output rating.
310 DESCRIPTION OF UPS TYPE

There shall be a number of UPS units within the Building if present in the drawings.
FATE Requires UPS to cover transition of equipment during a mains power failure to standby.
The UPS units shall include as a minimum the following:
- Static Unit
- Floor mounted
- Maintenance facilities: Modular battery packs
- Bypass switch
- Clean earth arrangement
- Cooling arrangement – Chilled Water FCU with DX backup (Covered under Particular Section U41)
Ensure where necessary that the installations shall be compliant with the ATEX and DSEAR Regulations. All
equipment selected, supplied, installed, tested and commissioned shall be compliant with these regulations.
At every UPS location, provide 2no. 32Amp rotary isolators and BS EN 60309 socket outlets for the UPS
connection and a spare way for future UPS provision.
410 BMS MONITORING

Arrange for each UPS system to be monitored by the BMS system, comprising the following signals for each of
the UPS systems:
- main supply healthy

- UPS static bypass operated
- maintenance bypass operated
- UPS system common fault

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
420 UPS MONITORING PANEL

Provide each UPS system with a standard alarm monitoring panel, integral to the unit to display all systems
information, loads and fault conditions.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
510 RESPONSIBILITIES – ELECTRICAL INSTALLER

Select appropriate UPS units to achieve the design criteria and supply, install, test and commission a UPS system
comprising of control devices and equipment, complete with all required accessories to serve the areas and
locations of the building as indicated on the LV Schematic.
The electrical installer shall be responsible for the installation of all trunking, wiring, owner supplies, fire
protection, fire detection and controls.
520 MAIN CONTRACTOR

To undertake the provision of all plant bases, holes and openings as detailed by the Electrical Installer.

540 PERMIT TO WORK

550 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.
610 UPS SYSTEMS – TECHNICAL PERFORMANCE

Input
Input voltage 240V + 10% - 6%
Power factor 0.8 lagging
Phases single + neutral
Frequency 50Hz ± 1%

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Input power Systems rated performance with battery recharging
Input harmonics Complies with ENA G5/4. Each system to be complete with input harmonic filters/power factor
correction to achieve 3% maximum total/2% maximum any single harmonic.
Accuracy
Balanced load ± 1%
50% unbalanced load ± 2.5%
Adjustment ± 5%
Transient ± 5%
Response time Recovery to within 1% voltage within 20ms
Balanced load 120° ± 1°
100° unbalanced load 120° ± °
Frequency 50Hz
Nominal 50%
Synchronised ± 1% (±2% Pre-settable)
Unsynchronised ± 0.1% / 24 hours
Environment
UPS systems:
Temperature range - 0°C to +35°C at full rated capacity operating
Relative humidity 90% at 20°C
Maximum operating altitude Up to 1000m above mean sea level.
Batteries:
Temperature range operating - 20°C to 25°C at full rated capacity
Temperature range storage - 0°C to 35°C
Equipment dimensions: Manufacturer’s standard module sizes and battery layout to suit equipment room area.
Cable access Top entry for input, output and battery supply.
Cabinet finish Manufacturer’s standard colour finish.
RF interference:
To comply with VDE 0875N and BS EN 55014-1.
Acoustic noise Approximately 60dBA at 1m, to ISO3746.
Conversion efficiency 90% minimum at full load and 50% load
Insulation test Compliance with IEC 60146.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Static bypass Provide each UPS system with no-break static bypass.
Maintenance bypass Provide each UPS system with synchronised no-break maintenance bypass.
Provide UPS systems complete with all systems controls, monitoring unit, dc battery supply breaker and
connections to provide a complete system.




The installers shall submit as a minimum the following:
- predicted sound level coverage

- schematic drawings
- Technical specifications for the proposed equipment
- quantities in terms of equipment, materials etc
- method statement
- system testing

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
V40 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

The intention of the system is to provide sufficient illumination to allow people to evacuate a building safely when
the normal lighting has failed in an emergency situation.
To provide throughout all areas, as detailed on the drawings and in the specification, a complete emergency
lighting installation to allow safe egress of the building in the event of circuits or total mains failure.
Supply and install the complete emergency lighting installation and controls as detailed on the drawings and in
the specification.
Emergency lighting shall also be provided as specified in areas where the use of the space provides an
inherent danger to means of escape.
The emergency lighting system shall indicate clearly and unambiguously all escape routes; internally and
externally as required, provide illuminance along such routes and immediate external areas of escape routes so
as to allow safe movement towards and through all exits, ensure that the fire call points and fire fighting
equipment provided along escape routes can be located when the normal lighting has failed, and external escape
routes are illuminated where specified with also emergency lighting to open areas for anti panic and escape
lighting.
Ensure the complete emergency/escape lighting systems comply fully with the requirements of the layout
drawings, this specification, the associated European and British Standards and the relevant requirements of the
‘Y’ sections.
Ensure that the emergency lighting system is connected to the inline central battery system to maintain lighting
for the task to be completed and safe egress from the facility achieved.

section prevails.
European Standard.
- Oman Regulations and Safety Standards Health & Safety at Work Act
- BS 764Specification for automatic change-over contactors for emergency lighting systems
- BS 5266 Emergency lighting

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 5499 Graphical symbols and signs. Safety signs, including fire safety signs
conditions
- BS 6972 Specification for general requirements for luminaire supporting couplers for domestic, light industrial
and commercial use
- BS EN 1838 Lighting applications.
- BS EN 13032 Measurement and presentation of photometric data of lamps and luminaires
- BS EN 50172 Emergency escape lighting systems
- BS EN 60598-2-22 Luminaires for emergency lighting
- BS EN 60622 Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes. Sealed nickel-
cadmium prismatic rechargeable single cells
- BS EN 61951 Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes. Portable sealed
rechargeable single cells.
The design has been developed to achieve the illumination levels and control as detailed unless otherwise
specified in this specification, independent of the normal mains electricity supply and where provided the central
battery system.
Provide emergency lighting equipment throughout the installation of the type and manufacturer listed in the
schedules of manufacturers and luminaires.
Ensure that all luminaires notated as emergency are Industry Committee for Emergency Lighting (ICEL) approved
whether detailed in the schedule of Luminaires or not.
Emergency lighting is a generic term which covers a number of specific forms, which are identified with required
design standards, and applies unless otherwise specified in this specification.
Emergency escape lighting.
This is provided to enable the safe exit should the normal supply fail. It consists of three forms:
- Defined escape route lighting

- This enables the safe exit of buildings and immediate external areas by the occupants by providing them with
appropriate visual conditions and direction finding on escape routes and special locations. It ensures that the
fire call points, fire fighting equipment and safety equipment can be located and used.
- Design standard: 1 lux (min), operation in 5 seconds.
- Open area (anti-panic area) lighting
- This is provided to reduce the chances of panic and enable the building occupants to move safely towards exit
routes by providing them with appropriate visual conditions and direction finding.
- Design standard: 0.5 lux (min), to defined areas, which excludes a border of 0.5m, operation in 5 seconds.
- High risk task area lighting
- This is provided to ensure the safety of those involved in possibly dangerous situations and processes and to
allow the correct shut down procedures to be effected.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Design standard: 10% of the required maintained illuminance for the task, but not less than 15 lux (min),
operation in 0.5 second.
The emergency lighting system should provide the following coverage:
- Illumination of all defined escape routes within the building

- Illumination of escape route immediately adjacent to the building
- Illumination of defined external escape routes
- General illumination of office areas for anti-panic lighting
- Illumination of high risk areas
Type of system operation.
Standby lighting run off of the central battery system provided to enable normal activities to be continued should
the normal mains supply fail.
For the purpose of this specification the following emergency luminaire definitions apply:
- Non maintained – luminaires containing one lamp which does not operate at all from the normal supply, but
will energise from the emergency supply upon failure of the normal circuit it monitors
- Maintained (multi-lamp) – luminaires containing one or more lamps which operate from the normal switched
supply as required and of which one will energise from the emergency supply upon failure of the normal
circuit it monitors
- Sustained (2 lamps) – luminaires containing two lamps, one of which operates from the normal supply
(switched) at all times and the other which will energise from the emergency supply upon failure of the
normal circuit it monitors
Provide an emergency lighting system rated for 3 hour duration unless otherwise specified in this specification.
Ensure that the emergency lighting system design and classification comprise one of the following types:
- NM/3 + M/3 Non-maintained and designated maintained, operation of the emergency lighting on failure of the
normal supply or individual circuits and the addition of maintained emergency lighting at designated areas and
exit locations, 3 hour operation.
Reference 3 following the system classification shall identify an operation time of 3 hours.

Those areas identified in clause 200 shall be compliant with the ATEX and DSEAR Regulations. All equipment
safe.
All areas of the building shall be provided with emergency lighting linked to the central battery system.
310 GENERAL
Supply and install the complete emergency lighting installation and controls including all wiring,
manual and automatic controls, luminaires, lamps and emergency supply equipment as detailed on the drawings
and within this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
The types of luminaires/installation have been determined by the nature of the task being carried out within the
individual spaces, defined as follows:
Provide an emergency lighting system comprising a 3 hour non-maintained system, type NM/3 with maintained
emergency exit luminaire operation at designated exit doors type M/3 as required and indicated on the drawings.
Provide an emergency lighting system comprising maintained emergency versions of normal luminaires,
maintained dedicated emergency luminaires and sustained emergency luminaires all complete with lamps and
control gear, and emergency supply as detailed in this section to form the total emergency lighting system. The
types of luminaire are defined within the Schedule of Luminaires.
Provide samples of luminaires with the choice of louvres and lamp types for demonstration and final selection at
site, during the course of the contract works, generally in line with the Schedule of Luminaires.
For the final selection of the proposed luminaires, of the types listed in the Schedule of Luminaires, provide full
design calculations for the emergency lighting installation for all affected areas.
In addition, in the areas defined as high risk, provide enhanced emergency lighting to provide 10% of the normal
general lighting maintained illuminance or to a minimum of 15 lux as defined, and specialist system operation to
ensure the emergency lighting is immediately available in emergency, operation within 0.5 second.
Ensure all services requirements are met, to co-ordinate the complete system installation, planning cable routes
and equipment locations and access, to provide a neat and tidy installation.
Ensure that the emergency lighting installation is independent of all other systems wiring in accordance with BS
7671 and as set out in this specification.
Ensure the installation is surface mounted in galvanised conduit or designated cable types together with metal
clad accessories, with the exception of hazardous areas.
Refer to the layout drawings for wiring types, system operation and location of emergency lighting test switches,
and where applicable automatic testing and monitoring system.
320 LUMINAIRES
Ensure that all luminaires are complete with high frequency control gear unless specified otherwise in the
Schedule of Luminaires.
Use one manufacturer as far as is reasonably practical. This applies particularly to the modular fluorescent
luminaires where it is a requirement for all luminaires to have matching paint finish in colour and percentage
gloss.
Provide emergency lighting luminaires complete with EC standard exit legend (running man) at designated exit
doors and changes in direction.
Ensure that the luminaires are of the type described in the Schedule of Luminaires.
Ensure that any alternative complies fully with the performance and quality detailed.
330 LAMPS
Ensure that all lamp type characteristics are as follows:
- Linear fluorescent lamp

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Compact fluorescent lamps
340 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEMS

Luminaires used in this type of system derive their secondary supply via a central power source known as a
central battery unit.
Provide a central battery unit of the type and rating designated in the equipment schedules, and conforming with
the following:
- mode of operation: maintained

- lighting load: Watts
- battery type: low maintenance nickel cadmium
- input voltage: 240V, 50Hz single phase
- output voltage: 240V
- battery capacity: Ampere Hour (Ah)
- duration: 3 hours unless specified otherwise in this specification.
- options: (phase failure relays/low electrolyte alarm/sub-circuit monitor relay/maintained lighting control
switch/solar dial time clock/24 hour timer/ earth fault alarm/low voltage disconnect/BS 764 mains failure
contactor/double pole HRC distribution fuses/double pole distribution circuit breakers/(automatic) timed
boost/timed delay test facility (auto-reset)/runon- timer/mains input switch (in place of mcb)/remote alarm
unit/fire alarm relay(24V coil)/auxiliary alarm relay/special paint finish)
- indicators: (mains supply healthy/float/boost/mains supply fail/charger fail/high volts/low volts/system
fault/charger healthy)
- alarms: As supplied by manufacturer
- recharge time: As supplied by manufacturer
- fabrication: As supplied by manufacturer
- IP rating: IP44.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
V41 STREET / AREA / FLOOD LIGHTING

provide low voltage electricity supplies from the transformer rooms LV switchboard to the external lighting
installation.

section prevails.
European Standard.

- The electrical supply to meet the building electricity maximum demand load requirements.
throughout. With regards to all British Standards and all other reference documents the highlighted areas of this
building shall be considered for compliance in line with all necessary criteria for an Explosives Building.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

External lighting shall be provided as detailed on the relevant drawings, schedules and written specifications.
The lighting and supporting power systems shall be designed in conjunction with relative Codes of Practice
current at the time. This includes, but is not limited to, the following:
- BS 5489-1 2013 (Code of Practice for the Design of Road Lighting. Part 1: Lighting of Roads and
- Public Amenity Areas)
- BS 7671 2013 (IET Wiring Regulations Seventh Edition)
- BS 7430 2011 (Code of Practice for Protective Earthing of Electrical Installations).
The contractor shall deliver a road lighting system in accordance with BS EN 13201 category ME3c.
The contractor shall deliver a carpark lighting system in accordance with BS EN 12464-2:2007 carpark
lighting (achieving a lighting performance of 20 lux average with a uniformity of 0.25 minimum).
A provisional scheme has been provided showing luminaire types and layouts. The contractor shall develop this
design information to construction level including all electrical and civil detail based on the final equipment
selections.
Luminaires:
The contractor shall use ‘flat glass’ lanterns to avoid light spill to the local airfield. The luminaire shall be Class 1
electrical, road lighting lantern with IP66 optical and gear compartment for 1x90W HIT-CE lamp with electronic
high frequency control gear.
Lighting Columns:
The height of lighting columns shall comply with MOD and BAE requirements. However, at this stage 8 meter
high columns have been proposed.
The structural support of lighting columns shall be coordinated with their final selection. Manufactures
recommendations, geological conditions and environmental conditions (e.g. ground type and wind speeds) shall
be considered in the design.
The exact position of columns shall be coordinated with other services and the final lighting design. Columns shall
be located near driveways and footpaths. Their positioning shall take into consideration routine maintenance and
potential third party damage.
Columns shall be handled and stored in line with manufactures recommendations and site safety procedures.
Feeder Pillars:
The feeder pillars shall be provided as shown on the drawings and schedules. Their structural support shall be
coordinated with their final selection and manufactures recommendations. This shall include
consideration for geological and environmental conditions.
The enclosures shall be made of fabricated metal or GRP to a weatherproof design providing ingress
protection to IP 55. The pillars shall be dual compartment cabinets with front access doors. The electrical
distribution and controls equipment shall be housed in individual compartments. Suitable ventilation shall be
provided for the equipment within the pillar.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Feeder pillars shall be provided with an anti-condensation heater and internal light fed from a separate final
circuit taken from the internal distribution board. The pillars shall be provided with a suitable locking system to
prevent unauthorised access and key matching. The enclosure door shall have two locks of flush nonrusting type.
A pocket for the schematic diagram and the “As built” drawing shall be provided on the inside of the
enclosure door. The diagrams and drawings shall under no circumstances be stuck on the door.
Wiring:
Steel wired armoured (SWA) cables shall be provided in line with the cable schedule and typical feeder pillar
circuit arrangement. The sizes show is indicative and the contractor shall produce detailed cable calculations to
support final wiring routes and lighting design to take in consideration the final protective device selection,
disconnection times and voltage drops.
Wiring between the feeder pillars and lighting columns shall be installed in conjunction with the typical LV cable
trench layout drawings. Warning tape shall be labelled along its length e.g. CAUTION STREET LIGHTING CABLE
BELOW.
The termination and routing of the cabling into the base of the column shall provide an accessible route to the
fused cut-out. Where ducting is used is shall be orange in colour.
Wiring system, at each column and feeder pillar, shall be suitably referenced using fixed markers with
alphanumeric combinations in line with their circuit reference. The numbering between points shall also be
recorded on the fixed markers from the start of the circuit i.e. the first cable in the circuit from the feeder pillar
shall be numbered 1 or A, ascending in number or letter to the end of the circuit. The fixed markers shall be
made of durable plastic with cable tie-wraps fixings.
11 kV cables:
the 11000 volts cables are for operation on MEW's 11 KV system and shall be constructed in accordance with and
conform to relevant IEC specification.
Rated service voltage 11000 V
Highest system voltage 12500 V
No. of phases 3
Design fault level 250 MVA
Neutral solid earthed
Controls:
Photo-electric cells shall be provided as detailed on the drawings. These shall be mounted to the top of a local
lighting column to ensure natural ambient light conditions are measured. The photo-electric cell and its controls
shall, in the event of fault, fail switched on. A separate time clock arrangement shall be provided at each feeder
pillar to provide overriding control. The photo-electric cell shall work in conjunction with the time clock to provide
maximum control of the lighting system. An override facility shall be provided at each feeder pillar to override the
lighting in the event of control circuit failure. A separate control circuit shall be taken locally from the feeder pillar
for this arrangement.
Contactor controls shall be provided to support the control arrangement and should be installed in such a way to
facilitate their easy replacement in the event of fault and routine maintenance.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
A master black out control, connected to all the feeder pillars, shall be provided at the Facilities Management
building with its final location to be agreed. The control switch shall be suitably located to protect against
unwanted tampering. A lock and key facility shall also be provided to prevent unauthorised use. An enhanced fire
resistance SWA cable not less than 4 mm2 shall be provided for this controls circuit.
Switchgear:
A means of local isolation, in the form of a fused cut-out, shall be provided at the base of each lighting column
with suitable access from outside of the column under the operation of a key. Fused cut-outs shall have provide
double pole isolation and a suitable BS 88 rated fuse shall be installed in conjunction with the final selection of
luminaire. Wiring within the column shall be a minimum of 2.5 mm² 3 core flexible cable based on the column
manufactures recommended cable type e.g. PVC.
The rated conditional short circuit current capacity of all associated electrical switchgear shall be selected based
on calculated fault levels within that part of the system.
25% spare capacity at the feeder pillar distribution board shall be provided. Spare fuses shall also be provided in
the feeder pillar and should not be less than 1 or 20% (whichever is greater) of the connected final circuits.
Earthing:
Earthing arrangement should be provided in line with BS 7671 and BS 7430. Final circuit wiring shall have a
separate circuit protective conductor (CPC) within the SWA cable.
Earthing electrodes shall be provided at the last or penultimate lighting column. Earth electrodes shall also be
installed at each feeder pillar. Suitable earth electrodes in conjunction with BS 7430 should be provided along
with appropriate pit and cover to match the surroundings.


- source impedance

11kV and low voltage system fault protection shall be provided by the ESC as detailed on the schematics and
V10, V11 and V12.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
within each building. The ESC shall obtain the electrical characteristics of the supplies from the national grid and
shall design the electrical infrastructure accordingly to ensure the fault levels, loads and switching arrangements
are fully coordinated. The ESC shall design the electrical infrastructure based on the final equipment selections.
The Installer shall be responsible for providing the remainder of the electrical installation within the buildings. The
Main Contractor will be responsible for the provision of all builderswork, trenching, backfilling, cable ducts,

530 PERMIT TO WORK

540 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.
550 INSTALLATION


STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
610 BACK BOARDS

to boards.
620 CABLE TAILS




ordinated.
910 PROCEDURE
Provide the results on A1 or A0 layout drawings and include in the O&M instruction manuals. Provide electronic
copies of the drawings in AutoCAD 2008 format on a CDROM.
920 DOCUMENTATION
documentation and system instruction drawings and manuals) and issue three hard copies and three electronic

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

Provide Drawings, specifications, schedules, method statements, etc. as detailed in Section A of this Specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
W10 TELECOMMUNICATIONS

To provide the building with the required number of telephone lines as detailed in this specification and shown on
the layout drawings.
Provide telephone lines into the building for the following:
- Electrical Plant Room/s

- Mechanical Plant Room/s
- Building Entrances (External)
- As otherwise indicated on the drawings or deemed necessary
Telephone installation to be compatible and compliant with the site wide infrastructure.

the British Standard Institution, would also apply (see latest BSI Standard Catalogue etc.).

- British Standards
- Health & Safety at Work Act

Final location of telephone outlets must be confirmed prior to installing. Include for all works associated with the
provision of working telephone points at practical completion.
Provide phone lines/BMS connections to all necessary systems such as fire alarm and security panels.
All external Telecom lines and services on the site shall be run below ground, to prevent un-authorized
tampering.
The installer shall allow for a minimum within each facility, of a single phone to be located in each of the
Electrical & Mechanical plant rooms and adjacent to the main access doors to the facilities.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
400 SCOPE OF WORKS
The electrical installer shall liaise with the Site Wide IT Contractor to determine their requirements for the
provision of a telephone system as detailed above. The installer shall liaise with the Site Wide IT Contractor and
the main contractor to agree the necessary containment required within the building.
The installer shall include for liaising with the specialist, regarding the cable containment systems and
programming of the telephone wiring etc. and for the installation of PVC conduit and containment facilities
including outlet plates to match the electrical accessories in accordance with the Site Wide IT Contractors
recommendations.

430 PERMIT TO WORK

440 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
W12 PUBLIC ADDRESS / SOUND AMPLIFICATION

To provide the means for enabling the evacuation of individual or multiple sectors of the complex in an
emergency, by broadcasting secure, clear and concise audible instructions to all personnel within the complex.
To manage public address announcements throughout the complex.

section prevails.
European Standard.

- Local Authority Acts and Bylaws
- The Fire Precautions (Sub-surface Railway Stations) Regulations
- The Fire Safety and Safety of Places of Sport Act
- BS 31 Specification. Steel conduit and fittings for electrical wiring
- BS 546 Specification. Two-pole and earthing-pin plugs, socket-outlets and socket-outlet adaptors
- BS 5640 Aerials for the reception of sound and television broadcasting in the frequency range 30 MHz to 1
GHz
- BS 5839 Fire detection and fire alarm systems for buildings Part 1: Code of practice for system design,
installation, commissioning and maintenance Part 8: Code of practice for the design, installation,
commissioning and maintenance of voice alarm systems Part 9: Code of practice for the design, installation,
commissioning and maintenance of emergency voice communication systems
- BS 6004 Electric cables. PVC insulated, non-armoured cables for voltages up to and including 450/750 V for
electric power, lighting and internal wiring
- BS 6259 Code of practice for the design, planning installation, testing and maintenance of sound systems
- BS 6500 Electric cables. Flexible cords rated up to 300/500 V, for use with appliances and equipment intended
for domestic, office and similar environments
- BS 6840 Sound system equipment
- BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations. IET Wiring Regulations.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 8434 Methods of test for assessment of the fire integrity of electric cables
- BS EN 54-4 Fire detection and fire alarm systems. Power supply equipment
- BS EN 60228 Conductors of insulated cables
- BS EN 60268-4 Sound system equipment Part 4: Microphones
- BS EN 60702 Mineral insulated cables and their terminations with a rated voltage not exceeding 750 V
- BS EN 60598-3 Digital audio interface Part 3: Consumer applications
- BS EN 61386 Conduit systems for cable management
- BS EN ISO 3382 Acoustics. Measurement of room acoustic parameters
- EN 300330 Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Short Range Devices(SRD);
Radio Equipment in the Frequency Range 9 kHz to 25 MHz and Inductive Loop Systems in the Frequency
Range 9 kHz to 30 MHz
- EN 300422 Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); wireless microphones in the 25
MHz to 3 GHz frequency range COP 10 Code of Practice - Voice Alarm Systems (British Fire Protection
Systems Association Ltd.)
- Dangerous Substances and Explosive Atmospheres Regulations (DSEAR) EFDC Dirty.

The emergency voice communication (EVC) system consists of a set of amplification equipment located within
each of the buildings. The equipment is housed in equipment racks adjacent to the fire alarm detection control
panels. From the Electrical Plant room, the fibre optic cable shall link back to the site wide PA system at the
CENTER Building.
Manual announcements override all other pre-recorded announcements.
Automatic monitoring and control of the complete EVC system is incorporated into the central amplification
equipment within the CENTER Building.
Dual EVC speakers are fitted throughout the complex, and circuits configured such that the failure of any one
speaker circuit will not affect the rest of the system. Each circuit is under constant automatic monitoring during
non broadcast mode, with control indications of any circuit failures.
A control panel will be installed within the CENTER Building with the following facilities:
- the broadcast of top priority manual emergency announcements over any combination or all evacuation
sectors
- the broadcast of pre-recorded second priority evacuation tone and message over any combination or all
evacuation sectors
- the broadcast of a pre-recorded third party stand-down/false alarm tone and message over any combination
or all evacuation sectors
Facilities for the broadcast of various emergency messages throughout the site simultaneously are provided.
Controls are provided for selecting the broadcast of the following pre-recorded messages to all areas:

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- pre-fire alarm test message

- post-fire alarm message.
Upon receipt of the appropriate command from the fire alarm system the automatic evacuation procedures are
initiated.
Within the security control unit provide for the broadcast of live voice paging announcements with automatic
chime, to all public areas (selectively).
Controls are provided for selecting the broadcast pre-recorded messages to all areas simultaneously monitored
system within the Building.
Systems automatically change over to an integral standby battery supply in the event of mains failure and revert
back to normal mains supply upon restoration, with no loss of broadcasting.

Three number microphones shall be provided. The number of microphones and controls and their locations are
showed on the detailed drawings.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
Coordinate with other installers including the Building and Site Wide Infrastructure Main Contractors and Sub
Contractors, to ensure correct inter-operability with other systems (including access control, BMS, fire detection
and alarm) and to achieve proper spatial control of equipment and components.
Appoint a communications specialist to design, supply, install, test and commission the PA system throughout the
building coordinating with the site wide systems specialist installer for integration.
520 PA SYSTEM INSTALLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

Liaise with the installer to design, supply, install, test and commission a complete PA system with speakers
located at the locations as indicated on the drawings.
Design, supply, install, test and commission an audio presentation system within each of the meeting
rooms/briefing rooms greater than 50m2 as indicated on the drawings.

Ensure the system complies fully with BS 6259, BS 6840, BS 7671 and BS EN 60268.
House the central amplification and control equipment in a 19" rack system, within the Data Centre.
610 CABLES AND CONDUITS
611 GENERAL
Install all cables in accordance with section Y61 of this specification.
Ensure cables comply with BS EN 60228, BS 6500 and BS EN 60702.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Liaise with the equipment manufacturer and advise him of the proposed longest cable routes. Determine th circuit
load and therefore, the voltage drop and advise the engineer immediately if the output at the speakers
is not in accordance with his requirements. Provide this information prior to the ordering of the cables.
Install the cables so that they are physically continuous throughout their length from the amplifier to the
speaker other than where connection is made of the terminations of a system component.
Take all precautions to prevent the occurrence of earth loops. Pay particular attention to the earthing of cable
screening to ensure both ends are not connected to earth.
612 MICROPHONE CABLE

Use flexible twisted pair microphone cable of tinned annealed copper conductors, PVC insulated, tinned copper
braided shield and PVC outer sheath. Use either light grey or white coloured outer sheath. Terminate all cables
for microphones.
Satisfy the following minimum characteristics:
- at least 16 strands per conductor

- strand diameter not to be less than 0.15mm
- nominal outer diameter not to be greater than 5mm
- capacitance between conductors not to be more than 110pF/m
- inner conductor DC resistance not to be more than 36Ω/km at 20°C
- insulation thickness not to be less than 0.25mm
For Lavalier microphones, satisfy the following:

- strand diameter not to be less than 0.1mm
- nominal outer diameter not to be greater than 3.4mm
- capacitance between conductors not to be more than 110pF/m
- inner conductor DC resistance not to be more than 36Ω/km at 20°C
613 LOUDSPEAKER CABLE

Except where underground use flexible pair loudspeaker cable of tinned, annealed copper conductors, PVC
insulated and white or grey PVC sheath. For surface wiring use parallel pair cable. For conduit run use twisted
pair cable.
Wire loudspeaker circuits on a radial basis.
Always connect loudspeakers in phase; indicate the phase connection on the cabling.

- strand diameter not less than 0.21mm
- nominal outer diameter not to be greater than 8mm

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

Where underground use PVC insulated, armoured underground loudspeaker cable with one or two twisted pairs
of tinned, annealed copper conductors, tinned copper braided shield, complete with an overall protective jacket of
PVC. Ensure the cable is at least 19 strands per conductor of diameter not less than 0.21mm.
614 POWER CABLE

Use three core PVC insulated, non-armoured power cables with copper conductors of not less than 2.5mm2 to BS
6004, complete with an overall protection sheath of PVC.
615 CONDUIT
Except for flexible conduit, use conduit made of galvanised iron of heavy gauge, screwed, longitudinally welded.
Ensure all conduits and conduit fittings comply with BS EN 61386.
Ensure steel conduit and solid type adaptors comply with BS 31. Use metallic water tight pattern, PVC over
sheathed flexible conduit with a separate earth wire enclosed for earth continuity.
Fix surface conduit with galvanized heavy spacing saddles, and only run in a vertical or horizontal direction.
On a straight run support 20 and 25mm conduits no less than one saddle every one metre in addition to the
support provided by any structure, box or fitting. For 32mm and larger conduits, place saddles no more than
1.2m apart. Support angle bends with two saddles as near as possible to the bends. Fix heavy spacing galvanized
saddles with brass screws in plastic wall plugs or other approved method.
Ensure conduit bends have a radius of four times the outer diameter of the conduit.
Provide a saddle support not less than 150mm and not more than 200mm from any bend or termination.
Ensure conduit systems are mechanically and electrically continuous throughout and properly earthed.
Ensure chases for conduit in walls are either vertical or horizontal and keep to a minimum surface mounting
where possible.
Make joints in runs of steel conduit by means of a coupler into which the ends of both conduits are inserted and
tightened up.
Provide an adequate number of suitably sized hot-dipped galvanized cast iron draw in boxes in conduit runs to
enable cables to be easily drawn without damage. Fit draw in boxes after every two bends, or after an maximum
straight run of 15m.
616 INSTALLATION
Install all cables and conduit in the locations as indicated on the drawings.
Run all cables, as far as practicable, inside conduits or trunking, only in a vertical or horizontal direction. Only
fix cables to the ceiling if they are required to feed a point on the ceiling.
When cables pass through walls or columns, insert a galvanised steel sleeve into the wall or column before
drawing the cables through.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Use rubber grommets or insulated bushes to protect cables through metal covers of distribution board, box or
any other metal work.
Run cables at least 150mm clear of non-electrical services. Ensure microphone cables have a minimum separation
of 50mm from loudspeaker cables. Take precautions to prevent the occurrence of earth loops.
Pay particular attention to the earthing of cable screening to ensure that both ends are not connected to earth.
Unless otherwise authorised by the Engineer, secure cables flat to the surface of walls and ceilings by means of
buckle clips or cable saddles.
Do not exceed 150mm in horizontal direction and 225mm in vertical direction in the spacing of clips. Provide clips
not less than 75mm and not more than 100mm from any bend or termination, set cables so that they lie flat
against the surface.
Avoid jointing of cables; if jointing is required obtain the permission of the Contract Administrator prior to
jointing, and use properly designed connectors or joint boxes.
Allow to adjust transformer tappings after installation to achieve the desired sound pressure levels.
Make good any work disturbed during installation.
Run microphone level circuits (level below -20dBm), line level circuits (up to +30dBm), loudspeaker circuits
(above +30dBm) and power circuits in separate conduits. Ensure all other conduits are spaced not less than
50mm from power conduits. Ground power conduits to the power system ground.
Insulate microphone and 600Ω lines from the conduit and from each other for the entire conduit length.
Only ground microphone line shields at the microphone frame. Ground other shields only at the power amplifier
inputs or at the control equipment outputs. Preserve the continuity of shields at connecting points.
Connect all audio grounds in the sound equipment rack to a common point at the rack, which in turn is connected
to the building ground.
Ensure all audio lines, including microphone lines, line-level lines and loudspeaker lines are floating with respect
to ground and either side of audio lines are grounded. If the equipment has a single ended input or output,
provide the equipment with isolation transformers to ensure floating conditions. Mute microphones by shorting
the microphone output; do not mute by opening the circuit. Use two pole cut-off or transfer switches in line-level
lines, switching both sided of the lines simultaneously. Do not interconnect the outputs of power amplifiers.
Connect loudspeaker lines leaving the equipment rack via barrier strip terminals.
620 MICROPHONES
621 GENERAL
Three number shall be provided within the Building, final location and type to be agreed onsite with the contract
administrator. Either of the secondary microphones shall have the facility to make announcements remotely
within the other Building.
Use microphones of the cardroid/condenser type, mounted on a flexible, gooseneck stand. Ensure the
microphones have a characteristic frequency response of 100Hz-100kHz.
Confirm that, in the event of an emergency condition, the control of microphone output is automatically
overridden, so that the loudspeakers achieve the room sound pressure levels, irrespective of the volume control.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Connect the microphone to a multi-zone controller, enabling broadcast to any number of selected zones at once,
depending on whether zone selector buttons or an all-call button is pressed.
- an axis frequency response not to vary more than +6dB, -10db over the frequency range 100 to 10,000Hz
relative to 1.0kHz
- sensitivity not to be less than 1.0mV/Pa (-77dB ref 1V/ ubar) at 1.0kHz
- distortion to be less than 0.5% at 1.0kHz at 30Pa sound pressure level input
- front to back discrimination ratio to be greater than 15dB for 300Hz to 5000Hz for unidirectional microphones
- balanced, low impedance in the range 200Ω to 600Ω at 1.0kHz
622 UNIDIRECTIONAL MICROPHONE

Use a dynamic type unidirectional microphone provided with built in ‘blast and pop’ protection an microphone
holder.
Where required, provide the microphone with an adjustable mount and hardware adaptable to the floor stand or
desk stand.
623 MINIATURE OMNI DIRECTIONAL LAVALIERE MICROPHONE

Ensure the microphone is lightweight and unobtrusive with smooth exterior and recessed grill screen minimizing
clothing noise, of rugged aluminium case construction and fitted with a flexible long life cable.
Ensure the lavaliere cord can be easily snapped onto or disengaged from a clasp on the lavaliere holder.
624 DESK MOUNTED OMNI DIRECTIONAL MICROPHONE

Provide omni-directional microphones with a locking flange mount, integrated preamplifier, flexible gooseneck
stand and XLR connector.
625 MICROPHONE DESK STAND AND FLEXIBLE GOOSENECK SHAFT

Construct the desk stand in a similar fashion to the floor stand but with a short satin chrome pillar, with
adjustment by means of a clamp, designed to support the microphone 100mm to 200mm above the desktop.
Construct the flexible gooseneck shaft from stainless steel flexible tubing of not less than 300mmm an permits
easy bending in any direction.
Fit the gooseneck with a thread insert and an XLR type connector for easy mounting onto a desk stand on one
end and a microphone on the other.
630 LOUDSPEAKERS
631 GENERAL
Use speakers that are dust and water protected to IP65 where necessary. Ensure each speaker has an integrated
100 V line transformer with power tappings of 30/15/7.5/3.75W and has a rated maximum power input of 6W
RMS.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Terminate outdoor speakers through weatherproof type plugs and sockets provided with a push on cap and cap
retaining ring.
To facilitate the easy removal of indoor speakers, terminate each speaker through a 2 Amp three pin plug and
socket complying with BS 546.
632 HORN SPEAKER

General Purpose Horn Speaker:
- an axis frequency response not to vary by more than ± 10.0dB over the frequency range 250Hz to 6000Hz
- sensitivity greater than 103dB/W
Wide Range Horn Speaker:
- an axis frequency response not to vary by more than ± 10dB over the frequency range 200Hz to 15000Hz
- sensitivity greater than 95dB/W
633 CEILING MOUNT SPEAKER

Ensure the speaker is either suitable for flush mounting to a false ceiling of any configuration, or for surface
mounting if there is no false ceiling. Equip with a multiple tapping matching transformer to provide easy control
of speaker sound volume. Provide supporting brackets of differing configurations to mount each speaker.
- an axis frequency response not to vary more than ± 10.0dB over the frequency range 200Hz to 8000Hz
- sensitivity greater than 90dB/W.
640 AMPLIFIERS
641 MIXER POWER AMPLIFIER

- power on/off switch

- mains ‘On’ indicator
- rack mountable
- independent mixing volume control for each input
- master volume, bass and treble controls
- three core flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains supply and earth connection
- balanced floating outputs of 70V and 100V for loudspeaker connections
- AC and DC fuse protection
- standard sockets complete with plug and locking rings for each input and terminals for loudspeaker output
- minimum rated output power of 120W
- 50-15,000 Hz ±3dB frequency response
- minimum 4 microphone inputs, XLR balanced 200Ω low impedance connectors

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- microphone input sensitivity no greater than 0.5mV for rated output for source impedance of 200Ω to 600Ω
balanced
- high level input sensitivity not to be greater than 400mV for rated output for source impedance up to 50kΩ
- total harmonic distortion at rated output not to exceed 2% between 50 and 15,000 Hz distortion does not
increase at lower power output
- noise level to be better than 65dB below rated output with input shorted, over the frequency range 50 to
15,000 Hz unweighted
- frequency response not to vary more than ±2dB over the frequency range 50 to 15,000 Hz at rated output
- 48V DC phantom power
642 MIXER PREAMPLIFIER


- rack mountable
- independent mixing volume control for each input
- master volume, bass and treble controls
- three core flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains supply and earth connection
- microphone input sensitivity no greater than 0.5mV for rated output for source impedance of 200Ω to 600Ω
balanced
- high level input sensitivity not to be greater than 400mV for rated output for source impedance up to 500kΩ
- output impedance of 600Ω balanced
- frequency response not to vary more than ±2dB over the frequency range 50Hz to 15,000 Hz at rated output
- total harmonic distortion at rated output not to exceed 1% between 50 and 15,000 Hz distortion does not
- base control ±10dB at 100Hz
- treble control ±10dB at 10,000Hz
- noise level to be better than 80dB below rated output with input shorted, over the frequency range 50 to
15,000Hz unweighted
643 POWER AMPLIFIER

- minimum output power rating (RMS) of 1.0kW per channel

- rack mountable
- input protection against overload
- volume, bass and treble controls

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- balanced floating output of 70V and 100V for loudspeaker connection

- standard sockets complete with plug and locking rings for each input and terminals for loudspeaker output
- input sensitivity not to be greater than 0.77V for rated output for source impedance of 600Ω
- frequency response not to vary more than ±3dB over the frequency range 50Hz to 15,000 Hz at rated output
- total harmonic distortion at rated output not to exceed 1% between 50Hz and 15,000 Hz distortion does not
- noise level to be better than 70 dB below rated output with input shorted, over the frequency range 50Hz to
15,000 Hz unweighted
- output regulation to be less than 2dB from no load to full load, stable under no load conditions
650 MISCELLANEOUS
651 SPEAKER SELECTOR UNIT

Ensure the speaker selector unit allows speaker groups and all-call circuits to be selected individually, collectively
or any other combination.
Provide lamp indicators showing the conditions of use for each speaker group and the all-call circuit.
Ensure each switch is capable of handling the power of its controlling circuit.
652 MONITOR PANEL

Construct the monitor panel from stainless steel or anodised aluminium.
Provide the following minimum requirements for the panel:
- monitor speaker with volume control

- system power on/ off switch
- VU Meter
- channel selector switch
- line voltage selector switch for monitoring 70V or 100V outputs
653 RELAY CONTROL BOX

Construct the relay control box from stainless steel or anodized aluminium. Ensure box can be rack mounted.
Equip the relay control box with adequate relay sets to provide inhibit circuits to microphone inputs. Provide a
schematic diagram with the operation and maintenance manuals to show the operation of the circuit.
654 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES

Use common XLR type audio connectors for wall panels, mixer inputs, microphones etc.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
660 EQUIPMENT RACK
661 GENERAL
Locate all possible equipment, which may otherwise be loose, securely in equipment racks of a type approved by
the engineer.
Ensure each rack is floor standing, of sturdy construction from mild steel with stove enamelled finish. Each rack is
capable of accepting standard 19” width rack mounting components.
Construct and install racks in such a manner that it is not necessary to remove an item in order to gain access to
another item. Ensure each rack is fitted with suitable working lights on the back and front so thatunits can be
replaced, or solder connections made in situ without the need for other light sources.
Route main power to individual units down the left hand side of the racks when viewed from the rear, terminated
in standard mains plugs. Provide a mains distribution socket system such that the wiring is kept neat and tidy and
unit replacement is kept simple. Route signal cables down the right hand side of the racks when viewed from the
rear.
Provide mains power to the rack from a designated switched fused spur via cable contained in a flexible conduit.
Similarly bring all connections from or to the rack from other equipment via flexible conduit. Ensure each rack
provides knock-outs for propriety conduit systems.
Do not carry mains and signal/control cables in the same conduit.
662 CABLE MANAGEMENT

Ensure cabling within each rack is neat and tidy, accessible for rearrangement without excessive work, leave
good access to see the arrangement of the equipment, testing and fault finding.
663 LABELLING
Provide all racks with a schedule printed on paper and protected by a transparent plastic surface, attached to
the inside of the rack, which can clearly identify all the connections within that rack. Ensure the front panels of all
equipment clearly identifies the purpose and application of the units within.
Provide a schematic diagram showing all elements of the system, laminated and fixed to the control equipment
rack in a manner acceptable to the engineer.
Include a copy of each schedule/schematic diagram in the operating and maintenance manuals.
664 COVER PANELS

Where equipment controls are primarily used as “pre-set” controls during commissioning are mixed with
operational control or access, cover the “pre-set” controls by a screw mounted security panel which may (at the
discretion of the engineer) be transparent or translucent. The fixing of these security panels can be via
equipment mounting lugs, provided they are not used for the physical support of the equipment.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
670 POWER SUPPLY/STANDBY OPERATION

Provide a 24V DC battery support comprising battery and charger to meet the requirements of BS 5839, Part1.
Ensure the battery support has sufficient capacity to maintain the system operation for up to 24 hours in a
quiescent mode and 30 minutes at full load.
Construct the amplifiers and standby batteries in accordance with BS EN 54-4.
Ensure the battery charger is capable of re-charging discharged batteries to 100% of their rated capacity within a
24 hour period and more than 80% within 12 hours.
Ensure the power supply in the battery charger has a constant voltage output with compensation for variation in
battery temperature. Check batteries are protected from discharge by a solid state switch which disconnects the
negative terminal.
Design the power supply and supervisory board to maintain the batteries, on float charge and in good condition,
for ten years at an ambient temperature of 250 C. Ensure the charger compensates for ambient temperature
changes in order to maximise the battery life and minimise the recharge time.
Provide visual indication of mains status, battery disconnected and charger fail on the power supply module
within the VES controller as well as on the battery cabinet itself.
Provide a standby amplifier controller module and amplifier to automatically switch in a spare amplifier to replace
a failed amplifier and indicate which amplifier has failed.
700 EQUIPMENT
711 GENERAL
Ensure all equipment and systems are designed and installed to provide electromagnetic compatibility with the
system and with any other systems installed in the same locations.
712 COVERAGE AREA

Coverage area as shown on the drawings and described within this specification.
713 EQUIPMENT
Microphones
Ensure microphones comply with BS EN 60268-4.
720 EMERGENCY VOICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (EVC)
721 GENERAL
Ensure the EVC fully complies with BS 5839, BS 9999, BS 7671, BS 7827, BS EN 60849 and COP 10.
Arrange the EVC as a dual channel system, capable of transmitting two different messages simultaneously.
Configure the EVC to control and monitor all speaker circuits, control equipment, remote audio control equipment
and amplifiers.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure a minimum sound level for the attention-drawing signal of either 65dBA or 6.0dB above any other noise
likely to persist for a period longer than 30 seconds, whichever is the greater, is produced in all accessible parts
of the installation.
Ensure that the EVC obtains a minimum of 0.5 in all accessible parts of the installation when testing intelligibility
using the Room Acoustic Speech Transmission Index (RASTI) method.
722 MASTER STATION

A master station shall be provided within the building, ensure the operation of the master station is compatible
with the installation within the building.
Ensure that the following outputs from the building are relayed back to the Master Station as a minimum:
- short circuit or disconnection of any normal power supply associated with the EVC
- short circuit or disconnection of any standby power supply associated with the EVC
- short circuit or disconnection of the battery charging equipment in the EVC
- short circuit or disconnection of fuses and circuit breakers used in the EVC
- failure of any speaker circuit
- open circuit, short circuit faults on interconnecting cabling between the master station and speaker circuits
- failure of any hardware or software within the master station itself
If any of the above conditions occur, an audible warning sounds and an associated lamp illuminates to indicate
the problem. Ensure that the audible alarm is 10dB above background level noise.
723 SPEAKER CIRCUIT CONTROL UNIT

Provide a speaker circuit control unit, in the master station, which can manually activate or deactivate speaker
circuits. Provide speaker circuit control switches equipped with on, off and automatic positions and indications.
Fit a single “all call” switch that activates all speaker circuits simultaneously, also fit a push to talk microphone for
manual voice messages.
724 CABLING
Earth EVC cabling in accordance with BS 7671.
Ensure all cables used in the interconnection between components of an EVC system, and cables for the low
voltage supply to the system are of enhanced resistance to fire type and comply with BS 5839.
Lay the cabling on the dedicated fire alarm system/EVC cable tray throughout the complex. Where cables are
installed on tray, fix the cables using fire rated clips.
730 DIGITAL STORAGE MODULE

Provide a monitored digital storage module to record/ replay speech messages.
Store the recorded message on a monitored solid state, non-volatile, memory device.
Confirm with the engineer prior to installing the equipment, the content and style of the messages required.
Prior to installation, record and submit the messages to the engineer for comment. No additional costs will be
accepted for non compliance with this procedure.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
740 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

Install all equipment in the locations as indicated on the drawings.
Ensure all equipment (except portable equipment) is firmly held in place. Check fastenings and supports are
adequate to support their loads with a safety factor of at least three. If attachment to roof truss members is
required to lift equipment into place, only attach by permanent lifting eyelets provided in the roof truss. Do not
weld or drill the steel roof truss, use approved clamping arrangements employing neoprene or similar bearing
pads for permanent attachment to trusses, protecting the truss finish.
Use multi-pin connectors or terminals to mechanically and electrically interconnect various items of equipment.




- amplifiers
- back up systems
- fault monitoring systems
- loudspeakers
- system testing

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
W14 ALARM SYSTEM FOR DISABLED TOILETS

To provide systems within the building to enhance safety by the monitoring of assistance alarms for disabled
persons within the designated disabled toilets enabling an audio/visual alarm to be given so that emergency
action may be taken.

system’ section (e.g. S10, T31, V21, etc.) of this specification, the Standard referred to in the engineering system
section prevails.
Each product and each material selected by the Installer shall comply fully with the latest issue of either the
BS or the equivalent European Standard.

Provide a complete working disabled alarm systems within the building as detailed within the Specification and/or
indicated on the Drawings including 240V ac supplies and 24V dc power supply units.
Provide a ceiling-mounted pull-cord switch in each of the disabled toilets. The pull-cord switch when activated,
shall initiate an alarm status until reset. Each pull-cord shall have a red cord with toggles at 1000mm and 50mm
above finished floor level.
The pattress of the pull-cord shall illuminate on alarm to provide reassurance to the person requiring assistance
and shall stay illuminated until reset.
A manually operated reset button shall be provided and installed within the disabled toilet.
An overdoor indicator lamp/tone generator unit shall be supplied and installed above the door to each disabled
toilet. When the disabled alarm is activated the overdoor lamp and tone generator shall operate to summon
assistance.
The lamps and tone generators shall continue to operate until reset by the local manual reset button within the
cubicle.
The pull-cord unit shall be finished in white plastic. The overdoor indicator and cubicle reset unit finishes shall be
advised by the architect at a later date, for the purposes of the tender allow for brushed stainlesssteel finishes.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
400 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

Provide electronic stand alone systems, incorporating the latest solid state switching techniques, operating at
extra low voltage and powered from power supply units complete with battery backup. Provide all other
components as specified.
500 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

The system shall operate at 24-Volt dc and be wired in accordance with the selected manufacturer’s
recommendations utilising LSF/LSF multicore cables. Cables shall be installed within fully concealed Class 4
galvanised steel conduit systems in walls and above suspended ceilings.
Locate the power supply unit/control panel in the toilet area ceiling void, which shall be accessible via ceiling
mounted access panels.
Install an unswitched fused connection unit with identification label 'DISABLED PERSONS ASSISTANCE ALARM -
DO NOT ISOLATE' below the power supply unit in a suitable position.

Fully test and commission the completed disabled persons' assistance alarm systems in conjunction with the
equipment manufacturer.
Demonstrate all functions to the Engineer and to the Client after commissioning has been successfully carried out.
Record all control arrangements, settings and sequences on completion of commissioning and demonstration on
the ‘As Fitted’ Drawings and with the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
W20 SMATV

Design, supply, install, test, commission and set to work a complete and integrated television/satellite system
for performance of all functions as specified in the defined areas/building(s).
The contractor shall supply, install and commission an IF Satellite Receiving System of an approved manufacturer
and design, capable of receiving and distributing present transmission in the intermediate (IF) frequency from the
satellites as required, with sufficient allowance made to include any future expansions and backward compatibility
to DVB-S standard within the foreseeable future without degradation of the system parameters.
Carry out a pre-planned site survey to consider the required signal levels at all outlet locations to achieve the
specified signal/noise criteria.
Provide, install, test and commission a complete and integrated television system for performance of all functions
as specified, to serve all TV outlets as indicated on the Atkins FF&E drawings.
Provide all the necessary equipment and cabling for reception, processing and distribution of sound signals,
television signals, satellite signals and their associated data signals from the Single Master Antenna Television
(SMATV) system at the Data Centre.
The system to comprise of head-end equipment located within the building, low loss cable network, amplifiers,
tap-offs/splitters, system outlet, electrical supplies cable containment system and all necessary material and
components to form a functional system whether or not such items are specifically shown or described below.
Provide pre-distribution amplifiers as necessary to ensure a quality picture and sound, and good data information
at all system outlets.
Ensure the installation meets the performance requirements of BS 6513, with the exception that the signal level
for each channel measured at any system outlet shall not be higher than 3dB below the maximum or lower than
3dB above the minimum signal level specified in the British Standard.
Provide a system that allows Satellite television to be viewed from any of the outlets via the use of a decoder
box, allowing separate channels to be viewed at each outlet.
The contractor shall submit a complete proposal with BoQ, schematic drawings, list of materials and original
detailed catalogues of the equipment for consultant / client approval.

section prevails.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Local Statutory Requirements

- International Standards
- MoD Requirements
- Building Regulations
- All relevant British Standards
Ensure the system complies with all relevant regulation and codes of practice as follows:
- Code of practice for the installation of SMATV and MATV systems

Take responsibility for ensuring that the selected manufacturer’s system/equipment is fully compatible with the
building elements to which the system is to be installed.
Provide a low loss cable transmission medium network to receive the television channels.
The system shall be installed, tested and each type of equipment or material selected to comply with the British
Standard (BS) [a British Standard Institution recognised equivalent European Standard would also comply (see
latest BSI Catalogue etc.)] and any relevant statutory regulations and other application guidelines in the
specification and BS7671: the 17th Edition of the IET Wiring Regulations.
Comply with the Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations and prevent interference between TV cable networks,
radio services and other sources. All supplied components with shielding rate defined in European standard EN
50083-2 shall be used for distribution items including connecting cables for terminal equipment.
All parts and equipment related to the SMATV system shall be CE certified and tested and CE Marking shall
appear on the packaging or included in the operating instructions.
There shall be a minimum total signal cross-modulation ratio of 57dB with the maximum output for all present
and future programs set with an allowance of at least 3dB output under all known conditions.
Achieve clean signals free from reflections and/or nearby channel interference effects, or the possibility of
interference from other sources that may interfere with the SMATV system performance.
The SMATV system shall be capable of providing reception of all free to air channels available from the satellites
for digital and HD format with DVB-S2 standard, including the NILESAT (ku Band) and a provision for a second
dish antenna for future use.
The following system specifications shall be complied with:
- Standard radio frequency distribution impedance of 75-Ohms

- Return loss shall not be less than 14dB at any point
- Isolation between any two outlets shall be at least 22dB
- The system shall be such that the short or open circuit at any7 outlet socket will not significantly affect signals
at other outlets
- The system shall be capable of continuous operation 24 hours per day 365 days per year in ambient
temperatures up to +55oC

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

The primary purpose of the system is to provide the facility for Satellite signal reception at the outlets in areas of
the building, indicated on the FF&E Drawings.
Provide all access wire ways, power outlets, TV outlets, all network cabling and active equipment as necessary for
a functional system within the building.
Install distribution “Splitters” at each floor level to accommodate a star wired distribution system to each outlet
(allowing for flexibility and future expansion without having to change any active equipment).
Provide the necessary active equipment to meet the specification performance for all TV outlets.
Provide all the necessary surge protection equipment on the cabling network in compliance with BS-EN 62305.
Provide active equipment to divert high induced transient voltages to earth.
Liaise with the selected equipment manufacturer and Data Centre SMATV provider to ensure that the network
cabling lengths are suitable for the specified equipment.
Install and connect the final cabling to the outlet points as indicated on the drawings.
Where impairments in the quality or level of the signal cannot be overcome by repositioning of the aerials and/or
use of high gain aerials, fit low noise pre-amplifiers complete with their own power supply to the distribution
system.
Licensing and Planning
The installer will be responsible to ensure that any necessary SMATV licences are obtained for the installation and
the site have obtained local authority or other planning approvals.

Distribute all satellite box outputs over the cable distribution network to be available at all outlet positions.
500 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
510 GENERAL
Where specified house all internal equipment in robust well ventilated, and conditioned enclosures and be located
for convenient access at all times.
Install external equipment within suitable vandal resistant enclosures or housings providing an IP65 degree of
protection against the extremes of local environment conditions. Fit secure fastenings and locks to all such
enclosures.
Solid aluminium dishes or steel dish antennas with weatherproof/rust proof paint, for satellite reception.
Cascadable Multidiseq switches, Active type (230V A/C Input) with future extra expansion slots (minimum 5).
Minimum of Quad output LNBs must be provided with a suitable frequency matching with the satellites.
520 HEAD-END DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT

Ensure the head-end equipment is equipped complete with stabilised protected power supplies, converters,
preamplifiers, automatic gain control (AGC) attenuators, filters, satellite receivers etc., as required.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Size the head-end distribution amplifier to accommodate all selected distribution channels.
Liaise with the system specialist of the Data Centre SMATV System to ascertain the correct channel selection and
output signals for the system.
Ensure the installation has the capacity to accommodate future reception channels.
Provide all satellite receivers as modular construction types.
Satellite dish shall be suitable for Ku/Ka band and with a minimum wind load of 1270N (or 140kmph) subject to
local conditions if higher wind loadings are considered necessary.
Dishes to be connected to lightning protection system.
The output of modulators to be such that the use of further channel amplifiers for distribution is avoided.
As a minimum standard, switches shall have 8 or 9 cable systems, where 8 cables are used for the IF frequency
and 1 for RF frequency. The switches shall be cascadable.
530 AMPLIFIER EQUIPMENT

Ensure repeater amplifiers are capable of accommodating all channels within the band/channels specified and are
powered from adjacent mains power supplies.
Suitable cascadable post amplifiers shall be used as necessary along the line to compensate for the signal loss on
the cable.
The number of amplifiers shall be made as required for the final wiring layout.
Arrangements shall be made to dissipate the heat generated during normal working of the amplifier and installed
within rooms kept below 35°C.
540 DISTRIBUTION MEDIUM

Use high return loss/low attenuation coaxial type cable with nominal impedance of 75ohms to distribute the
signals over the network.
Ensure connecting cables between amplifiers on SMATV head-ends have a minimum braid cover of at least 95%.
Domestic quality (low loss) coaxial cables will not be acceptable at any point on the system.
Ensure all cabling is of the high quality, well screened type with correct and uniform impedance characteristic and
of robust construction.
Ensure connection between equipment and cables are to be properly designed and constructed to provide a high
degree of impedance matching, screening efficiency, and to minimise the generation of signal reflection within
the system.
Ensure the system is segregated from local power and fire alarm circuits and identified in accordance with
BS1710.
Comply with manufacturers recommendations for the installation of the cabling network, and ensure the
maximum bending radius and termination requirements are met.
Provide an appropriate type cabling complete with integral water barrier, for underground routes.
All sockets and connectors shall be suitable for the frequency range required.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
600 SYSTEM INSTALLATION
610 GENERAL
Provide cable terminations and equipment components with identification labels, at 3m intervals on cable routes.
Identification labels to be cross-referenced back to the record drawings and documentation. Install all cabling in
the defined routes on the drawings on dedicated cable tray/conduit/trunking.
Ensure cables are protected from mechanical damage throughout the route, either through a duct or by
mechanical tubing which will permit their future replacement, when the cabling goes through the building
structure.
In subsoil, protect cables by routing through UPVC ducts coloured “purple”.
620 POWER SUPPLIES

Provide an electrical power supplies to all the active distribution equipment, generally by means of a switched
final connection unit.
700 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

Undertake preliminary checks to ensure that the system and system components are in a satisfactory and safe
condition before commencing the commissioning.
On completion of the installation undertake the complete testing, commissioning and demonstration of the
system operation as detailed below and in accordance with the British Standards.
- Correct antenna/satellite alignment

- Correct signal strength for all satellite TV channels
- Correct signal strength for all channels.
Undertake operational selective viewing and/or listening tests on all channels provided, at each co-axial socket
outlet including any reconnected existing outlets to demonstrate the following:
- That all channels and digital interactive services operate satisfactorily

- There is no discernible difference in picture, sound quality of the same receiver, whether connected to the co-
axial socket outlets specified or to the aerial input of the head-end equipment, using attenuators if necessary
- Measuring and recording the signals levels throughout the system at the input and output of each amplifier
and at the output of the antenna(s) head-end equipment
- Demonstrate the operation of the TV sound and volume control at each outlet.
- Provide record documentation to the Engineer of all signal strength meter readings undertaken and prove the
readings to the Engineer.
- Provide full method statement for the testing, commissioning and demonstration of the system to the
Engineer 10 working days before demonstration of the system.
- Record all signal dB losses and signal strength throughout the system on completion of commissioning and
demonstration, on the “As Fitted” drawing and within the Operating and Maintenance Manual

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
W40 ACCESS CONTROL

To design, provide, install, commission, and demonstrate a security access control system to allow the user to
manage and control access to specified areas and according to user-defined access levels.
To monitor the movement of persons in real time in specific locations.
To ensure that the system does not prevent persons from escaping in the event of a fire.
To provide a system that allows the user to easily add, suspend, cancel, or change the access control information
and authorisations of any person or groups of people.
To ensure that the system continues to function throughout any interruption of the electricity supply that powers
it.

section prevails.

- BS EN 50133-1 Alarm systems - Access control systems for use in security applications. System requirements
- BS EN 50133-2-1 Alarm systems - Access control systems for use in security applications. General
requirements for components
- BS EN 50133-7 Alarm systems - access control systems for use in security applications. Application
- guidelines
- BS EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
- BSIA No. 173 Access Control: a guide to assist in compliance with the Disability Discrimination Act NACP 30
Code of Practice for Planning, Installation and Maintenance of Access Control Systems
- Disability Discrimination Act
- The Data Protection Act

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- The Data Protection (Processing of Sensitive Personal Data) Order

- The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations
- The Private Security Industries Act
- The Requirements of the Local Council
- The Requirements of the Fire Department

Ensure that the Access Control System complies with the required room classifications as set out in the Room
Data Sheets Security Column within Appendix 2, and in accordance with BS EN 50133-1.
Provide a system that efficiently utilises a data network operating on TCP/IP protocol as the medium for
transmitting all access control and control data between the components of the system.
220 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

The following terms, definitions, acronyms, and abbreviations may be used in this specification.
310 SYSTEM CLASSIFICATIONS

For individual room classifications, refer to the building specific Room Data Sheets included within Appendix 2.
The classifications and levels of security protection are summarised as follows:
- Unclassified Lock and Key

- Restricted Access Control
- Confidential Access Control + Window and Fire Exits Alarmed
- Secret Access Control + Window and Fire Exits Alarmed + Intruder Detection.
The automated access control and alarm system will be a specialist design package.
The racks shall be complete with any system hardware/amplifiers/boosters etc. as well as any other equipment
required to provide a complete system capable of relaying the signal from the individual monitored points through
the Building’s SCR over the site wide IT Building Services fibre optic network to the main Access Control and
Security System Server housed within the Data Centre Building Services dedicated racks. From these racks the
system shall report to the head end located in the Data Centre security room.
Capability shall be provided for this system to be connected to the site wide Adam Air Base Security System
Centre which sits outside of this scope of works.
311 UNCLASSIFIED
Unclassified areas as defined within Appendix 2 – Room Data Sheets, shall be controlled with suited lock and key
systems tailored to the door type and function as set out by the Architectural design.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
312 RESTRICTED
Restricted areas shall have a proprietary swipe card, or proximity pad, security system with an automated card
reader at each access door of the room(s) as defined ‘restricted’ within the Appendix 2 Room Data Sheets.
Where more than one card reader exists in a particular room these may be patched together through a modbus
or similar.
The card reader shall be complete with power supply and LAN data point.
All controlled doors shall be equipped with powered magnetic hold close devices.
A fire alarm interface shall be provided, complete with power and a LAN outlet point, to isolate the power to the
hold close devices in the event of an emergency.
In addition an internal operation only telephone data point shall be positioned adjacent to the card reader for
ability to request manual access.
Room egress shall generally be through a push button exit switch that shall interrupt the electrical supply to the
magnetic hold close device.
313 CONFIDENTIAL
Confidential areas as defined within Appendix 2 – Room Data Sheets, shall have a proprietary card reader system
as described within 312 Restricted access section above.
In addition all windows and fire exits will be complete with a break contact alarm system which reports over the
same arrangement as the swipe card system, via the Data Centre and to the Security System Head end in the
Data Centre Security Room.
314 SECRET
Secret areas as defined within Appendix 2 – Room Data Sheets, shall have a proprietary card reader system and
all windows and fire exits monitored as described within 313 Confidential access section above.
In addition an Infra red intruder movement detection system shall be provided.
The intruder system shall be complete with essential power electrical supply and IT data points located within the
room, that will report upon an unauthorised activation in the room outside of those hours set through the system
head end.
315 GENERAL
The system does not allow access to the secure side of any access point fitted with a token reader on one side
only, unless a valid access token is presented to the token reader. Any user is able to open such doors from the
secure side by manually operating a mechanism. Refer to the drawings and Appendix 2, for room security
requirements throughout the facility to identify access control points.
All access points are fitted with separate fire alarm interfaces and battery backup UPS to maintain the access
control system in the event of mains power failure.
All doors will be in a locked position, with the access control system providing power open control. In the event of
power failure all doors will remain shut, however, egress form the room for safety purposes will still be possible
via the manually operated exit mechanism on the secure side of the door.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Every time a token is presented to a token reader, the reader gives both visual and audible indication of
acceptance or rejection of the token.
Every time a token is presented to a token reader, the system records the accurate time and date of the event,
the unique identification of the token, the identification of the token reader, and whether access has been denied
or granted. This information is stored securely in an event log which is not affected by interruption of the mains
power supply.
The system sounds a local buzzer and a siren in the security office, and generates an alarm signal when an
access point is forced open without access being granted by the system.
All alarm signals are recorded in a secure log.
The user is able to view, control, and set up the system at any time through any personal computer connected to
the computer network. Access to these functions is controlled through authorisation codes.
The user is able to view the status of all networked access points, obtain an accurate and up-to-date list of all
persons present in the building, view any event log and alarm log, and retrieve all access control and related data
based on search criteria such as token identification, token reader, and time period.
All manually operated access points are fail secure, and operate normally and without interruption for at least 8
hours during interruption of the electrical power supply. Automatic access points revert to manual operation for
the duration of the interruption.
The areas identified in Clause 200 shall be compliant with the ATEX and DSEAR Regulations. All equipment
safe.
400 SCOPE OF WORKS
The Builder will provide automatic door closers on all access control, manually operated doors.
The Electrical Installer will provide a power outlet, including all cables and containment:
- At each access point

- At each secure door
The Electrical Installer will provide containment for all cabling to an RJ45 outlet:

The Electrical Installer will provide a telephone outlet, including all cables and containment:

The Electrical Installer will provide all containment for LV and ELV power, communication, and ITC cabling to
all access point equipment, including all:
- Readers
- Push buttons

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Break glass units

- Locks
- control stations
- Sounders
- Magnetic door monitors
The Electrical Installer will provide a local UPS battery backup adjacent to each secure outlet.
The IT installer will provide the complete computer network, including all head end and network equipment, LAN
and WAN cabling, and local RJ45 outlets.
The IT Installer will provide an RJ45 socket outlet:

The IT Installer will provide a PoE network switch in the SCR as required.
The IT Installer will provide all standard 19” equipment racks.
The Builder will provide door closures and openers.
The Builder will provide all cut-outs to any door or frame to accommodate access control hardware and door
cable loops.
420 INSTALLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

The access control system, including the number of points and position of equipment described within this
specification and on the accompanying drawings is indicative for Tendering purposes and shall be confirmed by
the specialist designer subject to review of these documents.
Employ a specialist Access Control Installer to design, install, test, commission and demonstrate the entire access
control system. Ensure the Access Control Installer has the necessary expertise and capacity to provide
professional and timely maintenance and emergency repair services of the entire system during the design life of
the system. Ensure that the access control specialist coordinates with the site wide IT specialist and electrical
installers to install a coordinated package.
Ensure that all current and recurrent software licence fees are included within the tender return related to the
Client’s use of any software supplied by the Access Control Installer. Transfer the licences to the Client at the end
of the defects liability period.
Provide a common IP-based ODBC-compliant database to allow cause-and-effect functionality between the
various security systems.
Ensure that the installation of all door locking equipment for wooden, glass, and metal doors can be successfully
implemented without degradation of any fire separation, aesthetic, or architectural requirements of the doors or
door frames. For every type of electromagnetic lock incorporated in the system obtain Building Control approval
of its Fire Rating Certificate.
Liaise with the Architect to agree on the positioning and style of all access point hardware.
List all Builder required installations at the time of tender.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Take responsibility for providing the Builder with all builder-related information required to prepare and construct
building elements suitable for installation of access control equipment.
Liaise with the Electrical Installer to ensure that all power supply and containment installations comply with the
requirements of the access control system, and to agree on the exact position of back boxes and other outlets.
Liaise with the IT Installer to ensure that all space and installation provisions for access control equipment in IT
racks comply with the requirements of the access control equipment.
Liaise with the IT installer to agree on the positioning of all RJ45 outlets.
Include in the Tender all costs associated with 3 No. post Practical Completion visits to the site by the access
control installer, to re-align door locks that fail owing to door settlement.
Take responsibility for ensuring that the selected manufacturer’s systems and equipment are fully compatible with
the building elements to which the system is to be interfaced to meet the performance requirements detailed
herein.
510 CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Arrange the system software to permit system wide control and monitoring functions, either manually via the
keyboard, or automatically via time programs. These are to include, but not be limited to, the following.
- Individual token reader enable/disable

- Individual access point controlled or free access
- Groups to enable different access authorizations
520 SOFTWARE
521 GENERAL
Ensure that the system application software runs under an industry standard, multi-user operating system and is
mature, field proven and in commercial operation.
Arrange its design to provide a logical series of steps for its establishment, operator training, and maintenance,
so that it is complementary to personnel conversant with security practices and possess standard office computer
skills.
Equip the system to produce a hard copy printout of all data base and system configuration tables, on the
demand of the Security Manager. Provide a list of available reports along with the tender return.
Ensure that the system is capable of supporting multiple operator and administration terminals, each interacting
in real-time mode with the CPU.
522 SOFTWARE ACCESS

Construct the software in levels, with corresponding operation manuals, so that individuals can be conveniently
trained up to, but not beyond, the level of their involvement in the system’s operation. Provide a minimum of 5
levels of system access.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
523 DATABASE BACK-UP FACILITY

Provide a system that maintains back-up copies of the software for later use in re-constructing a lost or damaged
file, and for historical interrogation of system activity, without affecting normal system operation. Ensure that the
system does not overwrite current files with back-up data until it is fully restored. Thus a system failure during its
restoration procedure cannot corrupt existing system files.
524 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS

Provide an on-line diagnostics utility that enables rapid assessment of vital operating parameters.
525 USER GENERATED GRAPHICS

Ensure that the system has the ability to support dynamic graphical displays (maps) comprising text and
bitmapped images for the purpose of event annunciation, system status display and explanatory maps.
Arrange that users are able to generate high-resolution free hand and rigid line representations.
Ensure the system has the facility to construct graphics from data stored on the latest edition of AutoCAD.
Arrange that graphical displays have the ability to be available on demand, and be presented to the operator
within two seconds of the request being made. Provide at least three layers of graphics to achieve a zoom facility.
Issue sample formats to the Engineer for comment prior to installation and allowing sufficient time to match all
required changes.
526 HISTORICAL TRANSACTION LOGS

Arrange that an authorised operator can maintain a historical file of all system and operator activity that is
accessible at any time.
Ensure that from this, it is possible to extract any data and present it in a readable and meaningful format for
analysis of both current and archived information.
527 TOKENHOLDER DATABASE

Provide a database to provide for tokenholder records. The database is to contain at least the following details for
each tokenholder:
- Title
- Full names, Surname
- Position
- Department
- Employer
- Status (e.g. staff, student, visitor)
- Full colour photograph
- Access authorisation (e.g. valid access points, valid time periods, automatic expiry dates and times, anti-
passback settings)
- Tokenholder visited
- Tokenholder designated as the visitor’s escort

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Token identification
- Name of operator who last edited the data
- Date on which the data was last edited
Ensure that the access control database is populated automatically from the common staff database, so that data
need only be captured once.
Ensure that all records are indexed in the internal system directory, and are capable of being displayed by a
search function for full or part matches in one or more record fields.
Ensure that it is possible to search the entire database and find any tokenholder file or groups of tokenholders
matching defined search criteria. Arrange the search options to cover any of the fields used in the database.
Ensure that wild token searches, as well as additive or subtractive searches can be supported.
Ensure that it is possible to allocate specific access levels to every individual token that will define at which token
readers the token will be accepted. Also ensure that it is possible to allocate time codes to every individual token,
which will define the times at which the token will operate specific token readers. Arrange the system to have
variances of access levels and time codes to encompass all final site requirements.
Ensure that it is possible for the security administrator to alter the levels of access on all access control tokens,
temporarily cancel them and reinstate them.
600 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
610 TIME AND DATE

Provide a time and date generator as an integral part of the surveillance system.
Provide an automatic accuracy check and correction function to ensure the time and date remains accurate at all
times, and that it automatically adjusts for official seasonal time adjustments and leap years.
Ensure that the time and date are identical on all parts of the system and on any other interfaced system at all
times.
Provide a means of easily checking and verifying the clock accuracy, suitable for use in legal proceedings in a
court of law.
620 TOKEN CONTROL
621 ACCESS AUTHORISATION

Provide a system to grant or deny access through any access point at any time. Ensure that the system allows
the user to select and change the access authorisation settings for each tokenholder individually, for any number
of groups of tokenholders, and for all tokenholders. The following authorisation settings are to be provided as a
minimum:
- The authorised access points

- The times during which various access points are authorised
- The expiry time and date of the authorisation
- The anti-passback settings
- The identity of the tokenholder’s escort

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
622 ANTI PASS-BACK

Provide the system with the facility for anti-pass-back that permits the security administrator to define any
number of anti-pass-back controlled areas within the secured areas.
Arrange the software to be able to track every tokenholder to the anti-pass-back area in which that tokenholder
is presently located. Ensure that the system is able to produce a list of tokenholders present in any given area.
Incorporate a means of removing pass-back control for individual tokenholders, or for all tokenholders.
623 ESCORTED ACCESS

Arrange the system with a facility for controlling and logging visitor movements on the site. Ensure that when the
escorted access rule is applied to an area, the system only permits access to a visitor token when a designated
escort token is accepted by the system.
624 TIME CONTROL

Ensure that the system supports various time zones. Arrange that each time zone provides two periods for each
day of the week. Ensure that the system allows for all time zones to be applied at least for the following:
- To deny access outside certain hours

- To de-activate token readers during certain hours
- To enable groups of alarms during certain hours
630 RECORDING
631 HISTORICAL RECORDING

Record all system and operator activity related to the access control system, utilising digital media. Ensure that
recall of all such data is available on demand for all parameters.
632 TRACKIN
Provide a comprehensive tracking feature to allow the user to track the movements of any token.
640 TAMPER ARRANGEMENTS

Fit tamper switches to monitor all equipment enclosures or junction boxes carrying signals for the security
system.
650 RELIABILITY
Design the security access control system for trouble free operation with a design life expectancy of at least 10
years.
660 COMMUNICATIONS
Ensure that all data is error checked and source verified.
Ensure data encryption is utilised wherever communication links are located outside a protected area.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure all controllers are polled continuously and any failures to respond are immediately enunciated at the main
computer/processor.
670 SYSTEM INTERFACES

Arrange for the access control system to interface with the following systems:
- Vehicle traffic lights

- Surveillance
- Intruder alarm
- Fire alarm
- BMS
- Paging
- Intercom
- Modem
- Other alarms
- Internal lighting
- External lighting
Provide all power supplies, input/output devices, and volt free contacts to enable the different devices to
interface. Liaise with each service provider to agree requirements to interface the systems to provide the desired
outcome.
700 EQUIPMENT
710 CONTAINMENT
Liaise with the Electrical Installer to ensure that all security system cabling is contained in metal trunking or
galvanised metal conduit throughout its length.
Ensure that all RJ45 outlets located in non-secure areas are installed in vandal-proof, lockable, secure box, of
Sarel manufacture or equal and approved.
720 CABLES
Supply and install all cables fully in accordance with Section Y61 of this Specification.
Utilise suitable control cabling under 50 V.
Utilise a bi-directional polling loop arrangement for the wiring of all token readers and monitoring controllers.
Ensure the transfer of electrical connections onto doors is via suitable flexible cables with protected armouring.
730 ACCESS POINT HARDWARE

Where indicated on the drawings, install a locally mounted electronic siren to give audible annunciation of no less
than 100 dB at 1 000 mm, or 6 dB above ambient noise at 1 000 mm if ambient noise is in excess of 94 dB, of
the door being forced or held open beyond a user definable programmed time, prior to transmission of this alarm
to the central control system.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that central annunciation of access point forced, held open, or token misuse conditions occur within two
seconds, irrespective of other system activities.
Ensure that the locks on all access points on fire escape routes release automatically when a fire signal from the
fire alarm panel is received.
731 CONTROLLERS
Provide controllers at each access point, to integrate the functions of access control, input monitoring and local
output control.
Provide all controllers to poll connected token readers and grant or deny access, according to them tokenholder’s
individual access authority.
Arrange the design of the system so that the elapsed time between a valid token read and the activation of the
door output will not exceed two seconds, irrespective of other system activity.
Arrange every controller to monitor access point alarms and report these to the central control computer or
server.
Ensure that all controllers are fully intelligent and capable of operating either in a "host decision" or "standalone”
mode, depending upon the specific software requirements. Base such determinations on "local” versus "global"
control facilities, including alarm input and output control, anti pass-back and other facilities offered by the
system software.
Ensure all controller inputs are filtered to prevent mal-operation due to electrical or electronic noise on the
system.
Incorporate into all controllers built-in diagnostics utilising both hardware and software.
Arrange every controller to maintain, in internal non-volatile memory, the entire system applicable programme
pertinent to its local area, and to process all tasks, thus freeing the central processor from the burden of real-
time decision making.
Ensure that all controllers buffer real-time events and reader transactions in internal memory, for later uploading
when polled by the host computer. Make the transaction buffer expandable for multiple events as a contingency,
in the event of a prolonged communications failure with the host.
Arrange every controller to provide a non-degraded level of fall back intelligence and maintain full local operation
of all connected equipment in the event of communication failure with the host computer. In this mode, local
programming of access control functions to be available, either via an integral keypad or a plugin programming
unit.
Ensure that failure of any individual controller does not compromise communications to, or operation of, any
other controller within the system.
Install, integral with every controller, a battery power supply and charger sized to match the number of token
readers, locking devices and exit door sounders. Ensure that every such battery is a sealed lead acid type rated
for at least 4 hours, with a minimum battery life of 5 years.
Install all controllers on the secure side of internal access points, or in secure locations near external access
points.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
732 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS

Provide every networked access controlled door with a low voltage electromagnetic lock to match the fire
integrity of the door rating and to effectively secure and release the door.
Ensure that the locks engage automatically when returned to the closed position.
Provide a position monitoring device integral with every electromagnetic lock. Arrange that central annunciation
of forced, door held open, or token misuse conditions occur within two seconds, irrespective of other system
activities. Agree the style and colour of all electronic locks and fixtures with the Architect prior to purchasing.
733 ELECTRONIC HANDLE SETS

Provide electronic handle sets to effectively lock and release doors. Take responsibility for coordinating the design
and installation of these sets with the Architectural design before placing an order for the equipment.
Each set is to consist of two handles and a token reader on the non-secure side. Ensure that the handle on the
secure side allows any user to open the door without the need for a token.
Ensure that the mechanism unlocks the door lock when presented with valid token, and that it locks automatically
when the door is closed. Ensure that the mechanism is operated with the same tokens as the networked access
control system.
Provide a system for allowing the user to upload and download programming and data to and from any electronic
handle set, by means of presenting a programmed token to the reader.
Provide a system of recording the last 500 transactions in each mechanism, and for retrieving this information
and incorporating it in the database of the networked access control system.
Ensure that every electronic handle set provides visual and audible indication that the token has been read and
access granted or denied.
Provide an integral, replaceable battery to power each lock for at least 30 000 operations.
734 ELECTRONIC CYLINDERS

Provide electronic cylinder lock mechanisms to effectively lock and release doors. Ensure that the mechanisms fit
exactly into the proposed door handle assembly. Take responsibility for coordinating the design and installation of
these mechanisms with the Architect before placing an order for the equipment. Each mechanism is to consist of
a token reader on the non-secure side, and a thumb-turn on the secure side.
Ensure that the mechanism unlocks the door lock when presented with valid token, and that it locks automatically
when the door is closed. Ensure that the mechanism is operated with the same tokens as the networked access
control system.
Provide a system for allowing the user to upload and download programming and data to and from any electronic
cylinder, by means of presenting a programmed token to the mechanism.
Provide a system of recording the last 500 transactions in each mechanism, and for retrieving this information
and incorporating it in the database of the networked access control system.
Ensure that every electronic cylinder provides visual and audible indication that the token has been read and
access granted or denied.
Provide an integral, replaceable battery to power each lock for at least 30 000 operations.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
735 TOKEN READERS

Ensure that every reader provides visual and audible indication that the token has been read and access granted
or denied.
Note that the location of readers and egress push buttons shown on the drawings are indicative only.
Ensure that all readers are physically located such that users are in no danger of being struck by the opening or
by the closing action of the controlled door. Mount readers at a height that will achieve ease of use for both able
and disabled personnel. Agree all hardware positions with the Engineer and Architect on site and, if appropriate,
after consultations with the Local Authority.
Hardwire all token readers and associated locking devices to a local control unit.
736 VALIDATION POINTS

Ensure that the user can set different validity periods for any token or any group of tokens, and that that each
token or group of tokens can be validated for any access points.
737 KEYPADS
Provide weatherproof keypads as shown on the drawings. Set up the system so that access is only allowed upon
entering the correct four-digit code. Ensure that the user is able to set and change any of these codes, as well as
the time periods during which they are valid, at any time after installation.
738 MANUAL ACCESS POINT RELEASE

Provide semi-flush mounted green break glass units clearly marked “Emergency Door Release” on the secure side
of all doors and barriers on fire exit routes. Ensure that power to the locking mechanism is disconnected when
the unit is operated, so that the connected door releases and remains in the released state until the system is
reset.
739 AUTOMATIC ACCESS POINT RELEASE

Ensure that all access points are fail-secure, so that an interruption to the power supply to the door does not
cause the locks to release.
Provide an interface with the intruder alarm system at each of the doors and barriers on fire exit routes.
Ensure that power to the locking mechanism is disconnected and automatic barriers and doors opened when a
signal is received from the fire alarm system, so that the connected door releases and remains in the released
state until the system is reset.
740 ACCESS CONTROL TOKENS

Ensure that only tokens validated by the security administrator are accepted by the Access Control System and
that an alarm is generated when unauthorised or incompatible tokens are used.
Ensure that every token is individually identified by carrying unique site and user data.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
750 CENTRAL EQUIPMENT
751 PERSONAL COMPUTER

Provide a 19” rack-mounted personal computer with 19” LCD TFT high resolution colour monitor and all software
to set up, monitor, and control all functions of the access control system.

Provide in-line protectors or barriers to protect against lightning strikes on all power and communication circuits
from external equipment.
Comply with Section W52 of this specification.
770 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY AND SCREENING

Ensure all systems comply with the EMC Directive and all associated EMC regulations.

900 IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES

Cabling to be clearly and unobtrusively labelled at the distribution and control panels to facilitate future
maintenance and servicing. A cross-reference chart showing the relationship between cables and devices to be
held by the installer and form part of the record drawings.
Install signage throughout the site in accordance with statutory and regulatory requirements.
1010 GENERAL
Carry out an offsite demonstration to confirm that the proposed access control system’s performance and
software capabilities are in accordance with this specification. Provide a detailed method statement for review
and comment by the Main Contractor and Engineer prior to such demonstration.
On completion of the installation of the access control system, carry out, with the selected specialist security
system contractor, the complete testing, commissioning and demonstration of the system’s operation to the
Engineer, in accordance with section A32 of this Specification and the requirements of NACP 30.

Visually examine the wiring installation, including the following:
- Check for segregation to BS 7671.

- Check supports are provided in accordance with the relevant standards and manufacturers recommendations.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Check that cable entry holes are protected with grommets, glands or restraining straps as appropriate.
- Check that the system is correctly earthed.
- Check continuity.
- Check that all interconnecting wiring is positioned and/or protected so that any tampering will create an alarm
1030 PROCEDURES
Undertake the following commissioning procedures:
System
- Test all reader devices and demonstrate that the system meets with the overall operation and control
functional requirements detailed
- Calibrate all field devices
- Record and provide a printed record of the events recorded during the commissioning
- On completion of the commissioning and testing, provide a certificate of conformity
- Simulated test of all devices monitored on the PC and on a printer
- Access level security on the integrated system
- Alarm annunciation on the PC and at the remote site
- Software graphics is fully demonstrated
- Site plans on computer are current
- Check release times for each door
- Check door held open signal
Communication link
Where a remote centre is used, ensure that the alarm communication link to the remote manned station is fully
tested and commissioned as follows:
- Check the link before connecting the system.

- Warn the remote centre of the test.
- Initiate the alarm and contact the remote control centre/ station and confirm that the alarm condition has
been received.
- Confirm the end of testing once the system links have been fully commissioned
Interfaces
Commission every system scheduled below independently and as an integrated, co-ordinated system:
- Access control system

- Closed circuit television system
- Alarm monitoring system
- Intercom facilities
- Fire alarm system
- BMS
- Vehicle traffic light system

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Lighting control
Commission the access control system under normal power supply conditions, followed by a simulated power
failure that proves that the backup UPS supports the system.
Test, prove and commission the interfaces with the following systems under normal and emergency power
modes:
- Fire detection and alarm system

- BMS
Provide hard copy print outs of all elements proven to have been commissioned.
1040 INSTRUCTION OF EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE

Provide instruction in accordance with Section A37 of this Specification and the following:
Arrange for specialist security system contractor to provide a minimum of 2 day’s (8 hours a day) instruction of
the complete system for two Employer’s representatives before the contract completion date. Explain how to
report problems and how to record them in the log books. Provide hand books to every trainee with one spare
copy.
1110 SUBMISSIONS WITH TENDER
1111 TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Submit with the tender, technical information about the following, with sufficient detail to enable physical
dimensions, aesthetics and proposed layouts to be appreciated:
- Network hardware
- System software
- Readers
- Electromagnetic locks
- Electronic cylinders
- Intercom call stations
- Intercom apartment stations
- Intercom concierge stations
Provide financial details for the past 3 years on the proposed specialist Security System contractor.
1112 DOCUMENTATION
Submit with the tender the following documentation:
- Certification to demonstrate specialist control system designers governing body affiliation

- A list of recent projects of size and complexity comparable to the tendered project where the Access Control
System Installer has successfully completed installations, and contact details of the Client’s representative on
each project

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- A compliance certificate listing all items proposed that do not comply fully with this specification, as well as
justification for each incidence of non-compliance
- A method statement indicating how the proposed system will interface with all the listed systems, highlighting
any compatibility issues
1113 FINANCIAL INFORMATION

Submit financial details for the past 3 years of the proposed specialist Surveillance System Installer.
Submit a separate cost and details of a maintenance plan for a period of 12 months, to include regular
inspections and tests of the entire system, as well as all manufacturers’ system software upgrades released
during the period. List all services or costs not included in the proposed plan.
Submit a cost for extending the maintenance contract for a total of 2, 3 and 5 years. This cost shall include for all
manufacturers system software upgrades released during the period of the contract.
Include within the price all labour and materials necessary to effect a complete operating addition to the access
control system installation.
1120 SUBMISSIONS DURING THE CONTRACT
1121 GENERAL
Submit for the Engineer’s comment in accordance with Section A37 of this Specification:
- Full working drawings of all cable and containment routes co-ordinated with all the other trade packages.
- Fully detailed drawings to indicate how the door hardware equipment co-ordination has been affected
- Sample formats for user generated graphics allowing sufficient time to match all required changes
- Acceptance test certificate for every off-the-shelf item integrated into the system without being modified or
tailed
- Approval by the local Fire Prevention Officer of the Fire Rating Certificate for every type of electromagnetic
lock proposed for the system
- Method statements for the installation of all hardware, equipment, containment, cabling, testing and
commissioning
- Full and concise documentation on how to put the system into operation
- Record drawings and operating and maintenance manuals
- User’s log books for the system
1122 SAMPLES
Provide samples of all items which may be viewed in or on the building within the normally occupied internal
or external space. All samples are to be submitted and approved prior to confirmation of orders for supply.
Deliver samples to the Engineer’s offices or such other location as may be identified from time to time.
Provide as a minimum samples of all types of:
- Readers
- Electromagnetic locks and Electronic cylinders

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Intercom call stations

- Intercom concierge stations

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
W41 INTRUDER ALARM SYSTEM

To design, provide, install, commission, and demonstrate an intruder alarm and emergency alarm system that will
automatically transmit an alarm when an unauthorised person enters or is present in protected areas, or when
any person activates the emergency alarm.
To ensure that the system is self-testing and that the user is automatically notified of any tamper or system fault.

section prevails.

- BS 5979 Code of practice for remote centres receiving signals from security systems
- BS 8473 Intruder and hold-up alarm systems. Management of false alarms. Code of practice.
- BS EN 50131-6 Alarm systems. Intrusion systems. Power supplies
- BS EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
- DD 243 Installation and configuration of intruder alarm systems designed to generate confirmed alarm
conditions. Code of practice.
- DD CLC/TS 50131-7 Alarm systems. Intrusion systems. Application guidelines
- PD 6662:2004 Scheme for the application of European Standards for intruder and hold-up alarms
- prEN 50131-1:2004 Alarm systems - Intrusion and hold-up systems Part 1: System requirements
- JSP 440
- The Data Protection Act
- The Data Protection (Processing of Sensitive Personal Data) Order
- The Disability Discrimination Act
- The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations
- The Noise and Statutory Nuisance Act

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- The Private Security Industries Act

- The requirements of the Local Council
- The requirements of the user’s insurers
- EFDC Dirty: Explosion Proof.

Provide an intruder alarm system to transmit alarm notifications to on-site staff and a remote third party alarm
receiving centre within the CENTER building when any unauthorised person attempts to enter or is present in any
protected space.
Provide a system to allow the user to easily set and unset the system or a part of the system.
Provide audible and visual warning devices to alert the user of any genuine alarm condition and to deter or
disturb perpetrators.
Provide deliberately operated devices to create alarm conditions and to notify the user of emergency situations.
Select individual detectors and install, commission and test the system in accordance with the design parameters
so as to minimise the likelihood of any false alarms.
Provide control and indicating equipment to monitor the alarm circuits for communication integrity and for the
detection of intruders, to process the information and to indicate the alarm condition and also to provide means
for operating the intruder alarm system.
Where required, integrate the system with the surveillance, access control, and building management systems, as
outlined elsewhere.
Provide control equipment to manage authorisations and setting and unsetting of systems, monitor system
integrity, receive alarms from detectors and deliberately operated devices, and transmit alarm notifications to
annunciators and remote receiving devices and control centres.
220 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

The following terms and definitions may be used in this specification.
Term Definition
Access level Level of access to particular functions of the intruder alarm system, as described in
prEN 50131-1:2004.
Alarm Warning of an intrusion, attempted intrusion, or manual operation of a device.
Alarm notification A signal sent to a warning device, control device, or alarm transmission device, as a
result of the presence of an alarm condition.
Component A single part of the intruder alarm system, such as a detector or a sounder.
Environmental The environmental class as described in prEN 50131-1:2004.
classification
Emergency alarm Any alarm triggered manually by the user and not an intruder.
Confirmed alarm An alarm event detected by more than one independent detector.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Term Definition
Genuine alarm An alarm condition when:

condition - an unauthorised person is present in the protected space,
- an unauthorised person attempts to enter a protected space, or
- a manually operated alarm is triggered by a user.
Intruder alarm Alarm system comprising intruder alarm and emergency alarm. The term includes,
but is not limited to, Intruder and Hold-up Alarm Systems (I&HAS) as defined in
prEN50131-1.
Intruder alarm system All components of the intruder and emergency alarm system, including but not
limited to control panels, keypads, power supplies, detectors, manually operated
devices, emergency alarm devices, warning devices, transmission equipment, and
software.
Level 1 Access levels as defined in prEN 50131-1:2004
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Protected space Any area that is supervised by the intruder alarm system, and in which the part of
the intruder alarm system is set.
Security grade The security grade as described in prEN 50131-1:2004.
Security administrator A user who is authorised to add, delete, and change user names and authorisation
codes, and to adjust the setup of the system.
Set The condition in which the system is able to detect intruders and notify alarms.
Unset The condition in which the system is not able to detect intruder and notify alarms.
User The security operator, supervisor, administrator, or any other person designated by
the end user of the system.
Acronym Term
BMS Building management system

EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
GMT Greenwich mean time
GSM Global system for mobile communication
ISDN Integrated services digital network
LAN Local area network
LCD Liquid crystal display
PC Personal computer
PIN Personal identification number
PoE Power over Ethernet
PSTN Public switched telephone network

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
310 SYSTEM CLASSIFICATIONS

The classifications and levels of security protection are summarised as follows:
- Unclassified Lock and Key

- Restricted Access Control
- Confidential Access Control + Window and Fire Exits Alarmed
- Secret Access Control + Window and Fire Exits Alarmed + Intruder Detection
The automated access control and alarm system will be a specialist design package.
Field devices shall operate over the Local Area Network (LAN) to the Building Services rack within each of the
Buildings.
The rack shall be complete with any system hardware/amplifiers/boosters etc. as well as any other equipment
required to provide a complete system capable of relaying the signal from the individual monitored points through
the Building’s SCR over the site wide IT Building Services fibre optic network to the main Access Control and
Security System Server housed within the Data Centre Building Services dedicated racks. From these racks the
system shall report to the head end located in the Data Centre security room.
Capability shall be provided for this system to be connected to the site wide Adam Air Base Security System
Centre which sits outside of this scope of works.
311 UNCLASSIFIED
Unclassified areas as defined within Appendix 2 – Room Data Sheets, shall be controlled with suited lock and key
systems tailored to the door type and function as set out by the Architectural design.
No intruder alarm detection shall be afforded to areas classified as Unclassified.
312 RESTRICTED
Restricted areas shall have a proprietary swipe card, or proximity pad, security system with an automated card
reader at each access door of the room(s) as defined ‘restricted’ within the Appendix 2 Room Data Sheets.
No intruder alarm detection shall be afforded to areas classified as Restricted.
313 CONFIDENTIAL
Confidential areas as defined within Appendix 2 – Room Data Sheets, shall have a proprietary card reader system
as described within 312 Restricted access section above.
In addition all windows and fire exits will be complete with a break contact alarm system which reports over the
same arrangement as the swipe card system, via the Data Centre and to the Security System Head end in the
314 SECRET
The intruder system shall be complete with essential power electrical supply and IT data points located within the
room, that will report upon an unauthorised activation in the room outside of those hours set through the system
head end.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
315 GENERAL
Unauthorised entry or attempts to entry is detected by means of magnetic door monitors, window break glass
detectors, and dual-technology passive infrared and microwave motion detectors. When an alarm condition is
detected by these devices, an alarm notification is sent to over the LAN network to the Data Centre Security
Room.
External doors and fire doors shall be alarmed so that unauthorised opening from internal or external shall cause
a local sounder to operate, and an alarm signal to relay back to the monitoring station at the head end.
Operation of fixed and portable manually operated devices send emergency alarm signals to the Data Centre
Security Room. The system is be continuously monitored to ensure that any attempt to tamper with devices or
cabling is immediately detected and a tamper alarm is sent to the control panel.
The control panel transmits alarm notifications to local annunciators and the Data Centre Security Room.
The systems are divided in various programmable zones. Zones can be set and unset by all except Level 1 users.
The entry/exit zone are set and unset through the use of an authorised proximity token / authorized proximity
smart token / a valid authorisation code, while all other zones except 24-hour and tamper zones are set and
unset through the use of authorisation codes.
The security administrator is able to allocate, change, and cancel any authorisation code at any time, through any
of the keypads or through software while connected to the LAN. Both methods require the correct authorisation
code.
The control panels of the systems are IP-addressable and are linked to the data network, and authorized users
are able to access the system remotely from the Data Centre Security Control Room via personal computers to
view the status of the system, the identity and the location of the detector where an alarm condition originated,
and a full record of all events recorded by the systems. Authorised users are also able to set and unset the
various zones of the system through the computer interface. The interface contains software that automatically
displays the floor plan of the building and the location of the detector where an alarm condition originated, as
well as the status of all devices.
410 SYSTEM CONTROL

Provide wired remote keypads to allow authorised users to control the setup and function of the intruder alarm
systems.
Provide personal computer-based control software to allow an authorised user to control the setup and function
of the intruder alarm systems.
Ensure that access to these functions is restricted by means of authorisation codes in accordance with prEN
50131-1:2004. Provide 4 levels of access, and ensure that authorisation codes comply with the specifications for
logical keys as specified in prEN 50131-1:2004.
420 ZONE CONTROL

Provide programmable zones of detectors and field devices to allow authorised users to set and unset parts of the
system, and to set up different operational and alarm parameters for each zone.
Design the zoning to ensure full compliance with the requirements as outlined in this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Provide a system for setting and unsetting any one or any combination of the zones.
Set up entry/exit zones so that only detectors protecting the shortest route between the relevant entry door and
the keypad / token reader is disabled for a user-settable time period to allow authorised users to set and unset
the system or part of the system.
430 ALARM TRANSMISSION

Provide dual path signalling for alarm notification transmission to a remote third party alarm receiving centre.
Provide dedicated output signals to the following systems:
- Surveillance system
- Access control system
Take full responsibility for liaising with all other parties to ensure that all output signals are fully compatible with
the requirements of the receiving systems.
Provide all cabling, containment, and transmission equipment required to provide signals at the locations of the
receiving systems.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS
The intruder alarm system, including the number of points and position of equipment described within this
specification and on the accompanying drawings is indicative for Tendering purposes and shall be confirmed by
the specialist designer subject to review of these documents.
The Electrical Installer will provide power outlets, including all cables and containment, at each control panel and
all devices as required.
The Electrical Installer will provide containment for all cabling to RJ45 outlets at each control panel and all
devices as required.
The Electrical Installer will provide all containment for LV and ELV power, communication, and ITC cabling to all
intruder alarm field equipment, including all:
- Detectors
- Deliberately operated devices
- Keypads
- Sounders
The Electrical Installer will provide a local distribution board complete with switchgear and UPS backup in the
The IT installer will provide the complete computer network, including all headend and network equipment, LAN
and WAN cabling, and local RJ45 outlets.
The IT Installer will provide an RJ45 socket outlet at each control panel and all devices as required.
The IT Installer will provide all standard 19” equipment racks.
The IT Installer will provide a PoE network switch in the SCR as required.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
520 INTRUDER ALARM INSTALLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

Employ a specialist Intruder Alarm Installer certified as acceptable by MoDES, to design, install, test, commission
and demonstrate the intruder alarm system in coordination with the Access Control System covered in particular
section W40.
Ensure that the Intruder Alarm Installer has the necessary expertise and capacity to provide professional and
timely maintenance and emergency repair services of the intruder alarm system, including all sub-systems, during
the design life of the system.
Ensure that all current and recurrent software licence fees are included within the tender return related to the
Client’s use of any software supplied by the Intruder Alarm Installer. Transfer the licences to the Client at the end
of the defects liability period.
Provide a common IP-based ODBC-compliant database to allow cause-and-effect functionality between the
various security systems.
Liaise with the Contract Administrator to agree on the positioning and style of all keypads, readers, and sounders.
List all Builder required installations at the time of tender.
Take responsibility for providing the Builder with all builder-related information required to prepare and construct
building elements suitable for installation of intruder alarm equipment.
Liaise with the Electrical Installer to ensure that all power supply and containment installations comply with the
requirements of the intruder alarm system, and to agree on the exact position of back boxes and other outlets.
Liaise with the IT Installer to ensure that all space and installation provisions for intruder alarm equipment in IT
racks comply with the requirements of the intruder alarm equipment.
Liaise with the IT installer to agree on the positioning of all RJ45 outlets.
Take responsibility for ensuring that the selected manufacturer’s systems and equipment are fully compatible with
the building elements to which the system is to be interfaced to meet the performance requirements detailed
herein.
600 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
610 TIME AND DATE

Provide a time and date generator as an integral part of the Intruder Alarm System.
Provide an automatic accuracy check and correction function to ensure the time and date remains accurate at all
times, and that it automatically adjusts for official seasonal time adjustments and leap years.
Ensure that the time and date are identical on all parts of the system and on any other interfaced system at all
times.
Provide a means of easily checking and verifying the clock accuracy, suitable for use in legal proceedings in a
court of law.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
620 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
621 GENERAL
Provide a central system to control all functions of the intruder alarm system, including:
- Setting,
- Unsetting,
- Receipt of alarm, fault, tamper, and emergency notification, and
- Transmission of alarm, fault, tamper, and emergency notification
622 ACCESS LEVELS

Provide a system of restricting access to the system components and controls by means of 4 levels of user
access, in compliance with prEN 50131-1:2004.
623 FUNCTIONS ACCESSIBLE TO UNAUTHORISED PERSONS – ACCESS LEVEL

Provide a system to allow any person to generate an emergency alarm condition, by activation of any the
following devices:
- Dedicated keypad buttons

- Hand-operated switches
624 FUNCTIONS ACCESSIBLE TO AUTHORISED PERSONS – ACCESS LEVELS 2, 3, AND 4

Provide a system to provide authorised persons access to functions as specified in prEN 50131-1:2004.
625 AUTHORISATION CODES

Provide a system of authorisation codes in compliance with prEN 50131-1:2004.
700 EQUIPMENT
710 GENERAL
Provide a system wherein individual or groups of detecting devices have a unique address and are linked to a
microprocessor based, programmable control panel via an interconnecting digital communication network.
Ensure that all equipment complies with all requirements of the relevant security grade as specified in this
document. Ensure that each component carries the manufacturer’s label stating the PD6662:2004 security grade
and environmental classification of the component.
720 CONTROL DEVICES
721 CONTROL PANELS

Provide microprocessor-based, programmable alarm system control panels designed for commercial applications.
Ensure that each control panel supports both hard-wired and wireless devices.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that the system has facility to expand and accommodate an additional 25% of devices in the future.
Ensure that all control panels allow part setting of zones. Each control panel is to incorporate the following types
of zones.
- Intruder
- Tamper
- Timed
- Emergency
- 24-hour
- Entry/exit.
Design the control panels to ensure full compliance with the requirements as outlined in this specification.
Provide a power supply unit to each control panel to supply uninterrupted power to the entire system in the event
of mains power failure. Ensure that the power supply complies with the requirements for Type A as defined in
prEN 50131-2004.
722 PC-BASED CONTROL

Provide a personal computer with 19” LCD TFT high resolution colour monitor and all software to set up, monitor,
and control all functions of the access control system.
Provide all necessary application software complete with licences for use on a standard personal computer with
Microsoft Windows operating system, to monitor and control the intruder alarm systems.
- Ensure that authorised users are able to access the following functions through the software.
- Set and unset the systems
- Set and unset selected zones
- Verify system functions
- Restore the systems
- Interrogate the event logs
- Inhibit, isolate, or override individual detectors or groups of detectors
- Add or change authorisation codes
- Activate emergency alarms
- Print reports and event logs
Provide a system to display user-definable and interactive graphical representations of the site and the intruder
alarm system.
Programme the software to display the status of every alarm system device as a symbol on a layout map of the
premises.
Assign icons to each device and configure the system so that the icon will flash on and off when in alarm, display
green when normal, and amber when isolated or in fault.
The software to be able to import maps from any graphical software supporting BMP, JPEG or GIF image formats.
The software maps to have the ability to contain hyperlinks to create a hierarchy of interlinked maps.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that access to the software is available to persons with the correct authorisation code only. Provide the
means for authorised persons to set and unset the system or selected zones.
Ensure that the system maintains an accurate and secure audit trail of all events, including access gained to the
software and all changes to setup or system settings.
723 REMOTE KEYPADS

Provide remote keypads to enable full control of the alarm system through the use of authorisation codes.
Ensure that authorised users are able to access the following functions through the keypads.
- Set and unset the system

- Set and unset selected zones
- Verify system functions
- Restore the system
- Interrogate the event log
- Inhibit, isolate, or override individual detectors or groups of detectors
- Add or change authorisation codes
- Activate emergency alarms
All keypads to have 32-character alphanumeric LCD display screens, backlit keys, tamper protection, and an
integral buzzer. Provide hardwired connections between all keypads and the relevant control panels.
Ensure that the system maintains an accurate and secure audit trail of all events, including access gained to the
software and all changes to setup or system settings.
730 INTERNAL DETECTORS
731 GENERAL
Install detectors to detect the presence of unauthorised persons within a protected space. Select detectors to suit
the influences of the ambient environment within the protected space and to minimise the risk of unwanted
alarms due to reasons other than persons moving.
732 PASSIVE INFRA-RED

Provide wall or ceiling mounted passive infra-red detectors to monitor the infra-red radiant energy in the
protected area. Ensure that the detector signals the Intruder Alarm in the event of detection of any change in the
background infra-red energy characteristic signifying a moving person.
733 ULTRASONIC (DOPPLER)

Provide wall or ceiling mounted ultrasonic detectors set to transmit an ultrasonic signal into the protected space
and detect the reflected energy. In the event of a moving person within the space ensure that the frequency shift
within the reflected signals is detected and an alarm signalled to the Intruder Alarm.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
734 MICROWAVE (DOPPLER)

Provide wall or ceiling mounted microwave detectors set to transmit a microwave signal within the protected
space only and to detect the reflected energy. In the event of a moving person within the space ensure that the
frequency shift within the reflected signal is detected and an alarm signalled to the Intruder Alarm.
Limit the sensitivity of the system to ensure that activity outside of the protected space will not be detected, but
do not reduce the sensitivity to the extent that the performance of the device within the protected space is
affected.
740 PERIMETER DETECTORS
741 GENERAL
Install detectors to detect attempts by unauthorised persons to enter a protected space. Select detectors to suit
the influences of the ambient environment within the protected space and to minimise the risk of unwanted
alarms due to reasons other than attempts at unauthorised entry.
742 DOOR AND WINDOW MONITORS

Install concealed magnetic switch-type monitors to detect the opening of doors, shutters, windows, roof lights
and other openable building elements. Ensure that the monitor signals and alarm condition to the Intruder Alarm
when the element is opened by no more than 100 mm.
Ensure that the magnetic switch cannot be overcome by use of external magnets.
743 ELECTROSTATIC MICROPHONIC CABLE

Fit a co-axial sensor cable to the fence or wall at the locations detailed. The cable to be of the dielectric type and
constructed of a piezo-electric substance. Ensure that the sensor cable and transducer signal an alarm in the
event of the microphone monitoring device detecting disturbances on the wall or sensing a break in the cable.
744 ELECTROMAGNETIC CABLE

Provide floor, ceiling or wall mounted electromagnetic cables set to detect disturbances of the cables within the
embedded magnetic field.
745 VIBRATION DETECTORS

Install vibration detectors of the piezo-electric sensor type or inertia switch type to detect vibration or shock and
trigger an Intruder Alarm.
746 CONTINUOUS WIRING

Install a continuous cable comprising a double pole circuit with a detector device set to trigger an Intruder Alarm
on detection of a short circuit. Fix the continuous wire directly onto the surface of the area to be protected or
within a tube or grooved rod set within the protected surface.
747 RIGID PRINTED CIRCUIT WIRING

Install continuous rigid printed circuit conductors onto a base metal and fix onto the protected surface. Trigger
the Intruder Alarm system in the event of the printed circuit conductors short circuiting.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
748 ACOUSTIC (MICROPHONIC)

Install acoustic detectors adjacent to windows to detect the ultrasound frequencies of breaking glass and to
signal an alarm condition to the Intruder Alarm. Ensure that the detector is installed flush in suspended ceilings,
and surface mounted in other areas.
In areas with a low ambient noise level (strong rooms, etc.) install acoustic detectors set to respond to a wider
spectrum of sound. On activation of the detector, establish a signal path to the remote manned centre to enable
the operators to monitor the sound live to determine the likely cause of the alarm.
749 ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE LAMINATED GLAZING

Ensure that the specified glazing is manufactured with an electrically conductive layer of metallic oxide.
Provide a detecting device to monitor the circuit and to activate an alarm if the glass is broken causing a break in
the conductive layer.
750 DELIBERATELY OPERATED ALARM DEVICES
751 GENERAL
Install manually operated devices to transmit alarm signals to the control panel when these devices are directly or
indirectly activated by the user. Ensure that the control panel is able to distinguish between the various types of
alarm signals, including:
- Holdup,
- Panic, and Man down.
752 FIXED EMERGENCY ALARM BUTTONS

Provide momentary pushbuttons which are hardwire connected to the control panel. Ensure that the button
signals an emergency alarm to the Intruder Alarm when pushed.
753 FOOT BUTTONS AND TREADLES

Provide momentary pushbuttons or treadles which are hardwire connected to the control panel. Ensure that these
devices signal an emergency alarm to the Intruder Alarm when activated.
754 LONE WORKER PORTABLE ALARMS

Provide lone worker portable alarms. Ensure that manual activation of the alarm button transmits an alarm signal
to the Intruder Alarm. Ensure that the Intruder Alarm will receive all alarm signals transmitted from any location
on the premises. Ensure that the operation of the alarm button unit is totally silent.
755 MONEY TRAY ALARM

Provide money tray alarm devices in all till trays. Ensure that the devices send alarm signals to the Intruder Alarm
when triggered.
Ensure that the operation of the alarm button unit is totally silent.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
760 SIGNALLING DEVICES
761 SOUNDERS
Provide internal and external audible warning devices set to sound in the event of a change to its connections to
the control equipment, when an alarm condition is received, when tested and when a tamper detector operates.
Provide sounders that produce sound volume of at least 100 dB at 1 000 mm, or 6 dB above ambient noise at
1000 mm if ambient noise is in excess of 94 dB. Ensure that the sound volume and duration, and the position of
all sounders are in compliance with national legislation and local authority requirements. Obtain approval from
local authorities for the proposed sounder installations and settings.
Ensure that sounder enclosures provide adequate protection against the influences of the ambient environment.
Provide effective tamper alarms in each sounder to signal the Intruder Alarm in the event of an attempt to
tamper with the sounder.
All external sounders to be self-actuating with integral battery backup.
770 CABLING INSTALLATION

Ensure that the wiring within the unprotected or unsecure area is installed concealed within a mechanically
protected containment system, inaccessible to intruders.
Contain vertical cable drops within metallic conduit. Mechanically protect cables, which run from ceiling to floor.
Adequately support all wiring within conduit/trunking systems or on cable tray. Where cables are fixed direct to
the building fabric, support the cable by fitting LSF clips at minimum 250 mm centres.
Ensure that the wiring system is installed concealed or flush in all areas except where specified otherwise.
Install flexible interconnectors across moving joints such as hinges etc.
Do not run low voltage and signal cables in the same cableways as mains cable. Insulate all cable to the highest
voltage present.
Ensure that all metal cased control panels are connected to the earth.
Fit rubber grommets or glands to all cable entry holes and provide cable restraint independent of the cable
terminations.

Provide in-line protectors or barriers to protect against lightning strikes on all power and communication circuits
from external equipment.
790 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY AND SCREENING

Ensure all systems comply with the EMC Directive and all associated EMC regulations.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

900 IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES

Cabling to be clearly and unobtrusively labelled at the distribution and control panels to facilitate future
maintenance and servicing. A cross-reference chart showing the relationship between cables and devices to be
held by the installer and form part of the record drawings.
Install signage throughout the site in accordance with statutory and regulatory requirements.
1010 TESTING
On completion of the installation, undertake full technical and performance tests on the entire system.
Include as a minimum the following tests.
- All wiring is correctly terminated and labelled

- All equipment is correctly labelled
- Correct supply voltage at all parts of the system.
- The system continues to work when the main power supply is disconnected
- Correct operation of all detectors, and elimination of false alarms
- Correct operation of manually operated devices
- Correct operation of annunciation devices, and measurement and recording of sound levels
- Operation of all software functions
- Operation of remote monitoring and control via the LAN
- Effectiveness of access level settings
- Receipt of all types of alarm signals to the remote monitoring facility
- Tamper protection of devices, enclosures, and wiring
Ensure that the entire system satisfies all test criteria.
Supply all test equipment required.
Before demonstrating the system, submit to the Engineer full tests results, as well as a certificate o conformity
that lists details of all aspects of the system that do not conform to the intended requirements.
1020 COMMISSIONING
Demonstrate to the Engineer that the system complies with all technical and functional requirements.
Demonstrate all functions of the surveillance system to fire officers and the user’s insurers, after successful
demonstration to the Engineer.
Provide on-site training to the end user, demonstrating the operation and adjustable features of the system.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure all control arrangements, settings and sequences on completion of commissioning and demonstration are
recorded and added to the Record Drawings and included within the operating and maintenance manuals.
1110 SUBMISSIONS WITH TENDER
1111 TECHNICAL INFORMATION

Submit with the tender technical information about the following, with sufficient detail to enable physical
dimensions, aesthetics, performance, compliance, and proposed layouts to be appreciated:
- Control panels
- Cabling systems
- Keypads
- Detectors
- Sounders
- Lone worker alarms
Submit details of manufacturers’ warrantees on all equipment.
1112 DOCUMENTATION
Submit with the tender the following documentation:
- Certification to demonstrate specialist control system designers governing body affiliation

- A list of recent projects of size and complexity comparable to the tendered project where the Intruder
- Alarm Installer has successfully completed installations, and contact details of the Client’s representative on
each project
- A compliance certificate listing all items proposed that do not comply fully with this specification, as ,well as
justification for each incidence of non-compliance

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
W50 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

Provide a fully addressable automatic fire detection and alarm system to satisfy the area coverage, and
operational and performance criteria as outlined elsewhere in this section.
Provide central control and indication equipment, and, where specified, distributed and repeat indication facilities.
Provide audible alarms and combined audible/visual alarms of the nature and type indicated, to achieve the
required sound levels and intelligibility specified, the remote information criteria, and satisfy relevant British
Standards.
Provide software system and programming, including security of stored information; and re-programming
capability.
Provide dedicated power supplies to fire detection and alarm control panels, and, where required, ancillary and
field devices, including independent standby battery-charger facilities.
Undertake all testing and commissioning of the system in accordance with standard and regulatory criteria, and
specialised manufacturers standard procedures, and to the satisfaction of the CA’s representative, Employer’s
representative and local fire authority, as required. Undertake all testing and commissioning to an integrated
programme with other systems to ensure that all necessary power supplies are available, and that the correct
operation of all interfaces with ancillary systems can be proved.
Provide full record information, including testing results, operational and maintenance manuals, record drawings,
zonal and address designations and certification.
Provide demonstration and instruction to selected members of the employer’s staff.
Provide all system components of compatible operation, and all of a single manufacturer’s standard product
range. Employ an approved specialist fire alarm system contractor, to select system components, undertake
installation of specialist equipment, and undertake testing, commissioning and certification.
110 CONTROLS AND INTERFACES

Provide integral auxiliary control facilities and effect interfaces with other systems including BMS, ventilation
plant, control panels, mechanical plant, security access, fire protection and suppression systems, door release
units, voice alarm systems and fire telephone systems.
Future allowance shall be provided to interface with the Component Booth fit out of the Fire Alarm and
Ventilation Systems, via the BMS and Fire Alarm Interface panels provided adjacent to the indicative Booth
Location within the CFC Workshop area.
Fire Alarm shall be via a dedicated BMS Fibre Optic Cable back to the CENTER Building.


STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
section prevails.

- Smoke Detectors Act 1991
- BS 2740 Specification for simple smoke alarms and alarm metering devices
- BS 4422 Fire. Vocabulary
- BS 5306 Fire extinguishing installations and equipment on premises.
- BS 5499 Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols
- BS 5839 Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings
- BS 6266 Code of practice for fire protection for electronic equipment installations
- BS 6387 Specification for performance requirements for cables required to maintain circuit
- integrity under fire conditions
- BS 7273 Code of practice for the operation of fire protection measures
- BS 7346-6 Part 6: Specifications for cable systems
- BS EN 54 Fire detection and alarm systems
- BS EN 14604 Smoke alarm devices
- BS EN 61672 Electroacoustics. Sound level meters Part 1: Specifications
- BS EN ISO 9000 Quality management systems
- BSRIA Application Guide 1/81 Locating fire alarm sounders for audibility
- CIBSE Guide E: Fire Engineering
- Local Authority Standing Orders and Bylaws
- Loss Prevention Council publications
- NJCC Guidance Note 3: Fire Officers Recommendations
- EFDC Dirty: Explosion Proof.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
210 STATUS OF TENDER DRAWINGS

The fire detection and alarm system schematic and layout drawings are indicative only.
The position of all detectors, call points and sounders are shown on the drawings for tender purposes only.
At an early stage in the Contract, determine the exact locations of all components on site and inform the architect
of any required position change and obtain approval to change prior to installation.
Contractor to consider placement of all detectors adjacent to external doors to guard against humidity and dust.
Ensure that all requirements for the chosen manufacturer’s equipment are included for in the tender package.
This is to cover ancillary components and items such as separate power supplies for bells, interface units, zone
isolators etc. which are required by some systems and not others, and for the manner in which the system is to
be wired, which varies from one manufacturer to another. Determine the requirement for additional items by
reference to architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings.
310 SYSTEM TYPE AND CONFIGURATION
311 GENERAL
The fire detection and alarm system is to include the following items:
- main control and indication panel(s)

- repeater panel(s)
- automatic detection circuits or loops, connecting automatic detection devices, manual call points and
- other interface, isolation and control devices
- alarm circuits connected to audible, visual or combined alarms
- auxiliary circuits connected so as to automatically interface with other systems.
The arrangement of the system components is to be as indicated on the tender drawings. The system type (and
configuration) is to be as outlined below. The system control is to be as described at clause 400. The system is to
include all components necessary to achieve the operational performance outlined in this specification, including
all sundry relays, interfacing and interconnecting components.
The areas identified in Clause 200 shall be compliant with the ATEX and DSEAR Regulations. All equipment
safe.
320 SYSTEM TYPE

Provide fire detection and alarm system of the following type, or combination of types.
321 ADDRESSABLE SYSTEM

Provide a system in which all automatic detectors, manual call points, alarm devices and other field and interface
devices have unique address identification; and in which the main control and identification panel has a
microprocessor - based, pre-programmed software system which allows identification of the condition of all
devices in the system. The system devices are to be of the two-state type.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
410 SYSTEM OPERATION

Activation from any device will cause the system to go into full alarm and notify the monitoring facility of the
alarm.
420 CONTROL INTERFACES
421 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS CONTROL AND MOUNTING

Provide all necessary relay and termination facilities within the respective control and indication panels to achieve
the requirements specified.
Ensure the fire alarm system contains a sufficient number of volt free contacts suitable for monitoring by other
systems (plus five spare sets for future connection). Arrange for the other systems to initiate the appropriate
action in the event of fire or fault signals being initiated.
Ensure the volt free contacts are capable of switching the current and voltage of the auxiliary systems input.
The volt free contacts required are:
- Mechanical Plants.
Wire these services directly from the fire alarm panel, using cabling sized appropriately to the switching system
operation requirements, and liaise fully with the specialist installers of those systems to effect satisfactory
connections and operations.
Power all relays from the fire detection system supply.
422 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS MONITORING

Sprinkler systems and sensors are to be provided and installed by others.
424 FUSIBLE LINK INPUT

Provide input interface unit for connection of the fusible link system to the fire alarm system control panel.
425 COMPONENT BOOTH CONTROL AND MONITORING

Provide all necessary relay and termination facilities within the respective control and indication panels to achieve
the requirements specified.
Ensure that the fire alarm system contains a sufficient number of volt free contacts suitable for monitoring of the
Component Booth systems (plus five spare sets for future connection). Arrange for the other systems to initiate
the appropriate action in the event of fire or fault signals being initiated.
Ensure the volt free contacts are capable of switching the current and voltage of the auxiliary systems input.
The volt free contacts required are:
- Mechanical Plant.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Wire these services directly from the fire alarm panel, using cabling sized appropriately to the switching system
operation requirements, at the rear of the component booths and liaise fully with the specialist installers of those
systems to effect satisfactory connections and operations. Power all relays from the fire detection system supply.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS

The installer shall coordinate the design, installation, testing, commissioning and sign off the complete fire
detection and alarm system, based on the drawings and specification.

520 PERMIT TO WORK

530 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.
540 INSTALLATION AND WIRING ARRANGEMENT
541 WIRING TYPE AND ARRANGEMENT

Provide the fire alarm system installation with a totally independent, separated and segregated wiring system in
accordance with BS 5839-1 and BS 7671. Ensure that the system uses the same cable type throughout, sourced
from a single manufacturer, and that the cable manufacturer is to be BASEC approved. Ensure that the cable type
is LPCB approved.
542 FIRE RATED CABLING

Provide fire rated enhanced FP200 or equal and approved, cabling for the complete system with a red LSF outer
sheath. Provide minimum cable sizes of 1.5mm² for detection/actuation circuits and 2.5mm² for sounder circuits.
Ensure that sounder circuit cable sizes are of adequate size to ensure that volt drop criteria are satisfied
Adhere to the material standards set down in the Y sections of this specification for the wiring system.
Cables classified as Fire Proof enhanced FP200 or equal and approved shall be used.
543 WIRING ARRANGEMENT

Install sufficient short circuit isolation devices in each detector loop to ensure that a single fault does not disable
more than 20 manual call points or sensors or one fire zone. Plan the installation of the detector cables
accordingly.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where practical ensure that the two cables forming the loop follow separate routes to ensure integrity of the
system in accordance with BS 5839 and BS EN 54.
Ensure that the maximum number of addresses allowed to be connected on each loop is not exceeded, and
allows a minimum of 30% spare capacity.
Ensure that the routes of each “leg” of each loop cable are segregated from each other, in order to reduce loss of
entire fire alarm loop in the event of short or open circuit or earth fault occurring, and that only one cable “leg”
can be affected by a fault.
Do not use 4 core loop cables.
Wire sounder circuits using ‘A’ and ‘B’ circuit technique to provide two separate circuits for any particular area,
and allocate sounders to the ‘A’ and ‘B’ circuits as indicated on the drawings.
544 INSTALLATION
Install the cabling fixed to walls and on dedicated cable tray systems, to allow a practical means for future
rewiring of the system.
Single or twin runs of cable in ceiling voids may be clipped direct to the structure. Where more than two cables
follow a common route, include for the installation of a cable tray spaced off the soffit by suitable galvanised
brackets.
Adhere to the installation standards set down in the Y sections of this specification for the installation of the
wiring system.
Earth all fire alarm system cabling in accordance with the requirements of BS 7671 and Y sections of the
specification.
Install the wiring system concealed/flush other than in plant areas, including the final positioning and installation
co-ordination of all system cabling and components together with the marking out of all associated builder’s
works.
Install all cables in a manner such that they are physically continuous throughout the length of each circuit other
than where connection is made at the terminations of a system component. Do not use any other cable
connections or joints.
Provide the final connections to all the system components via suitable conduit boxes fixed flush with the
underside of the ceiling or, flush in the walls, except in plant areas where the installation shall be surface.
Provide all necessary cabling from the main fire alarm panels to the appropriate MCCs, lift control panels, etc. and
liaise fully with the installers of those systems to effect satisfactory connections and operation. Wire these
services either directly from the fire alarm panels, or utilise the appropriate detector/alarm circuit loops, via
suitable interface units, if required. Size cabling appropriate to the switching systems operation requirements.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
610 SELF-CONTAINED PANELS FOR ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE (OR ADDRESSABLE) SYSTEMS
611 GENERAL
Provide a single-zone, multi-loop main control panel of the addressable type, housing all items of control and
indication equipment and located and mounted as indicated on the drawings. Provide a panel with a fascia layout
generally as set-out in the selected manufacturers standard arrangement and of tamper-proof construction.
Mount the components on the front panel, or internally on a chassis.
Arrange the equipment mounting such that the enclosure can be fixed in position, and outgoing cables
terminated, prior to the equipment being installed. Ensure the enclosure incorporates suitable internal cable
management such that modular components can be easily replaced.
Arrange the internal layout to provide adequate free space for cable termination. Ensure access to all outgoing
terminals is possible with the panel in an operational state. Provide access to terminals at the back of the
enclosure by use of a hinged chassis, if necessary. Include a series of 20mm knockouts or gland plates at the top
and bottom of the enclosure for the termination of cables.
612 FEATURES
The panel is to incorporate the following features as a minimum:
- Liquid crystal display, back-lit, providing up to 80 characters per alarm condition, to enable all alarm and fault
conditions to be reported. All information is to be stored in the display memory to enable messages to be
scrolled and reviewed prior to system re-setting. Display messages to be in English.
- Integral keypad for interrogation, programming, device labelling and device/zone isolation including facilities
to display index, display log and review/scroll. Where indicated, a standard computer keyboard and
interconnection facility is also to be provided.
- All necessary control cards for the number of loops required, including spare capacity.
- Lamp/LED indications.
- Lamp/LED test key switches for fire, fire zone and zone fault/isolated.
Controls to:
Start Sounders
test “Evacuate” alarm
stop sounders (alarm mute)
control clock and date setting
cancel fault buzzer
disable links to other systems for test purposes
panel test/enter
address isolate
- Zone identification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Single stage alarm facilities.

- Fireman’s Switch to activate Ventilation System
- Fault monitoring for all detection circuits, to cover open, short circuit and earth fault conditions, with a
separate alarm output provided for each of these conditions.
- Supervisory buzzer.
- Integral battery/charger power supply unit.
- An integral 24 column dot matrix printer to provide a hard copy of all information shown on the display, and
stored information to provide history, full or selective, of system events.
- Real time clock.
- All necessary operating relay/switch devices and auxiliary devices to control remote ancillary devices.
- Facilities for automatic remote dialling to a registered alarm centre network.
- Sufficient quantity of terminals to receive all incoming and outgoing circuit wiring, including provision for
future spare capacity.
- Alarm sounder circuits, of sufficient number as outlined elsewhere, complete with continuous circuit fault
monitoring facilities.
- Instructions for user operation.
- A zone chart in a glass fronted hardwood frame, identifying the building fire alarm zones, is to be mounted
adjacent to the panel.
- An output port to allow communication with a suitable computer, using either RS - 232 or R5 -485 data
interchange system.
- All necessary volt free contacts to achieve operation of ancillary systems.
613 CONSTRUCTION
Provide all details of panel construction, layout and equipment for approval prior to confirming instructions to
the equipment manufacturer.
614 CONTROLS AND INDICATION

Equip the panel with all necessary controls and indication to monitor, interrogate, programme, silence, test and
re-set the system. Include facilities for full fault monitoring of all devices connected to the loop.
Incorporate zone/address designation LED indicator boards, complete with full operating instructions and facility
to enter all zone and address allocations. Ensure the panel is to be capable of indicating the exact source of the
alarm condition on the display. Provide an integrated microprocessor system to interpret, analyse and dispense
fire alarm information. Provide a non-volatile memory to record all system events, up to a maximum of 5000
events, and hold these available for printing out or displaying on screen. The time and date of each event is to be
recorded, with sufficient data to identify the device, zone and loop. The earliest event is to be automatically
discarded on memory overrun.
615 PROGRAMMING
Arrange for the programming to be completed by the manufacturer, including zone definition in accordance with
BS 5839-1. Give each zone a unique reference. Make reference to fire compartmentation to ensure that the zones

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
chosen give compliance with British Standards requirements. Provide a marked up drawing showing zone areas
and hand to the Contract Administrator no less than 14 days before the system is offered for acceptance.
616 ISSUE OF INFORMATION

Issue for comment, prior to programming, all necessary information, e.g. room names and number. A full chart
detailing device numbers, types, loop connected, zone, address and position is to be supplied as part of the user’s
operating and instruction manual.
617 CONNECTION TO REPEAT PANELS

Where indicated, provide facilities for connection of repeat panels. Incorporate means for disabling the link to the
repeat panel(s), with audible and visual indication when disabled. In the event of disconnection or failure of the
remote link, audible and visual indication is to be given with sounder silencing facility. All alarm link controls are
to be key operated.
630 FIELD DEVICES
631 GENERAL
Note that locations indicated on drawings are approximate only. Confirm actual locations with the engineer and
prepare installation drawings before commencing wiring or other equipment installation. Determine the full
quantity of equipment, manual call points, detectors, interface units, monitors, sounders etc, from layout
drawings and specification requirements.
Keep detectors free of any contamination due to works taking place after installation and commissioning by
bagging etc, and replace any heads contaminated at no extra cost.
632 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

Mount items of equipment at the following typical centre line heights above floor level (except where indicated
otherwise on drawings):
- manual call points - 1200 mm

- sounders in offices and other low ceiling rooms – 200mm below soffit level
- main control and mimic panels 1500mm
- beam detectors - min 3750mm above finished floor level and maximum 300mm below soffit level
Agree all fire alarm equipment heights with engineer prior to commencing installation and subject to architects’
drawings which may be issued post tender.
640 ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE SYSTEMS FIELD DEVICES
641 DETECTORS – GENERAL

Provide automatic detectors of the type and in the locations as indicated on the drawings. Ensure each detector is
of the analogue type and capable of being individually addressed.
Incorporate the following facilities in each detector:
- common mounting base for different types, allowing detector heads to be fully interchangeable

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- integral LED alarm indication of operation where directly visible. Provide remote indication where concealed,
ie duct sensors, lift shafts etc., and label suitably.
- capability of automatic or manual disablement for maintenance purposes
- appropriate indication on Main Control and Repeat Panel when sensor removed from base
- ensure removal of detector head does not render any part of system inoperative
Ensure all automatic detectors produce an analogue output which changes with smoke density or temperature,
and that detectors change this to digital data for transmission to the processor.
Ensure all automatic detection devices are individually compensated, at the master control panel, for any
degradation in performance due to ageing, dust accumulation, component characteristic change etc.
Ensure that detectors installed anywhere on any loop are capable of being assigned to any zone.
642 MANUAL CALL POINTS

Provide manual call points of the addressable type complying fully with BS EN 54-11, made of
polycarbonate/moulded ABS material and finished in red. Ensure all manual call points are of the same type.
Install call points complete with suitable inscription of operation, and provided with suitable proprietary
enclosures for surface or flush mounting and internal/external locations.
Incorporate the following facilities within each manual call point:
- external test facility to operate contacts without opening manual call point
- an LED to indicate operation of manual call point
643 AUTOMATIC SMOKE DETECTORS

Optical Smoke Detectors
Ensure detectors are of the obscuration or scatter light type, capable of sensitivity adjustment via the system
control panel.
Optical Beam Detectors
Provide infra red sensors of the obscuration type, with transmitting and receiving units specifically designed for
operation on the detector loops.
Provide the sensors complete with programmable sensitivity and complying fully with BS 5839-5 and capable of
sensitivity adjustment via the system control panel.
Ensure access to transmitter and receiver units facilitates maintenance, all as indicated on the drawings.
Allow for interfacing for connection onto the loop with appropriate interface units.
Ensure that each detector is addressable. In addition beam detection operation is to be individually isolatable at
the panel to facilitate maintenance.
Ensure transmitter and receiver units are carefully aligned and mounted to establish and maintain maximum
beam signal strength.
Agree final location on site with the engineer/specialist supplier.
Locate interface units discreetly, where appropriate.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
644 AUTOMATIC HEAT DETECTORS

Fixed temperature/rate of rise type
Provide heat sensors of the electronic type and specifically designed for analogue operation and capable of being
utilised for either rate of rise or fixed high temperature heat detection.
Ensure the detector complies with the sensitivity performance of BS EN 54 and is capable of sensitivity
adjustment via the system control panel.
Ensure the detector parameters for fixed temperature operation, rate of change temperature operation, ambient
temperature and grade of response are as indicated on the drawings.
645 ISOLATION AND INTERFACE DEVICES

Interface Units
Provide interface units of the addressable type connected to the local loop circuit and which provide the required
inputs and outputs for control or indication functions.
Ensure each input/output way is fully programmable from the control panel and fully monitored for open and
short circuit conditions.
646 AUDIBLE ALARM DEVICES

Electronic Sounders
Sounders are to be electronic, with an output frequency of 500-1000Hz, providing a sound level of not less than
104 dBA at 1 metre and to have adjustable volume control. Ensure that the number of sounders on any one
circuit does not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended maximum.
Electronic two-tone, red coloured sounders. Ensure these units are polarised and suppressed as a standard.
Supply complete with centre disc bearing the legend “Fire” in black.
Flashing Beacon Units
Ensure flashing beacons are to operate at all times whilst sounder circuits are activated. Do not incorporate
mute or isolation switches.
700 EQUIPMENT
710 POWER SUPPLIES
711 GENERAL
Provide separate power supplies to each item of equipment, as required, comprising a primary mains 240V ac
supply, and a secondary/back-up dc power supply unit, incorporating a battery charger, for the specified system
operating voltage. Power supplies are to comply with BS 5839: Part 1. Provide power supplies for the following
items:
- main control and indication panel, including ancillary control and indication equipment
- repeat indicator panels
- interface units

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- other ancillary items requiring power

Provide fault monitoring and alarm indication for:
- mains power failure

- battery power failure
- charger output failure
712 MAINS POWER SUPPLIES

Provide a dedicated, lockable fused switch on the essential side of the main LV distribution panel, finished red in
colour by the manufacturers and labelled “Fire Alarm - Do not switch off”. Terminate this supply in the main
enunciator/control panel power supply section.
Where several supplies are required, connect the power supplies to a dedicated distribution board for fire alarm
equipment.
Connect each supply to equipment via an unswitched fuse connection unit, suitably labelled. Make the final
connections to the equipment in heat-resistant LSF cable of a suitable rating enclosed within steel conduit.
Label fuse connection units with details of equipment served and include wording “Fire Alarm - Do not switch
off”.
Ensure each supply is dedicated to particular equipment item (and does NOT feed any non-fire alarm device).
Label appropriate MCBs in distribution boards to emphasise supplies are serving fire alarm equipment.
713 BATTERY AND CHARGER UNITS

Ensure the secondary power supply comprises a fully encapsulated low maintenance type NiCad or sealed lead
acid battery to BS 6290. Ensure the battery is able to sustain full system operation for 72 hours in quiescent
mode, and thereafter operate sounders in all zones for 30 minutes continuously in the event of mains failure.
Where power supply units are required for sounder circuits, ensure that they are suitably sized to cater for any
reasonable future requirements. Ensure that the units are in full compliance with the requirements of B.S. 5839
and BS EN 54.
Ensure battery chargers are high quality constant potential type, with temperature compensation. Check and
record charging voltages and currents during commissioning.
Do not take delivery of any batteries until the complete system is ready for test to ensure that the batteries do
not degrade during the construction stage of the works.




STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

The installer shall provide for the Engineer’s approval:
- predicted sound level coverage

- schematic drawing
- technical specifications for the proposed equipment
- quantities in terms of equipment, materials etc.
- method statement.
- amplifiers
- back up systems
- fault monitoring systems
- loudspeakers
- microphones
- disc/tape players
- recording equipment
- digital message store
- system testing.
standards listed in the relevant ‘A’ sections of this specification.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
W51 EARTHING AND BONDING

Employ a lightning protection specialist to design, supply, install, test and commission a complete lightning
protection and earthing systems for the electrical infrastructure network. The earthing and lightning protection
system described within this specification and on the accompanying drawings is indicative for Tendering purposes
and shall be confirmed by the specialist designer subject to earthing tests on site.
To provide an earthing system for the transfer of electrical current to earth so that in the event of an earth fault,
all earth fault currents are safely conducted to earth without danger to personnel or damage to equipment.
To provide an earthing system of sufficiently low impedance to facilitate operation of the electrical system
protective devices such that all earth faults are cleared within the time scales specified in BS 7671.
To provide main and supplementary bonding in accordance with BS 7671, to create an equipotential zone of
protection within all areas supplied by the associated electrical system, to ensure that all exposed conductive
parts are at the same electrical potential as earth, and that personnel are not exposed to unsafe potentials under
steady state or fault conditions.
To provide a reference point for the LV electrical system by providing a connection from the star-point of each
transformer to earth.
To ensure that the consumer earthing requirements of the Site Wide Infrastructure, Electrical Supply
Contractor (ESC) supplying the building(s)/site are fully complied with.

section prevails.
European Standard.

- The Electrical Supply Authority Requirements
- The Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations 2002
- The Electricity Supply Regulations
- The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989
- BS 951 Electrical earthing. Clamps for earthing and bonding. Specification

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- BS 4444 Guide to electrical earth monitoring and protective conductor proving

conditions
- BS 6701 Telecommunications equipment and telecommunications cabling. Specification for installation,
operation and maintenance
- BS 7361-1 Cathodic protection Part 1: Code of practice for land and marine applications
- BS 7430 Code of Practice for earthing
- BS 1377-9 Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes Part 9: In-situ tests (Partially superseded
but remains current)
- BS EN 13636 Cathodic protection of buried metallic tanks and related piping
- BS EN 50164-2 Lightning protection components (LPC) Part 2: Requirements for conductors and earth
electrodes
- BS EN 50310 Application of equipotential bonding and earthing in buildings with information technology
equipment
- BS EN 61557-4 Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1000 V a.c. and 1500 V d.c.
- Equipment for testing, measuring or monitoring of protective measures Part 4: Resistance of earth connection
and equipotential bonding
- ENA ER G12/3 Requirements for the application of protective multiple earthing to low voltage networks
- ENA ER G59/1 Recommendations for the connection of embedded generating plant to the Public Electricity
Supplier’s distribution systems
- ENA ER G83/1 Recommendations for the connection of small-scale embedded generators [up to 16A per
phase] in parallel with public LV distribution networks
- ENA ER P20/1 Earthing policy in relation to the customers installations
- ENA ER P23/1 Consumer’s earth fault protection for compliance with IEE Wiring Regulations for Electrical
Installations
- ENA ETR113 Notes of guidance for the protection of embedded generating plant up to 5MW for operation in
parallel with Public Electricity Supplier’s Distribution Systems
- ENA TS 41-24 Guidelines for the Design, Installation, Testing and Maintenance of Main Earthing Systems in
Substations
- ENA TS 43-94 Earth rods and their connectors
- Office Area: DSEAR Classification - Non-Hazardous
- Workshop: DSEAR Classification - Potentially Hazardous Zones 0, 1 & 2

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
210 SYSTEM DESIGNATION

Supply at Low Voltage (LV)
TN-S system – with separate neutral and protective conductors throughout the system.

Design, supply, install, test and commission the complete earthing system throughout the facility including all
equipotential bonding to the various incoming and distributed services, the building structures, all supplementary
bonding systems including to ceiling structures, earth arrays, and earth bars to data systems.
11kV
Each panel shall be equipped with a cable earthing switch to earth power cables.
Bus metering and bus section panel shall be equipped with a busbar earthing switch to earth main bus.
The earth switch shall have fault make capacity and can withstand the short circuit current. Earthing switch shall
be interlocked and manually operated from the front of the switchboard.
It shall be possible to observe earth switch blade via viewing window on panel front for operator safety.
Earth switch operations can be prevented by means of padlocks.
LV
Install a main building earth bar adjacent to the main LV panel within each transformer, generator and chiller
buildings.
The installer shall also include for the following additional specialist earthing point connections due to the nature
of the facility:
All metal surfaces must be connected to a common earth.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
400 SCOPE OF WORKS
410 GENERAL – INSTALLER

protection and earthing systems. The earthing and lightning protection system described within this specification
and on the accompanying drawings is indicative for Tendering purposes and shall be confirmed by the specialist
designer subject to earthing tests on site.
Liaise with the lightning protection specialist to provide all necessary earthing of the components of the building
and specialist requirements.
Provide a suitably sized extraneous earth bar adjacent to the main LV panel. Support earth bar on insulated posts
on a unistrut frame if necessary.
Provide connections from the main earth bar to extraneous metal parts as described below.
Liaise with the distribution network operator regarding the earthing arrangements of the LV installation and
confirm these arrangements in writing.
Ensure that any part of the earth fault current path provided by the distribution network operator or others is
suitable for the operation of the earth fault protection provided by the installer.
Liaise with the main contractor regarding the phasing of the works
Take responsibility for the electrical continuity of all trunking, tray, basket, cable containment, gas pipes, water
pipes, ductwork etc. and for testing and demonstrating such continuity prior to connection to the earthing
system.
Take responsibility for liaison with all installers, and for the provision, installation and connection of all main earth
connections to metallic services containment.
Take responsibility, for electrical continuity of pipework (including pumps etc.) and ductwork (including AHUs,
FCUs, etc) and provision of earth connection points on each for the connection of earth bonds.
Take responsibility, for all specialist earthing requirements set out within this specification for personnel earthing
within the facility.

Carry out a careful co-ordination exercise of the mechanical systems installed under the engineering works
package, together with metal work provided under other works packages such as ceilings, architectural
metalwork, and floors, to ensure that a consistent earthing installation results.
Liaise with all other relevant installers and systems specialists, to provide a comprehensive and consistent
earthing installation throughout the building(s).
the engineer.
Agree the colours and finishes of all exposed materials of the system(s) with the engineer.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
440 INITIAL SOIL TESTS

Carry out soil tests in accordance with BS 7430 and BS 1377 to establish soil electrical resistivity prior to
commencement of the works.
Report results to the engineer.
500 EARTHING REQUIREMENTS
511 LV NEUTRAL EARTH

Bond the neutral point of the transformer secondary winding to the neutral/earth bus bar in the LV distribution
switch panel through a bolted link.
Ensure that the neutral/earth bus bar is connected to the common earth bar within the LV distribution switch
panel, through a bolted link.
Connect the neutral/earth bus bar to the earth electrode system using an adequately sized copper tape (at least
75mm x 6mm) or copper cable (at least 95mm2) both with PVC insulation. Connect from the neutral bus bar in
the LV switchgear to the earth electrode system via a substation earth bar.
Do not use the HV earth electrode system for LV earthing.
Provide a separate wall mounted earth bar for terminating equipotential bonding, plus an additional
functional earth bar for IT and other sensitive equipment where required.
Connect the separate sub-station earth bar (at least 75mm x 6mm copper cable) to the neutral point of the
transformer.
Ensure that the resistance of the LV neutral earth electrode system at the substation (measured
independently) does not exceed 40Ω.
Ensure that the LV earth electrode system is at least 3 metres away from the nearest HV earth electrode (in
cases of abnormally high resistances, increase the distance to suit).
520 EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM

Provide and locate the earth electrode system as indicated on the drawings.
Construct the LV earth electrode system using a copper conductor which interconnects a series of earth rods (as
described below) driven into the ground in an area previously agreed for the installation of earth electrodes. Drive
the rods vertically into the ground until their tops are a minimum of 600mm below the surface.
Include for any mechanical tool or device in order to drive the rods into the earth at the required depth.
Place all electrodes a minimum distance apart, equivalent to their buried length.
Prior to driving any electrodes into the ground, check the selected area with an electronic scanning device, for
any buried services.
Encase the electrode in marconite in a comprehensive lattice arrangement. Protect all earth connections from
corrosion by a suitable compound impregnated waterproof tape.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Where the ground has high soil resistivity such that the final resistance value of the earth electrode(s) cannot be
guaranteed, provide additional electrodes, inspection covers and inter-connecting tape to achieve the stipulated
resistance over and above that shown on the drawings or described herein.
The exact number of rods within each grid will be determined by test by the installer to achieve the stipulated
resistance to the mass of earth. If any additional equipment is required, obtain approval from the engineer prior
to installation.
Connect earth electrodes in arrays using bronze purpose made clamps with compatible material high tensile bolts
and 25mm x 6mm plain copper tape between electrodes. Make connections at the tops of electrodes, ensure that
horizontal tape runs between electrodes are 750mm below finished ground level; allow for the necessary vertical
tape lengths.
Provide each electrode head with a purpose made concrete inspection housing having a removable concrete
‘plug’. Arrange the housings to be accessible and visible at finished ground level to enable tests to be periodically
undertaken.
Ensure that connections to the earth electrodes are readily accessible for periodic inspection, and protected
against mechanical damage and corrosion. Make the connection to the rod by means of a purpose made clamp
and lay below ground level in a concrete inspection pit having a removable cover prominently inscribed "Earth".
Fit rod sections with hardened steel tips and driving caps. Ensure that the depth of driver rod is a minimum of
2400mm and the spacing between rods is at least equal to the driven length. Ensure no electrode is within
3000mm of the building foundations.
Interconnect earth rods using minimum 25mm x 3mm copper tape.
Divide the earth rod system into two equal parts so that testing can be carried out on each half without loss of
earthing facilities.
Connect each part of the system to proprietary testing links using insulated conductors, terminating at the
substation earth bar.
inscribed "EARTH".
For earth connection cables buried below ground use PVC sheathed type, ensure that the cables are a minimum
0.6m below the ground, and sized in accordance with table 54.1 of BS 7671.
530 LV SYSTEM EARTHING

Install an earthing system to meet the requirements of BS 7671. Base the system on separate neutral and
protective conductors throughout the installation.
Install earth bars in the locations indicated on the drawings, final positions to be agreed on site. Using adequately
sized copper tape (at least 75mm x 6mm) or copper cable (at least 95mm2) both with PVC insulation, connect
the main earth bar to the following:
- neutral of the source of energy TNS

- main earth electrode system
- main LV distribution panel(s).
- lightning protection system/structural steelwork.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- cable tray/ladder system.

- secondary earth bar(s).
Connect to the secondary earth bars, hard drawn copper cables, LSF insulated, to the following local items:
- all electrical distribution equipment

- all building structural steelwork
- all mechanical plant including ductwork and pipework.
Provide circuit protective conductors (CPCs) as follows:
- SWA of the XLPE/SWA/LSF sub-main distribution cabling with additional CPCs where indicated on the
drawings/cable schedule
- dedicated earth conductor to be of fire rated cables complying with BS 6387 CWZ
- separate CPC for all final circuits comprising PVC/LSF cables installed in conduit and trunking distribution
systems.
Separate CPCs for final circuits to be of the same cross-sectional area as that of the phase conductor. All as
540 EQUIPMENT EARTHING
541 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
Provide circuit protective conductors as follows:
- separate copper circuit protective conductors with yellow/green insulation

- armouring and/or metal sheaths of armoured cable
- armouring and/or metal sheaths of armoured cable with auxiliary separate copper circuit protective
conductors with yellow/green insulation
- an integral protective conductor of any multi-core cable.
Ensure that the size of the protective conductor is in accordance with BS 7671 and is as indicated on the
drawings. Verify that no protective conductor is smaller than the minimum size of 1.5mm2.
Terminate bolted connections with compression type lugs formed by an automatic purpose made machine.
Bond the metal sheaths and/or armouring of paper and PVC insulated cables to the metal parts of the equipment
to which they are connected, utilising a proprietary brass earthing tag and brass nut and bolt.
When flexible conduit is used, ensure that the protective conductor at the equipment end is made-off to the
equipment earth terminal. Install the protective conductor within the conduit and suitably sized for the circuit(s)
passing through.
542 EXTERNAL SOCKET OUTLETS AND EQUIPMENT

Note that the term "external socket outlet and equipment" applies to any socket outlet or equipment which itself
is located outside the equipotential bonding zone of the main electrical installation or provided for the specific
purpose of enabling mobile or portable equipment to be used outside this zone. Protect all external socket outlets
with a residual current device (RCD) having an operating current not greater than 30mA.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
543 ANTI STATIC DEVICES

Ensure suitable anti static devices are installed throughout the facility as described elsewhere within this
specification.
600 BONDING REQUIREMENTS
610 BONDING EXTRANEOUS CONDUCTIVE PARTS

Bond extraneous conductive parts to earth in accordance with BS 7671 and BS 7430.
Ensure all building incoming main metallic services and building structure are securely connected to the main
earth bar. Ensure that the following services are bonded:
- main water pipes

- air duct lines
- chilled water pipework
- exposed metallic parts of building structure
- thermal insulation metallic cladding
- metallic cable sheaths of all cables
- lightning protection systems.
Bond all simultaneously accessible conductive parts to the protective conductor system using supplementary
equipotential bonds.
Agree on site with the engineer the final positions for equipotential bonding of piped services prior to
commencement of the installation.
Provide an independent 6.0mm² supplementary bonding cable from locations where water services are in general
use, to the local distribution board. Take all supplementary cross-bonding within such locations (where water
services are in general use) from the independant main bonding point to pipes and fittings etc.
Ensure electrical continuity of metallic floor tile systems using supplementary bonding.
Bond the raised floor system in each area of the building to the respective small power distribution board with a
6.0mm² LSF earthing cable, mechanically protected as necessary.
For the purposes of this clause a building is defined as a separate structure. Structures linked by a corridor,
subway or bridge are considered to be separate structures.
Bond together metallic water pipes, other metallic service pipes and metallic ventilation ducting etc.,
entering/leaving plant rooms, and other wet-process areas, and bond to the electrical installation protective
conductor system.
Ensure that all exposed or extraneous conductive parts having a resistance to earth of less than 1MΩ are bonded
to the electrical services earth.
Prove each circuit protective conductor prior to making any supplementary bonding connection.
Bond final connections of all extraneous metalwork by means of a bolted type lug connection in a suitable
position to be agreed with the engineer. Use only bronze nuts and washers when fixing earth tape.
No main or supplementary bonding cables to be less than 6mm²/copper LSF-covered, green/yellow.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Connect all the protective conductors for bonding to the earthing system at the nearest convenient earthing
terminal provided in an outlet box or equal. Conductors are to be installed within ducts etc., and where necessary
within conduits to outlet boxes.
620 BONDING EXPOSED CONDUCTIVE PARTS

Carry out the equipotential bonding of the extraneous metalwork in the building in accordance with BS 7671.
Ensure the exposed metallic parts of the building structure are securely connected to the LV earth system.
Provide all conduit and trunking distribution services with equipotential and supplementary bonding systems
throughout the installation, to ensure in conjunction with the requirements that maximum earth continuity is
provided for all such services.
Provide primary cable ladder and tray distribution systems with earth straps at each joint position and connect at
source to the main earthing reference.
Bond each distribution board and switch panel, in addition provide the supply cable armouring, by a separate LSF
cable to the cable containment system.
630 OTHER BONDING REQUIREMENTS

Ensure any exposed or extraneous metalwork, other than any live part, forming part of the electrical installation
is at earth potential.
Ensure that metallic structures forming part of sub-stations eg fencing, are bonded to earth.
Ensure all LV socket outlets have a green/yellow PVC insulated 2.5mm² stranded copper conductor as a 'fly lead',
connected between earth terminals secured to both socket assembly and socket box.
Provide each lighting switch grid with an earth terminal and a green/ yellow PVC insulated 1.5mm² stranded
copper conductor as a 'fly lead', connected between earth terminal and grid assembly.
Provide green/yellow PVC insulate fly leads (6.0mm² minimum) for all hinged panels of switches, switchgear,
control cubicles, distribution boards, etc., Route/protect the 'fly leads' to obviate damage to the cables when
panels are opened and closed.
Provide protective conductors for the full length of all bus bar trunking systems. Ensure sizes are in accordance
with BS 7671. Fix tinned copper tape externally to the side of the busbar trunking system using brass bolts and
double (locking) nuts. Ensure that the maximum fixing centres are 900mm and each section of rising busbar
trunking is securely bonded to the tape.
700 INSTALLATION
710 GENERAL
Carry out the installation in accordance with BS 7671 and BS 7430.
Make joints in earthing conductors by any of the following methods:
- tin jointed area of conductor, install minimum of four rivets, then sweat joint solid. Wrap joint in tape below
ground
- proprietary crimps, by purpose made automatic machine, ensuring that a crimp, once started cannot be
released until full pressure, and crimp depth has been achieved. Wrap joint in tape below ground

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- proprietary fusion welding system. Installed strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Wrap
joints in tape below ground.
Ensure that where holes are drilled in the copper tape for connection to items of plant the effective crosssectional
area of the connection is not less than that required to comply with BS 7671. Tin the connected surface area.
Use clamps to BS 951 for bonding of pipes.
Provide all earthing cables with suitable mechanical protection, labelled and clearly identified throughout the
installation on the cable tray, ladder, trunking and conduit distribution facilities.
Undertake all earthing and bonding in an inconspicuous and approved manner wherever possible. All cabling
routes shall be agreed with the engineer prior to commencement of the installation.


800 TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDOVER

900 INSTALLERS SUBMISSIONS

Submit the following for the engineer's comment:
- Wiring diagrams
- Test and Commissioning Certificates
- Certification by the site wide infrastructure electrical supply contractor
- Certification by specialist installer
910 HANDOVER DOCUMENTATION

Fully record all tests, and submit all test results in writing to the engineer. The results to be included as part of
the operating and maintenance manuals.
Complete the respective distribution board schedules with measured test values for each site location.
Provide specific information as follows:
- fault levels at all main, sub-main and distribution boards

- final earth loop impedance values at equipment locations for all circuits
- test information and records at installation completion. These are required for future use by the Client's
electrical maintenance engineers in meeting their obligations on maintenance and periodic testing as required
by BS 7671

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
W52 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

Employ a lightning protection specialist (LPS) to design, supply, install, test and commission a complete lightning
protection and earthing systems for Building facility. The earthing and lightning protection system described
within this specification and on the accompanying drawings is indicative for Tendering purposes and shall be
confirmed by the specialist designer subject to earthing tests on site.
To install, commission and test a complete lightning protection system (LPS) providing protection for the
proposed facility to:
- intercept a lightning flash to the structure (using an air-termination system)

- conduct the lightning current safely towards earth (using a down-conductor system)
- disperse the lightning current into the earth (using an earth-termination system)
To reduce the risk of the following types of damage to property caused by lightning:
- injury of persons due to step and touch voltages

- physical damage including fire, explosion, mechanical destruction, chemical release
- failure of internal systems due to lightning electromagnetic impulse (LEMP)
To reduce the risk of disruption to service caused by lightning.
To minimise the following types of loss resulting from damage due to lightning:
- loss of human life

- loss of service
To ensure that the LPS complies with this specification (including all appropriate design parameters set out
herein) by arranging that the design, installation, testing and commissioning is completed by a lightning
protection system specialist.
To robustly fix the system(s) to the building(s) and ensure that the system(s) is(are) capable of operating without
itself(themselves) being damaged by lightning.
To prevent fixed metallic components of the building(s) including antennae, rainwater disposal systems, roof
mounted equipment, etc. from defeating the function of the LPS.
To use in the system(s) materials that are resistant to atmospheric corrosion and thus minimise the risk of
staining of the external fabric of the building(s).
To ensure that the system(s) does not/do not undermine the weatherproofing and waterproofing systems of
roofs nor any other part of a building’s fabric.
To reduce the risk of voltage surges in the electricity supply to Building, accommodating sensitive electronic (e.g.
IT) equipment, produced by lightning.
To enable the system to be readily extended to interconnect with the proposed future extension of the building.
To enable the system to be readily extended in future to interconnect with proposed adjoining buildings.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED

section prevails.
European Standard.

- BS 951 Electrical earthing. Clamps for earthing and bonding. Specification
- BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations: IET Wiring Regulations
- BS EN 50164 Lightning protection components (LPC)
- BS EN 61643 Low voltage surge protection devices
- BS EN ISO 9001 Quality management systems. Requirements

The lightning protection levels shall be determined by the lightning protection system specialist to provide the
extent of protection in accordance with BS EN 62305.
The lightning protection system will consist of an air termination network at roof level based on a grid of copper,
PVC coated tapes.
The roof tapes will be bonded to all sections of metal roofing at some point on the neutral axis clear of the steel
fixings. Additional protection shall be provided to the building elevations where necessary.
Rebar within building primary structure shall be utilised for the down conductor paths.
Surge protection shall be provided to protect electronic and electrical systems.
The LPS for the Building comprises the main elements set out below in the indicative configuration indicated on
the drawings. Uphold the aesthetic appearance of the facility by ensuring that the components of the LPS meet
the architect’s requirements.
Provide the following LPS component elements:
- an air termination network using PVC covered copper tapes

- proprietary roof joints and fixings as required to secure the air termination network

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- LPS connection to mechanical equipment provided by vertical air rod termination and bonding to the air
termination system
- LPS connection to metallic structure
- a down conductor network based using PVC covered copper tapes (note requirement for architectural co-
ordination reference the colour and routing of PVC covered down conductors) an earth termination system
comprising:
o o copper connections from each down conductor to earthing electrodes at ground level
o o bi-metallic joints as required
o o copperbond earthing electrodes
o o earth inspection pits and covers
o o bare copper interconnecting tape
o o lightning electromagnetic impulse
Select components of the LPS to withstand the electromagnetic effects of lightning current and predictable
accidental stresses without being damaged.
Select components of the LPS from the materials listed in BS EN 62305, Table 5, or from other materials with
equivalent mechanical, electrical and chemical (corrosion) performance characteristics.
Obtain agreement of the Contract Administrator to the proposed materials used at the time of submission of
working drawings and prior to commencement of the Works.

The system is passive in operation and therefore no form of control is required.
410 SURGE PROTECTION

Provide surge protection to the incoming supply and incoming telecoms lines as required by BS EN 62305.
Additionally, provide surge protection to the supplies of external plant and luminaires where necessary to satisfy
the design parameters.
500 SCOPE OF WORKS

protection and earthing systems for Building facility. The earthing and lightning protection system described
within this specification and on the accompanying drawings is indicative for Tendering purposes and shall be
confirmed by the specialist designer subject to earthing tests on site.
Liaise with the main contractor regarding the phasing of the LPS installation.
Take responsibility for liaison with all installers, and for the provision, installation and connection of all LPS
connections to other metallic services, equipment and structure.
Ensure that the design, installation, testing and commissioning of the LPSs is completely carried out by a single
LPS specialist fully in accordance with this specification and BS EN 62305. Confirm that the specialist is a Member
of the National Federation of Master Steeplejacks and Lightning Conductor Engineers and is registered under BS
EN ISO 9001 for quality management.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that all components of the system(s) are selected and installed fully in accordance with the
manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
Determine by calculation the lightning protection level (LPL) required for the development in accordance with BS
EN 62305. Determine the parameters required to perform the calculation using design information and by survey.
Provide the class of lightning protection system (LPS) relevant to the LPL determined.
Ensure that the design, installation, testing and commissioning of the lightning protection systems is
completely carried out by a single lightning protection system specialist. Confirm that the specialist is a Member
of the National Federation of Master Steeplejacks and Lightning Conductor Engineers and is
registered under BS EN ISO 9000 for quality assurance.
Ensure that all components of the system are installed fully in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
installation instructions.
520 DETAIL COORDINATION

The drawings provided are indicative only and show design intent. The design and coordination with the
architectural, structural and regulatory requirements are to be performed by the specialist.
Agree all proposed methods of fixing the system to structure, roof, cladding, chimneys, equipment, etc. with the
contract administrator.
Agree the colours and finishes of all exposed materials of the system with the Architect.
530 BONDING OF OTHER SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

Bond the lightning protection system to its associated main electricity earthing terminal.
Electrically bond all extraneous conductive parts connected to the structure of the building(s), including all metal
projections on or above the main surface of the roof(s), to the lightning protection system(s). This is to include
but not be limited to the following:
- External mechanical plant and equipment

- Screens, louvres and grilles
- Handrails and external staircases
- Window cleaning cradles and rails
- Solar shading
- Aerials and antennae
- Copings
- Vents and cowls
- Metal roof coverings
- Metallic door and window frames
- Exposed steelwork
- Water pipes

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- Gutters
- Metallic cladding and curtain walling
540 SOIL SURVEY

Make an appropriate survey of the conditions of the site, including measurements of soil resistivity, and report all
results to the Contract Administrator and engineer. Ensure that the method of earth termination is suitable and, if
not, propose the works required to obtain satisfactory earthing.
Based on the results of the soil resistivity, confirm the proposed method of earth termination.
550 PERMIT TO WORK

560 WARNING SIGNAGE

operatives.
610 AIR TERMINATION NETWORK

Provide an air termination network based on a grid of copper 25mm x 3mm PVC covered tapes run around the
perimeter and internal levels of the main roof and plant room roof with the grid of tapes installed across the roof
to provide full strike coverage.
Co-ordinate with all appropriate parties (including the main contractor, roofing contractor, cladding contractor
etc.), to ensure that the LPS is installed at an appropriate time during the construction process.
Where systems have components of, or are in contact with other materials in the building of, dissimilar metals,
incorporate features (eg purpose manufactured connectors, surface treatment of materials, etc.), to prevent
electrolytic corrosion.
Configure the air termination network to have the minimum number of joints.
611 STRUCTURES WITH A FLAT ROOF

Bond the air termination grid to every down conductor.
Provide lightning protection to parapets using an exposed copper flat 25mm x 3mm perimeter conduction tape,
bonded to the grid and secured using manufacturer’s proprietary fixings suited to the parapet surface material.
Provide 25mm x 3mm proprietary roof joints and fixings as required to secure the air termination network.
Provide LPS connection to mechanical equipment provided by vertical air rod termination and bonding to the air
termination system.
Provide LPS connection to metallic structure. Include connections to roof top ballustrading, lift shaft structure,
roof steelwork, roof metallic covering and coping as appropriate.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
612 NATURAL COMPONENTS (STRUCTURES WITH METAL ROOFS)

Use the natural components of the roof structure as the air termination network in lieu of and/or to
supplement the air termination system described above, in accordance with the following clauses.
Ensure that the electrical continuity between the various parts is made durable means of connection, eg by
means of brazing, welding, crimping, seaming, screwing or bolting. Provide electrical bonding for any separated
part of the metal roof to ensure a complete and continuous electrical network.
Ensure that the following minimum dimensions for metal roof covering to act as the air termination component,
exist:
Material Minimum thickness (mm)
- Galvanised Steel 0.5

- Copper 0.5
- Aluminum 0.65
- Zinc 0.7
- Lead 2.0
At each down conductor position install an accessible bolted connection to the metal roof covering, ensuring that
it does not adversely affect the waterproof integrity of the roof.
Where used, ensure metal parts such as ornamentation, railings, pipes, coverings of parapets, etc., have cross
sections not less than that specified for standard air-termination components.
Where used, ensure metal pipes, tanks and other equipment on the roof, are constructed of material with
thicknesses as set out above.
Do not use natural components where the conditions for thickness cannot be fulfilled; in such cases integrate the
natural components into the LPS in accordance with this specification.
Do not use natural components carrying readily-combustible or explosive mixtures as an air termination natural
component if gaskets in flange couplings are not metallic or where the flange-sides are not otherwise properly
bonded.
Do not use natural components that are clad with insulating material.
Where such natural components are proposed to form part of an LPS, they must be incorporated fully in
accordance with BS EN 62305.
Obtain agreement of the Contract Administrator to the proposed method of air termination system at the time of
submission of working drawings and prior to commencement of the works.
On completion of the metal roof covering, test the continuity of the covering between elements and to the down
conductor connection positions. Where required, connect by a bonding conductor, any part of the roof found to
be electrically isolated from the remainder of the roof.
620 DOWN CONDUCTOR NETWORK

Provide a down conductor network based on the building perimeter spacing of copper 25mm x 3mm PVC covered
tapes (note requirement for architectural co-ordination reference the colour and routing of PVC covered down
conductors).

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that all down conductors take the most direct route, without bends and without ‘re-entrant loops’, from
the air termination network to the earth termination network.
Ensure that all cantilevered elements of the structure are treated in accordance with clause E4.2.4.2 of BS EN
62305-3.
Arrange that there are no joints between the test joint and the connection to the electrode, in any down
conductor.
Protect the down conductors from ground level corrosion by a PVC sleeve for a distance of 0.3m above and below
ground.
On completion of the down conductor network, test the continuity of each down conductor from the air
termination to earth termination positions. Where required, connect by a bonding conductor, any part of the
down conductor found to be electrically isolated from the remainder of the conductor.
621 CONNECTORS, CLAMPS, LINKS, BONDS AND BOLTS

Ensure that all connectors, clamps and links between tapes, all clamps of tapes onto structural reinforcing steel
and structural steelwork, and all bonds of tapes onto components that are not part of the LPS, are effective in
reliably maintaining electrical continuity with negligible electrical resistance, and comply with BS EN 50164.
Clean all surfaces of conductors and apply a moisture inhibiting paste before jointing, and fit a proprietary
waterproof shroud, colour matched to the PVC coloured conductor.
Robustly secure and fix all connectors, clamps, links and bonds so that the system is not damaged in operation.
622 NON STEEL FRAMED STRUCTURES

Where it is not possible to utilise the steel structure of the building as the down conductor path, install and fix
conduction tape with down conductors positioning dependent on the LPS level apart around the perimeter at roof
or ground level for buildings less than 20m high, depending on the LPS level apart at roof or ground level for
buildings 20m high or more.
Ensure that all down conductor tapes are flat 25mm x 3mm copper fixed to the wall at no more than 1.0m
intervals using manufacturer’s proprietary fixings suited to the wall surface material, and have a 3mm minimum
thickness anti-staining PVC sheath of a colour agreed by the Contract Administrator.
Install manufacturer’s proprietary joints to the air termination network.
623 NATURAL COMPONENTS (STEEL FRAME STRUCTURES)

Use the natural components of the building structure in lieu of and/or to supplement the down conductor network
described above, in accordance with the following clauses.
Ensure that the electrical continuity by installing bolted bonds, tapes and joints between:
- separated elements of the proposed natural components of the building structure

- the proposed natural components of the building structure and the air termination network
- the proposed natural components of the building structure and the earth termination network
Supply all connectors used as joints between elements of reinforcement, as joints to the air termination network,
and as joints to the earth termination network.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Ensure that the dimensions of the proposed natural components of the building structure are at least equal to
that specified for the standard down conductors specified above.
Do not use natural components carrying readily-combustible or explosive mixtures as a down conductor natural
component if gaskets in flange couplings are not metallic or where the flange-sides are not otherwise properly
bonded.
630 EARTH TERMINATION NETWORK

Use the results of the soil survey of the site required by clause 570 of this specification to determine the
resistivity of the soil and hence confirm the arrangement and type of earth termination network to achieve the
earthing resistance.
Ensure that every earth electrode is of a material that provides good resistance to corrosion and is capable of
carrying high currents repeatedly.
Ensure that every point of connection to the earth termination network is removable and easily accessible.
Provide an earth termination network with maximum 10Ω earthing resistance.
The 10Ω figure provided above is a recommendation of BS EN 62305; achieve lower if possible.
Arrangement - comprising horizontal or vertical earth electrodes installed outside the structure to be protected,
and connected to each down-conductor.
Obtain the agreement of the Contract Administrator to the proposed method of earth termination network at the
time of submission of working drawings and prior to commencement of the Works.
631 EARTH TERMINATION SYSTEM

Provide an earth termination system comprising:
- 25mm x 3mm copper connections from each down conductor to earthing electrodes at ground level
- bi-metallic joints as required
- earthing electrodes comprise 2500mm x 16mm steel cored copperbond electrodes complete with gunmetal
fittings, earth inspection pits and covers, and 25mm x 3mm bare copper interconnecting tape.
The 2500mm electrode length quoted above is the minimum length allowable. Where the maximum 10Ω earthing
resistance cannot be achieved, increase the length of earth rods until the required value is achieved.
Ensure that the total number of earth electrodes is not less than 2.
Install earth electrodes at a minimum upper end depth of 0.5m, distributed as uniformly as possible to minimize
electrical coupling effects in the earth.
Install solid copper rods in soft earth where low resistance is required. Install copper clad steel rods in well
compacted or stony ground where rods must be power driven.
Connect additional electrodes to the ring earth electrode at points where the down conductors are connected.
Where the maximum 10Ω earthing resistance cannot be achieved, increase the provision of earth conductor
and/or add earth electrode rods until the required value is achieved.
Ensure that the total number of earth electrodes is not less than 2.
Bury ring earth electrodes at a minimum depth of 0.5m at a distance of approximately 1m from external walls.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
632 NATURAL EARTH ELECTRODES (UTILISATION OF STRUCTURAL REINFORCING BARS)

Use the natural components of the building structure in lieu of and/or to supplement the earth termination
system described above, in accordance with the following clauses.
Ensure there is full continuity between bars before using this method. Take precautions to ensure full
continuity between the earth reinforcing bars and the lightning protection connections above ground.
Where the maximum 10Ω earthing resistance cannot be achieved, supplement the natural earth electrode system
with earth conductor and/or add earth electrode rods until the required value is achieved.
In the case of pre-stressed concrete, consideration should be given to the consequences of the passage of
ightning discharge currents which may produce unacceptable mechanical stresses.
If a foundation earth electrode is used, a long-term increase in earthing resistance is possible.
More extensive information on this topic is provided in BS EN 62305-3.
700 EQUIPMENT
710 TEST POINTS

Connect every earth electrode to its corresponding down conductor with a test joint incorporated into its down
conductor path.
Ensure that every test joint is a mechanically strong clamp made from corrosion resistant metal with low electrical
resistance.
At every deep driven earth electrode install an earth electrode inspection pit incorporating a test chamber
complete with test clamp for bonding.
Ensure that, where test chambers are installed, they take the form of ground recessed inspection pits.
Where inspection pits are installed within hardcore areas ensure the chambers are concrete. Where inspection
pits are installed in the soft ensure they are made of a durable plastic.
720 INTERNAL LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

Provide internal lightning protection in accordance with BS EN 62305.
Review specification section W51 for details of the earthing and bonding arrangement. Confirm to the
Contract Administrator that the proposals for earthing and bonding arrangement contained within W51 meet the
requirements of BS EN 62305 in respect of internal lightning protection.
Obtain the approval of the Contract Administrator for any additional earthing and bonding required to meet the
requirements of BS EN 62305; provide details of additional requirements at the time of submission of working
drawings and prior to commencement of the Works.
730 LIGHTNING ELECTROMAGNETIC IMPULSE (LEMP)

Provide lightning electromagnetic impulse (LEMP) protection for electrical/electronic systems within the
building(s) in accordance with BS EN 62305.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Protect incoming electrical supply cables with a standard equipotential bonding Type 1 SPD (rated to ISPD above)
Protect incoming IT and communications cables with a standard equipotential bonding Type 1 SPD (rated to ISPD
above) in accordance with BS EN 62305-3.
Protect all internal systems connected to the incoming electrical supply cables with a coordinated set of standard
Type II and Type III SPDs in accordance with BS EN 62305-4.
Protect all internal systems connected to IT/Comms with a coordinated set of standard Type II and Type III SPDs
Ensure that every surge protection device complies with BS EN 62305; is suited for the location; is suited for the
application; operates with ‘line to earth’, ‘line to neutral’, ‘neutral to earth’, or ‘line to line’ mode of protection
according to the application and has the following features.
Confirm to the Contract Administrator that the proposals for LEMP protection contained in this specification meet
the requirements of BS EN 62305.
Obtain the approval of the Contract Administrator for any additional protection required to meet the requirements
of BS EN 62305; provide details of additional requirements at the time of submission of working drawings and
prior to commencement of the Works.

Use cadmium plated or stainless steel screws to prevent galvanic action where white metal plug fixings are used.

Install a sign, complying with BS EN 62305, at the main electricity earth terminal in every building to which the
LPS is bonded, warning that it should not be disconnected.
Install a sign at the door providing access to the roof, warning that the LPS must not be undermined by
extending the building (eg by adding a flagpole to the roof.) Write the same warning in the operating and
maintenance instructions.
Ensure that every electrode inspection pit cover bears the wording ‘Lightning protection system earth’.

Ensure that the complete LPS is fully tested by the specialist installer all in accordance with BS EN 62305.
Arrange a mutually agreed programme for the demonstration of the LPS with the Contract Administrator.
Prepare a method statement for the test, commissioning and demonstration stating exactly how these are to be
carried out and submit the statement to the Contract Administrator for comment.
With its test link removed and without any bonding to other services, measure the earth resistance of every
individual earth electrode. Ensure such resistance in ohms does not exceed ten times the number of down
conductors on the structure.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Measure with the test links in place the resistance to earth of the complete LPS at any point on the building.
Ensure that all results from this test do not exceed 10Ω.
Carry out this test prior to bonding to other services. If the overall resistance exceeds 10Ω provide, at no
additional cost to the Employer, any means (e.g. the addition of earth mats or plate electrodes) as
recommended by BS EN 62305, to reduce the overall resistance.
Fully tabulate all test results and issue to the Contract Administrator. Also allow for all witnessing of the testing
procedure by the Contract Administrator.

Submit to the Contract Administrator in accordance with sections A11, A33 and A37 of this specification:
- soil survey report and earth resistivity measurements

- working drawings for the entire LPS(s) clearly showing the location of every component of the system(s) and
details of all fixings, including those to building structure, reinforcement of concrete, and building fabric
- samples of all components that are visible after installation
- details and specifications of all surge protection devices (SPDs) to be used within the installation
- all test results and a test certificate to confirm that the system as tested complies fully with the BS EN 62305
- CAD record drawings
- operating and maintenance instructions for inclusion in the project O & M manuals.
- a logbook for inclusion within the project O & M manuals, including full instructions for testing procedures and
intervals, and with pages for recording test measurements and results

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
W64 CONTROL PANELS

Design, Supply, Install, Test and Commission all necessary control panels to achieve the criteria set out within
this specification and the accompanying drawings and schedules.

section prevails.
European Standard.

- Health and Safety at Work etc. Act
- Electricity (Factories Act) Special Regulations
- Electricity at Work Regulations
- BS 88 Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c. and 1500 V d.c.
- BS 5992 Electric relays
similar apparatus Part 1: Emission
- BS EN 60204 Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines
- BS EN 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies, Type-tested and partially typetested
assemblies
- BS EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 1: General rules Part 3: Switches, disconnectors,
switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units Part 4-1: Contactors and motor-starters. Electromechanical
contactors and motor-starters
- BS EN 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 6-3: Generic standards. Emission standard for
residential, commercial and light-industrial environments Part 6-4: Generic standards. Emissions standard for
industrial environments

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- ENA ER G5/4-1 Planning levels for harmonic voltage distortion and the connection of non-linear equipment to
transmission systems and distribution networks in the United Kingdom Health and Safety at Work etc. Act
Electricity (Factories Act) Special Regulations Electricity at Work Regulations

Controls shall be system built to provide the function and requirements of the overall control philosophy and
functionality defined throughout this specification and below. Controls shall be electro mechanical and be
developed from a recognised range of components or equal and approved. Controllers shall be selected as
actuator mounted or local to the equipment being operated, and be contained in suitable boxes or panels with
outputs to the BMS, if available.
MCCP’s shall be designed to be accommodated in the wall spaces available and shall be of the proportions
appropriate to the allocated position.
Panels and enclosures shall be arranges to incorporate integrated electrical isolation / access interlock.
All equipment selected, supplied, installed, tested and commissioned shall be compliant with these regulations
and intrinsically safe.
400 CONTROL PANELS
410 GENERAL
This specification applies to all electrical control panels for mechanical plant, whether part of proprietary
packaged plant, or whether built specially to house motor starters and controls.
Design, construct and install all control panels and associated switchgear so that their operation and maintenance
can comply with the Electricity (Factories Act) Special Regulations; the Health and Safety at Work etc. Act, the
Electricity at Work Regulations and revisions to the legislation, together with other safety legislation and
regulations current on the date the equipment is ordered.
Install the control panels and all interconnected equipment to form a complete and working system. Coordinate
the designs of all interconnected units, their wiring and terminal connections so that they are mutually compatible
and function as a whole in accordance with the design intent. Ensure that the cable access systems required are
adequately sized, supported and spatially co-ordinated with other equipment and the building structure.
Ensure that all cable terminals are big enough to take the sizes of cables specified. Ensure there is ample space
within panels, isolators, etc. to accept the cables specified.
Prepare schematic, wiring and general arrangement drawings of the control panels and all equipment connected
and submit the drawings to the engineer for comment at least four weeks before manufacture is required to
begin. Include details of the motor drives finally ordered.
Design and manufacture all purpose-built assemblies such as those incorporating motor control gear and
associated equipment and components to comply with the standards referred to in this specification and with the
component manufacturers' recommendations.
Protect equipment against physical damage and from ingress of water, dust and other contaminants during
delivery, storage and installation.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
420 CONSTRUCTION
Construct the control panels with rigid framed enclosures and with panels in zinc coated mild steel at least 1.6mm
thick for panels up to 600mm x 600mm and at least 2mm thick for larger panels. Round all edges and corners to
a minimum radius of 3mm. Passivate the panels and finish all surfaces with a wear resistant paint system in the
specified colour. Provide details of the proposed panel construction and paint system with the drawings submitted
to the engineer for comment.
Design and construct the panels with protection to IP54 and design the panels for continuous operation.
Construct the panels of ample size and/or provide ventilation to maintain all internal components within their
maker's specified temperature limits with a plant room temperature up to 40°.
Mount proprietary equipment such as inverters and motor soft starters in accordance with their makers'
recommendations. Ensure that heat generated can be safely dissipated.
Fit control panels containing Inverters or motor soft starters with temperature detectors to warn when the panel
limiting temperature is reached.
For panels weighing more than 40 Kg provide 4-no removable lifting eye bolts on the top of each panel.
Provide blanking plugs to seal the holes when the lifting eyes are removed.
Assemble floor-mounted units on a plinth at least 100mm deep made of channel iron or zinc-coated sheet steel,
with holes provided to bolt the complete assembly to the floor. The maximum height of floor-standing units shall
be 2m above the plinth.
Notwithstanding clause 3000, ensure that the panel dimensions, particularly the height, do not prevent proper
installation of the panel and of the cables and cable access systems associated with it.
Do not mount any live panel components on the floor, roof or sides of the panel, or less than 150mm from the
bottom of the panel.
Provide panel doors with lockable hand-operated fastenings.
Fit appropriately rated anti-condensation heaters which are automatically energised when the panel is switched
off.
430 WARDROBE-TYPE CONTROL PANELS

Construct wardrobe-type control panels as type tested assemblies to BS EN 61439 with minimum internal sub-
division to Form 4.
Mount all main components on a back plate with switches and indicator lights on the doors. All live parts are to
be efficiently shrouded against accidental contact during maintenance or inspection.
Supply power to all motor drives and packaged plant via fuses to BS 88.
Loosely loom all internal wiring in slotted metal or plastic trunking. Size all wiring to be protected against both
overload and short circuits by the fuses installed. Ensure it is possible to apply a suitable clip-on ammeter to
motor supply cables for commissioning purposes without taking off covers or disturbing the wiring.
Incorporate extra space in the panels for terminals, fuseways and starters up to one quarter of the installed
capacity.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
440 COMPARTMENTED CONTROL PANELS

Construct compartmented control panels as type tested assemblies to BS EN 61439 with minimum internal sub-
division to Form 3b, Type 2.
Equip each compartment with the following equipment and controls as appropriate:
- fuse/switch isolator
- ammeter
- control switches and indicator lamps
- motor starters
- sub-fuses for the low speed windings of motors with separate windings
- door lock
- labels and warning notices.
Ensure that it is possible to measure motor current safely for commissioning purposes with a suitable clip-on
ammeter.
Incorporate spare compartments within the panels up to one quarter of the number and capacity fully installed.
Equip the spare compartments with switch/fuses sized for each compartment's maximum capacity.
Provide a distribution of spare compartment sizes to match that of the installed drives and packaged plant.
450 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Motor control panels and their internal assemblies shall be type tested to BS EN 61439. Provide copies of type
test certificates when submitting drawings to the engineer for comment.
Design the internal busbar system, including its fixings within the assembled panel, to carry the full load current
scheduled in the particular specification and a 3-phase symmetrical short circuit current of 30kA for 1 second.
Design all equipment and wiring for 50Hz electrical supplies of 415V (3 ph) or 240V (1 ph) plus 10% or minus
6%.
Design and construct all electrical equipment to be suitable for use in local ambient temperatures up to 40°C and
with relative humidity’s up to 90% with occasional occurrences of moderate condensation. Proof all equipment
against moderate amounts of dust and corrosion by salt laden air where specified. Use only materials resistant to
mould growth and attack by vermin.
Connect all motor control panels to a main low voltage switch board. Protect the connecting cables against
overload and short-circuit faults by appropriately sized fuses to BS 88.
Gland cable and conduit entries to maintain the IP54 protection specified. Where light cables need to enter the
panel via trunking, provide a purpose made watertight upstand at least 75mm high to form a water resistant
junction between the panel and the cable trunking.
Terminate all incoming and outgoing cables in terminal blocks close to the cable entry positions. Terminate
control cables carrying voltages of above 50V in disconnectable terminal blocks for essential working without
isolating the main supplies, using appropriate safety procedures.
Ensure that all internal cableways and terminal blocks are sized to accept the input and output cables specified.

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Protect all cables serving sub-circuits, packaged plant and motor drives against both overload and short circuit
faults with fuses to BS 88. Select fuses protecting motor circuits to suit the motors finally installed according to
the fuse manufacturer's recommendations and taking account of the form of motor starting employed.
Ensure all fuses installed in the motor control panel provide satisfactory discrimination with sub-circuit fuses
within the panel and with the panel's main supply fuse.
Ensure all contactor/fuse combinations provide Class 'C' Co-ordination as defined in BS EN 60947-1.
Shroud all cable terminals, live parts of the switchgear and other components, including live parts to the rear of
switchgear, against accidental direct contact when testing and inspecting the panel. Install fuses either as part of
fuse/switches or in shrouded fuse holders.
Identify and mark all cables, cable terminals, fuses, switchgear and other components with permanent labels
using the circuit references used in the installation and on as-fitted drawings.
500 EQUIPMENT
510 CONTROL CIRCUITS

Design control circuits for contactors to operate at 240V. Provide control circuit wiring of at least 1.5mm² and
sized so that voltage drop even during motor starting is never great enough to prevent correct operation of all
devices served.
520 CONTROL RELAYS

Install control relays of the plug-in type conforming with BS EN 55014-1 and BS 5992, with suitably rated
contacts for the circuits to be controlled.
Enclose control relays in dust proof covers.

Provide front panel rotary switches for the following duties:
- single speed, single motor drives: HAND/OFF/AUTO

- two-speed motor drives: HIGH SPEED/LOW SPEED/OFF/AUTO
- motor drives with Duty 1 and Duty 2 motors: DUTY 1/DUTY 2 selector switch for use when the motors are in
HAND control and with HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switches for each drive
Arrange for all selector switches serving plant subject to AUTO control to have auxiliary contacts to signal to the
building management system when the drives are in auto control.
540 LAMP INDICATIONS

Provide LED indicator lights for the following functions for each drive served:
- RUN Green Lamp

- TRIPPED Red Lamp
- PANEL LIVE (Each section) White Lamp
- SUPPLY ON (Packaged plant) White Lamp

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
Install indicator lights of the LED type with push-to-test facility. Ensure lamps are replaceable without the use of
special tools.
550 MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION

Equip each panel to ensure it is capable of providing energy data logging including the following facilities as a
minimum:
- Measurement using suitable volt meters and ammeters with a line and phase voltage selector switch.
Voltmeters shall be fuse protected
- The full scale reading of the meter shall be the rating of the fuses protecting the panel
Ensure all instruments are at suitably sized and conform to BS 89. Provide motor and packaged plant ammeters
with full scale readings twice the full load current of the equipment served, but ensure ammeters are capable of
passing starting currents without damage.
560 PANELS
561 LABELS FOR INFORMATION AND WARNING

Screw-fix permanent engraved labels to all panels to provide information and warning to suitably qualified
persons carrying out operation and maintenance:
- a label indicating the function of each switch and lamp indication

- a label on each openable panel door reading: "WARNING - ISOLATE PANEL BEFORE MAINTENANCE". In
addition, a self adhesive warning label is to be fixed to each door giving access to 415V circuits
- a key diagram showing the source and identification of all power supplies entering a panel, their function and
means of isolation
562 EARTHING
Install an earthing bar of 25 x 3mm copper along the whole length of each panel.
Connect each panel section, including the panel doors and each cable earth continuity conductor to the earthing
bar via connections sized to comply with BS 7671.
563 PANEL ISOLATION

Route the incoming supply via a separate full-load rated three pole isolator mounted so that it can be operated
with the panel doors open or closed.
Take the building management system from the live side of the panel isolator via separately mounted
fuse/switches, or from a separate secure supply.
570 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE

Install measures to prevent electro-magnetic interference with control panel operation and to prevent
electromagnetic interference from control panels affecting other electrical equipment. Measures likely to be
required include:
- use of control flexible cable to BS6500 from the inverters to motors to prevent inverter failure.
- supply motor control panels direct from the main LV switchboard

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- wire control systems in twisted pair cable. Run control cables away from mains cables
- use armoured cables for power circuits and full size neutral conductors
- fit voltage surge suppression devices to mineral insulated cables, relay and contactor operating coils and
vulnerable electronic equipment
- fit input and output harmonic filters to electronic inverters and motor soft starters.
800 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Before dispatch subject the panels to physical inspection, routine dialetric tests to BS EN 61439, full operation
testing. Provide certificates recording the works inspections and tests.
Allow time in the programme and attendance for the engineer to inspect the control panels at the maker's works
on completion of manufacture and test and before delivery. Ten working days notice of readiness for inspection
shall be given.
Following installation on site check and provide evidence that all wiring connections are correct. Check that the
panels are clean of debris and that all holes are properly sealed. Check also that the functioning of all
components and controls is correct, including the correct functioning of all interfaces with associated equipment.
Measure power wiring insulation and earth loop impedance and record the results.
Following installation on site and completion of all site tests allow programme time and provide attendance for
the engineer to inspect the installation and to verify test results.
Special units such as variable frequency inverters shall be checked and commissioned by the makers, or
according to the makers' specific instructions for the units fitted.
Measure and record all motor currents. Set motor overloads to motor nameplate full load currents. Note that
Star/Delta starters normally have overloads installed in the Delta Loop and set to full load current x 0.58.
Ensure that during commissioning and test no motor which has reached normal operating temperature is started
more frequently than twice in one hour, or according to the motor maker's instructions if different.
900 AS-FITTED DRAWINGS, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Provide three copies of the following documents bound into durable hardback folders:
- description of equipment operation

- schematic and wiring diagrams and panel general arrangement drawings
- inspection and test certificates
- data sheets and manufacturers' addresses for all panel components
- recommended spares list
- schedule of recommended periodic inspection and maintenance, including safety precautions
1000 SCHEDULE OF INSTALLERS SUBMITTALS

Submit the following drawings and other documentation in connection with the control panels specified above:
- control panel and assemblies type test certificates

- control panel schematic wiring and general arrangement drawings
- details of the control panel construction and finish

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01
DETAILED
- details of control panel labels and key diagrams

- control panel works test certificates
- site control panel test and commissioning results
- control panel as-fitted drawings and operation & maintenance manuals

STAGE 4
S4 General Rev. A01

Construction of Adam Airbase: (Package Five)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Construction of Adam Airbase: (Package Five)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Construction of Adam Airbase: (Package Five)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

T01 August 2014 E.Moretti A.Romildo A.Cecchini L.

Construction of Adam Airbase

Main Consultants (Joint Venture):

Project and Construction Design Consultant:

Hill International LLC 3TI PROGETTI ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LLC

Alberto Cecchini Lorenzo Candelpergher

T14 - ELECTRO - MECHANICAL [task 14]

Document no: S4_T14_XX00-00_00_S001-00

A01 July 2014 F.Tappi/S.Federici A.Cecchini L.Candelpergher

1 PART 1 – PRELIMINARIES AND STANDARDS SPECIFICATION ................................................................. 51

A10 PROJECT PARTICULARS .......................................................................................................................... 52

A11 TENDER AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................. 55

A12 THE SITE / EXISTING BUILDINGS ............................................................................................................ 62

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

530 SPECIAL SURVEYS...................................................................................................................................................................... 63

A13 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS ................................................................................................................ 64

A20 THE CONTRACT / SUBCONTRACT........................................................................................................... 67

A30 TENDERING / SUB-LETTING / SUPPLY .................................................................................................... 72

A31 PROVISION, CONTENT AND USE OF DOCUMENTS ................................................................................ 74

A32 MANAGEMENT OF THE WORKS ............................................................................................................. 77

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

820 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................... 80

A33 QUALITY STANDARDS / CONTROL ......................................................................................................... 82

A34 SECURITY / SAFETY / PROTECTION ........................................................................................................ 87

A37 OPERATION / MAINTENANCE OF THE FINISHED INSTALLATIONS ......................................................... 91

A40 MANAGEMENT AND STAFF.................................................................................................................... 97

2 PART 2 – PARTICULARS .......................................................................................................................... 99

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

R11 FOUL DRAINAGE ABOVE GROUND ...................................................................................................... 100

S10 COLD WATER ........................................................................................................................................ 111

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

410 METERING .............................................................................................................................................................................. 114

S11 HOT WATER.......................................................................................................................................... 118

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

550 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION ................................................................................................................................................ 124

S30 COMPRESSED AIR................................................................................................................................. 127

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

6110 ISOLATING VALVES ................................................................................................................................................................. 135

S63 SPRINKLER ............................................................................................................................................ 139

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

550 PLANNED SHUTDOWN............................................................................................................................................................ 145

S71 FOAM FIRE FIGHTING........................................................................................................................... 152

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

410 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................... 155

T90 HEATING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................. 160

55 PIPED SUPPLY SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................... 163

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

55-40-40/140 INSTANTANEOUS HOT WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................... 163

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

55-85-25/110 FIRE HOSE REEL SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................................................... 176

60 MECHANICAL HEATING COOLING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS ..................................................... 178

U10 GENERAL SUPPLY AND EXTRACT VENTILATION SYSTEMS ................................................................... 187

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

550 ALL CONTRACTORS COORDINATED RESPONSABILITIES.......................................................................................................... 191

U11 TOILET VENTILATION ........................................................................................................................... 199

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number:

310 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................. 200

U41 FAN COIL AIR CONDITIONING .............................................................................................................. 204

T14 – ELECTRO-MECHANICAL [task 14] Document number: